BIDDING REQUIREMENTS,
CONTRACT CONDITIONS AND SPECIFICATIONS
for
NEW PASSENGER TERMINAL
at
BROWNSVILLE / SOUTH PADRE INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT
BID #: ATE-39-0618
April 09, 2018
======
Project Manual – Vol. 3 Divisions 21 – 26
Issue for Bid
======Section Title A/E/C Last Issue
1 TABLE OF CONTENTS 2 3 LEGEND 4 5 First Column: Specification Section Number 6 Second Column: Specification Section Name 7 Third Column: Author Responsible for Section: 8 9 C2HM – C2HM 10 COR – Corgan 11 MOYE – Moye Consulting 12 BHS – Vic Thompson Company 13 AMB – Ambiotec 14 SSP – SSP Design, LLC (Landscape) 15 16 Fourth Column: Latest Issue Date for Section 17 18 DOCUMENT PACKAGE 19 20 Issue for Bid...... 04/09/18 21 22 23 Cover Sheet – Vol. 1...... TBD 04/09/18 24 Cover Sheet – Vol. 2...... COR 04/09/18 25 Cover Sheet – Vol. 3...... C2HM 04/09/18 26 Cover Sheet – Vol. 4...... MOYE 04/09/18 27 Cover Sheet – Vol. 5 ...... AMB 04/09/18 28 Table of Contents...... COR 04/09/18 29 Seals Page...... COR 04/09/18 30 31 32 Section Title Issue Date 33 34 Table of Contents...... 04/09/18 35 36 37 PROCUREMENT GROUP 38 39 Procurement and Contracting Requirements Subgroup 40 41 DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 42 43 00 Invitation to Bids...... 04/09/18 44 01 Acknowledgement of Receipt...... 04/09/18 45 02 General Conditions...... 04/09/18 46 03 Supplemental General Conditions...... 04/09/18 47 04 Bid Bond...... 04/09/18 48 05 Performance Bond...... 04/09/18 49 06 Payment Bond...... 04/09/18 50 07 BF23-BF25 – Bid Form A_Landside...... 04/09/18 51 07 BF23-BF25 – Bid Form B_Airside ...... 04/09/18 52 07 BF23-BF25 – Bid Form C_By Pass Road...... 04/09/18
09/April/2018 00 00 03 - 1 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO Section Title A/E/C Last Issue
1 07 BF23-BF25 – Bid Form D_Landscaping...... 04/09/18 2 07 BF23-BF25 – Bid Form D_SSP ...... 04/09/18 3 07 BF23-BF25 – Bid Form E_Terminal...... 04/09/18 4 07 Bid Proposal...... 04/09/18 5 08 Agreement...... 04/09/18 6 09 FAA General Provisions...... 04/09/18 7 10 FAA Airports...... 04/09/18 8 9 10 SPECIFICATIONS GROUP 11 12 General Requirements Subgroup 13 14 DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 15 16 01 11 00 Summary of Work...... COR 04/09/18 17 Geotechnical Report...... CH2M 04/09/18 18 01 14 00 Work Restrictions...... COR 04/09/18 19 01 23 00 Alternates...... COR 04/09/18 20 01 25 00 Substitution Procedures ...... COR 04/09/18 21 01 29 00 Measurement and Payment...... COR 04/09/18 22 01 31 00 Project Coordination ...... COR 04/09/18 23 01 31 19 Project Meetings...... COR 04/09/18 24 01 32 16 CPM Schedules and Reports ...... COR 04/09/18 25 01 32 33 Photographic Documentation...... COR 04/09/18 26 01 33 23 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples ...... COR 04/09/18 27 01 35 13.13 Contractor Air Operations Area (AOA) Procedures...... COR 04/09/18 28 01 41 00 Regulatory Requirements...... COR 04/09/18 29 01 42 00 References...... COR 04/09/18 30 01 43 39 Integrated Exterior Mockup...... COR 04/09/18 31 01 45 16 Contractor’s Quality Control...... COR 04/09/18 32 01 45 29 Testing Agency Services...... COR 04/09/18 33 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls ...... COR 04/09/18 34 01 51 36 Temporary Water...... COR 04/09/18 35 01 55 26 Traffic Control...... COR 04/09/18 36 01 56 39 Vegetation Protection and Relocation ...... SSP 04/09/18 37 01 57 00 Temporary Environmental Controls...... COR 04/09/18 38 01 57 19 Dust Control...... COR 04/09/18 39 01 57 23 Storm Water Pollution Plan (TPDES Requirements) ...... AMB 04/09/18 40 01 58 00 Project Identification and Signs ...... COR 04/09/18 41 01 60 00 Product Requirements...... COR 04/09/18 42 01 71 23 Field Engineering...... COR 04/09/18 43 01 71 33.13 Protection of Existing Utilities...... COR 04/09/18 44 01 73 29 Cutting and Patching ...... COR 04/09/18 45 01 74 13 Construction Cleaning...... COR 04/09/18 46 01 74 19 Construction Waste Management and Disposal...... COR 04/09/18 47 01 74 23 Final Cleaning ...... COR 04/09/18 48 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures...... COR 04/09/18 49 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data...... COR 04/09/18 50 01 78 30 Warranties and Bonds...... COR 04/09/18 51 01 78 39 Project Record Documents ...... COR 04/09/18 52 01 78 46 Extra Materials...... COR 04/09/18
09/April/2018 00 00 03 - 2 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO Section Title A/E/C Last Issue
1 01 79 00 Systems Demonstrations and Training ...... COR 04/09/18 2 3 4 Facility Construction Subgroup 5 6 DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS 7 8 02 41 16 Structure Demolition...... COR 04/09/18 9 02 41 19 Selective Structure Demolition...... COR 04/09/18 10 02 82 13.33 Asbestos Abatement for Utilities...... AMB 04/09/18 11 12 13 DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE 14 15 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete...... C2HM 04/09/18 16 03 30 53 Concrete for Utility Construction ...... AMB 04/09/18 17 03 33 00 Architectural Concrete ...... C2HM 04/09/18 18 03 35 73 Concrete Floor Polishing ...... COR 04/09/18 19 03 39 00 Concrete Sealing...... COR 04/09/18 20 03 53 13 Decorative Concrete Topping...... COR 04/09/18 21 22 23 DIVISION 04 – MASONRY 24 25 04 01 00 Masonry Cleaning...... COR 04/09/18 26 04 05 13 Masonry Mortar and Grout ...... COR 04/09/18 27 04 05 19 Masonry Anchorage, Reinforcement, and Accessories ...... COR 04/09/18 28 04 21 13 Brick Masonry...... COR 04/09/18 29 04 22 00 Concrete Unit Masonry...... COR 04/09/18 30 04 72 00 Cast Stone...... COR 04/09/18 31 32 33 DIVISION 05 – METALS 34 35 05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing ...... C2HM 04/09/18 36 05 12 13 Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel Framing ...... C2HM 04/09/18 37 05 21 00 Steel Joist Framing ...... C2HM 04/09/18 38 05 31 00 Steel Decking...... C2HM 04/09/18 39 05 40 00 Cold-Formed Metal Framing...... COR 04/09/18 40 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications...... COR 04/09/18 41 05 51 00 Metal Stairs...... COR 04/09/18 42 05 52 13 Pipe and Tube Railings...... COR 04/09/18 43 05 70 00 Decorative Metal...... COR 04/09/18 44 05 73 13 Glazed Decorative Metal Railings ...... COR 04/09/18 45 05 75 00 Decorative Formed Metal ...... COR 04/09/18 46 47 48 DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 49 50 06 10 53 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry ...... COR 04/09/18 51 06 16 63 Moisture Resistant Sheathing ...... COR 04/09/18 52 06 41 16 Plastic-Laminate-Faced Architectural Cabinets...... COR 04/09/18
09/April/2018 00 00 03 - 3 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO Section Title A/E/C Last Issue
1 06 41 19 Stainless-Steel-Clad Architectural Cabinets...... COR 04/09/18 2 3 4 DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 5 6 07 16 16 Crystalline Waterproofing...... COR 04/09/18 7 07 19 00 Water Repellent...... COR 04/09/18 8 07 21 00 Thermal Insulation...... COR 04/09/18 9 07 21 29 Sprayed Insulation...... COR 04/09/18 10 07 26 00 Sheet Vapor Retarders (Slab-on-Grade) ...... COR 04/09/18 11 07 27 26 Fluid-Applied Membrane Air Barriers ...... COR 04/09/18 12 07 42 13.13 Metal Wall Panels...... COR 04/09/18 13 07 42 13.19 Insulated Metal Wall Panels...... COR 04/09/18 14 07 42 13.23 Custom Metal Wall Panels...... COR 04/09/18 15 07 42 53 Exterior Facade Panels...... COR 04/09/18 16 07 54 00 Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing ...... COR 04/09/18 17 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim ...... COR 04/09/18 18 07 71 00 Roof Specialties ...... COR 04/09/18 19 07 72 00 Roof Accessories...... COR 04/09/18 20 07 84 13 Penetration Firestopping...... COR 04/09/18 21 07 84 43 Joint Firestopping...... COR 04/09/18 22 07 92 00 Joint Sealers...... COR 04/09/18 23 24 25 DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS 26 27 08 11 13 Standard Steel Doors and Frames ...... COR 04/09/18 28 08 31 13 Access Doors and Frames ...... COR 04/09/18 29 08 33 23 Overhead Coiling Doors...... COR 04/09/18 30 08 33 26 Overhead Coiling Grilles ...... COR 04/09/18 31 08 34 63 Detention Doors and Frames...... COR 04/09/18 32 08 41 13 Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts ...... COR 04/09/18 33 08 42 29.23 Sliding Automatic Entrances...... COR 04/09/18 34 08 44 23 Structural-Sealant-Glazed Curtain Walls...... COR 04/09/18 35 08 56 53.13 Security Windows...... COR 04/09/18 36 08 56 53.19 Transaction Windows...... COR 04/09/18 37 08 71 11 Door Hardware ...... COR 04/09/18 38 08 71 13 Automatic Door Operators ...... COR 04/09/18 39 08 80 00 Glazing...... COR 04/09/18 40 08 83 00 Mirror Glass...... COR 04/09/18 41 08 84 00 Plastic Glazing...... COR 04/09/18 42 08 88 00 Special Function Glazing ...... COR 04/09/18 43 44 45 DIVISION 09 – FINISHES 46 47 09 21 96 Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Systems...... COR 04/09/18 48 09 29 50 Gypsum Board Systems ...... COR 04/09/18 49 09 30 13 Ceramic Tiling...... COR 04/09/18 50 09 51 13 Acoustical Panel Ceilings ...... COR 04/09/18 51 09 54 23 Linear Metal Ceiling...... COR 04/09/18 52 09 57 53 Security Ceiling Assembly...... COR 04/09/18
09/April/2018 00 00 03 - 4 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO Section Title A/E/C Last Issue
1 09 61 05 Moisture Vapor Emission and Alkalinity Control...... COR 04/09/18 2 09 65 13 Resilient Base and Accessories...... COR 04/09/18 3 09 65 19 Resilient Tile Flooring ...... COR 04/09/18 4 09 65 36 Static-Control Resilient Flooring ...... COR 04/09/18 5 09 67 23 Resinous Flooring ...... COR 04/09/18 6 09 68 13 Tile Carpeting ...... COR 04/09/18 7 09 75 05 Ultracompact Wall Finishes...... COR 04/09/18 8 09 91 13 Exterior Painting...... COR 04/09/18 9 09 91 23 Interior Painting ...... COR 04/09/18 10 09 96 59 High-Build Glazed Coatings...... COR 04/09/18 11 12 13 DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES 14 15 10 18 50 Manufactured Shower Enclosures...... COR 04/09/18 16 10 21 13.15 Stainless-steel Toilet Compartments ...... COR 04/09/18 17 10 22 13 Wire Mesh Partitions ...... COR 04/09/18 18 10 26 00 Wall and Door Protection...... COR 04/09/18 19 10 28 13 Toilet and Bath Accessories...... COR 04/09/18 20 10 44 13 Fire Extinguishers Cabinets...... COR 04/09/18 21 10 44 16 Fire Extinguishers...... COR 04/09/18 22 10 51 13 Metal Lockers...... COR 04/09/18 23 10 75 16 Flag Poles ...... SSP 04/09/18 24 10 90 99 Miscellaneous Specialties...... COR 04/09/18 25 26 27 DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT 28 29 11 19 16 Detention Gun Lockers ...... COR 04/09/18 30 31 32 DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS 33 34 12 24 13 Roller Window Shades ...... COR 04/09/18 35 12 36 23 Plastic-Laminate-Clad Countertops...... COR 04/09/18 36 12 36 61 Simulated Stone Countertops...... COR 04/09/18 37 12 48 13 Entrance Floor Mats...... COR 04/09/18 38 39 40 DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 41 42 13 19 19 Pet Relief Areas...... COR 04/09/18 43 44 45 DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING EQUIPMENT 46 47 14 20 50 General Elevator Requirements...... COR 04/09/18 48 14 24 00 Hydraulic Elevators...... COR 04/09/18 49 14 31 00 Escalators...... COR 04/09/18 50 51 52 Facility Services Subgroup
09/April/2018 00 00 03 - 5 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO Section Title A/E/C Last Issue
1 2 DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION 3 4 21 13 13 Wet Pipe Sprinkler Systems...... C2HM 04/09/18 5 21 13 16 Dry Pipe Sprinkler Systems ...... C2HM 04/09/18 6 21 31 13 Electric Motor Driven Fire Pump and Accessories...... C2HM 04/09/18 7 8 9 DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING 10 11 22 05 00 Plumbing...... C2HM 04/09/18 12 22 08 00.01 Potable Water System Sterilization...... C2HM 04/09/18 13 22 30 00 Plumbing Equipment...... C2HM 04/09/18 14 22 30 01 Plumbing Drains and Specialties...... C2HM 04/09/18 15 22 40 00 Plumbing Fixtures ...... C2HM 04/09/18 16 17 18 DIVISION 23 –HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING 19 20 23 00 15 Basic Equipment Installation...... C2HM 04/09/18 21 23 05 00 Common Work Results for HVAC...... C2HM 04/09/18 22 23 05 01 Mechanical Codes and Standards...... C2HM 04/09/18 23 23 05 02 Mechanical Certification...... C2HM 04/09/18 24 23 05 10 Basic Materials and Methods...... C2HM 04/09/18 25 23 05 13 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment...... C2HM 04/09/18 26 23 05 16 Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping...... C2HM 04/09/18 27 23 05 19 Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping ...... C2HM 04/09/18 28 23 05 23 General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping ...... C2HM 04/09/18 29 23 05 29 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment ...... C2HM 04/09/18 30 23 05 48 Vibration Controls for HVAC Piping...... C2HM 04/09/18 31 23 05 53 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment...... C2HM 04/09/18 32 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC ...... C2HM 04/09/18 33 23 07 00 HVAC Insulation ...... C2HM 04/09/18 34 23 07 19 HVAC Piping Insulation...... C2HM 04/09/18 35 23 09 00 Building Automation System for HVAC...... C2HM 04/09/18 36 23 09 23 Instruments for Control Systems...... C2HM 04/09/18 37 23 09 90 MEP Sequence of Operation ...... C2HM 04/09/18 38 23 21 13 Hydronic Piping ...... C2HM 04/09/18 39 23 21 23 Hydronic Pumps...... C2HM 04/09/18 40 23 29 23 Variable Frequence Drives...... C2HM 04/09/18 41 23 31 13 Metal Duct...... C2HM 04/09/18 42 23 34 00 HVAC Fans...... C2HM 04/09/18 43 23 36 00 VAV Air Terminal Units...... C2HM 04/09/18 44 23 37 13 Diffusers, Grilles, and Registers...... C2HM 04/09/18 45 23 41 00 Air Filters, HVAC ...... C2HM 04/09/18 46 23 64 26 Air-Cooled, Rotary-Screw Water Chillers...... C2HM 04/09/18 47 23 74 13 Central Station Air Handling Units ...... C2HM 04/09/18 48 23 82 19 Fan Coil Units...... C2HM 04/09/18 49 50 51 DIVISION 25 – INTEGRATED AUTOMATION 52
09/April/2018 00 00 03 - 6 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO Section Title A/E/C Last Issue
1 Not Used 2 3 4 DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL 5 6 26 05 01 Basic Electrical Requirements ...... C2HM 04/09/18 7 26 05 19 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables ...... C2HM 04/09/18 8 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems...... C2HM 04/09/18 9 26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems...... C2HM 04/09/18 10 26 05 33 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems...... C2HM 04/09/18 11 26 05 49 Vibration Isolation for Electrical Systems...... C2HM 04/09/18 12 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems...... C2HM 04/09/18 13 26 05 75 Fault Calculation and Protective Device Coordination Study....C2HM 04/09/18 14 26 08 10 Acceptance Testing and Calibration...... C2HM 04/09/18 15 26 09 00 Instrumentation and Control for Special Function Glazing...... C2HM 04/09/18 16 26 09 23 Lighting Control Devices...... C2HM 04/09/18 17 26 22 00 Low Voltage Transformers...... C2HM 04/09/18 18 26 24 13 Switchboards...... C2HM 04/09/18 19 26 24 16 Panelboards...... C2HM 04/09/18 20 26 27 26 Wiring Devices ...... C2HM 04/09/18 21 26 28 16 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers...... C2HM 04/09/18 22 26 29 13 Enclosed Controllers ...... C2HM 04/09/18 23 26 29 16 Contactors ...... C2HM 04/09/18 24 26 29 23 Variable Frequency Drives...... C2HM 04/09/18 25 26 32 13 Engine Generators...... C2HM 04/09/18 26 26 33 53 Static Uninterruptible Power Supply...... C2HM 04/09/18 27 26 36 23 Automatic Transfer Switches ...... C2HM 04/09/18 28 26 41 00 Facility Lightning Protection ...... C2HM 04/09/18 29 26 50 00 Lighting...... C2HM 04/09/18 30 26 52 13 Emergency Lighting Power Supply ...... C2HM 04/09/18 31 32 33 DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS 34 35 27 05 00 Common Work Results for Communications ...... MOYE 04/09/18 36 27 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Communications...... MOYE 04/09/18 37 27 05 28 Pathways for Communications Systems ...... MOYE 04/09/18 38 27 05 53 Identification for Communications Systems...... MOYE 04/09/18 39 27 11 00 Communications Equipment Room Fittings...... MOYE 04/09/18 40 27 13 00 Communications Backbone Cabling ...... MOYE 04/09/18 41 27 15 00 Communications Horizontal Cabling...... MOYE 04/09/18 42 27 21 00 Data Communications Network Equipment...... MOYE 04/09/18 43 27 41 16 Integrated Audio-Video Systems and Equipment ...... MOYE 04/09/18 44 27 41 30 Master Antenna Television Systems...... MOYE 04/09/18 45 27 42 16 Transportation Information Display Systems...... MOYE 04/09/18 46 27 51 16 Public Address and Mass Notification Systems...... MOYE 04/09/18 47 27 51 23 Intercommunication Systems ...... MOYE 04/09/18 48 49 50 DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 51 52 28 05 00 Common Work Results for Electronic Safety and Security...... MOYE 04/09/18
09/April/2018 00 00 03 - 7 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO Section Title A/E/C Last Issue
1 28 13 00 Automated Access Control...... MOYE 04/09/18 2 28 16 00 Intrusion Detection...... MOYE 04/09/18 3 28 23 00 Video Surveillance System ...... MOYE 04/09/18 4 28 31 00 Fire Detection and Alarm ...... CH2M 04/09/18 5 6 7 Site and Infrastructure Subgroup 8 9 DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK 10 11 31 23 16.13 Trench Safety Systems...... AMB 04/09/18 12 31 23 23.13 Excavation and Backfill for Utilities ...... AMB 04/09/18 13 31 23 23.34 Cement Stabilized Sand...... AMB 04/09/18 14 31 32 13 Lime Treatment for Subgrade...... AMB 04/09/18 15 31 63 29 Drilled Concrete Piers and Shafts...... C2HM 04/09/18 16 17 18 DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 19 20 32 11 23 Crushed Limestone Flexible Base ...... AMB 04/09/18 21 32 12 16 Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete ...... AMB 04/09/18 22 32 13 13 Concrete Pavement...... AMB 04/09/18 23 32 14 13 Unit Pavers...... SSP 04/09/18 24 32 16 13 Concrete Curb and Gutter, Driveways, and Sidewalks...... AMB 04/09/18 25 32 17 13 Parking Bumpers...... COR 04/09/18 26 32 17 23 Pavement Marking ...... COR 04/09/18 27 32 23 23.16 Utility Backfill Materials...... AMB 04/09/18 28 32 80 00 Irrigation ...... SSP 04/09/18 29 32 90 00 Plantings ...... SSP 04/09/18 30 32 92 00 Lawns ...... SSP 04/09/18 31 32 33 DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES 34 35 33 14 13 Waterline Pipework ...... AMB 04/09/18 36 33 31 11 Sanitary Sewer Pipework...... AMB 04/09/18 37 33 42 12 Storm Drainage System...... AMB 04/09/18 38 33 42 41.51 Frames, Grates, Rings, and Covers ...... AMB 04/09/18 39 40 41 DIVISION 34 – TRANSPORTATION 42 43 34 77 39 Baggage Handling and Checked Baggage Inspection Systems...... BHS 04/09/18 44 45 46 DIVISION 35 – WATERWAY AND MARINE CONSTRUCTION 47 48 Not Used 49 50 51 52
09/April/2018 00 00 03 - 8 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO Section Title A/E/C Last Issue
1 FAA Specifications – Airside 2 3 Item D-701 Pipe for Storm Drains and Culverts ...... 04/09/18 4 Item D-751 Manholes, Catch Basins, Inlets and Inspection Holes...... 04/09/18 5 Item F-162 Chain-Link Fence...... 04/09/18 6 Item P-100 Mobilization and Traffic Control...... 04/09/18 7 Item P-101 Surface Preparation...... 04/09/18 8 Item P-150 Demolition...... 04/09/18 9 Item P-152 Excavation, Subgrade, and Embankment...... 04/09/18 10 Item P-155 Lime-Treated Subgrade ...... 04/09/18 11 Item P-304 Cement-Treated Base Course...... 04/09/18 12 Item P-501 Portland Cement Concrete (PCC) Pavement...... 04/09/18 13 Item P-605 Joint Sealants for Concrete Pavements ...... 04/09/18 14 Item P-610 Structural Portland Cement Concrete ...... 04/09/18 15 Item P-620 Runway and Taxiway Marking ...... 04/09/18 16 Item P-650 Aircraft Tiedown ...... 04/09/18 17 Item T-901 Seeding...... 04/09/18 18 Item T-904 Sodding ...... 04/09/18 19 Item T-905 Topsoiling...... 04/09/18 20 21 22 END OF DOCUMENT
09/April/2018 00 00 03 - 9 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 SECTION 21 13 13 2 3 WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 4
6 PART 1 GENERAL
7 1.1 SUMMARY
8 A. Section Includes: 9 1. Provide labor, material (including hardware), equipment and supervision to design 10 and install automatic water-based wet pipe sprinkler fire extinguishing systems with 11 required sprinkler and aboveground piping systems . 12 2. Interior Class I standpipe system. 13 3. Include joining, cutting, patching, freight, engineering, fees, and appurtenances for a 14 fully automatic system.
15 B. Prepare sprinkler system shop drawings in accordance with the design documents and 16 applicable codes and standards.
17 C. System Description: The wet pipe system includes, but is not limited to: 18 1. Water supply 19 2. Wet pipe valves 20 3. Hydraulically designed piping system 21 4. Automatic sprinklers 22 5. Standpipe system 23 6. Piping supports and bracing
24 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
25 A. Ensure layout drawings for fire protection systems are prepared by or under the supervision 26 of a NICET Fire Protection Engineering Technician, Level 3 or 4, subfield of Water Based 27 System Layout or otherwise in accordance with State licensing laws.
28 B. Pay for and obtain approvals, permits, and required inspections.
29 C. Provide UL listed and FM Approved materials and equipment in compliance with applicable 30 NFPA standards, owner and fire marshal’s requirements. Submit documentation that the 31 specific items furnished under this section for this Project conform to such requirements.
32 1.3 DESIGN CRITERIA
33 A. Design in accordance with criteria and area densities for the automatic sprinkler systems as 34 indicated on Drawings.
35 B. Design and install sprinkler systems in accordance with the applicable Codes and Standards 36 referenced in the project documents as adopted by the State or local code authority.
37 C. Hydraulically design systems: Submit to verify the recommended density can be met on a 38 minimum basis for the hydraulically designed system. 09/April/2018 21 13 13 - 1 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 D. Base hydraulic calculations upon water flow tests conducted and recorded at a point close to 2 the tie-in point for the proposed system. Once new underground construction is complete, 3 a new water flow test will be required to verify water supply data.
4 E. Design drawings are provided by CH2M to assist in layout of the sprinkler system, but it will 5 be the Contractor’s responsibility to determine and obtain exact layout and dimensions for 6 design of the system. If serious omissions are noted on Drawings, or in the specifications, it 7 is intended that Contractor will call attention thereto.
8 F. Design and provide supports and bracing for seismic loads specified in NFPA 13 when 9 noted as required on the design documents.
10 1.4 SUBMITTALS
11 A. Refer to the Submittal Schedule at the end of Part 3 for a list of submittal requirements for 12 this Section.
13 B. Owner will send design drawings, electrical diagrams, calculations, specification, and related 14 data directly to insurance underwriter for approval unless directed otherwise
15 C. Shop drawing packages are expected to be legible and provided with data sheets of materials 16 being purchased and installed and meet the requirements of required information for 17 submission to the State Fire Marshal. Data sheets need to clearly and specifically indicate 18 which model number of component is being proposed. The contractor is expected to 19 review his own shop drawings for completion and clarity before submitting to CH2M. 20 Illegible and/or incomplete packages will be rejected.
21 PART 2 PRODUCTS
22 2.1 ALARM SYSTEM
23 A. Locate water motor gong shut-off valve on the downstream side of the pressure switch. Do 24 not install a shutoff between the wet pipe automatic valve and the pressure switch.
25 B. Install a separate gong test valve for testing the water motor operated gong. Connect this test 26 valve so that the gong may be tested without testing the entire sprinkler system.
27 C. Alarm Flow/Pressure Device: 28 1. Provide electrical alarm flow device as an accessory to each alarm check valve of the 29 sprinkler system to detect water flow in the system. When water flow is detected, an 30 internal electric audible alarm will sound. Provide one device for each zone in the 31 system. Wiring for devices will be by others. 32 2. Provide Potter Electric Type PS-10 electrical alarm flow device 33 3. Provide device with two electrically independent, snap-acting switches, one capable 34 of being wired “normally closed” and one capable of being “normally open”. Adjust 35 both switches to actuate at the same time, on rising water pressure. Provide switch 36 electrical rating of 15 amps, or greater, at 120V/240 Volts alternating current (VAC).
09/April/2018 21 13 13 - 2 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1
2 D. Valve Tamper or Supervisory Switch: 3 1. Provide for each manually operated valve single unit comprised of dual SPDT 4 switches, 10 amps at 125/250 VAC, 2.5 amps at 24 VDC, in tamper-proof cover 5 with mounting and required hardware for attachment to indicated valves. 6 2. UL listed, FM approved. 7 3. System Sensor (Pittway) OSY2 for gate valve, PIBV2 for butterfly valves, or 8 approved equals by ADT, United Electric, or Victaulic conforming to 9 recommendations of valve manufacturer.
10 E. Wiring of devices will be performed by the Fire Alarm installing contractor.
11 2.2 ABOVEGROUND PIPING SYSTEM MATERIALS AND VALVES
12 A. Pipe: 13 1. FM approved standard weight carbon steel, electric resistance welded, ASTM A53 or 14 A135.See 2.2.A.2 immediately following. 15 2. For aboveground feed mains, cross mains, and branch lines in sizes 2-1/2 inches and 16 larger only, pipe may be FM approved thinwall or Schedule 10 carbon steel, electric 17 resistance welded, ASTM A135 or A795; pipe ends to suit fittings used. 18 3. Do not use lightwall pipe and Schedule 5 pipe. 19 4. Provide galvanized pipe where exposed outdoors. 20 5. Furnish standard weight pipe vertical water supply risers from grade floor level at entry 21 of feed main into building up to the highest horizontal cross main.
22 B. Pipe Fittings: 23 1. 2 Inches and Smaller: FM approved, 150-psig malleable iron, ASTM A197, threaded, 24 ASTM B16.3. 25 2. 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: UL listed, FM approved, malleable iron grooved end fittings, 26 Victaulic 10/11/12/18/19/25/29/100/110. 27 3. Provide galvanized fittings if exposed outdoors. 28 4. Certify fittings, used with thinwall pipe or Schedule 10 pipe, by the fitting 29 manufacturer as dimensionally compatible with and fully connectable to the pipe used 30 without field modifications. 31 5. Welded or segmented fittings are not acceptable.
32 C. Grooved Joint Couplings: 33 1. Mechanical couplings, Victaulic style 75, ductile or malleable iron, UL listed for fire 34 protection service, with standard EPDM gaskets. 35 2. Galvanized if exposed outdoors. 36 3. Certify couplings, used with thinwall pipe or Schedule 10 pipe, by the fitting 37 manufacturer as dimensionally compatible with and fully connectable to the pipe 38 used without field modifications.
39 D. Flanges: Cast iron, AWWA C110, C111, C115, flat faced. 40 1. 250 psi water service rating, Class 125 dimensions and bolt pattern. 41 2. Threaded or grooved as compatible with connecting pipe or fittings.
09/April/2018 21 13 13 - 3 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 2 3. Galvanized if exposed outdoor. 3 4. For grooved type provide Victaulic 741. 4 5. Certify flanges and flange adaptors for use with thinwall pipe or Schedule 10 pipe by 5 the fitting manufacturer as dimensionally compatible with and fully connectable to the 6 pipe used without field modifications.
7 E. Bolts: ASTM A307 grade B, galvanized, with galvanized nuts in accordance with ASTM A563 8 grade A.
9 F. Unions: 150 psig malleable iron, ASTM A197, threaded, ground joint, integral seat. 10 Galvanized if exposed outdoors.
11 G. Flange Gaskets: 1/8-inch full face synthetic rubber, Garlock 22.
12 H. Valves: 13 1. Minimum working pressure of 200 psig. FM approved for fire protection service. 14 Flanged end and wafer type valves shall be compatible for installation with flanges as 15 specified. 16 2. 2 Inches and Smaller: 17 Gate Ball 18 Kennedy 8067SS Nibco KT-585-70-UL, KT-580-70-UL 19 Victaulic 722 20 Drain, Test 21 ½ “– Potter-Roemer 4119 with capped nipple on outlet 22 1 ½ “– Potter-Roemer 4120 with capped nipple on outlet 23 Hose, male hose thread outlet 24 Angle pattern - Potter-Roemer 4060 with Potter Roemer 4615 chained outlet cap 25 Straight pattern - Potter-Roemer 4110 with Potter Roemer 4615 chained outlet cap 26 3. 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: 27 OS&Y Gate Swing Check 28 Kennedy 8068A Kennedy 1126A 29 Mueller R- 2360-6 Mueller A-2122-6 30 Nibco F-607-RW Nibco 908W 31 Victaulic 717 32 NRS Gate (for wall indicator post) 33 Kennedy 8561ASS 34 Mueller P-2360-6 35 Wafer Check Butterfly 36 Marlin U12-HMP Nibco LD-3510-4 (lug mounted) 37 Nibco GD-4765-A 38 Grinnell LD-8282-3-FP (lug mounted) 39 Victaulic 705,705W 40 41 42 09/April/2018 21 13 13 - 4 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 Drain, Test 2 2 ½ “- Potter-Roemer 4125 with capped nipple on outlet 3 Hose, male hose thread outlet 4 Angle pattern - Potter-Roemer 4065 with Potter Roemer 4625 chained outlet cap 5 Straight pattern - Potter-Roemer 4115 with Potter Roemer 4625 chained outlet cap. 6 7 4. Wet Pipe Automatic System Valves: Alarm check style, vertical variable pressure 8 type, complete with water motor gong, trim, and drain fittings, by Viking, Tyco, or 9 Reliable.
10 I. Wall Indicator Post: Mueller A-20814, Kennedy 641, Nibco NIP-2AJ, or approved equal, 11 UL listed, FM approved.
12 J. Pipeline Strainer: Mueller Steam Specialty (Muessco) 911-U, UL listed, with 0.25 inch 13 perforated stainless steel screen.
14 2.3 SPRINKLERS
15 A. For all finished ceilings provide Concealed pendent style sprinklers with white cover plate, 16 Quick Response or Standard response and temperature as noted on the drawings. For areas 17 with exposed construction provide standard response, standard finish upright or pendent to 18 suit conditions, temperatures as noted on the drawings.
19 B. Spares: 20 1. Furnish the minimum supply of required spare automatic sprinklers in accordance 21 with NFPA 13. 22 2. Pack sprinklers in a suitable container and representative of and in proportion of the 23 number of each type and temperature rating of the sprinklers installed. 24 3. Furnish no fewer than two special sprinkler head wrenches, or at least one head 25 wrench for each container or sprinkler box, whichever is greater.
26 C. Provide sprinklers by Reliable, Viking, Tyco, or Globe.
27 D. General: 28 1. Install sprinklers on concealed piping above the suspended ceiling with sprinklers 29 installed in the pendent position, except in areas having no suspended ceiling where 30 sprinklers are to be installed on exposed piping. Provide upright sprinkler on 31 exposed piping. 32 2. Align pendent sprinklers within normal fabrication and installation tolerances. 33 3. Sprinklers are to be located in center of tiles. 34 4. Verify clearances to obstructions such as lights, equipment, ductwork, piping and 35 provide separation as required by Chapter 8 of NFPA 13. Coordination with other 36 trades during the system layout/design phase is critical.
09/April/2018 21 13 13 - 5 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1
2 2.4 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS
3 A. 1 1/2 inch fire hose stations (or connections) shall be 1 1/2 inch - 11 1/2 (male) National 4 Pipe Thread (N.P.T), with cap and chain on each connection.
5 B. 2 1/2 inch fire hose stations (or connections) shall be 2 1/2 inch - 7 1/2 (male) National 6 Hose (N.H.) with cap and chain on each connection.
7 C. Steamer (pumper) connections shall be 4 inch - 4 (male) National Hose (N.H.) or 6 inch - 4 8 (male) National Hose (N.H.), with cap and chain on each connection, as indicated on 9 drawings.
10 D. Exposed Fire Department Connections: Potter-Roemer 5763 or approved equal, free- 11 standing, cast brass, rough chrome plated, two-way inlet with two 2 1/2 inch fire hose 12 connections, 6 inch outlet standpipe, double clappers, and cap and chain on each inlet.
13 E. Wall-Mounted Fire Department Inlet Connection: Potter-Roemer 5751-D or approved 14 equal, 4 x 2 ½ x 2 ½ , with double clappers and caps with retaining chains on inlets. Include 15 plate lettered “AUTO. SPKR.”
16 PART 3 EXECUTION
17 3.1 PREPARATION
18 A. Take possession of material and debris resulting from the excavation and removal work and 19 remove such material from the site.
20 B. Perform excavation, removal, and disposal in a workmanlike manner.
21 3.2 INSTALLATION
22 A. Install system components as indicated on Drawings and in accordance with NFPA 13.
23 B. Support, isolate, and brace sprinkler piping in accordance with NFPA 13.
24 C. Electrical connections for devices specified in this Article and for other required devices, will 25 be made in accordance with Division 26 of the Specifications.
26 D. Clean and pressure test water piping systems in accordance with NFPA 13
27 E. Install, test, and commission equipment and systems provided under this Section; execute 28 such installation, testing, and commissioning within the Project schedule to allow Owner 29 sufficient time to obtain required occupancy permits.
30 F. Conduct tests upon completion of work in the presence of and for the approval of the 31 Owner and Fire Department Inspector. Provide Owner minimum 24 hours advance notice.
09/April/2018 21 13 13 - 6 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 G. Coordinate installation and operation of equipment and piping systems to avoid 2 interferences.
3 H. Coordinate with other trades to ensure proper operational interfaces with other building 4 systems.
5 I. Install supervisory switches on manual valves and exterior indicator posts as indicated on 6 Drawings and as required by local codes and AHJ.
7 J. Locate and install fire hose valves and standpipe system as required in accordance with NFPA 8 14.
9 K. Install inspector’s test connection in accordance with NFPA 13 at most hydraulically remote 10 section of each system
11 L. Painting of pipe will be by painting contractor. Piping is to be cleaned prior to installation in 12 preparation of painting.
13 M. Fire hose valve cabinets are provided and installed by others.
14 N. Low Point Drains: 15 1. Install connection with valve having capped nipple on outlet at each aboveground 16 low point in piping. 17 2. Size of drain connection and drain valve shall be ¾ inch for line sizes ¾ inch 18 through 2 inches, 1-1/2 inches for line sizes 2-1/2 inches through 4 inches, and 2 19 inch for line sizes 6 inches and larger unless noted otherwise.
20 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
21 A. System Installation: By an automatic sprinkler company accredited or licensed by the fire 22 marshal’s office having jurisdiction over the location of this portion of Work, regularly 23 engaged in the business and familiar with this type of work.
24 B. Construct in a workmanlike manner as shown on the Drawings and as stated in the 25 specifications. It is the intent to include the necessary details whether or not those are shown 26 on the Drawings or included in the specifications.
27 C. Owner or CH2M will witness tests on the system (such as piping and operational tests) and 28 inspect installed systems
29 D. Determine exact locations of sprinkler system pipes after the working plans are made to 30 avoid interference with other trades.
31 E. Locate sprinklers in ceiling spaces in accordance with hazard requirements and additionally 32 locate symmetrical with respect to lighting fixtures. For lay-in or tiled ceilings, locate 33 sprinklers in center of tile.
34 F. At completion of Work under this Section, furnish to Owner an original version (not 35 photocopied) of NFPA 25. Receipt of this document by Owner is indicated on the Material 36 and Test Certificate.
09/April/2018 21 13 13 - 7 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 G. At completion of Work under this Section and before turnover of completed systems to 2 Owner, prepare and install design information placards for each water supply riser for each 3 system in accordance with requirements of NFPA 13.
4 H. Prior to final acceptance by Owner, demonstrate to Owner that complete sprinkler system is 5 complete and operable.
6 I. Post 1 copy of complete operator’s instructions at each alarm-check valve.
7 3.4 FIELD SUPPORT
8 Provide services of Contractor’s technicians to train Owner’s personnel at Project site in 9 proper operation and maintenance of wet pipe systems and system components. Provide this 10 training for not less than 4 hours per system (not including travel time) and at a time as 11 stipulated by Owner.
12 3.5 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE 13 14
ITEM NO. SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT AS INDICATED
WITH BID WITH BID
21 13 13-01 Prior to delivery Schedule covering design and installation of Per construction schedule entire fire protection system 21 13 13-02 It shall be the responsibility of the fire Prior to delivery protection contractor to deliver to Owner Per construction schedule all design drawings, calculations, and specification for approval by Owner’s insurance underwriter and the fire marshal prior to the start of any construction.
One (1) copy of all "working drawings" for the installation must be reviewed and approved by insurance underwriter and fire marshal before any fabrication of materials is begun. 21 13 13-03 Product data for pipe, system valves. pipe Prior to delivery fittings, gaskets, valves, sprinkler heads, Per construction schedule alarm devices, hydrants, indicator posts, and limit switches 21 13 13-04 Design drawings and plan drawings for Prior to delivery system with final design criteria Per construction schedule
09/April/2018 21 13 13 - 8 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO
ITEM NO. SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT AS INDICATED
WITH BID WITH BID
21 13 13-05 Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret Per construction schedule test results for compliance with performance requirements.
21 13 13-06 Record Drawings: Indicate actual routing, With record documents fitting details, elevations, and installed accessories and devices.
21 13 13-07 Written certification that systems are Per construction schedule correctly installed and that all components of such systems are fully functional in accordance with the applicable governing NFPA standard and recommendations of manufacturers
21 13 13-08 “Contractor’s Material and Test Certificate Per construction schedule for Aboveground Piping” signed by witnessing parties, from and in accordance with NFPA 13 21 13 13-09 Instructions, including catalog cuts, With record documents diagrams, drawings, and other descriptive With operations and data, covering proper testing, operation, maintenance manuals and maintenance of system installed, and necessary information for ordering replacement parts.
Include detailed instructions covering necessary and recommended testing, operating, and maintenance procedures to be followed by the using service maintenance personnel as directed by the Owner.
Furnish NFPA 25 document to Owner. 1
2 END OF SECTION
09/April/2018 21 13 13 - 9 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 SECTION 21 13 16 2 DRY PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 5 PART 1 GENERAL 6 7 1.1 SUMMARY 8 9 A. Section Includes: 10 1. Provide labor, material (including hardware), equipment and supervision to design 11 and install automatic water-based dry pipe sprinkler fire extinguishing systems with 12 required sprinkler and aboveground piping systems . 13 2. Include joining, cutting, patching, freight, engineering, fees, and appurtenances for a 14 fully automatic system
15 B. Prepare sprinkler system shop drawings in accordance with the design documents and 16 applicable codes and standards.
17 C. System Description: The dry pipe system includes, but is not limited to: 18 1. Water supply 19 2. Compressed air supply 20 3. Dry pipe valve 21 4. Hydraulically designed piping system 22 5. Automatic sprinklers 23 6. Piping supports and bracing
24 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE 25 26 A. Ensure layout drawings for fire protection systems are prepared by or under the supervision 27 of a NICET Fire Protection Engineering Technician, Level 3 or 4, subfield of Water Based 28 System Layout or otherwise in accordance with State licensing laws. 29 30 B. Pay for and obtain approvals, permits, and required inspections. 31 32 C. Provide UL Listed, FM Approved materials and equipment in compliance with applicable 33 NFPA standards, owner and fire marshal’s requirements. Submit documentation that the 34 specific items furnished under this section for this Project conform to such requirements. 35 36 1.3 DESIGN CRITERIA 37 38 A. Design in accordance with criteria and area densities for the automatic sprinkler systems as 39 indicated on Drawings. 40 41 B. Design and install sprinkler systems in accordance with the applicable Codes and Standards 42 referenced in the project documents as adopted by the State or local code authority. 43 44 C. Hydraulically design systems: Submit to verify the recommended density can be met on a 45 minimum basis for the hydraulically designed system. 46 47 09/April/2018 21 13 16 - 1 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO
1 D. Base hydraulic calculations upon water flow tests conducted and recorded at a point close to 2 the tie-in point for the proposed system. 3 4 E. Design drawings are provided by CH2M to assist in layout of the sprinkler system, but it will 5 be the Contractor’s responsibility to determine and obtain exact layout and dimensions for 6 design of the system. If serious omissions are noted on Drawings, or in the specifications, it 7 is intended that Contractor will call attention thereto. 8 9 F. Design and provide supports and bracing for seismic loads specified in NFPA 13 when 10 noted as required on the design documents. 11 12 1.4 SUBMITTALS 13 14 A. Refer to the Submittal Schedule at the end of Part 3 for a list of submittal requirements for 15 this Section. 16 17 B. Owner will send design drawings, electrical diagrams, calculations, specification, and related 18 data directly to insurance underwriter for approval unless directed otherwise. 19 20 C. Shop drawing packages are expected to be legible and provided with data sheets of materials 21 being purchased and installed and meet the requirements of required information for 22 submission to the State Fire Marshal. Data sheets need to clearly and specifically indicate 23 which model number of component is being proposed. The contractor is expected to 24 review his own shop drawings for completion and clarity before submitting to CH2M. 25 Illegible and/or incomplete packages will be rejected. 26 27 PART 2 PRODUCTS 28 29 2.1 ALARM SYSTEM 30 31 A. Locate water motor gong shut-off valve on the downstream side of the pressure switch. Do 32 not install a shutoff between the dry pipe automatic valve and the pressure switch. 33 34 B. Install a separate gong test valve for testing the water motor operated gong. Connect this test 35 valve so that the gong may be tested without testing the entire sprinkler system. 36 37 C. Air Compressor and Accessories for Each Dry Pipe System: 38 1. Air Compressor: Automatically controlled air compressor, 208/1/60VAC, with 39 prewired motor starter with overload protection and integral UL listed control 40 package, for maintaining supervisory air pressure in dry pipe systems. Verify required 41 compressor capacity during system design and before procurement. 42 2. Provide air compressor of sufficient capacity to restore proper air pressure in system 43 within 30 minutes. 44 3. Provide integral safety relief valve to prevent over-pressurizing of system piping. 45 4. Provide trim, connections, gauges, and switches for proper operation with the system 46 served by the air compressor. 47 5. For each air compressor include UL listed air maintenance device with unloader 48 valve and Low Air Alarm device. Reliable B1 or equal. 09/April/2018 21 13 16 - 2 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO
1 6. Include supports for mounting compressor sufficiently designed to rigidly support 2 total weight of air compressor. 3 4 D. Alarm Flow/Pressure Device: 5 1. Provide electrical alarm flow device as an accessory to each alarm check valve of the 6 sprinkler system to detect water flow in the system. When water flow is detected, an 7 internal electric audible alarm will sound. Provide one device for each zone in the 8 system. Wiring for devices will be by others. 9 2. Provide Potter Electric Type PS-10 electrical alarm flow device 10 3. Provide device with two electrically independent, snap-acting switches, one capable 11 of being wired “normally closed” and one capable of being “normally open”. Adjust 12 both switches to actuate at the same time, on rising water pressure. Provide switch 13 electrical rating of 15 amps, or greater, at 120V/240 Volts alternating current (VAC). 14 15 E. Valve Tamper or Supervisory Switch: 16 1. Provide for each manually operated valve single unit comprised of dual SPDT 17 switches, 10 amps at 125/250 VAC, 2.5 amps at 24 VDC, in tamper-proof cover 18 with mounting and required hardware for attachment to indicated valves. 19 2. UL listed, FM approved. 20 3. System Sensor (Pittway) OSY2 for gate valve, PIBV2 for butterfly valves, or 21 approved equals by ADT, United Electric, or Victaulic conforming to 22 recommendations of valve manufacturer. 23 24 2.2 COMPRESSED AIR PIPING SYSTEM 25 26 A. Piping: Type K copper tubing, ASTM B88. 27 28 B. Fittings: Copper, ASME B16.22. 29 30 C. Joints: Silver brazed, made with cadmium-free brazing material, Handy and Harman 31 Sil-Fos 5, J.W. Harris Stay Silv 5, or Engelhard Silvaloy 5. 32 33 D. Ball Valves: Apollo 82-100, with 6 inch tube extensions and female end suitable for silver 34 brazing. 35 36 E. Check Valves: Powell 1825, ends suitable for silver brazing. 37 38 2.3 ABOVEGROUND PIPING SYSTEM MATERIALS AND VALVES 39 40 A. Pipe: 41 1. FM approved standard weight internally galvanized carbon steel, electric resistance 42 welded, ASTM A53 or A135.See 2.3.A.2 immediately following. Corrosion resistant 43 coating is required for all exposed piping. 44 2. For aboveground feed mains, cross mains, and branch lines in sizes 2-1/2 inches and 45 larger only, pipe may be FM approved thinwall or Schedule 10 internally galvanized 46 carbon steel, electric resistance welded, ASTM A135 or A795; pipe ends to suit fittings 47 used. 48 3. Do not use lightwall pipe and Schedule 5 pipe. 09/April/2018 21 13 16 - 3 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO
1 4. Furnish standard weight internally galvanized pipe vertical water supply risers from 2 grade floor level at entry of feed main into building up to the highest horizontal cross 3 main. 4 5 B. Pipe Fittings: 6 1. 2 Inches and Smaller: FM approved, 150-psig galvanized malleable iron, ASTM A197, 7 threaded, ASTM B16.3. 8 2. 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: UL listed, FM approved, galvanized malleable iron grooved 9 end fittings, Victaulic 10/11/12/18/19/25/29/100/110. 10 3. Certify fittings, used with thinwall pipe or Schedule 10 pipe, by the fitting 11 manufacturer as dimensionally compatible with and fully connectable to the pipe used 12 without field modifications. 13 4. Welded or segmented fittings are not acceptable. 14 15 C. Grooved Joint Couplings: 16 1. Mechanical couplings, Victaulic style 75, galvanized ductile or malleable iron, UL 17 listed for fire protection service, with standard EPDM gaskets. 18 2. Certify couplings, used with thinwall pipe or Schedule 10 pipe, by the fitting 19 manufacturer as dimensionally compatible with and fully connectable to the pipe 20 used without field modifications. 21 22 D. Flanges: Galvanized iron, AWWA C110, C111, C115, flat faced. 23 1. 250 psi water service rating, Class 125 dimensions and bolt pattern. 24 2. Threaded or grooved as compatible with connecting pipe or fittings. 25 3. For grooved type provide Victaulic 741. 26 4. Certify flanges and flange adaptors for use with thinwall pipe or Schedule 10 pipe by 27 the fitting manufacturer as dimensionally compatible with and fully connectable to the 28 pipe used without field modifications. 29 30 E. Bolts: ASTM A307 grade B, galvanized, with galvanized nuts in accordance with ASTM A563 31 grade A. 32 33 F. Unions: 150 psig galvanized malleable iron, ASTM A197, threaded, ground joint, integral seat. 34 35 G. Flange Gaskets: 1/8-inch full face synthetic rubber, Garlock 22.
36 H. Valves: 37 1. Minimum working pressure of 200 psig. FM approved for fire protection service. 38 Flanged end and wafer type valves shall be compatible for installation with flanges as 39 specified. 40 2. 2 Inches and Smaller: 41 Gate Ball 42 Kennedy 8067SS Nibco KT-585-70-UL, KT-580-70-UL 43 Victaulic 722 44 Drain, Test 45 ½ “– Potter-Roemer 4119 with capped nipple on outlet 46 1 ½ “– Potter-Roemer 4120 with capped nipple on outlet
09/April/2018 21 13 16 - 4 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO
1 Hose, male hose thread outlet 2 Angle pattern - Potter-Roemer 4060 with Potter Roemer 4615 chained outlet cap 3 Straight pattern - Potter-Roemer 4110 with Potter Roemer 4615 chained outlet cap 4 3. 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: 5 OS&Y Gate Swing Check 6 Kennedy 8068A Kennedy 1126A 7 Mueller R- 2360-6 Mueller A-2122-6 8 Nibco F-607-RW Nibco 908W 9 Victaulic 717
10 NRS Gate (for wall indicator post) 11 Kennedy 8561ASS 12 Mueller P-2360-6 13 Wafer Check Butterfly 14 Marlin U12-HMP Nibco LD-3510-4 (lug mounted) 15 Nibco GD-4765-A 16 Grinnell LD-8282-3-FP (lug mounted) 17 Victaulic 705,705W 18 Drain, Test 19 2 ½ “- Potter-Roemer 4125 with capped nipple on outlet 20 Hose, male hose thread outlet 21 Angle pattern - Potter-Roemer 4065 with Potter Roemer 4625 chained outlet cap 22 Straight pattern - Potter-Roemer 4115 with Potter Roemer 4625 chained outlet cap 23 I. Wall Indicator Post: Mueller A-20814, Kennedy 641, Nibco NIP-2AJ, or approved equal, 24 UL listed, FM approved. 25 26 J. Dry Pipe Automatic Valves: Dry pipe valves, vertical differential type, with water motor gong, 27 priming chamber, trim, and drain fittings, by Viking, Tyco, or Reliable. 28 29 K. For exposed dry pipe system in baggage area, piping, fittings, components and hangers shall 30 be coated or of such material that is resistant to salt exposure. 31 32 2.4 SPRINKLERS 33 34 A. For Dry pipe system in baggage handling area provide standard response uprights with 35 corrosion resistant finish suitable for salt exposure, temperatures as noted on drawings. 36 37 B. Spares: 38 1. Furnish the minimum supply of required spare automatic sprinklers in accordance 39 with NFPA 13. 40 2. Pack sprinklers in a suitable container and representative of and in proportion of the 41 number of each type and temperature rating of the sprinklers installed. 42 3. Furnish no fewer than two special sprinkler head wrenches, or at least one head 43 wrench for each container or sprinkler box, whichever is greater.
44 09/April/2018 21 13 16 - 5 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO
1 C. Provide sprinklers by Reliable, Viking, Tyco, or Globe. 2 3 D. General: 4 1. Furnish dry type sprinklers, with integral extended length nipple, for dry pipe 5 sprinkler systems. 6 2. Install sprinklers on concealed piping above the suspended ceiling with sprinklers 7 installed in the pendent position, except in areas having no suspended ceiling where 8 sprinklers are to be installed on exposed piping. Provide upright sprinkler on 9 exposed piping. 10 3. Align pendent sprinklers within normal fabrication and installation tolerances. 11 Provide chrome plated pendent sprinklers and chrome plated associated 12 escutcheons. 13 4. Verify clearances to obstructions such as lights, equipment, ductwork, piping and 14 provide separation as required by Chapter 8 of NFPA 13. Coordination with other 15 trades during the system layout/design phase is critical. 16 17 2.5 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS 18 19 A. 1 1/2 inch fire hose stations (or connections) shall be 1 1/2 inch - 11 1/2 (male) National 20 Pipe Thread (N.P.T), with cap and chain on each connection. 21 22 B. 2 1/2 inch fire hose stations (or connections) shall be 2 1/2 inch - 7 1/2 (male) National 23 Hose (N.H.) with cap and chain on each connection. 24 25 C. Steamer (pumper) connections shall be 4 inch - 4 (male) National Hose (N.H.) or 6 inch - 4 26 (male) National Hose (N.H.), with cap and chain on each connection, as indicated on 27 drawings. 28 29 D. Exposed Fire Department Connections: Potter-Roemer 5763 or approved equal, free- 30 standing, cast brass, rough chrome plated, two-way inlet with two 2 1/2 inch fire hose 31 connections, 6 inch outlet standpipe, double clappers, and cap and chain on each inlet. 32 33 E. Wall-Mounted Fire Department Inlet Connection: Potter-Roemer 5751-D or approved 34 equal, 4 x 2 ½ x 2 ½ , with double clappers and caps with retaining chains on inlets. Include 35 plate lettered “AUTO. SPKR.” 36 37 PART 3 EXECUTION 38 39 3.1 PREPARATION 40 41 A. Take possession of material and debris resulting from the excavation and removal work and 42 remove such material from the site. 43 44 B. Perform excavation, removal, and disposal in a workmanlike manner. 45 46 3.2 INSTALLATION 47 48 A. Install system components as indicated on Drawings and in accordance with NFPA 13. 09/April/2018 21 13 16 - 6 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO
1 B. Support, isolate, and brace sprinkler piping in accordance with NFPA 13. 2 3 C. Electrical connections for devices specified in this Article and for other required devices, will 4 be made in accordance with Division 26 of the Specifications. 5 6 D. Clean and pressure test water piping systems in accordance with NFPA 13. 7 8 E. Pressure test compressed air tubing with dry air or dry nitrogen to 200 psig for 4 hours. 9 10 F. Blow out compressed air tubing with dry air or dry nitrogen until discharge is clean and 11 visibly free of moisture. 12 13 G. Install, test, and commission equipment and systems provided under this Section; execute 14 such installation, testing, and commissioning within the Project schedule to allow Owner 15 sufficient time to obtain required occupancy permits. 16 17 H. Conduct tests upon completion of work in the presence of and for the approval of the 18 Owner and Fire Department Inspector. Provide Owner minimum 24 hours advance notice. 19 20 I. Coordinate installation and operation of equipment and piping systems to avoid 21 interferences. 22 23 J. Coordinate with other trades to ensure proper operational interfaces with other building 24 systems. 25 26 K. Install supervisory switches on manual valves and exterior indicator posts as indicated on 27 Drawings and as required by local codes and AHJ. 28 29 L. Install inspector’s test connection in accordance with NFPA 13 at most hydraulically remote 30 section of each system. 31 32 M. Low Point Drains: 33 1. Install connection with valve having capped nipple on outlet at each aboveground 34 low point in piping. 35 2. Size of drain connection and drain valve shall be ¾ inch for line sizes ¾ inch 36 through 2 inches, 1-1/2 inches for line sizes 2-1/2 inches through 4 inches, and 2 37 inch for line sizes 6 inches and larger unless noted otherwise. 38 39 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 40 41 A. System Installation: By an automatic sprinkler company accredited or licensed by the fire 42 marshal’s office having jurisdiction over the location of this portion of Work, regularly 43 engaged in the business and familiar with this type of work. 44 45 B. Construct in a workmanlike manner as shown on the Drawings and as stated in the 46 specifications. It is the intent to include the necessary details whether or not those are shown 47 on the Drawings or included in the specifications.
09/April/2018 21 13 16 - 7 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO
1 C. Owner or CH2M will witness tests on the system (such as piping and operational tests) and 2 inspect installed systems. 3 4 D. Determine exact locations of sprinkler system pipes after the working plans are made to 5 avoid interference with other trades. 6 7 E. Locate sprinklers in ceiling spaces in accordance with hazard requirements and additionally 8 locate symmetrical with respect to lighting fixtures. 9 10 F. At completion of Work under this Section, furnish to Owner an original version (not 11 photocopied) of NFPA 25. Receipt of this document by Owner is indicated on the Material 12 and Test Certificate. 13 14 G. At completion of Work under this Section and before turnover of completed systems to 15 Owner, prepare and install design information placards for each water supply riser for each 16 system in accordance with requirements of NFPA 13. 17 18 H. Prior to final acceptance by Owner, demonstrate to Owner that complete sprinkler system is 19 complete and operable. 20 21 I. Post 1 copy of complete operator’s instructions at each dry pipe valve.
22 23 3.4 FIELD SUPPORT 24 25 Provide services of Contractor’s technicians to train Owner’s personnel at Project site in 26 proper operation and maintenance of wet pipe systems and system components. Duration of 27 this training shall be not less than 4 hours per system (not including travel time) and shall be 28 at a time as stipulated by Owner.
09/April/2018 21 13 16 - 8 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO
1 2 3.5 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE 3 4
ITEM NO. SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT AS INDICATED
WITH BID WITH BID
21 13 16-01 Schedule covering design and installation of Prior to delivery entire fire protection system Per construction schedule
21 13 16-02 It shall be the responsibility of the fire Prior to delivery protection contractor to deliver to Owner Per construction schedule all design drawings, calculations, and specification for approval by Owner’s insurance underwriter and the fire marshal prior to the start of any construction. One (1) copy of all "working drawings" for the installation must be reviewed and approved by insurance underwriter and fire marshal before any fabrication of materials is begun. 21 13 16-03 Product data for pipe, system valves. pipe Prior to delivery fittings, gaskets, valves, sprinkler heads, Per construction schedule alarm devices, hydrants, indicator posts, air compressors, air maintenance devices, and limit switches 21 13 16-04 Design drawings and plan drawings for Prior to delivery system with final design criteria Per construction schedule
21 13 16-05 Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret Per construction schedule test results for compliance with performance requirements.
21 13 16-06 Record Drawings: Indicate actual routing, With record documents fitting details, elevations, and installed accessories and devices.
21 13 16-07 Written certification that systems are Per construction schedule correctly installed and that all components of such systems are fully functional in accordance with the applicable governing NFPA standard and recommendations of manufacturers 09/April/2018 21 13 16 - 9 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO
ITEM NO. SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT AS INDICATED
WITH BID WITH BID
21 13 16-08 “Contractor’s Material and Test Certificate Per construction schedule for Aboveground Piping” signed by witnessing parties, from and in accordance with NFPA 13 21 13 16-09 Instructions, including catalog cuts, With record documents diagrams, drawings, and other descriptive With operations and data, covering proper testing, operation, maintenance manuals and maintenance of system installed, and necessary information for ordering replacement parts. Include detailed instructions covering necessary and recommended testing, operating, and maintenance procedures to be followed by the using service maintenance personnel as directed by the Owner. Furnish NFPA 25 document to Owner. 1 2 END OF SECTION 3 4
09/April/2018 21 13 16 - 10 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO
1 SECTION 21 31 13
2 ELECTRIC MOTOR DRIVEN FIRE PUMP AND ACCESSORIES
3 PART 1 GENERAL
4 1.1 SUMMARY
5 A. Section Includes: provision, delivery, installation, and startup of one (1) electric 6 motor-driven fire pump, with drive and associated controller, with interconnecting piping 7 and interconnecting wiring.
8 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
9 A. Comply with 2012 IBC/IFC, 2010 NFPA 20. All components are to be UL Listed and FM 10 Approved.
11 B. Seismic Design: Seismic Design Category is “A”.
12 C. Preshipment Testing: 13 1. Test entire fire pump system, including pumps, drives, controllers, and valves, at 14 factory as a packaged system to ensure performance as specified and as required by 15 NFPA 20. 16 2. System shall be energized through power distribution panel and all failures shall be 17 demonstrated. This test shall be witnessed and approved by a representative of the 18 Owner. 19 3. Factory testing shall include a pump flow test in a facility bearing ISO 9001 approval 20 and witnessed by a registered professional engineer. 21 4. Copies of certified factory test data shall be available for comparison during field 22 acceptance tests. 23 5. Test packaged pumping system at factory with water to 200 psig. 24 6. Test all electrical components for proper configuration, connection, and operability.
25 D. Manufacturer's Qualifications: 26 1. Responsible for compliance with all applicable codes. 27 2. Responsible for performance of entire housed fire pump system as specified in this 28 Section and installed at Owner’s location. 29 3. Manufacturing facility (location where fire pump system is manufactured and 30 assembled) bears ISO 9001 approval current as of the date of this specification. 31 4. Minimum five years' experience in production and assembly of fire pumps and 32 packaged fire pumping systems.
33 E. Furnish materials that are new, unused, and free from cracks or imperfections.
34 F. Provide services of qualified manufacturer's representative to assist in installation and 35 complete checkout and startup of equipment. (See also Paragraph 3.1.A of this Section.)
36 G. Manufacturer or supplier shall have capability to provide repair, maintenance, and parts 37 supply service for all furnished components.
09/April/2018 21 31 13 - 1 42336 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal – BRO
1 H. Do not commence fabrication and assembly of packaged system until review of all submittal 2 data by Owner's Representative is completed.
3 I. Contractor and Owner’s Representative shall be able to inspect construction of packaged 4 pump module at the manufacturer with 24 hours notice.
5 J. Components requiring FM approval shall bear FM labels as certification of approval.
6 K. All operating items shall be suitable and designed for operation in an indoor environment of 7 between 40 F and 120 F.
8 L. Include sufficient quantities of proper lubricants as required and specified by equipment 9 manufacturer for complete lubrication during field tests and initial operation.
10 1.3 SUBMITTALS
11 A. Comply with the Submittal Schedule at the end of this Section.
12 B. Submit detailed list of special tools and devices required to install, adjust, repair, test, or 13 operate equipment. Identify and price separately items which are not provided with 14 equipment.
15 C. Mark each submittal to identify the following: 16 1. Purchase Order Number, if applicable. 17 2. A/E's Project Number. 18 3. Equipment Number. 19 4. Package Number, if applicable.
20 D. Identify each submittal as "With Bid," "For Review," or "Certified Record".
21 E. Submit "Review" documents not later than 10 days after receipt of Purchase Order .
22 F. Submit "Certified Record" documents not later than 10 days after return of "Approval" 23 documents.
24 G. Mark each document to identify applicable options and models.
25 H. Submit electronic copies (PDF) for review and approval according to project contract.
26 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
27 A. Protect all equipment, enclosure components, connection surfaces, piping, wiring, fluid 28 passages, and working parts from damage during shipment, handling, and storage.
29 B. Repair or replace all items damaged during shipment and delivery.
30 C. Receive and unload equipment and materials specified in this Section.
31
09/April/2018 21 31 13 - 2 42336 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal – BRO
1 1.5 WARRANTY
2 A. Warrant that all supplied components will function as specified and as a complete functional 3 system in accordance with all applicable codes and be free from defects in design, assembly, 4 manufacture, and workmanship for a minimum period of one year after equipment is placed 5 in service.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A. Fire Pump: 1. Quantity: One, driven by electric motor. 2. Design: Delivery of not less than 65 percent of rated head at 150 percent of rated capacity. 3. Maximum Shutoff Head: 140 percent of rated head, maximum. 4. Rated Operating Conditions: a. Capacity: 1,000 GPM. b. Total Discharge Head (TDH): 50 psig. 5. Pump Type: Vertical In-Line, with: a. Cast iron casing with replaceable wear rings. b. Steel shaft. c. Cast iron stuffing box with lantern ring. d. Bronze impeller. 6. Pump Discharge Connection: Flanged, 125 psig or class125 cast iron, ASME B16.1. 7. Provide accessories and fittings in accordance with NFPA 20 including, but not limited to: a. One 3/4 inch casing relief valve, b. One automatic air release valve, c. One supply hose valve header with hose thread end bronze gate valves with end cap and chain for each valve, d. One automatic ball drip upstream of hose valve header, e. One 3 1/2 inch pump discharge pressure gauge, range 0-300 psig, with shutoff cock f. One manufacturer's nameplate for pump, stating: 1) pump capacity, 2) total head, 3) pump RPM, 4) manufacturer's model number and serial number, and 5) casing working pressure. g. One pilot operated pump discharge relief valve (installed in fire pump discharge manifold), h. One relief valve discharge cone with a means of detecting water flow through the cone, i. Common rigid structural steel baseplate (elevated as required) for each pump and its associated drive, and j. Flexible drive coupling with OSHA approved guard. 8. Pump Design and Construction: Pump shall be FM approved and/or have UL label for fire pump service at the specified rating.
09/April/2018 21 31 13 - 3 42336 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal – BRO
9. Identify pump with equipment number in accordance with attached Tag Data Sheet. 10. Acceptable Manufacturer: ITT A-C Pump, Patterson, Peerless, Fairbanks-Morse, or Aurora.
B. Jockey (Pressure Maintenance) Pump: NOT APPLICABLE FOR THIS PROJECT 1. Quantity: One. 2. Configuration: Vertical or in-line. 3. Type: Centrifugal or multistage diffuser, direct drive by electric motor. 4. Materials: a. Casing: Cast iron. b. Shaft: Steel. c. Trim and Impeller: Bronze. 5. Operating Conditions: a. Capacity: 20 GPM. b. Total Head (TDH): 160 psig. c. Maximum Shutoff Head: 180 psig. d. Speed: 3500 RPM maximum. 6. Provide accessories including, but not necessarily limited to: a. Common rigid structural steel baseplate for pump and drive, elevated as required, b. Manufacturer’s nameplate stating: 1) pump capacity, 2) total head, and 3) manufacturer's model number and serial number. 7. Motor: TEFC, 1.15 service factor, NEMA design "B", 460/3/60, 10 HP. 8. Identify pump with equipment number in accordance with attached Tag Data Sheet. 9. Acceptable Manufacturer: Same as fire pumps.
C. Fire Pump Motor: 1. Type: Squirrel cage, induction type, open drip-proof, NEMA design "B", continuous duty, listed for fire pump service. 2. Equip with non-reverse ratchet. 3. Service Factor: 1.15 minimum. 4. Rated Horsepower: 350. 5. Voltage: 460/3/60. 6. Withstand Rating: 65,000 amperes RMS symmetrical. 7. Provide nameplate including following information: a. Manufacturer's type and frame designation. b. Rated horsepower. c. Voltage/phase/hertz. d. Insulation class. e. RPM at full load. f. Full load amperes. g. Service factor. h. Manufacturer's model number.
D. Electric Motor Driven Fire Pump Controller: 1. Enclosure: NEMA 12 certified, heavy steel, dust and moisture resistant; include heavy gauge steel door with three-point lockable latch and continuous hinge.
09/April/2018 21 31 13 - 4 42336 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal – BRO
2. Type: UL listed, FM approved combined automatic/manual, factory wired, with features including: a. Manual start pushbutton b. Manual stop pushbutton c. Running period timer d. All required contactors e. Control transformer f. Ground lug(s) 3. Motor Starter: a. Type: Wye delta closed transition reduced voltage, suitably sized. b. Operation: Automatic by signal from pressure switch (low pressure in fire protection system) or manual by switching means on control cabinet; include emergency start handle which operates to close motor-circuit switching mechanism mechanically and to provide for nonautomatic continuous running operation of motor independent of pressure switch, electrical control circuits, and magnetic devices. c. Provide contacts and terminal bar for connection of following signals: 1) Pump running condition. 2) Loss of power in any phase on line side of motor starter. 3) Phase reversal on line side of motor starter. d. Provide timed automatic acceleration of motor, with acceleration not exceeding ten seconds. e. Starting resistors designed to permit one five-second starting operation in each 80 seconds for period of not less than one hour. f. Provide tap for relay power source on load sides of circuit breaker and motor contactor, respectively. 4. Disconnect Switch (Isolating Means): a. Externally operable, quickbreak type with spring latch. b. Rating: Not less than 115 percent of nameplate current rating of motor. 5. Circuit Breaker (Disconnecting Means): a. Magnetic trip type, externally operable; designed to trip free of handle. b. Interrupting Capacity: Equal to or greater than available short circuit current for circuit in which breaker is used. c. Continuous Rating: Not less than 115 percent of rated full load current of motor. d. Designed to permit normal starting without tripping and to provide instantaneous short-circuit protection. e. Nonthermal type or ambient temperature compensated thermal type overcurrent sensing elements. 6. Locked Rotor Overcurrent Protection: a. Time-delay type device with tripping time between 8 and 20 seconds at locked rotor current. b. Calibrated up to and set at 300 percent of motor full load current. c. Visual indication of proper setting(s). d. Designed with reset capability immediately after tripping, with tripping characteristic remaining unchanged. e. Tripping accomplished by opening circuit breaker. 7. Provide voltmeter test studs and ammeter test link. 8. Pressure Switch: Responsive to water pressure; independent high and low calibrated adjustments, with sensing element capable of withstanding 400 psi surge pressure.
09/April/2018 21 31 13 - 5 42336 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal – BRO
9. Provide pilot lamp to indicate power available at controller for starting. 10. Automatic Transfer Switch: a. Electrically operated - mechanically held on both the emergency and normal power source sides b. Rated for continuous duty in an unventilated enclosure. c. Rated and listed for fire pump service d. UL 1008 listed and FM Approved e. Electronically controlled for automatic switching f. Capable of manual operation. g. Transfer switch logic shall monitor the emergency power source for all three phases before permitting transfer from the normal source. Transfer switches monitoring only two phases of either source are not acceptable. h. Include the following: 1) Full Phase Protection – the solid state phase monitor shall be a field adjustable, close differential type, with 85-100% pickup and 75- 98% dropout. A single adjustment shall set all phases. 2) Solid state, three phase voltage and frequency monitor on generator output to prevent transfer prior to proper output parameters, adjustable 85-100% of generator voltage and frequency, with adjustable dropout of 75-85% setting. 3) Adjustable 2 to 30 minutes on retransfer of load to normal. 4) Adjustable 2 to 30 minutes cool-down timer when the generator set runs unloaded after retransfer to line. 5) Motor load decay time delay, adjustable from 1.5 to 15 seconds and operating on transfer to either source. 6) Adjustable 0.5 seconds to 5 minutes time delay on transfer to emergency source after verification of emergency source voltage and frequency. 7) Test switch to simulate normal power failure. 8) Phase loss and phase reversal monitor to initiate transfer to emergency power. 9) “Normal” and “Emergency” position LED’s. 10) Engine start contacts for generator. 11) Auxiliary contacts for normal and emergency positions. 12) Emergency source isolating switch/motor circuit protector, as a means of disconnect. The switch shall include aux. contacts to inhibit motor starting when switch is open. 13) Audible and visual alarm to indicate isolating switch is open, with “Normal-Silence” selector switch and re-ring function. 14) Push button to bypass retransfer to normal time delay. i. The following diagnostic LED indications shall be provided: 1) Normal Source Voltage O.K. Green LED 2) Emergency Source Voltage O.K. Red LED 3) Emergency Frequency O.K. Green LED 4) Transfer to Emergency Timing Red LED 5) Transfer to Normal Timing Red LED 6) Motor Running Unloaded Timing Red LED
09/April/2018 21 31 13 - 6 42336 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal – BRO
10. Compliance: Designed to meet or exceed requirements of NFPA 20, latest edition. 11. Include operating and maintenance instructions, wiring diagram, operating sequence description, and parts list inside door. 12. Identify controller with equipment number in accordance with attached Tag Data Sheet. 13. Acceptable Manufacturer: Joslyn-Clark, Master Control Systems, Cutler-Hammer, Metron, or Firetrol.
E. Jockey Pump Controller NOT APPLICABLE FOR THIS PROJECT 1. Function: Cycling jockey pump to maintain system pressure of 125 psig; pump shall start at 75 psig and shut off at 140 psig. 2. Compliance: UL, FM. 3. Include: a. externally operable fused disconnect switch rated at 115 percent of nameplate current rating of motor, b. across-the-line pump motor starter, c. pressure switch with adjustable cut-in and cut-out points, d. pilot lamp to indicate power to motor available, e. pushbutton for manually starting motor, f. operation mode selector (three position, HAND-OFF-AUTO), g. fuse blocks, and h. control power transformer. 4. Enclosure: Sheet steel, NEMA 12, wall mountable design, with gasketed access door, threaded hubs for conduit entry, and bulkhead connector for connecting pressure sensor to pressure switch. 5. Provide timer to keep motor in operation for five minutes when started automatically. 6. Identify controller with equipment number in accordance with attached Tag Data Sheet. 7. Acceptable Manufacturer: Same as fire pump drive controller.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Place, assemble, install, and place into operational readiness complete pumping system and building as specified in the Section, in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations, Drawings, and NFPA 20.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's field representative shall supervise installation of all items and equipment specified in this Section.
B. Manufacturer's representative and Contractor shall inspect jobsite 72 hours before shipment of packaged pump house module to assure field conditions compatible with packaged pump houses.
09/April/2018 21 31 13 - 7 42336 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal – BRO
C. Manufacturer's field representative shall conduct and document acceptance tests and startup of pumps and controllers specified in this Section and shall ensure conformance to acceptance requirements of NFPA 20.
D. Manufacturer's representative shall instruct Owner's personnel in proper system operation and maintenance.
E. Manufacturer's representative shall commission equipment and certify to Owner in writing that all installation, maintenance instruction, tests, adjustments, repairs, and startup are complete and that all components are ready for continuous operation.
3.3 START UP AND COMMISSIONING
A. The system manufacturer or his representative shall provide commissioning of the complete packaged pumping system. This commissioning shall include a check of proper installation by the installing contractor, system check-out, adjustment, and complete start-up. This commissioning will occur only when all hook-ups, tie-ins and terminations have been completed and signed-off on the system manufacturer's start-up request form by the installer.
B. The commissioning will require the system manufacturer or his representative to provide on- site training for the Owner's personnel on the operation and maintenance of the packaged pumping systems.
C. Manufacturer's representative shall commission equipment and certify to Owner in writing that all installation, maintenance instruction, tests, adjustments, repairs, and startup are complete and that all components are ready for continuous operation.
3.4 TRAINING
A. Provide personnel in direct employ of pumping system manufacturer for site instructional training.
B. Provide training on operation, maintenance, and troubleshooting of unit.
C. Provide instruction for minimum of 8 normal working hours.
D. Provide required educational materials for number of personnel as required by the owner.
E. Do not commence training until final turnover of operation and maintenance data to Owner.
F. Provide minimum of 10 days notice of scheduled start of training.
3.5 ATTACHMENTS
A. Tag Data Sheet (attached after “End of Section’) is part of this Section.
3.6 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
A. See Article 1.3 for additional detailed requirements.
09/April/2018 21 31 13 - 8 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO
ITEM NO. SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT AS INDICATED
WITH BID BID WITH
21 31 13-01 Product Data (catalog documents, standard Review schedules, and charts) Certified Record 21 31 13-02 General Arrangement Drawings, Including Review Complete Dimensions, Types & Sizes of Certified Record Piping & Electrical Service Connections, Locations of Equipment & System Accessories, and Requirements for Service Access to Equipment 21 31 13-03 Foundation Drawings and Load Data Review Certified Record 21 31 13-04 Anchor Bolt Layout Review Certified Record 21 31 13-05 Erection Drawings and Lifting and Handling Certified Record Instructions 21 31 13-06 Schematic Piping and Instrumentation Review Drawings Certified Record 21 31 13-07 Equipment Weights Review Certified Record 21 31 13-08 Performance Curves Review Certified Record 21 31 13-09 Factory Test Reports Certified Record 21 31 13- Noise Level Data Review 010 Certified Record 21 31 13- Wiring Diagram and Field Connections Review 011 (power and control) Certified Record 21 31 13- AC Motor Data (FLA, HP or kW, voltage, Review 012 phase, Hz) Certified Record 21 31 13- Electrical Requirements - volts, phase, amps, Review 013 kW (total system and individual powered Certified Record components) 21 31 13- Utility Requirements (air, water, and other Review 014 utilities) Certified Record 21 31 13- Installation Instructions Certified Record 015 21 31 13- Operating and Maintenance Manual Certified Record 016 21 31 13- Parts List and Recommended Spare Parts Certified Record
09/April/2018 21 31 13 - 9 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO
ITEM NO. SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT AS INDICATED
WITH BID BID WITH
017 (with prices) 21 31 13- Bill of Materials (with OEM and part Certified Record 018 numbers) 21 31 13- Inspection Reports Certified Record 019 21 31 13- Written Warranty Certified Record 020
END OF SECTION
31/2” (89 4” (102 m m ) m m )
1. GENERAL A. Number shown is for illustration only. B. Use die-stamp to affix numbers/characters. C. Fabricate tag from 24 gauge, Type 316 stainless steel. Attach tag to metal substrate with stainless steel screws or stainless steel rivets D. Mount tag in a conspicuous place adjacent to manufacturer's nameplate. E. Use larger tag above unless small size of equipment dictates otherwise. 2. EQUIPMENT NUMBER TAG: A. Refer to Drawings for equipment numbers.
09/April/2018 21 31 13 - 10 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 SECTION 22 05 00
2 PLUMBING
7 PART 1 GENERAL
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9 A. This Section includes furnishing labor, materials, equipment, and performance of 10 operations required to complete plumbing installations as shown on the Drawings and 11 specified in this Section. Terminate Work described in this Section at a point 5 feet outside 12 walls of buildings, or as shown on Drawings.
13 B. Related Sections: 14 1. Section 22 08 00.01 – Potable Water System Sterilization. 15 2. Section 22 30 00 – Plumbing Equipment 16 3. Section 22 30 01 – Plumbing Drains and Specialties 17 4. Section 23 00 15 – Basic Equipment Installation.
18 1.2 REFERENCES
19 A. International Code Council (ICC): 20 1. International Plumbing Code (IPC).
21 B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 22 1. Standards as referenced
23 C. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) 24 1. Standards as referenced
25 D. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) 26 1. Standards as referenced
27 E. American Water Works Association (AWWA) 28 1. Standards as referenced
29 1.3 SUBMITTALS
30 A. Refer to the Submittal Schedule at the end of Part 3 of this Section for a list of submittal 31 requirements for this Section.
32 1.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
33 A. Provide and install nonconductive transition fittings, between dissimilar pipe materials, 34 that comply with the latest adopted edition of the International Plumbing Code (IPC).
09/April/2018 22 05 00 - 1 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 B. Provide and install connections to plumbing equipment and fixtures, and plumbing 2 equipment and fixtures furnished by others or specified elsewhere. Trap and vent (and 3 where required, provide and install trap seal protection) drainage connections. Provide the 4 service line to each item of equipment with a shut-off valve to enable isolation of the item 5 for repair and maintenance without interfering with operation of other equipment or 6 fixtures.
7 C. Comply with laws and adopted codes of place of the Work and latest adopted edition of 8 the IPC.
9 D. Install systems and items to pass inspections required by codes, local plumbing inspection 10 department, state and federal authorities, and insurance company having jurisdiction. 11 These specifications and the IPC provide the minimum basis for inspection. Provide, 12 without additional cost to the Owner, changes or additions that may be necessary to pass 13 such inspections and obtain such approvals. Editions of codes and standards current and 14 adopted at the time of signing the Contract govern.
15 E. Provide qualified personnel, either licensed master plumbers, or personnel under the 16 supervision of a licensed master plumber to perform the Work. Work includes: Sanitary 17 drainage systems, storm drainage systems, sanitary vent systems, potable water systems, 18 and any system and/or elements connected to one or more of these systems named in this 19 paragraph.
20 F. The Drawings are diagrammatic, unless delineated on the Drawings, showing only the 21 arrangement and approximate location of the various lines. Do not locate underground 22 pipe at an elevation lower than adjacent parallel structural foundations unless it is far 23 enough away so that the angle from bottom of pipe to bottom of structural foundation is 24 less than 45 degrees.
25 G. Coordinate with the Owner’s representative before deviating from the plumbing layout 26 and elevations shown on the Drawings. In the event of a conflict or omission in the 27 Drawings or Specifications, notify the Owner’s representative before proceeding with that 28 part of the Work in question.
29 H. Where conflicts occur between the Drawings and Specifications, the Drawings take 30 precedence over the Specifications.
31 I. Perform the following: 32 1. Examine Drawings and Specifications to determine requirements and scope for this 33 portion of Work. 34 2. Execute this portion of Work in accordance with Drawings. 35 3. Comply with Specifications. 36 If direct conflicts are discovered between Specifications and Drawings that together 37 describe this portion of Work, the Drawings govern unless the Owner’s 38 representative directs otherwise.
09/April/2018 22 05 00 - 2 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 J. The Contractor is responsible for replacement due to the use of materials, tools, 2 equipment, fabrication methods, or installation procedures that are contrary to, or in direct 3 violation of, the requirements of referenced codes, referenced standards, and this 4 Specification, unless the use of such material, equipment, method, or procedure has the 5 prior written approval of the Owner’s representative, including acknowledgment of the 6 variation from the requirements. Failure to discover the use by the Contractor of 7 prohibited materials, equipment, methods, or procedures prior to final approval or 8 acceptance of the system does not constitute approval of such prohibited material, 9 equipment, method, or procedure, nor relieve the Contractor of the responsibility to 10 replace prohibited materials or correct the prohibited component installation at no 11 additional cost.
12 K. Drawings indicate required size and points of termination of pipes to suggest proper 13 routes to conform to structure, avoid obstructions, and preserve clearances. However, 14 Drawings do not indicate each necessary offset. Provide installation to conform to 15 structure, avoid obstructions, preserve headroom, maintain adequate clearance, and clear 16 passageways.
17 L. Carefully examine existing conditions, including related work, and compare Contract 18 Documents. Submittal of bid indicates the Contractor has examined the site and Drawings 19 and has included the costs associated with the Work. Additional compensation will not be 20 paid to the Contractor for his failure to visit the job site, review Drawings, and identify the 21 Work required. Contract Sum includes the cost for additions to the Work identified by the 22 Contractor during the site visit and review of the Contract Documents.
23 M. Prior to commencement of this portion of Work, review peculiarities and limitations of 24 workspace available for installation of materials and equipment furnished and installed. 25 Install materials and equipment to provide easy access for operation and maintenance.
26 N. In instances where Work under this Division is required in or adjacent to an existing 27 building or service area, notify Owner of need to schedule this portion of Work to avoid 28 disruption to existing operations. If damage to existing materials, processes, and 29 equipment occurs as a result of Work under this Division, repair or replace damaged 30 materials and equipment to Owner representative’s satisfaction at no cost to Owner.
31 O. If Work is performed in or adjacent to existing building, structure, manufacturing area, 32 processing area (including, but not limited to, areas used for packaging, filling, 33 transporting, inspecting, compounding, milling, grinding, mixing, testing, or validating), 34 office area, equipment room, or service area, inspect conditions for renovations or repairs 35 required to existing items and provide labor and materials necessary to alter, renovate, or 36 repair existing items so as to facilitate incorporation of this portion of Work as specified 37 and as indicated on Drawings.
38 P. Materials, apparatus, and methods of installation shall meet with the approval of the 39 Owner’s representative.
09/April/2018 22 05 00 - 3 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 Q. It is the responsibility of the Contractor performing the portion of Work under this 2 Specification to provide and install plumbing equipment, plumbing fixtures, valves, drains, 3 and specialties so as to result in secure, watertight, non-leaking connections to water 4 supply systems and drainage systems without deforming or dimensionally altering the 5 connected pipe or the connected item. This includes the selection, provision, and 6 installation of gaskets, sealant, and adaptor fittings as required.
7 R. Provide and install drain traps with a means to maintain a liquid seal in accordance with 8 requirements of local codes and authorities having jurisdiction.
9 S. Do not provide or install a plumbing fixture, device, or piping that will provide a cross 10 connection or interconnection between a distributing water supply for drinking or 11 domestic purposes and a polluted supply such as a drainage system or soil or waste pipe so 12 as to make possible the back flow of sewage, polluted water, or waste into the water supply 13 system.
14 T. Fixture Supports: 15 1. Select, provide, and install fixture supports and carriers suitable for and compatible 16 with the wall construction type, floor construction type, pipe connection type, and 17 available installation space at each supported fixture location. 18 2. For each fixture support or carrier, furnish and install hardware required to attach 19 and secure supports or carriers to wall elements, floor elements, and supported 20 fixture. 21 3. Furnish and install fixture supports specifically designed and constructed for support 22 of the fixture for which such support is specified and required. 23 4. Fixture supports constructed from pipe, conduit, structural shapes, and other field 24 materials are unacceptable.
25 U. Materials of pipe, tubing, pipe fittings, tube fittings, valves, water system specialties, 26 plumbing fixtures, and other system components that contact potable water of any 27 temperature shall comply with NSF/ANSI 61.
28 V. All plastic system components and elastomeric system components, including but not 29 limited to plastic pipe, plastic fittings, plastic valves, flange gaskets, and coupling gaskets, 30 that contact potable (drinkable) water shall comply with NSF 14 and NSF/ANSI 61.
31 W. Materials of pipe, tubing, pipe fittings, tube fittings, valves, water system specialties, 32 plumbing fixtures, and other system components that contact potable water of any 33 temperature and contain lead (Pb) shall comply with Safe Drinking Water Act and have a 34 lead limit of 0.25 percent. Certified “lead-free” (0 percent Pb) materials are acceptable. 35
09/April/2018 22 05 00 - 4 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2 2.1 PLUMBING SYSTEMS MATERIALS – PIPING SERVICES
3 A. Sanitary Drainage and Vent System: 4 1. Underground Sanitary Drainage and Vent (Gravity) System: Polyvinyl chloride 5 (PVC) socket and plain end construction. 6 2. Aboveground Sanitary Drainage and Vent (Gravity) System: Cast iron no-hub 7 construction.
8 B. Storm Drainage/Rainwater (Gravity) Piping System: 9 1. Underground Storm Drainage System: Cast iron hub and spigot construction or 10 Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) socket and plain end construction . 11 2. Aboveground Storm Drainage (Gravity) System: Cast iron no-hub construction. 12 3. Piping cast in concrete structural columns: Cast iron hub and spigot construction.
13 C. Potable Water System: 14 1. Potable Water Lines, Aboveground, Outdoors: Type K or L Copper tubing. 15 2. Potable Water Lines, Aboveground, Indoors: 16 a. Within Plumbing Chase Areas, Above Ceilings and in walls: 17 1) 3 Inches and Smaller: Type K or L copper tubing. 18 2) 4 Inches and Larger: Type 304 stainless or Galvanized steel pipe with 19 screwed joints. 20 b. In Pipe Racks and Other Locations Not Listed in Above: Type K or L copper 21 tubing. 22 3. Underground Potable Water Lines: 23 a. Potable Water Lines 3 Inches and Smaller: Type K copper tubing. 24 b. Potable Water Lines 4 Inches and Larger: 350 psi class cement-lined ductile 25 iron with exterior bituminous coating and mechanical or push-on joints. 26 Include encasement, AWWA/ANSI C105/A21.5, 8-mil low density 27 polyethylene film per installation method A or B. 28 4. Provide plastic system components and elastomeric system components, including 29 but not limited to flange gaskets and coupling gaskets, that comply with NSF/ANSI 30 61, Drinking Water System Components – Health Effects, latest adopted edition, 31 where such components contact potable (drinkable) water.
32 2.2 PIPING MATERIALS
33 A. Cast Iron Pipe and Fittings (Underground Gravity [and Vent] Service Through 15 Inches): 34 1. Pipe: Cast iron, ASTM A74, service weight, hub and spigot ends, with exterior 35 bituminous coating. 36 2. Fittings: Cast iron, ASTM A74, service weight, hub and spigot ends; Coating same as 37 pipe. 38 3. Joints: Gasketed compression type with ASTM C564 neoprene gaskets. 39
09/April/2018 22 05 00 - 5 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 B. Cast Iron Pipe and Fittings (Aboveground Gravity and Vent Service): 2 1. Pipe: Cast iron, ASTM A888, Group 022, CISPI 301, hubless, uncoated on the 3 exterior to permit painting where exposed inside building. 4 2. Fittings: Cast iron, ASTM A888, Group 022, CISPI 301, hubless. 5 3. Joints: Hubless, with neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp-and shield securing 6 assemblies, CISPI 310.
7 C. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe and Fittings (Underground Gravity and Vent Service): 8 1. Pipe: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), Schedule 40 DWV, ASTM D1785, ASTM D2665. 9 2. Fittings: PVC, Schedule 40 DWV, ASTM D2665, socket ends, drainage pattern, 10 ASTM D3311 8 inches and smaller, ASTM F1866 10 inches and larger. 11 3. Cement: ASTM D2564. 12 4. Primer for Cement: ASTM F656.
13 D. Copper Tubing and Fittings: 14 1. Service Lines 3 Inches and Smaller: Seamless copper conforming to ASTM B88: 15 a. Underground Installation: Type K (soft annealed). 16 b. Aboveground Installation: Type L (hard drawn). 17 2. Fittings: 18 a. Copper Tubing: Cast or wrought-bronze or wrought-copper, solder-joint or 19 flared type (1/2” and smaller only), fabricated at factory. 20 b. Bronze Fittings: Not less than 85 percent copper and conform to applicable 21 requirements of ASME B16.22. 22 c. Type L Hard-Drawn Tubing: Cast or wrought-bronze or of wrought copper 23 and of the solder-joint type. 24 d. Type K Annealed Tubing: Cast-bronze and of the flare-joint or solder joint 25 type. 26 3. Solder for Fittings and Copper Tubing Systems: Lead-free, 95-5 tin-antimony 27 composition, ASTM B32.
28 E. Galvanized Steel Pipe: 29 1. Provide pipe ASTM A53 Type E, standard weight for pressure applications, 30 galvanized, ends to suit fittings and joint type. Do not use cut grooving to prepare 31 ends of Schedule 10 pipe. 32 2. Provide fittings for galvanized steel pipe as galvanized malleable iron, ASTM A197, 33 screwed, ASME B16.3, or galvanized, ductile iron or steel, standard or AGS wedge- 34 shaped grooved ends, Victaulic 35 10/11/12/18/19/20/25/29/30/30-R/32/32-R/100/110 with Victaulic Style 107, 36 07, W07, 75, 77, or W77 galvanized couplings and EPDM gaskets. 37 3. Provide flanges as galvanized, class 125, flat faced, ASME B16.1, threaded or 38 grooved end adapter type, with galvanized nuts and galvanized bolts. 39 4. Provide joints 4 inches and larger as standard galvanized flanged connections or 40 galvanized grooved end fittings for use with gasketed couplings as specified. 41 42 43
09/April/2018 22 05 00 - 6 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 F. Stainless Steel Pipe and Fittings: 2 1. Pipe: ASTM A312 Grade 304, Schedule 10S for 2 inches and larger Schedule 40S for 3 1-1/2 inches and smaller, ends to suit fittings and joint type. 4 2. Fittings: 5 6 a. Schedule 40S Pipe: Screwed, 3,000-pound forged, ASTM A182 Grade F304L, 7 ASME B16.11. 8 b. Schedule 10S Pipe: Type 304L stainless steel, ASTM A403, Schedule 10S 9 Grade WP 304L, butt welding ends. 10 c. Flanges to be stainless steel, type same as connected pipe, class 150, flat faced, 11 ASME B16.1, threaded, weld neck, lap joint, with galvanized nuts and 12 galvanized bolts.
13 G. Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings (Underground Water Service): 14 1. Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA/ANSI C151/A21.51, 350 psi class, with 1/16-inch 15 cement lining, AWWA/ANSI C104/A21.04, exterior bituminous coating. 16 2. Ductile Iron Fittings: AWWA/ANSI C110/A21.10 or AWWA/ANSI C153/A21.53, 17 pressure class, lining and coating same as pipe. 18 3. Joints: Gasketed push-on type or mechanical joint conforming to AWWA/ANSI 19 C111/A21.11. Include lockable retainer glands and required rods, nuts, and bolts for 20 restrained assemblies; provide and install stainless steel or approved coating of with 21 16 mils minimum coal-tar epoxy over 3 mils coal tar epoxy primer on rods, nuts, and 22 bolts prior to burial. 23 4. Include encasement, AWWA/ANSI C105/A21.5, 8-mil low density polyethylene 24 film per installation method A or B.
25 H. Flanged Joints: 26 1. Flanged Joints: American Standard Drillings unless otherwise specified; provide and 27 install NSF-approved gaskets of 1/8-inch-thick SBR rubber (Garlock 98206 or 28 approved substitution). 29 2. Flanges: Bolted with machine bolts, ASTM A307 Grade B, ASME B18.2.1, and 30 hexagonal nuts, ASTM A563 Grade A, ASME B18.2.2 of proper size and thread. 31 Tightened bolts and nuts so as to distribute the stress evenly in the bolts, and bring 32 the pipe into uniform alignment.
33 I. Sheet Aluminum: Conform to ASTM B209, 5005 or 3003-H14 aluminum alloy as 34 appropriate, clear anodized or epoxy coated. Where aluminum sheet thickness is not 35 indicated, provide 0.0201-inch thickness.
36 J. Push Joint Seals: As manufactured by Charlotte Pipe and Foundry Company or approved 37 equal conforming to ASTM C564.
38 K. Twisted Jute Packing: Conform to Federal Specification HH-P-117, Type I, dry, when 39 caulking ductile iron water pipe; or Type II, tarred, when caulking cast iron soil pipe where 40 joints are sealed with lead.
09/April/2018 22 05 00 - 7 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 L. Galvanic Corrosion Protection: Where ferrous metals are jointed to non-ferrous metals 2 and where stainless steel is joined to non-stainless steel, provide following type of dielectric 3 insulating type fittings: 4 1. Threaded: Insulating unions. 5 2. Flanged: 6 a. Dielectric flange unions. 7 b. Insulating gaskets, bolt sleeves, and washers for nuts and heads of bolts. 8 3. Design: Suitable for operating pressure, temperature, and other characteristics of 9 piping system and specifically designed for isolation of dissimilar metals. 10 4. Provide rated dielectric unions or flanges for service exposure, pressure, and 11 temperature conditions. Provide unions with metal connections on ends to match 12 connecting piping. 13 a. Manufacturers: 14 1) Epco Sales, Inc. 15 2) Stuart Steel Protection Corp. 16 3) Watts Regulator Co. 17 4) Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
18 2.3 VALVES
19 A. Provide and install valves for systems specified under this specification with bodies rated at 20 not less than Class 125 or 125-pound (125 psig steam at not less than saturated conditions) 21 where shown or as required.
22 B. Except in stainless steel systems, provide and install solid bronze valves where sizes are 23 2 inches and smaller. 24 1. Gate Valves: Crane Figure LF438 (threaded ends) or Crane Figure LF1320 (solder 25 joint ends). 26 2. Check Valves: Swing check, Crane Figure LF37 (threaded ends) or Crane Figure 27 LF1340 (solder joint ends). 28 3. Ball Valves, Threaded Ends: Watts LFB6080. 29 4. Ball Valves, Solder Joint Ends: Watts LFB6081.
30 C. Except in stainless steel systems, provide and install iron-body, bronze trimmed, flanged 31 end valves where sizes are 3 inches and larger. 32 1. Gate Valves: 250 psig CWP, outside screw and yoke (OS&Y), epoxy coated inside 33 and out, American Series 2500. 34 2. Swing Check Valves: 125-pound, epoxy coated inside and out, resilient seat, 35 American series 2100. 36 3. Wafer or Silent Type Check Valves: Nibco W-920-W-LF, Class 125. 37 4. Butterfly Valves: Lug type cast iron body, aluminum bronze disc, 416 stainless steel 38 stem, EPDM seat, lever operator for sizes 4 inches and smaller, gear operator for 39 sizes 6 inches and larger, NSF approved, WattsBF03-121-4-5/G-M2.
40 D. For stainless steel piping systems, provide and install stainless steel valves as follows: 41 1. 2 Inches and Smaller:
09/April/2018 22 05 00 - 8 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 a. Gate Valves: Ladish 8252, Powel 1832. 2 b. Swing Check Valves: Ladish 5260. 3 c. Silent Type Check Valves: Muessco 203-HT. 4 d. Ball Valves: Neles Jamesbury 4BX-3636-MT-61, assemble dry no grease. 5 2. 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: 6 a. Gate Valves: Ladish 8275, Powel 2456. 7 b. Swing Check Valves: Ladish 5272. 8 c. Silent Type Check Valves: Muessco 72-HHH-8-H. 9 d. Butterfly Valves: Neles Jamesbury 815L-11-3636-MT-61, assemble dry no 10 grease, with lever operator in sizes smaller than 6 inches, worm gear operator 11 in sizes 6 inches and larger.
12 2.4 PIPING SYSTEMS INSULATION
13 A. Pipe Insulation: Molded fiberglass sectional pipe insulation, ASTM C547 Type I, with 14 factory applied vapor barrier jacket covering, ASTM C1136, consisting of laminated 15 aluminum foil, glass reinforcing, and white kraft paper exterior, by Johns-Manville, Owens- 16 Corning, or Knauf.
17 B. Provide finishes and sealants and utilize mastics, coatings, and adhesives by Foster, 18 Childers, Vimasco, MEI, or Insul-coustic recommended or specified by the insulation 19 manufacturer and suitable for the maximum service temperature and minimum exposure 20 temperature of the insulated system.
21 C. Vapor Sealing Mastic for Irregular Surfaces: Eco-Mastic 55-51, light gray, as manufactured 22 by MEI.
23 D. Provide and install a flexible and seamless insulated cover on exposed drain pipes, P-traps, 24 and hot water supplies under lavatories designated as handicapped, wheelchair accessible, 25 or barrier-free: McGuire ProWrap anti-microbial PVC resin cover.
26 2.5 PIPING AND TUBING SUPPORTS
27 A. Beam Clamps For 3/4-Inch Through 8-Inch Pipe: Malleable iron as manufactured by 28 Anvil (Grinnell) Figure 218 or by Cooper B-Line, Globe, Michigan Hanger, Piping 29 Technology and Products, or Tolco.
30 B. Support of Hot Water Pipe and Cold Water Pipe: 31 1. Anvil (Grinnell) No. 65. 32 2. Insulation Protection Shield: Anvil (Grinnell) No. 167. 33 3. Rod Size for Support of Hot Water Pipe and Cold Water Pipe: As shown in Table 1 34 in Part 3 of this Specification.
35 C. Drain Lines: 36 1. Clevis for Support of Drain Lines: Anvil (Grinnell) No. 260.
09/April/2018 22 05 00 - 9 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 2. Rod Size for Support of Drain Pipe: As shown in Table 2 in Part 3 of this 2 Specification.
3 D. Riser Clamps for Pipes Passing Through Floor: Anvil (Grinnell) No. 261.
4 E. Clevis: Provide a minimum 2-inch vertical height adjustment with two nuts at each end for 5 positioning and locking.
6 F. Wall Brackets Supporting Piping: Welded steel construction, galvanized with a design 7 safety factor of not less than 5. Anvil (Grinnell) Figure Nos. 193, 194, 195, and 199.
8 2.6 SLEEVES AND PENETRATIONS FOR PIPING SYSTEMS
9 A. Sleeves: 10 1. Walls: 11 a. Interior and Exterior Walls: Schedule 40 carbon steel. 12 b. Concrete: Cast iron wall sleeves with integrally cast water stop. 13 c. Interior Partitions: 22 gauge (U. S. Standard) minimum galvanized sheet steel. 14 2. Interior Floor: Schedule 40 carbon steel. 15 3. Slab-on-Grade: Cast iron wall sleeves with integrally cast water stop. 16 4. Underground (Beneath Foundations, Footings, Grade Beams): Standard weight 17 corrugated steel, bituminous coating inside and outside, with close-fitting bituminous 18 coated plate at each end.
19 B. Sleeve and Penetration Packing: 20 1. Modular Wall and Casting Seals: Link-Seal as manufactured by Thunderline 21 Corporation, Flexicraft PipeSeal, Sleeve and modular wall and casting seal to be 22 furnished together as a single integrated unit. 23 2. Penetration Packing (With or Without Sleeve) for Interior Walls and Interior 24 Elevated Floors: 25 a. UL listed, FM approved materials and sealant systems, by 3M Fire Barrier 26 Wrap/Strip FS-195+. 27 b. Flexible elastomeric material unless specified otherwise. 28 c. Include additional materials and accessories to meet requirements of 29 manufacturer and this Article. 30 d. Compatible with penetrated surface. 31 e. Hazard Ratings: 32 1) Pipes Penetrating Fire Rated Walls, Fire Rated Ceilings, and Fire Rated 33 Floor Slabs (1 hour or greater): Material having maximum flame spread 34 of 25 and maximum smoke develop rating of 50, selected to maintain fire 35 rating of penetrated surface. 36 2) Pipes Penetrating Other Interior Walls: Material having maximum smoke 37 develop rating of 50, selected to prevent smoke transmission through 38 penetration. 39 3) Pipes Penetrating Non-Rated Interior Floors: Mineral wool and fire-rated 40 caulk.
09/April/2018 22 05 00 - 10 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 2.7 PIPING SYSTEMS IDENTIFICATION
2 A. Labeling and/or color-coding to be as follows: 3 1. Label insulated and uninsulated pipes. 4 2. Complete, dry, and clean the paint on the surface of the pipe prior to attaching 5 labels. 6 3. Provide colors that are distinctive hues matching as closely as possible (without 7 custom color blending). Use the following basic colors as specified by ASME A13.1. 8 a. Green background with white lettering – water. 9 b. Orange background with black lettering – toxic and corrosive fluids. 10 c. Grey background with white lettering – drainage. 11 4. Provide plastic laminated type labels as manufactured by one of the suppliers below 12 or an approved substitution. Seton P.O. Box 458 Buffalo, NY, USA 14240 800-243-6624 (US only) FAX 800-345-7819 (US only) Brady 6555 W. Good Hope Road Milwaukee, WI 53223 888-250-3082 FAX 800-292-2289
Emedco P.O. Box 369 Buffalo, NY. 14240 800-442-3633
13 5. Locate labels in accordance with ANSI/ASME A13.1, Fig. 1(below) and sized per 14 Table 3 guidelines (below Fig 1).
09/April/2018 22 05 00 - 11 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1
2 3 6. Coordinate colors, fluid code legends, sizes and quantities required for the project 4 with the Owner’s existing supply of labels or planned coding requirements before 5 placing order.]
6 PART 3 EXECUTION
7 3.1 SANITARY DRAINAGE AND VENT SYSTEM, STORM 8 DRAINAGE/RAINWATER PIPING SYSTEM INSTALLATION
9 A. Installation: 10 1. Drainage Pipes and Vent Piping: 11 a. Slope horizontal as shown on Drawings. Slope gravity drain lines 12 continuously in the direction of flow at a minimum grade of 1/8 inch per 13 foot unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. 14 2. Fittings: 15 a. Provide changes in pipe size on soil, waste, and drain lines with reducing 16 fittings or recessed reducers. 17 b. Provide changes in direction by the appropriate use of 45-degree wyes, half 18 wyes, long or short sweep 1/4 bends, 1/6, 1/8 or 1/16 bends, or by a 19 combination of those or equivalent fittings.
09/April/2018 22 05 00 - 12 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 c. Single and double sanitary tees and 1/4 bends may be used in drainage lines 2 only where the direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. 3 d. Short sweeps not less than 3 inches in diameter may be used where the 4 change in direction of flow is either from horizontal to vertical or from 5 vertical to horizontal, and may be used for making necessary offsets between 6 the ceiling and the next floor above. 7 3. Union Connections: 8 a. Provide slip joints in trap seals or on both sides of the traps. 9 b. Provide tucker or hub drainage fittings for making union connections 10 wherever practicable. 11 c. The use of long screws and bushings is prohibited.
12 B. Joints: 13 1. Cast Iron Pipe: Firmly pack joints in hub-and-spigot, cast iron soil, waste, drain, and 14 vent pipes, or between cast iron soil, waste, and vent pipes and threaded pipe or 15 caulking ferrules, with tarred twisted jute packing and caulked with lead at least 16 1-inch deep. 17 2. Ductile Iron Push Joint Pipe: 18 a. Wipe pipe clean at joint to assure leak tight seal. 19 b. Clean and align seals. 20 c. Pipe must be adequately supported to relieve undue stress on joint. Lubricate 21 joints and make up with jointing tool. 22 3. Cast Iron No-Hub Pipe: Provide joints in no-hub pipe with hub-less fittings and 23 no-hub coupling with neoprene gaskets and stainless steel shield. 24 4. Threaded Pipe: 25 a. Provide threaded joints per American National taper screw threads 26 conforming to the requirements of NBS Handbook H28, with graphite and 27 oil compound applied to the male thread. 28 b. Make connections between threaded pipe and soil pipe similar. Provide 29 threaded pipe with a ring or half coupling screwed on to form a spigot end. 30 5. Plastic Pipe: 31 a. Cut, smooth, and clean ends of piping before applying solvent cement, joint 32 sealant, and heating appurtenance. 33 b. Assemble joints completely in accordance with applicable ASTM 34 requirements and accepted industry standards, exercising care not to damage 35 pipe surfaces. 36 c. Install and secure adapters for connection to traps, nonplastic pipe, bell and 37 spigot pipe, and threaded connections. 38 d. Do not cut threads on plastic pipe. 39 e. Align pipe to provide uniform slope and eliminate strain from piping and 40 joints. 41 f. Support piping so that pipe is not abraded or distorted and allows free 42 movement. 43 g. Do not expose pipe to sunlight during or after installation.
09/April/2018 22 05 00 - 13 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 h. Use fittings for changes in direction. If bending of piping becomes necessary, 2 bend pipe to minimum radius in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions 3 for type of material and wall thickness. 4 i. Do not handle or install pipe with solvent-cemented joints until joints have 5 cured for minimum one hour. 6 j. Install pipe so that identifying marks are clearly visible. 7 k. Apply primers as required by pipe manufacturer. 8 l. Install fusion welded joints, socket fusion joints, and butt fusion joints in 9 accordance with instructions of pipe manufacturer. Use tools, equipment, 10 and materials furnished by pipe manufacturer or specifically approved by 11 pipe manufacturer for the intended use. 12 m. Join solvent cemented non-metallic pipe in accordance with ASTM D2855. 13 n. For plastic piping systems exposed to weather and not insulated, paint 14 exterior surfaces of pipe and fittings with commercial grade white water- 15 based latex paint labeled for outdoor use such that no surfaces of pipe and 16 fittings are unpainted. Prepare surfaces to be painted and apply paint in 17 accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Final dry film thickness 18 (DFT) of paint should be not less than 4 mils.]
19 C. Cleanout Plugs and Test Tees: 20 1. Make cleanouts the same size as the pipe up to and including 6-inch pipe size. 21 2. Only 6-inch cleanout plugs are required in pipes larger than 6 inches in size. 22 3. Unless otherwise noted, provide cleanouts installed in connection with cast iron, 23 hub-and-spigot pipe consisting of a long sweep 1/4-inch bend or one or two 24 1/8-inch bends extended to an easily accessible place, or where indicated on the 25 Drawings.
26 D. Flashing for Vent Pipes and Roof Drains: 27 1. Flash and make watertight vent pipes and roof drains at the roof with sheet 28 aluminum. 29 2. Extend flashings for vent pipes up the vent pipes a minimum of 12 inches where 30 threaded standard cast iron or malleable iron recess roof couplings are used and 31 install to form counterflashings or rain guards for pipe. 32 3. Turn down flashings in connection with cast iron pipe vents into the pipes or hubs. 33 4. Extend flashing shields not less than 8 inches from the vent pipes and roof drains in 34 each direction. 35 5. Clamp or solder flashing installed in connection with roof drains watertight.
36 E. Traps: 37 1. Equip each fixture and piece of equipment requiring connections to the drainage 38 system, except fixtures with continuous waste and spill prevention piping, with a 39 trap. 40 2. Place each trap as near to the fixture as possible and do not double trap a fixture. 41 3. Provide traps installed on hub-and-spigot pipe as service weight cast iron. 42 4. Furnish traps installed on threaded pipe as recess drainage pattern. 43 5. Install a trap in the continuous waste line after fixtures have been connected.
09/April/2018 22 05 00 - 14 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 F. Do not install plastic piping and plastic pipe fittings in spaces above suspended ceilings 2 where spaces above suspended ceilings function as passive return air plenums. This applies 3 to insulated piping systems and uninsulated piping systems.
4 3.2 WATER SYSTEM INSTALLATION
5 A. Ductile Iron: 6 1. Provide ductile iron water service pipe and fittings 4 inches and larger from 7 approximately 1 foot above the lower floor or within the building wall to a point 8 extending 1 foot into undisturbed soil. 9 2. Terminate pipe inside of building wall with a ductile iron spigot and flange special 10 fitting. Terminate pipe in a vertical section with face of flange 1 foot, 0 inches above 11 finished slab. 12 3. Thrust Blocks: 13 a. If pressure rated push-on joints are used, install thrust blocks of concrete 14 compounded from Type I portland cement, natural sand, clean crushed stone 15 (size #67), and potable water at changes in direction. 16 b. Provide concrete with minimum cement ratio (bags per cubic yard) of 5.5, 17 maximum water to cement ratio (gallons per bag) of 6.75 to provide 3000 psi 18 at 28 days. 19 c. Make size of thrust blocks in accordance with NFPA 24 for 2,000 psf soil 20 bearing pressure and 200 psi water pressure minimum. 21 4. Install polyethylene encasement or film on buried ductile iron pipe.
22 B. Galvanic Corrosion Protection: Isolate copper tubing and fittings and stainless steel piping 23 and fittings from non-stainless ferrous metal piping and fittings by the use of dielectric 24 fitting assemblies or other approved methods to prevent galvanic corrosion.
25 C. Installation: 26 1. Install a shutoff valve and drain on the incoming potable water service line inside 27 the building. 28 2. Extend the piping to fixtures, outlets, and equipment from the shutoff valve. 29 3. Install the cold water system with a fall toward the shut-off valve. 30 4. Cap or plug outlets as indicated on the Drawings, and left ready for future 31 connections. 32 5. Bends formed with hydraulic operated pipe benders are acceptable.
33 D. Mains, Branches, and Runouts: 34 1. Install piping as indicated on the Drawings. 35 2. Cut pipe accurately to measurements established at the building by the Contractor 36 and work into place without springing or forcing. 37 3. Take care not to weaken the structural portions of the building. 38 4. Run piping above ground parallel with the lines of the building unless otherwise 39 shown or noted on the Drawings.
09/April/2018 22 05 00 - 15 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 5. Branch pipe from service lines may be taken off top of main, bottom of main, or 2 side of main using such crossover fittings as may be required by structural or 3 installation conditions. 4 6. Keep service pipe, valves, and fittings a sufficient distance from other work and 5 other services to permit not less than 1/2 inch between finished covering and other 6 work, and not less than 1/2 inch between finished covering on the different 7 services. 8 7. Do not bury water piping in floors unless specifically indicated on Drawings or 9 approved by the Owner. 10 8. Make changes in pipe sizes with reducing fittings.
11 E. Pipe Drains: 12 1. Make pipe drains indicated on the Drawings consist of 1/2-inch globe valves with 13 renewable discs and 3/4-inch hose nipples. 14 2. Install additional drains at low points on the hot water piping, and grade piping 15 down to the drains.
16 F. Expansion and Contraction of Piping: 17 1. Make allowance for expansion and contraction of pipe. 18 2. Anchor horizontal runs of pipe over 50 feet in length to the wall or to the 19 supporting construction about midway on the run to force expansion, evenly 20 divided toward the ends.
21 G. Provide Shock Absorbers: Shock absorbers in water system as indicated on the Drawings.
22 H. Joints: 23 1. Threaded Pipe: 24 a. Ream and remove burrs after cutting and before threading, pipe. 25 b. Make screwed joints with graphite or inert filler and oil or with an approved 26 graphite compound applied to male threads only. 27 c. Caulking of threaded joints to stop or prevent leaks will not be permitted. 28 d. Provide unions where required for disconnection of exposed piping. 29 e. Provide unions where access is provided. 30 f. Use threaded swing joints for branch connections to risers and mains. 31 2. Flared or Sweated Tubing: 32 a. Cut tubing square and remove burrs. 33 b. Clean both inside of fittings and outside of tubing with steel wool before 34 sweating. 35 c. Take care to prevent annealing of fittings and hard drawn tubing when 36 making connections. 37 d. Mitering of joints for elbows and notching of straight runs of pipe for tees 38 will not be permitted. Make joints for soldered fittings with a non-corrosive 39 paste flux and solid string or wire solder composed of 95-5 tin antimony. 40 e. Cored solder will not be permitted. 41 f. Provide compression pattern Joints for flared type fittings.
09/April/2018 22 05 00 - 16 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 g. Furnish joints in copper pipe and tubing 2-1/2 inches in diameter and larger 2 with heat applied uniformly around the entire circumference of the pipe and 3 fittings by a multiflame circular torch. 4 3. Non-Potable Water System: Make connections included as part of Work indicated 5 on Drawings to non-potable water systems provided under separate contract or 6 work package with a suitable dielectric waterway fitting or union located at the point 7 of connection. 8 4. Plastic Pipe: 9 a. Cut, smooth, and clean ends of piping before applying solvent cement, joint 10 sealant, and heating appurtenance. 11 b. Assemble joints completely in accordance with applicable ASTM 12 requirements and accepted industry standards, exercising care not to damage 13 pipe surfaces. 14 c. Install and secure adapters for connection to traps, nonplastic pipe and 15 threaded connections. 16 d. Do not cut threads on plastic pipe. 17 e. Align pipe to provide uniform slope and eliminate strain from piping and 18 joints. 19 f. Support piping so that pipe is not abraded or distorted and allows free 20 movement. 21 g. Do not expose pipe to sunlight during or after installation. 22 h. Use fittings for changes in direction. If bending of piping becomes necessary, 23 bend pipe to minimum radius in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions 24 for type of material and wall thickness. 25 i. Do not handle or install pipe with solvent-cemented joints until joints have 26 cured for minimum one hour. 27 j. Install pipe so that identifying marks are clearly visible. 28 k. Apply primers as required by pipe manufacturer. 29 l. Install fusion welded joints, socket fusion joints, and butt fusion joints in 30 accordance with instructions of pipe manufacturer. Use tools, equipment, 31 and materials furnished by pipe manufacturer or specifically approved by 32 pipe manufacturer for the intended use. 33 m. Join solvent cemented non-metallic pipe in accordance with ASTM D2855. 34 n. For plastic piping systems exposed to weather and not insulated, paint 35 exterior surfaces of pipe and fittings with commercial grade white water- 36 based latex paint labeled for outdoor use such that no surfaces of pipe and 37 fittings are unpainted. Prepare surfaces to be painted and apply paint in 38 accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Final dry film thickness 39 (DFT) of paint should be not less than 4 mils.
40 I. Potable Water System Sterilization: 41 1. Sterilize the potable water distribution system, including those portions furnished as 42 part of packaged systems and those portions that are comprised of stainless steel in 43 accordance with Section 22 08 00.01 – Potable Water System Sterilization, and in
09/April/2018 22 05 00 - 17 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 accordance with AWWA C651 using a solution containing not less than 50 parts per 2 million of available chlorine. 3 2. Provide the chlorinating material of either liquid chlorine conforming to Federal 4 Specification BB-C-120, or calcium hypochlorite or chlorinated lime conforming to 5 Federal Specification O-C-114, introduced into the system in an approved manner. 6 3. Allow the sterilizing solution to remain in the system for a period of 8 hours, during 7 which time open and close valves and faucets several times. 8 4. After sterilization, flush the solution from the system with clean water until the 9 residual chlorine content is not greater than 0.2 parts per million (PPM), unless 10 otherwise directed.
11 3.3 INSULATION INSTALLATION
12 A. Furnish and install insulation on non-buried piping for plumbing systems, drainage 13 systems, and horizontal runs of roof drain conductors as specified herein.
14 B. Apply insulation on roof drain conductors on horizontal runs from and including the roof 15 drain to 12 inches down the last vertical drop, 1-1/2 inches thick. Provide insulation on 16 the Overflow drain conductors from the drain body along the horizontal to 12” down the 17 first vertical.
18 C. Provide hot water pipe size 1/2 inch and larger in accordance with Section 23 07 19 – 19 HVAC piping Insulation.
20 D. Insulate cold water pipe sizes 1/2 inch and larger in accordance with Section 23 07 19 – 21 HVAC piping Insulation.
22 E. Apply materials in accordance with the selected manufacturer’s published instructions and 23 recommendations. Cold lines will not be sealed with adhesives that will allow condensation 24 to form at seal.
25 F. Clean piping of loose scale, dirt and foreign matter before insulation is applied. Do not 26 apply insulation until the pipe has been hydrostatically tested.
27 G. Insulate fittings, valves, and other irregular shaped items on insulated lines with the same 28 type of pipe insulation built up to the same thickness as the adjoining insulation. Then 29 apply a coat of vapor sealant mastic at a sufficient rate to produce a minimum dry film 30 thickness of 1/16 inch. Apply mastic in accordance with its manufacturer’s 31 recommendations.
32 H. As the efficiency of this insulation system is dependent upon obtaining and maintaining an 33 absolutely vapor tight barrier, take precautions to not rupture vapor barriers, including but 34 not limited to the use of screws, staples, nails, and tacks.
35 3.4 TESTS OF PLUMBING SYSTEMS
36 A. Test of Drainage and Vent Systems:
09/April/2018 22 05 00 - 18 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 1. Test piping of the plumbing system with water or air. 2 2. After the plumbing fixtures have been set and their traps filled with water, the entire 3 drainage system submit to final tests. 4 3. The Plumbing Official may require the removal of clean-outs, to ascertain if the 5 pressure has reached parts of the system.
6 B. Methods of Testing Drainage and Vent Systems: 7 1. Water Test: 8 a. Apply water test to the drainage system either in its entirety or in sections. 9 b. If applied to the entire system, tightly close openings in the piping, except the 10 highest opening and the system filled with water to point of overflow. 11 c. If the system is tested in sections, tightly plug each opening except the 12 highest openings of the section under test, and fill each section with water, 13 but do not test a section with less than a 10-foot head of water. 14 d. In testing successive sections at least the upper 10 feet of the next preceding 15 section, test so that no joint or pipe in the building (except the uppermost 16 10 feet of the system) will have been submitted to a test of less than a 17 10-foot head of water. 18 e. Keep water in the system, or in the portion under test, for at least 15 minutes 19 before inspection starts; Make the system tight at points and held for 2 hours 20 with no more than 1-inch loss of water column on caulked joint cast iron soil 21 pipe; no loss on push joint pipe. 22 2. Air Test: 23 a. Make the air test by attaching an air compressor or testing apparatus to 24 suitable opening and after closing other inlets and outlets to the system, 25 forcing air into the system until there is a uniform gage pressure of 5 pounds 26 per square inch or sufficient to balance a column of mercury 10 inches in 27 height. 28 b. Hold this pressure without introduction of additional air for a period of at 29 least 15 minutes. 30 3. Final Test: 31 a. Make the final test of the completed drainage, vent and vacuum system visual 32 and in sufficient detail to ensure that the provisions of the governing Code 33 and this Specification have been complied with, provided, however, that for 34 cause, it may be required to subject the plumbing to either a smoke or 35 peppermint test. 36 b. Where the smoke test is preferred, make it by filling traps with water and 37 then introducing into the entire system a pungent, thick smoke produced by 38 one or more smoke machines. 39 c. When the smoke appears at stack openings on the roof, close and build and 40 maintain pressure equivalent to a 1-inch water column for 15 minutes before 41 inspection starts. 42 d. Where the peppermint test is preferred, introduce 2 ounces of oil of 43 peppermint for each line of stack. 44
09/April/2018 22 05 00 - 19 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 C. Test of Water Supply System: 2 1. Upon completion of a section or of the entire water supply system, following 3 successful disinfection, test the completed section and connection to prove tight 4 under a water pressure not less than 1-1/2 times the working pressure under which 5 it is to be used. 6 2. Obtain the water used for tests from a potable source of supply.
7 D. Defective Work: Repair leaks or defective joints observed by the Plumbing Inspector or 8 [Owner’s representative to the satisfaction of the Inspector and Owner’s representative.
9 E. Test Reports: Prepare test reports in writing and filed with Owner’s representative.
10 F. Perform test in sections if required by the Inspector. The test results are to be documented 11 and approved by Inspector.
12 G. If inspection during test under this Article shows defects or shows conditions judged to be 13 defects by the Plumbing Inspector, replace such defective work or material, and repeat 14 inspection and tests at no cost to Owner.
15 3.5 MISCELLANEOUS REQUIREMENTS
16 A. Cutting and Repairing: 17 1. Make cutting of the building construction only with written permission of Owner’s 18 repressentative. 19 2. Avoid cutting structural members, piping, and conduit. Use rotary cutting tools to 20 avoid damage to structures. 21 3. Do not use impact tools, except where rotary tools are not practical. 22 4. Provide additional support at openings in masonry walls so that structural integrity 23 of unit remains unaffected. 24 5. Provide airtight seal at pipes, sleeves, ducts, and other penetrations through surface. 25 6. Repair new and existing Work damaged under execution of tasks under this 26 Specification and specifications referenced in this document. 27 7. Repair damage to building, piping, wiring or equipment as a result of cutting for 28 installation by skilled mechanics for the trade involved, at no additional expense to 29 Owner. 30 8. Repair penetrations in existing construction due to removal of pipes, ducts, and 31 conduits. 32 9. Finish adjacent surfaces to match existing adjacent surfaces.
33 B. Drainage System Protection: Temporarily plug open pipes to avoid debris and soil from 34 entering drainage system until aboveground plumbing begins.
35 C. Buried Piping Systems: 36 1. Pipe Trench Excavation: 37 a. Excavate the trench in a safe and workmanlike manner, to a depth to permit 38 installation of the pipe along the lines and grades shown on the Drawings.
09/April/2018 22 05 00 - 20 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 b. Make the width of the trench sufficient to allow thorough compacting of the 2 backfill under and around the pipe, and in no case less than 18 inches greater 3 than the outside diameter of the barrel of the pipe. 4 c. Where excavation is in rock, remove the rock to a depth below grade of the 5 pipe at least 4 inches; and before laying the pipe, refill the trench to grade 6 with earth, sand, gravel, or other suitable material, firmly compacted to 7 provide proper bedding for the pipe. 8 d. Rock excavation is classified and paid for as material that cannot be removed 9 by a backhoe with a 1 cubic yard digging bucket (with rock teeth) within the 10 limits of work. 11 e. No payment is made for rock excavation more than 6 inches below grade of 12 pipe. 13 f. Excavate bell holes accurately to size. 14 2. The amount of the trench excavated ahead of the pipe laying is subject to the 15 approval of the Inspector. 16 3. Brace and bridge to maintain traffic during construction. 17 4. Comply with OSHA, Sub-Part P, Excavation, Trenching and Shoring, as defined in 18 1926.650, General Protection Requirements; 1926.651, Specific Excavation 19 Requirements; 1926.652, General Trenching Requirements; and 1926.653, 20 Definitions applicable to this subpart. 21 5. Bracing and Sheeting of Excavations: 22 a. Wherever necessary to prevent caving, excavations, sheet and brace and 23 widen the trench accordingly. 24 b. Keep trench sheeting in place until the pipe has been tested and backfilled to 25 a depth of 2 feet over the top of the pipe. 26 c. Leave sheeting and shoring in place where directed by Owner’s 27 representative. 28 6. Pumping: Provide pumping necessary for dewatering trenches and to provide 29 proper work conditions for installation of pipe and appurtenances. 30 7. Pipe Laying: 31 a. Handle pipe carefully and place to prevent breakage or other damage. 32 b. Lay pipe to a true straight line and uniform grade between angles, and in 33 cases rest on a firm bed, with bells laid up hill. 34 c. Grades shown as pipe elevations are, unless otherwise noted, to the bottom 35 of inside of pipe (invert). 36 d. For plastic pipe provide 4 inches minimum clean sand bedding for full width 37 of trench and full length of pipe. 38 8. Trench Backfilling: 39 a. Immediately after the pipes have been laid, the trench backfill around the 40 barrel of the pipe with fine material, free from large stones, deposited in level 41 layers not more than 6 inches in depth, each layer to be thoroughly tamped 42 and compacted before the next layer is deposited. 43 b. Make this filling along the barrel of the pipe only, to at least the mid-diameter 44 of the pipe but not more than the top of the pipe, and keep the away from 45 the joints until the joints have been inspected and repairs to joints made.
09/April/2018 22 05 00 - 21 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 c. After joints are inspected and tested, if required, backfill trenches, using fine 2 material up to 18 inches above top of pipe, placed in 6-inch layers and 3 thoroughly tamped. Balance of backfill may be placed with the aid of dump 4 trucks, or other approved methods and thoroughly compacted. 5 d. Succeeding layers of backfill above the herein before specified 18 inches may 6 contain coarser materials; free from brush or other perishable or 7 objectionable matter that would prevent proper consolidation or that might 8 cause subsequent settlement; compact thoroughly by tamping or other 9 method approved by Inspector. 10 e. Provide a compaction 95 percent maximum dry density or 90 percent relative 11 dry density Modified Proctor ASTM D1557. 12 f. Do not use rock or boulders in the backfill for at least 1 foot above the top 13 of the pipe. Do not use stone larger than 6 inches in its greatest dimension in 14 the backfilling. 15 g. For plastic pipes provide 6 inches minimum compacted clean sand backfill 16 over top of pipe. 17 h. Where it is important that the surface of the backfill be made safe for 18 vehicular traffic as soon as possible, or where a permanent pavement is to be 19 placed within a short time, make the upper 12 inches of backfill of approved 20 moist material, thoroughly compacted in thin (about 4-inch) layers by 21 tamping, brought to the required surface grade. 22 i. Allow for settlement of fill in the trench. Fill and dress depressions caused by 23 settlement.
24 D. Pipe Hangers and Support Systems: 25 1. Furnish and install necessary hangers, beam clamps, hanger rods, turnbuckles, 26 bracing, rolls, plates, brackets, saddles, and other accessories necessary to support 27 the pipes from the Owner’s buildings, pipe bridges, stanchions, and structures. 28 2. Clamping to beams is the preferred method of attachment for rod type hangers. 29 3. Supports of wire, rope, wood, chain, strap perforated bar or other makeshift device 30 are not permitted, temporary or otherwise. 31 4. Provide drilling, cutting, and other operations required to attach the piping to such 32 structures as part of the Contract. Furnish channels, angles, small beams, and other 33 structural steel items to span between building beams or columns to support one or 34 more pipe hangers and used solely for that purpose and the cost thereof included in 35 the Contract price. Determine supplementary steel sizes using the loads shown in 36 Table 1 and a safety factor of 5. 37 5. Provide pipe lines with hanger assemblies. Include the pipe hanger, washers, nuts, 38 turnbuckles, rods, clip angles, beam clamps, and through bolts. 39 6. Furnish hot and cold water pipe with a single rod (installed on exterior of insulation 40 jacket) adjustable steel clevis hangers with insulation protection shield. 41 7. Provide drainage pipe with a single rod adjustable steel clevis hangers. 42 8. Space pipe hangers for horizontal steel pipe and horizontal copper tubing to permit 43 normal pitch of pipe lines with deflection and bending stress maintained at a
09/April/2018 22 05 00 - 22 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 minimum. Provide hanger spacing for steel pipe and copper tubing be no more than 2 shown in Table 1:
Table 1 Nominal Pipe Minimum Rod THD’d Rod or Tubing Size Size Safe Load (lbs) Spacing 1/2” - 1” 3/8” 610 7’ 1-1/2” 3/8” 610 9’ 2” 3/8” 610 10’ 2-1/2” ½” 1,130 10’ 3” 1/2” 1,130 12’ 4” 5/8” 1,810 12’ 6” 3/4” 2,710 14’ 8” 7/8” 3,770 14’ 10” 7/8” 3,770 18’ 12” 7/8” 3,770 18’ 14” 1” 4,960 20’
3 9. Space pipe hangers for cast iron pipe to permit nominal pitch of pipe lines with 4 deflection maintained at a minimum. Spacing for cast iron pipe be no greater than 5 10 feet, with a minimum of one hanger per pipe section on barrel close to joint. 6 10. Locate hangers as near to hubs as possible. 7 11. Additional supports are required at; changes in direction, branch piping and runouts 8 over 5 feet and concentrated loads. 9 12. Design multiple pipe hangers with a safety factor of 5 on ultimate strength.
10 E. Pipe Openings in Floors and Walls: 11 1. Wire brush clean and coat carbon steel sleeves to 3 mils dry film thickness with 12 Tnemec Series 66-1211 or equivalent prior to installation. 13 2. Fit and seal penetrations in fire-rated walls or in accordance with the manufacturer’s 14 installation instructions, or Owner’s written approved equal. 15 3. Pack annular spaces between pipe and sleeves or between pipe and inside of 16 penetration hole through exterior walls and ground floor slabs with sleeve packing 17 Sealing method must fill space completely. 18 4. Seal piping penetrations in basement walls and pit walls with modular wall and 19 casting seals. 20 5. Provide and apply additional caulking and sealing materials as recommended by 21 manufacturer for the material and construction of the penetrated surface. 22 6. Seal floor openings on grade by grouting with concrete. 23
09/April/2018 22 05 00 - 23 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 F. Cleaning and Adjusting: 2 1. At completion of the work, clean parts of the installation. 3 2. Clean equipment, pipe, valves, and fittings of grease, metal cuttings, and sludge 4 which may have accumulated by operation of the system for testing. 5 3. Repair stoppages, discolorations, or other damage to parts of the building, its finish, 6 elements, or furnishings, due to the Contractor’s failure to properly clean the piping 7 system, without cost to the Owner. 8 4. At completion of the work, adjust the hot water system, flush valves, and automatic 9 controls for proper operation.
10 G. Where trap primers are required and indicated, install and correctly adjust trap primer 11 valves and trap primer distribution units in accordance with manufacturer’s written 12 instruction and as required to satisfy local code requirements
13 3.6 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
ITEM NO. SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT AS INDICATED WITH BID 22 05 00-01 Manufacturer’s literature for materials and [X] Per construction schedule equipment in accordance with this Section. Included required is, but not necessarily be limited to: 1. Electrical data including wiring diagrams, if applicable. 2. Description of materials of construction, including ASTM specifications and finishes. 3. Product data for hangars and supports. 4. Manufacturers’ statements of compliance to NSF standards as required by specification. 5. Manufacturer’s standard catalog data. 22 05 00-02 Descriptions and narratives of installation, [X] With operations and operating, and maintenance procedures maintenance manuals required for systems, controls, and equipment.
14 END OF SECTION
09/April/2018 22 05 00 - 24 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 SECTION 22 08 00.01
2 POTABLE WATER SYSTEM STERILIZATION
3 PART 1 GENERAL
4 1.1 SUMMARY
5 A. Section includes the requirements for sterilizing the potable water piping systems within 6 buildings to 5’-0” beyond building exterior walls before they are placed into service.
7 B. Related Sections: 8 1. Section 22 05 00 – Plumbing.
9 1.2 SUBMITTALS
10 A. Refer to the Submittal Schedule at the end of Part 3 for a list of submittal requirements for 11 this Section.
12 PART 2 PRODUCTS
13 2.1 GENERAL
14 A. Sterilize pipelines intended to carry potable water before they are placed into service. 15 Conform to AWWA C651 and as specified below.
16 B. Protect the water supply for flushing or sterilizing with an approved reduced-pressure-type 17 (RPZ) backflow preventer.
18 C. Before sterilizing, flush foreign matter from the pipeline. Provide hoses, temporary pipes, 19 ditches, etc., as required to dispose of flushing water without damage to adjacent 20 properties. Flush at minimum velocities of 2.5 fps. For pipes 24 inches and larger, clean 21 pipeline in place from the inside by brushing and sweeping, then flush the line at a lower 22 velocity.
23 2.2 STERILIZATION MIXTURE
24 A. Sterilization Mixture: Chlorine-water solution having a free chlorine residual of 40 to 25 50 ppm. Prepare the sterilizing mixture by injecting one or more of the following: 26 1. Liquid chlorine gas-water mixture. 27 2. Dry chlorine gas. 28 3. Calcium hypochlorite and water mixture. Comparable commercial products include 29 HTH, Perchloron, and Pittchlor. 30 4. Sodium hypochlorite and water mixture. Comparable commercial products include 31 Chlorox and Purex.
09/April/2018 22 08 01 - 1 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO Product Quantit Water y Calcium hypochlorite (65 to 70 percent 1 pound 7.50 gallons Cl) Sodium hypochlorite (5.25 percent Cl) 1 gallon 4.25 gallons
1 PART 3 EXECUTION
2 3.1 STERILIZATION MIXTURE
3 A. Liquid Chlorine Gas-Water Mixture: Inject mixture by means of an approved solution feed 4 chlorinating device.
5 B. Dry Chlorine Gas: Feed gas through proper devices for regulating the rate of flow and 6 providing effective diffusion of the gas into the water within the pipe being treated. 7 Chlorinating devices for feeding solutions of chlorine gas or the gas itself provide a means 8 of preventing the backflow of water into the chlorine cylinder.
9 C. Calcium Hypochlorite and Water Mixture: Mix the dry powder with water to make a thick 10 paste, then dilute to approximately a 1 percent solution (10,000-ppm chlorine).
11 D. Sodium-Hypochlorite and Water Mixture: Dilute the liquid with water to obtain a 12 1 percent solution.
13 3.2 INJECTION
14 A. Point of Application: 15 1. Inject the chlorine mixture into the pipeline to be treated at the beginning of the line 16 through a suitable tap in the top of the pipe. 17 2. Control water flow from the existing system or other approved source so as to flow 18 slowly into the newly installed piping during the application of chlorine. 19 3. Adjust the rate of chlorine mixture flow in proportion to the rate of water entering 20 the pipe so that the combined mixture will contain 40 to 50 ppm of free available 21 chlorine. 22 4. Do not place concentrated quantities of commercial sterilizers in the line before it is 23 filled with water.
24 B. Retention Period: 25 1. Retain treated water in the pipeline long enough to destroy nonspore-forming 26 bacteria. 27 2. Maintain proper flushing and the specified solution strength for at least 24 hours. 28 3. Ensure at the end of the retention period, the sterilizing mixture has a strength of at 29 least 10 ppm of chlorine. 30 4. Operate valves, hydrants, and other appurtenances during sterilization to ensure that
09/April/2018 22 08 01 - 2 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 the sterilizing mixture is dispersed into parts of the line, including dead ends, new 2 services, and similar areas that otherwise may not receive the sterilizing solution.
3 C. Flushing: After chlorination, flush with water from the permanent source of supply until 4 the water through the line is equal chemically and bacteriologically to the permanent 5 source.
6 D. Disposal of Sterilizing Water: Dispose of sterilizing water in an approved manner. Do not 7 allow sterilizing water into waterways or sanitary sewers without adequately diluting or 8 treating with a neutralizing chemical that reduces the chlorine concentrations to a safe level 9 and without a permit from the AHJ.
10 E. Bacteriological Testing: 11 1. After final flushing and before the new water main is connected to the distribution 12 system, Collect two consecutive sets of acceptable samples. Include samples from 13 1,200 feet of new water main, at the end of the main, and from each branch. 14 2. Collect samples from a smooth unthreaded 1/2-inch hose bibb into sterile bottles 15 treated with sodium thiosulfate. Sample in accordance with AWWA Standard 16 Methods for Examination of Water and Wastewater. 17 3. Test samples for bacteriological quantity by the state health department. 18 4. If the initial disinfection fails to produce satisfactory bacteriological results, reflush 19 and disinfect the system and resample. Ensure a satisfactory test report is received 20 prior to making a permanent connection to the active distribution system.
21 3.3 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE 22 23
ITEM NO. SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT AS INDICATED WITH BID 22 08 00.01- Provide state health department Prior to substantial 01 bacteriological test reports showing the completion and prior to absence of coliform organisms for water connecting to city water samples. supply.
24 END OF SECTION
09/April/2018 22 08 01 - 3 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 SECTION 22 30 00
2 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
7 PART 1 GENERAL
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9 A. Section Includes: Plumbing equipment items including: 10 1. Water heaters. 11 2. Domestic water expansion tanks. 12 3. Domestic hot water circulation pumps. 13 4. Submersible pumps. 14 5. Grease Interceptors.
15 B. Related Sections: 16 1. Section 23 00 15 – Basic Equipment Installation. 17 2. Section 23 05 00 – Common Work Results for HVAC 18 3. Section 26 60 20 – OEM Electric Motors.
19 C. Comply with datasheets provided at the end of this Section.
20 1.2 SUBMITTALS
21 A. Refer to the Submittal Schedule at end of Part 3 for a list of submittal requirements for 22 this Section.
23 1.3 WARRANTY
24 A. Provide manufacturer’s extended warranty in writing with Owner named as beneficiary. 25 Provide warranty correction or, at the option of the Owner, removal and replacement of 26 products found defective during stated warranty period after the date of Substantial 27 Completion.
28 PART 2 PRODUCTS
29 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
30 A. Materials that contact potable water of any temperature shall comply with NSF/ANSI 61.
31 B. Plastic components and elastomeric components that contact potable (drinkable) water 32 shall comply with NSF 14 and NSF/ANSI 61.
33 C. Materials that contact potable water of any temperature and contain lead (Pb) shall 34 be certified “lead-free” (0 percent Pb) materials.
09/April/2018 22 30 00 - 1 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 2.2 WATER HEATERS
2 A. Gas Water Heater (Tank Type WH-1): 3 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: 4 a. AO Smith. 5 b. Lochinvar. 6 c. Heat Transfer Products. 7 d. PVI Industries. 8 2. Description: 9 a. Type: Automatic, vertical, gas-fired, direct vent burner, condensing storage 10 type. 11 b. Regulatory Compliance: UL listed, ASME, ASHRAE 90.1, NSF. 12 c. Tank: Steel, glass lined, 150-psig working pressure. 13 d. Insulation: Foam or fiberglass type with minimum R value per ASHRAE 90.1. 14 e. Thermal Trap: Factory installed on inlet and outlet. 15 f. Dip Tube: Required on inlet connection down to bottom section of tank. 16 g. Anode: Heavy-duty, tank-mounted screw-in type or non-sacrificial powered 17 anode. 18 h. Pressure/Temperature Relief Valve: ASME rated. 19 i. Connections: Inlet and outlet with factory-installed dielectric unions and brass 20 drain valve with hose thread. 21 j. Burner: 95 percent efficiency, cast iron, with primary air injection. 22 k. Vent: Power vented. 23 l. Controls: Fully automatic immersion-type thermostat, Direct spark ignition 24 m. Warranty: 3 years or as indicated on datasheet at end of Section.
25 2.3 DOMESTIC WATER EXPANSION TANK
26 A. Acceptable Manufacturer: 27 1. Amtrol, Model AST. 28 2. Conbraco 40-XT Series. 29 3. Watts, Series DET. 30 4. ITT Bell & Gossett PTA Series.
31 B. Description: 32 1. Type: Factory pressurized diaphragm type, vertical. 33 2. Shell: Welded steel. 34 3. Diaphragm: FDA-approved heavy-duty butyl with polypropylene liner. 35 4. Connection Size: 3/4". 36 5. Maximum Operating Pressure: 150 psi. 37 6. Maximum Operating Temperature: 140 deg. F. 38 7. Finish: Manufacturer’s standard air-dry enamel.
39 2.4 ELEVATOR PIT SUMP PUMP:
40 A. Submersible cast iron body pump, bottom suction design, with:
09/April/2018 22 30 00 - 2 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 1. Close-coupled oil-filled motor, 115 volts, single phase, maximum 1 horsepower, with 2 automatically resettable thermal overload protection. 3 2. Open vane impeller. 4 3. Stainless steel shaft. 5 4. Carbon and ceramic faced mechanical shaft seal. 6 5. Upper and lower ball bearings to support motor shaft and maintain alignment. 7 6. Level control. 8 7. Multiple inlet strainers. 9 8. Hard wired power connection with control panel for automatic operation with 10 manual override. 11 9. Provide oil sensing probes into pit to determine presence of hydrocarbons. Control 12 panel shall communicate with Building Management System (BMS) by means of 13 BACnet communication protocol.
14 B. Solids Handling: 5/8-inch spherical.
15 C. Discharge Connection: 2 inches NPT.
16 D. Maximum Height of Pump Body: 1 foot, 0 inches.
17 E. Compatible with or resistant to hydraulic fluid at normal operating temperature.
18 F. Stancor SE100 series as basis of design.
19 2.5 GREASE INTERCEPTOR
20 A. Acceptable Manufacturers: [J.R. Smith, Model 8970] [______].
21 B. Description: 22 1. General: Remediation tank with internal remediation media and baffle and clarifier 23 section with sample test port and separate solids interceptors. 24 2. Construction: Stainless steel. 25 3. Components with the following features: 26 a. Microprocessor-controlled metering pump shelf with stainless steel shelf 27 Remediator culture, metering pump, and low supply light/alarm. 28 b. Solids interceptor with removable cover, flow control, and removable basket 29 strainer. 30 c. Bridge trap with vent connection. 31 d. Remediation tank with removable cover and removable FOG media.
32 PART 3 EXECUTION
33 3.1 INSTALLATION
34 A. Install, arrange, and connect equipment as shown on the Drawings and in accordance with 35 the manufacturer’s recommendations.
09/April/2018 22 30 00 - 3 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 B. Backflow Preventer Installation: 2 1. Support and seismically restrain backflow preventer, inlet, and outlet piping. 3 2. Install backflow preventer in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation 4 instructions and code requirements. Maximum mounting height of backflow 5 preventers is no higher than 60 inches to facilitate maintenance access unless 6 otherwise indicated on Drawings. Minimum mounting height of backflow preventer 7 is 12 inches from the floor to the lowest part of assembly or as required to permit 8 approved installation of drain piping.
9 3.2 REDUCED PRESSURE BACKFLOW PREVENTER TESTING
10 A. Retain services of independent agency specializing in the testing of reduced pressure 11 backflow preventers.
12 3.3 STARTUP/COMMISSIONING
13 A. General: Complete the following in addition to the requirements stated in Division 01.
14 B. Piping Systems: Verify that flushing, cleaning, and testing has been completed prior to 15 startup. Do not hydrostatic test pumps with mechanical seals.
16 3.4 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE 17 18
ITEM NO. SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT AS INDICATED WITH BID 22 30 00-01 Catalog information and rough-in Prior To Delivery dimensions for plumbing equipment. Including compliance with NSF standards and lead (Pb) free certification. 22 30 00-02 Performance test report (per Prior To Substantial paragraph 3.2.A) for reduced pressure Completion backflow preventers. 22 30 00-03 Performance test report for submersible Prior To Substantial pumps. Completion 19 20 21 END OF SECTION
09/April/2018 22 30 00 - 4 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 SECTION 22 30 01
2 PLUMBING DRAINS, AND SPECIALTIES 3 7
8 PART 1 GENERAL
9 1.1 SUMMARY
10 A. Section Includes: 11 1. This Section specifies supplying and installing plumbing equipment, including drains, 12 cleanouts, trap primer valves, shock absorbers, wall hydrants, hose bibbs, and specialties, 13 for plumbing systems as indicated on Drawings. 14 2. All materials and methods specified or referenced in this Section may not be required for 15 this Project or this Package. Comply with Drawings to determine requirements.
16 B. Related Sections: 17 1. Section 22 05 00 – Plumbing. 18 2. Section 23 00 15 – Basic Equipment Installation. 19 3. Section 23 05 00 – Common Work Results for HVAC 20 4. Section 23 05 01 – Codes and Standards.
21 C. Provide and install plumbing equipment, drains, and specialties so as to result in secure, 22 watertight, non-leaking connections to water supply systems and drainage systems without 23 deforming or dimensionally altering the connected pipe or the connected item. This includes the 24 selection, provision, and installation of gaskets, sealant, and adaptor fittings as required.
25 D. Provide and install drain traps with a means to maintain a liquid seal in accordance with 26 requirements of local codes and authorities having jurisdiction.
27 E. Materials that contact potable water of any temperature shall comply with NSF/ANSI 61.
28 F. All plastic components and elastomeric components that contact potable (drinkable) water shall 29 comply with NSF 14 and NSF/ANSI 61.
30 G. Materials that contact potable water of any temperature and contain lead (Pb) shall have a lead 31 limit of 0.25 percent. Certified “lead-free” (0 percent Pb) materials are acceptable.
32 1.2 SUBMITTALS
33 A. Refer to the Submittal Schedule at the end of Part 3 of this Section for a list of submittal 34 requirements for this Section.
09/April/2018 22 30 01 - 1 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2 2.1 EQUIPMENT
3 A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 4 1. Specific manufacturers and models are specified to provide a basis for the type and 5 design of required materials and equipment. Items different from those specified may be 6 used subject to review and approval per other sections of this specification 7 2. Cleanouts and Drains for Iron Piping Systems: Smith, Zurn, Wade, or Josam. 8 3. Cleanouts and Drains for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Piping Systems: Smith, Zurn, Wade, 9 Charlotte Pipe, Harvel Plastics, or Josam. 10 4. Recirculating Pumps: ITT Bell and Gossett, Taco. 11 5. Provide cleanouts and drains connected to iron piping systems from a single common 12 manufacturer. 13 6. With the exception of hub drains and miscellaneous cleanouts, provide cleanouts and 14 drains connected to PVC piping systems from a single common manufacturer.
15 B. Floor Drains 16 1. FD-1, Floor Drain (Finished Areas): 17 a. Model: J.R. Smith 2010C-D-NB-B-U. 18 b. Materials: Cast iron body, adjustable nickel bronze strainer. 19 c. Modifications: Vandal-proof screws. 20 2. FD-2, Floor Drain (Unfinished Areas): 21 a. Model: J.R. Smith 2120C-B-U. 22 b. Materials: Cast iron body and grate. 23 c. Modifications: Sediment bucket, vandal-proof screws. 24 3. FD-3, Floor Drain (Indirect Receptor): 25 a. Model: J.R. Smith 3510C-PB-B-U with 3581 funnel. 26 b. Materials: Cast iron body and strainer. 27 c. Modifications: Round top anti-flood rim strainer, vandal-proof screws.
28 C. Clean Outs: 29 1. WCO, Wall Cleanout: 30 a. Model: J.R. Smith 4531S-Y-U. 31 b. Material: Stainless cover and screw. 32 2. FCO, Floor Cleanout (Finished Areas): 33 a. Model: J.R. Smith 4108C-U. 34 b. Material: Taper thread, bronze plug with round adjustable scoriated secured nickel 35 bronze top. 36 3. FCO, Floor Cleanout (Unfinished Areas): 37 a. Model: J.R. Smith 4228C-M-U. 38 b. Material: Taper thread, bronze plug with round adjustable scoriated secured cast 39 iron top. 40 4. CTG, Cleanout to Grade: 41 a. Model: J.R. Smith 4263. 42 b. Material: Taper thread, bronze plug, heavy-duty scoriated cast iron top. 43 5. Miscellaneous Cleanouts for Iron Drainage Piping Systems: 44 a. Exposed Metal Stack Cleanout: Smith 4511S-Y. 45 b. Wall Cleanout: Smith 4531S-Y.
09/April/2018 22 30 01 - 2 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 c. Horizontal Non-Buried Iron Pipe: Iron no-hub ferrule and threaded bronze plug. 2 6. Miscellaneous Cleanouts for PVC Drainage Piping Systems: 3 a. Ends of Horizontal Pipe: Charlotte 105-X, PVC fitting cleanout adapter with 4 threaded PVC cleanout plug. 5 b. Vertical Pipe: Charlotte 444-X, PVC cleanout tee with threaded PVC cleanout 6 plug. 7 c. Intermediate Cleanout for Exposed Horizontal Pipe: Charlotte 444-X, PVC 8 cleanout tee with threaded PVC cleanout plug. 9 d. Wall Cleanout: Charlotte 445 PVC cleanout tee with Smith 4472 threaded cleanout 10 plug and wall cover.
11 D. P-Traps: 12 1. Deep seal type designed to provide 4 inches water seal. 13 2. Material and wall thickness to match connected pipe. 14 3. Required for floor drains, hub drains, and indirect drains unless specifically indicated 15 otherwise on Drawings. 16 4. Where trap primer is required and connected drain does not have trap primer connection, 17 provide trap with primer connection.
18 E. Trap Primer: 19 1. Automatic, 1/2-inch inlet and outlet. 20 2. Precision Plumbing Products (PPP) trap primer valve, with [PPP] distribution unit for 21 supplying trap priming water flow to two to four drains, as follows: Quantity of Drains PPP Trap Primer Valve PPP Distribution Unit 1 P2-500 Not Applicable 2 P2-500 DU-2 3 P1-500 DU-3 4 P1-500 DU-4]
22 F. Battery-Operated Trap Primer: 23 1. Automatic, 1/2-inch inlet and outlet. 24 2. Precision Plumbing Products (PPP) Mini-Prime trap primer valve, with [PPP] distribution 25 unit for supplying trap priming water flow to two to four drains, as follows: 26 Quantity of Drains PPP Trap Primer Valve PPP Distribution Unit 1 MP-500-12V Not Applicable 2 MP-500-12V DU-2 3 MP-500-12V DU-3 4 MP-500-12V DU-4 27
28 G. Hot Water Recirculating Pump: 29 1. In-line permanently lubricated centrifugal. 30 2. Cast iron bronze fitted. 31 3. Maximum capacity 5 GPM at 23 feet total head.
09/April/2018 22 30 01 - 3 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 4. Provided with High Low Mixing Station
2 H. Shock Absorbers (SA) for Fixture Water Supplies: 3 1. Select and size for hot water supplies and cold water supplies to plumbing fixtures in 4 accordance with Plumbing and Drainage Institute (PDI) WH 201 and the following: 5 PDI Size Inlet Water Supply Fixture Units A 1/2-inch 1-11 B 3/4-inch 12-32 C 1-inch 33-60 D 1-1/4-inch 61-113 E 1-1/2-inch 114-154 F 2-inch 155-330 6 7 2. Sioux Chief Hydra-Rester.
8 I. Hose Bibbs (HB): 9 1. HB-1, Hose Bibb: 10 a. Model: Woodford 24PC. 11 b. Material: 3/4-inch bronze hose bibb, bent nose with wall flange, polish chrome- 12 plated finish, integral vandal-proof vacuum breaker, with removable wheel handle. 13 2. HB-2, Wall Hydrant (Freezeproof, Recessed Box): 14 a. Model: J.R. Smith 5509QT. 15 b. Material: Bronze nickel-plated quarter turn nonfreeze hydrant with hose 16 connection, integral vacuum breaker, removable T handle, and stainless steel box.
17 J. Vacuum Breaker: Watts N36.
18 K. Vent Caps: Smith 1748.
19 V. Backflow Preventer (BFP): 20 1. Type: Reduced pressure principle (RPZ), constructed and designed in accordance with 21 ASSE standard no. 1013. 22 2. Performance: In accordance with USC Foundation for Cross Connection Control 23 Research. Maximum rated flow in accordance with Section 3, table 1, of AWWA C506. 24 3. Internal Parts: Completely removable so service to first and second check valves and 25 relief valve can be accomplished without removal of unit from line. 26 4. Materials: 27 a. Main Valve Cover: Bronze with threaded ends for 2 inches and smaller, cast iron or 28 ductile iron. 29 b. Trim: Bronze. 30 c. Relief Valves: Bronze with stainless steel trim. 31 d. Air Gap Fitting: Iron. 32 5. Manufacturer: 33 a. 2 Inches and Smaller: Watts 009QT with air gap fitting, Watts 909AG-A/C/F 34 series.
09/April/2018 22 30 01 - 4 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 6. Include ball valves for assemblies 2 inches and smaller.
2 W. Double Check Valves: Specified in Section 33 14 13.
3 PART 3 EXECUTION
4 3.1 INSTALLATION
5 A. Install plumbing equipment, drains, and specialties as indicated on Drawings and in accordance 6 with local code requirements and manufacturers’ recommendations.
7 B. Connect drains and cleanouts to drainage system piping using connection fittings, gaskets, and 8 adaptors as required for installation.
9 C. Install floor cleanouts with cleanout covers flush with finished floor surfaces.
10 D. Install vent cap on each plumbing system vent termination above roof.
11 E. Air Admittance Valves (AAV): 12 1. Locate each AAV as indicated on Drawings in an accessible location. 13 2. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions in a vertical, upright position. 14 3. Install adapters as required to locate and install as indicated.
15 F. Where trap primers are required and indicated, install and correctly adjust trap primer valves 16 and trap primer distribution units in accordance with manufacturer’s written instruction and as 17 required to satisfy local code requirements.
18 G. Install hot water circulating pump in recirculating line to water heater as close as possible to 19 water heater such that pump discharges into cold water inlet to heater. Install check valve and 20 shutoff valve in recirculating line between pump discharge and connection of recirculating line 21 to heater cold water inlet pipe.
22 3.2 INSPECTION
23 A. Provide opportunity for Owner’s Representative to inspect installation of each item as 24 installation progresses and after installation.
25 B. Repair, correct, and replace as required to satisfaction of Owner’s Representative. 26
09/April/2018 22 30 01 - 5 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 3.3 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE 2 3
ITEM NO. SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT AS INDICATED WITH BID 22 30 01-01 Manufacturer’s literature for materials and [ ] Per construction schedule equipment in accordance with this Section. Required data includes, but not necessarily be limited to: 1. Unit designation, if applicable. 2. Unit dimensions and weight. 3. Electrical data including wiring diagrams, if applicable. 4. Description of materials of construction, including ASTM specifications and finishes. 5. Sizes and types of piping connections. 6. Manufacturers’ statements of compliance to NSF standards and low lead (Pb) requirements as required by specification. 7. Manufacturer’s standard catalog data. 22 30 01-03 Complete descriptions and narratives of [ ] Before date of Substantial installation, operating, and maintenance Completion procedures required for systems, and equipment.
4 END OF SECTION
09/April/2018 22 30 01 - 6 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 SECTION 22 40 00
2 PLUMBING FIXTURES
3 PART 1 GENERAL
4 1.1 SUMMARY
5 A. Section Includes: 6 1. Fixture trim. 7 2. Plumbing fixtures. 8 3. Safety equipment.
9 B. Related Sections: 10 1. Section 07 90 00 – Joint Protection. 11 2. Section 22 30 01 – Plumbing Equipment 12 3. Section 22 30 01 – Plumbing Drains, and Specialties. 13 4. Section 23 00 15 – Basic Equipment Installation
14 1.2 SUBMITTALS
15 A. Refer to the Submittal Schedule at the end of Part 3 for a list of submittal requirements for 16 this Section.
17 1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
18 A. Comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and state and local handicap laws.
19 B. Comply with the latest edition of the following: 20 1. IPC.
21 C. Materials that contact potable water of any temperature shall comply with NSF/ANSI 61.
22 D. All plastic components and elastomeric components that contact potable (drinkable) water 23 shall comply with NSF 14 and NSF/ANSI 61.
24 E. Materials that contact potable water of any temperature and contain lead (Pb) shall have a 25 lead limit of 0.25 percent. Certified “lead-free” (0 percent Pb) materials are acceptable.
26 PART 2 PRODUCTS 27
28 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
29 A. Fixture Trim:
09/April/2018 22 40 00 - 1 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 1. Supply Stops and Traps: 2 a. American Standard. 3 b. McGuire. 4 c. Brass Craft. 5 d. Fixture manufacturer. 6 2. Flush Valves: 7 a. Sloan. 8 b. American Standard. 9 c. Zurn. 10 d. Kohler. 11 e. Toto. 12 3. Water Closet Seats: 13 a. Bemis. 14 b. Church. 15 c. Olsonite. 16 d. Water closet manufacturer.
17 B. Plumbing Fixtures: 18 1. Water Closets, Urinals and Lavatories: 19 a. Acorn. 20 b. American Standard. 21 c. Kohler. 22 d. Sloan. 23 e. Crane Plumbing. 24 f. Toto. 25 2. Faucet Fittings: 26 a. Sinks: 27 1) Chicago. 28 2) T&S Brass. 29 3) Fixture manufacturer. 30 b. Lavatories: 31 1) Chicago. 32 2) Sloan. 33 3) T&S Brass. 34 4) Fixture manufacturer. 35 3. Shower Trim: 36 a. Acorn. 37 b. Powers. 38 c. Symmons. 39 d. Groehe. 40 4. Shower Stalls: 41 a. Aquatic. 42 b. Aqua Glass. 43 c. Lasco. 44 d. Fixture manufacturers.
09/April/2018 22 40 00 - 2 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 5. Stainless Steel Sinks: 2 a. Elkay. 3 b. Just. 4 6. Mop Sinks and Shower Bases: 5 a. Acorn. 6 b. Stern Williams. 7 c. Fiat. 8 d. Mustee. 9 7. Drinking Fountains/Electric Water Coolers: 10 a. Elkay. 11 b. Haws. 12 c. Western. 13 d. Halsey Taylor. 14 e. Oasis. 15 f. Westinghouse.
16 C. Emergency Eyewashes: 17 1. Haws. 18 2. Guardian. 19 3. Speakman. 20 4. Encon. 21 5. Bradley.
22 D. Drainage Products: 23 1. Smith. 24 2. Wade. 25 3. Zurn. 26 4. Kusel.
27 E. Plumbing Specialties: 28 1. Hose Bibbs: 29 a. Acorn. 30 b. Chicago. 31 c. Woodford. 32 d. Zurn. 33 2. Wall Hydrants: 34 a. Smith. 35 b. Wade. 36 c. Woodford. 37 d. Zurn. 38 3. Shock Arresters (PDI-Certified): 39 a. Smith. 40 b. Wade. 41 c. Sioux Chief. 42 d. Precision Plumbing Products. 43 4. Trap Primers:
09/April/2018 22 40 00 - 3 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 a. Precision Plumbing Products. 2 b. Smith. 3 c. Wade. 4 5. Pressure/Temperature Relief Valves: 5 a. Conbraco. 6 b. Watts. 7 c. Cash Acme. 8 6. Pressure Regulators: 9 a. Cash Acme. 10 b. Conbraco. 11 c. Watts. 12 d. Fisher. 13 7. Pressure Gauges: 14 a. Ashcroft. 15 b. Marsh. 16 c. Dwyer. 17 d. Weksler. 18 8. Pressure-Reducing Valve: 19 a. Cash-Acme. 20 b. Conbraco. 21 c. Watts. 22 d. Fisher. 23 9. Tempering Valves: 24 a. Conbraco. 25 b. Powers. 26 c. Lawler. 27 d. Haws. 28 10. Thermometers: 29 a. Ashcroft. 30 b. Marshalltown. 31 c. Weiss. 32 11. Supply/Drain Box: 33 a. Acorn. 34 b. Bradley. 35 c. Oatey.
36 2.2 GENERAL
37 A. Fixture Trim: Provide plumbing fixture trim where applicable on fixtures.
38 B. Plumbing Fixtures: Products are indicated by a fixture number as shown on the Drawings.
39 C. Drainage Products: Products are indicated by a fixture number as shown on the Drawings.
40 D. Plumbing Specialties: Products are indicated by a fixture number as shown on the 41 Drawings.
09/April/2018 22 40 00 - 4 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 2.3 MATERIALS
2 A. Fixture Trim: 3 1. Supply Stops: McGuire rigid, heavy-pattern, all-metal supplies with heavy cast brass, 4 loose key, 1/2-inch IPS by 3/8-inch OD tubing angle stops to wall with canopy 5 flanges; chrome plate finish. Provide stops with stuffing box. 6 2. Traps: McGuire chrome-plated, 17-gauge, semicast P-traps with compression ring 7 cast brass waste and vent connections and cleanout; 1-1/4-inch inlet for lavatories 8 and drinking fountains, 1-1/2-inch inlet for sinks.
9 B. Plumbing Fixtures: 10 1. WC-1, Water Closet (Wall-Hung Type, Sensor Activated Flush Valve): 11 a. Fixture: Sloan WETS-2450.1401(1.28 gpf), white vitreous china, siphon jet 12 action, top spud, elongated bowl. 13 b. Trim: Sloan G2-8111-1.28 battery powered (AA batteries) infra-red sensor, 14 automatic flushometer, 1.28 gallons for flush (the part number for the fixture 15 includes the trim). 16 c. Seat: Bemis 95CT, elongated, white open front. 17 d. Carrier: J.R. Smith 210/220 or 410, commercial type per plan. 18 2. WC-2, Water Closet (Wall-Hung Type, ADA Compliant): Same as WC-1 but 19 mounted to meet ADA requirements with flush valve handle pointed to wide side of 20 stall enclosure and meeting ADA requirements. 21 3. WC-3, Detention Grade Water Closet Lavatory Combination (Floor Mounted Type, 22 Remote Flush Activated Valve): 23 a. Fixture: Acorn 1449-LO-2-BPH-PBH-04-DMB-BPH (1.6 gpf), 304 Stainless 24 Steel, blowout jet action, Chase serviced, elongated bowl. 25 b. Trim: The part number for the fixture includes the trim. 26 4. U-1, Urinal (Wall-Hung Type, Sensor Activated Flush Valve): 27 a. Fixture: Sloan WEUS-1005.1401, white vitreous china, washdown with integral 28 flushing rim, top spud. 29 b. Trim: Sloan G2-8186-0.5 battery powered (AA batteries) infra-red sensor, 30 automatic urinal flushometer, 0.50 gallons per flush (trim included with 31 fixture). 32 c. Carrier: J.R. Smith, Figure 644, commercial floor-mounted-type. 33 5. U-2, Urinal (Wall-Hung Type, Sensor Activated Flush Valve, ADA Compliant): 34 Same as UR-1 but mounted for handicap access meeting ADA requirements. 35 6. LV-1, Lavatory (Wall-Hung Type, ADA Compliant): 36 a. Fixture: American Standard Decorum, Model 9024.000EC, 20 inches by 37 18 inches, white vitreous china, for floor-mounted concealed arm carrier, 38 single-hole punched for faucet; additional hole punch for soap dispenser on 39 the right side of faucet ledge. 40 b. Faucet: Sensor operated Sloan Optima EAF-200-LT-ISM-IC, 6-vDC adapter 41 powered, integral spout mixer and 0.5-gpm flow restrictor. 42 c. Soap Dispenser: American Specialties 0391-(n) with AC adapter operation
09/April/2018 22 40 00 - 5 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 d. Trim: 3/8-inch supply stops with loose key, 17-gauge chrome-plated cast brass 2 P-trap, McGuire ProWrap for trap, tailpiece, and hot and cold water supply 3 piping. 4 e. Strainer: McGuire 155A chrome-plated grid strainer with tailpiece. 5 f. Carrier: J.R. Smith 700 series concealed arm. 6 g. Transformer: EL-451, 120V ac/6V ac, box mounted type, 25VA for up to 4 7 lavatory faucets and soap dispensers. 8 7. LV-2, Lavatory (Under Counter Set, Rectangular): 9 a. Fixture: Kohler Kathryn K2297, 23-inch by 15-inch bowl, vitreous china, 10 unglazed rim for underdeck mounting, rear overflow with mounting kit. 11 b. Faucet: Sensor operated Sloan Optima EAF-200-LT-ISM-IC, 6-vDC adapter 12 powered, integral spout mixer and 0.5-gpm flow restrictor. Faucet mounted on 13 countertop. 14 c. Soap Dispenser: American Specialties 0391-(n) with AC adapter operation. 15 Mounted on countertop 16 d. Trim: 3/8-inch supply stops with loose key, 17-gauge chrome-plated cast brass 17 P-trap, McGuire ProWrap for trap, tailpiece, and cold and hot water supply 18 piping. 19 e. Strainer: McGuire 155A chrome-plated grid strainer with tailpiece. 20 f. Transformer: EL-451, 120V ac/6V ac, box mounted type, 25VA for up to 4 21 lavatory faucets and soap dispensers. 22 8. EWC-1, Electric Water Cooler (ADA Compliant, Wall Mounted, Dual Receptors, 23 Dual Height, with bottle filler): 24 a. Fixture: Elkay, Model LZWS-LRPBM28K 25 b. Finish: Satin finish stainless steel oval receptors, back panel, and grille. 26 c. Valves: Front pushbutton operated with automatic stream regulation. 27 d. Trim: Screwdriver stops, strainer, and P-traps with cleanouts. 28 e. Chiller: Elkay Model ECH8 air cooled, recessed with wall grille. 29 f. Mount: Wall mounting can. 30 9. S-1, Sink (Counter Mounted, Stainless Steel, Single Compartment): 31 a. Fixture: Elkay, Model SL-ADA-2019-16-GR, 20 inches by 19 inches by 5 32 1/2 inches deep, 3-1/2-inch drain opening at rear, 16 gauge, Type 304 stainless 33 steel, three-hole punch, self-rimming, undercoated. 34 b. Faucet: T&S Brass B-2855-02 with B-0199-29 1.5-gpm aerator, 4-inch wrist 35 handles. 36 c. Trim: 1-1/2-inch OD, 17-gauge chrome-plated cast tailpiece, chrome-plated 37 17-gauge cast brass P-trap with cleanout, and 1/2-inch wall supply stops with 38 loose key. 39 d. Strainer: None 40 e. Disposal: ISE (In-Sink-Erator), Model 76039H, 1/3 horsepower, 120-volt 41 service. 42 10. S-2, Sink (Counter Mounted, Stainless Steel, Single Compartment): 43 a. Fixture: Elkay, Model SL-ADA-2019-16-GR, 20 inches by 19 inches by 5 44 1/2 inches deep, 3-1/2-inch drain opening at rear, 16 gauge, Type 304 stainless 45 steel, three-hole punch, self-rimming, undercoated.
09/April/2018 22 40 00 - 6 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 b. Faucet: T&S Brass B-2855-02 with B-0199-29 1.5-gpm aerator, 4-inch wrist 2 handles. 3 c. Trim: 1-1/2-inch OD, 17-gauge chrome-plated cast tailpiece, chrome-plated 4 17-gauge cast brass P-trap with cleanout, and 1/2-inch wall supply stops with 5 loose key. 6 d. Strainer: J-35 304 SS crumb strainer with removeable stainless steel basket. 7 11. S-3, Sink (Counter Mounted, Stainless Steel, Double Compartment): 8 a. Fixture: Just, Model DL-ADA-2233-16-GR, 22 inches by 33 inches by 9 5-1/2 inches deep, 16-gauge, Type 304 stainless steel, faucet flange at rear, 10 three-hole punch, self-rimming, undercoated, ledge-type. Drain punched at rear 11 of basins. 12 b. Faucet: T&S Brass B-2855 with B-0199-29, 1.5-gpm aerator, 4-inch wrist 13 handles. 14 c. Trim: 1-1/2-inch OD, 17-gauge chrome-plated cast tailpiece, chrome-plated 15 17-gauge cast brass P-trap with cleanout, 1/2-inch wall supply stops with loose 16 key. 17 d. Strainer: J-35 304 SS crumb strainer with removeable stainless steel basket. 18 e. Disposal: ISE (In-Sink-Erator), Model 76039H, 1/3 horsepower, 120-volt 19 service. Install disposal on left side basin. 20 12. S-4, Sink (Counter Mounted, Stainless Steel, Double Compartment): 21 a. Fixture: Just, Model DL-ADA-2243-A-GR, 22 inches by 43 inches by 5 inches 22 deep, 18 gauge, Type 304 stainless steel, three-hole punch, self-rimming, 23 undercoated, ledge-type. Drain punch Center Rear. 24 b. Faucet: T&S Brass B-2855 with B-0199-29, 1.5-gpm aerator, 4-inch wrist 25 handles. 26 c. Trim: 1-1/2-inch OD, 17-gauge chrome-plated cast tailpiece, chrome-plated 27 17-gauge cast brass P-trap with cleanout, 1/2-inch wall supply stops with loose 28 key. 29 d. Strainer: J-35 304 SS crumb strainer with removeable stainless steel basket. 30 e. Disposal: ISE (In-Sink-Erator), Model 76039H, 1/3 horsepower, 120-volt 31 service. Install disposal on left side basin. 32 13. MS-1, Mop Sink (Floor Mounted): 33 a. Fixture: Acorn, Model TNC-24, terrazzo, corner set, 24 inches by 24 inches by 34 12 inches deep with drop-front stainless steel cap, back panels and stainless 35 steel grid strainer with inside caulk connection for 3-inch pipe. 36 b. Faucet: T&S Brass B-0667-POL with hose thread, vacuum breaker, and rod 37 support. Faucet mounted 36 inches above finished floor. 38 c. Accessories: Acorn KH36 hose with wall hanger and Acorn KMH stainless 39 steel mop hanger. 40 14. SH-1, Shower (Stall, ADA Compliant): 41 a. Enclosure: Aquatic Freedomline, Model 1363 BFS CL (seat on right side) or 42 CR (seat on left side) per plan, fiberglass enclosure, 36 inches long by 36 inches 43 wide by 75 inches high, with applied acrylic finish and antibacterial protection, 44 complete with fold-down seat, and grab bars.
09/April/2018 22 40 00 - 7 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 b. Hand Spray: T&S Brass B-0925-02 with 2.0-gpm flow restrictor, 60-inch 2 flexible stainless steel hose with in-line vacuum breaker, and 24-inch chrome- 3 plated glide bar. 4 c. Mixing Valve: Acorn Controls Model SV16. ADA compliant. 5 d. Trim: Inlet strainers, checks, integral stops, temperature limit stop, and two 6 wall hooks. 7 e. Drain: McGuire 1266A, 3-1/2-inch stainless steel grid drain, 2-inch outlet. 8 f. Color: Selected by Architect
9 C. Safety Equipment: 10 1. EW-1, Emergency Eyewash (Stainless Steel, Wall Mount): 11 a. Model: Guardian GBF1724-BC-T. 12 b. Eyewash: Stainless steel heads with filters and 11-inch-diameter face spray ring 13 with stainless steel receptor and dust cover. 14 c. Valve: Stay-open stainless steel ball valve. 15 d. Support: Stainless wall bracket.
16 D. Drainage Products: 17 1. FD-1, Floor Drain (Finished Areas): 18 a. Model: J.R. Smith 2010C-D-NB-B-U. 19 b. Materials: Cast iron body, adjustable nickel bronze strainer. 20 c. Modifications: Vandal-proof screws. 21 2. FD-2, Floor Drain (Unfinished Areas): 22 a. Model: J.R. Smith 2120C-B-U. 23 b. Materials: Cast iron body and grate. 24 c. Modifications: Sediment bucket, vandal-proof screws. 25 3. RD-1, Combination Roof Drain and Overflow Drain – 4”: 26 a. Model: J.R. Smith 1800Y-E-CID. 27 b. Material: Cast iron body with combined flashing clamp, gravel stop, and cast 28 iron dome. 29 c. Modifications: Extension collar, cast iron dome. 30 4. RD-2, Combination Roof Drain and Overflow Drain – 6”: 31 a. Same as RD-1 with size 6” drain outlets 32 5. RD-3, Roof Drain – 4”: 33 a. Model: J.R. Smith 1015Y-E-R-C-CID. 34 b. Material: Cast iron body with combined flashing collar and gravel stop, and 35 cast iron dome. 36 c. Modifications: Extension collar, sump receiver, underdeck clamp, and cast iron 37 dome. 38 6. RD-4, Roof Drain – 6”: 39 a. Same as RD-3 with 6” outlet 40 7. RD-5, Roof Drain – 8”: 41 a. Model: J.R. Smith 1015Y-16-R-C-CID. 42 b. Material: Cast iron body with combined flashing collar and gravel stop, and 43 cast iron dome. 44 c. Modifications: Sump receiver, underdeck clamp, and cast iron dome.
09/April/2018 22 40 00 - 8 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 8. OD-1, Overflow Drain – 4”: 2 a. Model: J.R. Smith 1070Y-E-R-C-CID-CIS. 3 b. Material: Cast iron body with combined flashing collar and gravel stop, and 4 cast iron dome. 5 c. Modifications: Extension collar, sump receiver, underdeck clamp, cast iron 6 dome, and 2-inch-high cast iron standpipe. 7 9. OD-2, Overflow Drain – 6”: 8 a. Same as OD-1 with 6” outlet 9 10. OD-3, Overflow Drain – 8”: 10 a. Same as OD-1 with 8” outlet 11 11. ON-1, Overflow Nozzle: 12 a. Model: J.R. Smith 1775-U. 13 b. Size: Per Plan 14 c. Material: 304 Stainless Steel.
15 PART 3 EXECUTION
16 3.1 FIELD PREPARATION
17 A. Install fixtures and accessories in accordance with the plumbing laws, rules, and regulations 18 of the state and of the city, whichever represent the higher standards.
19 B. Drawings do not attempt to show exact details of fixtures, and no extra payment will be 20 allowed for obstruction by work of other trades or local obstructions to the work under 21 this Contract which require offsets. Where diagrams have been made to show fixture 22 locations, the Contractor is cautioned that these diagrams not be used for obtaining 23 material quantities. Submit changes in location of fixtures, advisable in the opinion of the 24 Contractor, to CH2M HILL for review before proceeding with the work. Verify 25 measurements and dimensions at the site. Adjust equipment adjusted and left in a 26 condition satisfactory to CH2M HILL.
27 C. Where preparation of the structural components of the building is required for installation 28 of fixtures and material regarding the work, ensure such preparation is done by the 29 particular affected trade to the satisfaction of CH2M HILL and the Owner.
30 3.2 INSTALLATION
31 A. Fixture Trim: Provide plumbing fixture trim where applicable on fixtures.
32 B. Plumbing Fixtures, Mounting Heights: Fixtures standard rough-in catalogued heights 33 unless shown otherwise on the Drawings. 34 1. Furnish polished chrome plated exposed fixture connections and piping. 35 2. Caulk fixtures in contact with finish walls with waterproof, white, nonhardening 36 sealant that will not crack, shrink, or change color with age. See Section 07 90 00 – 37 Joint Protection.
09/April/2018 22 40 00 - 9 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 C. Exact fixture location and mounting arrangements is as indicated on toilet room elevations 2 and details as shown on the architectural drawings.
3 D. Unless noted otherwise and as a minimum, support fixtures as indicated in Plumbing and 4 Drainage Institute (PDI) Code Guide 302.
5 E. Safety Equipment: 6 1. System Shutoff Valves: 7 a. Provide shutoff valves with a visual indication of position (open or closed). 8 b. Furnish shutoff valves with lockable valves and locked in the open position. 9 2. Provide each safety shower, eyewash, combination safety shower/eyewash with a red 10 safety signoff tag. After completing the requirements listed below, the installing 11 contractor and the Owner will sign the red safety signoff tag. The requirements are 12 as follows: 13 a. Visually check safety shower/eyewash piping for leaks. 14 b. Verify that upon operation, stay-open valves remain open. 15 c. Showerheads to be between 82 inches and 96 inches above standing surface. 16 d. Provide showerhead spray pattern, when valve is full open, with a minimum 17 20 inches in diameter at 60 inches above standing surface. 18 e. The water arcs from the eyewash spray heads cross. Test with an eyewash 19 gauge, Haws Model 9015. 20 f. Minimum flow rate for safety showers is 20 gpm. 21 g. Minimum flow rate for eyewash units is 0.5 gpm. 22 h. [Provide tempered water at [75 degrees F] [80 degrees F] [85 degrees F] [a 23 temperature as indicated on the Drawings].]
24 F. Drainage Products: 25 1. Floor Drains: Set top flush with floor. Provide membrane clamps where required. 26 2. Cleanouts: Where shown or required for purposes intended. Set cover flush with 27 finished floor.
28 G. Plumbing Specialties: 29 1. Hose Bibbs and Wall Hydrants: Mount at 24 inches above finished floor or grade 30 unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. 31 2. Shock Arresters: Install PDI-certified and rated shock arresters, sized and located in 32 accordance with PDI standard WH-201 and as shown on the Drawings. Provide 33 shock arresters with access panels or to be otherwise accessible. 34 3. Priming Valves: 35 a. Floor drain traps primed with priming valves, 1/2-inch copper pipe to floor 36 drain. 37 b. Two traps maximum primed from one priming valve or as recommended by 38 manufacturer. Locate in mechanical spaces or janitor’s rooms and as indicated 39 on the Drawings. 40 c. Provide shutoff valve ahead of priming valves. 41 4. Thermometers and Pressure Gauges: 42 a. Arrange devices to facilitate use and observation.
09/April/2018 22 40 00 - 10 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 b. Install in an orientation that will allow clear observation from ground level. 2 c. Provide pressure gauges with block valves. 3 d. Install thermometers in thermowells.
4 H. Caulk penetrations of exterior walls with waterproof sealant per Section 07 90 00 – Joint 5 Protection.
6 I. Adjust water flows in domestic water systems for reasonable water flows at each plumbing 7 fixture, terminal device, and recirculation loop. Adjust flush valve fixtures for proper flush 8 cycle time and water quantity.
9 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
10 A. Test safety shower and eyewash units. Test water flow at both the showerhead and 11 eyewash/face ring. 12 1. The shower flow may be tested with a tube-type water guide (Haws Model 9010) and 13 a 5-gallon bucket. The bucket fill in 15 seconds or less with a required minimum 14 20-gpm flow. 15 2. The eyewash flow can be tested in a similar manner using a 1-gallon container.
16 B. Verify alarm operation both locally and system wide. Notify security prior to test if alarm is 17 connected system wide.
18 C. Perform a visual inspection for physical damage, blocked access, cleanliness, and missing 19 items.
20 D. Log, date, and initial the inspection upon passing flow tests.
21 E. Notify the Owner and CH2M HILL of shower testing 48 hours prior to the scheduled 22 test. The Owner and CH2M HILL reserve the right to witness [tempered water system 23 and] safety shower testing. 24
09/April/2018 22 40 00 - 11 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1
2 3.4 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE 3 4
ITEM NO. SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT WITH BID AS INDICATED 22 40 00-01 Catalog information and rough-in 2 weeks prior to beginning dimensions for plumbing fixtures, products, installation and specialties. Include manufacturers’ statements of compliance to NSF standards and low lead (Pb) requirements as required by specification. 22 40 00-02 Completed and signed safety shower and eye Prior to Substantial wash inspection log. Completion
5 END OF SECTION
09/April/2018 22 40 00 - 12 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 SECTION 23 00 15
2 BASIC EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
6 PART 1 GENERAL
7 1.1 SUMMARY
8 A. This Section includes recommended procedures for the receiving, unloading, storage, 9 installation, start-up, pre-operational service, and commissioning of mechanical equipment 10 with drives and accessories including but not limited to equipment listed on the attached 11 Equipment List the following: 12 1. Pumps. 13 2. Fans. 14 3. Terminal units. 15 4. Chillers. 16 5. Air handling units. 17 6. It is not the intent of this Section to limit the Contractor to specified materials and 18 methods in the execution of work required to properly install equipment and satisfy 19 equipment manufacturers’ recommendations.
20 B. Work under this Section includes but is not limited to the following: 21 1. Setting, anchoring, securing, and assembly of equipment and accessories furnished 22 under separate subcontract: 23 2. Setting, anchoring, securing, and assembly of equipment and equipment accessories. 24 3. Complete installation of motor or drive for each item installed under this section 25 and supplied with or requiring a motor or drive for operation. 26 4. Furnishing miscellaneous steel supports and fasteners and installing mechanical 27 equipment which requires attachment to structural members. 28 5. Furnishing fittings and making piping and pneumatic instrumentation connections 29 to mechanical equipment. 30 6. Furnishing fittings and making instrument control wire connections to mechanical 31 equipment. 32 7. Completing required interconnections of wiring, piping, tubing, and ductwork 33 within equipment boundaries for a complete operational installation. 34 8. Completing required interconnections of wiring, piping, tubing, and ductwork 35 between individual items furnished under a common purchase order for a complete 36 operational installation. 37 9. Completing required interconnections of wiring, piping, tubing, and ductwork 38 between individual items furnished under a common specification for a complete 39 operational installation. 40 10. Start-up and testing of equipment. 41 11. Equipment manufacturer’s field supervision of equipment installation and start-up. 42 12. Field support of Owner’s commissioning activities.
09/April/2018 23 00 15 - 1 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 1.2 QUALIFICATIONS
2 A. Equipment to be installed by persons qualified and experienced in moving, assembling, 3 setting, and aligning plant equipment.
4 B. Instrument control connections to process/mechanical equipment to be made by persons 5 qualified and experienced in instrumentation installation work.
6 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
7 A. Delivery and Handling: 8 1. Receive materials and equipment, including Owner-furnished equipment as 9 required. 10 2. Unload products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions for unloading or as 11 specified. Record receipt of products at Site. Promptly inspect for completeness and 12 evidence of damage during shipment. 13 3. Inspect for damage and for compliance with Specifications. 14 4. Remove damaged products from Site and expedite delivery of identical new 15 undamaged products, and remedy incomplete or lost products to provide that 16 specified, so as not to delay progress of the Work. 17 5. Leave protective wrappings, coatings, and covers in place. Cover openings to 18 prevent entrance of dust, moisture, and insects. Protect machined surfaces with 19 grease or other suitable coatings. 20 6. Maintain equipment bolted in crates so that crate may protect equipment when 21 moving to final location. Handle crates in accordance with precautionary markings. 22 7. After unloading equipment transport equipment to storage location or installation 23 location. 24 8. Handle and lift equipment in accordance with equipment manufacturers’ written 25 instructions. 26 9. Protect exposed painted and machined surfaces.
27 B. Storage and Protection: 28 1. Store equipment including Owner-furnished equipment, and materials in 29 accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions and in a manner to prevent 30 damage to the stored items for up to 6 months storage duration. 31 2. Store in weatherproof shelter, off ground and floor. 32 3. Access for Inspection: 33 a. Arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access for inspection of stored 34 materials and equipment. 35 b. Make periodic inspections of stored products to assure that products are 36 maintained under specified conditions, and free from damage or 37 deterioration. 38 c. Keep running account of products in storage to facilitate inspection and to 39 estimate progress payments for products delivered, but not installed in the 40 Work. 41 4. Electrical, Instrumentation, and Controls Components:
09/April/2018 23 00 15 - 2 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 a. Store electrical, instrumentation, and control products in weather-tight 2 structures maintained above 60 degrees F. 3 b. Protect electrical, instrumentation, and control products, and insulate against 4 moisture, water, and dust damage. 5 c. Connect and operate continuously space heaters furnished in electrical 6 equipment. 7 5. Store equipment with bearings in weather-tight structures maintained above 8 60 degrees F. 9 6. Store fabricated products above ground on blocking or skids, and prevent soiling or 10 staining. 11 7. Store loose granular materials in well-drained area on solid surface to prevent 12 mixing with foreign matter. 13 8. Cover products that are subject to deterioration with impervious sheet coverings; 14 provide adequate ventilation to avoid condensation. 15 9. Store finished products that are ready for installation in dry and well-ventilated 16 areas. Do not subject to extreme changes in temperature or humidity. 17 10. Tag or label as necessary to permit easy identification of stored items. 18 11. Mark spare parts, special tools, and instruction manuals with Purchase Order 19 number and equipment number and maintain in separate storage area until accepted 20 by Owner’s Representative.
21 C. Repairs/Replacement: Replace, or repair to Owner’s satisfaction, items damaged during 22 shipment or handling. Replace delivered items not in compliance with Specifications.
23 PART 2 PRODUCTS
24 2.1 MATERIALS
25 A. Equipment to be installed is shown on the Drawings and specified in Division 23.
26 B. Furnish materials required to complete installation of equipment.
27 C. Provide materials and accessories noted on manufacturer’s documentation, including 28 certified equipment drawings and in manufacturer’s installation instructions, as required 29 for installation (of the equipment represented and described by the documentation) but 30 not furnished by equipment manufacturer.
31 D. Cap Screws: Finished hexagonal, National Coarse Thread per USASI. Provide minimum 32 grip of thread 1-1/2 times diameter of cap screw. Provide diameter of cap screw 1/8 inch 33 less than diameter of equipment mounting bolt holes 3/4 inch and larger, and 1/16 inch 34 less than diameter of equipment mounting bolt holes 5/8 inch and less.
35 E. Dowel Pins: Standard steel (tapered) as follows:
36
09/April/2018 23 00 15 - 3 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO Size of Equipment Diameter of Dowel at Hold-Down Bolt Use Dowel Size Large End 1/4 inch 2 0.193 inch 3/8 inch 3 0.219 inch 1/2 inch 4 0.250 inch 5/8 inch 5 0.289 inch 3/4 inch 6 0.341 inch 7/8 inch 7 0.409 inch 1 inch 8 0.492 inch 1-1/8 inch 9 0.591 inch 1-1/4 inch 10 0.706 inch 1
2 F. Grout: 3 1. Use pre-mixed cementitious non-metallic, non-shrink, non-corrosive grout 4 providing minimum compressive strength of 8,000 psi at 28 days. 5 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Cormix, Sonneborn, Master Builders, or Five Star 6 Products.
7 G. Miscellaneous Steel: Provide structural steel members as required for equipment 8 installation in accordance with structural drawings, in accordance with AISC.
9 H. Instrument Signal Wire and Cable Connections: Section 26 05 01 – Basic Electrical 10 Requirements and Section 26 05 19 – Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and 11 Cables.
12 I. Anchor Bolts: 13 1. Provide proper quantity and sizes of anchorage and securement bolts recommended 14 or specified by equipment manufacturers and not provided by equipment 15 manufacturers, fully compatible with equipment being anchored and surface 16 material to which equipment is anchored. 17 2. Provide Hilti HIT HY-20 adhesive anchor for anchoring to masonry. 18 3. Provide Hilti HIT HY-150 adhesive anchor for anchoring to concrete. 19 4. Include bolt sleeves and specialties and equipment required for proper and 20 complete installation compatible with equipment being anchored. 21 5. Equipment vendor to submit anchorage design calculations and details stamped by 22 a licensed Texas professional engineer. Design to be submitted as a deferred 23 submittal package in accordance with the International building code and must 24 account for project design loading criteria, equipment location/elevation and 25 support material. Vendor to account for review comments and coordination with 26 both the building official and engineer of record.
09/April/2018 23 00 15 - 4 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 J. Touch-up Paint: Provide suitable type and quantity of equipment manufacturer’s 2 recommended primer and paint for field touch-up after installation.
3 K. Furnish and maintain tools required to connect equipment to piping systems and to 4 properly install, secure and adjust equipment.
5 L. Provide proper quantities and grades of lubricant, chemicals and appropriate media 6 required to lubricate, clean, and test equipment and prepare equipment for initial 7 operation.
8 M. Where specific fluids are required for testing and startup of equipment in accordance with 9 manufacturer’s instructions, furnish such fluids in quantities and volumes recommended 10 by equipment manufacturers.
11 N. Erection Equipment: 12 1. Provide and maintain equipment required to transport, erect, and install equipment. 13 2. Equip power operated equipment with pneumatic tires or rubber treads if used 14 within building. 15 3. Maintain motor operated equipment such that no oil or grease is dropped on 16 finished floors.
17 O. Rigging and Lifting Equipment: Furnish and use equipment in accordance with 18 recommendations of equipment manufacturers and the following: 19 1. Below-the Hook Lifting Devices (Other Than Slings): ASME B30.20. 20 2. Manually Operated Hoists: ASME B30.21. 21 3. Slings: ASME B30.9. 22 4. Hooks: ASME B30.10
23 P. Steel Supports and Attachments for Equipment Installation: 24 1. Provide structural steel members, fabrications, attachments, and hardware as 25 required for complete installation in accordance with AISC and equipment 26 manufacturer’s instructions. 27 2. Provide steel members, steel brackets, steel supports, steel attachments, and steel 28 hardware factory galvanized or shop coated with weather-resistant primer if not 29 located inside buildings.
30 Q. Gaskets and Packing: 31 1. Inspect gaskets and packing furnished by equipment manufacturers. 32 2. Replace gaskets and packing that are found to be defective. 33 3. Asbestos and asbestos-bearing compounds are prohibited.
34 R. Other Materials: Provide additional materials not specifically described but required for 35 installation of work of this Section. Provide materials that are new and first quality. 36 Materials are subject to the approval of Owner’s Representative.
09/April/2018 23 00 15 - 5 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 PART 3 EXECUTION
2 3.1 INSPECTION
3 A. Inspect areas and determine that preparatory work of other trades necessary for 4 installation is complete and that installation may proceed without interference. Verify that 5 installation may be accomplished in accordance with Drawings and Specifications. Notify 6 A/E of discrepancies for his resolution prior to continuing Work.
7 3.2 SEQUENCING
8 A. Coordinate installation activities with work of other trades and sequence work to avoid 9 conflicts and maintain schedules.
10 3.3 INSTALLATION OF MISCELLANEOUS STEEL
11 A. Install steel supports required for equipment installations. Obtain approval from Structural 12 Engineer before cutting or otherwise modifying existing steel structure for work not 13 indicated on Drawings.
14 3.4 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
15 A. General: 16 1. Transport, rig, and install equipment in accordance with the equipment 17 manufacturer’s printed instructions, following industry standards, and in compliance 18 with Section 23 05 01 – Mechanical Codes and Standards. 19 2. Utilize certified manufacturer’s drawings during equipment installation Owner 20 CH2M HILL are not responsible for errors in installation made by using 21 manufacturer’s drawings that are not certified as complete by the equipment 22 manufacturer. 23 3. Cooperate with and fully assist manufacturer’s representatives and Owner when 24 such parties supervise or participate in equipment installation.
25 B. Equipment Handling: 26 1. Lift and move equipment by rigging as approved by manufacturer. Use pads or 27 spreaders as necessary to prevent damage to equipment. 28 2. Rigging and installation personnel to ensure adequate safety precautions are taken to 29 prevent damage to other work or personnel during equipment movement.
30 C. Equipment Setting: 31 1. Set equipment in accordance with centerlines, reference points, bench marks, datum 32 plates, and elevations as established on Contract Documents, certified 33 manufacturers’ drawings, and certified manufacturers’ equipment data. Notify 34 Owner of conflict between manufacturers’ drawings or data and Contract 35 Documents and obtain written approval from Owner before equipment is set.
09/April/2018 23 00 15 - 6 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 2. Provide and install appropriate hold-down bolts for equipment and sleeves as 2 required for setting in concrete bases. 3 3. Set equipment supported on concrete level at grouted height and firmly shim. 4 Provide required slope where equipment is to be sloped. Orient drives, vents, 5 hoppers, and nozzles to conform with Drawings. Grout equipment after equipment 6 is set and aligned. 7 4. Bolt equipment supported by steel structure directly to structure and set level with 8 shims where necessary. Use flat steel shims or shim stock. Do not use wedges or 9 tapered shims. 10 5. Install vibration dampening mounts, when indicated, in accordance with 11 manufacturer’s instructions. 12 6. Set equipment bases or base plates on clean foundation, level, and align before 13 making piping connections. 14 7. Align driver and drive shaft assembly, after grout is set, to required tolerance of 15 manufacturer’s instructions before giving shaft couplings and anchor bolts final 16 tightening. 17 8. Make adjustments for elevation by use of thin steel shims or shim stock between 18 baseplate mounting surfaces and machine feet. Provide for expansion or 19 contraction due to temperature changes in accordance with manufacturer’s 20 instructions. 21 9. Set motors in proper alignment and spacing with driven equipment.
22 D. Piping Service Connections: 23 1. Perform dimensional check of piping connected to equipment prior to fabrication 24 and installation of piping. 25 2. Install piping connected to equipment after connected equipment has been properly 26 set and aligned. 27 3. Bolt piping connections after grouting. 28 4. Align couplings and remove shims where specified. 29 5. “Float” piping connections against equipment. 30 6. After flanges are mated, loosen bolts and verify that neither flange is bolt bound. 31 Bolts must move fully. 32 7. Align and support piping connections so as to not exceed maximum allowable 33 forces, moments, and resultants in the X, Y, and Z directions. 34 8. Ensure that loading on equipment does not impair proper functioning or structural 35 integrity of the equipment. 36 9. Relieve strain on equipment by adjusting position of connected pipe. 37 10. Check alignment of machine and driver after piping is bolted in position and realign 38 if necessary. 39 11. Conform to ASME B31.9.
40 E. Interconnections: For each piece of equipment install, support, and connect the following: 41 1. Instrument or signal wiring between components. 42 2. Control wiring between components. 43 3. Tubing between components. 44 4. Piping between components.
09/April/2018 23 00 15 - 7 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 5. Ductwork between components.
2 F. Instrument and Control Connections: Connect pneumatic instrument tubing, sensing 3 tubing, capillary tubing, and electrical control wiring to equipment for a complete 4 installation. Install and connect electrical wiring in accordance with NFPA 70.
5 G. Dowel Installation: Furnish and install dowels, when required, after alignment and piping 6 connections have been made.
7 H. Alterations: Do not alter equipment or make attachments to equipment which are not in 8 agreement with Drawings without prior consent of A/E.
9 I. Overhead Equipment Installation: Provide and install hangers and supports for overhead 10 equipment in accordance with MSS SP-58, MSS SP-69, MSS SP-89, Section 23 05 29 11 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment and equipment manufacturer’s 12 recommendations.
13 J. Floor Mounted and Concrete Surface-Mounted Equipment Installation: 14 1. Install, level, and bolt in place equipment installed on plant concrete surfaces and 15 concrete pads, as shown on Drawings.
16 K. Electrical Connections: 17 1. Connect electrical power wiring to equipment in accordance with NFPA 70 for a 18 complete installation. 19 2. When grounding equipment, tighten electrical connectors and terminals according 20 to manufacturer’s published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer’s torque 21 values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B.
22 L. Check safety valves and rupture discs for proper installation and operation. Perform 23 remedial work as required to provide fully operational, properly functioning, and correctly 24 installed safety valves and rupture discs before releasing equipment and systems containing 25 such devices to Owner.
26 3.5 FINAL CLEAN UP
27 A. Clean work area and external surfaces of equipment at completion of work to remove 28 concrete, dust and dirt, welding and cutting splatter, exterior rust, and other foreign 29 material.
30 B. Drain pumps, tanks, and other vessels (excluding refrigerant side of chillers) including 31 jackets. Leave bottom connections open to ensure that factory test liquids and field- 32 accumulated water will drain. Open and examine tanks and vessels and remove sludge and 33 debris.
09/April/2018 23 00 15 - 8 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 3.6 LUBRICATION
2 A. Furnish and install (fill or introduce as specified by equipment manufacturer) required 3 lubricants for equipment installed under this Division.
4 B. Lubricate equipment installed under this Division prior to initial operation and 5 energization in accordance with equipment manufacturer’s instructions.
6 C. Repair or replace to Owner’s satisfaction and without cost to Owner components, parts, 7 and materials that are damaged as a result of inadequate or improper lubrication at Project 8 site.
9 3.7 MISCELLANEOUS FLUIDS
10 A. Install (fill or introduce as specified by equipment manufacturer) fluids required for testing 11 and startup of equipment in quantities and volumes recommended by equipment 12 manufacturers.
13 B. Repair or replace to Owner’s satisfaction and without cost to Owner components and 14 materials that are damaged as a result of inadequate or improper application of fluids (for 15 equipment) at Project site.
16 3.8 EQUIPMENT STARTUP
17 A. Startup Service Provided by Equipment Manufacturers: 18 1. Conform to requirement of individual equipment specifications. 19 2. Provide factory-trained manufacturer’s representative for onsite equipment startup. 20 Assistance provided by Owner until equipment is accepted by Owner. 21 3. If pre-start-up preparation of equipment is not performed by equipment 22 manufacturer’s representatives, prepare equipment for start-up utilizing materials 23 and methods recommended by equipment manufacturer. 24 4. For each item installed under this Division, submit to Owner, for approval prior to 25 testing and pre-operational service, a detailed written commissioning plan. Owner’s 26 Representative approval and signoff is required before testing and pre-operational 27 testing commences. Contractor responsible to provide assistance from equipment 28 manufacturers in preparing commissioning plans. The installing contractor with 29 assistance from the equipment manufacturers’ representatives is responsible for 30 executing each approved commissioning plan. 31 5. For each equipment item, after installation and startup services are complete, 32 submit to Owner written certification of correct installation, code conformance, 33 completion of satisfactory testing in accordance with this Article, completion of 34 approved commissioning plan, and readiness for turn-over to Owner and 35 commencement of operation.
36 B. Testing:
09/April/2018 23 00 15 - 9 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 1. Test equipment installed under this Section by operating or running equipment 2 within a system or unit to determine and demonstrate that equipment and its 3 connected system are operating properly in accordance with specifications and 4 equipment manufacturer’s written guidelines and instructions. 5 2. Comply with applicable codes and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 6 3. Notify Owner of time when testing is to take place. 7 4. In cases where manufacturer’s startup is furnished, perform testing as instructed by 8 manufacturer’s representative in presence and under direct supervision of 9 manufacturer’s representative.
10 C. Pre-Operational Service: 11 1. Perform required pre-start-up procedures in accordance with equipment 12 manufacturers’ recommendations and under direction of manufacturer’s field 13 representatives. 14 2. Following installation and prior to acceptance by Owner, maintain equipment in 15 operational readiness by regularly performing the following for equipment installed 16 under this section in accordance with equipment manufacturer’s instructions or 17 under direction of Owner. 18 a. Lubricating in accordance with this Section. 19 b. Maintaining required fluids in equipment in accordance with this Section. 20 c. Activating electrical power to motor for not longer than two seconds 21 (“jogging”). 22 3. Compare pre-operational test results with factory acceptance test (FAT) results 23 provided by equipment manufacturer. Advise Owner of differences for proper 24 resolution with equipment manufacturer. 25 4. Prepare and maintain a log of pre-operational service for each equipment item 26 detailing tasks performed. Obtain signoff from the Owner of each log.
27 D. Repair damage caused by improper execution or application of tests or procedures or by 28 failure to properly and completely execute required procedures in accordance with this 29 Section. 30
09/April/2018 23 00 15 - 10 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 3.9 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE 2
ITEM NO. SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT AS INDICATED WITH BID 23 00 15-01 Anchorage design calculations and details Per construction schedule stamped by a licensed Texas professional engineer. Refer to 2.1.J.5.
3 5 END OF SECTION
09/April/2018 23 00 15 - 11 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 SECTION 23 05 00 2 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
3 4 PART 1 – GENERAL 5 6 1.1 SUMMARY 7 8 A. General requirements for acceptance, provision, and installation of piping, mechanical, 9 heating, ventilating and air conditioning system components, equipment, and related 10 accessories are described in this Division and on Drawings for piping, heating, ventilating, 11 and air conditioning. Division 23 Specifications shall be applicable to HVAC and 12 Mechanical disciplines unless specifically noted otherwise. 13 14 B. Provisions for the shipment, delivery, receiving, unloading, storage, on-site transportation, 15 installation, connection, support, alignment, lubrication, adjustment, securing, and 16 grouting, for equipment are specified under this Division. 17 18 C. On-site transportation, placement, leveling, securing, support, alignment, lubrication, 19 adjustment, connection of required piping services and grouting for process and utility 20 equipment purchased under separate purchase order are described under this Division. 21 22 D. Provision and installation of all other related mechanical and piping system components 23 specified and required under this Division for proper establishment of fully operational 24 installed process equipment. 25 26 E. Provision and installation of all other items and equipment specified and required under 27 this Division. 28 29 F. Commissioning defined as systematic process of ensuring that all building systems perform 30 interactively according to the design intent and the Owner’s operational needs. 31 32 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE 33 34 A. Codes and Standards: Work shall be governed by the latest edition of codes and standards 35 in Section 23 05 01 as supplemented by specific Section references. 36 37 B. Include start-up assistance by factory-trained Manufacturer's representative as defined in 38 other sections. 39 40 C. Guarantee in writing that Work under Division 23 will be free from defective materials and 41 for one (1) year after final acceptance as a minimum performance level. Some equipment 42 may be required to have a different time span, as listed in other Sections. Submit in 43 accordance with requirements of Owner's General Conditions. 44 45 D. Provide equipment installation personnel having minimum of three (3) years experience in 46 setting, installing, aligning, and adjusting equipment installed under this Division. 47
09/April/2018 23 05 00 - 1 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 E. Provide items whose design and configuration are approved by authorities having 2 jurisdiction and that have been reviewed by Owner's Representative. 3 4 F. Provide furnished items that are new, first grade, physically and chemically suitable for 5 intended application unless written permission is obtained from the Owner's 6 Representative to reuse certain materials, devices or equipment. 7 8 G. Provide Manufacturer's standard nameplate for each item of equipment furnished under 9 this Division. Refer to Section 23 05 53 for further identification requirements. 10 11 1.3 SUBMITTALS 12 13 A. Shop Drawings and Manufacturer's Data: Submit in accordance with requirements of 14 Owner's General Conditions. 15 1. Submit complete list of proposed manufacturers of all major items of Contractor- 16 furnished equipment within 30 days of Owner-Contractor agreement 17 2. Submit shop drawings and operating instructions as set forth in these Contract 18 Documents. 19 3. Unless otherwise specified within this Division, submit shop drawings for 20 Contractor-furnished equipment and pre-purchased equipment installed by 21 Contractor, piping system and accessories (including plumbing systems), and duct 22 system and accessories for review prior to commencement of work including, but 23 not limited to, following: 24 a. Complete Manufacturer's descriptive data including technical data. 25 b. Pipe connection sizes and types. 26 c. Materials of construction. 27 d. Dimensions and weight. 28 e. Performance data and operating curves. 29 f. Electrical data, including wiring diagrams. 30 g. Installation recommendations. 31 h. Spare parts list. 32 i. Recommended maintenance. 33 j. Drawings for fabrication and installation of piping and duct systems. 34 k. Pipe layout w/Vents and low pt drains identified. 35 4. Process shop drawing data to ensure that it conforms to the requirements of the 36 Plans and Specifications and that there are no omissions and/or duplications. 37 5. Each shop drawing submission shall designate the exact item offered; unidentified 38 items on Manufacturer's data sheets are not acceptable. Each submitted for 39 equipment such as pumps, air handlers, fans, etc. shall be accompanied by its 40 respective performance and operating curve. 41 6. In each case, the various material submissions of related items, procured from a 42 single Manufacturer or Supplier, shall be assembled in brochures or in other suitable 43 package form and shall not be submitted in a multiplicity of loose sheets. 44 7. The shop drawings shall include room by room tabulations of air distribution 45 devices, fire dampers, valves and similar items. 46
09/April/2018 23 05 00 - 2 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 2 3 A. Shipment and Delivery: 4 1. Identify equipment or shipping containers with following: 5 a. Item name 6 b. Item number, if any 7 c. Purchase order number 8 d. Manufacturer and model number 9 e. Destination 10 f. Owner's name 11 g. Contractor's name 12 2. Receive, unload, remove from crate, and inspect all equipment and items specified 13 and required under this Division for proper execution of this portion of Work. 14 3. Protect all connections, fluid passages, working parts, and linings of items furnished 15 under this Division from weather and physical damage during shipment 16 4. Upon receipt of items at Project site, examine surfaces and working parts for 17 defects and damage. 18 5. Return defective or damaged parts to Supplier for repair or replacement so that 19 schedule of this portion of Work is not impaired. 20 6. Identify all documents certifying quality and compliance with Specifications and 21 deliver to Owner's Representative. 22 23 B. Storage: 24 1. Store items in dry, clean areas, safe from damage. 25 2. Maintain security and condition of all storage areas while items are stored. 26 3. Store pipe and equipment off floor or off ground. 27 4. Store small items and loose materials in clearly labeled, neatly arranged bins. 28 5. Protect ends of pipe, valves, and fittings from weather and abuse; keep open ends 29 sealed or covered until removed for installation. 30 6. Store equipment and motors in safe, clean, dry areas, with open ends, ventilation 31 inlets, and pipe connection points covered until removed for installation. 32 7. Store nonmetallic pipe, cement, adhesives, and solvents in cool, clean areas and in 33 accordance with Manufacturers' instructions. 34 8. Store all stainless steel on wood. 35 9. Protect equipment subject to damage from falling objects with suitable protective 36 covers. 37 10. Mark with purchase order number and equipment number and deliver to storage 38 area spare parts and small items crated with equipment but not installed by 39 Contractor under this Division. 40 11. At all times take every precaution to properly protect apparatus from damage. 41 Include erecting temporary shelters to protect apparatus stored at the site, cribbing 42 of apparatus above the floor of the construction, and covering of apparatus in the 43 uncompleted building with plastic sheeting or other protective coating. Failure on 44 the part of the Contractor to comply with the above to the satisfaction of the 45 Owner's Representative will be sufficient cause for the rejection of the pieces of 46 apparatus in question.
09/April/2018 23 05 00 - 3 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 12. Responsibility for the protection of apparatus shall extend to presently installed 2 apparatus. Erect temporary sheltering structures, provide temporary bracing and 3 supports, or cover equipment as required or directed to afford proper protection. 4 5 C. Handling: 6 1. Unload, unpack, and handle items with extreme care; use slings, cradles, or other 7 appropriate appurtenances. 8 2. Utilize lifting points provided to move equipment 9 3. Prevent contact of stainless steel and copper alloys with carbon steel. 10 4. Handle items in accordance with special instructions of Manufacturer or Suppliers. 11 5. Adequately grease all machined surfaces. 12 6. Move items within building such that floors are not gouged or marred. 13 7. Repair or replace parts damaged during handling at no additional cost to Owner so 14 that schedule of this portion of work is not impaired. 15 8. If part of equipment crate serves as a skid, leave bolted to equipment until just prior 16 to transfer of equipment to its final location. 17 9. Protect painted and machined surfaces where exposed; avoid denting, marring, or 18 unduly stressing equipment parts. 19 20 1.5 SITE CONDITIONS 21 22 A. Interferences: Examine in advance location of ducts, plumbing and electrical systems and 23 other components to be installed, and properly coordinate installation of work to avoid 24 interference with same. 25 26 B. Site Visit: The accompanying drawings do not indicate exact existing mechanical and 27 electrical installations other than to identify modifications of and extensions thereto. Visit 28 the site, inspect the installations and ascertain the conditions to be met and the work to be 29 accomplished in removing and modifying existing work and in installing new work. Failure 30 to comply with this shall not constitute grounds for any additional payments in connection 31 with removing or modifying any part of the existing installations and/or installing any new 32 work under this Division. 33 34 1.6 SEQUENCING 35 36 A. Coordinate installation of equipment, equipment accessories, system accessories, and 37 piping with installation of: 38 1. Electrical cable trays and conduit 39 2. Ductwork 40 3. Horizontal and vertical support systems 41 4. Slabs and trenches 42 5. Any items dependent on piping system for support 43 44 B. Coordinate installation of equipment with placement of supports and foundations and 45 placement of associated or connected systems. 46 47 C. Progress Schedule: Contractor shall coordinate progress schedules of all other Contractors 48 and shall work in accordance with schedules for completion of Contract.
09/April/2018 23 05 00 - 4 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 2 D. Disturbance to Occupants: Since the building will continue in use throughout the 3 construction period, carry out the work under this Division in such a manner as to 4 minimize disturbance to the occupants. 5 6 E. Service Interruptions: Should the work in the designated areas affect any services to the 7 areas remaining in use, new permanent or temporary or a combination of both shall be 8 installed as required to enable those occupied areas to function properly. Additional valves 9 required shall be installed without added cost to the Owner. Perform no work in the 10 present building(s) which would interfere with its use unless special permission is granted 11 in writing by the Owner. Included are operations which would cause objectionable noise 12 or any service interruptions. 13 14 1.7 ENGINEERING DRAWINGS 15 16 A. Drawings are not intended to show complete or accurate details of buildings, equipment, 17 ductwork and piping in every respect. They indicate general layout, approximate locations, 18 relations and arrangements and are not intended to show details of Manufacturer's 19 equipment Details of equipment shall be furnished by Manufacturer and Contractor for 20 Owner's Representative approval. 21 B. Contractor: Define locations and relations in the field and as satisfactory to Owner. Take 22 all field measurements and be responsible therefor. 23 24 C. Not all details of piping systems are shown on Drawings, nor are they specified herein. 25 Piping shall be such as to legally pass all inspections by Inspection Department, State and 26 Federal Authorities and Insurance Company having jurisdiction, and any changes or 27 additions which may be necessary to obtain such inspection and approval shall be made by 28 the piping contractor as a part of this Contract without additional cost to Owner. 29 30 D. Contractor shall provide three dimensional CADD (Bin) models of all mechanical work 31 coordinated with all other trades. Submit shop drawings of mechanical piping, ductwork 32 and equipment coordinated with other trades for review with changes from Construction 33 Documents noted on Drawing. 34 35 1.8 SUBSTITUTIONS AND SPACE ALLOCATIONS 36 37 A. Comply with the General Conditions. 38 39 B. Products: Comply with requirements as indicated in the General Conditions. 40 41 C. Space Allocations: Comply with requirements as indicated in the General Conditions. 42 43 D. Substitutions: Comply with requirements as indicated in the General Conditions. 44 45 1.9 SALVAGED MATERIALS 46 47 A. Reuse no salvaged materials except as noted on the Drawings, specified herein, or directed 48 by the Owner's Representative in writing. Remove from the premises all present materials
09/April/2018 23 05 00 - 5 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 falling under this Division which are removed from the existing building(s) and/or 2 systems. 3 4 B. Comply with Owner’s salvaged material requirements for this Project.
5 6 PART 2 – PRODUCTS 7 8 2.1 MATERIALS 9 10 A. In describing an item of equipment, it may be described singularly, even though 11 there may be a multiplicity of identical items. Also, where a description is only 12 general in nature, the exact size, duty, space arrangement, horsepower requirement 13 and other data shall be determined by reference to plans, details and schedules. 14 15 B. Equipment called for on the plans and not listed herein shall be provided and 16 installed as though it were fully described herein. Similarly, equipment called for 17 herein shall be completely provided and installed, whether fully detailed or not on 18 the plans and/or schedules. 19 20 C. Provide pipe, pipe system accessories, duct accessories, and equipment attachments 21 unaffected by conditions of service and adjacent atmosphere. 22 23 D. Furnish all tools, cap screws, nuts, steel shims or shim stock, cinch anchor, anchor 24 bolts, bolt sleeves, and proper quantities and grades of lubricant required to properly 25 install, secure, lubricate and adjust equipment, including items purchased under 26 separate purchase order and installed under this Division. 27 28 E. Provide proper quantities and grades of chemicals and appropriate media required to 29 clean and test equipment. 30 31 F. Erection Equipment: 32 1. Provide and maintain equipment required to transport, erect, and install all 33 items, including those purchased under separate purchase order. 34 2. Equip power operated equipment with pneumatic tires or rubber treads if 35 used within building. 36 3. Maintain motor operated equipment such that no oil or grease is dropped on 37 finished floors. 38 G. Provide OSHA approved guards for belt drives and motor couplings. Provide 1/2 39 inch hole in guard at center of equipment drive shaft where belt drive is used. 40 41 H. Interchangeability: 42 1. Provide completely interchangeable components, assemblies, and parts 43 where such items have the same part number. 44 2. All interchangeable components shall be interchangeable without 45 modification.
09/April/2018 23 05 00 - 6 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 2 I. No asbestos or asbestos containing products are allowed. 3 1. Where dimensions, ratings, and characteristics are not known or specified, 4 determine compliance using Manufacturer's design limits. 5 6 7 PART 3 - EXECUTION 8 9 Not Used. 10 11 END OF SECTION
09/April/2018 23 05 00 - 7 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 SECTION 23 05 01 2 3 MECHANICAL CODES AND STANDARDS 4 5 PART 1 – GENERAL 6 7 1.1 SUMMARY 8 9 A. This Section identifies agencies and societies that prepare codes, standards and regulations 10 which govern work described in Division 23. 11 12 B. Where specific articles, sections, divisions or heading of applicable code or standard are 13 not given, conform to complete code or standard except where provisions in code or 14 standard conflict with Contract Documents. In such cases confer with A/E to determine 15 governing requirement. 16 17 1.2 BUILDING CODES AND GOVERNMENT REGULATIONS 18 19 A. Comply with all Latest Recognized Airport Building Codes, including International Codes: 20 1. Building/Dwelling Code: IBC 2012 21 2. Plumbing Code: IPC 2012 22 3. Mechanical Code: IMC 2012 23 4. Fire/Life Safety Code: IFC 2012, NFPA 101, NFPA 1, NFPA 13 24 5. Accessibility Code: State of Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS). 25 6. Energy Code: IECC 2009 26 7. Security and Anti-Terrorism Guideline 27 8. U.S. Customs and Border Protection Design Guideline 28 9. ASHRAE 189.1 29 10. ASHRAE Guideline 01, 1.1-2007 Commissioning Guidelines and other applicable 30 commissioning technical guidelines including Section 01 91 00 – Commissioning. 31 32 B. Comply with regulations of all authorities having jurisdiction including local codes, statutes 33 and ordinances. 34 35 C. Comply with Owner’s Insurance Underwriter Requirements. 36 37 1.3 STANDARDS 38 39 A. Specifications and standards of the following technical societies, associations and organiza- 40 tions are by reference made a part of these specifications; unless otherwise indicated, 41 comply with requirements and recommendations applicable practices, methods and 42 standards prepared by these organizations. 43 44 AGMA American Gear Manufacturer’s Association 45 AHRI Air Conditioning, Heating and Refrigeration Institute 46 AISC American Institute of Steel Construction 47 AMCA Air Movement and Control Association 48 ANSI American National Standards Institute
09/April/2018 23 05 01 - 1 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 API American Petroleum Institute 2 ASA American Standards Association 3 ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air Conditioning 4 Engineers 5 ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers 6 ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials 7 AVSS American Vacuum Society 8 AWWA American Water Works Association 9 AWS American Welding Society 10 CGA Compressed Gas Association 11 CISPI Cast iron Soil Pipe Institute 12 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute 13 EPA Environmental Protection Agency 14 FM FM Global 15 HI Hydraulic Institute 16 IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers 17 IES Institute of Environmental Sciences 18 MSS Manufacturer’s Standardization Society of the Valves and Fitting 19 Industry 20 NBS National Bureau of Standards, U.S. Department of Commerce 21 NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau 22 NEC National Electrical Code 23 NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association 24 NFPA National Fire Protection Association 25 NSC National Safety Code 26 OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration 27 PDI Plumbing and Drainage Institute 28 SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association 29 SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council 30 UL Underwriter’s Laboratories 31 32 PART 2 – PRODUCTS 33 34 Not Used. 35 36 PART 3 – EXECUTION 37 38 Not Used. 39 40 END OF SECTION
09/April/2018 23 05 01 - 2 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 SECTION 23 05 02 2 3 MECHANICAL CERTIFICATION 4 5 PART 1 – GENERAL 6 7 1.1 SUMMARY 8 9 A. This specification section pertains to all systems specified in Mechanical and HVAC 10 sections. 11 12 1.2 MANDATORY CERTIFICATIONS 13 14 A. Written test compliance shall be submitted to Owner’s authorized representative for 15 the following at a minimum: 16 1. All systems and equipment have been installed in accordance with Contract 17 Documents and manufacturing recommendation. 18 2. Pressure test of all pressure piping systems. 19 3. Safety and operating controls are functioning properly. 20 4. Equipment performance test. 21 5. Lubrication. 22 6. HVAC/ Test and Balancing and Commissioning Reports. 23 24 B. Notification: Provide Owner’s authorized representative 24 hour notice prior to any 25 testing. Owner may elect to be present or not. 26 27 C. Comply with Commissioning section. 28 29 30 PART 2 – PRODUCTS 31 32 Not Used. 33 34 35 PART 3 – EXECUTION 36 37 3.1 SUBMITTALS 38 39 A. When the work of this Division is completely installed, balanced and in permanent 40 operating condition, the Contractor shall submit written certification in six copies to 41 Owner that all systems and/or items of equipment are installed in accordance with 42 Drawings, specifications and manufacturer’s recommendations and that safety and 43 operating controls are functioning properly. 44 45 B. Tests of mechanical systems required and specified under the work of Division 23 46 shall be logged, certified and submitted to the Owner’s Representative. 47 48 END OF SECTION
09/April/2018 23 05 02 - 1 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 SECTION 23 05 10 2 3 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 4 5 6 PART 1 – GENERAL 7 8 1.1 SUMMARY 9 10 A. The following generally define materials and methods to be used for fabrication, erection, 11 and installation of piping systems and components. These provisions are in addition to the 12 requirements included in the other Division 23 Sections and Drawings and are intended to 13 supplement the Drawings. In case of conflict the Drawings shall take precedence over this 14 Section. 15 16 1.2 WORK INCLUDED 17 18 A. Provide and install all materials constituting piping systems indicated on Drawings, 19 including miscellaneous materials not specified as part of piping systems. 20 21 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 22 23 A. Provide new, full weight, full length, and scale-free pipe, fittings and valves of best 24 available quality. 25 26 B. Guarantee all materials to be as specified prior to delivery. 27 28 C. Arrange for inspection of all piping, pipe fittings and valves prior to installation and 29 replace defective materials. 30 31 1.4 REFERENCES 32 33 A. Applicable Standards: 34 35 ANSI 21.11: Rubber Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Pressure 36 Pipe and Fittings. 37 ANSI B2.1: Pipe Threads 38 ANSI B16.1: Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, class 25, 125, 250, 39 and 800. 40 ANSI B16.3: Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings. 41 ANSI B16.5: Steel Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Including Rating for 42 Class 150, 300, 400, 600, 900,1500, and 2500. 43 ANSI B16.9: Factory-Made Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings. 44 ANSI B16.10: Face-to-Face and End-to-End Dimensions of Ferrous Valves. 45 ANSI B16.11: Forged Steel Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded. 46 ANSI B16.18: Cast Copper Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. 47 ANSI B16.21: Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe Flanges. 48 ANSI B16.34: Steel Valves, Flanged and Butt-Welding End.
09/April/2018 23 05 10 - 1 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 ANSI B18.2.1: Square and Hex Bolts and Screws, Including Askew Head Bolts, 2 Hex Cap Screws, and Lag Screws. 3 ANSI B18.2.2: Square and Hex Nuts. 4 ANSI B31.1: Power Piping. 5 ANSI B31.3: Chemical Plant and Petroleum Refinery Piping. 6 ANSI B36.10: Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe. 7 ANSI B36.19: Stainless Steel Pipe. 8 ASTM A 53: Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc Coated, 9 Welded and Seamless. 10 ASTM A 105: Specification for Forging, Carbon Steel, for Piping Components. 11 ASTM A 106: Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High 12 Temperature Service. 13 ASTM A 120: Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated 14 (Galvanized) Welded and Seamless, for Ordinary Uses. 15 ASTM A 126: Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and 16 Pipe Fittings. 17 ASTM A 182: Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy-Steel Pipe Flanges, 18 Forged Fittings, and Valves and Parts for High Temperature 19 Service. 20 ASTM A 194: Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High- 21 Pressure and High-Temperature Service. 22 ASTM A 197: Specification for Cupola Malleable Iron. 23 ASTM A 216: Specification for Carbon-Steel Castings Suitable for Fusion 24 Welding for High-Temperature Service. 25 ASTM A 234: Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and 26 Alloy Steel for Moderate and Elevated Temperatures. 27 ASTM A 307: Specification for Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard 28 Fasteners. 29 ASTM A 312: Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel 30 Pipe. 31 ASTM A 351: Specification for Austenitic Steel Castings for High Temperature 32 Service. 33 ASTM A 395: Specifications for Ferritic Ductile Iron Pressure-Retaining 34 Castings for Use at Elevated Temperatures. 35 ASTM A 403: Specification for Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe Fittings 36 ASTM A 436: Specification for Austenitic Gray Iron Castings. 37 ASTM A 494: Specification for Nickel and Nickel Alloy Castings. 38 ASTM A 563: Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. 39 ASTM B 61: Specification for Steam or Valve Bronze Castings. 40 ASTM B 62: Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings. 41 ASTM B 124: Specification for Copper and Copper Alloy Forging Rod, Bar and 42 Shapes. 43 ASTM B 148: Specification for Aluminum-Bronze Sand Castings. 44 ASTM D 1330: Specification for Rubber-Sheet Gaskets. 45 ASTM D 1784: Specification for Ridged Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) 46 Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) 47 Compounds.
09/April/2018 23 05 10 - 2 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 ASTM D 1785: Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, 2 Schedules 40, 80, and 120. 3 ASTM D 2146: Specification for Propylene Plastic Molding and Extrusion 4 Materials. 5 ASTM D 2466: Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe 6 Fittings, Schedule 40. 7 ASTM D 2564: Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) 8 PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. 9 ASTM D 2855: Recommended Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints 10 with Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings. 11 ASTM F 438: Specification for Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) 12 (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40. 13 ASTM F 441: Specification for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) 14 Plastic Pipe and Fittings. 15 AWWA C500: Gate Valves - 3 inch through 48 inch - For Water and Other 16 Liquids. 17 CISPI 301: Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Sanitary System. 18 MSS SP-6: Standard Finishes for Contact Faces of Pipe Flanged and 19 Connecting End Flanges of Valves and Fittings. 20 MSS SP-61: Pressure Testing of Steel Valves. 21 MSS SP-67: Butterfly Valves. 22 MSS SP-70: Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends. 23 MSS SP-71: Cast Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends. 24 MSS SP-72: Ball Valves with Flanged or Butt-Welding Ends for General 25 Service. 26 MSS SP-78: Cast Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends. 27 MSS SP-80: Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves. 28 MSS-SP-82: Valve Pressure Testing Methods. 29 MSS-SP-84: Steel Valves - Socket Welding and Threaded Ends. 30 MSS-SP-85: Cast Iron Globe and Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends. 31 MSS-SP-88: Diaphragm Type Valves. 32 33 1.5 SUBMITTALS 34 35 A. Submit in accordance with requirements of General Conditions. 36 37 B. Submit: 38 1. Manufacturer's written certification of compliance with requirements of regulatory 39 agencies. 40 2. Manufacturer's written certification of piping material design pressure rating. 41 3. Pipe and fitting dimensional data. 42 4. Complete listing with manufacturer's name, of all pipe, fittings, and accessories to 43 be used. 44 5. Sources of materials 45 6. Submit list of valves proposed for project to Architect/Engineer for approval prior 46 to purchase. 47 7. Submit catalog cuts and descriptive information for all valves showing dimensions, 48 end connection type and size, materials of construction, chemical and physical
09/April/2018 23 05 10 - 3 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 properties of materials, operational data, rated design pressure, and manufacturer's 2 installation recommendations. 3 4 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 5 6 A. Ship, receive, and handle pipe and fittings so as not to damage joining surfaces, coating, 7 lining, and as required to prevent cracking or breakage. 8 9 B. Repair or replace all coatings, linings, or wrapping damaged during delivery, transportation, 10 and storage. 11 12 C. Utilize appropriate tools, equipment, and procedures to handle and transport pipe. 13 14 D. Conform to Section 23 05 00. 15 16 17 PART 2 – PRODUCTS 18 19 2.1 MATERIALS 20 21 A. Material and Dimensional Requirements: 22 1. Pipe Threads: ANSI B2.1. 23 2. Steel Pipe: ANSI B36.10, ASTM A 53, ASTM A 120, ASTM A 106 (high 24 temperature or high pressure). 25 3. Stainless Steel Pipe: ANSI B36.19, ASTM A 312. 26 4. Stainless Steel Pipe Fittings: ASTM A 403. 27 5. Cast Iron Flanges: ANSI B16.1. 28 6. Steel Flanges: ANSI B16.5, ASTM A105, ASTM A182 (high temperature). 29 7. Malleable Iron Fittings: ANSI B16.3, ASTM A197. 30 8. Forged Steel Threaded and Socket-Welding Fittings: ANSI B16.11, ASTM A 105, 31 ASTM A 182 (high temperature). 32 9. Steel Buttwelding Fittings: ANSI B16.9, ASTM A 234. 33 10. Bolts and Screws: ANSI B18.2.1, ASTM A 307, ASTM A 193. 34 11. Nuts: ANSI B18.2.2, ASTM A 563, ASTM A 194. 35 12. Nonmetal Gaskets: ASTM D 1330 (rubber), ANSI B16.21 36 13. PVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 1785, ASTM D 1784. 37 14. PVC Plastic Pipe Fittings: ASTM D2466, ASTM D 1784. 38 15. CPVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM F 441, ASTM D 1784. 39 16. CPVC Plastic Pipe Fittings: ASTM F 438. 40 41 B. Ferrous Nipples: 42 1. 4 Inches and Longer: Standard weight carbon steel, ASTM A53. 43 2. Shorter than 4 Inches: Schedule 80 carbon steel or as specified for system. 44 C. Joint Compound, Ferrous Pipe: 1/2 inch x 3 mils Teflon tape, or John Crane plastic lead 45 seal, unless specified otherwise for system. 46 47 D. Sleeves: 48 1. Walls:
09/April/2018 23 05 10 - 4 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 a. Interior: Schedule 40 galvanized steel. 2 b. Concrete: Cast iron wall sleeves with integrally cast water stop. 3 c. Interior Partitions: 22 gauge (U.S. Standard) minimum galvanized sheet steel. 4 2. Floor: See Structural Drawings. 5 3. Slab on grade: Cast iron wall sleeves with integrally cast water stop. 6 4. Underground (Beneath Foundations, Footings, Grade Beams): Standard weight 7 corrugated steel bituminous coating inside and outside, with close fitting bituminous 8 coated plate at each end. 9 10 E. Modular Wall and Casting Seals: Link-Seal as manufactured by Thunderline Corporation. 11 12 F. Sleeve Packing: 13 1. Waterproof Wall Below Grade: Oakum and waterproof sealer. 14 2. Exterior Walls, Slab on Grade: Oakum and waterproof sealer or mastic. 15 3. Interior Walls, Elevated Floor Slabs: Dow Corning 3-6548 silicone RTV seal, or 16 approved equal to accommodate rating of wall. 17 18 G. Escutcheon Plates: 19 1. Finished Spaces and Toilet Rooms: Chrome plated, split type. 20 2. Projecting Floor Sleeves: Box type. 21 3. Unfinished Areas: Nickel-plated steel. 22 4. Cleanroom/Lab: Stainless steel. 23 24 H. Steel Welding Fittings: 25 1. Flanges: Weld-neck type; use slip-on flanges only for modification to existing 26 piping. 27 2. Elbows: Long radius except where short radius is indicated or required due to 28 limited space. Bends may be used in place of welding elbows only if bends comply 29 with ANSI B31.3. 30 3. Shop Fabricated Bends: ANSI B31.1. 31 32 I. Piping Branch Connections: 33 1. Threaded or Screwed Pipe: Straight size or reducing tee. 34 2. Socket Welded Piping: Straight size or reducing tee. 35 3. Buttwelded Piping: 36 a. Straight size welding tee or reducing welding tee for changes not greater than 37 one or two standard pipe sizes. 38 b. Standard weight "Weldolet" for changes more than two pipe sizes. 39 4. Socket Welding Branch Line: "Sockolet" or socket welded coupling, pressure rating 40 in accordance with piping specification. 41 5. Threaded Branch: "Thredolet" or threaded coupling, pressure rating in accordance 42 with piping specification. 43 44 J. Flanges: Drilled and dimensioned to ANSI standards for material and various pressure 45 classes. 46
09/April/2018 23 05 10 - 5 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 K. Provide schedule 40 carbon steel pipe, ASTM A 53, with 150 psig malleable iron threaded 2 fittings, for services and piping not designated or specified in this Division. 3 4 L. Solder Flux: AWS approved. 5 6 M. Thread Sealants for Plastic Pipe: 7 1. Plasto-Joint Stick by Lake Chemical Company. 8 2. Hypalon caulk by Weschester Chemical Company. N. Solvent Cements: 9 10 N. Solvent Cements: 11 1. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe: ASTM D2564. 12 2. Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe: ASTM F493. 13 14 O. Supports: Section 23 05 29. 15 16 P. Where ferrous metals are joined to non-ferrous metals, provide following type of 17 insulating type fittings: 18 1. Threaded: Insulating unions. 19 2. Flanged: 20 a. Dielectric flange unions. 21 b. Insulating gaskets, bolt sleeves, and washers. 22 3. Design: Suitable for operating pressure, temperature, and other characteristics of 23 piping system and specifically designed for isolation of dissimilar metals. 24 25 Q. Overflows and Vents: Same material as adjoining pipe unless otherwise specified. 26 27 R. Drip Legs and Dirt Traps: Full line size. 28 29 S. Provide proper quantities and type of cement, adhesives, tools, and heat sources for 30 attachment and installation of non-metallic pipe and accessories. 31 32 T. Provide all inserts required for proper execution of this portion of work. 33 34 U. Braided copper jumpers shall be furnished around connections between metallic pipe and 35 non conductive connections (e.g., vibration isolators, etc.) to provide for continuous 36 electrical grounding. Attach jumpers to piping in such a manner as not to bind flexible 37 connections. 38 39 2.2 SPECIAL MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS 40 41 A. General Construction: 42 1. Conform to MSS standards including following: 43 a. Valve Facings: MSS SP-6. 44 b. Testing: MSS SP-61, SP-82. 45 c. Butterfly Valves: MSS SP-67. 46 d. Gate Valves: MSS SP-70, SP-80. 47 e. Check Valves: MSS SP-71, SP-80. 48 f. Flanged or Butt-Welding Ball Valves: MSS SP-72.
09/April/2018 23 05 10 - 6 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 g. Cast Iron Plug Valves: MSS SP-80, SP-85. 2 h. Diaphragm Valves: MSSSP-88. 3 i. Threaded or Socket Welding Steel Valves (General): MSS SP-84. 4 2. Provided valves having full line size and connections. 5 3. Provide valves fully compatible in materials and operation with fluid conveyed in 6 piping. 7 4. Provide flanged and ferrous valves having dimensions conforming to ANSI B16.10. 8 9 B. Butterfly Valves: Furnish with gear operator if 6 inches and larger and, if located 10 aboveground, clearly visible position indicator with stops for open and closed positions. 11 All butterfly valves shall be threaded lug type unless specifically indicated otherwise. 12 13 C. Wafer Valves: Furnish with threaded bolt holes. 14 15 D. Angle Valves: Equivalent to specified globe valve. 16 17 E. Provide extension operators, chain operated handwheels, and other operating accessories 18 for valves where required. 19 20 F. Safety and Relief Valves: ASME approved. 21 22 G. The following abbreviations apply to Valve Types: 23 AL: Aluminum 24 BR: Bronze 25 BWE: Butt Welding Ends 26 CI: Cast Iron 27 CPVC: Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride 28 CS: Cast Steel 29 CWP: Cold Working Pressure 30 DI: Ductile Iron 31 FFF: Flat Face Flange Ends 32 FS: Forged Steel 33 MJE: Mechanical Joint Ends 34 OS&Y: Outside Screw & Yoke 35 POJE: Push-On Joint Ends 36 PVC: Polyvinyl Chloride 37 PVDF: Polyvinyl Difluorodine 38 RFF: Raised Face Flange Ends 39 RJE: Ring Joint Ends 40 SBE: Silver Braze Ends 41 SS: Stainless Steel 42 SWJE: Solvent Weld Joint Ends 43 TE: Threaded Ends 44 TFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene 45 SJE: Solder Joint Ends 46 SWE: Socket Weld Ends
09/April/2018 23 05 10 - 7 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 VCE: Victaulic Coupling Ends 2 WOG: Water, Oil, Gas 3 WSP: Working Steam Pressure 4 5 6 PART 3 – EXECUTION 7 8 3.1 INSPECTION 9 10 A. Examine all surfaces of pipe, piping specialties, valves, accessories, and equipment to be 11 joined; clean on all metal obtrusions, discontinuities and debris. Remove and replace 12 promptly all materials disclosed to be cracked, damaged or defective as that schedule of 13 this portion of work is not impaired. 14 15 B. General Requirements for Valves: 16 1. Locate valves for immediate accessibility for operation. 17 2. Point stems up wherever possible; where not possible, point stems in horizontal 18 position or as indicated on drawings. 19 3. Point stems down only where indicated or where no other position is possible. 20 4. Connect valves to piping in accordance with fitting installation requirement of 21 Section 23 05 10 and Drawings. 22 5. Cover all valve outlets not connected to piping system with end closure, such as 23 plug, capped nipple, or blind flange. 24 6. Where manual valves are used with locally mounted flow indicators, locate valves at 25 same operating level as instrument and so that instrument can be readily observed. 26 7. Lubricate appropriate valves as required after installation, using approved lubricants. 27 8. Where relief valve discharge is of non-hazardous nature, pipe directly to drain. 28 9. Where relief valve is used in process or steam service, extend discharged pipe 10'-0" 29 above any working level within radius of discharge point or extend above roof; 30 where required, provide minimum 1/2 inch drain at low point of discharge and pipe 31 to drain system. 32 10. Except as indicated, do not install pipe between vessel or line and relief valve inlet. 33 11. Install relief valves in vertical position. 34 12. Brace and support outlet piping so that excessive stress on relief valve is avoided 35 and so that removal of relief valve can be accomplished without temporarily 36 supporting discharge piping. 37 13. Install discharge piping to avoid pockets; provide weepholes as required. 38 39 C. Equipment: 40 1. Prior to commencing equipment installation, inspect work or other trades and verify 41 that work of other trades and work under this Division is complete to point where 42 equipment installation may properly commence. 43 2. Verify that equipment installation may proceed in accordance with relevant codes 44 and standards. 45 3. Notify Owner's Representative immediately in event of discrepancy; do not proceed 46 with installation in areas of discrepancy until such discrepancies are resolved. 47
09/April/2018 23 05 10 - 8 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 D. General Requirements for Pipe: 2 1. Clean all pipe and fittings before installation and keep clean until accepted as part of 3 completed work. 4 2. Install piping in a neat manner with risers plumb and lines straight and parallel to 5 walls and column lines. 6 3. Avoid running pipe through ductwork, directly under electric lights or where other 7 lines and services are routed. 8 4. Use full lengths of pipe except where cut lengths are necessary. 9 5. Cut pipe square with ends carefully reamed and cleaned before being installed. 10 6. Erect piping with proper provision for expansion and contraction; pipe loops are 11 preferable. 12 7. Where lines of lower pressure rating tie into services or equipment of higher 13 pressure rating, install required valve conforming to higher rating between 14 connections. 15 8. Unless otherwise specified, maintain minimum clearance of 2 inches between 16 exterior edges of aboveground parallel pipes, edges of flanges, or coverings, if any. 17 9. Install drip legs, vents, drains, and dirt traps as required; install line size drip legs and 18 dirt traps in compressed air lines as required unless otherwise shown on Drawings. 19 10. Support pipe and arrange reducers to allow piping systems to be drained at low 20 points and vented at high points. 21 11. Keep exposed ends of pipe plugged during installation. 22 12. Terminations: 23 a. Where pipe comes above grade or slab on grade and future connection is to 24 be made, terminate in suitable fitting to facilitate connections. 25 b. Plug, cap, or blank off openings in pipe until connections are made. 26 27 E. Fittings: 28 1. Use standard manufactured fittings for changes in direction. 29 2. Do not bend, spring or deform piping to prepare joints. 30 3. Do not use bushings except where specifically approved by Owner's Representative 31 4. Use eccentric reducers to facilitate air removal and drainage from lines and as 32 required to maintain level bottom of pipe elevation on trapeze hangers and pipe 33 bridges. 34 5. Utilize threaded caps at base of dirt legs. 35 36 F. Flanged Connections: 37 1. Align flange faces with holes straddling vertical center line of piping. 38 2. Where steel flanges are bolted to flat face cast-iron flanges, machine off raised face. 39 3. Lubricate bolts over entire thread with heavy graphite and oil mixture prior to 40 tightening. 41 4. Tighten bolts with appropriate wrenches to produce uniform bolting. 42 5. Tighten commercial grade bolts to approximately 15,000 psi stress, based on root 43 areas of thread. 44 6. Tighten alloy steel bolts to a stress of 45,000 psi, based on root area of thread. 45 7. Use nonmetallic gaskets for flanged connections except where noted otherwise. 46
09/April/2018 23 05 10 - 9 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 G. Screwed Connection: 2 1. Use full cleanly cut threads of true taper, accurate to gauge and per appropriate 3 standard, for screwed threaded connections. 4 2. Use reducing fittings for reducing in line size. 5 3. Do not use bushings and close nipples. 6 4. Use square head steel plugs. 7 5. Use sealing tape as joint compound with threaded connections. 8 6. Clean threads thoroughly of cuttings, oil, and other foreign matter before applying 9 sealant and attempting to join pipe. 10 11 H. Dielectric Type Fittings: 12 1. Install at joints between dissimilar metals 13 2. Install at: 14 a. Points where buried steel piping enters building. 15 b. Points where buried steel piping connects to existing buried services and 16 above grade services. 17 18 I. Sleeves: 19 1. Provide and install sleeves for pipe passing through walls, floor slabs. 20 2. Size sleeves to allow minimum 1 inch clearance around outer circumference of 21 uninsulated pipe or pipe insulation, if any. 22 3. Cut sleeves flush with wall ceiling surfaces. 23 4. Extend sleeves 1 inch above finished floors. 24 5. Set Floor sleeves in place before concrete is poured or securely fasten and grout 25 sleeves with cement. 26 6. Set wall sleeves as wall is constructed. 27 7. Do not use jackhammer or pavement breaker unless specifically approved by 28 Owner's Representative. 29 8. Provide copper and brass pipe and tubing passing through floor with sleeve or wrap 30 from point 12 inches beneath the slab to 6 inches above the slab. 31 9. Project sleeves through outside walls 1/2 inch on each side of finished walls. 32 10. Where indicated on Drawings, provide and install sleeves under foundations and 33 elsewhere to accommodate routing of piping. 34 11. Before backfill, install steel plate, cut to closely fit pipe, at each end of sleeves used 35 for underground piping. 36 12. Install escutcheons or appropriate plates on both sides of pipe penetrations through 37 walls, floors, ceilings, and partitions for pipe exposed to view in finished areas. 38 39 J. Sleeve Packing: 40 1. Insert packing entire length of sleeve. 41 2. Where pipe passes through elevated floor of fire wall, pack space between bare pipe 42 or insulation and sleeve with fire-resistant penetration sealing material. 43 3. Seal ends of sleeves penetrating fire walls with metal cap or plate. 44 4. Where pipe passes through exterior wall, slab on grade, or waterproof wall below 45 grade, pack space between pipe and sleeve with joint sealants appropriate for size, 46 depth and location of joint. Comply with requirements for sealants specified in 47 Section 07 92 00 “Joint Sealants.”
09/April/2018 23 05 10 - 10 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 5. Where piping 170°F or higher penetrates combustible wall, insulate pipe with 2 minimum 1-1/2 inches noncombustible insulation for length of penetration. 3 4 K. Escutcheons: 5 1. Install chrome-plated escutcheons for pipe passing through walls or floors in toilets 6 and finished areas. 7 2. Install nickel-plated steel for pipe passing through walls or floors in unfinished 8 areas. 9 3. Install box-type sleeves only as required or as indicated. 10 4. Install stainless steel sleeves where services penetrate cleanroom. 11 12 L. Blinds: 13 1. Install blinds on all process lines at battery limits and where required to facilitate 14 testing, inspection, or maintenance of system components or equipment. 15 2. Use circular blinds with 3 inch tell-tale tabs where required. 16 3. Provide line blinds and spacers with jack screws and install with jack screw holes 17 located so that adjacent piping or equipment will not interfere with reversing blinds. 18 4. Upon completion of cleaning and testing, account for blanks used to protect piping 19 and equipment. 20 21 M. Provide flanges or unions at: 22 1. All final connections to equipment, 23 2. Both sides of all control valves, in-line equipment and instruments, 24 3. Intervals in screwed lines, 25 4. Where frequent dismantling of piping or removal of in-line items is required, 26 5. Where non-metallic pipe systems cannot be otherwise joined. 27 6. Where necessary to provide clearance for dismantling equipment, and 28 7. In pipelines on both sides of items as needed. 29 30 N. Welding Steel Pipe: 31 1. Use metallic-arc welding process made by qualified welders meeting minimum 32 requirements of Section 6 of ANSI B31.1. 33 2. Prohibit welding when atmospheric temperature is less than 0°F and surfaces are 34 wet. 35 3. Clean welded surfaces free of loose scale, slag, rust, paint, oil, and other foreign 36 material. 37 4. Insure that joint surfaces are smooth, uniform, and free from fins, tears and other 38 defects that affect proper welding. 39 5. Cut bevels accurately by machining or by mechanically guided cutting torch. 40 6. Align pipe carefully before welding and maintain in alignment during welding. 41 7. Use tack welds of the same quality as final welds to maintain alignment. 42 8. Remove defective tack welds before final weld is made. 43 9. Surfaces of finished welds 44 a. Brightly metallic after cleaning. 45 b. Fairly smooth and uniform contour with regular ripples. 46 c. Free from overlaps, undercuts, and excessive convexity. 47 10. Insure that welds are sound throughout, fused thoroughly, and free of gas pockets, 48 oxide, slag inclusions, and surface porosity.
09/April/2018 23 05 10 - 11 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 11. Clean inside of pipe free from globules of weld metal, spacers, and other material 2 which would restrict pipe area or become loose to enter fluid stream. 3 12. Remove and replace defective and unsound welds. 4 13. Replace with new pipe and fittings material that cannot be rewelded satisfactorily as 5 determined by Owner or his authorized representative. 6 14. Field fabricated branches may be used if system operating pressure is 100 psig and 7 less provided branch is at least one pipe size smaller than main line. 8 9 O. Joining Copper Pipe and Tubing: 10 1. Cut tubes and pipe to prevent burrs, out of round, or improperly sized tube ends. 11 2. Use antler type or multiple flame torch on pipe and fittings 4 inches and larger. 12 3. Open all valves in system completely while joints are being made. 13 4. Do not peen to correct defects. 14 5. Redo any joints containing cracks, pinholes, or incomplete penetrations. 15 6. Remove all external and internal loose solder and flux after joint cools. 16 17 3.2 PREPARATION 18 19 A. Cutting and Patching: 20 1. Perform cutting and patching required to install piping, ductwork, mechanical 21 system components and mechanical equipment. 22 2. Secure approval of Owner's Representative before cutting where strength or 23 appearance of finished work is affected. 24 3. Finish to match existing or prior work. 25 26 B. Lubricated all moving parts of equipment installed under this Division thoroughly prior to 27 operation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 28 29 C. Place, set, and install all sleeves and inserts required to route and install services under this 30 Division. 31 32 3.3 INSTALLATION 33 34 A. Piping Systems: 35 1. Avoid pockets in all lines where possible. 36 2. Install low point drainage and high point venting, with suitable valves or plugs, in 37 low and high points, respectively, in liquid piping systems and install dirt legs as 38 required. 39 3. Connections: 40 a. Route pipe to equipment connections and interface points without tightening 41 connections until after equipment has been set and grouted. 42 b. Examine all pipe and valve connections for strain on connected equipment 43 and rework if required. 44 c. Remove pipe and correct alignment if misalignment occurs. 45 d. Provide mating flange of same pressure rating and facing as equipment or 46 valve flange to which it is connected. 47 e. Recheck pipe alignment at equipment after equipment has been operated and 48 tested and realign.
09/April/2018 23 05 10 - 12 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 f. Install full size piping and valves to equipment and change size, if required, at 2 point of connection. 3 g. Install connecting piping and accessories that are compatible with connected 4 equipment. 5 6 B. Install suitable designed guides, anchors, braces, and couplings wherever required to limit 7 movement of piping resulting from induced hydraulic reduce transmission of such stresses 8 and resulting forces; utilize minimum number necessary. 9 10 C. Equipment: 11 1. Rig, install, and assemble equipment as required to constitute complete workable 12 system in satisfactory operating condition 13 2. Place, level, support, lubricate, align, grout, and firmly shim equipment components 14 as required and as indicated on Drawings, including equipment purchased under 15 separate purchase order. Grout equipment after equipment is set and aligned 16 3. Provide required slope where equipment is required to be sloped. 17 4. Where indicated, install vibration dampening mounts in accordance with 18 manufacturer's instructions. 19 5. Set equipment bases or baseplates on clean foundation and level and align before 20 connecting piping. Tighten anchor bolts and grout base. 21 6. Conceal outside end of shims on rotary equipment so as to have minimum 1/4 inch 22 covering. 23 7. Align driver and drive shaft assembly of driven equipment after grout has set to 24 within manufacturer's required tolerances before giving shaft couplings and anchor 25 bolts final tightening. 26 8. Motor Alignment: 27 a. Over 50 HP: Light shrink fit on coupling halves. 28 b. 50 HP and Under: Light tap fit. 29 9. Install all piping and electrical connections before attempting operation of 30 equipment, including equipment purchased under separate purchase order. 31 10. Follow manufacturer's supplied instructions installing all equipment. 32 11. Modify assemblies, locations, and orientation only as required by shop drawings and 33 as approved by Owner's Representative. 34 12. Maximum Runout For Rotating Parts: 0.0005 inch, dial indicator. 35 13. Install equipment such that tightening anchor bolts or connecting pipe does not 36 induce stresses or distortion. 37 14. Recheck alignment of equipment, including equipment purchased under separate 38 purchase order, after base plate is tightened, after piping has been connected and 39 again at operating temperature after equipment has been tested and operated at 40 conditions of service. Realign as necessary. 41 15. After grouting, leveling, aligning, and securing are complete and after shims are 42 removed where specified by manufacturer, make internal and external connections 43 of all piping, tubing, and other utilities as required to all equipment, including 44 equipment purchased under separate purchase order, and check connections for 45 tightness, correctness, and integrity prior to initial operation. 46 16. Install dowels where required after alignment and after connecting piping. 47 17. Level and bolt in place equipment not supported on foundation.
09/April/2018 23 05 10 - 13 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 18. If no anchor bolts are indicated, fasten equipment to concrete floors with required 2 number and size of expansion bolts extending minimum 3 inches into concrete. 3 19. Engage services of qualified manufacturer's field engineers to supervise and assist in 4 installation, start-up, and testing of equipment installed under this Division. 5 20. Unless otherwise required by Owner's Representative, start up, adjust, and conduct 6 performance tests for each system and each item of utility equipment, specified in 7 this Division and purchased under separate purchase order, in accordance with 8 manufacturer's instructions and to satisfaction of owner's representative. Notify 9 Owner's Representative minimum three days in advance of performance test. 10 11 D. Bolted Connections: 12 1. Punch, drill, or ream bolt holes and remove burrs. 13 2. Use washers, lock washers, and self-locking nuts as indicated and as required. 14 3. Use screw threads conforming to National or Unified forms in accordance with 15 NBS and other applicable standards. 16 4. Do not use sheet metal screws. 17 5. Use machine bolts where access to and use of nuts may not be possible and where 18 unbolting may be required. In the case of the latter, use sufficient metal thickness to 19 assure that bolt thread engagement is at least equal to thickness of the 20 corresponding nut. 21 6. Secure machine bolts in place with properly sized lock washers. 22 23 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 24 25 A. Install piping and mechanical systems so as to pass all inspections by local, state, and 26 federal plumbing authorities having jurisdiction, insurance company having jurisdiction, 27 and all other governing agencies. Changes or additions necessary to obtain approvals of 28 inspecting agencies shall be included as part of work under this Division. 29 30 B. Clean all accessible parts of extraneous materials; smooth external surfaces and bevel all 31 edges where practical. 32 33 C. Before installing piping, examine proposed routing proposed routing location for clearance 34 of piping, structural steel, ductwork, conduit, walls, and roofing already present and as 35 proposed by other trades and other trades and coordinate routing with items and services 36 to avoid interference. 37 38 D. Piping: 39 1. Test piping systems in accordance with Section 23 05 93 before permitting 40 operation of systems or any equipment servicing or connected to piping systems. 41 2. Test all components of fire protection system for proper operation and system 42 performance. 43 3. Clean and flush all systems per Specifications before permitting operation. 44 4. Clean piping for process fluids in manner that will not damage or abrade pipe and 45 that will not contaminate contents of finished system. 46
09/April/2018 23 05 10 - 14 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 E. Valves: 2 1. Examine and test valves after installation for: 3 a. Alignment 4 b. Tightness 5 c. Operability 6 d. Proper orientation in pipe. 7 2. Correct or reinstall all valves revealed by inspection of Owner's Representative to be 8 improperly installed. 9 10 F. During installation, test pipe coating with suitable electronic tester and correct deficiencies. 11 12 G. Equipment Installation: 13 1. If structure floor or overhead steel is used to support equipment, protect, brace, and 14 shore up floor to avoid damage to floor or any supporting structure or member. 15 2. Repair all damage to floor, structure, steel, or any portion of Work resulting from 16 improper support or handling of equipment. 17 3. Use only flat shims for leveling. 18 4. Do not use jack nuts on anchor bolts for leveling. 19 5. Use only machine bolts of proper size for bolting in place equipment supported on 20 structural steel. 21 6. Clean external surfaces of equipment at completion of this portion of Work to 22 remove dust, debris, rust, weld splatter, and concrete. 23 7. Remove all erection equipment, tools, and debris from area when equipment is 24 installed and ready for operation. 25 8. Examine equipment installation for secure placement and proper assembly and 26 orientation; perform all work required to produce workable, operable installation. 27 28 H. Provide certification for items and completed portions of work including following: 29 1. Conformance of all work under Division 23 with Contract Documents 30 2. Testing and inspection of utility piping and equipment 31 3. Testing and inspection of process piping and equipment 32 4. Lubrication 33 5. Leak test of all drainage and vent systems 34 6. Disinfection of potable water system 35 7. HVAC testing and balancing agency (including complete report) 36 8. Manufacturer's or vendor's shop drawings for equipment, including dimensions, 37 design data, instrumentation, and electrical data 38 9. Testing of mechanical systems as specified in this Division 39 40 I. Provide opportunity for Architect/Engineer and Owner's Representative to inspect 41 installation of all equipment, piping, valves, ductwork, and any other portion of work 42 under this Division at any time or stage and witness performance tests; perform any 43 remedial work required and indicated by inspection. 44 45 J. Repair or correct all leaks, defects, failures, or inoperative conditions. 46 47 K. Insure that areas and systems comprising completed work under this Division are left in 48 proper working order, clean, and free of debris and surplus materials.
09/April/2018 23 05 10 - 15 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 2 L. Install overhead piping and ductwork such that, unless otherwise indicated or specified, 3 minimum overhead clearances to underside of flanges, pipe insulation, duct, duct 4 insulation, or bottom of structural supports is as follows: 5 1. Above Floors Within Building: 10' - 0" 6 2. Above Elevated Wales and Platforms: 10' - 0" 7 3. Above All Other Outside Areas at Grade: 10' - 0" 8 9 M. Touch up areas, where equipment finishes or coatings are marred or damaged during 10 handling, transporting, and installing, with manufacturer's recommended type and 11 thickness of touch-up paint to match existing finish. 12 13 14 END OF SECTION
09/April/2018 23 05 10 - 16 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 SECTION 23 05 13 2 3 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 4 5 6 PART 1 - GENERAL 7 8 1.1 SUMMARY 9 10 A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose, 11 horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems 12 up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by 13 equipment manufacturer for field installation. 14 15 1.2 COORDINATION 16 17 A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with 18 the following: 19 1. Motor controllers. 20 2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load. 21 3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence. 22 4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location. 23 24 25 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 26 27 2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS 28 29 A. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated. 30 31 B. Comply with IEEE 841 for severe-duty motors. 32 33 2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS 34 35 A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 °C (104 °F) and at altitude of 3300 36 feet (1000 m) above sea level. 37 38 B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected 39 loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating 40 sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor. 41 42 2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS 43 44 A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor. 45 46 B. Efficiency: Premium efficiency, as defined in NEMA MG 1. 47
09/April/2018 23 05 13 - 1 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 C. Service Factor: 1.15. 2 3 D. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque. 4 1. For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding. 5 2. For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed. 6 7 E. Multispeed Motors: Separate winding for each speed. 8 9 F. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage. 10 11 G. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust 12 loading. 13 14 H. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating. 15 16 I. Insulation: Class F. 17 18 J. Code Letter Designation: 19 1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G. 20 2. Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic. 21 22 K. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor 23 frame sizes smaller than 324T. 24 25 2.4 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS 26 27 A. Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection 28 requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor 29 terminal box, suited to control method. 30 31 B. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: 32 1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed 33 and tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses 34 produced by pulse-width modulated inverters. 35 2. Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation. 36 3. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation. 37 4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally 38 protected motors. 39 40 C. Severe-Duty Motors: Comply with IEEE 841, with 1.15 minimum service factor. 41 42 2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS 43 44 A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and 45 requirements of specific motor application: 46 1. Permanent-split capacitor. 47 2. Split phase. 48 3. Capacitor start, inductor run.
09/April/2018 23 05 13 - 2 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 4. Capacitor start, capacitor run. 2 3 B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type. 4 5 C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and 6 thrust loading. 7 8 D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type. 9 10 E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to 11 motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of 12 motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor 13 temperature returns to normal range. 14 15 PART 3 - EXECUTION 16 17 Not Used. 18 19 END OF SECTION
09/April/2018 23 05 13 - 3 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 SECTION 23 05 16 2 3 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING 4 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 6 7 1.1 SUMMARY 8 9 A. Section Includes: 10 1. Flexible-hose packless expansion joints. 11 2. Metal-bellows packless expansion joints. 12 3. Rubber packless expansion joints. 13 4. Pipe loops and swing connections. 14 5. Anchors. 15 16 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 17 18 A. Compatibility: Products shall be suitable for piping service fluids, materials, working 19 pressures, and temperatures. 20 21 B. Capability: Products to absorb 200 percent of maximum axial movement between 22 anchors. 23 24 1.3 SUBMITTALS 25 26 A. Refer to Submittal at the end of Part 3 for a list of submittal requirements for this Section. 27 28 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS 29 30 A. Welding certificates. 31 32 B. Product Certificates: For each type of expansion joint, from manufacturer. 33 34 35 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 36 37 A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 38 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 39 2. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX. 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 47 48 2.1 PACKLESS EXPANSION JOINTS
09/April/2018 23 05 16 - 1 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 2 A. Flexible-Hose Packless Expansion Joints: 3 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one 4 of the following: 5 a. Flex-Hose Co., Inc. 6 b. Flexicraft Industries. 7 c. Flex Pression Ltd. 8 d. Metraflex, Inc. 9 e. Unisource Manufacturing, Inc. 10 2. Description: Manufactured assembly with inlet and outlet elbow fittings and two 11 flexible-metal-hose legs joined by long-radius, 180-degree return bend or center 12 section of flexible hose. 13 3. Flexible Hose: Corrugated-metal inner hoses and braided outer sheaths. 14 4. Expansion Joints for Copper Tubing NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Copper-alloy 15 fittings with solder-joint connections. 16 a. Bronze hoses and single-braid bronze sheaths with 450 psig at 70 deg F 17 (3100 kPa at 21 deg C) and 340 psig at 450 deg F (2340 kPa at 232 deg C) 18 ratings. 19 5. Expansion Joints for Copper Tubing NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): 20 Copper-alloy fittings with threaded end connections. 21 a. Stainless-steel hoses and single-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 300 psig at 22 70 deg F (2070 kPa at 21 deg C) and 225 psig at 450 deg F (1550 kPa at 232 23 deg C) ratings. 24 6. Expansion Joints for Steel Piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Carbon-steel fittings 25 with threaded end connections. 26 a. Stainless-steel hoses and single-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 450 psig at 27 70 deg F (3100 kPa at 21 deg C) and 325 psig at 600 deg F (2250 kPa at 315 28 deg C) ratings. 29 7. Expansion Joints for Steel Piping NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 6 (DN 65 to DN 150): 30 Carbon-steel fittings with flanged end connections. 31 a. Stainless-steel hoses and single-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 200 psig at 32 70 deg F (1380 kPa at 21 deg C) and 145 psig at 600 deg F (1000 kPa at 315 33 deg C) ratings. 34 B. Metal-Bellows Packless Expansion Joints: 35 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one 36 of the following: 37 a. Adsco Manufacturing LLC. 38 b. American BOA, Inc. 39 c. Badger Industries, Inc. 40 d. Expansion Joint Systems, Inc. 41 e. Flex-Hose Co., Inc. 42 f. Flexicraft Industries. 43 g. Flex Pression Ltd. 44 h. Flex-Weld, Inc. 45 i. Flo Fab inc. 46 j. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. 47 k. Metraflex, Inc. 48 l. Proco Products, Inc.
09/April/2018 23 05 16 - 2 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 m. Senior Flexonics Pathway. 2 n. Tozen Corporation. 3 o. Unaflex. 4 p. Unisource Manufacturing, Inc. 5 q. Universal Metal Hose; a subsidiary of Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. 6 r. U.S. Bellows, Inc. 7 s. WahlcoMetroflex. 8 2. Standards: ASTM F 1120 and EJMA's "Standards of the Expansion Joint 9 Manufacturers Association, Inc." 10 3. Type: Circular, corrugated bellows with external tie rods. 11 4. Minimum Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa) unless otherwise indicated. 12 5. Configuration: Single joint class(es) unless otherwise indicated. 13 6. Expansion Joints for Copper Tubing: Multi-ply phosphor-bronze bellows, copper 14 pipe ends, and brass shrouds. 15 a. End Connections for Copper Tubing NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Solder 16 joint. 17 b. End Connections for Copper Tubing NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to 18 DN 100): Threaded. 19 7. Expansion Joints for Steel Piping: Single-ply stainless-steel bellows, steel pipe ends, 20 and carbon-steel shroud. 21 a. End Connections for Steel Pipe NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded. 22 b. End Connections for Steel Pipe NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged. 23 24 C. Rubber Packless Expansion Joints: 25 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one 26 of the following: 27 a. Amber/Booth Company, Inc.; a div. of Vibration Isolation Products of 28 Texas, Inc. 29 b. Flex-Hose Co., Inc. 30 c. Flexicraft Industries. 31 d. Flex-Weld, Inc. 32 e. Garlock Sealing Technologies. 33 f. General Rubber Corporation. 34 g. Mason Industries, Inc.; Mercer Rubber Co. 35 h. Metraflex, Inc. 36 i. Proco Products, Inc. 37 j. Red Valve Company, Inc. 38 k. Tozen Corporation. 39 l. Unaflex. 40 m. Unisource Manufacturing, Inc. 41 2. Standards: ASTM F 1123 and FSA's "Technical Handbook: Non-Metallic 42 Expansion Joints and Flexible Pipe Connectors." 43 3. Material: Fabric-reinforced rubber complying with FSA-NMEJ-703. 44 4. Arch Type: Single arches with external control rods. 45 5. Spherical Type: Single spheres with external control rods. 46 6. Minimum Pressure Rating for NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 40 to DN 100): 150 psig 47 (1035 kPa) at 220 deg F (104 deg C). 48 7. Minimum Pressure Rating for NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN 125 and DN 150): 140 psig
09/April/2018 23 05 16 - 3 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 (966 kPa) at 200 deg F (93 deg C). 2 8. Material for Water: CR. 3 9. End Connections: Full-faced, integral steel flanges with steel retaining rings. 4 5 6 PART 3 - EXECUTION 7 8 3.1 EXPANSION-JOINT INSTALLATION 9 10 A. Install expansion joints of sizes matching sizes of piping in which they are installed. 11 12 B. Install metal-bellows expansion joints according to EJMA's "Standards of the Expansion 13 Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc." 14 15 C. Install rubber packless expansion joints according to FSA-NMEJ-702. 16 17 D. Braided stainless steel flex hoses to be provided at coil connections for terminal boxes 18 where required to facilitate installation and/or minimize noise and vibration. 19 20 3.2 PIPE LOOP AND SWING CONNECTION INSTALLATION 21 22 A. Connect risers and branch connections to mains with at least five pipe fittings including tee 23 in main. 24 25 B. Connect risers and branch connections to terminal units with at least four pipe fittings 26 including tee in riser. 27 28 C. Connect mains and branch connections to terminal units with at least four pipe fittings 29 including tee in main. 30 31 3.3 ANCHOR INSTALLATION 32 33 A. Install anchors at locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by 34 ASME B31.9 and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment, and 35 as shown on the Drawings. 36 37 B. Anchor Attachments: 38 1. Anchor Attachment to Steel Pipe: Attach by welding. Comply with ASME B31.9 39 and ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing 40 Qualifications." 41 2. Anchor Attachment to Copper Tubing: Attach with pipe hangers. Use MSS SP-69, 42 Type 24, U-bolts bolted to anchor. 43 44 C. Fabricate and install steel anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars. Comply with 45 ASME B31.9 and AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 46 1. Anchor Attachment to Steel Structural Members: Attach by welding. 47 2. Anchor Attachment to Concrete Structural Members: Attach by fasteners. Follow 48 fastener manufacturer's written instructions.
09/April/2018 23 05 16 - 4 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 2 D. Use grout to form flat bearing surfaces for anchors attached to concrete.
3 3.4 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
ITEM NO. SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT AS INDICATED WITH BID 23 05 16-01 Product Data: For each type of prod- Per construction schedule uct indicated 23 05 16-02 Maintenance Data With record documents 4 5 6 7 END OF SECTION
09/April/2018 23 05 16 - 5 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 SECTION 23 05 19 2 3 METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING 4 5 6 PART 1 - GENERAL 7 8 1.1 SUMMARY 9 10 A. Section Includes: 11 1. Filled-system thermometers. 12 2. Liquid-in-glass thermometers. 13 3. Thermowells. 14 4. Dial-type pressure gages. 15 5. Gage attachments. 16 6. Test plugs. 17 7. Differential pressure transmitter. 18 19 20 1.2 SUBMITTALS 21 22 A. Refer to Submittal at the end of Part 3 for a list of submittal requirements for this Section. 23 24 25 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS 26 27 A. Product Certificates: For each type of meter and gage, from manufacturer. 28 29 30 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 31 32 2.1 FILLED-SYSTEM THERMOMETERS 33 34 A. Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Vapor-Actuated Thermometers: 35 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one 36 of the following: 37 a. Ashcroft Inc. 38 b. Marsh Bellofram. 39 c. Miljoco Corporation. 40 d. Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group. 41 e. REOTEMP Instrument Corporation. 42 f. Trerice, H. O. Co. 43 g. Weiss Instruments, Inc. 44 2. Standard: ASME B40.200. 45 3. Case: Sealed type, cast aluminum; 4-1/2-inch (114-mm) nominal diameter. 46 4. Element: Bourdon tube or other type of pressure element. 47 5. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer. 48 6. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in
09/April/2018 23 05 19 - 1 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 deg F. 2 7. Pointer: Dark-colored metal. 3 8. Window: Glass. 4 9. Ring: Stainless steel. 5 10. Connector Type(s): Union joint, rigid, back; with ASME B1.1 screw threads. 6 11. Thermal System: Liquid-filled bulb in copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass stem 7 and of length to suit installation. 8 a. Design for Air-Duct Installation: With ventilated shroud. 9 b. Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem. 10 12. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range. 11 12 2.2 LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS 13 14 A. Metal-Case, Industrial-Style, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers: 15 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one 16 of the following: 17 a. Flo Fab Inc. 18 b. Miljoco Corporation. 19 c. Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group. 20 d. Tel-Tru Manufacturing Company. 21 e. Trerice, H. O. Co. 22 f. Weiss Instruments, Inc. 23 g. Winters Instruments - U.S. 24 2. Standard: ASME B40.200. 25 3. Case: Cast aluminum; 9-inch (229-mm) nominal size unless otherwise indicated. 26 4. Case Form: Straight unless otherwise indicated. 27 5. Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and red organic liquid. 28 6. Tube Background: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings 29 graduated in deg F. 30 7. Window: Glass. 31 8. Stem: Aluminum and of length to suit installation. 32 a. Design for Air-Duct Installation: With ventilated shroud. 33 b. Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem. 34 9. Connector: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm), with ASME B1.1 screw threads. 35 10. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range or one scale division, to a 36 maximum of 1.5 percent of scale range. 37 38 2.3 DUCT-THERMOMETER MOUNTING BRACKETS 39 40 A. Description: Flanged bracket with screw holes, for attachment to air duct and made to 41 hold thermometer stem. 42 43 2.4 THERMOWELLS 44 45 A. Thermowells: 46 1. Standard: ASME B40.200. 47 2. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type fitting made for insertion into piping tee 48 fitting.
09/April/2018 23 05 19 - 2 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 3. Material for Use with Copper Tubing: 316 Stainless steel. 2 4. Material for Use with Steel Piping: 316 Stainless steel. 3 5. Type: Stepped shank unless straight or tapered shank is indicated. 4 6. External Threads: NPS 1/2, NPS 3/4, or NPS 1, (DN 15, DN 20, or NPS 25,) 5 ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads. 6 7. Internal Threads: 1/2, 3/4, and 1 inch (13, 19, and 25 mm), with ASME B1.1 screw 7 threads. 8 8. Bore: Diameter required to match thermometer bulb or stem. 9 9. Insertion Length: Length required to match thermometer bulb or stem. 10 10. Lagging Extension: Include on thermowells for insulated piping and tubing. 11 11. Bushings: For converting size of thermowell's internal screw thread to size of 12 thermometer connection. 13 14 2.5 PRESSURE GAGES 15 16 A. Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages: 17 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one 18 of the following: 19 a. AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge. 20 b. Ashcroft Inc. 21 c. Ernst Flow Industries. 22 d. Flo Fab Inc. 23 e. Marsh Bellofram. 24 f. Miljoco Corporation. 25 g. Noshok. 26 h. Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group. 27 i. REOTEMP Instrument Corporation. 28 j. Tel-Tru Manufacturing Company. 29 k. Trerice, H. O. Co. 30 l. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 31 m. Weiss Instruments, Inc. 32 n. WIKA Instrument Corporation - USA. 33 o. Winters Instruments - U.S. 34 2. Standard: ASME B40.100. 35 3. Case: Liquid-filled, sealed type; cast aluminum; 4-1/2-inch (114-mm) nominal 36 diameter. 37 4. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated. 38 5. Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/2 (DN 15), ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads 39 and bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type is indicated. 40 6. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer. 41 7. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in 42 psi. 43 8. Pointer: Dark-colored metal. 44 9. Window: Glass or plastic. 45 10. Ring: None. 46 11. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half of scale range. 47 48 2.6 GAGE ATTACHMENTS
09/April/2018 23 05 19 - 3 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 2 A. Valves: Brass or stainless-steel needle, with NPS 1/2 (DN 15), ASME B1.20.1 pipe 3 threads. 4 5 2.7 TEST PLUGS 6 7 A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the 8 following: 9 1. Flow Design, Inc. 10 2. Miljoco Corporation. 11 3. National Meter, Inc. 12 4. Peterson Equipment Co., Inc. 13 5. Sisco Manufacturing Company, Inc. 14 6. Trerice, H. O. Co. 15 7. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 16 8. Weiss Instruments, Inc. 17 18 B. Description: Test-station fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting. 19 20 C. Body: Brass or stainless steel with core inserts and gasketed and threaded cap. 21 22 D. Include extended stem on units to be installed in insulated piping. 23 24 E. Thread Size: NPS 1/2 (DN 15), ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread. 25 26 F. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 500 psig at 200 deg F (3450 kPa at 93 deg C). 27 28 G. Core Inserts: EPDM self-sealing rubber. 29 30 2.8 FLOWMETERS 31 32 A. Differential Pressure Transmitter: 33 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers 34 offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not 35 limited to, the following: 36 a. ABB; Instrumentation and Analytical. 37 b. Bell & Gossett; ITT Industries. 38 c. Meriam Process Technologies. 39 d. Preso Meters; a division of Racine Federated Inc. 40 e. S. A. Armstrong Limited; Armstrong Pumps Inc. 41 2. Description: Pressure transmitter on each supply and return header with sensor, 42 hoses or tubing, fittings, valves, indicator, and conversion chart. 43 3. Flow Range: Sensor and indicator shall cover operating range of equipment or 44 system served. 45 4. Sensor: Calibrated, pressure-measuring element; for installation on a pipe tap. 46 a. Design: Differential-pressure-type measurement for water. 47 b. Construction: Cast-iron body, brass valves with integral check valves and 48 caps, and calibrated nameplate.
09/April/2018 23 05 19 - 4 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 c. Minimum Pressure Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa). 2 d. Minimum Temperature Rating: 250 deg F (121 deg C). 3 5. Permanent Indicators: Meter suitable for wall or bracket mounting, calibrated for 4 connected sensor and having 6-inch- (152-mm-) diameter, or equivalent, dial with 5 fittings and copper tubing for connecting to sensor. 6 a. Scale: PSI. 7 b. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent between 20 and 80 percent of scale range. 8 6. Display: Shows differential, with register to indicate total volume in gallons (liters). 9 7. Operating Instructions: Include complete instructions with each flowmeter. 10 11 12 PART 3 - EXECUTION 13 14 3.1 INSTALLATION 15 16 A. Install thermowells with socket extending a minimum of 2 inches (51 mm) into fluid and in 17 vertical position in piping tees. 18 19 B. Install thermowells of sizes required to match thermometer connectors. Include bushings 20 if required to match sizes. 21 22 C. Install thermowells with extension on insulated piping. 23 24 D. Install direct-mounted thermometers in thermowells and adjust vertical and tilted positions. 25 26 E. Install duct-thermometer mounting brackets in walls of ducts. Attach to duct with screws. 27 28 F. Install direct-mounted pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at 29 the most readable position. 30 31 G. Install valve and syphon fitting in piping for each pressure gage. 32 33 H. Install test plugs in piping tees. 34 35 I. Install differential-pressure-type flowmeter elements, with at least minimum straight 36 lengths of pipe, upstream and downstream from element according to manufacturer's 37 written instructions. 38 39 J. Install permanent indicators on walls or brackets in accessible and readable positions. 40 41 K. Install thermometers in the following locations: 42 1. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic zone. 43 2. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic coil in air-handling units. 44 3. Outside-, return-, supply-, and mixed-air ducts. 45 46 L. Install pressure gages in the following locations: 47 1. Discharge of each pressure-reducing valve. 48 2. Suction and discharge of each pump.
09/April/2018 23 05 19 - 5 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 2 3.2 CONNECTIONS 3 4 A. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and 5 maintenance of meters, gages, machines, and equipment. 6 B. Connect flowmeter-system elements to meters. 7 8 C. Connect flowmeter transmitters to meters. 9 10 D. Connect thermal-energy meter transmitters to meters. 11 12 3.3 ADJUSTING 13 14 A. After installation, calibrate meters according to manufacturer's written instructions. 15 16 B. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility. 17 18 3.4 THERMOMETER SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE 19 20 A. Scale Range for Chilled-Water Piping: 0 to 100 deg F (Minus 20 to plus 50 deg C). 21 22 B. Scale Range for Air Ducts: 0 to 150 deg F (Minus 20 to plus 70 deg C). 23 24 3.5 PRESSURE-GAGE SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE 25 26 A. Scale Range for Chilled-Water Piping: 0 to 300 psi (0 to 2100 kPa). 27 28 3.6 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
ITEM NO. SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT AS INDICATED WITH BID 23 05 19-01 Product Data: For each type of prod- Per construction schedule uct indicated 23 05 19-02 Wiring Diagrams: For Power, signal, Per construction schedule and control wiring 23 05 19-03 Operation and Maintenance Data With record documents 29 30 31 32 END OF SECTION
09/April/2018 23 05 19 - 6 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 SECTION 23 05 23 2 3 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 4 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 6 7 1.1 SUMMARY 8 9 A. Section Includes: 10 1. Bronze ball valves. 11 2. Iron ball valves. 12 3. Iron, single-flange butterfly valves. 13 4. Iron, grooved-end butterfly valves. 14 5. High-performance butterfly valves. 15 6. Bronze lift check valves. 16 7. Bronze swing check valves. 17 8. Iron swing check valves. 18 9. Iron swing check valves with closure control. 19 10. Iron, grooved-end swing-check valves. 20 11. Steel, flanged check valves. 21 12. Bronze gate valves. 22 13. Iron gate valves. 23 14. Steel gate valves. 24 15. Bronze globe valves. 25 16. Iron globe valves. 26 17. Chainwheels. 27 28 B. Related Requirements: 29 1. Section 23 05 53 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for valve tags. 30 31 1.2 DEFINITIONS 32 33 A. CWP: Cold working pressure. 34 35 B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber. 36 37 C. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber. 38 39 D. NRS: Nonrising stem. 40 41 E. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke. 42 43 F. RS: Rising stem. 44 45 G. SWP: Steam working pressure. 46 47 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS 48
09/April/2018 23 05 23 - 1 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated. 2 3 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 4 5 A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single 6 manufacturer. 7 8 B. ASME Compliance: 9 1. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria. 10 2. ASME B31.1 for power piping valves. 11 3. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves. 12 13 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 14 15 A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows: 16 1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 17 2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends. 18 3. Set angle, gate, and globe valves closed to prevent rattling. 19 4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces. 20 5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open. 21 6. Block check valves in either closed or open position. 22 23 B. Use the following precautions during storage: 24 1. Maintain valve end protection. 25 2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature. If 26 outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures. 27 28 C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use 29 handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points. 30 31 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 32 33 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES 34 A. Refer to HVAC valve schedule articles for applications of valves. 35 36 B. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for 37 system pressures and temperatures. 38 39 C. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated. 40 41 D. Valve Actuator Types: 42 1. Gear Actuator: For quarter-turn valves NPS 8 (DN 200) and larger. 43 2. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types. 44 3. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 (DN 150) and smaller except plug valves. 45 4. Wrench: For plug valves with square heads. Furnish Owner with 1 wrench for every 46 10 plug valves, for each size square plug-valve head. 47 5. Chainwheel: Device for attachment to valve handwheel, stem, or other actuator; of 48 size and with chain for mounting height, as indicated in the "Valve Installation"
09/April/2018 23 05 23 - 2 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 Article. 2 3 E. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch (50-mm) stem extensions and the following 4 features: 5 1. Gate Valves: With rising stem. 6 2. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, 7 and protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal 8 or disturbing insulation. 9 3. Butterfly Valves: With extended neck. 10 11 F. Valve-End Connections: 12 1. Flanged: With flanges according to ASME B16.1 for iron valves. 13 2. Grooved: With grooves according to AWWA C606. 14 3. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18. 15 4. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1. 16 17 G. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45. 18 19 2.2 BRONZE BALL VALVES 20 21 A. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: 22 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of 23 the following: 24 a. American Valve, Inc. 25 b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves. 26 c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. 27 d. Hammond Valve. 28 e. Lance Valves; a division of Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc. 29 f. Legend Valve. 30 g. Milwaukee Valve Company. 31 h. NIBCO INC. 32 i. Red-White Valve Corporation. 33 j. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 34 2. Description: 35 a. Standard: MSS SP-110. 36 b. SWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). 37 c. CWP Rating: 600 psig (4140 kPa). 38 d. Body Design: Two piece. 39 e. Body Material: Bronze. 40 f. Ends: Threaded. 41 g. Seats: PTFE or TFE. 42 h. Stem: Bronze. 43 i. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. 44 j. Port: Full. 45 46 B. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Stainless-Steel Trim: 47 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of 48 the following:
09/April/2018 23 05 23 - 3 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves. 2 b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. 3 c. Hammond Valve. 4 d. Lance Valves; a division of Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc. 5 e. Milwaukee Valve Company. 6 f. NIBCO INC. 7 g. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 8 h. 9 2. Description: 10 a. Standard: MSS SP-110. 11 b. SWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). 12 c. CWP Rating: 600 psig (4140 kPa). 13 d. Body Design: Two piece. 14 e. Body Material: Bronze. 15 f. Ends: Threaded. 16 g. Seats: PTFE or TFE. 17 h. Stem: Stainless steel. 18 i. Ball: Stainless steel, vented. 19 j. Port: Full. 20 C. Three-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: 21 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of 22 the following: 23 a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves. 24 b. DynaQuip Controls. 25 c. Hammond Valve. 26 d. Milwaukee Valve Company. 27 e. NIBCO INC. 28 f. Red-White Valve Corporation. 29 2. Description: 30 a. Standard: MSS SP-110. 31 b. SWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). 32 c. CWP Rating: 600 psig (4140 kPa). 33 d. Body Design: Three piece. 34 e. Body Material: Bronze. 35 f. Ends: Threaded. 36 g. Seats: PTFE or TFE. 37 h. Stem: Bronze. 38 i. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. 39 j. Port: Full. 40 41 D. Three-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Stainless-Steel Trim: 42 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of 43 the following: 44 a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves. 45 b. Hammond Valve. 46 c. Milwaukee Valve Company. 47 d. NIBCO INC. 48 2. Description:
09/April/2018 23 05 23 - 4 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 a. Standard: MSS SP-110. 2 b. SWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). 3 c. CWP Rating: 600 psig (4140 kPa). 4 d. Body Design: Three piece. 5 e. Body Material: Bronze. 6 f. Ends: Threaded. 7 g. Seats: PTFE or TFE. 8 h. Stem: Stainless steel. 9 i. Ball: Stainless steel, vented. 10 j. Port: Full. 11 12 2.3 IRON BALL VALVES 13 14 A. Class 125, Iron Ball Valves: 15 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of 16 the following: 17 a. American Valve, Inc. 18 b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves. 19 c. Kitz Corporation. 20 d. Sure Flow Equipment Inc. 21 e. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 22 2. Description: 23 a. Standard: MSS SP-72. 24 b. CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). 25 c. Body Design: Split body. 26 d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron. 27 e. Ends: Flanged. 28 f. Seats: PTFE or TFE. 29 g. Stem: Stainless steel. 30 h. Ball: Stainless steel. 31 i. Port: Full. 32 33 2.4 IRON, SINGLE-FLANGE BUTTERFLY VALVES 34 35 A. 250 CWP, Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with EPDM Seat and Aluminum-Bronze 36 Disc: 37 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of 38 the following: 39 a. ABZ Valve and Controls; a division of ABZ Manufacturing, Inc. 40 b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves. 41 c. Cooper Cameron Valves; a division of Cooper Cameron Corp. 42 d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. 43 e. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. 44 f. Demco 45 g. DeZurik Water Controls. 46 h. Flo Fab Inc. 47 i. Hammond Valve. 48 j. Kitz Corporation.
09/April/2018 23 05 23 - 5 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 k. Legend Valve. 2 l. Milwaukee Valve Company. 3 m. NIBCO INC. 4 n. Norriseal; a Dover Corporation company. 5 o. Red-White Valve Corporation. 6 p. Spence Strainers International; a division of CIRCOR International. 7 q. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 8 2. Description: 9 a. Standard: MSS SP-67, Type I. 10 b. CWP Rating: 250 psig. 11 c. Body Design: Lug type; suitable for bidirectional dead-end service at rated 12 pressure without use of downstream flange. 13 d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, cast iron or ASTM A 536, ductile iron. 14 e. Seat: EPDM. 15 f. Stem: One- or two-piece stainless steel. 16 g. Disc: Aluminum bronze. 17 18 2.5 IRON, GROOVED-END BUTTERFLY VALVES 19 20 A. 175 CWP, Iron, Grooved-End Butterfly Valves: 21 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of 22 the following: 23 a. Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc. 24 b. Shurjoint Piping Products. 25 c. Tyco Fire Products LP; Grinnell Mechanical Products. 26 d. Victaulic Company. 27 2. Description: 28 a. Standard: MSS SP-67, Type I. 29 b. CWP Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa). 30 c. Body Material: Coated, ductile iron. 31 d. Stem: Two-piece stainless steel. 32 e. Disc: Coated, ductile iron. 33 f. Seal: EPDM. 34 35 B. 300 CWP, Iron, Grooved-End Butterfly Valves: 36 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of 37 the following: 38 a. Anvil International, Inc. 39 b. Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc. 40 c. Mueller Steam Specialty; a division of SPX Corporation. 41 d. NIBCO INC. 42 e. Shurjoint Piping Products. 43 f. Tyco Fire Products LP; Grinnell Mechanical Products. 44 g. Victaulic Company. 45 2. Description: 46 a. Standard: MSS SP-67, Type I. 47 b. NPS 8 (DN 50) and Smaller CWP Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa). 48 c. Body Material: Coated, ductile iron.
09/April/2018 23 05 23 - 6 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 d. Stem: Two-piece stainless steel. 2 e. Disc: Coated, ductile iron. 3 f. Seal: EPDM. 4 5 2.6 HIGH-PERFORMANCE BUTTERFLY VALVES 6 7 A. Class 150, Single-Flange, High-Performance Butterfly Valves: 8 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of 9 the following: 10 a. ABZ Valve and Controls; a division of ABZ Manufacturing, Inc. 11 b. Bray Controls; a division of Bray International. 12 c. Cooper Cameron Valves; a division of Cooper Cameron Corp. 13 d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Flowseal. 14 e. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. 15 f. DeZurik Water Controls. 16 g. Hammond Valve. 17 h. Jamesbury; a subsidiary of Metso Automation. 18 i. Milwaukee Valve Company. 19 j. NIBCO INC. 20 k. Process Development & Control, Inc. 21 l. Tyco Valves & Controls; a unit of Tyco Flow Control. 22 m. Xomox Corporation. 23 2. Description: 24 a. Standard: MSS SP-68. 25 b. CWP Rating: 285 psig (1965 kPa) at 100 deg F (38 deg C). 26 c. Body Design: Lug type; suitable for bidirectional dead-end service at rated 27 pressure without use of downstream flange. 28 d. Body Material: Carbon steel, cast iron, ductile iron, or stainless steel. 29 e. Seat: Reinforced PTFE or metal. 30 f. Stem: Stainless steel; offset from seat plane. 31 g. Disc: Carbon steel. 32 h. Service: Bidirectional. 33 34 2.7 BRONZE LIFT CHECK VALVES 35 36 A. Class 125, Lift Check Valves with Bronze Disc: 37 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of 38 the following: 39 a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. 40 b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. 41 c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. 42 2. Description: 43 a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 1. 44 b. CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). 45 c. Body Design: Vertical flow. 46 d. Body Material: ASTM B 61 or ASTM B 62, bronze. 47 e. Ends: Threaded. 48 f. Disc: Bronze.
09/April/2018 23 05 23 - 7 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 2 B. Class 125, Lift Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc: 3 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of 4 the following: 5 a. Flo Fab Inc. 6 b. Hammond Valve. 7 c. Kitz Corporation. 8 d. Milwaukee Valve Company. 9 e. Mueller Steam Specialty; a division of SPX Corporation. 10 f. NIBCO INC. 11 g. Red-White Valve Corporation. 12 h. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 13 2. Description: 14 a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 2. 15 b. CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). 16 c. Body Design: Vertical flow. 17 d. Body Material: ASTM B 61 or ASTM B 62, bronze. 18 e. Ends: Threaded. 19 f. Disc: NBR, PTFE, or TFE. 20 21 2.8 BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES 22 23 A. Class 125, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc: 24 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of 25 the following: 26 a. American Valve, Inc. 27 b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. 28 c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. 29 d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. 30 e. Hammond Valve. 31 f. Kitz Corporation. 32 g. Milwaukee Valve Company. 33 h. NIBCO INC. 34 i. Powell Valves. 35 j. Red-White Valve Corporation. 36 k. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 37 l. Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc. 38 2. Description: 39 a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 3. 40 b. CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). 41 c. Body Design: Horizontal flow. 42 d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze. 43 e. Ends: Threaded. 44 f. Disc: Bronze. 45 46 B. Class 125, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc: 47 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of 48 the following:
09/April/2018 23 05 23 - 8 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. 2 b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. 3 c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. 4 d. Hammond Valve. 5 e. Kitz Corporation. 6 f. Milwaukee Valve Company. 7 g. NIBCO INC. 8 h. Red-White Valve Corporation. 9 i. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 10 2. Description: 11 a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 4. 12 b. CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). 13 c. Body Design: Horizontal flow. 14 d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze. 15 e. Ends: Threaded. 16 f. Disc: PTFE or TFE. 17 18 C. Class 150, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc: 19 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of 20 the following: 21 a. American Valve, Inc. 22 b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. 23 c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. 24 d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. 25 e. Kitz Corporation. 26 f. Milwaukee Valve Company. 27 g. NIBCO INC. 28 h. Red-White Valve Corporation. 29 i. Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc. 30 2. Description: 31 a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 3. 32 b. CWP Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa). 33 c. Body Design: Horizontal flow. 34 d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze. 35 e. Ends: Threaded. 36 f. Disc: Bronze. 37 38 D. Class 150, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc: 39 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of 40 the following: 41 a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. 42 b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. 43 c. Hammond Valve. 44 d. Milwaukee Valve Company. 45 e. NIBCO INC. 46 f. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 47 2. Description: 48 a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 4.
09/April/2018 23 05 23 - 9 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 b. CWP Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa). 2 c. Body Design: Horizontal flow. 3 d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze. 4 e. Ends: Threaded. 5 f. Disc: PTFE or TFE. 6 7 2.9 IRON SWING CHECK VALVES 8 9 A. Class 125, Iron Swing Check Valves with Metal Seats: 10 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of 11 the following: 12 a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. 13 b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. 14 c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. 15 d. Hammond Valve. 16 e. Kitz Corporation. 17 f. Legend Valve. 18 g. Milwaukee Valve Company. 19 h. NIBCO INC. 20 i. Powell Valves. 21 j. Red-White Valve Corporation. 22 k. Sure Flow Equipment Inc. 23 l. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 24 m. Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc. 25 2. Description: 26 a. Standard: MSS SP-71, Type I. 27 b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12 (DN 65 to DN 300), CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). 28 c. Body Design: Clear or full waterway. 29 d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. 30 e. Ends: Flanged. 31 f. Trim: Bronze. 32 g. Gasket: Asbestos free. 33 34 B. Class 125, Iron Swing Check Valves with Nonmetallic-to-Metal Seats: 35 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of 36 the following: 37 a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. 38 b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. 39 2. Description: 40 a. Standard: MSS SP-71, Type I. 41 b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12 (DN 65 to DN 300), CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). 42 c. Body Design: Clear or full waterway. 43 d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. 44 e. Ends: Flanged. 45 f. Trim: Composition. 46 g. Seat Ring: Bronze. 47 h. Disc Holder: Bronze. 48 i. Disc: PTFE or TFE.
09/April/2018 23 05 23 - 10 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 j. Gasket: Asbestos free. 2 3 C. Class 250, Iron Swing Check Valves with Metal Seats: 4 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of 5 the following: 6 a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. 7 b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. 8 c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. 9 d. Hammond Valve. 10 e. Milwaukee Valve Company. 11 f. NIBCO INC. 12 g. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 13 2. Description: 14 a. Standard: MSS SP-71, Type I. 15 b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12 (DN 65 to DN 300), CWP Rating: 500 psig (3450 kPa). 16 c. Body Design: Clear or full waterway. 17 d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. 18 e. Ends: Flanged. 19 f. Trim: Bronze. 20 g. Gasket: Asbestos free. 21 22 2.10 IRON SWING CHECK VALVES WITH CLOSURE CONTROL 23 24 A. Class 125, Iron Swing Check Valves with Lever- and Spring-Closure Control: 25 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of 26 the following: 27 a. NIBCO INC. 28 2. Description: 29 a. Standard: MSS SP-71, Type I. 30 b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12 (DN 65 to DN 300), CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). 31 c. Body Design: Clear or full waterway. 32 d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. 33 e. Ends: Flanged. 34 f. Trim: Bronze. 35 g. Gasket: Asbestos free. 36 h. Closure Control: Factory-installed, exterior lever and spring. 37 38 2.11 IRON, GROOVED-END SWING CHECK VALVES 39 40 A. 300 CWP, Iron, Grooved-End Swing Check Valves: 41 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of 42 the following: 43 a. Anvil International, Inc. 44 b. Shurjoint Piping Products. 45 c. Tyco Fire Products LP; Grinnell Mechanical Products. 46 d. Victaulic Company. 47 2. Description: 48 a. CWP Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa).
09/April/2018 23 05 23 - 11 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 b. Body Material: ASTM A 536, ductile iron. 2 c. Seal: EPDM. 3 d. Disc: Spring operated, ductile iron or stainless steel. 4 5 2.12 STEEL FLANGED CHECK VALVE 6 7 A. 150 lb., steel, RF flanged end. 8 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of 9 the following: 10 a. Crane Co. 11 b. Kitz Corporation. 12 c. Velan. 13 2. Description: 14 a. CWP Rating: 285 psig @ 100 deg F. 15 b. Body Material: Cast carbon steel, ASTM A 216-WCB. 16 c. Disc: Chromium stainless steel swing disc, or cast carbon steel swing disc with 17 chromium stainless steel facing. 18 d. Ends: Flanged. 19 20 2.13 BRONZE GATE VALVES 21 22 A. Class 150, RS Bronze Gate Valves: 23 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of 24 the following: 25 a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. 26 b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. 27 c. Hammond Valve. 28 d. Kitz Corporation. 29 e. Milwaukee Valve Company. 30 f. NIBCO INC. 31 g. Powell Valves. 32 h. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 33 i. Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc. 34 2. Description: 35 a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 2. 36 b. CWP Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa). 37 c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and union-ring bonnet. 38 d. Ends: Threaded. 39 e. Stem: Bronze. 40 f. Disc: Solid wedge; bronze. 41 g. Packing: Asbestos free. 42 h. Handwheel: Malleable iron. 43 44 2.14 IRON GATE VALVES 45 46 A. Class 125, OS&Y, Iron Gate Valves: 47 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of 48 the following:
09/April/2018 23 05 23 - 12 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. 2 b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. 3 c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. 4 d. Flo Fab Inc. 5 e. Hammond Valve. 6 f. Kitz Corporation. 7 g. Legend Valve. 8 h. Milwaukee Valve Company. 9 i. NIBCO INC. 10 j. Powell Valves. 11 k. Red-White Valve Corporation. 12 l. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 13 m. Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc. 14 2. Description: 15 a. Standard: MSS SP-70, Type I. 16 b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12 (DN 65 to DN 300), CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). 17 c. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. 18 d. Ends: Flanged. 19 e. Trim: Bronze. 20 f. Disc: Solid wedge. 21 g. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free. 22 23 B. Class 250, OS&Y, Iron Gate Valves: 24 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of 25 the following: 26 a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. 27 b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. 28 c. Hammond Valve. 29 d. Milwaukee Valve Company. 30 e. NIBCO INC. 31 f. Powell Valves. 32 g. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 33 2. Description: 34 a. Standard: MSS SP-70, Type I. 35 b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12 (DN 65 to DN 300), CWP Rating: 500 psig (3450 kPa). 36 c. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. 37 d. Ends: Flanged. 38 e. Trim: Bronze. 39 f. Disc: Solid wedge. 40 g. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free. 41 42 2.15 STEEL GATE VALVE 43 44 A. 150 lb., steel, RF flanged end. 45 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of 46 the following: 47 a. Crane Co. 48 b. Kitz Corporation.
09/April/2018 23 05 23 - 13 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 c. Velan. 2 2. Description: 3 a. CWP Rating: 285 psig @ 100 deg F. 4 b. Body Material: Cast carbon steel, ASTM A 216-WCB. 5 c. Disc: Chromium stainless steel flexible wedge, or cast carbon steel flexible 6 wedge with chromium stainless steel facing. 7 d. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos-free. 8 9 2.16 BRONZE GLOBE VALVES 10 11 A. Class 125, Bronze Globe Valves with Bronze Disc: 12 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of 13 the following: 14 a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. 15 b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. 16 c. Hammond Valve. 17 d. Kitz Corporation. 18 e. Milwaukee Valve Company. 19 f. NIBCO INC. 20 g. Powell Valves. 21 h. Red-White Valve Corporation. 22 i. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 23 j. Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc. 24 2. Description: 25 a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 1. 26 b. CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). 27 c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet. 28 d. Ends: Threaded or solder joint. 29 e. Stem and Disc: Bronze. 30 f. Packing: Asbestos free. 31 g. Handwheel: Malleable iron. 32 33 B. Class 150, Bronze Globe Valves with Nonmetallic Disc: 34 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of 35 the following: 36 a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. 37 b. Hammond Valve. 38 c. Kitz Corporation. 39 d. Milwaukee Valve Company. 40 e. NIBCO INC. 41 f. Powell Valves. 42 g. Red-White Valve Corporation. 43 h. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 44 i. Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc. 45 2. Description: 46 a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 2. 47 b. CWP Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa). 48 c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and union-ring bonnet.
09/April/2018 23 05 23 - 14 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 d. Ends: Threaded. 2 e. Stem: Bronze. 3 f. Disc: PTFE or TFE. 4 g. Packing: Asbestos free. 5 h. Handwheel: Malleable iron. 6 7 2.17 IRON GLOBE VALVES 8 9 A. Class 125, Iron Globe Valves: 10 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of 11 the following: 12 a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. 13 b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. 14 c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. 15 d. Hammond Valve. 16 e. Kitz Corporation. 17 f. Milwaukee Valve Company. 18 g. NIBCO INC. 19 h. Powell Valves. 20 i. Red-White Valve Corporation. 21 j. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 22 k. Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc. 23 2. Description: 24 a. Standard: MSS SP-85, Type I. 25 b. CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). 26 c. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. 27 d. Ends: Flanged. 28 e. Trim: Bronze. 29 f. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free. 30 31 B. Class 250, Iron Globe Valves: 32 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of 33 the following: 34 a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. 35 b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. 36 c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. 37 d. Hammond Valve. 38 e. Milwaukee Valve Company. 39 f. NIBCO INC. 40 g. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 41 2. Description: 42 a. Standard: MSS SP-85, Type I. 43 b. CWP Rating: 500 psig (3450 kPa). 44 c. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. 45 d. Ends: Flanged. 46 e. Trim: Bronze. 47 f. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free. 48
09/April/2018 23 05 23 - 15 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 2.18 CHAINWHEELS 2 3 A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the 4 following: 5 1. Babbitt Steam Specialty Co. 6 2. Roto Hammer Industries. 7 3. Trumbull Industries. 8 9 B. Description: Valve actuation assembly with sprocket rim, brackets, and chain. 10 1. Brackets: Type, number, size, and fasteners required to mount actuator on valve. 11 2. Attachment: For connection to ball, butterfly and plug valve stems. 12 3. Sprocket Rim with Chain Guides: Ductile iron, of type and size required for 13 valve. Include zinc coating. 14 4. Chain: Stainless steel, of size required to fit sprocket rim. 15 16 2.19 ELECTRIC ACTUATORS 17 18 A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the 19 following: 20 1. Limitorque (Flowserve) 21 2. Tyco Valves & Controls 22 3. EIM 23 4. Crane 24 5. Keystone 25 26 B. Description: 27 1. Direct mount onto valve stem. 28 2. 120 VAC, 60 Hz, 2-position actuator, fail last position with open and closed limit 29 switches for butterfly valves. Provide similar actuators at 480 VAC for gate valves. 30 3. Size motor for 150% of required torque. 31 4. Valve closing time to be 30-60 seconds. 32 5. Provide NEMA 4X Enclosure, with space heater. 33 34 35 PART 3 - EXECUTION 36 37 3.1 EXAMINATION 38 39 A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. 40 Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during 41 shipping and handling. 42 43 B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats 44 made accessible by such operations. 45 46 C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness. 47 D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for 48 proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material
09/April/2018 23 05 23 - 16 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage. 2 3 E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves. 4 5 3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION 6 7 A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, 8 maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown. 9 10 B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. 11 12 C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe. 13 14 D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement. 15 16 E. Install chainwheels on operators for ball, butterfly, gate, globe, and plug valves NPS 4 17 (DN 100) and larger and more than 96 inches (2400 mm) above floor. Extend chains to 18 60 inches (1520 mm) above finished floor. 19 20 F. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows: 21 1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level. 22 2. Center-Guided and Plate-Type Check Valves: In horizontal or vertical position, 23 between flanges. 24 3. Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb. 25 26 3.3 ADJUSTING 27 28 A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service 29 but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs. 30 31 3.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS 32 33 A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following: 34 1. Shutoff Service: Ball, butterfly, gate, or plug valves. 35 2. Butterfly Valve Dead-End Service: Single-flange (lug) type. 36 3. Throttling Service: Globe or butterfly valves. 37 4. Pump-Discharge Check Valves: 38 a. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze swing check valves with bronze disc. 39 b. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Iron swing check valves with lever and 40 weight or with spring or iron, center-guided, metal-seat check valves. 41 42 B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of 43 valves with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted. 44 45 C. Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections: 46 1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded ends. Solder-joint 47 valve-end option is acceptable. 48 2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged ends.
09/April/2018 23 05 23 - 17 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 3. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded ends. 2 4. For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged ends. 3 5. For Grooved-End Steel Piping except Steam and Steam Condensate Piping: Valve 4 ends may be grooved. 5 6 3.5 CHILLED-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE 7 8 A. Ball Valves: 9 1. Pipe NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: One, Two or Three piece, full port, brass or 10 bronze with bronze or stainless steel trim. 11 a. Valves may be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends. 12 2. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: 13 a. Iron ball valves. 14 1) Iron Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): May be provided 15 with threaded ends instead of flanged ends. 16 b. Class 150 steel ball valves. 17 18 B. Butterfly Valves: 19 1. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: 20 a. Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12 (DN 65 to DN 21 300): 200 CWP, EPDM seat, aluminum-bronze, ductile-iron or stainless-steel 22 disc. 23 b. High-Performance Butterfly Valves: Class 150, single flange. 24 25 C. Check Valves: 26 1. Pipe NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: 27 a. Bronze Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded 28 ends. 29 b. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125 or Class 150, bronze or nonmetallic 30 disc. 31 2. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: 32 a. Iron Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): May be provided with 33 threaded ends instead of flanged ends. 34 b. Iron Swing Check Valves: Class 125 or Class 250, metal or nonmetallic-to- 35 metal seats. 36 c. Iron Swing Check Valves with Closure Control, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12 (DN 65 37 to DN 300): Class 125, lever and spring. 38 d. Iron, Grooved-End Check Valves, NPS 3 to NPS 12 (DN 80 to DN 300): 300 39 CWP. 40 41 D. Gate Valves: 42 1. Pipe NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze Valves, Class 150, NRS or RS with 43 threaded ends. 44 2. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Iron Gate Valves, Class 125 or Class 250, 45 OS&Y. 46 47 E. Globe Valves: 48 1. Pipe NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze angle or globe valves, Class 125 or Class
09/April/2018 23 05 23 - 18 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 150, bronze or nonmetallic disc, with threaded ends. 2 2. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Iron globe valves, Class 125 or Class 250 with 3 flanged ends. 4 5 F. Plug Valves: 6 1. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: 7 a. Lubricated Plug Valves: Class 125 or Class 250, cylindrical, threaded or flanged. 8 b. Eccentric Plug Valves: 175 CWP, resilient seating. 9 10 11 END OF SECTION
09/April/2018 23 05 23 - 19 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 SECTION 23 05 29 2 3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 4 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 6 7 1.1 SUMMARY 8 9 A. Section Includes: 10 1. Metal pipe hangers and supports. 11 2. Trapeze pipe hangers. 12 3. Fiberglass pipe hangers. 13 4. Metal framing systems. 14 5. Fiberglass strut systems. 15 6. Thermal-hanger shield inserts. 16 7. Fastener systems. 17 8. Pipe stands. 18 9. Equipment supports. 19 20 1.2 DEFINITIONS 21 22 A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc. 23 24 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 25 26 A. Delegated Design: Design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports, including 27 comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using 28 performance requirements and design criteria indicated. 29 30 1.4 SUBMITTALS 31 32 A. Refer to Submittal at the end of Part 3 for a list of submittal requirements for this Section. 33 34 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS 35 36 A. Welding certificates. 37 38 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE 39 40 A. Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to 41 AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 42 43 B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler 44 and Pressure Vessel Code. 45 46 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 47 48 2.1 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
09/April/2018 23 05 29 - 1 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 2 A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports: 3 1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. 4 2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped. 5 3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner. 6 4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to 7 support bearing surface of piping. 8 5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel. 9 10 B. Copper Pipe Hangers: 11 1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-coated-steel, factory- 12 fabricated components. 13 2. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of copper-coated 14 steel. 15 2.2 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS 16 17 A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made 18 from structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, 19 saddles, and U-bolts. 20 21 2.3 FIBERGLASS PIPE HANGERS 22 23 A. Clevis-Type, Fiberglass Pipe Hangers: 24 1. Description: Similar to MSS SP-58, Type 1, steel pipe hanger except hanger is made 25 of fiberglass or fiberglass-reinforced resin. 26 2. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, washer, and nuts made of polyurethane. 27 28 B. Strap-Type, Fiberglass Pipe Hangers: 29 1. Description: Similar to MSS SP-58, Type 9 or Type 10, steel pipe hanger except 30 hanger is made of fiberglass-reinforced resin. 31 32 2.4 FASTENER SYSTEMS 33 34 A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement 35 concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and 36 building materials where used. 37 38 B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel anchors, for use in 39 hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities 40 appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 41 42 2.5 PIPE STANDS 43 44 A. General Requirements for Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated assemblies made of 45 manufactured corrosion-resistant components to support roof-mounted piping. 46 47 B. Compact Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic unit with integral-rod roller, pipe clamps, or V- 48 shaped cradle to support pipe, for roof installation without membrane penetration.
09/April/2018 23 05 29 - 2 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 2.6 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS 2 3 A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural 4 carbon-steel shapes. 5 6 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS 7 8 A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and 9 galvanized. 10 11 B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and 12 nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications. 13 1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 14 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength. 15 16 PART 3 - EXECUTION 17 18 3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION 19 20 A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, 21 supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the 22 building structure. 23 24 B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. 25 Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field- 26 fabricated trapeze pipe hangers. 27 1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or 28 install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual 29 pipe hangers. 30 2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads 31 being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 32 33 C. Fiberglass Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with applicable portions of MSS SP-69 and 34 MSS SP-89. Install hangers and attachments as required to properly support piping from 35 building structure. 36 37 D. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping, and 38 support together on field-assembled metal framing systems. 39 40 E. Fiberglass Strut System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping, and 41 support together on field-assembled fiberglass struts. 42 43 F. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping. 44 45 G. Fastener System Installation: 46 1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs 47 less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely 48 cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer.
09/April/2018 23 05 29 - 3 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual. 2 2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and 3 completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions. 4 5 H. Pipe Stand Installation: 6 1. Pipe Stand Types except Curb-Mounted Type: Assemble components and mount 7 on smooth roof surface. Do not penetrate roof membrane. 8 2. Curb-Mounted-Type Pipe Stands: Assemble components or fabricate pipe stand and 9 mount on permanent, stationary roof curb. See Section 07 72 00 "Roof Accessories" 10 for curbs. 11 12 I. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, 13 washers, and other accessories. 14 15 J. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes. 16 17 K. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping 18 systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of 19 expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units. 20 21 L. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying. 22 23 M. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install 24 additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, 25 NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete 26 inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars 27 through openings at top of inserts. 28 29 N. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and 30 stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. 31 32 O. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not 33 exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping. 34 35 P. Insulated Piping: 36 1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping. 37 a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project 38 through insulation. 39 b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield 40 insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert. 41 c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services 42 piping. 43 2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is 44 indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. 45 a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight- 46 distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger if pipe is installed on 47 rollers. 48 3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier.
09/April/2018 23 05 29 - 4 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees. 2 a. Thermal-hanger shield inserts shall be used. Include steel weight-distribution 3 plate for pipe NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger if pipe is installed on rollers. 4 4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following: 5 a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN 8 to DN 90): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.048 6 inch (1.22 mm) thick. 7 b. NPS 4 (DN 100): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.06 inch (1.52 mm) thick. 8 c. NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN 125 and DN 150): 18 inches (457 mm) long and 0.06 9 inch (1.52 mm) thick. 10 d. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping 11 insulation. 12 e. Pipes NPS 1-1/2 through NPS 6 (DN 40 to DN 150) will include wood or 13 calcium silicate inserts of length at least as long as protective shield, piping 14 smaller than NPS 1/2 (DN 40) shall only have a Type 40 protective shield. 15 16 3.2 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS 17 18 A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to 19 support equipment above floor. 20 21 B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth. 22 23 C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports. 24 25 3.3 METAL FABRICATIONS 26 27 A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment 28 supports. 29 30 B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that 31 cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. 32 33 C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc 34 welding; appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; 35 and with the following: 36 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and 37 corrosion resistance of base metals. 38 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 39 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 40 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so 41 contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours. 42 43 3.4 ADJUSTING 44 45 A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to 46 achieve indicated slope of pipe. 47 48 B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches (40
09/April/2018 23 05 29 - 5 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 mm). 2 3 3.5 PAINTING 4 5 A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas 6 immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop 7 painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 8 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils 9 (0.05 mm). 10 11 3.6 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
ITEM NO. SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT AS INDICATED WITH BID 23 05 29-01 Product Data: For each type of prod- Per construction schedule uct indicated 23 05 29-02 Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a Per construction schedule qualified professional enginner. Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following; include Product Data for components: 1. Trapeze pipe hangers. 2. Metal framing systems. 3. Fiberglass strut systems 4. Pipe stands. 5. Equipment supports. 23 05 29-03 Delegated-Design Submittal: For tra- Per construction schedule peze hangers indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their prepara- tion 1. Detail fabrication and assembly of trapeze hangers. 2. Design calculations: Calculate requirements for designing tra- peze hangers. 12 13 14 END OF SECTION
09/April/2018 23 05 29 - 6 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 SECTION 23 05 48 2 3 VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC 4 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 6 7 1.1 SUMMARY 8 9 A. This Section includes the following: 10 1. Isolation mounts. 11 2. Freestanding spring isolators. 12 3. Housed spring mounts. 13 4. Spring hangers. 14 5. Restrained vibration isolation roof-curb rails. 15 6. Steel vibration isolation equipment bases. 16 17 1.2 DEFINITIONS 18 19 A. IBC: International Building Code. 20 21 B. ICC-ES: ICC-Evaluation Service. 22 23 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 24 25 A. Wind-Restraint Loading: 26 1. Refer to Structural Drawings. 27 28 29 B. Seismic-Restraint Loading: 30 1. Refer to Structural Drawings. 31 32 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS 33 34 A. Refer to Submittal at the end of Part 3 for a list of submittal requirements for this Section. 35 36 37 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 38 39 2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS 40 41 A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the 42 following: 43 1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 44 2. Kinetics Noise Control. 45 3. Mason Industries. 46 4. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc. 47 48 B. Mounts: Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant rubber, hermetically sealed
09/April/2018 23 05 48 - 1 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 compressed fiberglass, or neoprene isolator elements with factory-drilled, encapsulated top 2 plate for bolting to equipment and with baseplate for bolting to structure. Color-code or 3 otherwise identify to indicate capacity range. 4 1. Materials: Cast-ductile-iron or welded steel housing containing two separate and 5 opposing, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene elements that prevent central threaded 6 element and attachment hardware from contacting the housing during normal 7 operation. 8 2. Neoprene: Shock-absorbing materials compounded according to the standard for 9 bridge-bearing neoprene as defined by AASHTO. 10 11 C. Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, open-spring isolators. 12 1. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the 13 spring at rated load. 14 2. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 15 3. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 16 4. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without 17 deformation or failure. 18 5. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) 19 thick, rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside. Baseplates shall limit 20 floor load to 500 psig (3447 kPa). 21 6. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap 22 screw to fasten and level equipment. 23 24 D. Housed Spring Mounts: Housed spring isolator with integral seismic snubbers. 25 1. Housing: Ductile-iron or steel housing to provide all-directional seismic restraint. 26 2. Base: Factory drilled for bolting to structure. 27 3. Snubbers: Vertically adjustable to allow a maximum of 1/4-inch (6-mm) travel up or 28 down before contacting a resilient collar. 29 30 E. Spring Hangers: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger with spring and 31 insert in compression. 32 1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a 33 maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or 34 reducing isolation efficiency. 35 2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the 36 spring at rated load. 37 3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 38 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 39 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without 40 deformation or failure. 41 6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer- 42 reinforced cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame. 43 7. Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and 44 support spring coil. 45 46 2.2 VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT BASES 47 48 A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
09/April/2018 23 05 48 - 2 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 following: 2 1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 3 2. Kinetics Noise Control. 4 3. Mason Industries. 5 4. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc. 6 7 B. Concrete Inertia Base: field-fabricated, welded, structural-steel bases and rails ready for 8 placement of cast-in-place concrete. 9 1. Design Requirements: Lowest possible mounting height with not less than 1-inch 10 (25-mm) clearance above the floor. Include equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary 11 motor slide bases or rails. 12 a. Include supports for suction and discharge elbows for pumps. 13 14 2. Structural Steel: Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M. 15 Bases shall have shape to accommodate supported equipment. 16 3. Support Brackets: Factory-welded steel brackets on frame for outrigger isolation 17 mountings and to provide for anchor bolts and equipment support. 18 4. Fabrication: Fabricate steel templates to hold equipment anchor-bolt sleeves and 19 anchors in place during placement of concrete. Obtain anchor-bolt templates from 20 supported equipment manufacturer. 21 22 2.3 FACTORY FINISHES 23 24 A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting. 25 26 27 PART 3 - EXECUTION 28 29 3.1 EXAMINATION 30 31 A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and wind-control devices for 32 compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting 33 performance. 34 35 B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations 36 before installation. 37 38 C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 39 40 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 41 42 A. Perform tests and inspections. 43 44 B. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. 45 46 C. Prepare test and inspection reports. 47 48 3.3 ADJUSTING
09/April/2018 23 05 48 - 3 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 2 A. Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight. 3 4 B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating 5 height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of 6 contact during normal operation. 7 8 C. Adjust active height of spring isolators. 9 10 D. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation. 11 12 3.4 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT AS INDICATED PART 4 - ITEM NO. WITH BID 23 05 48-01 Product Data: For the following Per construction schedule 1. Include rated load, rated de- flection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation de- vice. 2. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each type and size of seismic re- straint component used. 23 05 48-02 Vibration Isolation Base Details. Detail Per construction schedule overall dimensions, including anchor- ages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxil- iary motor slides and rails, base weights, equipment static loads, power transmission, component misalign- ment, and cantilever loads 13 14 15 16 END OF SECTION
09/April/2018 23 05 48 - 4 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 SECTION 23 05 53 2 3 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 4 5 6 PART 1 - GENERAL 7 8 1.1 SUMMARY 9 10 A. Section Includes: 11 1. Equipment labels. 12 2. Warning signs and labels. 13 3. Pipe labels. 14 4. Duct labels. 15 5. Valve tags. 16 6. Warning tags. 17 18 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS 19 20 A. Refer to Submittal at the end of Part 3 for a list of submittal requirements for this Section. 21 22 23 1.3 COORDINATION 24 25 A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of 26 surfaces where devices are to be applied. 27 28 B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors. 29 30 C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. 31 32 33 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 34 35 2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS 36 37 A. Metal Labels for Equipment: 38 1. Material and Thickness: Anodized aluminum, 0.032-inch (0.8-mm) minimum 39 thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware if being 40 attached with mechanical fasteners. 41 2. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less 42 than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm). 43 3. Minimum Letter Size: 1/2 inch (13 mm) for minimum, and proportionately larger 44 lettering for viewing distances greater than 72 inches (1830 mm). Include secondary 45 lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. 46 4. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. 47 5. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with 48 substrate.
09/April/2018 23 05 53 - 1 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 6. Mechanical fasteners only to be used when adhesive is not suitable. 2 3 B. Label Content: Include equipment number. 4 5 C. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11- 6 inch (A4) bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing 7 numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the 8 Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule 9 shall be included in operation and maintenance data. 10 11 D. For HVAC equipment located above a ceiling provide a self-adhesive printed label on the 12 ceiling grid near the equipment. Label to be white with black letters. 13 14 2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS 15 16 A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 17 inch (3.2 mm) thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware if being attached 18 with mechanical fasteners. 19 20 B. Letter Color: Black. 21 22 C. Background Color: Yellow. 23 24 D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F (71 deg C). 25 26 E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 27 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm). 28 29 F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/2 inch (13 mm) minimum, and proportionately larger lettering for 30 viewing distances greater than 72 inches (1830 mm). Include secondary lettering two- 31 thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. 32 33 G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. 34 35 H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. 36 37 I. Mechanical fasteners only to be used when adhesive is not suitable. 38 2.3 PIPE LABELS 39 40 A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with 41 lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction in accordance with ASME A 13.1. 42 43 B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semi-rigid plastic formed to partially cover 44 circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive. Pretensioned 45 labels are preferred. 46 47 C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing. 48
09/April/2018 23 05 53 - 2 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or 2 abbreviations per the TRIP CAD abbreviation standards, pipe size, and an arrow 3 indicating flow direction. 4 1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to 5 accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow 6 direction. 7 2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) high. 8 9 E. Main hydronic loop piping shall have the prefix “EP” in front of the service. 10 11 2.4 DUCT LABELS 12 13 A. Self-adhesive Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent adhesive backing. 14 15 B. Letter Color: White. 16 17 C. Background Color: Blue. 18 19 D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F (71 deg C). 20 21 E. Duct Label Contents: Include identification of duct service using same designations or 22 abbreviations per the TRIP CAD abbreviation standards, duct size, and an arrow 23 indicating flow direction. 24 1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with duct system service lettering to accommodate 25 both directions or as separate unit on each duct label to indicate flow direction. 26 2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) high. 27 28 2.5 VALVE TAGS 29 30 A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) letters. 31 1. Tag Material: Anodized aluminum, 0.032-inch (0.8-mm) minimum thickness, and 32 having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware. 33 2. Fasteners: Aluminum beaded chain, or stainless steel wire. 34 35 B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (A4) bond paper. Tabulate 36 valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of 37 valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and 38 variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses. 39 1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data. 40 41 C. Follow valve tagging convention provided by IMT. 42 43 2.6 WARNING TAGS 44 45 A. Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of plasticized 46 card stock with matte finish suitable for writing. 47 48 2.7 LABELS FOR ABOVE CEILING EQUIPMENT
09/April/2018 23 05 53 - 3 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 2 A. Mechanical equipment installed above ceiling shall have a ceiling label. 3 4 B. Labels shall be self-adhesive printed label, white or clear background, with black text. 5 Width shall be no wider than ceiling grid. 6 7 C. Refer to equipment naming convention above. 8 9 D. Apply label to closest available ceiling grid. 10 11 12 PART 3 - EXECUTION 13 14 3.1 PREPARATION 15 16 A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification 17 devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and 18 encapsulants. 19 20 3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION 21 22 A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment. 23 24 B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible. 25 26 3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION 27 28 A. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; 29 machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and 30 exterior exposed locations as follows: 31 1. Near each valve and control device. 32 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal 33 units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 34 3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures. 35 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed 36 piping. 37 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 38 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) along each run. Reduce intervals to 39 25 feet (7.6 m) in areas of congested piping and equipment. 40 41 B. Pipe Label Color Schedule: 42 1. Chilled-Water Piping: 43 a. Background Color: Green. 44 b. Letter Color: White. 45 46 3.4 DUCT LABEL INSTALLATION 47 48 A. Locate duct labels where ductwork is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished
09/April/2018 23 05 53 - 4 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, and plenums; and 2 exterior exposed locations as follows: 3 1. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal 4 units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each duct at branch. 5 2. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures. 6 3. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed 7 duct. 8 4. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 9 5. Spaced at maximum intervals of 25 feet (7.5 m) along each run. 10 11 B. Duct Label Color Schedule: 12 1. Return Air, Outside Air, Supply Air, Exhaust: 13 a. Background Color: Blue 14 b. Letter Color: White. 15 16 3.5 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION 17 18 A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where 19 required. 20 21 3.6 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT AS INDICATED PART 4 - ITEM NO. WITH BID 23 05 53-01 Product Data: For each type of prod- Per construction schedule uct indicated 23 05 53-02 Samples: For color, letter style, and Per construction schedule graphic representation required for each identification material and device 23 05 53-03 Equipment Label Schedule: Include a Per construction schedule listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed content for each label. 23 05 53-04 Valve numbering scheme Per construction schedule 23 05 53-05 Valve Schedules: For each piping sys- Per construction schedule tem to include in maintenance manu- als. 22 23 24 25 END OF SECTION
09/April/2018 23 05 53 - 5 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 SECTION 230593
2 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
3 PART 1 - GENERAL
4 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
5 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary 6 Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
7 1.2 SUMMARY
8 A. Section Includes: 9 1. Balancing Air Systems: 10 a. Constant-volume air systems. 11 b. Variable-air-volume systems. 12 c. Multizone systems. 13 2. Balancing Hydronic Piping Systems: 14 a. Variable-flow hydronic systems. 15 3. Balancing steam systems. 16 4. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Equipment: 17 a. Motors. 18 b. Chillers. 19 c. Heat-transfer coils. 20 5. Testing, adjusting, and balancing existing systems and equipment. 21 6. Sound tests. 22 7. Vibration tests. 23 8. Duct leakage tests. 24 9. Control system verification.
25 1.3 DEFINITIONS
26 A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.
27 B. BAS: Building automation systems.
28 C. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.
29 D. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
30 E. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.
31 F. TAB Specialist: An independent entity meeting qualifications to perform TAB work.
32 G. TDH: Total dynamic head.
09/April/2018 23 05 93 - 1 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
2 A. TAB Conference: If requested by the Owner, conduct a TAB conference at Project site 3 after approval of the TAB strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual 4 understanding of the details. Provide a minimum of 14 days' advance notice of scheduled 5 meeting time and location. 6 1. Minimum Agenda Items: 7 a. The Contract Documents examination report. 8 b. The TAB plan. 9 c. Needs for coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors. 10 d. Proposed procedures for documentation and communication flow.
11 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
12 A. Submittals: 13 1. Air-Balance Report per ASHRAE 62.1, Section 7.2.2 - "Air Balancing." 14 2. TAB Report: Documentation of work performed for ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, 15 Section 6.7.2.3 - "System Balancing."
16 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
17 A. Qualification Data: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 18 documentation that the TAB specialist and this Project's TAB team members meet the 19 qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
20 B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to 21 Proceed, submit the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3.
22 C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 23 TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article.
24 D. System Readiness Checklists: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 25 system readiness checklists as specified in "Preparation" Article.
26 E. Examination Report: Submit a summary report of the examination review required in 27 "Examination" Article.
28 F. Certified TAB reports.
29 G. Sample report forms.
30 H. Instrument calibration reports, to include the following: 31 1. Instrument type and make. 32 2. Serial number. 33 3. Application. 34 4. Dates of use. 35 5. Dates of calibration.
09/April/2018 23 05 93 - 2 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
2 A. TAB Specialists Qualifications: Certified by AABC, NEBB or TABB. 3 1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by AABC, 4 NEBB or TABB. 5 2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by AABC, NEBB or 6 TABB as a TAB technician.
7 B. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: Comply with requirements in 8 ASHRAE 111, Section 4, "Instrumentation."
9 C. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 7.2.2 - "Air 10 Balancing."
11 D. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, 12 Section 6.7.2.3 - "System Balancing."
13 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
14 A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire 15 TAB period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with 16 Owner's operations.
17 B. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before 18 Substantial Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize 19 conflicts with Owner's operations.
20 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
21 Not Used
22 PART 3 - EXECUTION
23 3.1 EXAMINATION
24 A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to 25 discover conditions in systems designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and 26 equipment.
27 B. Examine installed systems for balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, 28 thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume 29 dampers. Verify that locations of these balancing devices are applicable for intended 30 purpose and are accessible.
31 C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.
09/April/2018 23 05 93 - 3 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design 2 assumptions for environmental conditions and systems output, and statements of 3 philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.
4 E. Examine ceiling plenums and underfloor air plenums used for supply, return, or relief air to 5 verify that they are properly separated from adjacent areas. Verify that penetrations in 6 plenum walls are sealed and fire-stopped if required.
7 F. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves. 8 1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system 9 effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced 10 capacities in all or part of a system. 11 2. Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment 12 when installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate 13 equipment performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and 14 charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems 15 - Duct Design." Compare results with the design data and installed conditions.
16 G. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing, 17 cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.
18 H. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections.
19 I. Examine HVAC equipment and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, 20 filters are clean, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.
21 J. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, and verify that they are 22 accessible and their controls are connected and functioning.
23 K. Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens have been replaced by permanent screens 24 with indicated perforations.
25 L. Examine control valves for proper installation for their intended function of throttling, 26 diverting, or mixing fluid flows.
27 M. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.
28 N. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.
29 O. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment.
30 P. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. 31 Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if 32 different from indicated values.
33 3.2 PREPARATION
34 A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes the following: 35 1. Equipment and systems to be tested.
09/April/2018 23 05 93 - 4 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 2. Strategies and step-by-step procedures for balancing the systems. 2 3. Instrumentation to be used. 3 4. Sample forms with specific identification for all equipment.
4 B. Perform system-readiness checks of HVAC systems and equipment to verify system 5 readiness for TAB work. Include, at a minimum, the following: 6 1. Airside: 7 a. Verify that leakage and pressure tests on air distribution systems have been 8 satisfactorily completed. 9 b. Duct systems are complete with terminals installed. 10 c. Volume, smoke, and fire dampers are open and functional. 11 d. Clean filters are installed. 12 e. Fans are operating, free of vibration, and rotating in correct direction. 13 f. Variable-frequency controllers' startup is complete and safeties are verified. 14 g. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational. 15 h. Ceilings are installed. 16 i. Windows and doors are installed. 17 j. Suitable access to balancing devices and equipment is provided. 18 2. Hydronics: 19 a. Verify leakage and pressure tests on water distribution systems have been 20 satisfactorily completed. 21 b. Piping is complete with terminals installed. 22 c. Water treatment is complete. 23 d. Systems are flushed, filled, and air purged. 24 e. Strainers are pulled and cleaned. 25 f. Control valves are functioning per the sequence of operation. 26 g. Shutoff and balance valves have been verified to be 100 percent open. 27 h. Pumps are started and proper rotation is verified. 28 i. Pump gage connections are installed directly at pump inlet and outlet flanges 29 or in discharge and suction pipe prior to valves or strainers. 30 j. Variable-frequency controllers' startup is complete and safeties are verified. 31 k. Suitable access to balancing devices and equipment is provided.
32 3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING
33 A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures 34 contained in AABC's "National Standards for Total System Balance", ASHRAE 111, 35 NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental 36 Systems", SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" and in this 37 Section.
38 B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the 39 minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures. 40 1. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and 41 thickness as used to construct ducts. 42 2. After testing and balancing, install test ports and duct access doors that comply with 43 requirements in Section 23 31 13 "Metal HVAC Ducwork and Accessories."
09/April/2018 23 05 93 - 5 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 3. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation, 2 coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Section 23 07 00 “HVAC 3 Insulation” and Section 23 07 19 "HVAC Piping Insulation."
4 C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position 5 indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other 6 suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings.
7 D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.
8 3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS
9 A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and 10 recommended testing procedures. Cross-check the summation of required outlet volumes 11 with required fan volumes.
12 B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.
13 C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.
14 D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow 15 measurements.
16 E. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and 17 exhaust-air dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.
18 F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
19 G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
20 H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.
21 I. Check for airflow blockages.
22 J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.
23 K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components.
24 L. Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Section 23 31 13 "Metal HVAC 25 Ductwork and Accesorries."
26 3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS
27 A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed 28 listed by fan manufacturer. 29 1. Measure total airflow. 30 a. Set outside-air, return-air, and relief-air dampers for proper position that 31 simulates minimum outdoor-air conditions.
09/April/2018 23 05 93 - 6 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 b. Where duct conditions allow, measure airflow by Pitot-tube traverse. If 2 necessary, perform multiple Pitot-tube traverses to obtain total airflow. 3 c. Where duct conditions are not suitable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, a 4 coil traverse may be acceptable. 5 d. If a reliable Pitot-tube traverse or coil traverse is not possible, measure airflow 6 at terminals and calculate the total airflow. 7 2. Measure fan static pressures as follows: 8 a. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible 9 connection. 10 b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan inlet or through the flexible 11 connection. 12 c. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up the air-handling 13 system. 14 d. Report artificial loading of filters at the time static pressures are measured. 15 3. Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static pressures versus 16 actual static pressures. Calculate actual system-effect factors. Recommend 17 adjustments to accommodate actual conditions. 18 4. Obtain approval from Construction Manager for adjustment of fan speed higher or 19 lower than indicated speed. Comply with requirements in HVAC Sections for air- 20 handling units for adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated air- 21 handling-unit performance. 22 5. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult 23 equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and 24 measure fan-motor amperage to ensure that no overload occurs. Measure amperage 25 in full-cooling, full-heating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine 26 the maximum required brake horsepower.
27 B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated 28 airflows. 29 1. Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts. 30 2. Adjust submain and branch duct volume dampers for specified airflow. 31 3. Re-measure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted.
32 C. Adjust air inlets and outlets for each space to indicated airflows. 33 1. Set airflow patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts. 34 2. Measure inlets and outlets airflow. 35 3. Adjust each inlet and outlet for specified airflow. 36 4. Re-measure each inlet and outlet after they have been adjusted.
37 D. Verify final system conditions. 38 1. Re-measure and confirm that minimum outdoor, return, and relief airflows are 39 within design. Readjust to design if necessary. 40 2. Re-measure and confirm that total airflow is within design. 41 3. Re-measure all final fan operating data, rpms, volts, amps, and static profile. 42 4. Mark all final settings. 43 5. Test system in economizer mode. Verify proper operation and adjust if necessary. 44 6. Measure and record all operating data. 45 7. Record final fan-performance data.
09/April/2018 23 05 93 - 7 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 3.6 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS
2 A. Adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows: 3 1. Verify that the system static pressure sensor is located two-thirds of the distance 4 down the duct from the fan discharge. 5 2. Verify that the system is under static pressure control. 6 3. Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow. Measure inlet 7 static pressure, and adjust system static pressure control set point so the entering 8 static pressure for the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of the terminal- 9 unit manufacturer's recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static 10 pressure needed to overcome terminal-unit discharge system losses. 11 4. Calibrate and balance each terminal unit for maximum and minimum design airflow 12 as follows: 13 a. Adjust controls so that terminal is calling for maximum airflow. Some 14 controllers require starting with minimum airflow. Verify calibration procedure 15 for specific project. 16 b. Measure airflow and adjust calibration factor as required for design maximum 17 airflow. Record calibration factor. 18 c. When maximum airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from 19 terminal units. 20 d. Adjust controls so that terminal is calling for minimum airflow. 21 e. Measure airflow and adjust calibration factor as required for design minimum 22 airflow. Record calibration factor. If no minimum calibration is available, note 23 any deviation from design airflow. 24 f. When in full cooling or full heating, ensure that there is no mixing of hot-deck 25 and cold-deck airstreams unless so designed. 26 g. On constant volume terminals, in critical areas where room pressure is to be 27 maintained, verify that the airflow remains constant over the full range of full 28 cooling to full heating. Note any deviation from design airflow or room 29 pressure. 30 5. After terminals have been calibrated and balanced, test and adjust system for total 31 airflow. Adjust fans to deliver total design airflows within the maximum allowable 32 fan speed listed by fan manufacturer. 33 a. Set outside-air, return-air, and relief-air dampers for proper position that 34 simulates minimum outdoor-air conditions. 35 b. Set terminals for maximum airflow. If system design includes diversity, adjust 36 terminals for maximum and minimum airflow so that connected total matches 37 fan selection and simulates actual load in the building. 38 c. Where duct conditions allow, measure airflow by Pitot-tube traverse. If 39 necessary, perform multiple Pitot-tube traverses to obtain total airflow. 40 d. Where duct conditions are not suitable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, a 41 coil traverse may be acceptable. 42 e. If a reliable Pitot-tube traverse or coil traverse is not possible, measure airflow 43 at terminals and calculate the total airflow. 44 6. Measure fan static pressures as follows: 45 a. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible 46 connection.
09/April/2018 23 05 93 - 8 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan inlet or through the flexible 2 connection. 3 c. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up the air-handling 4 system. 5 d. Report any artificial loading of filters at the time static pressures are measured. 6 7. Set final return and outside airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return 7 airflow and minimum outdoor airflow. 8 a. Balance the return-air ducts and inlets the same as described for constant- 9 volume air systems. 10 b. Verify that terminal units are meeting design airflow under system maximum 11 flow. 12 8. Re-measure the inlet static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the 13 system static pressure set point to the most energy-efficient set point to maintain the 14 optimum system static pressure. Record set point and give to controls contractor. 15 9. Verify final system conditions as follows: 16 a. Re-measure and confirm that minimum outdoor, return, and relief airflows are 17 within design. Readjust to match design if necessary. 18 b. Re-measure and confirm that total airflow is within design. 19 c. Re-measure final fan operating data, rpms, volts, amps, and static profile. 20 d. Mark final settings. 21 e. Test system in economizer mode. Verify proper operation and adjust if 22 necessary. Measure and record all operating data. 23 f. Verify tracking between supply and return fans.
24 3.7 PROCEDURES FOR MULTIZONE SYSTEMS
25 A. Position the unit's automatic zone dampers for maximum flow through the cooling coil.
26 B. The procedures for multizone systems will utilize the zone balancing dampers to achieve 27 the indicated airflow within the zone.
28 C. After balancing, place the unit's automatic zone dampers for maximum heating flow. Retest 29 zone airflows and record any variances.
30 D. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed 31 listed by fan manufacturer. 32 1. Measure total airflow. 33 a. Set outside-air, return-air and relief-air dampers for proper position that 34 simulates minimum outdoor air conditions. 35 b. Where duct conditions allow, measure airflow by Pitot-tube traverse. If 36 necessary, perform multiple Pitot-tube traverses to obtain total airflow. 37 c. Where duct conditions are not suitable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, a 38 coil traverse may be acceptable. 39 d. If a reliable Pitot-tube traverse or coil traverse is not possible, measure airflow 40 at terminals and calculate the total airflow. 41 2. Measure fan static pressures as follows: 42 a. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible 43 connection.
09/April/2018 23 05 93 - 9 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan inlet or through the flexible 2 connection. 3 c. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up the air-handling 4 system. 5 d. Report artificial loading of filters at the time static pressures are measured. 6 3. Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static pressures versus 7 actual static pressures. Calculate actual system-effect factors. Recommend 8 adjustments to accommodate actual conditions. 9 4. Obtain approval from Construction Manager for adjustment of fan speed higher or 10 lower than indicated speed. Comply with requirements in HVAC Sections for air- 11 handling units for adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated air- 12 handling-unit performance. 13 5. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult 14 equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and 15 measure fan-motor amperage to ensure that no overload occurs. Measure amperage 16 in full-cooling, full-heating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine 17 the maximum required brake horsepower.
18 E. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated 19 airflows. 20 1. Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts. 21 2. Adjust submain and branch duct volume dampers for specified airflow. 22 3. Re-measure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted.
23 F. Adjust air inlets and outlets for each space to indicated airflows. 24 1. Set airflow patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts. 25 2. Measure inlets and outlets airflow. 26 3. Adjust each inlet and outlet for specified airflow. 27 4. Re-measure each inlet and outlet after they have been adjusted.
28 G. Verify final system conditions. 29 1. Re-measure and confirm that minimum outdoor, return, and relief airflows are 30 within design. Readjust to match design if necessary. 31 2. Re-measure and confirm that total airflow is within design. 32 3. Re-measure all final fan operating data, rpms, volts, amps, and static profile. 33 4. Mark all final settings. 34 5. Test system in economizer mode. Verify proper operation and adjust if necessary. 35 6. Measure and record all operating data. 36 7. Record final fan-performance data.
37 3.8 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
38 A. Prepare test reports for pumps, coils, and heat exchangers. Obtain approved submittals and 39 manufacturer-recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required 40 coil and heat exchanger flow rates with pump design flow rate.
41 B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts.
09/April/2018 23 05 93 - 10 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 C. In addition to requirements in "Preparation" Article, prepare hydronic systems for testing 2 and balancing as follows: 3 1. Check liquid level in expansion tank. 4 2. Check highest vent for adequate pressure. 5 3. Check flow-control valves for proper position. 6 4. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters. 7 5. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection. 8 6. Check that air has been purged from the system.
9 3.9 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
10 A. Balance systems with automatic two- and three-way control valves by setting systems at 11 maximum flow through heat-exchange terminals, and proceed as specified above for 12 hydronic systems.
13 B. Adjust the variable-flow hydronic system as follows: 14 1. Verify that the differential-pressure sensor is located as indicated. 15 2. Determine whether there is diversity in the system.
16 C. For systems with no diversity: 17 1. Adjust pumps to deliver total design gpm. 18 a. Measure total water flow.
19 1) Position valves for full flow through coils. 20 2) Measure flow by main flow meter, if installed. 21 3) If main flow meter is not installed, determine flow by pump TDH or 22 exchanger pressure drop. 23 b. Measure pump TDH as follows:
24 1) Measure discharge pressure directly at the pump outlet flange or in 25 discharge pipe prior to any valves. 26 2) Measure inlet pressure directly at the pump inlet flange or in suction 27 pipe prior to any valves or strainers. 28 3) Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in gage heights. 29 4) Verify pump impeller size by measuring the TDH with the discharge 30 valve closed. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow 31 and verify that the pump has the intended impeller size. 32 5) With valves open, read pump TDH. Adjust pump discharge valve until 33 design water flow is achieved. 34 c. Monitor motor performance during procedures and do not operate motor in 35 an overloaded condition. 36 2. Adjust flow-measuring devices installed in mains and branches to design water flows. 37 a. Measure flow in main and branch pipes. 38 b. Adjust main and branch balance valves for design flow. 39 c. Re-measure each main and branch after all have been adjusted. 40 3. Adjust flow-measuring devices installed at terminals for each space to design water 41 flows. 42 a. Measure flow at terminals.
09/April/2018 23 05 93 - 11 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 b. Adjust each terminal to design flow. 2 c. Re-measure each terminal after it is adjusted. 3 d. Position control valves to bypass the coil and adjust the bypass valve to 4 maintain design flow. 5 e. Perform temperature tests after flows have been balanced. 6 4. For systems with pressure-independent valves at terminals: 7 a. Measure differential pressure and verify that it is within manufacturer's 8 specified range. 9 b. Perform temperature tests after flows have been verified. 10 5. For systems without pressure-independent valves or flow-measuring devices at 11 terminals: 12 a. Measure and balance coils by either coil pressure drop or temperature method. 13 b. If balanced by coil pressure drop, perform temperature tests after flows have 14 been verified. 15 6. Prior to verifying final system conditions, determine the system differential-pressure 16 set point. 17 7. If the pump discharge valve was used to set total system flow with variable- 18 frequency controller at 60 Hz, at completion open discharge valve 100 percent and 19 allow variable-frequency controller to control system differential-pressure set point. 20 Record pump data under both conditions. 21 8. Mark final settings and verify that all memory stops have been set. 22 9. Verify final system conditions as follows: 23 a. Re-measure and confirm that total water flow is within design. 24 b. Re-measure final pumps' operating data, TDH, volts, amps, and static profile. 25 c. Mark final settings. 26 10. Verify that memory stops have been set.
27 D. For systems with diversity: 28 1. Determine diversity factor. 29 2. Simulate system diversity by closing required number of control valves, as approved 30 by the design engineer. 31 3. Adjust pumps to deliver total design gpm. 32 a. Measure total water flow.
33 1) Position valves for full flow through coils. 34 2) Measure flow by main flow meter, if installed. 35 3) If main flow meter is not installed, determine flow by pump TDH or 36 exchanger pressure drop. 37 b. Measure pump TDH as follows:
38 1) Measure discharge pressure directly at the pump outlet flange or in 39 discharge pipe prior to any valves. 40 2) Measure inlet pressure directly at the pump inlet flange or in suction 41 pipe prior to any valves or strainers. 42 3) Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in gage heights. 43 4) Verify pump impeller size by measuring the TDH with the discharge 44 valve closed. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow 45 and verify that the pump has the intended impeller size.
09/April/2018 23 05 93 - 12 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 5) With valves open, read pump TDH. Adjust pump discharge valve until 2 design water flow is achieved. 3 c. Monitor motor performance during procedures and do not operate motor in 4 an overloaded condition. 5 4. Adjust flow-measuring devices installed in mains and branches to design water flows. 6 a. Measure flow in main and branch pipes. 7 b. Adjust main and branch balance valves for design flow. 8 c. Re-measure each main and branch after all have been adjusted. 9 5. Adjust flow-measuring devices installed at terminals for each space to design water 10 flows. 11 a. Measure flow at terminals. 12 b. Adjust each terminal to design flow. 13 c. Re-measure each terminal after it is adjusted. 14 d. Position control valves to bypass the coil, and adjust the bypass valve to 15 maintain design flow. 16 e. Perform temperature tests after flows have been balanced. 17 6. For systems with pressure-independent valves at terminals: 18 a. Measure differential pressure, and verify that it is within manufacturer's 19 specified range. 20 b. Perform temperature tests after flows have been verified. 21 7. For systems without pressure-independent valves or flow-measuring devices at 22 terminals: 23 a. Measure and balance coils by either coil pressure drop or temperature method. 24 b. If balanced by coil pressure drop, perform temperature tests after flows have 25 been verified. 26 8. Open control valves that were shut. Close a sufficient number of control valves that 27 were previously open to maintain diversity, and balance terminals that were just 28 opened. 29 9. Prior to verifying final system conditions, determine system differential-pressure set 30 point. 31 10. If the pump discharge valve was used to set total system flow with variable- 32 frequency controller at 60 Hz, at completion open discharge valve 100 percent and 33 allow variable-frequency controller to control system differential-pressure set point. 34 Record pump data under both conditions. 35 11. Mark final settings and verify that memory stops have been set. 36 12. Verify final system conditions as follows: 37 a. Re-measure and confirm that total water flow is within design. 38 b. Re-measure final pumps' operating data, TDH, volts, amps, and static profile. 39 c. Mark final settings. 40 13. Verify that memory stops have been set.
41 3.10 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS
42 A. Motors 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following 43 data: 44 1. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number. 45 2. Motor horsepower rating. 46 3. Motor rpm.
09/April/2018 23 05 93 - 13 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 4. Phase and hertz. 2 5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase. 3 6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase. 4 7. Starter size and thermal-protection-element rating. 5 8. Service factor and frame size.
6 B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test manual bypass of controller to 7 prove proper operation.
8 3.11 PROCEDURES FOR CHILLERS
9 A. Balance water flow through each evaporator to within specified tolerances of indicated 10 flow with all pumps operating. With only one chiller operating in a multiple chiller 11 installation, do not exceed the flow for the maximum tube velocity recommended by the 12 chiller manufacturer. Measure and record the following data with each chiller operating at 13 design conditions: 14 1. Evaporator-water entering and leaving temperatures, pressure drop, and water flow. 15 2. For water-cooled chillers, condenser-water entering and leaving temperatures, 16 pressure drop, and water flow. 17 3. Evaporator and condenser refrigerant temperatures and pressures, using instruments 18 furnished by chiller manufacturer. 19 4. Power factor if factory-installed instrumentation is furnished for measuring kilowatts. 20 5. Kilowatt input if factory-installed instrumentation is furnished for measuring 21 kilowatts. 22 6. Capacity: Calculate in tons of cooling. 23 7. For air-cooled chillers, verify condenser-fan rotation and record fan and motor data 24 including number of fans and entering- and leaving-air temperatures.
25 3.12 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT-TRANSFER COILS
26 A. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each water coil: 27 1. Entering- and leaving-water temperature. 28 2. Water flow rate. 29 3. Water pressure drop for major (more than 20 gpm) equipment coils, excluding 30 unitary equipment such as reheat coils, unit heaters, and fan-coil units. 31 4. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 32 5. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air for cooling coils. 33 6. Airflow.
34 B. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each electric heating coil: 35 1. Nameplate data. 36 2. Airflow. 37 3. Entering- and leaving-air temperature at full load. 38 4. Voltage and amperage input of each phase at full load. 39 5. Calculated kilowatt at full load. 40 6. Fuse or circuit-breaker rating for overload protection.
41 C. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each steam coil:
09/April/2018 23 05 93 - 14 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 1. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 2 2. Airflow. 3 3. Inlet steam pressure.
4 D. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each refrigerant coil: 5 1. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 6 2. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 7 3. Airflow.
8 3.13 SOUND TESTS
9 A. After the systems are balanced and construction is Substantially Complete, measure and 10 record sound levels at locations as designated by the Architect.
11 B. Instrumentation: 12 1. The sound-testing meter shall be a portable, general-purpose testing meter consisting 13 of a microphone, processing unit, and readout. 14 2. The sound-testing meter shall be capable of showing fluctuations at minimum and 15 maximum levels, and measuring the equivalent continuous sound pressure level 16 (LEQ). 17 3. The sound-testing meter must be capable of using 1/3 octave band filters to measure 18 mid-frequencies from 31.5 Hz to 8000 Hz. 19 4. The accuracy of the sound-testing meter shall be plus or minus one decibel.
20 C. Test Procedures: 21 1. Perform test at quietest background noise period. Note cause of unpreventable 22 sound that affects test outcome. 23 2. Equipment should be operating at design values. 24 3. Calibrate the sound-testing meter prior to taking measurements. 25 4. Use a microphone suitable for the type of noise levels measured that is compatible 26 with meter. Provide a windshield for outside or in-duct measurements. 27 5. Record a set of background measurements in dBA and sound pressure levels in the 28 eight un-weighted octave bands 63 Hz to 8000 Hz (NC) with the equipment off. 29 6. Take sound readings in dBA and sound pressure levels in the eight un-weighted 30 octave bands 63 Hz to 8000 Hz (NC) with the equipment operating. 31 7. Take readings no closer than 36 inches from a wall or from the operating equipment 32 and approximately 60 inches from the floor, with the meter held or mounted on a 33 tripod. 34 8. For outdoor measurements, move sound-testing meter slowly and scan area that has 35 the most exposure to noise source being tested. Use A-weighted scale for this type of 36 reading.
37 D. Reporting: 38 1. Report shall record the following: 39 a. Location. 40 b. System tested. 41 c. dBA reading. 42 d. Sound pressure level in each octave band with equipment on and off.
09/April/2018 23 05 93 - 15 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 2. Plot sound pressure levels on NC worksheet with equipment on and off.
2 3.14 VIBRATION TESTS
3 A. After systems are balanced and construction is Substantially Complete, measure and record 4 vibration levels on equipment having motor horsepower equal to or greater than 15.
5 B. Instrumentation: 6 1. Use portable, battery-operated, and microprocessor-controlled vibration meter with 7 or without a built-in printer. 8 2. The meter shall automatically identify engineering units, filter bandwidth, amplitude, 9 and frequency scale values. 10 3. The meter shall be able to measure machine vibration displacement in mils of 11 deflection, velocity in inches per second, and acceleration in inches per second 12 squared. 13 4. Verify calibration date is current for vibration meter before taking readings.
14 C. Test Procedures: 15 1. To ensure accurate readings, verify that accelerometer has a clean, flat surface and is 16 mounted properly. 17 2. With the unit running, set up vibration meter in a safe, secure location. Connect 18 transducer to meter with proper cables. Hold magnetic tip of transducer on top of 19 the bearing, and measure unit in mils of deflection. Record measurement, then move 20 transducer to the side of the bearing and record in mils of deflection. Record an axial 21 reading in mils of deflection by holding nonmagnetic, pointed transducer tip on end 22 of shaft. 23 3. Change vibration meter to velocity (inches per second) measurements. Repeat and 24 record above measurements. 25 4. Record CPM or rpm. 26 5. Read each bearing on motor, fan, and pump as required. Track and record vibration 27 levels from rotating component through casing to base.
28 D. Reporting: 29 1. Report shall record location and the system tested. 30 2. Include horizontal-vertical-axial measurements for tests. 31 3. Verify that vibration limits follow Specifications, or, if not specified, follow the 32 General Machinery Vibration Severity Chart or Vibration Acceleration General 33 Severity Chart from the AABC National Standards. Acceptable levels of vibration are 34 normally "smooth" to "good." 35 4. Include in report General Machinery Vibration Severity Chart, with conditions 36 plotted.
37 3.15 DUCT LEAKAGE TESTS
38 A. Witness the duct pressure testing performed by Installer.
39 B. Verify that proper test methods are used and that leakage rates are within specified 40 tolerances.
09/April/2018 23 05 93 - 16 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 C. Report deficiencies observed.
2 3.16 CONTROLS VERIFICATION
3 A. In conjunction with system balancing, perform the following: 4 1. Verify temperature control system is operating within the design limitations. 5 2. Confirm that the sequences of operation are in compliance with Contract 6 Documents. 7 3. Verify that controllers are calibrated and function as intended. 8 4. Verify that controller set points are as indicated. 9 5. Verify the operation of lockout or interlock systems. 10 6. Verify the operation of valve and damper actuators. 11 7. Verify that controlled devices are properly installed and connected to correct 12 controller. 13 8. Verify that controlled devices travel freely and are in position indicated by controller: 14 open, closed, or modulating. 15 9. Verify location and installation of sensors to ensure that they sense only intended 16 temperature, humidity, or pressure.
17 B. Reporting: Include a summary of verifications performed, remaining deficiencies, and 18 variations from indicated conditions.
19 3.17 TOLERANCES
20 A. Set HVAC system's airflow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances: 21 1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 22 percent. 23 2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent. 24 3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent. 25 4. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent.
26 B. Maintaining pressure relationships as designed shall have priority over the tolerances 27 specified above.
28 3.18 PROGRESS REPORTING
29 A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as 30 specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems 31 balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems balancing devices to 32 facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions 33 to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and 34 balancing devices.
35 B. Status Reports: Prepare biweekly progress reports to describe completed procedures, 36 procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and 37 problems found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each 38 system and each building floor for systems serving multiple floors.
09/April/2018 23 05 93 - 17 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 3.19 FINAL REPORT
2 A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate 3 sections for tested systems and balanced systems. 4 1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by 5 the certified testing and balancing engineer. 6 2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration. 7 3. Certify validity and accuracy of field data.
8 B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following: 9 1. Pump curves. 10 2. Fan curves. 11 3. Manufacturers' test data. 12 4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers. 13 5. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop 14 Drawings and Product Data.
15 C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data: 16 1. Title page. 17 2. Name and address of the TAB specialist. 18 3. Project name. 19 4. Project location. 20 5. Architect's name and address. 21 6. Engineer's name and address. 22 7. Contractor's name and address. 23 8. Report date. 24 9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report. 25 10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the 26 report. Number each page in the report. 27 11. Summary of contents including the following: 28 a. Indicated versus final performance. 29 b. Notable characteristics of systems. 30 c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract 31 Documents. 32 12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. 33 13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings. 34 14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated 35 values. 36 15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following: 37 a. Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers. 38 b. Conditions of filters. 39 c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions. 40 d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils. 41 e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch 42 diameter. 43 f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems. 44 g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller. 45 h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.
09/April/2018 23 05 93 - 18 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. 2 Present each system with single-line diagram and include the following: 3 1. Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows. 4 2. Water and steam flow rates. 5 3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes. 6 4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations. 7 5. Terminal units. 8 6. Balancing stations. 9 7. Position of balancing devices.
10 E. Air-Handling-Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following: 11 1. Unit Data: 12 a. Unit identification. 13 b. Location. 14 c. Make and type. 15 d. Model number and unit size. 16 e. Manufacturer's serial number. 17 f. Unit arrangement and class. 18 g. Discharge arrangement. 19 h. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. 20 i. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches. 21 j. Number, make, and size of belts. 22 k. Number, type, and size of filters. 23 2. Motor Data: 24 a. Motor make, and frame type and size. 25 b. Horsepower and rpm. 26 c. Volts, phase, and hertz. 27 d. Full-load amperage and service factor. 28 e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. 29 f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches. 30 3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): 31 a. Total airflow rate in cfm. 32 b. Total system static pressure in inches wg. 33 c. Fan rpm. 34 d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg. 35 e. Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg. 36 f. Preheat-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg. 37 g. Cooling-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg. 38 h. Heating-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg. 39 i. Outdoor airflow in cfm. 40 j. Return airflow in cfm. 41 k. Outdoor-air damper position. 42 l. Return-air damper position. 43 m. Vortex damper position.
44 F. Apparatus-Coil Test Reports: 45 1. Coil Data: 46 a. System identification.
09/April/2018 23 05 93 - 19 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 b. Location. 2 c. Coil type. 3 d. Number of rows. 4 e. Fin spacing in fins per inch o.c. 5 f. Make and model number. 6 g. Face area in sq. ft.. 7 h. Tube size in NPS. 8 i. Tube and fin materials. 9 j. Circuiting arrangement. 10 2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): 11 a. Airflow rate in cfm. 12 b. Average face velocity in fpm. 13 c. Air pressure drop in inches wg. 14 d. Outdoor-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. 15 e. Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. 16 f. Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. 17 g. Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. 18 h. Water flow rate in gpm. 19 i. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig. 20 j. Entering-water temperature in deg F. 21 k. Leaving-water temperature in deg F. 22 l. Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types. 23 m. Refrigerant suction pressure in psig. 24 n. Refrigerant suction temperature in deg F. 25 o. Inlet steam pressure in psig.
26 G. Electric-Coil Test Reports: For electric coils installed in central-station air-handling units, 27 include the following: 28 1. Unit Data: 29 a. System identification. 30 b. Location. 31 c. Coil identification. 32 d. Capacity in Btu/h. 33 e. Number of stages. 34 f. Connected volts, phase, and hertz. 35 g. Rated amperage. 36 h. Airflow rate in cfm. 37 i. Face area in sq. ft.. 38 j. Minimum face velocity in fpm. 39 2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): 40 a. Heat output in Btu/h. 41 b. Airflow rate in cfm. 42 c. Air velocity in fpm. 43 d. Entering-air temperature in deg F. 44 e. Leaving-air temperature in deg F. 45 f. Voltage at each connection. 46 g. Amperage for each phase.
09/April/2018 23 05 93 - 20 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 H. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following: 2 1. Fan Data: 3 a. System identification. 4 b. Location. 5 c. Make and type. 6 d. Model number and size. 7 e. Manufacturer's serial number. 8 f. Arrangement and class. 9 g. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. 10 h. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches. 11 2. Motor Data: 12 a. Motor make, and frame type and size. 13 b. Horsepower and rpm. 14 c. Volts, phase, and hertz. 15 d. Full-load amperage and service factor. 16 e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. 17 f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches. 18 g. Number, make, and size of belts. 19 3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): 20 a. Total airflow rate in cfm. 21 b. Total system static pressure in inches wg. 22 c. Fan rpm. 23 d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg. 24 e. Suction static pressure in inches wg.
25 I. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid 26 representing the duct cross-section and record the following: 27 1. Report Data: 28 a. System and air-handling-unit number. 29 b. Location and zone. 30 c. Traverse air temperature in deg F. 31 d. Duct static pressure in inches wg. 32 e. Duct size in inches. 33 f. Duct area in sq. ft.. 34 g. Indicated airflow rate in cfm. 35 h. Indicated velocity in fpm. 36 i. Actual airflow rate in cfm. 37 j. Actual average velocity in fpm. 38 k. Barometric pressure in psig.
39 J. Air-Terminal-Device Reports: 40 1. Unit Data: 41 a. System and air-handling unit identification. 42 b. Location and zone. 43 c. Apparatus used for test. 44 d. Area served. 45 e. Make. 46 f. Number from system diagram.
09/April/2018 23 05 93 - 21 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 g. Type and model number. 2 h. Size. 3 i. Effective area in sq. ft.. 4 2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): 5 a. Airflow rate in cfm. 6 b. Air velocity in fpm. 7 c. Preliminary airflow rate as needed in cfm. 8 d. Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm. 9 e. Final airflow rate in cfm. 10 f. Final velocity in fpm. 11 g. Space temperature in deg F.
12 K. System-Coil Reports: For reheat coils and water coils of terminal units, include the 13 following: 14 1. Unit Data: 15 a. System and air-handling-unit identification. 16 b. Location and zone. 17 c. Room or riser served. 18 d. Coil make and size. 19 e. Flowmeter type. 20 2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): 21 a. Airflow rate in cfm. 22 b. Entering-water temperature in deg F. 23 c. Leaving-water temperature in deg F. 24 d. Water pressure drop in feet of head or psig. 25 e. Entering-air temperature in deg F. 26 f. Leaving-air temperature in deg F.
27 L. Pump Test Reports: Calculate impeller size by plotting the shutoff head on pump curves 28 and include the following: 29 1. Unit Data: 30 a. Unit identification. 31 b. Location. 32 c. Service. 33 d. Make and size. 34 e. Model number and serial number. 35 f. Water flow rate in gpm. 36 g. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig. 37 h. Required net positive suction head in feet of head or psig. 38 i. Pump rpm. 39 j. Impeller diameter in inches. 40 k. Motor make and frame size. 41 l. Motor horsepower and rpm. 42 m. Voltage at each connection. 43 n. Amperage for each phase. 44 o. Full-load amperage and service factor. 45 p. Seal type. 46 2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
09/April/2018 23 05 93 - 22 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 a. Static head in feet of head or psig. 2 b. Pump shutoff pressure in feet of head or psig. 3 c. Actual impeller size in inches. 4 d. Full-open flow rate in gpm. 5 e. Full-open pressure in feet of head or psig. 6 f. Final discharge pressure in feet of head or psig. 7 g. Final suction pressure in feet of head or psig. 8 h. Final total pressure in feet of head or psig. 9 i. Final water flow rate in gpm. 10 j. Voltage at each connection. 11 k. Amperage for each phase.
12 M. Instrument Calibration Reports: 13 1. Report Data: 14 a. Instrument type and make. 15 b. Serial number. 16 c. Application. 17 d. Dates of use. 18 e. Dates of calibration.
19 3.20 VERIFICATION OF TAB REPORT
20 A. Commissioning authority shall randomly select measurements, documented in the final 21 report, to be rechecked. Rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total 22 measurements recorded or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a 23 normal 8-hour business day.
24 B. If rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the final 25 report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as 26 "FAILED."
27 C. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total 28 measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be 29 considered incomplete and shall be rejected.
30 D. If TAB work fails, proceed as follows: 31 1. TAB specialists shall recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the 32 final report and balancing device settings to include all changes; resubmit the final 33 report and request a second final inspection. 34 2. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner may contract the services of another 35 TAB specialist to complete TAB work according to the Contract Documents and 36 deduct the cost of the services from the original TAB specialist's final payment. 37 3. If the second verification also fails, Owner may contact AABC Headquarters 38 regarding the AABC National Performance Guaranty.
39 E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
09/April/2018 23 05 93 - 23 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 3.21 ADDITIONAL TESTS
2 A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced 3 conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.
4 B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer 5 and winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near-peak summer and winter 6 conditions.
7 END OF SECTION
09/April/2018 23 05 93 - 24 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 SECTION 23 07 00
2 HVAC INSULATION
6 PART 1 GENERAL
7 1.1 SUMMARY
8 A. Section includes requirements necessary to furnish and install ductwork thermal insulation 9 and internal sound attenuation insulation.
10 B. Related Sections: 11 1. Section 23 05 10 – Basic Materials and Methods
12 C. In the event of conflict regarding ductwork insulation requirements between this Section 13 and another section, the provisions of this Section govern.
14 1.2 REFERENCES
15 A. Provide insulation with composite (insulation-jacket-adhesive) fire and smoke hazard 16 ratings not exceeding a flame spread of 25 and smoke developed of 50, as tested by 17 Procedure ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of 18 Building Materials, NFPA 255 Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics 19 of Building Materials, and UL 723 UL Standard for Safety Test for Surface Burning 20 Characteristics of Building Materials. Use current adopted edition.
21 B. Provide interior duct lining materials meeting the life safety standards as established by 22 NFPA 90A Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. Use 23 current adopted edition.
24 1.3 SUBMITTALS
25 A. Refer to the Submittal Schedule at the end of Part 3 for a list of submittal requirements for 26 this Section.
27 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS
28 A. Installer Qualifications: Firm with a minimum of 3 years’ experience in ductwork 29 insulation application.
30 B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm with a minimum of 10 years’ experience in ductwork 31 insulation manufacturing. 32
09/April/2018 23 07 00 - 1 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2 2.1 EXTERNAL DUCT INSULATION
3 A. Materials: 4 1. Type A: 5 a. Flexible glass-fiber insulation, thickness as scheduled, 3/4-pcf density, with 6 UL-labeled foil vapor barrier. 7 b. Thermal conductivity no greater than 0.31 Btu-inch per hour- ft 2 degrees F at 8 75 degrees F. 9 c. Acceptable Manufacturers: 10 1) CertainTeed Corp: Duct Wrap Insulation, Type 75. 11 2) Johns Manville: R-Series Microlite. 12 3) Knauf Fiber Glass: Knauf Duct Wrap. 13 4) Owens Corning: Fiberglas All Service Duct Wrap. 14 2. Type B: 15 a. Rigid glass fiber insulation per ASTM C612 Standard Specification for Mineral 16 Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation, thickness as scheduled, 3-pcf 17 density, with UL-labeled, foil-reinforced, kraft-faced vapor barrier. 18 b. Thermal conductivity no greater than 0.23 Btu-inch per hour-ft 2 degrees F at 19 75 degrees F. 20 c. Acceptable Manufacturers: 21 1) CertainTeed Corp: Fiberglass Board Insulation, Type CB 300. 22 2) Johns Manville: Type 814 Spin-Glas. 23 3) Knauf Fiber Glass: Knauf Insulation Board. 24 4) Owens Corning: Fiberglas Board Insulation, Type 703. 25 3. Type C: 26 a. Rigid glass fiber insulation per ASTM C612, thickness as scheduled, 6-pound 27 density with UL-labeled, foil-reinforced, kraft-faced vapor barrier. 28 b. Thermal conductivity no greater than 0.23 Btu-inch per hour-ft 2 degrees F at 29 75 degrees F. 30 c. Acceptable Manufacturers: 31 1) CertainTeed Corp: Fiberglass Board Insulation, Type CB 600. 32 2) Johns Manville: Type 817 Spin-Glas. 33 3) Knauf Fiber Glass: Knauf Insulation Board. 34 4) Owens Corning: Fiberglas Board Insulation, Type 705. 35
36 2.2 OUTDOOR JACKET
37 A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Childers.
38 B. Materials, Type - Aluminum Sheet, Aluminum Alloy 3003-H-4 or 5005-H-14 with Factory- 39 Applied Moisture Barrier as Listed Below:
09/April/2018 23 07 00 - 2 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO Thickness Insulated Item (Inches) Finish Ductwork width or depth smaller than 0.016 Smooth or 36 inches stucco Ductwork width or depth 36 inches or larger 0.032 Smooth or stucco
1 2.3 ACCESSORIES
2 A. Adhesives: Water based; Miracle PF 102.
3 B. Lagging Adhesive: Fire resistive.
4 C. Welded Fasteners: Galvanized steel pin and washer fastener.
5 D. Tie Wires: Galvanized, 20 gauge.
6 E. Joint Tape: Foil scrim kraft (FSK) tape.
7 F. Impale Anchors: Galvanized steel, 13-gauge nail, self-adhesive pad, 30-gauge galvanized 8 steel washers.
9 PART 3 EXECUTION
10 3.1 FIELD PREPARATION
11 A. Install external insulation materials after ductwork has been cleaned, sealed, and has passed 12 pressurization tests.
13 B. Clean surfaces to encourage adherence of adhesives.
14 3.2 INSTALLATION
15 A. General: Install materials in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
16 B. External Duct Insulation for Indoor Applications: 17 1. Application: 18 a. Secure insulation to ductwork using wires and adhesive. Type B insulation may 19 also be secured with mechanical fasteners, such as impale anchors. 20 b. Install without sag on the underside of ductwork using adhesive or mechanical 21 fasteners where necessary. Bend over nail tips after installation of washers to 22 facilitate sealing of vapor barrier and to preclude injury. Stop and point 23 insulation around access doors and damper operators to allow operation 24 without disturbing wrapping. 25 c. Lap joints and seams of external insulation a minimum of 3 inches overlap and
09/April/2018 23 07 00 - 3 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 staple 3 inches on center. Wire where required. Utilize adhesive. Where 2 insulation types meet, lap external insulation a minimum of 6 inches overlap 3 and seal the vapor barrier jacket. 4 d. Seal insulation with vapor barrier adhesive or tape matching jacket type to 5 maintain the vapor barrier. Pay particular attention to penetrations by 6 mechanical fasteners, joints and seams and to ends and edges. 7 2. 2-Inch-Thick Type A Insulation: Band insulation with wire at 12 inches on center to 8 reduce thickness to 1 inch at the bands.
9 C. External Duct Insulation, Outdoor: 10 1. Application: 11 a. Install insulation as described for Types B and C, indoor. 12 b. Install aluminum outer jacket to enclose the duct insulation. 13 2. Jacket Installation: 14 a. Provide seamless top, and cover duct tops and sides with continuous sheet if 15 possible. 16 b. Cross break top sheet or provide slope to allow water drainage. Low points on 17 ducts that allow standing water are not acceptable. 18 1) Lap end seams 2 inches minimum and overlap in the direction of water 19 flow to shed water. 20 2) Form 3/4-inch-high standing seam closure at edges; install seam closure 21 strip with mastic and rivet at 12 inches on center. 22 3) Apply mastic at overlapped end seams and install gasketed screws at 23 6 inches on center. 24 4) Extend side jacket panels to allow 1-inch rain drip lip at bottom duct 25 closure jacket, seal with mastic, and install gasketed screws at 6 inches on 26 center along bottom of side panel. 27 5) Maintain complete integrity of closure system to shed rainwater. 28
29 3.3 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE 30
ITEM NO. SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT AS INDICATED WITH BID 23 07 13-01 Product data sheets for insulation, liners, Per construction schedule and adhesives. 23 07 13-02 Shop drawings of duct, indicating location Per construction schedule and types of insulation to be used. 23 07 13-03 Manufacturer’s instructions for installation. Per construction schedule
31
09/April/2018 23 07 00 - 4 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 DUCTWORK INSULATION SCHEDULE
Insulation Location Insulation Type Thickness (Inches) Notes Primary Air Distribution A 2 11 Ductwork Supply Air Ductwork A 2 11 Return Air Ductwork A 1 2, 3 Return Air Ductwork in A 1-1/2 7 Unconditioned Spaces Exhaust Air Ductwork A 1 2, 3 Outside Air Ductwork A 1 2 Toilet Room Exhaust Ductwork A 1 Plenums (Indoor) A 1 3 Plenums (Outdoor) 2 Supply Air in Mechanical Rooms A 1 2 Supply and Return Air Ductwork Refer to 3.2/C 2 Located Outdoors Ductwork at Fans A 1 2, 9 Louver Blankoff Sections B 1 2, 10 Supply Air Ductwork Exposed in A 1 2, 5 Spaces Terminal Unit Air Distribution A 1-1/2 2 Ductwork Miscellaneous Applications Insulated Duct Support C To match insulation 3, 4,13 thickness 2 3 Notes: 4 1. Not Used. 5 2. 1-inch thickness, unless 2-inch thickness is shown or otherwise specified. 6 3. Where shown or otherwise specified. 7 4. Install at hanger supports serving externally insulated ductwork. 8 5. Duct exposed in indoor spaces it serves does not require thermal insulation. Provide acoustical 9 insulation per standard requirements. 10 6. Not Used. 11 7. Not required between floors of conditioned space. 12 8. Not Used. 13 9. Not Used.
09/April/2018 23 07 00 - 5 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 10. Maintain vapor barrier. 2 11. Double wall duct. 3 12. Only ducts located outside of return air path. 4 13. Continuous strip, 6 inches wide.
5 END OF SECTION
09/April/2018 23 07 00 - 6 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO
1 SECTION 23 07 19
2 HVAC PIPING INSULATION
3 PART 1 GENERAL
4 1.1 SUMMARY
5 A. Section Includes: 6 1. HVAC piping insulation, jackets and accessories. 7 2. HVAC equipment insulation, jackets and accessories.
8 1.2 REFERENCES
9 A. ASTM International: 10 1. ASTM A240/A240M - Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel 11 Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications. 12 2. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and 13 Plate. 14 3. ASTM C195 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement. 15 4. ASTM C449/C449M - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting 16 Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement. 17 5. ASTM C450 - Standard Practice for Fabrication of Thermal Insulating Fitting Covers 18 for NPS Piping, and Vessel Lagging. 19 6. ASTM C534 - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular 20 Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form. 21 7. ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation. 22 8. ASTM C553 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for 23 Commercial and Industrial Applications. 24 9. ASTM C585 - Standard Practice for Inner and Outer Diameters of Rigid Thermal 25 Insulation for Nominal Sizes of Pipe and Tubing (NPS System). 26 10. ASTM C921 - Standard Practice for Determining the Properties of Jacketing Materials 27 for Thermal Insulation. 28 11. ASTM C1136 - Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders 29 for Thermal Insulation. 30 12. ASTM D1785 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, 31 Schedules 40, 80, and 120. 32 13. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of 33 Materials. 34 14. ASTM E162 - Standard Test Method for Surface Flammability of Materials Using a 35 Radiant Heat Energy Source. 36
09/April/2018 23 07 19 - 1 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO
1 1.3 SUBMITTALS
2 A. Refer to the Submittal Schedule at the end of Part 3 for a list of submittal requirements for 3 this Section.
4 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
5 A. Test pipe insulation for maximum flame spread index of 25 and maximum smoke developed 6 index of not exceeding 50 in accordance with ASTM E84.
7 B. Pipe insulation manufactured in accordance with ASTM C585 for inner and outer diameters.
8 C. Factory fabricated fitting covers manufactured in accordance with ASTM C450.
9 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS
10 A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with 11 minimum three years experience.
12 B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three 13 years experience.
14 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
15 A. Specification Section 01 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, 16 storing, and protecting products.
17 B. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's 18 identification, including product density and thickness.
19 C. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and damage, by 20 storing in original wrapping.
21 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
22 A. Specification Section 01 - Product Requirements: Environmental conditions affecting 23 products on site.
24 B. Install insulation only when ambient temperature and humidity conditions are within range 25 recommended by manufacturer.
26 C. Maintain temperature before, during, and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours. 27
09/April/2018 23 07 19 - 2 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO
1 1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
2 A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
3 1.9 WARRANTY
4 A. Specification Section 01 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and 5 product bonds.
6 B. Furnish one year manufacturer warranty for man made fiber.
7 PART 2 PRODUCTS
8 2.1 PIPE INSULATION
9 A. TYPE P-1: ASTM C547, molded glass fiber pipe insulation. 10 1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.23 at 75 degrees F. 11 2. Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 850 degrees F. 12 3. Vapor Barrier Jacket: ASTM C1136, Type I, factory applied reinforced foil kraft with 13 self-sealing adhesive joints. 14 4. Jacket Temperature Limit: minus 20 to 150 degrees F. 15 5. Acceptable Manufacturers: 16 a. Owens-Corning Fiberglas 17 b. John Manville 18 c. Kanif Fiber Glass
19 B. TYPE P-2: Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation: 20 1. Type I, 850 deg F (454 deg C) 21 2. Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. 22 3. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ. 23 4. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in “Factory-Applied Jackets” Article. 24 5. Acceptable Manufacturers; 25 a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200. 26 b. Johns Manville; Micro-Lok. 27 c. Knauf Insulation; 1000(Pipe Insulation. 28 d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley-K. 29 e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.
30 C. TYPE P-3: Flexible Elastomeric 31 1. Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. 32 2. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials. 33 3. Acceptable Manufacturers: 34 a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocel. 35 b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex. 36 c. RBX Corporation; Insul-Sheet 1800 and Insul-Tube 180.
09/April/2018 23 07 19 - 3 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO
1 2.2 PIPE INSULATION JACKETS
2 A. Vapor Retarder Jacket: 3 1. ASTM C921, white Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film. 4 2. Water Vapor Permeance: ASTM E96/E96M; 0.02 perms.
5 B. PVC Plastic Pipe Jacket: 6 1. Product Description: ASTM D1785, One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet 7 material, off-white color. 8 2. Thickness: 20 mil. 9 3. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive or Pressure sensitive color matching vinyl 10 tape.
11 C. Stainless Steel Pipe Jacket: 12 1. ASTM A240/A240M OR ASTM 666 type 304 stainless steel. 13 2. Thickness: 0.010 inch thick. 14 3. Finish: Smooth 15 4. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.010 inch thick stainless steel.
16 D. Acceptable Manufacturers: 17 1. Johns Manville 18 2. Childers 19 3. Pittsburgh Corning 20 4. Knauf Proto Fitting Covers
21 2.3 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS
22 A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When 23 factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following: 24 1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; 25 complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. 26 2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a 27 removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. 28 3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; 29 complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.
30 2.4 PIPE INSULATION ACCESSORIES
31 A. Vapor Retarder Lap Adhesive: Compatible with insulation.
32 B. Covering Adhesive Mastic: Compatible with insulation.
33 C. Piping 1-1/2 inches diameter and smaller: Galvanized steel insulation protection shield. MSS 34 SP-69, Type 40. Length: Based on pipe size and insulation thickness.
35 D. Piping 2 inches diameter and larger: Insulation saddle, calcium silicate. Inserts length: not less 36 than 6 inches long, matching thickness and contour of adjoining insulation.
09/April/2018 23 07 19 - 4 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO
1 E. Closed Cell Elastomeric Insulation Pipe Hanger: Polyurethane insert with stainless steel jacket 2 single piece construction with self-adhesive closure. Thickness to match pipe insulation.
3 F. Tie Wire: 0.048 inch stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers.
4 G. Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement: ASTM 5 C449/C449M.
6 H. Insulating Cement: ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool.
7 I. Adhesives: Compatible with insulation.
8 J. Acceptable Manufacturers: 9 1. Childers 10 2. Dow Corning 11 3. Johns Manville 12 4. Knauf 13 5. Pittsburgh Corning 14 6. RPR Products 15 7. 3M
16 2.5 EQUIPMENT INSULATION
17 A. TYPE E-8: ASTM C534, Type II, flexible, closed cell elastomeric insulation, sheet. 18 1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 at 75 degrees F. 19 2. Operating Temperature Range: Range: Minus 70 to 220 degrees F.
20 2.6 EQUIPMENT INSULATION ACCESSORIES
21 A. Vapor Retarder Lap Adhesive: Compatible with insulation.
22 B. Covering Adhesive Mastic: Compatible with insulation.
23 C. Tie Wire: 0.048 inch stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers.
24 D. Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement: ASTM 25 C449/C449M.
26 E. Adhesives: Compatible with insulation.
27 PART 3 EXECUTION
28 3.1 EXAMINATION
29 A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
09/April/2018 23 07 19 - 5 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO
1 B. Verify piping and equipment has been tested before applying insulation materials.
2 C. Verify surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.
3 3.2 INSTALLATION - PIPING SYSTEMS
4 A. Piping Exposed to View in Finished Spaces: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible 5 locations.
6 B. Piping Systems Conveying Fluids Below Ambient Temperature: 7 1. Insulate entire system including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible 8 connections, pump bodies, and expansion joints. 9 2. Furnish factory-applied or field-applied vapor retarder jackets. Secure factory-applied 10 jackets with pressure sensitive adhesive self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips. 11 Secure field-applied jackets with outward clinch expanding staples and seal staple 12 penetrations with vapor retarder mastic. 13 3. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness 14 as adjacent pipe. Finish with PVC fitting covers.
15 C. Inserts and Shields: 16 1. Piping 1-1/2 inches Diameter and Smaller: Install stainless steel shield between pipe 17 hanger and insulation. 18 2. Piping 2 inches Diameter and Larger: Install insert between support shield and piping 19 and under finish jacket. 20 a. Insert Configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of thickness and contour matching 21 adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated. 22 b. Insert Material: Compression resistant insulating material suitable for planned 23 temperature range and service. 24 3. Piping Supported by Roller Type Pipe Hangers: Install stainless steel shield between 25 roller and inserts.
26 D. Pipe Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces: Finish with canvas jacket 27 sized for finish painting or PVC jacket and fitting covers.
28 E. Piping Exterior to Building: Provide vapor retarder jacket. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves 29 with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe, and finish with glass mesh 30 reinforced vapor retarder cement. Cover with stainless steel jacket with seams located at 3 or 31 9 o’clock position on side of horizontal piping with overlap facing down to shed water or on 32 bottom side of horizontal piping.
33 3.3 INSTALLATION - EQUIPMENT
34 A. Factory Insulated Equipment: Do not insulate.
35 B. Exposed Equipment: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.
36 C. Fill joints, cracks, seams, and depressions with bedding compound to form smooth surface.
09/April/2018 23 07 19 - 6 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO
1 On cold equipment, use vapor retarder cement.
2 D. Equipment Containing Fluids Below Ambient Temperature: 3 1. Insulate entire equipment surfaces. 4 2. Apply insulation close to equipment by grooving, scoring, and beveling insulation. 5 Fasten insulation to equipment with studs, pins, clips, adhesive, wires, or bands. 6 3. Furnish factory-applied or field-applied vapor retarder jackets. Secure factory-applied 7 jackets with pressure sensitive adhesive self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips. 8 Secure field-applied jackets with outward clinch expanding staples and seal staple 9 penetrations with vapor retarder mastic. 10 4. Finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.
11 E. Equipment Containing Fluids 140 degrees F Or Less: 12 1. Do not insulate flanges and unions, but bevel and seal ends of insulation. 13 2. Install insulation with factory-applied or field applied jackets, with or without vapor 14 barrier. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive. 15 3. Finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.
16 F. Equipment in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces: Finish with canvas jacket 17 sized for finish painting or PVC jacket and fitting covers.
18 G. Nameplates and ASME Stamps: Bevel and seal insulation around; do not cover with 19 insulation.
20 H. Equipment Requiring Access for Maintenance, Repair, or Cleaning: Install insulation for easy 21 removal and replacement without damage. 22
09/April/2018 23 07 19 - 7 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO
1 3.4 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
2
ITEM SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT AS INDICATED
NO. BID WITH
23 07 19-01 Product data including but not limited to: Per construction schedule • Manufacturer's name and product identification. • Manufacturer's descriptive literature, including general description. • Insulation thickness in inches. • Thermal Conductivity in Btu per inch per square foot per degree Fahrenheit per hour at specific mean temperature. • Perm rating in grains per hour per square foot. • Minimum and maximum temperature limits in degrees Fahrenheit, if applicable. • Description of adhesives, mechanical fasteners, and application, finishing and flashing materials and methods. • Independent or composite Fire Hazard Classification for insulation and application materials.
3
4 3.5 INSULATION SCHEDULES
5 A. Cooling Services Piping Insulation Schedule: INSULATION INSULATION PIPE SIZE THICKNESS PIPING SYSTEM TYPE inches Chilled Water Supply and P-1 1-1/4 inches and smaller 1-1/2 Return 40 to 60 degrees F 1-1/2 inches and larger 1-1/2
6 B. Equipment Insulation Schedule:
09/April/2018 23 07 19 - 8 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO
INSULATION INSULATION THICKNESS EQUIPMENT TYPE inches Chilled Water Pump Bodies E-8 1/2
1 C. Domestic Water Piping Insulation Schedule: 2 INSULATION INSULATION PIPE SIZE THICKNESS PIPING SYSTEM TYPE inches Indoor Domestic Cold Water P-2 1-1/2 inches and smaller 1 2 inches inch and larger 1-1/2
Indoor Hot and Recirculated P-2 1-1/2 inches and smaller 1 Hot Water 2 inches inch and larger 1-1/2
3 D. Roof Drain and Overflow Drain Bodies: 4 INSULATION INSULATION PIPE SIZE THICKNESS PIPING SYSTEM TYPE inches Roof Drain and Overflow P-2 All pipe sizes 1 Drain Bodies
5
6 END OF SECTION
09/April/2018 23 07 19 - 9 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 SECTION 23 09 00
2 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM FOR HVAC
3 PART 1 GENERAL
4 1.1 SUMMARY
5 A. Section Includes: 6 1. Ensure that the software and hardware to be installed is compatible with data 7 functionality. 8 2. This Section specifies the requirements for a complete microprocessor- 9 based, Direct Digital Control System (DDC), which is to be furnished and 10 installed as a complete package. The system will include modular design with 11 required input/output (I/O) interface modules, communication modules and 12 networks, computer hardware and software, operator input/output devices, 13 DDC panels, local area networks, sensors, control devices, actuators and 14 other devices required to perform HVAC sequences as outlined in this 15 Section, the plans and the input/output point summary provided at the end 16 of this Specification. Spare parts, installation coordination and supervision, 17 acceptance test, training, warranty service, and at the owner's option, 18 extended warranty service. The DDC supplier will perform all DDC 19 programming, database entry and setup, graphic displays, alarming, trending 20 and historian functions. 21 3. Provide wiring between panels, sensors, and control devices, including power 22 wiring of devices and necessary conduit under this Section of the 23 specifications. 24 4. Provide interlock wiring required to make the system functional. Provide 25 other interlock wiring specified. 26 5. Provide controls not specified under this DDC Section, on the plans, or 27 required by the I/O Point Summary. 28 6. Control and power wiring, which is provided under this Section of the 29 specifications, will be in accordance with requirements set forth in Section 30 26 05 01, Basic Electrical Requirements. 31 7. Control valves, instrument wells and other items mounted in piping are 32 furnished under this Section. 33 8. Automatic control dampers and other items mounted in ductwork are 34 furnished under this Section.
35 B. System Description: 36 37 1. The Owner will employ a DDC system capable of providing monitoring and 38 control functions. The DDC system application runs on a multi-user, 39 multitasking operating system using personal computers, laptops and panel 40 mounted touch screen displays as operator interfaces.
09/April/2018 23 09 00 - 1 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 2. The accompanying preliminary I/O list contains the analog and discrete I/O 2 for the DDC system. Alternate system designs in addition to those shown in 3 the Drawings may be considered and may be proposed as alternatives.
4 C. Related Sections: 5 1. Use this Section in conjunction with the following other specifications and 6 related Contract Documents to establish the total requirements for the 7 DDCs and referenced associated items: 8 a. Building Automation System (BAS) block diagram. 9 b. I/O list. 10 c. Section 26 05 01 – Basic Electrical Requirements. 11 d. Preliminary design schedules for DDC deliveries. 12 2. In the event of conflict regarding the requirements for the DDC System 13 between this Section and another section, the provisions of this Section 14 govern.
15 1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
16 A. Coordination: 17 1. Coordinate product support and delivery, as well as training and onsite 18 support, with CH2M HILL’s schedules. 19 2. This Specification will be maintained and updated by the CH2M HILL. The 20 supplier and the construction manager will meet to discuss proposals for 21 changes and additions. At that time, changes will be made. 22 3. No proposed changes will be in effect unless issued by the construction 23 manager in an addendum to the Specification and accepted by the supplier. 24 Changes to this Specification are deemed acceptable to the supplier unless 25 notified within 2 weeks of receipt of change notification.
26 B. Pre-installation Meetings: 27 1. As required by construction manager.
28 1.3 SUBMITTALS
29 A. Refer to the Submittal Schedule at the end of Part 3 for a list of submittal 30 requirements for this section.
31 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
32 A. All materials and equipment shall be new.
33 B. Materials and equipment shall be the manufacturer’s latest standard design that 34 complies with the specification requirements.
35 C. Regulatory Requirements:
09/April/2018 23 09 00 - 2 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 1. The hardware will be Underwriters Laboratories (UL) listed, or recognized 2 and labeled as such to enable the assembled DDC panel to be labeled per UL 3 508. 4 2. National Electric Code, NFPA 70. 5 3. Comply with NEMA standards pertaining to components and devices for 6 electric control systems. 7 4. Comply with NFPA standards, where applicable, to control and control 8 sequences. 9 5. FCC Regulation, Part 15, Section 156.
10 D. Qualifications: 11 1. Manufacturer: Company specializing in Direct Digital Control Systems and 12 Building Automation Systems with 5 years’ documented experience.
13 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
14 A. Delivery and Acceptance: 15 1. Protect control components from moisture by using appropriate heaters as 16 instructed by the manufacturer. 17 2. Deliver individually wrapped for protection and mounted on shipping skids
18 B. Storage and Handling: 19 1. Store control components in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or 20 provide an additional heavy canvas or plastic cover to protect control 21 components from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic. 22 2. Handle components in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.
23 1.6 WARRANTY
24 A. The hardware and software warranty will be a minimum of 1 year from the 25 completion of the functional acceptance test on site.
26 1.7 DESIGN CRITERIA
27 A. The facility will operate continuously. The hardware, firmware, and programming 28 software will have been in service in similar applications for a period of at least 1 year 29 and meet minimum reliability specifications detailed below.
30 B. The DDC will provide the capability for on-line program modifications without 31 shutting down the process under control.
32 C. Factors in the selection of the DDC system includes: 33 1. Capability of the supplier to handle and manage the project, proven records 34 of managing previous projects in the same magnitude. Understanding the 35 issue of single source responsibility.
09/April/2018 23 09 00 - 3 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 2. Diagnostics provided; speed and ease of installation, calibration, and 2 maintenance. 3 3. Ease of upgrading to the next generation of software and hardware products. 4 4. Number of DDCs per network, network speed, and network design. 5 5. Availability of local and factory vendor technical support. 6 6. ISO 9001 certification, testing, and conformal coating. 7 7. Conformance to existing standards.
8 D. The following costs will be considered: 9 1. Costs of system components. 10 2. Cost of future expansion. 11 3. Service life of the design and protection of the investment. 12 4. System integration cost.
13 E. Hardware furnished to the project will employ identical revisions of software and 14 firmware as applicable.
15 F. Minimum Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF) requirements are 250,000 hours. 16 The DDC, if battery equipped, will retain its memory configuration for a minimum 17 of 6 months without applied power. Diagnostic capability information will be 18 supplied.
19 G. DDC will operate within a temperature range of zero to plus 60 degrees C (32 to 140 20 degrees F) and 5 to 95 percent relative humidity (non-condensing) at 60 degrees C.
21 1.8 SUPPORT
22 A. Provide support to the construction manager at project site, the supervisory software 23 supplier, and the panel vendor at a location to be determined later, regardless of the 24 geographical origin of the requests.
25 PART 2 PRODUCTS
26 2.1 PRODUCTS
27 A. Manufacturers: 28 1. Johnson Controls. 29 2. Siemens Building Technologies (Landis & Staefa Div.). 30 3. Honeywell. 31 4. Barber Colman. 32 5. Trane
33 B. Description:
09/April/2018 23 09 00 - 4 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 1. The system must consist of a distributed system of fully-intelligent DDC 2 panels, operating in a multitasking, multi-user environment on a true token 3 passing, peer-to-peer network. 4 2. Provide individual panels with stand-alone control/monitoring of associated 5 I/O points. Each system must have at least one stand-alone panel. The use 6 of a PC to serve the purpose of the required DDC will not be allowed. 7 Systems utilizing a monolithic processing architecture, a “MUX” or an 8 “IMUX” type system or not operating in a true networking environment are 9 not acceptable. 10 3. Small unit controllers or applicable specific devices for stand-alone terminal 11 unit control and other small applications which may require a central, 12 connected interface device for time scheduling and communications with 13 workstation and master LAN are permitted. Provide unit controllers and 14 interface device, together as a system, that form a fully-intelligent, stand- 15 alone, independent system providing full process variable control without 16 connection to a central computer workstation. 17 4. Provide a system that permits expansion by adding computer memory, 18 application software, operator peripherals and field hardware. At project 19 completion and turnover to Owner, provide capability of additional 20 expansion of a minimum of 33 percent.
21 C. Networking/Communications: 22 1. Network design must include the following provisions: 23 a. High-speed data transfer rates for alarm reporting, quick report 24 generation from multiple controllers and upload/download efficiency 25 between network devices. The minimum baud rate is to be 1 mega 26 baud. 27 b. Support of any combination of controllers and operator workstations 28 directly connected to the local area network. 29 c. The network is to include provisions for automatically reconfiguring 30 to allow operational equipment to perform their designated functions 31 as effectively as possible in the event of single or multiple failures of 32 either workstations, panels, or the network media. 33 d. Automatic synchronization of the real-time clocks in DDC panels 34 must be provided. 35 e. The system must support integration of third party systems (Fire 36 alarm, Security, Lighting, Chiller, Boiler) via panel mounted open 37 protocol. 38 f. Field panels must be capable of integration with open standards 39 including Modbus, Lonworks, as well with third party devices via 40 existing vendor protocols. 41 2. Dial-Up Communications: Auto-dial/auto-answer communications must be 42 provided to allow stand-alone DDC panels to communicate with remote 43 operator devices on an intermittent basis via telephone lines.
09/April/2018 23 09 00 - 5 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 a. Stand-alone panels must analyze and prioritize alarms to minimize 2 the initiation of calls. 3 b. Operators at dial-up workstations must be able to perform control 4 functions, report functions and database generation and modification 5 functions as described for workstations connected via the LAN.
6 D. Stand-Alone Digital (SDC) Controllers: 7 1. General: 8 a. Each SDC is to be microprocessor-based, multi-tasking, multi-user, 9 real-time digital control processors. Each panel consists of modular 10 hardware with plug-in, enclosed processors, communication 11 controllers, power supplies, and input/output modules. 12 b. Each controller will have sufficient memory to support its own 13 operating system and databases. 14 c. Each controller will support digital inputs, digital outputs, analog 15 inputs, analog outputs, and pulse inputs. 16 d. Each controller is to provide at least two RS-232c serial data 17 communications ports for simultaneous operation of multiple I/O 18 devices. 19 e. As indicated on the point schedule, the operator must have the ability 20 to manually override automatic or centrally executed commands at 21 the SDC. Controller must monitor the status or position of overrides. 22 f. Each SDC must continuously perform self-diagnostic, 23 communication diagnosis and diagnosis of subsidiary equipment. 24 g. Isolation is to be provided at network terminals, as well as field point 25 terminations to suppress induced-voltage transients consistent with 26 IEEE Std. 587. 27 h. In the event of loss of power, there must be an orderly shutdown of 28 SDCs to prevent loss of database or operating system software. 29 Nonvolatile memory must be incorporated for critical controller 30 configuration data and battery backup must be provided for the real- 31 time clock and volatile memory for a minimum of 72 hours. Upon 32 restoration of power, the panel must automatically resume full 33 operation without manual intervention. Should panel memory be lost 34 for any reason, the panel must automatically download via the LAN, 35 phone lines or connected computer. In addition, the user is to have 36 capability of reloading the SDC panel via the LAN network, the local 37 RS-232c port or via telephone line dial-in. 38 2. Software: 39 a. Provide, as an integral part of the SDC, necessary software to form a 40 complete operating system as described in this Specification, in the 41 sequence of operation and in the I/O table. 42 b. The SDC must have the ability to perform the following pre-tested 43 control algorithms: 44 1) Two-position control.
09/April/2018 23 09 00 - 6 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 2) Proportional control. 2 3) Proportional plus integral control. 3 4) Proportional, integral, plus derivation control. 4 5) Automatic-loop tuning. 5 c. Provide for limited number of times each piece of equipment may be 6 cycled within any 1-hour period. 7 d. Provide for excessive demand situations during startup periods by 8 introducing time delays between successive start commands to heavy 9 electrical loads. 10 e. After power failure, upon resumption, the panel must determine the 11 present occupancy schedule and resume normal operation. 12 f. Energy Management Applications: 13 1) Time-of-day scheduling. 14 2) Calendar-based scheduling. 15 3) Holiday scheduling. 16 4) Temporary schedule overrides. 17 5) Optimal start. 18 6) Optimum stop. 19 7) Night setback control. 20 8) Economizer switchover (enthalpy). 21 9) Peak demand limiting. 22 10) Temperature-compensated load rolling. 23 11) Fan speed/CFM control. 24 12) Heating/cooling interlock. 25 13) Cold deck reset. 26 g. SDCs must be able to execute custom, job-specific processes defined 27 by the operator to automatically perform calculations and special 28 control routines. 29 1) It must be possible to use the following in a custom process: 30 a) System-measured point data or status. 31 b) Calculated data. 32 c) Results from other processes. 33 d) Arithmetic functions. 34 e) Boolean logic operators. 35 f) On-delay/off-delay/one-shot timers. 36 2) Processes may be triggered based on a combination of the 37 following: 38 a) Time interval. 39 b) Time of day. 40 c) Date. 41 d) Other processes. 42 e) Time programming. 43 f) Events. 44 3) A single process must be able to incorporate measured or 45 calculated data from all other DDC panels on the LAN.
09/April/2018 23 09 00 - 7 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 4) Processes must be able to generate operator messages and 2 advisories to operator, I/O devices. 3 5) The custom-control programming feature must be self- 4 documenting. 5 h. Alarm management will be provided to monitor, buffer, and direct 6 alarm reports to operator devices and memory files. 7 1) Alarm or point-change reports must be included in the 8 point’s English language description and the time and date of 9 occurrence. In addition, the user must be able to print or 10 display a message to more fully describe the alarm or operator 11 response. 12 2) The user must be able to prioritize alarms and direct to a 13 user-defined list of operator devices or disk files used 14 archiving alarm information. 15 3) In dial-up applications, only critical alarms initiate a call to a 16 remote operator device. 17 i. Historical data collection utilities will automatically sample, store, and 18 display system data in the following ways: 19 1) Sample the value of analog inputs at 1/2-hour intervals. 20 Points must be stored for 24 hours. 21 2) Provide high-resolution sampling capability in 1-second 22 increments for verification of loop performance. 23 3) Provide for user-defined trends over an extended period of 24 time. Panel must have a dedicated buffer for trend data that 25 are capable of storing a minimum of 5,000 data samples. 26 Trend data will be available in disk file format. 27 4) Accumulate and store runtime hours. 28 5) Sample, calculate, and store consumption totals on a defined 29 basis for user-selected analog and pulse-input-type points. 30 6) Count events.
31 E. Application Specific Digital Controllers (ASDC): 32 1. General: 33 a. Each ASDC must be able to extend its performance and capacity 34 through the use of remote application-specific controllers. 35 b. Each ASDC must operate as a stand-alone controller capable of 36 performing its specified control responsibilities independently of 37 other controllers in the network. Each ASDC must be a 38 microprocessor-based, multitasking, real-time, digital control 39 processor. 40 c. Each ASDC is to have sufficient memory to support its own 41 operating system and databases, including: 42 1) Control processes. 43 2) Energy management applications. 44 3) Operator I/O.
09/April/2018 23 09 00 - 8 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 d. The operator interface to any ASDC point data or programs must be 2 through any network-resident workstation, any PC, or portable 3 operator’s terminal connected to any SDC in the network. 4 e. ASDCs will directly support the use of a portable terminal. The 5 capabilities of the portable terminal includes, but not limited to, the 6 following: 7 1) Display process variables. 8 2) Display status. 9 3) Display setpoints. 10 4) Display control parameters. 11 5) Override binary output control. 12 6) Override analog setpoints. 13 7) Modification of PID loop tuning constants. 14 f. Programmable parameters are to be stored such that a power failure 15 of any duration does not necessitate reprogramming the controller. 16 g. SDCs must have the capability of maintaining a history of the 17 associated zone temperature for the past 24 hours in 6-hour 18 increments. 19 2. Variable Air Volume (VAV) Digital Controllers (VAVDC): 20 a. VAVDCs must support, but not be limited to, the control of the 21 following configurations of VAV boxes to address current 22 requirements and for future expansion: 23 1) Single duct only (cooling only or cooling with reheat). 24 2) Fan-powered (parallel). 25 3) Supply, return, or exhaust. 26 b. Furnish with each terminal unit the damper motor, a flow transducer, 27 and a 24V transformer. 28 c. VAVDCs must support the following types of inputs and outputs: 29 1) Proportional cooling outputs. 30 2) Heating outputs (proportional or one to three stages). 31 3) Fan output (on/off or proportional). 32 3. Air Handling Unit (AHU) Digital Controllers (AHUDC): 33 a. AHUDCs must support the necessary point inputs and outputs to 34 perform the specified sequence of controls in a totally stand-alone 35 fashion. 36 b. AHUDCs are to have a library of control routines and program logic 37 to perform the sequence of operation and input/output summary as 38 specified. 39 c. Each controller must perform its own limit and status monitoring 40 and analysis.
41 F. Components, Sensors, Etc. 42 1. Room-Temperature Sensor: 43 a. Each room-temperature sensor must come complete with a terminal 44 jack, set-point adjuster, temperature indicator and override switch.
09/April/2018 23 09 00 - 9 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 b. The terminal jack must be used to connect the operator’s terminal to 2 control and monitor all hardware and software points associated with 3 the application specific controller. 4 c. The setpoint adjustment must allow modification of the room 5 temperature setpoint by the occupant. The setpoint adjustment may 6 be locked out, overridden, or limited as to time and temperature in 7 software by authorized operator at a central or remote operator’s 8 terminal. 9 d. The temperature indicator is to be a bimetal thermometer on the 10 sensor, which is readable without removing the cover plate. 11 e. An override switch must initiate override of the night setback or 12 unoccupied mode to normal operation when activated by the 13 occupant. The switch function may be locked out, canceled, or 14 limited as to time or temperature in software by an authorized 15 operator at a central or remote operator’s terminal. 16 f. The operator must be able to assign temperature ranges for the room 17 setpoint for heating and cooling and night setback mode for the 18 heating and cooling independent of each other. 19 g. The room sensor must be accurate to within plus or minus 0.5 20 degrees F and have a setpoint adjustment of at least 55 degrees F to 21 85 degrees F. 22 2. Outdoor Air Sensor: Outdoor air sensor must be of the RTD type with range 23 of minus 40 degrees F to 120 degrees F with an accuracy of plus or minus 0.5 24 degrees F. Sensor must be mounted in a weatherproof condulet with an 25 integral sun shield. 26 3. Current Sensing Switch: The current sensing switches must be of the current 27 transformer type and have built-in SPDT switch contacts. Contacts will be 28 make or break setpoint dial. LED annunciation of switch position required. 29 4. Duct Temperature Sensor: Single-point temperature sensor must be of the 30 RTD type with an accuracy of plus or minus 0.5 degrees F and a range of 40 31 degrees F to 150 degrees F. Duct averaging temperature sensor must be of 32 platinum RTD type with an accuracy of plus or minus 1 degree F and a range 33 of 20 degrees F to 120 degrees F. 34 5. Static Pressure Sensor: Analog sensor with an accuracy of plus or minus 1 35 percent and a suitable range of unidirectional or bidirectional inches WC 36 utilizing 4 to 20 mA output signal. 37 6. Damper Actuators: Provide 24-Vac or 120-Vac damper motors with either a 38 0 to 10 VDC or 4 to 20-mA input for true modulation. Floating type or 39 whetstone, bridge-resistance type motor will not be acceptable. Motors must 40 have spring return for fail-safe operation and electronic feedback signal. 41 Motors must also have mechanical position indication. Motor must have 42 sufficient torque to position its damper smoothly with the maximum design 43 airflow velocity.
09/April/2018 23 09 00 - 10 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 7. Terminal Damper Actuators: The terminal damper actuator must mount on 2 the damper shaft and must provide complete modulating control of the 3 damper. 4 a. The actuator must de-energize when the damper has reached the 5 operator- or system-determined position. 6 b. Damper actuator position status must be monitored from the central 7 or remote operator’s terminal and must display in percent open. 8 Visual means must be provided at the actuator to determine damper 9 status. 10 c. The actuator must be removable for servicing without removing the 11 terminal control unit. 12 8. Control Valves: 13 a. Provide factory-fabricated, electronic control valves as determined by 14 the manufacturer for installation requirements and pressure class, 15 based on maximum pressure and temperature rating of piping 16 system. Except as otherwise indicated, provide valves that mate, and 17 match material of connecting piping. Equip control valves with 18 control valve motors and with proper shutoff ratings for each 19 individual application. 20 b. Water Valves: Size for minimum full-flow pressures drop of 3 psig. 21 9. Control Dampers: Control dampers must be parallel blade for two-position 22 control and opposed blade for proportional-control applications. Dampers 23 must have black enamel finish or be galvanized with nylon bearings. Blade 24 edge and tip seals must be included for all dampers. Leakage through the 25 damper is not to exceed 20 cfm per square foot at 4 inches WC (based on 26 49-inches by 48-inches test sample). Blades must be 16-gauge minimum and 27 10-inches maximum width. Frame must be of welded channel iron. Dampers 28 with both dimensions less than 18 inches may have strap iron frames. Blades 29 over 48 inches wide must be equipped with a jackshaft to provide sufficient 30 force throughout the intended operating range.
31 G. Terminals 32 1. General: The operator interface terminal, located in the building control 33 room, must be capable, but not limited to, the following functions. 34 a. Multiple-level password access protection must be provided. 35 b. The operator interface is to be designed to allow the operator to 36 perform commands including, but not limited to, the following: 37 1) Startup- or shutdown-selected equipment. 38 2) Adjust setpoints. 39 3) Add/modify/delete time programs. 40 4) Enable/disable process execution. 41 5) Lock/unlock alarm reporting for each point. 42 6) Enable/disable totalization for each point. 43 7) Enable/disable trending for each point. 44 8) Override PID loop setpoints and tuning parameters.
09/April/2018 23 09 00 - 11 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 9) Enter temporary override schedule. 2 10) Define holiday schedules. 3 11) Change time/date. 4 12) Enter/modify analog alarm limits. 5 13) Enter/modify analog warning limits. 6 14) View limits. 7 15) Enable/disable demand limiting for each meter. 8 16) Enable/disable duty cycle for each load. 9 c. Reports must be generated automatically or manually, and directed to 10 CRT displays, printers or disk files, as available. As a minimum, the 11 system must allow the user to easily obtain the following types of 12 reports: 13 1) A general listing of points in the network. 14 2) List points currently in alarm, off line, in override status, 15 disabled or locked out. 16 3) List of items defined in a “follow-up” file. 17 4) List weekly schedules. 18 5) List holiday programming. 19 6) List alarm limits, warning limits, and dead bands. 20 7) Totalization for each point. 21 8) Trending for each point. 22 2. Operator’s Terminal: An operator’s terminal must be provided for command 23 entry, information management, network alarm management and database 24 management functions. Real-time control functions must be resident in the 25 stand-alone DDC panels. 26 a. Terminal must be a general purpose, commercially available, personal 27 computer with sufficient memory and processor capacity to perform 28 functions described in this Specification. 29 b. Sufficient hard disk storage must be provided to accommodate 30 databases, graphic databases, user-defined reports and historical data 31 archival as described in this Specification. 32 c. The display provided for the system operation must have a diagonal 33 screen measurement of no less than 19 inches and a minimum display 34 resolution of no less than 1,280 by 1,024 pixels.
35 H. DDC Programming/Documentation Software: 36 1. Quote software and hardware interfaces required to program and document 37 the DDC applications software. The package is to be capable of 38 programming DDCs from a central location. DDC software must run on a 39 DDC that is a multitasking, zero-user operating system capable of 40 performing off-line programming, upload/download operations, and 41 monitoring/editing of DDC data/programs on line. 42 2. The program must be able to be modified and edited; changes downloaded 43 with the DDC running.
09/April/2018 23 09 00 - 12 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 3. Provide application notes and technical briefs with the shipment of 2 equipment. Application notes and technical briefs must be supplied to the 3 Owner for a minimum of 5 years after shipment. 4 4. A laptop computer provided by Owner, loaded with programming software 5 provided by the Vendor, must interface to the DDC locally.
6 2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
7 A. Tests: 8 1. Fully assemble and test each control system component in accordance with 9 the latest version of ANSI and NEMA standards as applicable.
10 B. Inspections: 11 1. Visually inspect control components for external damage, proper packaging, 12 and that all required accessories are included.
13 PART 3 EXECUTION
14 3.1 EXAMINATION
15 A. Verification of Conditions: 16 1. Verify that sufaces are ready to receive work. 17 2. Verify field measurements are as shown on shop drawings. 18 3. Verify that required utilities are available in proper location, and ready for 19 use. 20 4. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing surface conditions.
21 B. Pre-installation Testing: 22 1. None.
23 3.2 INSTALLATION
24 A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. Where the drawings 25 conflict with these instructions, the Contractor shall submit a written request for 26 clarification.
27 B. Provide local factory support to Owner.
28 C. Provide training on hardware and development software. Training must be provided 29 by a certified instructor(s). Location of training will be at factory. Provide training 30 equipment as required.
31 D. Installation of controls on AHU’s shall follow the AHU manufacturer’s guidelines 32 (e.g. to ensure that any installation of internal devices and/or wiring does not affect 33 the AHU’s pressure and/or airflow specifications).
09/April/2018 23 09 00 - 13 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 E. Contractor shall coordinate installation with all other trades to avoid field condition 2 conflicts.
3 F. Electrical products and execution shall comply with requirements of applicable 4 Division 26 sections of these specifications.
5 G. Control Wiring and Communications Cabling: 6 1. Install control wiring in EMT in exposed or concealed, inaccessible locations. 7 UL plenum rated cable is acceptable for concealed, accessible locations. 8 a. Field devices provided with pig-tail wiring without any integral means 9 of flexible metal raceway attachment shall be enclosed with a suitable 10 means to allow for flexible metal raceway attachment. 11 2. Install parallel to building lines, supported from structural members. Raceway 12 or plenum wiring supported from or anchored to piping, duct supports 13 (raceway only), the ceiling suspension system (raceway only), or other 14 electrical conduits is not acceptable. Plenum wiring shall be installed using 15 cable rings at 15’ intervals maximum. 16 3. Flexible metal raceway, not in excess of three feet in length, shall be used for 17 termination of raceway on vibrating or moving equipment. The flexible metal 18 raceway shall be supported at each end. 19 4. Shielded wiring shall be used where recommended by the manufacturer and 20 installed according to the manufacturer’s installations. 21 5. All wiring shall be installed as continuous lengths with no splices between 22 termination points. 23 6. IP wiring and devices are by others, except for any final connections between 24 the DDC device and the receptacle/drop provided.
25 H. Enclosures: 26 1. All building automation components, including BAS controllers, sensors and 27 other devices, shall be installed within enclosures. 28 2. Enclosure locations shall be coordinated with other trades and shown in the 29 submittals for approval. 30 3. Enclosures for all devices except space sensors shall be NEMA rater for the 31 location.
32 I. Safeties: 33 1. All safety devices (smoke detectors, duct high/low pressure switches, etc.) 34 shall be hard-wired directly to the controlled equipment (i.e., the safety 35 sequence shall not be implemented through a “software interlock”). 36 2. Duct smoke detectors for air handling equipment shutdown are specified 37 under the fire alarm system. However, final wiring from the associated fire 38 alarm system control module to the controlled equipment shall be by this 39 section’s Contractor.
09/April/2018 23 09 00 - 14 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 3.3 EQUIPMENT - MOUNTING AND FINISHES
2 A. Visible identification logos, trademarks, or evidence of their removal are not 3 permitted on any equipment, devices, etc. that are located in areas accessible to the 4 public. Equipment, devices or enclosures accessible to the public shall utilize tamper 5 proof fasteners.
6 B. Mounting locations in public areas shall be verified with the Architect prior to 7 installation. Notify the Architect if a particular location is not acceptable for the 8 application.
9 3.4 CONDUIT INSTALLATION
10 A. Refer to Division 26.
11 3.5 CONDUIT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
12 A. All horizontal conduits throughout the building shall be thoroughly and substantially 13 supported with individually approved expansion ring hangers or supported in groups 14 using Unistrut or Kindorf channels and suitable hangers. Hangers shall not be 15 spaced more than 10' apart. Perforated extension bar hangers will not be accepted in 16 any part of the Work. All vertical conduits shall be substantially supported at floor 17 lines to carry the weight of the conduit and cable in a satisfactory manner with 18 allowance for expansion and contraction. Special hangers and supports shall be 19 provided where they may be required because of any peculiarities of construction. 20 Where exposed to weather, conduit hangers and supports shall be Robroy Industries 21 "Plasti-Bond-Red" or approved equal. Damaged hangers and supports shall be field 22 coated with Robroy Industries" Plasti-Bond-Red Touch Up" or approved equal. 23 Hanger rod sizes shall be as recommended by the hanger manufacturer for the 24 service intended.
25 B. At the Subcontractor's option, subject to the approval of the local authorities having 26 jurisdiction, conduit systems up to a maximum conduit size of 3/411 may be 27 substantially and individually supported in accordance with NEC spacing using #12 28 gauge galvanized tie wire and other supplementary braces as required by the National 29 Electrical Code to provide rigid support. Multiple conduits fastened to individual tie 30 wires are not acceptable. Suspending or supporting conduits from any ceiling 31 support system shall not be acceptable.
32 3.6 BORING
33 A. Provide all cutting, boring and patching of work as required for a complete BAS. 34 Boring and patching shall meet, at minimum, the following requirements:
35 B. Prior to boring any structural components, obtain the Owner's approval.
09/April/2018 23 09 00 - 15 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 C. Perform x-rays of the respective areas prior to boring. Coordinate x-rays with the 2 Owner.
3 D. Bores shall have clean, square and smooth edges. Patches shall be inconspicuous in 4 covered areas and visually undetectable in areas normally accessible to the tenants.
5 E. Restore fire ratings if boring has violated the fire rated assemblies.
6 F. Boring and cutting shall be kept to a minimum and conducted in a neat and 7 workmanlike manner. Provide reinforcing and fastening materials as necessary.
8 G. Boring and patching that has become necessary due to improperly installed sleeves 9 shall be done at no additional cost to the Owner.
10 3.7 SLEEVES, CUTTING, PATCHING AND FIRE STOPPING
11 A. The Subcontractor shall be responsible for the timely placing of sleeves as detailed 12 on the Drawings and the Coordination Drawings for all piping and conduit through 13 walls and partitions, beams, floors and roofs as noted below, while the same are 14 under construction:
15 B. All concrete or masonry construction.
16 C. Wall construction where the penetration must be sealed air tight. Patches for 17 penetrations through walls for Work installed prior to finish application shall be 18 provided by others.
19 D. Fire rated wall construction.
20 E. Where indicated on the Drawings.
21 F. Sleeves shall be at least one size larger than the size of conduit or pipe, including the 22 insulation where applicable, it serves except where "Link Seal" casing seals are used 23 in sleeves through walls below grade. Sleeves shall be sized such that the annular 24 space between the sleeve and the conduit will not be less than 1 12". All conduit 25 passing through concrete or masonry walls above grade shall be at least 18 gauge 26 galvanized steel sleeves. Sleeves shall be set flush with finished wall. All sleeves in 27 floors shall extend a minimum of 2" above the finished floor. Sleeves installed in fire 28 rated construction shall be of suitable length and diameter to accommodate the 29 firesafing system used. Sleeves set in concrete floor construction shall be at least 16 30 gauge galvanized steel. Where the conduit passes through a sleeve, no point of the 31 conduit shall touch the sleeve and the conduit shall be centered in the sleeve.
32 G. Seal all penetrations in fire rated construction with factory built devices or with 33 manufactured fill, void or cavity materials "Classified" by Underwriters Laboratories, 34 Inc. for use as a Through Penetration Firestop. All firestop devices and systems shall 35 be approved for such use by the authorities having jurisdiction. The firestop system
09/April/2018 23 09 00 - 16 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 used shall maintain the fire resistance rating of the building component that is 2 penetrated. Firestop systems and devices shall comply with ASTM E 814 (UL 1479) 3 for all types of penetrations being sealed. Submittal data for firestop systems shall 4 include the applicable UL System numbers. Excessive shrinkage of the firestop 5 materials, which would permit the transmission of smoke or water prior to exposure 6 to a fire condition, is unacceptable. Where a mastic coating is used to seal the surface 7 of the firestop, the mastic shall be non-hardening. The firestop manufacturer's 8 representatives shall instruct the Subcontractor's representatives in the proper 9 installation procedures so that the penetrations on the Project will be installed in 10 accordance with the UL listing and the manufacturer's recommendations. If it 11 complies with these Specifications, firestop sealing component/system as 12 manufactured by one of the following manufacturers will be acceptable: 13 1. Tremco Fire Resistive Joint System using Dymeric sealant and Cerablanket- 14 FS mineral filler. 15 2. Specified Technologies, Inc. SpecSeal Systems. 16 3. 3M Fire Barrier Penetration Sealing Systems. 17 4. GE Pensil Firestop Sealant by General Electric. 18 5. International Protective Coatings Corp. Flame Safe Systems. 19 6. Thermal Ceramics Fire Master Firestop Fire Protection Systems. 20 7. Hilti FS-601 Systems.
21 H. Sleeves penetrating walls below grade shall be standard weight galvanized steel pipe 22 with 1/4" thick steel plate waterseal secured to the pipe with continuous fillet weld. 23 The waterseal plate shall be located in the middle of the wall and shall be 2" wider all 24 around than the sleeve it encircles. The entire assembly shall be hot dipped 25 galvanized after fabrication. Seal off annular opening between pipe and sleeve with 26 "Link Seal" type casing seal as manufactured by Thunderline Corporation or 27 Innerlynx. The pipe sleeve shall be sized to accommodate the Thunderline casing 28 seal. Casing seals shall be Series 300 for pipe size 3/4" through 4" and Series 400 for 29 pipe sizes 5” and larger.
30 I. If holes and/or sleeves are not properly installed and cutting and patching becomes 31 necessary, it shall be done at no additional expense to the Owner. The Subcontractor 32 shall undertake no cutting or patching without first securing the Architect's written 33 approval.
34 J. All unused sleeves shall be sealed with firestop devices and systems to maintain the 35 fire rating of the construction penetrated.
36 3.8 HANGING AND SUPPORTING
37 A. Install all equipment, devices, materials and components in compliance with the 38 manufacturer's recommendations. Supports shall be suitable for the environment 39 within which the component is to be installed. Coordinate all hanging and 40 supporting of components with all trades.
09/April/2018 23 09 00 - 17 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 B. Structural support members shall be galvanized.
2 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3 A. Field Tests: 4 1. See the Commissioning specification for the testing and acceptance services 5 to be provided. 6 2. The above services does not preclude the requirement that the Contractor 7 start up and test the system according to manufacturer’s requirements, and to 8 perform full point-to-point and sequence of operation testing of the system 9 prior to the Commissioning phase of the project.
10 B. Field Inspections: 11 1. Inspect completed installation for physical damage, proper alignment, 12 anchorage, and grounding.
13 3.10 SYSTEM STARTUP
14 A. Perform Startup Services as required in the Commissioning specification.
15 3.11 ADJUSTING
16 A. Adjust mechanical linkages for free movement, system settings, set points, 17 operational parameters as determined to conform with site conditions and expected 18 system functions.
19 B. Provide touchup of surfaces damaged during installation.
20 3.12 CLEANING
21 A. Keep work areas clean and free of debris throughout the duration of each 22 construction shift.
23 3.13 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE 24 25
ITEM NO. SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT AS INDICATED WITH BID 23 09 00-01 Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s X detailed literature describing features of DDC system. 23 09 00-02 Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s Per construction schedule
09/April/2018 23 09 00 - 18 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO
ITEM NO. SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT AS INDICATED WITH BID technical product data for each control device furnished, indicating dimensions, capacities, performance characteristics, electrical characteristics, finishes of materials and including installation instructions and startup instructions. 23 09 00-03 An estimate of the data throughput Per construction schedule performance of the configuration. 23 09 00-04 Specify the mean time between failures Per construction schedule (MTBF) and mean time to repair (MTTR) data for the hardware components proposed, as well as for the system as a whole. 23 09 00-05 Provide a description of stand-alone Per construction schedule controllers, which are supported. Describe options for interfacing these controllers, information about the programming language of the controller, the cost of the controller, and any additional components necessary to interface to the DDC. 23 09 00-06 Shop drawings for each control system, Per construction schedule containing the following information: Schematic flow diagram of system showing fans, coils, dampers, valves, and control devices. Indicate required electrical wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory-installed and portions to be field-installed. Provide details of control panels, including controls, instruments, and labeling. In addition, supply a bill of material with part numbers. 23 09 00-07 Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit 10 days after FAT maintenance instructions and spare parts lists. Include this data, product data and shop drawings in maintenance manual.
09/April/2018 23 09 00 - 19 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO
ITEM NO. SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT AS INDICATED WITH BID
1 END OF SECTION
09/April/2018 23 09 00 - 20 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 SECTION 23 09 23 2 3 INSTRUMENTS FOR CONTROL SYSTEMS 4 5 PART 1 – GENERAL 6 7 1.1 SUMMARY 8 9 A. Section Includes: 10 1. Temperature sensors. 11 2. High/Low Limit Controllers 12 3. Humidity Sensors. 13 4. Pressure Sensors 14 5. Air Flow Meters 15 6. Current Switches. 16 7. CO2 Sensors 17 18 1.2 REFERENCES 19 20 A. AMCA 500 - Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters. 21 22 B. ANSI/ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure fittings. 23 24 C. ANSI/ASTM B32 - Solder Metal. 25 26 D. ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Tube. 27 28 E. ANSI/NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). 29 30 F. ANSI/NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems. 31 32 G. ASTM B280 - Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Field 33 Service. 34 35 H. FS-GG-G-76 - Gages, Pressure and Vacuum, Dial Indicating. 36 37 I. MIL-F-18280 - Fittings, Flareless Tube, Fluid Connection. 38 39 J. MIL-S-29175 - Switch, Thermostatic, Low Voltage, Non (Setback/Setup) and 40 Setback/Setup, Limiting: Heating, Cooling and Heating-Cooling. 41 42 K. NEMA DC 3 - Low-Voltage Room temp sensor. 43 44 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 45 46 A. Provide instruments consisting of temperature, pressure and humidity sensors, control 47 valves, dampers and operators, indicating devices, interface equipment, safety circuits, 48 lighting control wiring and other apparatus and accessories required to operate mechanical
09/April/2018 23 09 23 - 1 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 or monitoring systems, and to perform functions specified. 2 3 1.4 SUBMITTALS 4 5 A. Submit in accordance with requirements of General Conditions. 6 7 B. Product Data: Include description and engineering data for each control system 8 component. Include sizing and mark specific equipment to be used. 9 10 C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. 11 12 D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Sections 23 05 00 and related specification Section 01. 13 The equipment as supplied by any of the acceptable manufacturers or an approved equal 14 shall comply with all of the provisions of this specification. 15 16 1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 17 18 A. Submit record documents under provisions of Division 1. 19 20 B. Accurately record actual location of control components, instruments and sensors on as- 21 built drawings. 22 23 1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 24 25 A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Division 1. 26 27 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS 28 29 A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this 30 Section with minimum five years experience. 31 32 B. Installer: Company specializing in installing the work of this Section with minimum five 33 years experience both in devices installed and control wiring. 34 35 1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING 36 37 A. Sequence work to ensure installation of components is complementary to installation of 38 similar components in other systems. 39 40 B. Coordinate installation of system components with installation of all mechanical systems 41 equipment. 42 43 PART 2 – PRODUCTS 44 45 2.1 TEMPERATURE SENSORS 46 47 A. Rigid Probe Temperature – Rigid probe, duct/unit mounted temperature sensing 48 applications shall utilize 10,000Ω thermistor type sensors with rigid probes. Sensor shall
09/April/2018 23 09 23 - 2 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 include integral handi-box for wiring connections and terminations. Probe shall be 2 constructed from stainless steel and its dimensions shall be ¼”Φ x 8”. Operating span 3 shall be equal to -40°F to 250°F. Error within operating range of 32°F to 158°F not to 4 exceed ±0.36°F with 0.045°F maximum drift annually. Over operating temperature limits 5 not to exceed ±0.76°F with 0.09°F maximum drift annually. 6 1. Acceptable Products: 7 a. Schneider Electric TS-6721-850 8 b. Ven’s Industries TDDAM21 probe and transmitter. 9 c. Weed Model 733 probe and Model 4500H transmitter. 10 11 B. Duct Averaging Temperature – Averaging element, duct/unit mounted temperature 12 sensing applications shall utilize 1,000Ω Balco type sensors with averaging elements. 13 Sensor shall include integral handi-box for wiring connections and terminations. 14 Averaging elements shall be either 5’ or 22’ in length depending on achieving adequate 15 coverage. Operating span shall be equal to -40°F to 160°F. Error within operating span 16 not to exceed ±0.1%. 17 1. Acceptable Products: 18 a. Schneider Electric TS-9405 (element length = 5’) 19 b. Schneider Electric TS-9422 (element length = 22’) 20 21 C. Combination Temperature/Humidity: 22 1. Duct mounted combination temperature/humidity sensing applications shall utilize 23 digitally profiled thin film capacitive non-removable humidity sensor and 10,000Ω 24 thermistor type temperature sensor. Combination sensor shall include integral 25 handi-box for wiring connections and terminations. Probe shall be constructed from 26 aluminum and its dimensions shall be ½””Φ x 10”. Operating span shall be equal to 27 -40°F to 122°F. Error within operating range of 32°F to 158°F not to exceed 28 ±0.36°F with 0.045°F maximum drift annually. Over operating temperature limits 29 not to exceed ±0.76°F with 0.09°F maximum drift annually. 30 2. Humidity sensor shall be powered from 24Vac source and output to DDC controller 31 shall be 0-10V. Humidity sensor accuracy shall be 3% over range of 10%RH to 32 90%RH. Operating humidity range shall be equal to 0%RH to 100%RH. Operating 33 temperature range shall be equal to -40°F to122°F. 34 a. Acceptable Products: 35 1) Veris Industries HED3VSTK1 36 37 D. Immersion Temperature: Water temperature sensing applications shall utilize 10,000Ω 38 thermistor type sensors with rigid probes and matched stainless steel wells. Sensor shall 39 include integral handi-box for wiring connections and terminations. Probe shall be 40 constructed from stainless steel and its dimensions shall be ¼”Φ x 4”. Thermal 41 conduction compound shall be used when installing sensor probe within well. Operating 42 span shall be equal to -40°F to 250°F. Error within operating range of 32°F to 158°F not 43 to exceed ±0.36°F with 0.045°F maximum drift annually. Over operating temperature 44 limits not to exceed ±0.76°F with 0.09°F maximum drift annually. 45 1. Acceptable Products: 46 a. Weed Model 110-01A-A-4-C-24-310 probe, Inor Model APAQ-HRF 47 transmitter. Thermowell #S-260 series. 48 b. Schneider Electric TS-6721-853.
09/April/2018 23 09 23 - 3 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 c. Provide the following ranges: 2 1) Chilled Water: 0-100 °F. 3 4 5 E. Space Temperature: 6 1. Wall mounted, public space temperature sensing applications shall utilize 7 microprocessor based digital room temperature sensors with precision thermistor 8 temperature sensing elements and S-Link communications. Sensors shall be suitable 9 for mounting on vertical single gang wall box. Terminations shall be via integral sub- 10 base with screw terminals. Sensors shall feature self-compensating temperature 11 conversions to eliminate the need for calibration. Operating span shall be 32°F to 12 120°F. S-Link functionality shall allow sensors to communicate with respective 13 DDC controllers using unshielded, twisted pair cable not to exceed a maximum 14 length of 200’. To eliminate the need to connect a remote service tool directly to a 15 DDC controller, service personnel shall be able to connect directly to space 16 temperature sensor via S-Link communication jack to monitor controller 17 performance and edit operational settings locally. All space temperature sensors 18 enclosures shall be configured without any company logos. 19 2. Where indicated on drawings, provide space temperature sensors with pushbuttons 20 for setpoint adjustment and local override, as well as, LCD display. Display units 21 shall be configurable based on application to include heating and cooling setpoints in 22 °F. 23 a. Acceptable Products: 24 1) Schneider Electric MN-S1 (Public Space). 25 2) Schneider Electric MN-S3 (Non-Public Space). 26 27 F. Outside Air Temperature/Humidity Sensors: Existing outside air temperature and 28 humidity sensors to be monitored via the existing A-C Connector weather station. Values 29 to be shared globally over Schneider Electric Controller LAN. 30 31 2.2 HIGH/LOW LIMIT CONTROLLERS 32 33 A. Static Pressure High/Low Limit Controller: Differential pressure switches sahll be 34 provided for supply air static high limit and return air static low limit shutdown. 35 Differential pressure switches used for high/low limit shutdown, shall feature adjustable 36 setpoint range of 0.04” to 12.0” w.c. and pushbutton for manual reset. SPST N.C. switch 37 shall be rated for 15A at 125Vac. 38 1. Acceptable Products: 39 a. Cleveland Controls – AFS-460 40 41 B. Duct Smoke Detectors: To be provided by others. 42 43 C. Mixed Air Low Limit Temperature Controllers: Provide controller for low temperature 44 detection, with at least 20’ of expandable bulb and an external set PT adjustment with 45 manual reset switch. 46 1. Acceptable Products: 47 a. Schneider Electric TC-5242
09/April/2018 23 09 23 - 4 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 2 2.3 HUMIDITY SENSORS 3 4 A. Combination Temperature/Humidity: 5 1. Duct mounted combination temperature/humidity sensing applications shall utilize 6 digitally profiled thin film capacitive non-removable humidity sensor and 10,000Ω 7 thermistor type temperature sensor. Combination sensor shall include integral 8 handi-box for wiring connections and terminations. Probe shall be constructed from 9 aluminum and its dimensions shall be ½””Φ x 10”. Operating span shall be equal to 10 -40°F to 122°F. Error within operating range of 32°F to 158°F not to exceed 11 ±0.36°F with 0.045°F maximum drift annually. Over operating temperature limits 12 not to exceed ±0.76°F with 0.09°F maximum drift annually. 13 2. Humidity sensor shall be powered from 24Vac source and output to DDC controller 14 shall be 0-10V. Humidity sensor accuracy shall be 3% over range of 10%RH to 15 90%RH. Operating humidity range shall be equal to 0%RH to 100%RH. Operating 16 temperature range shall be equal to -40°F to122°F.Insertion type, proportioning 17 type, with operating range from 0 to 100 % with accuracy ±2% RH. 18 a. Acceptable Product: 19 1) Veris Industries HED3VSTK1 20 21 2.4 PRESSURE SENSOR/TRANSMITTERS 22 23 A. Airflow Differential Pressure Transducer: Required across all filter media: Dry media 24 static pressure transducers shall feature Digital CMOS intrinsic flow differential pressure 25 sensing element. Zero point accuracy shall be 0.5Pa with repeatability of 0.1Pa. Span 26 accuracy shall be 3% of reading with repeatability of 0.5%. Operating range to be 32°F to 27 122°F. Pressure transducers shall include NEMA 4 enclosures, brass barbed fittings for 28 line connection, and integral LCD display. The desired setpoint is to be in the top 50% of 29 the transducer’s operating range. 30 1. Acceptable Product: 31 a. Senva PDP31-001 pressure Range = 0.1”, 0.5”, or 1.0” wc. 32 b. Senva PDP31-002 pressure Range = 0.5”, 1.0”, or 2.0” wc. 33 34 B. Duct Static Pressure Transducer: Required for duct static pressure sensing applications: 35 Dry media static pressure transducers shall feature integrated, micromachined silicon 36 piezoresitive differential pressure sensing element. Span accuracy shall be 2.5% of full 37 span. Operating range to be 50°F to 140°F. Pressure transducers shall include NEMA 4 38 enclosures, integral duct probes, and integral LCD display. The desired setpoint is to be in 39 the top 50% of the transducer’s operating range. 40 1. Acceptable Product: 41 a. Senva PDP32-001 pressure Range = 2.5”, 5.0”, or 10.0” wc. 42 43 2.5 AIR FLOW METERS 44 45 A. To be provided by the equipment manufacturer integral to the air-handling unit. 46 47 2.6 CURRENT OPERATED SWITCHES / CURRENT METERS 48
09/April/2018 23 09 23 - 5 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 A. Provide general purpose, self powered, normally-open, current operated switch where 2 indicated. Current operated switches shall incorporate split core construction. Where 3 current operated switches are provided for monitoring operational status of equipment 4 served by VFD, adjustable setpoint shall be provided. 5 1. Acceptable Product: 6 a. Veris Industries Hawkeye 600 7 b. Veris Industries Hawkeye 908 (VFD driven equipment only) 8 9 2.7 CO2 SENSORS 10 11 A. Duct Mount or Wall Mount CO 2 Sensors: CO 2 sensors shall use gold plated, Non- 12 Dispersive Infrared Optical sensors with automatic baseline correction for self-calibration. 13 Measurement range shall be 0-2,000 ppm adjustable to 10,000 ppm. Each CO 2 sensor 14 shall have a rated life of 15 years. Operating temperature range to be 32°F to 122°F. 15 Where CO 2 sensors are duct mounted, provide aspiration box complete with duct probe. 16 Transmitter accuracy ±1% of measurement range or ±3% of measured value. CO 2 shall 17 feature 0-10V linear analog output for BAS interface. 18 1. Acceptable Products: 19 a. Air Test Technologies: Model TR9290B (Wall mount). 20 b. Air Test Technologies: Model TR9292B (Duct mount). 21 22 23 PART 3 – EXECUTION 24 25 3.1 EXAMINATION 26 27 A. Verify that systems are ready to receive work. 28 29 B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions. 30 31 3.2 INSTALLATION 32 33 A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 34 35 B. Use copper tubing in mechanical rooms, where subject to damage or temperatures in 36 excess of 200 degrees F, where adjacent to heating pipes passing through common sleeve, 37 and where not readily accessible. Plastic poly tubing may only be used for final 38 connections; maximum length is 1' or 12”. 39 40 C. Conceal tubing. Run exposed only in mechanical rooms, storage rooms and like, in neat 41 manner and properly supported. 42 43 D. Mechanically attach tubing to supporting surfaces. Sleeve through concrete surfaces in 44 minimum one inch sleeves, extended 6 inches above floors and one inch below bottom 45 surface of slabs. Do not support from ceiling tile hangars. 46 47 E. Purge tubing with dry, oil-free compressed air before connecting control instruments. 48
09/April/2018 23 09 23 - 6 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 F. Install pressure gages on branch lines at each end device showing both main air pressure 2 and signal pressure at each device or controller. 3 4 G. Check and verify location of temp sensor, humidistat, and other exposed control sensors 5 with plans and room details before installation. Align with lighting switches and 6 humidistats. 7 8 H. Mount outdoor transmitters and outdoor sensors indoors, if possible, with sensing 9 elements outdoors. 10 11 I. Provide separable sockets for liquids and flanges for air bulb elements. 12 13 J. Provide conduit for all BAS wire installed outdoors and electrical wiring where required. 14 15 K. Check cable for grounds and shorts. Test control devices and sensors using a Rosemount 16 field calibrator #262 or similar device. 17 18 L. Assist Owner by verifying accuracy of measurements during Owner testing. 19 20 M. After install, set humidistat accuracy to within ±2% of actual conditions. 21 22 3.3 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES 23 24 A. Installing contractor to provide assistance for checkout and startup. Assistance to entail: 25 1. As each end device is energized through its entire operating range, verify the correct 26 device received the signal and it is operating properly. 27 2. Alter the state of each analog and digital input an end devices, while checking for 28 proper output at control station. 29 30 3.4 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE 31
ITEM NO. SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT WITH BID AS INDICATED 40 05 17-01 Shop Drawings (submit for each specialty Per construction schedule item), including dimensions, end connections types, end connection sizes. 40 05 17-02 Manufacturer’s catalog data and pictorial With shop drawings information (submit for each specialty item), including electrical power requirements, pressure ratings, materials of construction. 40 05 17-03 Certified shop drawings (submit for each With record documents specialty item), including “as-supplied” shop drawings and general installation
09/April/2018 23 09 23 - 7 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO
ITEM NO. SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT WITH BID AS INDICATED instructions. 1 2 3 END OF SECTION
09/April/2018 23 09 23 - 8 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 SECTION 23 09 90 2 3 MEP SEQUENCES OF OPERATION 4 5 6 PART 1 – GENERAL 7 8 1.1 SUMMARY 9 10 A. Included points list and sequences provided herein are minimum requirements for 11 the Building Automation System. Refer to details, schedules, Drawings, Approved 12 Shop Drawings, manufacturer’s installation and Operation Manuals, and equipment 13 integration guidelines for additional requirements. 14 15 B. Sequence of operation is hereby defined as the manner and method by which 16 controls function. Requirements for each type of control system operation are 17 specified in this section. 18 19 C. All set points given in the sequence of operation shall be adjustable from the 20 Building Automation System (BAS). The set points are given as general starting 21 control points to be adjusted as desired or necessary during startup and normal 22 operation. 23 24 D. All BAS automatic alarms and indications shall be provided at the Building 25 Automation System (BAS) workstations and capable of being printed out on the 26 Building Automation System (BAS) printer (refer to Section 23 09 00). All alarms 27 shall be printed. The BAS shall be capable of recording all states and values. Alarm 28 limits (in some cases states) may be dynamic and therefore subject to change if 29 required. 30 31 E. All control valves shall have a minimum close-off rating of 90 PSIG. 32 33 F. The Air Handling Unit dampers and control valves shall go to their “fail” positions 34 upon the loss of control power. 35 36 G. All fire system discrete input points are defined by either one of two states, which are 37 point in alarm, or point not in alarm. State description shall be as appropriate for the 38 specific applications. 39 40 H. Control valves shall remain in current state for “Fail Last Place” valves and close 41 automatically upon equipment shutdown for “Fail Closed” valves. The BAS will do 42 so by adjusting the setpoint of the associated PID controller. 43 44 I. Control devices and equipment such as valves, pumps, and fans will not be affected 45 by automatic logic if they are placed in MANUAL mode by the operator. 46 47 J. The BAS will be configured with Master Startup/Shutdown Logic for all mechanical 48 equipment.
09/April/2018 23 09 00 - 1 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 2 K. Unless noted otherwise the operator shall be capable of starting and stopping all 3 mechanical equipment individually or through the master logic. 4 5 L. Where multiple equipment is listed per system type, the noted points list is per 6 equipment. 7 8 M. Where multiple terminal units supply one space, room, or area: 9 1. Create an adjacency matrix listing each zone with all adjacent zones. All 10 zones in the space, room, or area shall be listed in the matrix. The adjacency 11 matrix will be used for emergency mode operation. 12 13 1.2 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (GENERAL) 14 15 A. Two types of variable frequency drives shall be referenced in this sequence. The 16 main operational difference is that Type 1 shall be provided with a VFD bypass 17 switch which will allow the drive to be bypassed locally resulting in full speed 18 operation of the motor served and Type 2 shall not have bypass capability. 19 B. Type 1 VFD (VFD with Bypass) – Non Air Handling Units: 20 1. Normal OFF (Auto Mode): 21 a. The VFD Manual-Auto switch will be in Auto position. 22 b. The VFD Bypass-Off-Drive switch is in Drive. 23 c. The VFD Test-Normal switch will be in Normal. 24 2. Normal On (Auto Mode): 25 a. Drive run request via the VFD Bypass-Off-Drive switch to the BAS, 26 or the Master Startup-Shutdown sequence shall initiate VFD start. 27 b. When Manual Auto switch is placed in Auto. The VFD shall ramp 28 the motor served at a speed rate set via the BAS. 29 c. When placed in Manual the VFD speed control is local. 30 Determination of local speed control is made through the local digital 31 display. 32 d. When the VFD is placed in Bypass, all local or BAS control of speed 33 is lost. The motor served by the VFD in Bypass shall run at 34 synchronous (full) speed. 35 e. Start/Stop is controlled through BAS in Auto, Manual, and Bypass to 36 ensure all safeties and interlocks are satisfied. 37 3. General Function - VFD Monitoring Points: 38 a. Power on will be monitored locally at the VFD via panel mounted 39 light. 40 b. VFD on will be monitored locally at the VFD via panel mounted 41 light. 42 c. VFD fault will be monitored locally at the VFD via panel mounted 43 light. 44 d. VFD in bypass will be monitored locally at the VFD via panel 45 mounted light. 46 e. Refer to the VFD specification for local VFD function and local 47 monitoring capability through the digital display. 48 f. VFD current shall be monitored at the BAS.
09/April/2018 23 09 00 - 2 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 g. VFD run request will be monitored at the BAS. 2 h. VFD in Auto Position will be monitored at the BAS. 3 i. VFD fault will be monitored at the BAS. 4 j. VFD running in Bypass will be monitored at the BAS. 5 4. Alarms: 6 a. A general VFD alarm will be initiated at the BAS via the VFD fault 7 monitored at the BAS. 8 b. Drive run command on and current below a set level (to be field 9 determined.) 10 11 C. Type 2 VFD (VFD without Bypass) – Air Handling Units and Fans 12 1. Normal OFF (Auto Mode): 13 a. The VFD Manual-Auto switch will be in Auto position. 14 b. The VFD Off-Drive switch is in Drive. 15 c. The VFD Test-Normal switch will be in Normal. 16 2. Normal On (Auto Mode): 17 a. Drive run request via the VFD Off-Drive switch to the BAS, or the 18 Master Startup-Shutdown sequence shall initiate VFD start. 19 b. The VFD shall ramp the motor to the speed set locally 20 c. Start/Stop is controlled through BAS in Auto to ensure all safeties 21 and interlocks are satisfied. 22 3. General Function - VFD Monitoring Points: 23 a. Power on will be monitored locally at the VFD via panel mounted 24 light. 25 b. VFD on will be monitored locally at the VFD via panel mounted 26 light. 27 c. VFD fault will be monitored locally at the VFD via panel mounted 28 light. 29 d. Refer to the VFD specification for local VFD function and local 30 monitoring capability through the digital display. 31 e. VFD current shall be monitored at the BAS. 32 f. VFD Drive run request will be monitored at the BAS. 33 g. VFD in Auto Position will be monitored at the BAS. 34 h. VFD fault will be monitored at the BAS. 35 4. Alarms: 36 a. A general VFD alarm will be initiated at the BAS via the VFD fault 37 monitored at the BAS. 38 b. Drive run command on and current below a set level (to be field 39 determined.) 40 41 1.3 SINGLE AIR COOLED CHILLER 42 43 A. Chiller - Run Conditions: The chiller shall be enabled to run whenever it is 44 commanded to be enabled by the chiller manager program. The chiller shall run 45 subject to its own internal safeties and controls. 46
09/April/2018 23 09 00 - 3 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 B. Chilled Water Pump: The chilled water pump shall run anytime the chiller is called 2 to run. The chilled water pump shall also run for freeze protection whenever the 3 outside air temperature is less than a user definable setpoint (adj.). 4 5 C. The chilled water pump shall start prior to the chiller being enabled and shall stop 6 only after the chiller is disabled. The chilled water pump shall therefore have: 7 1. No delay on start. 8 2. AND a user adjustable delay on stop. 9 3. Pump speed controlled by VFD to maintain chilled water Loop Differential 10 Pressure. Pump speed shall modulate between minimum flow required by 11 chiller and Full Flow as required to maintain the differential pressure 12 setpoint. 13 14 D. The delay times shall be set appropriately to allow for orderly chilled water system 15 start-up, shutdown and sequencing. 16 1. Alarms shall be provided as follows: 17 a. Chilled Water Pump Failure: Commanded on, but the status is off. 18 b. Chilled Water Pump Running in Hand: Commanded off, but the 19 status is on. 20 c. Chilled Water Pump Runtime Exceeded: Status runtime exceeds a 21 user definable limit. 22 23 E. Chilled Water Bypass Valve - Loop Differential Pressure Control: The controller 24 shall measure chilled water loop differential pressure and, as the chilled water loop 25 differential pressure rises above setpoint, the controller shall modulate chilled water 26 pump speed to maintain the chilled water loop differential pressure setpoint. With 27 the pump at minimum speed and the differential pressure remains above the 28 setpoint, the controller shall modulate the chilled water bypass valve open to 29 maintain the chilled water loop differential pressure setpoint. 30 1. Alarms shall be provided as follows: 31 a. High Chilled Water Differential Pressure: If the chilled water 32 differential pressure is 25% (adj.) greater than setpoint. 33 b. Low Chilled Water Differential Pressure: If the chilled water 34 differential pressure is 25% (adj.) less than setpoint. 35 36 F. Chiller: The chiller shall be enabled a user adjustable time after pump statuses are 37 proven on. The chiller shall therefore have a user adjustable delay on start. The delay 38 time shall be set appropriately to allow for orderly chilled water system start-up, 39 shutdown and sequencing. The chiller shall run subject to its own internal safeties 40 and controls. 41 1. Alarms shall be provided as follows: 42 a. Chiller Failure: Commanded on, but the status is off. 43 b. Chiller Running in Hand: Commanded off, but the status is on. 44 c. Chiller Runtime Exceeded: Status runtime exceeds a user definable 45 limit. 46 47 G. Chiller Chilled Water Supply Setpoint: The chiller shall maintain a chilled water 48 supply temperature setpoint as determined by its own internal controls.
09/April/2018 23 09 00 - 4 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 2 H. Chilled Water Temperature Monitoring: The following temperatures shall be 3 monitored: 4 1. Chilled water supply. 5 2. Chilled water return. 6 3. Alarms shall be provided as follows: 7 a. High Chilled Water Supply Temp: If the chilled water supply 8 temperature is greater than 46°F (adj.). 9 b. Low Chilled Water Supply Temp: If the chilled water supply 10 temperature is less than 38°F (adj.). Hardware Points Software Points Show On Point Name AI AO BI BO AV BV Sched Trend Alarm Graphic Chilled Water Differential × × × Pressure Chilled Water Return Temp × × × Chilled Water Supply Temp × × × Chilled Water Bypass Valve × × × Chilled Water Pump Status × × × Chiller Status × × × Chilled Water Pump Start/Stop × × Chilled Water Pump Speed × × × Chiller Enable × × Chilled Water Differential × × × Pressure Setpoint Chilled Water Pump Failure × Chilled Water Pump Running in × Hand Chilled Water Pump Runtime × Exceeded
09/April/2018 23 09 00 - 5 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO Hardware Points Software Points Show On Point Name AI AO BI BO AV BV Sched Trend Alarm Graphic High Chilled Water Differential × Pressure Low Chilled Water Differential × Pressure Chiller Failure × Chiller Running in Hand × Chiller Runtime Exceeded × High Chilled Water Supply Temp × Low Chilled Water Supply Temp × Total 3 1 2 3 1 8 10 10
1 1.4 CHILLER MANAGER (TYPICAL OF 1) 2 3 A. Chilled Water System - Chiller Manager - Run Conditions: The chilled water 4 system shall be enabled to run whenever: 5 1. A definable number of chilled water coils need cooling 6 7 B. To prevent short cycling, the chiller manager shall run for and be off for minimum 8 adjustable times (both user definable). Each chiller shall run subject to its own 9 internal safeties and controls. 10 11 C. Chiller Lead/Lag Operation: The two chiller trains, (each chiller and its 12 associated support equipment), shall operate in a lead/lag fashion. Chiller train shall 13 be referred to as chiller in this sequence. The following setpoints are recommended 14 values. All setpoints shall be field adjusted during the commissioning period to meet 15 the requirements of actual field conditions. To prevent short cycling, there shall be 16 a user definable delay (adj.) between staging up or down, unless shutdown on safeties 17 or failure. Each chiller shall run subject to its own internal safeties and controls. 18 1. The lead chiller shall run first. 19 2. On failure of the lead chiller, the standby chiller shall run and the lead chiller 20 shall turn off. 21 3. On failure of the lag chiller, the standby chiller shall run and the lag chiller 22 shall turn off. 23 4. On increasing main chilled water supply temperature above 45°F (adj.), the 24 lag chiller shall stage on and run in unison with the lead chiller to 25 maintain chilled water temperature setpoint. 26 5. The designated lead chiller shall rotate upon one of the following conditions 27 (user selectable): 28 a. manually through a software switch 29 b. if chiller runtime (adj.) is exceeded
09/April/2018 23 09 00 - 6 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 c. daily 2 d. weekly 3 e. monthly 4 6. Alarms shall be provided as follows: 5 a. Chiller 1 Failure: Commanded on, but the status is off. 6 b. Chiller 2 Failure: Commanded on, but the status is off. 7 c. Chiller 3 (standby) Failure: Commanded on, but the status is off. 8 d. Lead Chiller Failure: The lead chiller is in failure and the standby 9 chiller is on. 10 e. Lag Chiller Failure: The lag chiller is in failure and the standby chiller 11 is on. 12 f. High Main Chilled Water Supply Temp: If the main chilled water 13 supply temperature is greater than 46°F (adj.). 14 g. Low Main Chilled Water Supply Temp: If the main chilled water 15 supply temperature is less than 38°F (adj.).
Hardware Points Software Points Show On Point Name AI AO BI BO AV BV Sched Trend Alarm Graphic Main Chilled Water Supply X X Yes Temp Main Chilled Water Return X X Yes Temp Chiller 1 Failure X Yes Chiller 2 Failure X Yes Chiller 3 Failure X Yes Lead Chiller Failure X Yes Lag Chiller Failure X Yes High Main Chilled Water X Supply Temp Low Main Chilled Water X Supply Temp Totals 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 7 7 Total Hardware ( 2 ) Total Software ( 9 )
09/April/2018 23 09 00 - 7 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 2 1.5 CHILLED WATER LOOP PUMPS 3 4 A. Chilled Water Pump System - Run Conditions: The chilled water pumps shall be 5 enabled from the chiller control panel. Pump shall be enabled and VFD controller 6 shall ramp up from minimum speed to speed required to maintain chilled water 7 differential pressure setpoint. 8 9 B. To prevent short cycling, the chilled water pump system shall run for and be off for 10 minimum adjustable times.(both user definable). 11 12 C. The pumps shall run at minimum speed or greater as required to meet building load 13 for freeze protection anytime the outside air temperature is less than 38°F (adj.). 14 15 D. Chilled Water Pump Lead/Lag/Standby Operation: The chilled water pump shall 16 run anytime it is requested to run. The chilled water pump shall also run for freeze 17 protection whenever the outside air temperature is less than a user definable setpoint 18 (adj.). The chilled water pump shall have: 19 1. VFD soft start. 20 2. AND a user adjustable delay on stop. 21 a. The delay times shall be set appropriately to allow for orderly chilled 22 water system start-up, shutdown and sequencing. 23 3. Pump speed controlled by VFD to maintain chilled water Loop Differential 24 Pressure. Pump speed shall modulate between minimum flow required by 25 chiller and Full Flow as required to maintain the differential pressure 26 setpoint. 27 4. The lead pump shall run first. 28 5. On decreasing chilled water differential pressure, the lag pump shall stage on 29 and run in unison with the lead pump to maintain chilled water differential 30 pressure setpoint. 31 6. On failure of lead pump, the standby pump shall run and the lead pump shall 32 turn off. 33 7. On failure of lag pump, the standby pump shall run and the lag pump shall 34 turn off. 35 8. Alarms shall be provided as follows: 36 a. Chilled Water Pump 1 37 1) Failure: Commanded on, but the status is off. 38 2) Running in Hand: Commanded off, but the status is on. 39 3) Runtime Exceeded: Status runtime exceeds a user definable 40 limit. 41 b. Chilled Water Pump 2 42 1) Failure: Commanded on, but the status is off. 43 2) Running in Hand: Commanded off, but the status is on. 44 3) Runtime Exceeded: Status runtime exceeds a user definable 45 limit. 46 c. Chilled Water Pump 3 (standby) 47 1) Failure: Commanded on, but the status is off. 48 2) Running in Hand: Commanded off, but the status is on.
09/April/2018 23 09 00 - 8 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 3) Runtime Exceeded: Status runtime exceeds a user definable 2 limit.
Hardware Points Software Points Show Point Name AI AO BI BO AV BV Sched Trend Alarm On Graphic Chilled Water Differential Pressure X X Yes Chilled Water Supply Temp X X Yes Chilled Water Return Temp X X Yes Chilled Water Pump 1 VFD Speed X X Yes Chilled Water Pump 2 VFD Speed X X Yes Chilled Water Pump 3 VFD Speed X X Yes Chilled Water Pump 1 Status X Yes Chilled Water Pump 2 Status X Yes Chilled Water Pump 3 Status X Yes Chilled Water Pump 1 VFD Fault X Yes Chilled Water Pump 2 VFD Fault X Yes Chilled Water Pump 3 VFD Fault X Yes Chilled Water Pump 1 Start/Stop X Yes Chilled Water Pump 2 Start/Stop X Yes Chilled Water Pump 3 Start/Stop X Yes Chilled Water Differential Pressure X Yes Setpoint Chilled Water Pump 1 Failure X Chilled Water Pump 2 Failure X Chilled Water Pump 3 Failure X Chilled Water Pump 1 Running in X Hand Chilled Water Pump 2 Running in X Hand Chilled Water Pump 3 Running in X Hand Chilled Water Pump 1 Runtime X
09/April/2018 23 09 00 - 9 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO Exceeded Chilled Water Pump 2 Runtime X Exceeded Chilled Water Pump 3 Runtime X Exceeded High Chilled Water Differential X Pressure Low Chilled Water Differential X Pressure High Chilled Water Supply Temp X Low Chilled Water Supply Temp X Totals 3 3 6 3 1 0 0 6 13 16 Total Hardware ( 15 ) Total Software ( 20 ) 1 2 1.6 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME ROOFTOP AIR HANDLING UNITS (AHU-2) 3 4 A. Equipment: 5 1. Refer to Equipment Schedule. 6 7 B. General Description: 8 1. A single-fan variable volume air handling system with a variable frequency 9 drives (Type 2), controlling the fan. The unit serves public spaces and 10 operates 24-hours a day, 7-days a week in occupied mode. Unoccupied 11 mode will provide setback of static pressure and zone temperatures. The 12 unit serves level 2 concourse airside and circulations to provide heating and 13 cooling as indicated in the schedule of equipment. The unit supplies air to 14 variable volume terminal units. 15 2. Monitoring, alarming, reporting, and control of all systems will be performed 16 by the BAS which will establish the proper mode of operation (occupied or 17 unoccupied). 18 3. System setpoints will be described in the sequence of operation or as shown 19 on the drawings. All setpoints and alarm parameters will be adjustable. 20 4. Each AHU shall connect to a DDC Control Panel located in the mechanical 21 room or utility room. All points shall connect to BAS unless noted 22 otherwise. 23 5. The supply fan shall run anytime the unit is commanded to run, unless 24 shutdown on safeties. To prevent short cycling, the supply fan shall have a 25 user definable (adj.) minimum runtime. 26
09/April/2018 23 09 00 - 10 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 C. Sequence of Operation: 2 1. The unit shall run based upon an operator adjustable schedule. 3 a. Normal OFF (Auto Mode): When the BAS calls for the unit to be 4 de-energized (via the BAS), the following will occur 5 1) The fan is de-energized via the variable frequency drives 6 (VFD). 7 2) The AHU outside air damper is in the closed position and 8 return air damper is in fully open position. 9 3) Chilled water control valve is in the closed position. Electric 10 heating coil is disabled. 11 4) All control loops will be de-activated. 12 5) All space control will be disabled, but alarms will continue 13 operating. 14 b. OFF (Manual Mode): 15 1) The VFD will have a local disconnect. The disconnect will 16 de-energize the VFD and associated fan. BAS system shall 17 indicate when a disconnect is in the “OFF” position. 18 c. Normal ON (Auto Mode): When the BAS calls for the unit to be 19 energized, the following will occur: 20 1) Fan supply air VFD will be energized. 21 2) When the VFD is enabled and all safeties are within 22 tolerance, the VFD will soft start its supply fan and ramp up 23 (modulate) to maintain system static pressure (refer to 24 Control Loop section on Static Pressure control). 25 3) The air-handling unit is variable volume. The VFD shall be 26 provided with local MANUAL/OFF/AUTO switch and 27 local speed control. With the local VFD MANUAL/OFF 28 AUTO switch in the AUTO position, the BAS will modulate 29 fan speed through the VFD to maintain the discharge air 30 static pressure setpoint. When the local VFD 31 MANUAL/OFF/AUTO switch is in the MANUAL 32 position, local operators will be able to control fan speed 33 manually through the local VFD control. When the local 34 VFD MANUAL/OFF/AUTO switch is in the OFF position, 35 the VFD shall be de-energized. 36 4) AHU Optimal Start: The unit shall start prior to scheduled 37 occupancy based on the time necessary for the zones to reach 38 their occupied setpoints. The start time shall automatically 39 adjust based on changes in outside air temperature and zone 40 temperatures. 41 d. Control Loops: 42 1) Temperature Control: Operation of CHW Cooling Coil: 43 a) General: 44 (1) Each AHU shall have a CHW cooling coil. 45 The BAS contractor shall be responsible for 46 furnishing 2-way, pressure independent auto- 47 flow control valves (PICV) for each coil. 48 Each PICV shall be furnished complete with
09/April/2018 23 09 00 - 11 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 an electronic, modulating, spring return 2 actuator. Chilled water control valves shall fail 3 in the closed position. 4 (2) The supply air temperature setpoint for each 5 AHU shall be resettable. Reset schedule shall 6 be linear based on cooling load of space 7 served. When 100% of VAV and/or fan 8 powered terminal units served by an AHU are 9 calling for cooling, the AHU supply air 10 temperature setpoint shall be at minimum 11 setpoint as indicated on schedule (adj.). When 12 100% of VAV and/or fan powered terminal 13 units served by an AHU are calling for 14 heating, the AHU supply air temperature 15 setpoint shall be at maximum temperature. 16 (3) Chilled water return temperature shall be 17 monitored at BAS. 18 (4) The electric heating coil shall be disabled 19 when the outside air temperature is greater 20 than the supply air temperature setpoint. The 21 controller shall measure the mixed air 22 temperature and stage the heating to 23 maintain its setpoint 5°F (adj.) less than the 24 supply air temperature setpoint. 25 (a) Mixed Air Temperature above Supply 26 Air Temperature Setpoint: 27 i) The BAS shall disable the 28 electric preheat-coil. 29 ii) The BAS shall modulate the 30 CHW coil PICV open to the 31 coil as required to maintain the 32 supply air temperature 33 setpoint. 34 (b) Mixed Air Temperature below Supply 35 Air Temperature Setpoint: 36 i) The BAS shall stage the 37 electric preheat-coil as 38 required to maintain supply air 39 temperature setpoint. 40 ii) The BAS shall command the 41 CHW coil PICV closed to the 42 coil. 43 (c) Supply Air Temperature Reset: 44 i. Supply air reset shall only be 45 enabled when the outside air 46 temperature (global) is below 47 70 deg. F.
09/April/2018 23 09 00 - 12 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 ii. Provide trend data for reset 2 control strategies at the sample 3 rate of no more than 5 4 minutes for all polled terminal 5 boxes for a given AHU. 6 iii. The controller shall monitor 7 the supply air temperature and 8 shall maintain a supply air 9 temperature setpoint reset 10 based on zone cooling and 11 heating requirements 12 iv. The supply air temperature 13 setpoint shall be reset for 14 cooling based on zone cooling 15 requirements as follows: 16 v. The initial supply air 17 temperature setpoint shall 18 be 55°F (adj.), or as shown in 19 AHU Schedule. 20 vi. Heating Mode: If 50% or 21 greater of the terminal boxes 22 served by the AHU (adj.) have 23 greater than 80% heating 24 demand then the supply air 25 setpoint is adjusted up by 10% 26 (adj.) of the difference 27 between the high setpoint 28 temperature (62°F, adj.) and 29 the low setpoint (55°F, adj.) or 30 as shown on AHU Schedule. 31 After 5 minute (adj.) delay, if 32 50% or greater of the terminal 33 boxes served by the AHU 34 have greater than 80% heating 35 demand, then the supply air 36 setpoint is again adjusted 37 upward until fewer than 50% 38 of the boxes served by the 39 AHU have greater than 80% 40 heating demand or the supply 41 air temperature reaches the 42 maximum setpoint 43 temperature of 62°F. 44 vii. If any terminal box has a high 45 space temperature alarm, the 46 supply air temperature will 47 reset to value prior to alarm 48 and that value is temporarily
09/April/2018 23 09 00 - 13 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 assigned the maximum 2 setpoint temperature. 3 viii. Cooling Mode: If 50% or 4 greater of the terminal boxes 5 served by the AHU have 6 greater than 80% cooling 7 demand, then the supply air 8 setpoint is adjusted down by 9 10% (adj.) of the difference 10 between the high setpoint 11 temperature (62°F, adj.) and 12 low setpoint temperature 13 (55°F, adj. or as shown on 14 Schedule). After 5 minutes 15 (adj.) delay, if 50% or greater 16 of the terminal boxes served 17 by the AHU have greater than 18 80% cooling demand, then the 19 supply air temperature is again 20 adjusted downward until less 21 than 50% boxes served by the 22 AHU have greater than 80% 23 cooling demand or the supply 24 air temperature reaches design 25 setpoint. 26 e. Static Pressure Control: Operation of Supply Air Fan Variable 27 Frequency Drives 28 1) General: The VFD manufacturer will be responsible for 29 furnishing VFD with a BACnet communication module. The 30 BAS shall integrate to VFD as required to read the following 31 values: speed, setpoint, hertz, volts, amps, and general alarm. 32 a) Static pressure transmitters shall be located in the 33 supply air ductwork. The supply air static pressure 34 transmitter location shall be shown on the submittal 35 drawings and approved by the Engineer. 36 b) The controller shall measure duct static pressure and 37 shall modulate the supply fan VFD speed to maintain 38 a duct static pressure setpoint of 1.5in w.c. (adj.). The 39 supply fan VFD speed shall not drop below minimum 40 operating speed (adj.). 41 c) The BAS system shall modulate the speed of the 42 VFD as required to maintain the supply air static 43 pressure setpoint (adj.). 44 d) Static Pressure Reset Operation 45 (1) Static Pressure Reset shall only be enabled 46 when the outside air temperature is above 47 70°F (adj.).
09/April/2018 23 09 00 - 14 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 (2) Provide trend data for reset control strategies 2 at a sample rate of no more than 5 minutes 3 for all polled terminal boxes for a given AHU. 4 (3) Fan static pressure shall be reset based on 5 VFD speed. Static pressure reset shall be 6 mapped during testing/balancing/adjusting 7 phase for both single VFD and two VFD 8 options. 9 (4) Determine the maximum static pressure 10 setpoint based on system demand with at least 11 one terminal until controlling airflow with the 12 primary damper operating at 90% (adj.). 13 Determine the minimum static pressure 14 setpoint based on system demand with at least 15 one terminal unit controlling airflow with the 16 primary damper operating at 90% (adj.). 17 (5) Static Pressure Reset shall vary from the 18 maximum static pressure setpoint to the 19 minimum static pressure setpoint and be 20 determined based on the terminal unit 21 primary damper position. When any terminal 22 unit damper position is greater than 90% 23 (adj.), the static pressure setpoint shall be 24 adjusted upward. When all terminal unit 25 damper positions are less than 90% (adj.), the 26 static pressure setpoint shall be adjusted 27 downward. 28 (6) Static Pressure Reset Operation shall be able 29 to be disabled for each AHU at the BAS. 30 Static pressure setpoint shall be adjustable. 31 f. Minimum Outside Air Control: Operation of Outside Air Dampers: 32 1) General: 33 a) AHU shall have a mixing box section consisting of 34 outside air and return air damper. In addition to this, 35 the AHU manufacturer shall also furnish and factory 36 install outside air airflow measuring station complete 37 with airflow rate transmitter. 38 b) Outside air is monitored and controlled to maintain a 39 constant outside air cfm (specified in Schedule) of 40 maximum supply air during the whole cycle of the fan 41 operation. This is done via the controller supplied 42 with the unit. Outside air damper modulation will be 43 based on maintaining constant outside air airflow. 44 Return air damper shall remain fully open as the 45 outside air damper modulates open to maintain 46 minimum outside air setpoint. Once the outside air 47 damper is fully open and minimum outside airflow is 48 below requirements (setpoint), the return air damper
09/April/2018 23 09 00 - 15 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 shall modulate towards the closed position until the 2 outside airflow setpoint is satisfied. 3 c) Outside air damper shall be configured normally 4 closed/fail closed and return air damper shall be 5 configured normally open/fail open. 6 d) Outside air damper shall close if both fan systems are 7 de-energized or if the freezestat indicates a mixed 8 temperature below 40°F. 9 10 D. BAS Alarms: 11 1. Low Temperature: 12 a. The analog temperature sensor downstream of preheat coil shall 13 provide control of the preheat coil and a low level alarm to the BAS 14 at 45°F (adj.). Upon alarm, heating will be enabled if currently 15 disabled. 16 b. When mixed air temperature drops below 40°F (adj.), a freeze alarm 17 will continue at BAS, outside air damper will signal closed. AHU 18 shall remain operational. 19 c. When mixed air temperature rises above 40°F (adj.) for two minutes, 20 the alarm condition will reset and outside damper will reset to 21 previous mode. AHU shall remain operational. 22 d. When the mixed air temperature rises above 45°F (adj.) for two 23 minutes (adj.), the alarm will silence. AHU shall remain operational. 24 2. Freezestat: A hard-wired freezestat will shut down the unit if preheat coil 25 discharge temperature is 35°F (adj.) 26 3. High Static Shutdown: The unit shall shut down and generate an alarm upon 27 receiving an high static shutdown signal. A local pushbutton control shall 28 reset unit after a trip due to high static pressure. 29 4. Return Air Smoke Detection: The unit shall shut down and generate an 30 alarm upon receiving a return air smoke detector status. 31 5. Supply Fan: Alarms shall be provided as follows: 32 a. Supply Fan Failure: Commanded on, but the status is off. Fan shall 33 continue to operate while static pressure is being met. 34 b. Supply Fan VFD fault (per VFD) 35 c. Supply Fans VFD in Hand: Commanded off, but the status is on (per 36 VFD). 37 6. Supply Air Duct Static Pressure Control: 38 a. High Supply Air Static Pressure: If the supply air static pressure is 39 25% (adj.) greater than setpoint. 40 b. Low Supply Air Static Pressure: If the supply air static pressure is 41 25% (adj.) less than setpoint. 42 7. Filter Assembly Differential Pressure Monitor: Prefilter differential pressure 43 exceeds a user definable limit (adj.). 44 8. Supply Air Temperature: Alarms shall be provided as follows: 45 a. High Supply Air Temp: If the supply air temperature is greater 46 than 120°F (adj.). 47 b. Low Supply Air Temp: If the supply air temperature is less 48 than 45°F (adj.).
09/April/2018 23 09 00 - 16 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO Hardware Points Software Points Show On Point Name AI AO BI BO AV BV Sched Trend Alarm Graphic Outside Air Airflow X Yes Supply Air Static Pressure X X Yes Supply Air Humidity X X Yes Filter Dirty? X X Yes Mixed Air Temp X Yes Return Air Humidity X X Yes Return Air Temp X X X Yes Supply Air Temp X X X Yes Supply Fan LEAD VFD Speed X Yes VFD Fault X Yes VFD Hertz X Yes VFD Amps X Yes VFD in Hand? X X Yes VFD enable/disable X Yes VFD On/Off Cooling Valve X X Yes Heating Valve X X Yes Chilled Water Return Yes X Temperature Heating Water Return Yes X Temperature Return Air Damper X X Yes Low Temperature Control X X X Yes Freezestat X X X Yes High Static Shutdown X X X Yes Return Air Smoke Detector X X X Yes Supply Fan Status (per fan) X X Yes Supply Air Static Pressure Yes X X Setpoint Supply Air Temp Setpoint X X Supply Air Temp Reset X X Static Pressure Reset X X Yes
09/April/2018 23 09 00 - 17 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO Hardware Points Software Points Show On Point Name AI AO BI BO AV BV Sched Trend Alarm Graphic Schedule X Yes High Supply Air Static Pressure X Yes Low Supply Air Static Pressure X Yes Supply Fan Failure X Yes Totals 9 3 5 1 8 1 1 16 13 30 Total Hardware ( 18 ) Total Software ( 39 ) 1 2 1.7 SINGLE ZONE AIR HANDLING UNITS – OVER 4000 CFM (PUBLIC SPACES) 3 A. Equipment: 4 1. Refer to Equipment Schedules. 5 6 B. General Description: 7 1. A single-fan constant volume air handling system with variable frequency 8 drive (Type 2) for use for “soft start” and balancing of system. 9 2. Monitoring, alarming, reporting, and control of all systems will be performed 10 by the BAS which will establish the proper mode of operation. 11 3. System setpoints will be described in the sequence of operation or as shown 12 on the drawings. All setpoints and alarm parameters will be adjustable. 13 4. Each AHU shall connect to a DDC Control Panel located in the mechanical 14 room or utility room. All points shall connect to BAS unless noted 15 otherwise. 16 5. The supply fan shall run anytime the unit is commanded to run, unless 17 shutdown on safeties. To prevent short cycling, the supply fan shall have a 18 user definable (adj.) minimum runtime. 19 20 C. Sequence of Operation: The unit shall run based upon an operator adjustable 21 schedule. 22 1. Normal OFF (Auto Mode): When the BAS calls for the unit to be de- 23 energized (via the BAS), the following will occur: 24 a. Fan is de-energized via the variable frequency drive (VFD). 25 b. The AHU outside damper is in the closed position and return air 26 damper is in fully open position. 27 c. Chilled water control valve is in the closed position. Hot water 28 control valve is in the closed position. 29 d. All control loops will be de-activated. 30 e. All space control will be disabled, but alarms will continue operating. 31 2. OFF (Manual Mode): 32 a. The VFD will have a local disconnect. The disconnect will de- 33 energize the VFD and fan. BAS system shall indicate when the 34 disconnect is in the “OFF” position. 35 3. Normal ON (Auto Mode):
09/April/2018 23 09 00 - 18 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 4. When the BAS calls for the unit to be energized (via the BAS), the following 2 will occur: 3 a. VFD will be energized. 4 b. When the VFD is enabled and all safeties are within tolerance, the 5 VFD will soft start its supply fan and ramp up (modulate) to 6 maximum airflow (determined during test and balance phase). 7 c. The air-handling units are provided with variable frequency drive. 8 VFD shall be provided with local MANUAL/OFF/AUTO switch 9 and local speed control. With the local VFD MANUAL/OFF 10 AUTO switch in the AUTO or MANUAL position, the BAS shall 11 operate the supply fan at speed set locally at VFD. When the local 12 VFD MANUAL/OFF/AUTO switch is in the OFF position, the 13 VFD shall be de-energized. 14 15 D. Control Loops: 16 1. Temperature Control: Operation of Electric Preheat Coil, CHW Cooling 17 Coil – General: 18 a. Each AHU shall have a CHW cooling coil. Refer to Schedules for 19 units with electric heating coils. The BAS contractor shall be 20 responsible for furnishing 2-way, pressure independent auto-flow 21 control valves (PICV) for each coil. Each PICV shall be furnished 22 complete with an electronic, modulating, spring return actuator. 23 Chilled water control valves shall fail in the closed position. 24 b. Chilled water return temperature shall be monitored at BAS. 25 c. The controller shall measure the zone temperature and modulate the 26 CHW coil PICV open to the coil as required to maintain its cooling 27 setpoint. 28 1) The cooling shall be enabled whenever: 29 a) Outside air temperature is greater than 60 ⁰ F (adj.). 30 b) AND the zone temperature is above cooling setpoint. 31 c) AND the supply fan status is on. 32 d) AND the heating is not active. 33 2) The CHW coil PICV shall open to 50% (adj.) whenever the 34 freezestat is on. 35 36 d. The controller shall measure the zone temperature and stage the 37 electric preheat coil to maintain its heating setpoint. 38 1) The heating shall be enabled whenever: 39 a) Outside air temperature is less than 60 ⁰ F (adj.). 40 b) AND the zone temperature is below heating setpoint. 41 c) AND the supply fan status is on. 42 d) AND the cooling is not active. 43 44 2. Outside Air Control: Operation of Outside Air Dampers - General: 45 a. When air handling unit is enabled, the outside air damper shall open 46 to outside air specified in Schedule. 47 b. Outside air and return air are balanced during commissioning.
09/April/2018 23 09 00 - 19 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 c. Outside air damper shall be configured normally closed/fail closed. 2 d. Outside air damper shall close if fan system is de-energized or if the 3 freezestat indicates a mixed temperature below 40°F. 4 5 E. BAS Alarms: 6 1. Low Temperature: 7 a. The analog temperature sensor downstream of preheat coil shall 8 provide control of the preheat coil and a low level alarm to the BAS 9 at 45°F (adj.). Upon alarm, heating will be enabled if currently 10 disabled. 11 b. When mixed air temperature drops below 40°F (adj.), a freeze alarm 12 will continue at BAS, outside air damper will signal closed. 13 c. When mixed air temperature rises above 40°F (adj.) for two minutes, 14 the alarm condition will reset and outside air damper will reset to 15 previous mode. 16 d. When the mixed air temperature rises above 45°F (adj.) for two 17 minutes (adj.), the alarm will silence. 18 2. Return Air Smoke Detection: The unit shall shut down and generate an 19 alarm upon receiving a return air smoke detector status. 20 3. Supply Fan: Alarms shall be provided as follows: 21 a. Supply Fan Failure: Commanded on, but the status is off. 22 b. Supply Fan VFD fault. 23 4. Filter Assembly Differential Pressure Monitor: filter differential pressure 24 exceeds a user definable limit (adj.). 25 5. Supply Air Temperature: Alarms shall be provided as follows: 26 a. High Supply Air Temp: If the supply air temperature is greater 27 than 120°F (adj.). 28 b. Low Supply Air Temp: If the supply air temperature is less than 45°F 29 (adj.). Hardware Points Software Points Point Name AI AO BI BO AV BV Sched Trend Alarm Show On Graphic Outside Air Airflow X Yes Supply Air Humidity X X Yes Filter Differential X X Yes Pressure Mixed Air Temp X Yes Return Air Humidity X X Yes Return Air Temp X X X Yes Supply Air Temp X X X Yes VFD Speed X Yes VFD Fault X Yes VFD Hertz X Yes VFD Amps X Yes VFD in Hand? X X Yes VFD enable/disable X Yes Cooling Valve X X Yes
09/April/2018 23 09 00 - 20 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO Hardware Points Software Points Point Name AI AO BI BO AV BV Sched Trend Alarm Show On Graphic SCR Heating X X Yes Chilled Water Ret. X Yes Temp. Return Air Damper X X Yes Freezestat X X X Yes Low Temp Control X X X Yes Return Air Smoke X X X Yes Detector Supply Fan Status X X Yes Supply Air Temp X X Yes Setpoint Totals 8 3 4 1 5 1 0 12 8 23 Total Hardware ( 16 ) Total Software ( 26 ) 1 2 1.8 FAN COIL UNITS – 2300 CFM AND LESS (WITHOUT VFD) 3 4 A. Equipment: 5 1. Refer to Equipment Schedules. 6 7 B. General Description: 8 1. A single-fan constant volume air handling system with starter. 9 2. Monitoring, alarming, reporting, and control of all systems will be performed 10 by the BAS which will establish the proper mode of operation. 11 3. System setpoints will be described in the sequence of operation or as shown 12 on the drawings. All setpoints and alarm parameters will be adjustable. 13 4. Each AHU shall connect to a DDC Control Panel located in the mechanical 14 room or utility room. All points shall connect to BAS unless noted 15 otherwise. 16 5. The supply fan shall run anytime the unit is commanded to run, unless 17 shutdown on safeties. To prevent short cycling, the supply fan shall have a 18 user definable (adj.) minimum runtime. 19 20 C. Sequence of Operation: The unit shall run based upon an operator adjustable 21 schedule. 22 1. Normal OFF (Auto Mode): When the BAS calls for the unit to be de- 23 energized (via the BAS), the following will occur: 24 a. Fan is de-energized. 25 b. Chilled water control valve is in the closed position. Electric heating 26 coil, if heating coil is included, is disabled. 27 c. All control loops will be de-activated. 28 d. All space control will be disabled, but alarms will continue operating.
09/April/2018 23 09 00 - 21 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 2. OFF (Manual Mode): 2 a. The fan will have a local disconnect. The disconnect will de-energize 3 the fan. BAS system shall indicate when the disconnect is in the 4 “OFF” position. 5 3. Normal ON (Auto Mode): When the BAS calls for the unit to be energized 6 (via the BAS), the following will occur: 7 a. Fan will be energized. 8 9 D. Control Loops: 10 1. Temperature Control: Operation of Electric Heating Coil, CHW Cooling 11 Coil - General: 12 a. Each AHU shall have a CHW cooling coil. Refer to Schedules for 13 units with electric heating coils. The BAS contractor shall be 14 responsible for furnishing 2-way, pressure independent auto-flow 15 control valves (PICV) for each coil. Each PICV shall be furnished 16 complete with an electronic, modulating, spring return actuator. 17 b. Chilled water return temperature shall be monitored at BAS. 18 c. Space Temperature above Setpoint: 19 1) The BAS shall disable the heating. 20 2) THE BAS shall modulate the CHW coil PICV open to the 21 coil as required to maintain the space temperature setpoint. 22 d. Space Temperature below Setpoint: 23 1) The BAS shall stage the heating to maintain the space air 24 temperature setpoint. 25 2) The BAS shall command the CHW coil PICV closed to the 26 coil. 27 28 E. BAS Alarms: 29 1. Supply Fan: Alarms shall be provided as follows: 30 a. Supply Fan Failure: Commanded on, but the status is off. 31 2. Filter Assembly Differential Pressure Monitor: Prefilter differential pressure 32 exceeds a user definable limit (adj.). 33 3. Space Temperature: Alarms shall be provided as follows: 34 a. High Space Temp: 10°F above setpoint (adj.). 35 b. Low Supply Air Temp: 10°F below setpoint (adj.). 36 4. Supply Air Temperature: Alarms shall be provided as follows: 37 a. High Supply Air Temp: If the supply air temperature is greater 38 than 120°F (adj.). 39 b. Low Supply Air Temp: If the supply air temperature is less 40 than 45°F (adj.). Hardware Points Software Points Point Name AI AO BI BO AV BV Sched Trend Alarm Show On Graphic Filter Dirty? X X Yes Heating Coil Leaving Temp X Yes Supply Air Temp X X X Yes
09/April/2018 23 09 00 - 22 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO Hardware Points Software Points Point Name AI AO BI BO AV BV Sched Trend Alarm Show On Graphic Space Temperature X X X Yes Return Air Temp X X Yes Fan enable/disable X Yes Cooling Valve X X Yes Heating Stage 1 X X Yes Heating Stage 2 X X Yes Chilled Water Ret. Temp. X Yes Supply Fan Status X X Yes Totals 6 2 3 2 0 0 0 7 4 13 Total Hardware ( 13 ) Total Software ( 11 ) 1 2 1.9 EXHAUST FANS (480V, SERVING PUBLIC SPACES, RESTROOMS, AND LOCKER 3 ROOMS) 4 5 A. Equipment: Refer to Schedule. 6 7 B. General Description: 8 1. Larger fans serving public and non-public spaces. 9 10 C. Sequence of Operation: 11 1. Fans will operate continuously. 12 2. Exhaust fans status (operating or not) will be indicated on BAS. 13 Hardware Points Software Points Point Name AI AO BI BO AV BV Sched Trend Alarm Show On Graphic Fan status (via current X YES switch) Totals 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Total Hardware ( 1 ) Total Software ( 0 ) 14 15 1.10 EXHAUST FANS (LESS THAN 480V, SERVING SMALL RESTROOMS, WORK 16 ROOMS, AND SMALL BREAK ROOMS) 17 18 A. Equipment: Refer to Schedule. 19 20 B. General Description: 21 1. Small fans serving low odor rooms. 22
09/April/2018 23 09 00 - 23 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 C. Sequence of Operation: 2 1. Fans serving single rooms or restrooms will be interlocked with lights. Other 3 fans will operate continuously. The fans will have no connection to BAS. 4 5 D. BAS Indication: 6 1. None
7 1.11 SUPPLY FANS (VESTIBULE)
8 A. Equipment: Refer to Schedule. 9 10 B. General Description: 11 1. Supply fans serving vestibule. 12 13 C. Sequence of Operation: 14 1. Fans will operate continuously. 15 2. Supply fans status (operating or not) will be indicated on BAS. 16 Hardware Points Software Points Point Name AI AO BI BO AV BV Sched Trend Alarm Show On Graphic Fan status (via current X YES switch) Totals 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Total Hardware ( 1 ) Total Software ( 0 ) 17 18 1.12 OUTSIDE AIR UNITS 19 20 A. Equipment: 21 1. Refer to Equipment Schedule for units with 100% outside air. 22 23 B. General Description: 24 1. A single-fan constant volume air handling system with variable frequency 25 drive (Type 2) for use for “soft start” and balancing of system. 26 2. Monitoring, alarming, reporting, and control of all systems will be performed 27 by the BAS which will establish the proper mode of operation. 28 3. System setpoints will be described in the sequence of operation or as shown 29 on the drawings. All setpoints and alarm parameters will be adjustable. 30 4. Each AHU shall connect to a DDC Control Panel located in the nearest 31 mechanical room. All points shall connect to BAS unless noted otherwise. 32 5. The supply fan shall run anytime the unit is commanded to run, unless 33 shutdown on safeties. To prevent short cycling, the supply fan shall have a 34 user definable (adj.) minimum runtime. 35 36 C. Sequence of Operation: The unit shall run based upon an operator adjustable 37 schedule. 38 1. Normal OFF (Auto Mode):
09/April/2018 23 09 00 - 24 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 2. When the BAS calls for the unit to be de-energized (via the BAS), the 2 following will occur: 3 a. Fan is de-energized via the variable frequency drive (VFD). 4 b. The OAU inlet damper is in the closed position. 5 c. Chilled water control valve is in the closed position. The electric 6 preheat coil shall be disabled. 7 d. All control loops will be de-activated. 8 e. All space control will be disabled, but alarms will continue operating. 9 3. OFF (Manual Mode): 10 a. The VFD will have a local disconnect. The disconnect will de- 11 energize the VFD and fan. BAS system shall indicate when the 12 disconnect is in the “OFF” position. 13 4. Normal ON (Auto Mode): When the BAS calls for the unit to be energized 14 (via the BAS), the following will occur: 15 a. The outside air damper shall open. 16 b. VFD will be energized. 17 c. When the VFD is enabled and all safeties are within tolerance, the 18 VFD will soft start its supply fan and ramp up (modulate) to 19 maximum airflow (determined during test and balance phase). 20 d. The air-handling units are provided with variable frequency drive. 21 VFD shall be provided with local MANUAL/OFF/AUTO switch 22 and local speed control. With the local VFD MANUAL/OFF 23 AUTO switch in the AUTO or MANUAL position, the BAS shall 24 operate the supply fan at speed set locally at VFD. When the local 25 VFD MANUAL/OFF/AUTO switch is in the OFF position, the 26 VFD shall be de-energized. 27 28 D. Control Loops: 29 1. Supply Air Temperature Setpoint – Outside Air Reset: 30 a. The controller shall monitor the supply air temperature and shall 31 maintain supply air temperature setpoint. The supply air temperature 32 setpoint shall reset for cooling as follows: 33 1) As outside air temperature drops from 95°F (adj.) to 36°F 34 (adj.), the supply air temperature setpoint shall reset upwards 35 from 55°F (adj.) to 70°F (adj.). 36 b. Cooling Coil Valve: 37 1) The controller shall measure the supply air temperature and 38 modulate the cooling coil valve to maintain its cooling 39 setpoint. 40 2) The cooling shall be enabled whenever: 41 a) Outside air temperature is greater than 60°F (adj.). 42 b) AND the supply air temperature is above cooling 43 setpoint. 44 c) AND the fan status is on. 45 3) The cooling coil valve shall open to 50% (adj.) whenever the 46 freezestat is on. 47 c. Electric Preheat Coil:
09/April/2018 23 09 00 - 25 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 1) The controller shall measure the supply air temperature and 2 stage the heating coil to maintain its heating setpoint. 3 2) The heating shall be enabled whenever: 4 a) Outside air temperature is less than 65°F (adj.). 5 b) AND the supply air temperature is below heating 6 setpoint. 7 c) AND the fan status is on. 8 3) The heating coil shall be staged to 100% (adj.) whenever the 9 freezestat is on. 10 2. Outside Air Safety Control: Operation of Outside Air Dampers - General: 11 a. The outside air damper shall open anytime the unit runs and shall 12 close anytime the unit stops. The supply fan shall start only after the 13 damper status has proven the damper is open. The outside air 14 damper shall close 4 sec (adj.) after the supply fan stops. 15 b. If the preheat coil discharge temperature (chilled water coil inlet 16 temperature) is below 35°F, the unit shall be de-energized and 17 damper closed. 18 19 E. BAS Alarms: 20 1. Low Temperature: 21 a. Warm-up mode: 22 1) The unit “warm up” mode is set for 10 minutes (adj.). 23 During this period, alarms to BAS will be suspended. 24 Freezestat will continue to disable unit in case of heating coil 25 discharge temperature below 35°F (adj.). 26 b. The analog temperature sensor downstream of preheat coil shall 27 provide control of the preheat coil and provide a low level 28 (“supervisory”) alarm to the BAS when the discharge temperature 29 drops below 45°F (adj.). Upon alarm, heating will be enabled if 30 currently disabled. 31 c. When the heating coil discharge temperature drops below 40°F (adj.), 32 a normal level freeze alarm will notify the BAS. 33 d. When heating coil discharge temperature rises above 40°F (adj.) for 34 two minutes, the alarm condition will reset. 35 e. When the mixed air temperature rises above 45°F (adj.) for two 36 minutes (adj.), all alarms will silence. 37 2. Freezestat: A hard-wired freezestat will shut down the unit if preheat coil 38 discharge temperature is 35°F (adj.). 39 3. Supply Fan: Alarms shall be provided as follows: 40 a. Supply Fan: Alarms shall be provided as follows: 41 b. Supply Fan Failure: Commanded on, but the status is off. 42 c. Supply Fan VFD fault 43 d. Supply Fan VFD in Hand: Commanded off, but the status is on. 44 4. Filter Assembly Differential Pressure Monitor: Prefilter differential pressure 45 exceeds a user definable limit (adj.). 46 5. Supply Air Temperature: Alarms shall be provided as follows: 47 a. High Supply Air Temp: If the supply air temperature is greater than 48 120°F (adj.).
09/April/2018 23 09 00 - 26 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 b. Low Supply Air Temp: If the supply air temperature is less than 45°F 2 (adj.). 3 6. Outside Air Damper: Alarms shall be provided as follows: 4 a. Outside air damper failure: Commanded open, but the status is 5 closed. 6 b. Outside air damper in Hand: Commanded closed, but the status is 7 open. 8 Hardware Points Software Points Point Name AI AO BI BO AV BV Sched Trend Alarm Show On Graphic Filter Differential X X Yes Pressure Preheat Coil Discharge X Yes Temp Chilled Water Coil X Yes Discharge Temp Outside Air Temp X X Yes Supply Air Temp X X Yes VFD Speed X Yes VFD Fault X Yes VFD Hertz X Yes VFD Amps X Yes VFD in Hand? X X Yes VFD enable/disable X Yes Cooling Valve X X Yes Preheat Heating SCR X X Yes Chilled Water Ret. X Yes Temp. Freezestat X X X Yes Outside Air Damper X X Yes Status Supply Air Temperature X X Yes Setpoint Outside Air Damper X X Yes Supply Fan Status X X Yes High Supply Air Temp X Low Supply Air Temp X Outside Air Damper X Failure Outside Air Damper in X Hand Totals 5 1 4 3 4 1 0 9 8 19 Total Hardware ( 13 ) Total Software ( 22 )
09/April/2018 23 09 00 - 27 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 2 1.13 PARALLEL FAN-POWERED TERMINAL UNIT WITH ELECTRIC HEATING 3 4 A. Equipment: Refer to Schedules. 5 1. Refer to Basis of Design for parallel operation fan-powered terminal units. 6 7 B. Sequence of Operation: 8 1. Run Conditions – Scheduled: The unit shall run according to a user 9 definable time schedule in the following modes: 10 a. When the outside temperature is 55°F or greater, the system will 11 maintain “Summer” setpoint temperature. When the outside air is 12 less than 55°F, the system will maintain “Winter” setpoint 13 temperature. 14 b. The standard deadband is 3°F (adj.). The maximum space 15 temperature is one-half of deadband (1.5°F) above setpoint 16 temperature. The minimum space temperature is one-half of 17 deadband (1.5°F) below setpoint temperature. If the summer 18 setpoint temperature is 75°F, the maximum space temperature would 19 be 76.5°F and the minimum space temperature is 73.5°F. 20 c. There are three modes of operation: Occupied Mode, Unoccupied 21 Mode, and Emergency Mode. Emergency Mode is a temperature 22 reset to account for the loss of cooling/heating from a failed adjacent 23 AHU, AHU VFD, or terminal unit. Should an AHU, one of its 24 VFDs, or an associated terminal box show fault at the BAS (not 25 operating), the adjacent terminal units (based on Adjacency Matrix) 26 will reset temperature to Emergency Mode. Once the fault has been 27 cleared, the terminal box will return to scheduled mode. 28 d. Occupied Mode: The unit shall maintain 29 1) A 75°F (adj.) Summer setpoint 30 2) A 72°F (adj.) Winter setpoint. 31 e. Unoccupied Mode (night setback): The unit shall maintain 32 1) A 80°F (adj.) Summer setpoint. 33 2) A 68°F (adj.) Winter setpoint. 34 f. Emergency Mode: the unit shall maintain 35 1) A 72°F (adj.) Summer setpoint 36 2) A 75°F (adj.) Winter setpoint. 37 2. Alarms shall be provided as follows: 38 a. High Zone Temp: If the zone temperature is greater than 5°F (adj.) 39 above the maximum space temperature 30 minutes (adj.) after a 40 mode changes (e.g., unoccupied to occupied mode, or off to 41 occupied). 42 b. Low Zone Temp: If the zone temperature is less than 5°F (adj.) 43 below the minimum space temperature 30 minutes (adj.) after a mode 44 changes (e.g., unoccupied to occupied mode, or off to occupied). 45 3. Zone Setpoint Adjust: For public spaces, the temperature setpoint will be set 46 from the BAS (no public access). For non-public spaces, the occupant shall 47 be able to adjust the zone temperature heating and cooling setpoints at the 48 zone sensor (up to 3°F from setpoint).
09/April/2018 23 09 00 - 28 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 4. Zone Unoccupied Override: For non-public office spaces, a timed local 2 override control shall allow an occupant to override the schedule and place 3 the unit into an occupied mode for an adjustable period of time. At the 4 expiration of this time, control of the unit shall automatically return to the 5 schedule. 6 5. Fan-Powered Terminal Unit - Flow and Temperature Control: The unit shall 7 maintain zone setpoints by controlling the temperature and airflow as 8 follows: 9 a. “Maximum Cooling Mode”: At maximum cooling provided for the 10 unit, the supply air valve is fully open and the maximum cooling 11 airflow (adj.) is provided. The parallel fan is de-energized and the 12 heating coil is disabled. 13 b. At “no load”, the supply air valve is at its minimum position (adj.) to 14 maintain ventilation. The parallel fan is de-energized and the heating 15 coil is disabled. 16 c. “Maximum Heating Mode 1”: When the space requires heating 17 (“first stage”), the supply air valve is at its minimum position. The 18 parallel fan is energized and operating at full speed. The heating coil 19 is disabled. 20 d. “Maximum Heating Mode 2”: At the maximum second stage of 21 heating (maximum total heating) provided by the unit, the supply air 22 valve is at its minimum position. The parallel fan is energized and 23 operating at full speed. The heating coil is staged to full heating. 24 e. When the unit is disabled via the BAS, the supply air valve will be 25 closed, the fan will be de-energized, and the heating coil will be 26 disabled. 27 f. In cooling mode, when the zone temperature is greater than the 28 maximum temperature setpoint, the supply air valve shall modulate 29 open until it is at maximum cooling airflow (adj.). If the zone 30 temperature is less than its minimum temperature setpoint, the 31 supply air valve shall modulate closed until it reaches its minimum 32 position (“No Load”). 33 g. At “No Load”, when the zone temperature is greater than its 34 maximum temperature setpoint, the unit shall go into cooling mode. 35 When the zone temperature is less than the minimum temperature 36 setpoint, the unit shall go into heating mode 1 and the parallel fan 37 will be enabled. 38 h. In heating mode 1, when the zone temperature is greater than its 39 maximum temperature setpoint, the parallel fan speed shall de- 40 energize. If the zone temperature is greater than the maximum 41 temperature setpoint (for at least 2 minutes, adj.), the unit shall go 42 into “no load” and the parallel fan shall be disabled. In heating mode 43 1, when the zone temperature is less than the minimum temperature 44 setpoint, the parallel fan speed shall energize and operate at pre-set 45 full speed of fan. At the maximum airflow, if the zone temperature is 46 less than the minimum temperature setpoint (for at least 2 minutes, 47 adj.), the unit shall go into heating mode 2 and the heating coil shall 48 be enabled.
09/April/2018 23 09 00 - 29 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 i. In heating mode 2, when the zone temperature is greater than its 2 maximum temperature setpoint, the heating coil shall be staged 3 closed. When fully closed, if the zone temperature is greater than the 4 maximum temperature setpoint (for at least 2 minutes, adj.), the unit 5 shall go into heating mode 1 and the heating coil shall be disabled. In 6 heating mode 2, when the zone temperature is less than the minimum 7 temperature setpoint, the heating coil shall be staged to full heating. 8 6. Discharge Air Temperature: The controller shall monitor the discharge 9 air temperature. 10 7. Fan Status: The controller shall monitor the fan status. 11 8. Filter Hours: The controller shall monitor the fan runtime and signal for 12 filter change at 1500 hrs (adj.). 13 14 C. BAS Alarms: 15 1. The following alarms shall occur at BAS: 16 a. Zone temperature greater than maximum temperature setpoint 17 temperature and the unit is at Maximum Cooling Mode. 18 b. Zone temperature less than minimum temperature setpoint 19 temperature and the unit is at Maximum Heating Mode 2. 20 c. High Discharge Air Temp: If the discharge air temperature is greater 21 than 120°F (adj.). 22 d. Low Discharge Air Temp: If the discharge air temperature is less 23 than 40°F (adj.). 24 e. Fan Failure: Commanded on, but the status is off. 25 f. Fan in Hand: Commanded off, but the status is on. Hardware Points Software Points Point Name AI AO BI BO AV BV Sched Trend Alarm Show On Graphic Zone Temp X X X Yes Zone Setpoint Adjust X Yes Supply Air Valve position X Yes Discharge Air Temp X X Yes Zone Damper X Yes Reheat Stage 1 X Yes Reheat Stage 2 X Yes Reheat Stage 3 X Yes Fan Status X Yes Fan Start/Stop X Yes Schedule X Yes Heating Setpoint X Yes Cooling Setpoint X Yes High Zone Temp X Yes
09/April/2018 23 09 00 - 30 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO Hardware Points Software Points Point Name AI AO BI BO AV BV Sched Trend Alarm Show On Graphic Low Zone Temp X Yes High Discharge Air Temp X Yes Low Discharge Air Temp X Yes Fan Failure X Yes Fan in Hand X Yes Filter Change Required X Yes Totals 3 1 1 4 1 0 1 4 8 20 Total Hardware ( 9 ) Total Software ( 14 ) 1 1.14 CARBON DIOXIDE (CO2) CONTROL 2 3 A. General Description: 4 1. Refer to air handling units serving level 1 baggage claim and primary 5 screening. 6 7 B. Sequence of Operation: 8 1. Minimum Outside Air Ventilation - Carbon Dioxide (CO2) Control: 9 When in the occupied mode, the controller shall monitor zone CO2 levels 10 served by the air handling unit. If any zone CO2 level rises above an 11 adjustable CO2 setpoint of 1200 ppm, the outside air damper will modulate 12 to 100% open position until all zone CO2 levels are below 1000 ppm (adj.). 13 CO2 control will be locked out during freeze prevention mode. 14 2. Outside air damper shall be limited by supply air temperature. If the supply 15 air temperature varies from the current setpoint by 10 degrees (adj.) above or 16 below, the CO2 mode will be disabled and normal outside air damper 17 operation will resume so that opening a damper will not cause a freezestat 18 warning or overwhelm the cooling coil. 19 3. Alarms shall be provided as follows: 20 a. High Zone Carbon Dioxide Concentration: If the highest zone CO2 21 concentration is greater than 1400 ppm (adj.). Hardware Points Software Points Point Name AI AO BI BO AV BV Sched Trend Alarm Show On Graphic
Zone CO 2 PPM (per zone) X X X Yes
Zone CO 2 PPM Setpoint Yes X Adjust Outside air damper setting X Yes Totals 0 1 0 0 2 0 0 1 1 3 Total Hardware ( 1 ) Total Software ( 4 )
09/April/2018 23 09 00 - 31 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 1.15 ELECTRIC UNIT HEATERS 2 3 A. Equipment: Refer to Schedule 4 5 B. General Description: 6 1. Electric unit heaters mounted on wall of Fire Riser Room. 7 8 C. Sequence of Operation: 9 1. When the outside temperature (global point) is below 35°F (adj.), the unit 10 heater will be enabled to maintain 55°F (adj.) space temperature in area. 11 12 1.16 CONDENSATE PUMPS FOR HVAC DRAIN 13 14 A. Equipment: Refer to Schedule MH6-0-1000-CD 15 16 B. General Description: 17 1. Small packaged HVAC drain condensate pumps with integral floats and 18 pump control to transfer condensate to drain. 19 20 C. Sequence of Operation: 21 1. The pumps will be local control with no connection to BAS. 22 23 D. BAS Indication: 24 1. None 25 26 1.17 LIGHTING CONTROL PANELS 27 28 A. Equipment: Refer to Electrical Drawings 29 30 31 B. General Description: 32 1. Lighting control panels will self monitor and control lighting zones based on 33 time-of-day schedule, occupancy, and/or light levels in space. Lighting 34 control panels will be interfaced with the BAS via a BACnet/IP connection. 35 Lighting control panel shall control lights regardless if communication is lost 36 with BAS. 37 38 C. Sequence of Operation: 39 1. Lighting control panel will control lighting zones based on occupancy, 40 lighting levels, or time-of-day schedule. Interface from BAS shall provide 41 access to status of lighting (which zones are in which mode), modification of 42 light level settings, override of status (occupied/unoccupied), and time clock 43 reprogramming. 44 D. BAS Trends: 45 1. BAS shall trend when a zone status is overridden at the BAS. Trend shall 46 indicate which zone and a date/time stamp.
09/April/2018 23 09 00 - 32 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO Hardware Points Software Points Point Name AI AO BI BO AV BV Sched Trend Alarm Show On Graphic Per lighting control panel: Zone status (per X Yes zone) Level Control (per X Yes zone) Override of Status Yes, as a color X X (per zone) change to status. Timeclock X Yes Reprogramming Fault X Yes Totals 0 0 0 0 1 2 1 0 1 5 Total Hardware ( 0 ) Total Software ( 5 )
1 1.18 HEAT TRACE PANELS FOR PLUMBING, HYDRONIC PIPING, AND FIRE 2 SPRINKLER PIPING 3 4 A. Equipment: 5 1. Hydronic Piping Heat Trace Panels 6 2. Fire Sprinkler Piping Heat Trace Panels 7 3. Plumbing Heat Trace Panels 8 9 B. General Description: 10 1. Heat trace panels will control and monitor individual heat trace circuits. 11 Alarm contacts from heat trace panels shall be interfaced with BAS. 12 13 C. Sequence of Operation: 14 1. Heat trace panels will control circuits. Hardware Points Software Points Point Name AI AO BI BO AV BV Sched Trend Alarm Show On Graphic General fault (per panel) X X YES Totals 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Total Hardware ( 1 ) Total Software ( 1 )
15 1.19 GLOBAL POINTS 16 17 A. Equipment: 18 1. None 19
09/April/2018 23 09 00 - 33 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 B. General Description: 2 1. General monitoring points. 3 C. Sequence of Operation: 4 1. Outside Air Conditions: The controller shall monitor the outside air 5 temperature and humidity and calculate the outside air enthalpy on a 6 continual basis. These values shall be made available to the system at all 7 times. 8 2. Alarm shall be generated as follows: 9 a. Sensor Failure: Sensor reading indicates shorted or disconnected 10 sensor. In the event of a sensor failure, an alternate outside 11 air conditions sensor shall be made available to the system without 12 interruption in sensor readings. 13 3. If an OA Temp Sensor cannot be read, a default value of 65°F will be used. 14 4. If an OA Humidity Sensor cannot be read, a default value of 50 % will be 15 used. 16 5. Outside Air Temperature History: The controller shall monitor and record 17 the high and low temperature readings for the outside air. These readings 18 shall be recorded on a daily, month-to-date, and year-to-date basis. 19 6. Cooling Degree Day: The controller shall provide a Degree Day history 20 index that reflects the energy consumption for the facilities cooling demand. 21 Computations shall use a mean daily temperature of 65°F (adj.). The Degree 22 Day peak value readings shall be recorded on a daily, month-to-date, and 23 year-to-date basis. 24 7. Heating Degree Day: The controller shall provide a Degree Day history 25 index that reflects the energy consumption for the facilities heating demand. 26 Computations shall use a mean daily temperature of 65°F (adj.). The Degree 27 Day peak value readings shall be recorded on a daily, month-to-date, and 28 year-to-date basis. 29 8. Outside Concentration of CO2: The controller shall monitor CO2 level for 30 outdoor air. 31 9. Extreme temperature alarm: Provide a color change to screen when the 32 outside air temperature is above 100°F or below 32°F. Provide an alarm 33 when outside air temperature is above 105°F or below 20°F. Hardware Points Software Points Point Name AI AO BI BO AV BV Sched Trend Alarm Show On Graphic Outside Air Temp X X X Yes Outside Air Humidity X X Yes Outside Air Enthalpy X X Yes High Temp Today X Yes High Temp Month-to-Date X Yes High Temp Year-to-Date X Yes
09/April/2018 23 09 00 - 34 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO Hardware Points Software Points Point Name AI AO BI BO AV BV Sched Trend Alarm Show On Graphic Low Temp Today X Yes Low Temp Month-to-Date X Yes Low Temp Year-to-Date X Yes Sensor Failure X Totals 2 0 0 0 1 0 0 9 1 9 Total Hardware ( 2 ) Total Software ( 11 ) 1 PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2 3 Not Used 4 5 PART 3 – EXECUTION 6 7 Not Used 8 END OF SECTION
09/April/2018 23 09 00 - 35 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 SECTION 232113
2 HYDRONIC PIPING
3 PART 1 - GENERAL
4 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
5 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary 6 Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
7 1.2 SUMMARY
8 A. Section includes pipe and fitting materials and joining methods for the following: 9 1. Chilled-water piping 10 2. Equipment drains and over flows. 11 3. Union and flanges 12 4. Pipe hangers and supports.
13 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
14 A. Product Data: For each type of the following: 15 1. Plastic pipe and fittings with solvent cement. 16 2. RTRP and RTRF with adhesive. 17 3. Pressure-seal fittings. 18 4. Chemical treatment. 19 5. Valves. Include flow and pressure drop curves based on manufacturer’s testing for 20 calibrated-orifice balancing valves and automatic flor-control valves. 21 6. Air control devices. 22 7. Hydronic specialties.
23 B. Delegated-Design Submittal: 24 1. Design calculations and detailed fabrication and assembly of pipe anchors and 25 alignment guides, hangers and supports for multiple pipes, expansion joints and 26 loops, and attachments of the same to the building structure. 27 2. Locations of pipe anchors and alignment guides and expansion joints and loops. 28 3. Locations of and details for penetrations, including sleeves and sleeve seals for 29 exterior walls, floors, basement, and foundation walls. 30 4. Locations of and details for penetration and firestopping for fire- and smoke-rated 31 wall and floor and ceiling assemblies.
32 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
33 A. Coordination Drawings: Piping layout, drawn to scale, on which the following items are 34 shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 35 1. Suspended ceiling components. 36 2. Other building services.
09/April/2018 23 21 13 - 1 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 3. Structural members.
2 B. Qualification Data: For Installer.
3 C. Welding certificates.
4 D. Field quality-control reports.
5 E. Water Analysis: Submit a copy of the water analysis to illustrate water quality available at 6 Project site.
7 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
8 A. Installer Qualifications: 9 1. Installers of Pressure-Sealed Joints: Installers shall be certified by pressure-seal joint 10 manufacturer as having been trained and qualified to join piping with pressure-seal 11 pipe couplings and fittings. 12 2. Fiberglass Pipe and Fitting Installers: Installers of RTRF and RTRP shall be certified 13 by manufacturer of pipes and fittings as having been trained and qualified to join 14 fiberglass piping with manufacturer-recommended adhesive.
15 B. Steel Support Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, 16 "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
17 C. Pipe Welding: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure 18 Vessel Code: Section IX. 19 1. Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and 20 installation. 21 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes 22 involved and that certification is current.
23 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
24 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
25 A. Hydronic piping components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the 26 following minimum working pressure and temperature unless otherwise indicated: 27 1. Chilled-Water Piping: 150 psig at 150 deg F. 28 2. Makeup-Water Piping: 80 psig at 150 deg F 29 3. Condensate-Drain Piping: 150 deg F. 30 4. Air-Vent Piping: 150 deg F. 31 5. Safety-Valve-Inlet and -Outlet Piping: Equal to the pressure of the piping system to 32 which it is attached.
33 2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
34 A. Drawn-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L, ASTM B 88, Type M.
09/April/2018 23 21 13 - 2 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 B. Annealed-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type K
2 C. Grooved, Mechanical-Joint, Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22. 3 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers 4 offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not 5 limited to, the following: 6 a. Anvil International, Inc. 7 b. S.P. Fitting; a division of Star Pipe Products. 8 c. Victaulic Company. 9 d. Nibco 10 e. Mueller 11 2. Grooved-End Copper Fittings: ASTM B 75, copper tube or ASTM B 584, bronze 12 casting. 13 3. Grooved-End-Tube Couplings: Rigid pattern unless otherwise indicated; gasketed 14 fitting. Ductile-iron housing with keys matching pipe and fitting 15 grooves, prelubricated EPDM gasket rated for minimum 230 deg F for use with 16 housing, and steel bolts and nuts.
17 D. Copper, Mechanically Formed Tee Option: For forming T-branch on copper water tube. 18 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers 19 offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not 20 limited to, the following: 21 a. T-DRILL Industries Inc.
22 E. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.
23 2.3 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
24 A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel with plain ends; welded and seamless, Grade B, 25 and wall thickness as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article.
26 B. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4; Classes 125 and 250 as indicated in "Piping 27 Applications" Article.
28 C. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and 300 as indicated in 29 "Piping Applications" Article.
30 D. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Classes 150, 250, and 300 as indicated in "Piping 31 Applications" Article.
32 E. Cast-Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Classes 25, 125, and 250; raised 33 ground face, and bolt holes spot faced as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article.
34 F. Wrought-Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, wall thickness to match adjoining pipe.
35 G. Wrought Cast- and Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, including 36 bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings: 37 1. Material Group: 1.1. 38 2. End Connections: Butt welding.
09/April/2018 23 21 13 - 3 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 3. Facings: Raised face.
2 H. Grooved Mechanical-Joint Fittings and Couplings: 3 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers 4 offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not 5 limited to, the following: 6 a. Anvil International, Inc. 7 b. Central Sprinkler Company; a division of Tyco Fire & Building Products. 8 c. National Fittings, Inc. 9 d. S.P. Fittings; a division of Star Pipe Products. 10 e. Victaulic Company. 11 2. Joint Fittings: ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron; ASTM A 47/A 47M, 12 Grade 32510 malleable iron; ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F, E, or S, Grade B 13 fabricated steel; or ASTM A 106/A 106M, Grade B steel fittings with grooves or 14 shoulders constructed to accept grooved-end couplings; with nuts, bolts, locking pin, 15 locking toggle, or lugs to secure grooved pipe and fittings. 16 3. Couplings: Ductile- or malleable-iron housing and synthetic rubber gasket of central 17 cavity pressure-responsive design; with nuts, bolts, locking pin, locking toggle, or 18 lugs to secure grooved pipe and fittings.
19 2.4 JOINING MATERIALS
20 A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping 21 system contents. 22 1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless 23 otherwise indicated.
24 a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges. 25 b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.
26 B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated. Bolts 27 ASTM A 307 Grade B heavy hex bolts with heave hex nuts.
28 C. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping 29 system manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.
30 D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to 31 ASTM B 813.
32 E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for 33 joining copper with copper; or BAg-1, silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.
34 F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12M/D10.12 for welding materials 35 appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
36 G. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled and working 37 temperatures and pressures.
09/April/2018 23 21 13 - 4 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 2.5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
2 A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating 3 nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be 4 joined.
5 B. Dielectric Unions: 6 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering 7 products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the 8 following: 9 a. Capitol Manufacturing Company. 10 b. Central Pastics Company. 11 c. Hart Industries International, Inc. 12 d. Jomar International Ltd. 13 e. Matco-Norca, Inc. 14 f. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 15 g. Wilkins; a Zurn company. 16 2. Description:
17 a. Standard: ASSE 1079. 18 b. Pressure Rating: Refer to paragraph 2.1. 19 c. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
20 C. Dielectric Flanges: 21 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering 22 products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the 23 following: 24 a. Capitol Manufacturing Company. 25 b. Central Pastics Company. 26 c. Matco-Norca, Inc. 27 d. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 28 e. Wilkins; a Zurn company. 29 30 2. Description:
31 a. Standard: ASSE 1079. 32 b. Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly. 33 c. Pressure Rating: Refer tp paragraph 2.1. 34 d. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded 35 solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
36 D. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits: 37 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering 38 products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the 39 following: 40 a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. 41 b. Calpico, Inc. 42 c. Central Pastics Company.
09/April/2018 23 21 13 - 5 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. 2 3 2. Description:
4 a. Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges. 5 b. Pressure Rating: Refer to paragraph 2.1. 6 c. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic. 7 d. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene. 8 e. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.
9 E. Dielectric Nipples: 10 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering 11 products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the 12 following: 13 a. Elster Perfection. 14 b. Grinnell Mechanical Products. 15 c. Matco-Norca, Inc. 16 d. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. 17 e. Victaulic Company. 18 19 2. Description:
20 a. Standard: IAPMO PS 66. 21 b. Electroplated steel nipple, complying with ASTM F 1545. 22 c. Pressure Rating: Refer to paragraph 2.1. 23 d. End Connections: Male threaded or grooved. 24 e. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.
25 2.6 BYPASS CHEMICAL FEEDER
26 A. Description: Welded steel construction; 125-psig working pressure; 5-gal. capacity; with fill 27 funnel and inlet, outlet, and drain valves. 28 1. Chemicals: Specially formulated, based on analysis of makeup water, to prevent 29 accumulation of scale and corrosion in piping and connected equipment.
30 2.7 AIR CONTROL DEVICES
31 A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering 32 products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the 33 following: 34 1. Amtrol, Inc. 35 2. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. 36 3. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries. 37 4. Taco.
38 B. Manual Air Vents: 39 1. Body: Bronze. 40 2. Internal Parts: Nonferrous.
09/April/2018 23 21 13 - 6 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 3. Operator: Screwdriver or thumbscrew. 2 4. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2 (DN 15). 3 5. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/8 (DN 6). 4 6. CWP Rating: 150 psig for chilled water 5 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 150 deg F for chilled water, 180 deg F for hot 6 water.
7 C. Automatic Air Vents: 8 1. Body: Bronze or cast iron. 9 2. Internal Parts: Nonferrous. 10 3. Operator: Noncorrosive metal float. 11 4. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2 (DN 15). 12 5. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/4 (DN 8). 13 6. CWP Rating: 150 psig for chilled water 14 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 150 deg F for chilled water
15 D. Bladder-Type Expansion Tanks: 16 1. Tank: Welded steel, rated for 250-psig working pressure and 180 deg F (82 deg C) 17 maximum operating temperature. Factory test with taps fabricated and supports 18 installed and labeled according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section 19 VIII, Division 1. 20 2. Bladder: Securely sealed into tank to separate air charge from system water to 21 maintain required expansion capacity. 22 3. Air-Charge Fittings: Schrader valve, stainless steel with EPDM seats.
23 E. Tangential-Type Air Separators: 24 1. Tank: Welded steel; ASME constructed and labeled for 250-psig (1720 kPa) 25 minimum working pressure and 180 deg F (82 deg C) maximum operating 26 temperature. 27 2. Air Collector Tube: Perforated stainless steel, constructed to direct released air into 28 expansion tank. 29 3. Tangential Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; 30 flanged connections for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger. 31 4. Blowdown Connection: Threaded. 32 5. Size: Match system flow capacity.
33 F. In-Line Air Separators: 34 1. Tank: One-piece cast iron with an integral weir constructed to decelerate system 35 flow to maximize air separation. 36 2. Maximum Working Pressure: Up to 250 psig. 37 3. Maximum Operating Temperature: Up to 180 deg F (82 deg C).
38 G. Air Purgers: 39 1. Body: Cast iron with internal baffles that slow the water velocity to separate the air 40 from solution and divert it to the vent for quick removal. 41 2. Maximum Working Pressure: 250 psig. 42 3. Maximum Operating Temperature: 180 deg F (82 deg C).
09/April/2018 23 21 13 - 7 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 2.8 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES
2 A. Y-Pattern Strainers: 3 1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain 4 connection. 5 2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged ends for 6 NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger. 7 3. Strainer Screen: 40-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 8 50 percent free area. 9 4. CWP Rating: Refer to Paragraph 1.3. 10 5. Provide fabricated carbon steel strainers as an alternate.
11 B. Basket Strainers: 12 1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, high-tensile cast iron with bolted cover and bottom 13 drain connection. 14 2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged ends for 15 NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger. 16 3. Strainer Screen: 40-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 17 50 percent free area. 18 4. CWP Rating: Refer to Paragraph 1.3. 19 5. Provide fabricated carbon steel strainers as an alternate.
20 C. T-Pattern Strainers: 21 1. Body: Ductile or malleable iron with removable access coupling and end cap for 22 strainer maintenance. 23 2. End Connections: Grooved ends. 24 3. Strainer Screen: 40-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 25 57 percent free area. 26 4. CWP Rating: Refer to Paragraph 1.3
27 D. Expansion fittings are specified in Section 23 05 16 "Expansion Fittings and Loops for 28 HVAC Piping."
29 2.9 COATING SYSTEM FOR BURIED COPPER TUBING SYSTEMS
30 A. Surface Preparation: 31 1. Clean surfaces of oil and grease in accordance with SSPC SP 1. 32 2. Blast clean all surfaces to receive coatings in accordance with SSPC SP 6.
33 B. Shop-applied Extruded Polyethylene Protective Coating: Coating system and materials shall 34 conform to ASME/AWWA C215 and NACE SP-0185 and shall include the following: 35 1. Coating system shall be Liberty Coatings “Pritec” or approved equal and shall 36 include the following materials: 37 a. Adhesive undercoating. 38 b. High density polyethylene (HPDE) copolymer seamless extrusion. 39 2. Coating thicknesses shall be as follows: Nominal Pipe Size Std. Thickness (mils)
09/April/2018 23 21 13 - 8 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO (NPS) Nom. Min. ½ inches to 25 23 1½ inches 2 inches to 30 27 2½ inches 3 inches to 4 inches 35 32 5 inches to 24 inches 40 36
1 C. Heat Shrinkable Coating for Polyethylene System: 2 1. Coating shall be heat shrinkable polyolefin-backed sleeve precoated with mastic, in 3 accordance with ASME/AWWA C216. 4 2. Aqua-Shield AQW by Canusa-CPS, or approved equal. 5 3. Thickness of sleeve shall not be less than nominal thickness of extruded coating.
6 PART 3 - EXECUTION
7 3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS
8 A. Chilled-water piping, aboveground, NPS 2 and smaller shall be the following: 9 1. Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints.
10 B. Chilled-water piping, aboveground, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, shall be the following: 11 1. Standard weight steel pipe, wrought-steel fittings and wrought-cast or forged-steel 12 flanges and flange fittings, and welded and flanged joints. Mains shall be ASTM A 53 13 Grade B seamless. Branch piping shall be ASTM A 53 B ERW.
14 C. Chilled-water piping installed belowground and within slabs shall be the following: 15 1. Type K, annealed-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered 16 joints. Use the fewest possible joints.
17 D. Makeup-water piping installed aboveground shall be the following: 18 1. Type Ldrawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints.
19 E. Makeup-Water Piping Installed Belowground and within Slabs: Type K, annealed-temper 20 copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints. Use the fewest possible joints.
21 F. Condensate-Drain Piping: Type M, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, 22 and soldered joints.
23 G. Air-Vent Piping: 24 1. Inlet: Same as service where installed with metal-to-plastic transition fittings for 25 plastic piping systems according to piping manufacturer's written instructions. 26 2. Outlet: Type K, annealed-temper copper tubing with soldered or flared joints.
27 H. Safety-Valve-Inlet and -Outlet Piping for Hot-Water Piping: Same materials and joining 28 methods as for piping specified for the service in which safety valve is installed with metal-
09/April/2018 23 21 13 - 9 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 to-plastic transition fittings for plastic piping systems according to piping manufacturer's 2 written instructions.
3 3.2 PIPING INSTALLATIONS
4 A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of 5 piping systems. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on 6 Coordination Drawings.
7 B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment 8 rooms and service areas.
9 C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at 10 right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically 11 indicated otherwise.
12 D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
13 E. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
14 F. Install piping at indicated slopes.
15 G. Install piping free of sags and bends.
16 H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
17 I. Install piping to allow application of insulation.
18 J. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating 19 pressure.
20 K. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and 21 servicing of valves.
22 L. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 threaded 23 nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system 24 drainage.
25 M. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow.
26 N. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up.
27 O. Install branch connections to mains using tee fittings or reducing fitting in main pipe, with 28 the branch connected to the bottom of the main pipe. For up-feed risers, connect the 29 branch to the top of the main pipe.
30 P. Install valves according to Section 23 05 23 “General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping.”
09/April/2018 23 21 13 - 10 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 Q. Install unions in piping, NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of 2 equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.
3 R. Install flanges in piping, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, at final connections of equipment and 4 elsewhere as indicated.
5 S. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.
6 T. Install strainers on inlet side of each control valve, pressure-reducing valve, solenoid valve, 7 in-line pump, and elsewhere as indicated. Install NPS ¾ (DN 20) nipple and ball valve in 8 blowdown connection of strainers NPS 2 (DN 50) and larger. Match size of strainer 9 blowoff connection for strainers smaller than NPS 2 (DN 50).
10 U. Comply with requirements in Section 23 05 16 "Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC 11 Piping" for installation of expansion loops, expansion joints, anchors, and pipe alignment 12 guides.
13 V. Comply with requirements in Section 23 05 53 "Identification for HVAC Piping and 14 Equipment" for identifying piping.
15 W. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with 16 requirements for sleeves specified in Section 23 00 15 "Basic Equipment Installation".
17 X. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with 18 requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 23 00 15 “Basic Equipment Installation”.
19 Y. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with 20 requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 23 00 15 “Basic Equipment Installtion”.
21 Z. Coating of Buried Steel Systems and Copper Systems: 22 1. Shop apply to straight pipe in accordance with ASME/AWWA C215 and coating 23 manufacturer's recommendations. 24 2. Fittings, joints, and special sections shall be field coated with heat shrinkable sleeves 25 in accordance with ASME/AWWA C216. 26 3. Perform holiday test on all coated pipe and coated fittings in accordance with 27 Section 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL (in PART 3) of this Section.
28 AA. Additional Requirements for Buried Piping: 29 1. Trench Excavation: 30 a. Excavate trenches to lines and grades shown on Drawings. 31 b. If suitable bearing as directed by Geotechnical Consultant is not encountered 32 at depth indicated for trench bottom due to wet or unstable material, excavate 33 such material to depth required, and refill and compact to proper grade with 34 coarse sand, fine gravel, or other suitable approved material. 35 c. Special requirements relating to specific utilities are as follows: 36 1) Pressure Lines:
09/April/2018 23 21 13 - 11 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 a) Unless otherwise indicated, grade trenches to avoid high points 2 with necessity of placing vacuum and relief valves in pressure 3 lines. 4 b) Provide a minimum cover over top of pipe of 3 feet in unpaved 5 areas and 4 feet in paved areas, or as shown on Drawings and to 6 avoid interference with other utilities. 7 2. Corrosion Protection of Metal Parts: For buried piping systems, all metal piping joint 8 components and restraint components, including but not limited to bolts, nuts, 9 studs, rods, washers, clamps, plates, flanges, and retainers, that are not supplied by 10 the manufacturer or Supplier as SS corrosion-resistant material, or with a uniformly 11 applied bituminous coating, shall be coated with specified coal tar epoxy coating 12 system (as specified in Paragraph 2.3.F Coal Tar Epoxy Coating) as follows: 13 a. Clean surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP 1. 14 b. Blast clean in accordance with SSPC SP 6. 15 c. Field apply coating system to cleaned and blasted surfaces as follows: 16 1) Primer: 1 coat at 3 mils dry film thickness (DFT). 17 2) Coal Tar Epoxy: 2 coats at 8 mils to 12 mils DFT per coat. Total DFT 18 of coal tar epoxy coat over primer shall be 16 mils minimum. 19 3. Thrust Blocks: 20 a. Unless indicated otherwise on Drawings, install concrete thrust blocks for 21 buried pressure piping systems as follows: 22 1) At each change of direction, regardless of angle. 23 2) At each tee or other branch connection. 24 b. Unless indicated otherwise on Drawings, determine dimensions in accordance 25 with Appendix A of NFPA 24. 26 c. Mix, form, place, and install in accordance with NFPA 24and American 27 Concrete Institute (ACI) 300 series specifications for concrete and concrete 28 construction.
29 3.3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
30 A. Comply with requirements in Section 23 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping 31 and Equipment" for hanger, support, and anchor devices. Comply with the following 32 requirements for maximum spacing of supports.
33 B. Install the following pipe attachments: 34 1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feet long. 35 2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping 20 feet 36 or longer. 37 3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or longer, 38 supported on a trapeze. 39 4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs. 40 5. Provide copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact 41 with copper pipe. 42 6. On plastic pipe, install pads or cushions on bearing surfaces to prevent hanger from 43 scratching pipe.
09/April/2018 23 21 13 - 12 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 C. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod 2 sizes: 3 1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm). 4 2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm). 5 3. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm). 6 4. NPS 2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm). 7 5. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 11 feet 8 6. NPS 3: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm). 9 7. NPS 4 (DN 100): Maximum span, 14 feet (4.3 m); minimum rod size, 1/2 inch (13 10 mm). 11 8. NPS 6 (DN 150): Maximum span, 17 feet (5.2 m); minimum rod size, 1/2 inch (13 12 mm).
13 D. Install hangers for drawn-temper copper piping with the following maximum spacing and 14 minimum rod sizes: 15 1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 16 2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 6 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 17 3. NPS 1-1/4Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 18 4. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 19 5. NPS 2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 20 6. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 21 7. NPS 3 and Larger: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
22 E. Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 10-foot intervals between floors.
23 3.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
24 A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
25 B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before 26 assembly.
27 C. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to 28 tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube 29 Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
30 D. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" 31 Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8/A5.8M.
32 E. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut 33 threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and 34 restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 35 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal 36 threading is specified. 37 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or 38 damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
09/April/2018 23 21 13 - 13 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 F. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12, using qualified 2 processes and welding operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article.
3 G. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service 4 application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
5 H. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with coupling and gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Cut or roll 6 grooves in ends of pipe based on pipe and coupling manufacturer's written instructions for 7 pipe wall thickness. Use grooved-end fittings and rigid, grooved-end-pipe couplings.
8 3.5 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
9 A. Sizes for supply and return piping connections shall be the same as or larger than 10 equipment connections.
11 B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment.
12 C. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If parallel control valves are 13 installed, only one bypass is required.
14 D. Install ports for pressure gages and thermometers at coil inlet and outlet connections. 15 Comply with requirements in Section 23 05 19 "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping."
16 3.6 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION
17 A. Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as 18 required for system air venting.
19 B. Install automatic air vents at high points of system piping in mechanical equipment rooms 20 only. Manual vents at heat-transfer coils and elsewhere as required for air venting.
21 C. Install tangential air separator in pump suction. Install blowdown piping with gate or full- 22 port ball valve; extend full size to nearest floor drain.
23 D. Install expansion tanks on the floor. Vent and purge air from hydronic system, and ensure 24 tank is properly charged with air to suit system Project requirements.
25 3.7 CHEMICAL TREATMENT
26 A. Perform an analysis of makeup water to determine type and quantities of chemical 27 treatment needed to keep system free of scale, corrosion, and fouling, and to sustain the 28 current water characteristics.
29 B. Install bypass chemical feeders in each hydronic system where indicated. 30 1. Install in upright position with top of funnel not more than 48 inches above the 31 floor. 32 2. Install feeder in minimum NPS 3/4 bypass line, from main with full-size, full-port, 33 ball valve in the main between bypass connections.
09/April/2018 23 21 13 - 14 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 3. Install NPS 3/4 pipe from chemical feeder drain to nearest equipment drain and 2 include a full-size, full-port, ball valve.
3 C. Fill system with fresh water and add liquid alkaline compound with emulsifying agents and 4 detergents to remove grease and petroleum products from piping. Circulate solution for a 5 minimum of 24 hours, drain, clean strainer screens, and refill with fresh water.
6 D. Add initial chemical treatment and maintain water quality in ranges noted above for the 7 first year of operation.
8 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
9 A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows: 10 1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test. 11 2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due 12 to test pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from 13 testing. 14 3. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water; then remove and clean or replace 15 strainer screens. 16 4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure 17 shall be capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install 18 blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment. 19 5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test 20 pressure, to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of 21 overpressure during test.
22 B. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping: 23 1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage 24 due to freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping 25 may be used. 26 2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release air. Use 27 drains installed at low points for complete draining of test liquid. 28 3. Isolate expansion tanks and determine that hydronic system is full of water. 29 4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the 30 system's working pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any 31 vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due 32 to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed 90 percent of specified 33 minimum yield strength or 1.7 times the "SE" value in Appendix A in ASME B31.9, 34 "Building Services Piping." 35 5. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine 36 piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, 37 or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks. 38 6. Prepare written report of testing.
39 C. Perform Holiday Test for Coated Steel Piping: 40 1. After installation but prior to backfill, inspect finished coatings on entire line in 41 presence of Contractor using a Tinker and Rasor AP-W tester with full circle 42 electrodes.
09/April/2018 23 21 13 - 15 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 2. Perform holiday test at 8,000 Volts in accordance with NACE SP 0274. 2 3. Repair all defects in coating in accordance with requirements for original coatings. 3 4. Ensure that all pipe subjected to test is visibly clean and dry to avoid false readings. 4 5. Test at maximum speed of 10 feet/minute. 5 6. Tests will be complete when pipe coatings are 100 percent holiday-free. Holidays are 6 not allowed on any portion of coated pipe. 7 7. Repair and retest all holidays found in coatings.
8 D. Perform the following before operating the system: 9 1. Open manual valves fully. 10 2. Inspect pumps for proper rotation. 11 3. Set makeup pressure-reducing valves for required system pressure. 12 4. Inspect air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and 13 operating freely (automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type). 14 5. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow. 15 6. Inspect and set operating temperatures of hydronic equipment, such as boilers, 16 chillers, cooling towers, to specified values. 17 7. Verify lubrication of motors and bearings.
18 3.9 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
ITEM NO. SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT AS INDICATED WITH BID WITH BID
23 21 13-01 Manufacturer’s catalog data and mate- Per construction schedule rials descriptions for proposed air con- trol devices, hydronic piping specialties and identified according to the fluid or gas service in which they are used. 23 21 13-02 Materials descriptions and specifica- Per construction schedule tions for proposed pipe, tube, pipe fit- tings, and tube fittings grouped and identified according to the fluid or gas service in which they are used. 23 21 13-03 Product data for coating systems in- Per construction schedule cluding materials description and certi- fication that tape coating used is com- patible with shop-applied coating in accordance with manufacturer’s in- structions.
19 20 END OF SECTION
09/April/2018 23 21 13 - 16 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 SECTION 232123
2 HYDRONIC PUMPS
3 PART 1 - GENERAL
4 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
5 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary 6 Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
7 1.2 SUMMARY
8 A. Section Includes: 9 1. Separately coupled, base-mounted, end-suction centrifugal pumps.
10 1.3 DEFINITIONS
11 A. Buna-N: Nitrile rubber.
12 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
13 A. Product Data: For each type of pump. Include certified performance curves and rated capacities, 14 operating characteristics, furnished specialties, final impeller dimensions, and accessories for 15 each type of product indicated. Indicate pump's operating point on curves.
16 B. Shop Drawings: For each pump. 17 1. Show pump layout and connections. 18 2. Include setting drawings with templates for installing foundation and anchor bolts and 19 other anchorages. 20 3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
21 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
22 A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For pumps to include in emergency, operation, and 23 maintenance manuals.
24 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
25 A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged 26 with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 27 1. Mechanical Seals: One mechanical seal(s) for each pump.
28 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
29 2.1 SEPARATELY COUPLED, BASE-MOUNTED, END-SUCTION CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
30 A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering 31 products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
09/April/2018 23 21 23 - 1 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 1. Taco 2 2. Paco 3 3. Bell & Gossett 4 4. Peerless 5 6 B. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, centrifugal, overhung-impeller, separately coupled, 7 end-suction pump as defined in HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3; designed for base mounting, with pump 8 and motor shafts horizontal.
9 C. Pump Construction: 10 1. Casing: Radially split, cast iron, with replaceable bronze wear rings, threaded gage 11 tappings at inlet and outlet, drain plug at bottom and air vent at top of volute, and flanged 12 connections. Provide integral mount on volute to support the casing, and provide attached 13 piping to allow removal and replacement of impeller without disconnecting piping or 14 requiring the realignment of pump and motor shaft. 15 2. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, keyed to shaft, 16 and secured with a locking cap screw. For pumps not frequency-drive controlled, trim 17 impeller to match specified performance. 18 3. Pump Shaft: Steel, with copper-alloy shaft sleeve. 19 4. Seal: Mechanical seal consisting of carbon rotating ring against a ceramic seat held by a 20 stainless-steel spring, and Buna-N bellows and gasket. 21 5. Seal: Packing seal consisting of stuffing box with a minimum of four rings of graphite- 22 impregnated braided yarn with bronze lantern ring between center two graphite rings, and 23 bronze packing gland. 24 6. Pump Bearings: Grease-lubricated ball bearings in cast-iron housing with grease fittings.
25 D. Shaft Coupling: Molded-rubber insert and interlocking spider capable of absorbing vibration. 26 Couplings shall be drop-out type to allow disassembly and removal without removing pump 27 shaft or motor. EPDM coupling sleeve for variable-speed applications.
28 E. Coupling Guard: Dual rated; ANSI B15.1, Section 8; OSHA 1910.219 approved; steel; 29 removable; attached to mounting frame.
30 F. Mounting Frame: Welded-steel frame and cross members, factory fabricated from 31 ASTM A 36/A 36M channels and angles. Fabricate to mount pump casing, coupling guard, and 32 motor.
33 G. Motor: Single speed, secured to mounting frame, with adjustable alignment. 34 1. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in 35 NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and 36 application. 37 2. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency 38 requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for 39 HVAC Equipment." 40 a. Enclosure: Open, dripproof 41 b. Enclosure Materials: Cast iron 42 c. Motor Bearings: Permanently, Grease-lubricated ball bearings. 43 d. Efficiency: Premium efficient. 44 e. NEMA Design: meets or exceeds NEMA MF-1 45 f. Service Factor: 1.15.
09/April/2018 23 21 23 - 2 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 H. Capacities and Characteristics: Refer to Drawing Schedule.
2 2.2 PUMP SPECIALTY FITTINGS
3 A. Suction Diffuser: 4 1. Angle pattern. 5 2. 175-psig pressure rating, ductile-iron body and end cap, pump-inlet fitting. 6 3. Bronze startup and bronze or stainless-steel permanent strainers. 7 4. Bronze or stainless-steel straightening vanes. 8 5. Drain plug. 9 6. Factory-fabricated support.
10 B. Triple-Duty Valve: 11 1. Angle or straight pattern. 12 2. 175-psig pressure rating, ductile-iron body, pump-discharge fitting. 13 3. Drain plug and bronze-fitted shutoff, balancing, and check valve features. 14 4. Brass gage ports with integral check valve and orifice for flow measurement.
15 PART 3 - EXECUTION
16 3.1 EXAMINATION
17 A. Examine equipment foundations and anchor-bolt locations for compliance with requirements for 18 installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
19 B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before 20 pump installation.
21 C. Examine foundations and inertia bases for suitable conditions where pumps are to be installed.
22 D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
23 3.2 PUMP INSTALLATION
24 A. Comply with HI 1.4 and HI 2.4.
25 B. Install pumps to provide access for periodic maintenance including removing motors, impellers, 26 couplings, and accessories.
27 C. Independently support pumps and piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps and 28 weight of pumps is not supported by piping.
29 D. Automatic Condensate Pump Units: Install units for collecting condensate and extend to open 30 drain.
31 E. Equipment Mounting: 32 1. Install base-mounted pumps on cast-in-place concrete equipment bases. Comply with 33 requirements for equipment bases and foundations specified in Section 03 "Cast-in-Place 34 Concrete."
09/April/2018 23 21 23 - 3 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 2. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation and seismic control devices specified in 2 Section 23 05 48 "Vibration Controls for HVAC Piping”. 3 3. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Section 23 05 48 4 "Vibration Controls for HVAC Piping."
5 F. Equipment Mounting: Install in-line pumps with continuous-thread hanger rods and spring 6 hangers of size required to support weight of in-line pumps. 7 1. Comply with requirements for hangers and supports specified in Section 23 05 29 8 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
9 3.3 ALIGNMENT
10 A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform alignment service.
11 B. Comply with requirements in Hydronics Institute standards for alignment of pump and motor 12 shaft. Add shims to the motor feet and bolt motor to base frame. Do not use grout between 13 motor feet and base frame.
14 C. Comply with pump and coupling manufacturers' written instructions.
15 D. After alignment is correct, tighten foundation bolts evenly but not too firmly. Completely fill 16 baseplate with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout while metal blocks and shims or wedges are in 17 place. After grout has cured, fully tighten foundation bolts.
18 3.4 CONNECTIONS
19 A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
20 B. Where installing piping adjacent to pump, allow space for service and maintenance.
21 C. Connect piping to pumps. Install valves that are same size as piping connected to pumps.
22 D. Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles.
23 E. Install triple-duty valve on discharge side of pumps.
24 F. Install Y-type strainer, suction diffuser and shutoff valve on suction side of pumps.
25 G. Install flexible connectors on suction and discharge sides of base-mounted pumps between 26 pump casing and valves.
27 H. Install pressure gages on pump suction and discharge or at integral pressure-gage tapping, or 28 install single gage with multiple-input selector valve.
29 I. Install check valve and gate or ball valve on each condensate pump unit discharge.
30 J. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical 31 Systems."
32 K. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and 33 Cables."
09/April/2018 23 21 23 - 4 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 3.5 STARTUP SERVICE
2 A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. 3 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 4 2. Check piping connections for tightness. 5 3. Clean strainers on suction piping. 6 4. Perform the following startup checks for each pump before starting: 7 a. Verify bearing lubrication. 8 b. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot liquid is 9 free to rotate with pump hot and cold. If pump is bound or drags, do not operate 10 until cause of trouble is determined and corrected. 11 c. Verify that pump is rotating in the correct direction. 12 5. Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pump for 13 operation. 14 6. Start motor. 15 7. Open discharge valve slowly.
16 3.6 DEMONSTRATION
17 A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to 18 adjust, operate, and maintain hydronic pumps.
19 3.7 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE 20
ITEM NO. SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT AS INDICATED WITH BID WITH 23 21 23-01 Performance Curves: Per construction schedule 1. Capacity versus head. 2. Driver horsepower. 3. NPSH. 4. Efficiency. 23 21 23-02 Manufacturer and Model Number: Per construction schedule 1. Pump. 2. Motor. 3. Shaft Seal. 23 21 23-03 Dimensions of pump –motor assembly, with Per construction schedule baseplate if baseplate is included. 23 21 23-04 Materials of Construction: for casing, shaft, Per construction schedule impeller, other trim and wetted parts. 23 21 23-05 Size and type of piping connections. Per construction schedule
23 21 23-06 Impeller Size: Selected size and maximum Per construction schedule size for selected casing.
09/April/2018 23 21 23 - 5 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO
ITEM NO. SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT AS INDICATED WITH BID WITH 23 21 23-07 Seals: Type and construction materials. Per construction schedule
23 21 23-08 Motor: Per construction schedule 1. Speed. 2. Shaft size. 3. Horsepower 4. Voltage 5. Service factor 6. NEMA enclosure type 7. Full load amperes. 23 21 23-09 Coupling: Make and model. Per construction schedule
1 END OF SECTION
09/April/2018 23 21 23 - 6 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 SECTION 23 29 23 2 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 3 4 PART 1 - GENERAL
5 1.1 SUMMARY
6 A. Section Includes: 7 1. Variable Frequency Drives
8 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
9 A. Section 23 05 00 – Common Work Results for HVAC.
10 B. Section 23 74 13 – Central Station Air Handling Units
11 C. Section 23 09 90 – MEP Sequence of Operation
12 D. Section 26 05 19 – Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables
13 E. Section 26 27 26 – Wiring Devices
14 1.3 REFERENCES
15 A. AFBMA 9 – Load Rating and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings
16 B. AFBMA 11 – Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings
17 C. AMCA 99 – Standards Handbook
18 D. AMCA 210 – Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes
19 E. AMCA 300 – Testing Code for Sound Rating Air Moving Devices
20 F. AMCA 301 – Method for Publishing sound Ratings for Air Moving Devices
21 G. NEMA MG1 – Motors and Generators
22 H. NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code
23 I. IEEE – 112B, 587 and 519
24 J. ASHRAE 01 and 1.1-2007 Guidelines
25 1.4 SUBMITTALS
26 A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00.
09/April/2018 23 29 23 - 1 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 B. Shop Drawings: Indicate assembly, unit dimensions, weight loading, required clearances, 2 construction details, field connection details, electrical characteristics, and connection 3 requirements.
4 C. Product Data: 5 1. Provide literature that indicates dimensions, weights, capacities, ratings, performance, 6 gauges and finishes of materials, electrical characteristics and connection 7 requirements. 8 2. Submit electrical requirements for power supply wiring including wiring diagrams for 9 interlock and control wiring, clearly indicating factory-installed and field-installed 10 wiring.
11 D. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions.
12 1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
13 A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00.
14 B. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for routine service, spare parts lists and wiring 15 diagrams.
16 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
17 A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this 18 section with minimum three years’ documented experience, who issues complete catalog 19 data on total product.
20 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
21 A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 23 05 00.
22 B. Accept products on site in factory-fabricated protective containers, with factory-installed 23 shipping skids and lifting lugs. Inspect for damage.
24 C. Store in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. Handle 25 carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures, and finish.
26 1.8 SCHEDULES ON DRAWINGS
27 A. In general, all capacities of equipment and electrical characteristics are shown in schedules 28 on the drawings. Reference shall be made to the schedules for such information. The 29 capacities shown are minimum capacities. Variations in the capacities of the scheduled 30 equipment supplied under this contract will be permitted only with the written direction of 31 the Owner. All equipment shall be shipped to the job with not less than a prime coat of 32 paint or as specified hereinafter. Where installation instructions are not included in these 33 Specifications or on the drawings, the manufacturer’s instructions shall be followed.
34 1.9 WARRANTY
35 A. Provide manufacturer parts and labor warranty for 12 months following Final Completion 36 covering the labor required to install replacement parts. Perform warranty work using
09/April/2018 23 29 23 - 2 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 manufacturer’s trained service technician. Service technician must be based within 50 2 miles of the job site.
3 B. Include factory-provided controls in the parts and labor warranties.
4 5 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
6 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
7 A. Yaskawa E7B series
8 B. ABB
9 C. Advanced Technology/Emerson
10 D. Reliance
11 E. Eaton Dynamic
12 F. MagneTek
13 G. Robicon
14 H. Danfoss
15 I. Siemens
16 J. Square D
17 K. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 23 05 00 and related specification Section 01. 18 The equipment as supplied by any of the acceptable manufacturers or an approved equal 19 shall comply with all of the provisions of this specification.
20 2.2 GENERAL
21 A. Furnish and install complete Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) or 6-step variable voltage, 22 variable frequency speed controllers, as specified herein. All of the variable speed 23 controllers shall be supplied by one manufacturer for this project. Where noted in the 24 Drawings or Schedule, motors must have a “bypass” switch as specified herein, to allow 25 them to run if the controller malfunctions. Air Handling Units do not require VFD 26 bypass. All safety devices shall be energized. If an equal is proposed and accepted, 27 Contractor must include installation and startup by manufacturer’s authorized personnel.
28 B. The Contractor shall furnish and install Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) motor 29 controllers to vary the speed of the supply air fans and pumps as shown in the fan and 30 pump schedules on the drawings. See schedules and drawings for quantity of controllers 31 required. Refer to schedules and Central Station Air Handling Units for factory installed 32 VFD.
33 C. The Variable Frequency Drive shall produce an adjustable AC voltage and frequency 34 output for complete motor control using solid-state technology. The VFD shall be 35 automatically controlled by a grounded electronic (4-20 ma) control signal. The drive shall
09/April/2018 23 29 23 - 3 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 produce an output volts/Hertz pattern to produce adequate starting torque under all 2 conditions and operate smoothly at all operating speeds on variable torque load. The VFD 3 shall be self-contained totally enclosed in NEMA 1 ventilated cabinet and capable of 4 operation between 0 degrees and 40 degrees Celsius.
5 D. VFD’s shall be ETL or UL listed. All components used on option units shall be ETL or 6 UL listed. VFD’s shall be designed to meet IEEE-587 and shall comply with all applicable 7 provisions of the latest revision of the National Electric Code. The VFD shall comply 8 with IEEE-519 with respect to the line noise generation.
9 E. The controllers shall be suitable for use with both standard and high efficiency 3-phase, 10 squirrel cage, induction motors.
11 F. The service factor of the controller shall be equal to 0.95 with a power unit rating basis of 12 100 percent rated current continuous. Rated continuous current of the VFD shall be equal 13 to 110% of driven motor’s FLA rating.
14 G. Each controller shall consist of a converter, D.C. link filter or supply power backfeed RF 15 (radio frequency) filter, and an inverter section with each section modularized for ease of 16 troubleshooting. PWM controllers shall also have output line filters for motor noise 17 reduction. All components shall be factory mounted and wired on a dead-front, grounded, 18 freestanding or wall mounted minimum NEMA 1 enclosure arranged for top or bottom 19 conduit entry.
20 H. The controller enclosure shall be provided with the manufacturer’s illustrated operating 21 instructions and parts list mounted inside the enclosure door, manual speed control 22 potentiometer, three position mode selector switch (“manual – off – auto”, or equivalent), 23 “power on” light, auxiliary relays and contacts for interlock and control wiring.
24 I. The 6-step VFD shall convert 460 volt, three-phase 60 Hertz utility power to variable 25 voltage and frequency, three phase, AC power. Both 6-step and PWM shall be designed to 26 provide stepless motor control from 20 percent to 100 percent of base speed.
27 2.3 FEATURES
28 A. The VFD shall incorporate the following minimum features: 29 1. Input Power: 460 V/3 phase/60 Hz. 30 2. Input fused disconnect switch. 31 3. Input line filter capable of protecting the electronics against transient voltage spikes 32 or notches, as well as backfeed of RF (Radio Frequency) interference, into the 33 incoming power supply. 34 4. Fuseless electronic power protection for ground fault protection. Isolation 35 transformers for ground fault protection are not acceptable. Ground fault shall not 36 cause fuses to open. 37 5. The following door mounted devices: 38 a. “Power on” light 39 b. Hand/off/auto (or equivalent) selector switch. 40 c. Manual speed potentiometer (1000 ohms) and ammeter. 41 d. Digital display unit. 42 e. Status, frequency/percent speed and fault diagnostics. 43 6. Minimum/maximum adjustable speeds.
09/April/2018 23 29 23 - 4 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 7. Lockable disconnect switch and thermal motor overloads. 2 8. Manual speed control during manual control mode. 3 9. A thermally protected transfer switch for manual bypass of the VFD (where 4 bypasses are indicated in Drawings). 5 10. The VFD shall have auto-restart after power failure, power surge, undercurrent and 6 overcurrent. Overcurrent restart shall be limited to a maximum of five attempts. 7 11. Electronic and control follower board. 8 12. External signal shutdown feature (i.e. fire/smoke, freeze, operable and normal 9 bypass mode). 10 13. Output terminal for remote frequency and current meters (4 to 20 ma). 11 14. Trip replay for remote fault indication. 12 15. A door interlock, designed to cut power to the unit when the door is opened. 13 16. Instantaneous overcurrent trip. 14 17. Unit over temperature protection. 15 18. A bypass switch, where required, shall simultaneously isolate the VFD from input 16 and output power, and provide line power directly to the motor. The bypass switch 17 shall also have the capability of starting and stopping the motor. The switch shall 18 consist of an enclosure separate from the VFD. The following shall be mounted on 19 the enclosure door: 20 a. Door interlocked main input disconnect switch. 21 b. “Power on” light 22 c. “Drive-off-bypass” manual mode selector switch. 23 d. A “normal operation-off-test” selector to facilitate static testing of the drive at 24 startup or while the motor is operating in the bypass mode. 25 e. Speed lockout circuitry to allow the lockout or bypass of at least three speed 26 ranges within the full range of the controller.
27 2.4 DISCONNECT AND INTERFACE
28 A. The following shall be mounted within the enclosure: 29 1. Line, load and bypass contactors capable of interrupting the locked rotor rating of 30 the driven motor. Bypass and load contacts must be mechanically interlocked to 31 prevent simultaneous closure. 32 2. Overload relay. 33 3. A dedicated terminal strip to allow the controller to be interconnected with external 34 shutdown contacts from smoke detectors, fire detectors, damper interlocks, freeze- 35 stats, time clocks, remote master on-off switch, energy management and control 36 system (BAS) and input signals. The system must be capable of shutdown whether 37 in the drive or in the bypass mode by remote detectors.
38 2.5 FAULT DETECTION DEVICES
39 A. A diagnostic fault detection center shall be integral to each VFD, providing an indication 40 of the following fault conditions: 41 1. External fault. 42 2. Processor line fault. 43 3. Low AC line voltage. 44 4. High AC line voltage.
09/April/2018 23 29 23 - 5 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 5. Current overload. 2 6. High DC buss voltage. 3 7. VFD output fault.
4 2.6 CONTROL
5 A. All control adjustments shall be made without the necessity of an extender board of 6 specialized meters, but rather from front access adjustable potentiometers.
7 B. Low voltage logic and 115V control circuits shall be electrically isolated from the power 8 circuits. Signal circuit common shall be grounded.
9 C. The VFD shall include a power ride-through feature to allow continuous operation 10 through up to a three to five cycle line loss.
11 D. Electronic output overload protection shall be provided to eliminate the use of bimetallic 12 overloads. The drive shall not be phase sequence sensitive.
13 E. The VFD shall have independently adjustable acceleration and deceleration circuits of 5 to 14 120 seconds. Extended time periods are also acceptable.
15 F. The VFD shall have full function output current limit adjustable from 10 to 100 percent.
16 2.7 SYSTEM OPERATION
17 A. Selector switch in the “off” position – the controller run circuit shall be open and the 18 system shall not operate.
19 B. Selector switch in the “manual” position – the speeds of the motors shall be controlled by 20 the manual speed potentiometer.
21 C. Selector switch in the “auto” position – operation shall be via the input 0 to 10 VDC signal 22 with the output speed proportional to the input signal. If required for incorporation into 23 the controls scenario, the VFD manufacturer shall furnish a pressure transducer mounted 24 in the drive enclosure to convert a 3 to 15 psi pressure signal to a 0 to 10 VDC signal.
25 D. The bypass switch, when required, shall provide the ability to service the control in bypass 26 operation while not de-energizing the motor. It shall also allow for start/stop functions 27 for the motor.
28 E. In case of an output ground fault or similar abnormal output condition, any VFD serving 29 multiple units shall be able to automatically alternate its output to either the duty device or 30 the standby device. The VFD shall be fully operational after an output ground fault 31 condition.
32 33 PART 3 - EXECUTION
34 3.1 GENERAL
35 A. As part of the purchase price and agreement, a full, unconditional, one (1) year past Final 36 Completion warranty on all parts and labor shall be provided. The warranty shall include
09/April/2018 23 29 23 - 6 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 all parts, labor, shipping, field service or technician time, labor or travel expenses and 2 verbal or written correspondence with the VFD manufacturer or his representatives, 3 including that which might be incidental to the proper installation and operation of the 4 equipment.
5 B. The manufacturer’s representative shall provide a list of recommended spare parts.
6 C. The manufacturer’s representative shall provide terminal block to terminal block wiring 7 diagrams coordinated with the Owner to provide a complete and functional operating 8 system. Furnish detailed drawings showing construction, dimensions, wiring diagrams and 9 installation procedures for Engineer’s approval.
10 D. The manufacturer shall provide a factory trained technician to start the VFD and place it 11 into operation.
12 E. The successful vendor shall provide for and present to the Owner, at no cost to the 13 Owner, a training and troubleshooting course at the Owner’s location. This course shall 14 be comprised of a minimum of two (2) days of classroom instruction for a minimum of 15 four (4) hours per day complete with visual aids, documentation, circuit diagrams and 16 hands-on training for a group of approximately 6 people. This course is not to be 17 construed as a sales meeting, but rather as a school to familiarize the Owner with the care, 18 troubleshooting and servicing of the VFD.
19 3.2 INSTALLATION
20 A. VFD’s shall be wall hung units. Contractor shall provide unistrut mounting brackets for 21 drives. Contractor shall reinforce the wall studs with bracing as required to adequately 22 support the drive. Installation of the VFD shall allow for clearance in front of the drive as 23 required by the latest revision of the National Electric Code for electrical panel.
24 3.3 TESTING
25 A. Refer to Section 23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC.
26 B. For VFDs associated with air handling units, also refer to Section 23 74 13 – Central 27 Station Air Handling Units for additional requirements.
28 END OF SECTION
09/April/2018 23 29 23 - 7 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 SECTION 23 31 13
2 METAL HVAC DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES
4 PART 1 GENERAL
5 1.1 SUMMARY
6 A. Section includes the work necessary to furnish and install, complete, metal HVAC ductwork 7 systems with pressure classifications ranging from negative 3 inches WC to positive 10 inches 8 WC.
9 B. The SMACNA publication HVAC Duct Construction Standard - Metal and Flexible generally 10 governs the material gauges and the fabrication and installation techniques for systems 11 specified in this Section. SMACNA criteria are superseded by the requirements of this Section. 12 Use current adopted edition.
13 C. In the event of conflict regarding metal HVAC ductwork and accessory requirements between 14 this Section and another section, the provisions of this Section govern.
15 1.2 REFERENCES
16 A. Where required to provide design, based upon criteria imposed by this Section, use current 17 adopted editions of the following SMACNA publications as a minimum: 18 1. HVAC Duct Construction Standards – Metal and Flexible. 19 2. Fire Damper and Heat Stop Guide for Air-Handling Systems.
20 B. NFPA Publications (use current adopted edition): 21 1. 90A – Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. 22 2. 91 – Standard for the Installation of Blower and Exhaust Systems for Dust, Stock, and 23 Vapor Removal or Conveying. 24 3. 96 – Standard for the Installation of Equipment for the Removal of Smoke and Grease- 25 Laden Vapors from Commercial Cooking Equipment.
26 1.3 DEFINITIONS
27 A. Duct: A tube or channel, including fittings, through which a gas moves.
28 B. Ductwork: A system of interconnected ducts and duct accessories, including, but not limited to, 29 isolation and balancing dampers, smoke and/or fire dampers, access doors, turning vanes, 30 flexible connections, air extractors, hangers and supports, and other miscellaneous items 31 required for a completely operable and adjustable system.
32 1.4 SUBMITTALS
33 A. Refer to the Submittal Schedule at the end of Part 3 for a list of the submittal requirements for 34 this section.
09/April/2018 23 31 13 - 1 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS
2 A. Fabricate and install sheet metal work using qualified, experienced mechanics as specified 3 herein.
4 1.6 COORDINATION
5 A. The Drawings do not attempt to show exact details of ductwork. No extra payment will be 6 allowed for obstruction by work of other trades or local obstructions to the work which require 7 offsets. Where diagrams have been made to show duct connections, the diagrams not be used 8 for obtaining material quantities.
9 B. Submit changes in location of equipment or ductwork, advisable in the opinion of the 10 Contractor, for review before proceeding with the work. Verify measurements and dimensions 11 at the site.
12 C. Duct sizes shown on the Drawings represent the nominal free area required for that service. 13 Where changes in duct dimensions are necessary to coordinate the installation, the Contractor 14 may change to an equivalent duct area with different dimensions as determined using a Trane 15 Ductulator or Carrier or ASHRAE equivalence charts.
16 D. Coordination with Existing Conditions and Other Trades: 17 1. Coordinate the installation of ductwork with existing conditions and the work of other 18 trades to allow the installation of ductwork and the proper operation of dampers, 19 operators, and duct access doors. 20 2. Relocate existing thread rod, strut material, miscellaneous supports, conduit, or piping 21 under 1 inch diameter where it obstructs the passage of the ductwork at no additional cost 22 to the Owner. Coordinate the work with other trades.
23 PART 2 PRODUCTS
24 2.1 MATERIALS
25 A. Ductwork Materials: 26 1. Galvanized Steel (GS): Hot-dipped GS sheet, lock-forming grade, conforming to 27 ASTM A924 and A653, having G90 zinc coating in conformance with ASTM A90, 28 unless heavier galvanizing is specified. 29 2. Hot-Rolled Steel (HRS): HRS sheet, commercial quality, conforming to ASTM A568 30 and A569, or A366 (cold-rolled) plate with hot-rolled structural steel shapes, in 31 conformance with ASTM A6 and ASTM A36. 32 3. Aluminum (AL): 33 a. AL Sheet: Alloy 3003-H14 conforming to ASTM Standard B209. 34 b. AL Connectors and Bar Stock: Alloy 6061-T6 or of equivalent strength. 35 4. Stainless Steel (SS): Type 304 or 316 SS sheet, as scheduled, with No. 2B finish 36 conforming to ASTM A167 and A480; matching type structural members conforming to 37 ASTM A666; Type 316 SS fasteners.
38 B. Sealants and Tapes:
09/April/2018 23 31 13 - 2 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 1. Duct Sealer – Acceptable Manufacturers: 2 a. United Duct Sealer. 3 b. Duro-Dyne HPS Sealant. 4 c. Vulkem (one part polyurethane) Sealant. 5 d. 3M Fastbond Duct Sealer 900. 6 2. Tape and Adhesive/Activator System: 7 a. Acceptable Manufacturer: Hardcast. 8 b. Description: 9 1) Hardcast Type DT tape and FTA-20 (indoors) or RTA-50 (outdoors) 10 adhesive. 11 2) Do not use Hardcast within cleanrooms or in locations where it is exposed to 12 air to be recirculated back to cleanrooms. Use NASHUA No. 324A tape 13 under this circumstance. 14 3. Duct Tape - Acceptable Manufacturers: NASHUA No. 357 silver cloth tape. 15 4. Shrink Band (Round Ducts Only) – Acceptable Manufacturer: Raychem Flexcad.
16 2.2 ROUND AND FLAT OVAL SPIRAL LOCK-SEAM HVAC DUCTWORK
17 A. Acceptable Duct Manufacturers: 18 1. United Sheet Metal Company “UniSeal” with uniform fittings. 19 2. Semco. 20 3. Local manufacturers with equal quality and dimension standards, as approved by the 21 Owner. (Submit sample for approval.)
22 B. Materials: Except as indicated in alternative material, construct round and flat oval HVAC 23 ductwork, along with components and accessories from materials specified above, as scheduled 24 at the end of this Section, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings.
25 C. Fabrication: 26 1. General: 27 a. Fabricate ducts using spiral lock-seam construction technique out of sheet material 28 equaling or exceeding the minimum gauge shown in the SMACNA round duct 29 gauge selection tables and SMACNA flat oval duct construction table for the duct 30 pressure classifications specified. 31 b. Where the duct diameter is so large that spiral-wound ductwork is not available, 32 longitudinal seam ductwork with continuous corrosion-resistant welded seams may 33 be used. 34 c. Paint galvanized coatings that have been damaged by welding with ZRC Cold 35 Galvanizing Compound 36 2. Fittings: 37 a. General: Machine formed, shop fabricated with continuous corrosion-resistant 38 welded seams. 39 b. Branch Takeoffs: Provide duct fittings as a completely separate fitting and not 40 tapped directly into spiral ducts. Saddle fittings are prohibited. Provide branch 41 takeoffs as shown on the Drawings. Where branch takeoffs are not shown, provide 42 45 degree laterals or conical tees. 43 c. Branch Takeoffs, Rectangular to Round: 44 1) 3 Inches WC and Greater Pressure Class: Manufactured bell-mouth fittings.
09/April/2018 23 31 13 - 3 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 2) 2 Inches WC and Lower Pressure Class: Conical bell-mouth fittings for 2 supply; boot fitting for return and exhaust. 3 d. Transitions, Elbows: 4 1) Utilize transitions of concentric type or eccentric type to maintain elevations 5 indicated with not more than 15-degree angle variation on sloped portion. 6 2) Provide 90-degree elbows of five-piece segmented design with centerline 7 radius equal to one and a half of duct diameter minimum. 8 3) Provide 60-degree and 45-degree elbows of three-piece segmented design 9 with centerline radius equal to one and one-half of duct diameter minimum. 10 4) Elbows 8 inches diameter and smaller may be of the stamped variety with a 11 bead rolled on each end. 12 5) Contractor-fabricated transitions and elbows are prohibited except where 13 standard fabricated fittings cannot be used and only after review of each 14 specific case and approval by the Owner. 15 e. Joints – Circumferential: 16 1) Provide couplings with centering beads. 17 2) Flanged joints may be used for connections to equipment where longitudinal 18 seam ductwork is provided, where flat oval ductwork requires reinforcing, 19 and at other locations where couplings are inappropriate. 20 3) Crimped-end joints are prohibited.
21 2.3 RECTANGULAR HVAC DUCTWORK
22 A. Materials: Construct rectangular HVAC ductwork and components and accessories from 23 materials specified above as scheduled in this section, except as noted on Drawings.
24 B. Fabrication: 25 1. General: Fabricate ductwork from sheet material equaling or exceeding minimum wall 26 thickness and reinforcing as scheduled in the SMACNA rectangular duct construction 27 schedules to comply with duct pressure classifications specified. Cross break or bead duct 28 widths over 12 inches and horizontal surfaces to prevent ballooning or breathing. 29 2. Fittings: 30 a. General: Fabricate fittings for lowest air pressure drop. 31 b. Radius Elbows: Fabricate with centerline radius equal to or greater than one and 32 one-half times the duct dimension in the plane of the turn. 33 c. Mitered Elbows: Provide with turning vanes as specified under ductwork 34 accessories. 35 d. Branch Takeoffs, Rectangular to Rectangular: 36 1) 3 Inches WC and Greater Pressure Class: Use parallel flow branches where 37 possible. Where branch taps be made, use 45-degree entry with L = 1/4, 38 4 inches minimum. 39 2) 2 Inches WC and Lower Pressure Class: 40 a) Use parallel flow branches where possible. Where branch taps be 41 made, use 45-degree entry with L = 1/4w, 4 inches minimum. 42 b) Extractors fixed at 12 degrees may be used for short runs and where 43 shown on Drawings. 44 e. Joints: 45 1) Longitudinal: Pittsburgh lock flooded with mastic prior to assembly. 46 Snaplock is unacceptable.
09/April/2018 23 31 13 - 4 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 2) Transverse: Use demountable joint system, such as Ductmate, Nexus, or 2 TDC on rectangular ductwork except where it is impractical. Seal corners 3 prior to assembly.
4 2.4 HVAC FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK
5 A. Standards and Listings: Comply with NFPA 90A Standard for the Installation of Air 6 Conditioning and Ventilating Systems and UL 181 Standard for Safety Factory-Made Air Ducts 7 and Connectors for Class 1 air duct.
8 B. Materials: 9 1. HVAC Application (3 Inches WC and Lower Pressure Class): 10 a. Acceptable Manufacturer: Thermaflex M-KF. 11 b. Wire Helix: Zinc coated or vinyl coated, high-carbon steel. 12 c. Interior Liner: Acoustically treated CPE air barrier bonded to wire helix. 13 d. Insulation: Minimum 1-inch-thick blanket of fiberglass, factory installed and 14 bonded to the duct liner. 15 e. Jacket: Factory-applied, scuff-resistant, fiberglass-reinforced metalized film 16 laminate vapor barrier with three-ply standing support slam. 17 f. Maximum Length: 7 feet. 18 g. Operating Ratings: 10 inches WC positive pressure for diameters 12 inches and 19 under, 1 inch WC negative pressure; 4,000 fpm maximum velocity.
20 2.5 DUCT ACCESSORIES
21 A. General: Fabricate duct accessories from the same material as the ductwork in which the 22 accessory will be installed, unless specified otherwise.
23 B. Manual Splitter Dampers: Fabricated from 18-gauge metal of the same material as the 24 ductwork with splitters long enough to completely close the branch duct without flutter. 25 Provide a locking quadrant and align its operating handle with the damper blade.
26 C. Manual Single-Blade Balancing Dampers (2 Inches WC Construction): 27 1. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA standards, except as detailed on the Drawings 28 and as specified. 29 2. Provide dampers of length suitable to shut off branch ducts without causing damper 30 flutter. 31 3. Cross-break dampers and stiffen edges with two edge brakes for rigidity. Provide 32 additional stiffening angles, as required. 33 4. Provide continuous rods and outside end bearings, or provide inside end bearings for 34 dampers installed in internally lined ducts. Mark the ends of damper rods with a saw-cut 35 to indicate blade position. 36 5. Maximum single-blade balancing damper size is 12 by 12 inches. Provide manual 37 opposed-blade balancing dampers in ducts wider than 12 inches. Section damper blades 38 over 48 inches wide horizontally. 39 6. Provide specified locking quadrants for ductwork serving nonclean areas. Provide 40 specified dial regulators for ductwork serving cleanrooms.
41 D. Manual Opposed-Blade Balancing Dampers (2 Inches WC Construction):
09/April/2018 23 31 13 - 5 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 1. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA standards, except as detailed on the Drawings 2 and as specified. 3 2. Provide blades center crimped for stiffness and to receive pins and rods and edge crimped 4 to interlock with adjacent blades on full shutoff. Provide additional stiffening angles, as 5 required. 6 3. Provide a prime-coated or galvanized channel frame for mounting of bearings with angle 7 stops on top and bottom. 8 4. Mark the ends of the damper shaft extension with a saw-cut to indicate blade position. 9 5. Provide SMACNA-accepted linkage and hardware as manufactured by Ventfabrics, Inc., 10 arranged for gang operation and opposed-blade action without jamming or racking. 11 6. Provide oil-impregnated bronze bushings for GS dampers, sized to match with pins. 12 Provide nylon bushings for aluminum and stainless steel ductwork. 13 7. Provide blades with a minimum of 18-gauge steel or equal strength aluminum maximum 14 blade width of 12 inches. Provide multi-section dampers for dampers over 48 inches 15 wide. 16 8. Provide specified locking quadrants for ductwork serving nonclean areas. Provide 17 specified dial regulators for ductwork serving cleanrooms.
18 E. Manual Opposed-Blade Balancing Dampers (3 to 6 Inches WC Construction): 19 1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Ruskin. 20 2. Provide blades center crimped for stiffness and to receive pins and rods and edge crimped 21 to interlock with adjacent blades on full shutoff. Provide additional stiffening angles, as 22 required. 23 3. Provide a prime-coated or galvanized channel frame for mounting of bearings with angle 24 stops on top and bottom. 25 4. Mark the ends of the damper shaft extension with a saw-cut to indicate blade position. 26 5. Provide SMACNA-accepted linkage and hardware as manufactured by Ventfabrics, Inc., 27 arranged for gang operation and opposed-blade action without jamming or racking. 28 6. Provide stainless steel bearings. 29 7. Provide blades with a minimum of 16-gauge steel or equal strength aluminum and 30 maximum blade width of 8 inches. Provide multi-section dampers for dampers over 31 48 inches wide.
32 F. Motorized Dampers: 33 1. Provide continuous rods on motorized damper assemblies. 34 2. Provide actuators in accordance with Section 23 09 23 – Instruments for Control Systems 35 3. Locate actuator outside the airstream. 36 4. Provide actuator sized by and provided by the damper manufacturer. 37 5. Install the actuator as specified and in accordance with the manufacturer’s written 38 directions. 39 6. Provide electric actuators with 24V ac/V dc power supply. Provide proportional actuators 40 to accept 0- to 10V dc or 0- to 20-mA control signal. Provide UL-listed actuators 41 designed for a minimum of 60,000 full-stroke cycles.
42 G. Regulators and Quadrants: 43 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: 44 a. Ventfabrics, Inc. (Ventlok). 45 b. Duro-Dyne Specline/Quadline. 46 2. Concealed Accessible Uninsulated Ductwork:
09/April/2018 23 31 13 - 6 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 a. Ventlok Figure 635 dial regulator and 607 end bearing. 2 b. Ventlok Figure 555 locking quadrant and 607 end bearing. 3 3. Concealed Accessible Insulated Ductwork: 4 a. Ventline Figures 637 or 639 dial regulator and 607 end bearing to match insulation 5 thickness. 6 b. Ventline Figure 555 locking quadrant with an elevated standoff and 607 end 7 bearing of the same height as the insulation thickness. 8 4. Concealed Inaccessible Ductwork: Ventlok Figure 677 concealed damper regulator with 9 plain cover, extended rod, and universal joints and miter gears as required.
10 H. Turning Vanes: 11 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: 12 a. Elgen All-Tight. 13 b. Duro-Dyne Vane Rail. 14 2. Description: Hat channel or embossed vane side rails with shop-fabricated, double-blade 15 turning vanes of the same material as the ductwork.
16 I. Air Extractors: 17 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: 18 a. Carnes Model RXVA, Style 3. 19 b. Titus Type AG-45, with operator No. 3. 20 2. Description: Synchronized steel curved extractor blades, mounted on heavy side rails 21 with a screw operator. Furnish on takeoffs from main ducts adjacent to diffusers or grilles 22 where a splitter is not used.
23 J. Flexible Connectors: 24 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: 25 a. Ventfabrics. 26 b. Duro-Dyne. 27 2. Indoor Applications: 28 a. Description: Neoprene-coated, fire-retardant woven glass fabric, minimum 29 30-ounce-per-square-yard density, UL listed, crimped into metal edging strip with 30 2-inch minimum clearance between equipment and ductwork, unless otherwise 31 indicated. 32 b. Products: 33 1) Ventfabrics: Ventglass. 34 2) Duro-Dyne: Neoprene metal fab or super metal fab. 35 3. Outdoor Applications: 36 a. Description: Hypalon-coated, fire-retardant woven glass fabric, minimum 37 24-ounce-per-square-yard density, UL listed, crimped into metal edging strip, with 38 2-inch minimum clearance between equipment and ductwork, unless otherwise 39 indicated. 40 b. Products: 41 1) Ventfabrics: Ventlon. 42 2) Duro-Dyne: Durolon metal fab or super metal fab.
43 K. Duct Access Doors: 44 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: 45 a. Ventfabrics.
09/April/2018 23 31 13 - 7 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 b. Duro-Dyne. 2 c. Ruskin. 3 2. Description: 4 a. Double-wall access door with minimum 1-inch-thick insulation between walls, 5 angle, or Z-frame, sealing gasket around the periphery, double layer Plexiglas 6 vision panel with air space between, hinged with Ventlok No. 100 quick-release 7 latches. Access doors smaller than 12 inches square may be secured with sash 8 locks. 9 b. Provide sizes as follows: Frame Number of Duct Size Size Hinges Access Requirements 6 through 8 inches 6 by 8 Two Handhole 10 inches 10 by 12 Two One hand and sight 12 through 12 by 16 Two Two hands and head 16 inches sight Greater than 16 by 24 Three Body entry 16 inches 10 c. Provide sufficient sealant for application between the door frame and duct for 11 installations in ductwork with seal Classes A and B and in ductwork serving 12 cleanrooms. 13 d. Patch plates attached with screw fasteners are prohibited, except in locations where 14 they are specifically noted.
15 L. Spin-in Fittings: Straight pattern sheet metal spin-in fitting with 45-degree scoop designed for 16 connection to sheet metal ductwork. Assemble using spot welds or rivets. Button punch 17 fabrication is prohibited. Provide a specified balancing damper in the ductwork immediately 18 downstream of each spin-in fitting.
19 M. Airflow Stations: 20 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Air Monitor or Ebtron. 21 2. General Description: Velocity pressure averaging station with multipoint VP sensing 22 elements, maximum 36 square inches per probe, and multipoint static pressure sensing 23 elements, maximum 24-inch spacing on sides, minimum of four. Duct centerline 24 connection to pitot grid. 25 3. Construction: Tubular or honeycomb air straighteners to provide uniform flow at sensing 26 elements; copper pitot tubes. 27 4. Static Pressure Drop: Maximum 0.15 inch WC at 2,000 fpm for assembly. 28 5. Fan Discharge Monitoring: Provide units suitable for installation mounting downstream 29 of fans when shown in that location.
30 N. Backdraft Damper: 31 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: 32 a. American Warming and Ventilating. 33 b. Ruskin. 34 c. Safe-Air of Illinois. 35 2. Description:
09/April/2018 23 31 13 - 8 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 a. Commercial-quality, multi-blade, parallel-action, counterbalanced backdraft 2 dampers of 16-gauge GS or extruded aluminum with center-pivoted blades of 3 maximum 6-inch width with felt or flexible vinyl-sealed edges, linked together in 4 rattle-free manner with 90-degree stop, steel ball bearings, and plated steel pivot 5 pin. [Channel] [Front-flanged] [Rear-flanged] frame. 6 b. Gravity backdraft dampers smaller than 18 by 18 inches furnished with air-moving 7 equipment may be the air-moving equipment manufacturer’s standard construction. 8 3. Ratings: 3,500-fpm maximum velocity, 1 inch WC backpressure, set to relieve above 9 0.02 inch WC differential pressure.
10 O. Fire Dampers for Duct Mounting: 11 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: 12 a. Ruskin. 13 b. Air Balance, Inc. 14 2. Description: Curtain type, UL-labeled assembly with frame, interlocking blades, and 15 165 degree F rated fusible link. Provide stainless steel closure springs and latches for 16 horizontal installations. Configure with blades stored out of the airstream. 17 3. Provide assemblies rated to maintain the integrity of the rated construction in which the 18 damper be installed. 19 4. Select thin-line dampers with nominal 2-inch-thick frame for installation in walls 20 between or behind grilles. 21 5. Select static or dynamic damper according to the system operation. 22 6. Corrosive Environments: Fabricate dampers exposed to corrosive environments from 23 Type 316 SS.
24 P. Fire Dampers for Ceiling Grilles and Diffusers: 25 1. Acceptable Manufacturer: 26 a. Ruskin CFD series. 27 b. Air Balance Inc., 290 series. 28 2. Description: 29 a. UL-labeled radiation damper assembly rated to maintain the integrity of 30 floor/ceiling (F/C) and roof/ceiling (R/C) assemblies, consisting of butterfly-style 31 damper blades, retained by a fusible link, installed in a standard frame for hard- 32 ducted applications, and an extended frame for flexible ducted applications. 33 b. Provide a diffuser radiation shield fabricated of mineral wool or refractory ceramic 34 fiber to maintain the integrity of the rated assembly. 35 c. Provide a factory-installed mechanism to permit adjustment of damper blades to 36 balance airflow. 37 3. Rating: 165 degree F fusible link for F/C or R/C assembly fire-resistance ratings of 38 3 hours or less.
39 Q. Sheet Metal Plenums: Fabricate from minimum 18-gauge metal of the same material as the 40 ductwork, braced with steel framing for rigidity. Provide man-access doors for plenums size 41 6 feet or greater in height.
42 R. Louver Blank-Off Sections: Fabricate from 20-gauge galvanized steel sheets lined with sound 43 attenuation material as specified in Section 23 07 00, HVAC Insulation. Install airtight 44 attachment to louver in such a manner as to allow easy removal. Prime and paint the outside 45 face of blank-off sections with two coats of flat black exterior paint.
09/April/2018 23 31 13 - 9 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 S. Contractor-Fabricated Roof Hood: 2 1. Materials: Galvanized steel, minimum 18-gauge base and 20-gauge hood; suitably 3 reinforced with removable hood, birdscreen with 1/2-inch square mesh for exhaust and 4 3/4 inch for intake, and epoxy paint finish. 5 2. Insulate inside surfaces of hoods not connected to duct systems. 6 3. Accessories: Minimum 12-inch-high curb base with insulation between duct and curb. 7 4. Performance: Size hood outlet area to exceed twice the throat area.
8 T. Contractor-Fabricated Gooseneck: 9 1. Materials: Minimum 18-gauge galvanized steel. 10 2. Accessories: Minimum 12-inch-high curb base where size exceeds 9 by 9 inches.
11 2.6 DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
12 A. General: 13 1. Provide duct hanger and support material gauges to comply with details on the Drawings. 14 Where details are not provided, comply with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction 15 Standards - Metal and Flexible. 16 2. Suspension material may be threaded rod, metal strap, structural shapes, or strut material; 17 however, the use of strap is limited to inaccessible areas or those accessed through a 18 ceiling. The use of wire as suspension material is prohibited.
19 B. Upper Attachments: 20 1. Concrete Construction: 21 a. Cast-in-place inserts as specified in another division of work are acceptable. 22 b. Expanding concrete anchors as specified in another division of work may be used. 23 c. The use of powder-actuated fasteners is prohibited without prior written consent by 24 the Owner. 25 2. Steel Construction: 26 a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 27 1) Anvil International 28 2) B-line Inc. 29 b. Support ductwork from structure or supplementary steel, utilizing beam clamps 30 designed for the intended service. Support from metal decks above is prohibited. 31 Provide supplementary steel as detailed and as required.
32 C. Trapezes: Utilize structural steel shapes or strut material. Separate dissimilar ducts and support 33 materials with 1/16-inch rubber sheet.
34 D. Support Frames: Structural steel shapes or strut frames for support of ductwork, accessories, 35 and HVAC system components with nuts, bolts, fittings, etc., compatible with the frame 36 material.
37 PART 3 EXECUTION
38 3.1 FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION
39 A. General:
09/April/2018 23 31 13 - 10 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 1. Duct sizes shown on the Drawings are inside duct dimensions and represent the net-free 2 dimensions of the duct. 3 2. Install the entire duct system with a minimum number of bends and transitions. 4 3. Except where Hardcast or Raychem are applied, seal nonwelded joints with a specified 5 chemical-resistant mastic sealant while joining. 6 4. Install additional reinforcement to preclude ballooning or breathing of ducts.
7 B. Purchased Components: Install ductwork components, such as Duct-Mate, Hardcast, etc., and 8 accessories in accordance with the manufacturers’ written instructions.
9 C. Joints: 10 1. Assemble round and oval sections using couplings with duct sealer mastic applied to 11 inside and outside of section. After applying mastic, push sections together with 1-inch 12 minimum overlap. Apply a coat of duct sealer mastic over joint and coupling. 13 2. At the Contractor’s option, sections may be assembled with joints brazed or welded. 14 3. Hardcast or Raychem shrinkwrap may be used in lieu of mastic and tape system with 15 Owner’s prior approval.
16 D. Branch Takeoffs: 17 1. Provide takeoffs to terminal units to be the same free area as terminal unit inlet or as 18 shown, whichever is larger. 19 2. Connect rigidly to terminal unit inlet without flexible duct.
20 E. Sound Attenuation (Internal Insulation): 21 1. Provide sound attenuation duct where shown and as specified under Section 23 07 00 – 22 HVAC Insulation. 23 2. Duct dimensions shown are net-free inside dimensions of the duct with attenuating 24 material.
25 F. Splitter Dampers: Installation of splitter dampers is restricted to only those locations shown on 26 the Drawings.
27 G. Balancing Dampers: 28 1. Install where shown and where required. Install quadrants or regulators as specified, 29 leaving dampers locked wide open. 30 2. Add or remove balancing dampers at the direction of the Owner based on 31 recommendations by the air balancing firm for the necessary control of air in ducted 32 systems.
33 H. Turning Vanes: Install in 90-degree miter elbows.
34 I. Extractors: Install above duct-mounted diffusers, behind sidewall supply grilles and registers, 35 where shown.
36 J. Flexible Connectors: Make connections to fans and other rotating equipment using flexible 37 connectors with 2-inch minimum clearance between casing and ductwork. Flexible connectors 38 are not required on internally spring-isolated units equipped with internal flexible connectors 39 unless shown on Drawings.
09/April/2018 23 31 13 - 11 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 K. Ducts Through Walls and Floors: 2 1. Caulk non-fire-rated openings with Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing (3M) 3 Company, 3M butyl sealer. 4 2. Seal openings through fire-rated partitions with fire sealants as specified in Section 07 5 Attach sheet metal collar tightly and neatly to duct to cover exposed openings.
6 L. Rectangular Ducts Exposed to Weather: 7 1. Provide ducts greater than 30 inches in width with 1-1/2-inch standing seams. The 8 alternate use of a sheet metal pitched roof may be proposed, but approved by the Owner 9 prior to fabrication or installation. 10 2. Demonstrate support and drainage with a snow load of 12 inches.
11 M. Spin-in Fittings: 12 1. The use of spin-in fittings is acceptable only in supply ductwork of 2 inches WC and 13 lower pressure class. 14 2. Install at branch takeoffs to outlets.
15 N. Connections to Equipment: 16 1. Install flanges to match those of connecting factory-fabricated equipment. 17 2. Make transitions in ductwork from rectangular to round or to accommodate the sizes of 18 factory-fabricated equipment (e.g., coils and dampers) using tapered ducts, not by 19 safeing.
20 O. Duct Access Doors: Provide duct access doors for inspection and maintenance at each fire 21 damper, smoke or ionization detector, electric duct heater, coil, filter, humidifier, automatic 22 damper, fan plenum, and elsewhere as indicated.
23 P. Access Doors Through Building Construction: 24 1. Provide access doors through building construction under work of this Section as 25 specified under Section 08 – Access Doors and Frames. 26 2. Provide ceiling access doors adjacent to each duct-installed devices requiring inspection, 27 adjustment, or maintenance. 28 3. Provide wall access doors for access to duct-installed devices requiring inspection, 29 adjustment, or maintenance.
30 Q. Backdraft Dampers: 31 1. Provide backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where 32 indicated. 33 2. Provide duct access doors for checking operation and maintenance.
34 R. Fire and Combination Fire-Smoke Dampers: 35 1. Install dampers in accordance with NFPA 90A, UBC, the manufacturer’s written 36 recommendations, and the product’s UL listing. 37 2. Install fire dampers at locations indicated, where ducts and outlets pass through fire-rated 38 construction, and where required by authorities having jurisdiction. 39 3. Install with required perimeter mounting angles, sleeves, breakaway duct connections, 40 corrosion-resistant springs, bearings, bushings, and hinges.
09/April/2018 23 31 13 - 12 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 4. Install an access door in a serviceable position on the link or latch side of the damper of 2 sufficient size to allow resetting of the damper and replacement of the link. Provide doors 3 compatible with the pressure rating of the duct in which they are installed. 4 5. Demonstrate resetting of fire dampers to authorities having jurisdiction and to the Owner.
5 S. Painting: 6 1. Paint duct stackheads behind diffusers, registers, and grilles with primer and two coats of 7 flat black paint. 8 2. Paint exterior exposed ductwork and supports with primer and two coats of exterior flat 9 enamel paint in accordance with Section 09 – Painting-Building.
10 T. Vibration Isolators and Seismic Restraints: 11 1. Provide vibration isolation in accordance with Section 13 48 00 – Mechanical Sound and 12 Vibration Control, and as detailed on the Drawings. 13 2. When details regarding seismic restraints are not present, install seismic restraints to 14 comply with the applicable building code for the seismic zone at the site with materials 15 and installation in accordance with SMACNA Seismic Restraint Manual.
16 U. Humidifier and Dehumidification Coil Drain Pans: 17 1. Provide a welded, 304L stainless steel drain pan from 3 feet upstream to 10 feet 18 downstream of humidifiers and coils where condensation may occur. Slope the bottom of 19 the pan to drain. 20 2. Provide a minimum 1-inch NPT pipe coupling or nipple for connection to field drainage 21 piping.
22 3.2 INSTALLATION, HVAC FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK
23 A. Applied Location: 24 1. Cleanrooms: Use of flexible ductwork is acceptable only at connections to ducted filter 25 ceiling modules. 26 2. Nonclean Areas: Use of flexible ductwork is acceptable at connections to supply and 27 return diffusers only where shown on the Drawings.
28 B. Installation, Cleanrooms: 29 1. Install flexible ductwork, using Panduit strap, using Panduit installation tool, and two 30 turns of cleanroom duct tape to seal. Completely encapsulate fiberglass fibers. 31 2. Originate necessary horizontal runs at a plenum-mounted, 90-degree elbow, have 32 supports at 6-foot intervals, and terminate at a filter with a duct support. 33 3. Protect installed duct runs from contact with rough or sharp surfaces.
34 C. Installation, Nonclean Areas: 35 1. Make connections at ends using Panduit strap, using Panduit installation tool, and a 36 minimum of two wraps of duct tape. Install the strap between the rolled bead on the duct 37 collar and the duct or diffuser. 38 2. Suspend center spans from structure above at maximum 6-foot centers. Use with 1-inch- 39 wide galvanized steel strap with single loop at top and 1-1/2-inch galvanized sheet metal 40 saddles with smooth edges under duct. 41 3. Suspending duct by laying it on the ceiling is prohibited.
09/April/2018 23 31 13 - 13 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 4. Avoid reducing the free area of the duct by crimping. Avoid bends in excess of 2 90 degrees.
3 3.3 DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
4 A. General Support Locations: 5 1. Install hangers close to transverse joints of main ducts and branches, clinch collar branch 6 connections, and the first branch elbows after nested splits. 7 2. Locate hangers of ducts penetrating walls or partitions as though the walls will contribute 8 no support to the duct. 9 3. Install hangers in pairs on exact opposite sides of duct. Install duct supports from floors 10 and walls when necessary. 11 4. Maintain hanger spacing intervals not greater than the specified maximums. 12 5. Install hangers at the midpoint of small- and medium-sized (less than 10 square feet) 13 horizontal-vaned square elbows. On wide-vaned square elbows, install additional hangers 14 at maximum allowable intervals (or less) measured along the heel lines of the elbows. 15 6. Provide a set of hangers at the midpoint of small- and medium-sized horizontal radius 16 elbows with greater than 20-degree offset. Install one or more supplementary hangers 17 along the inside and outside arcs of large-radius elbows of angle whenever the lengths of 18 these arcs exceed the maximum hanger spacing length for that duct size. 19 7. Provide at least one set of hangers for short duct branches 3 feet or less in length. 20 8. Provide each duct riser with a minimum of two supports completely spanning the shaft 21 opening at each floor. One pair of supports may be used to support more than one duct 22 riser, provided that the strength of the supports is increased appropriately and proper 23 additional supplementary steel is used at the extra risers. 24 9. Support duct risers located between floors that are more than 15 feet high at each floor 25 and halfway points between floors. The distance between intermediate supports on very 26 high floors not exceed 12 feet for round ducts or 10 feet for rectangular ducts 27 (intermediate hangers may be supported from an adjacent wall or hung by rods from 28 supports on the floor above). 29 10. Provide one or more sets of hangers for equipment in duct runs, such as heating coils, air 30 terminal units, mixing boxes, etc., as recommended by their manufacturers.
31 B. Specific Support Locations – Locate Duct Hangers: 32 1. Approximately 2 to 24 inches from flexible connections of fans. 33 2. Approximately 2 to 24 inches from the outlets or flexible connections of terminal units or 34 mixing boxes. 35 3. Approximately 12 to 36 inches from the main duct to the first hanger of long branch 36 ducts. 37 4. Approximately 2 to 12 inches from the ends of branch ducts and linear diffuser plenums. 38 5. Approximately 2 to 24 inches from fire damper breakaway joints. 39 6. Approximately 2 inches to half the duct width, plus 2 inches from the vertical centerline 40 of the lower elbow of short vertical offsets made with vaned square elbows. The width 41 refers to the dimension of the elbow in the plane of the turn. The heavier the duct, the 42 closer the hanger to the centerline of the elbow. 43 7. Approximately 2 inches to half the duct width, plus 2 inches from the vertical centerline 44 of the bottom and top elbows of vaned square elbow offsets over 8 feet high. Diameters 45 of hanger rods of heavy offsets increase proportionately. The heavier the duct, the closer 46 the hanger to the centerline of the elbow.
09/April/2018 23 31 13 - 14 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 8. Approximately one-eighth of the arc in from the ends of bottom and top radius elbows of 2 vertical offsets longer than 8 feet. Short vertical offsets require hangers at the bottom 3 elbow. Likewise, sloping offsets need at least one set of hangers at their lower-radius 4 elbow. Fasten hangers on sloping or arched surfaces to ducts to prevent slippage. 5 9. Approximately 6 to 12 inches from transverse joints of ducts whose lengths are the same 6 as specified hanger intervals. 7 10. Approximately 6 to 12 inches from one side of walls or partitions penetrated by ducts.
8 C. Support Spacing – Maximum Permitted Hanger Spacing: 9 1. Ducts with areas up to 4 square feet may have their hangers spaced up to 8 feet apart. 10 2. Ducts with areas from 4 to 10 square feet may have their hangers spaced not more than 11 6 feet apart. 12 3. Ducts with areas over 10 square feet may have their hangers located up to 4 feet apart.
13 D. Support Method: 14 1. Support low ductwork from floors or other steel structures acceptable to the Owner using 15 struts or structural steel shapes or bars. Where possible, maintain 6 inches clear between 16 the bottom of the duct and the supporting structure. 17 2. Support ductwork suspended from overhead using trapeze supports for rectangular ducts 18 or straps for round ducts with the hanger strap wound completely around the duct. Use 19 threaded rod for support from above. 20 3. Use of sheet metal screws for attaching support straps to ducts is prohibited. 21 4. Trim support material to minimum length after elevation is adjusted.
22 3.4 TEST AND ADJUST
23 A. Pressure Testing of HVAC Ductwork: 24 1. Description: 25 a. Prior to connection to equipment and before applying insulation, perform a 26 dynamic pressure test on HVAC ductwork systems using a high-pressure blower 27 with a calibrated orifice and manometer. Provide necessary blowers, gauges, 28 connections, and similar items required to perform the tests. 29 b. Repair leaks and retest until stipulated results are achieved. 30 c. Advise the Owner 48 hours in advance of each test. Failure to so notify will require 31 test to be rescheduled. 32 2. Testing Requirements: Maximum Loss Pressure Class Seal Class Test Pressure Percent * 2 inches WC A 2 inches WC 0.5 B 2 inches WC 1.0 C 2 inches WC 2.0 3 inches WC A 3 inches WC 0.5 B 3 inches WC 1.0 4 inches WC and above A 6 inches WC 0.5 *Percent of rated airflow.
09/April/2018 23 31 13 - 15 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
2 A. Cleaning of General Service Ductwork: Remove debris from general-purpose ductwork and 3 accessories, then blow ductwork clean with air movement provided by the system fan or 4 blower. Blow supply ductwork clean before final branch connections are made to terminal units 5 or before terminal grilles, registers, or diffusers are installed.
6 B. General Cleaning: Clean up and remove refuse material, crates, and rubbish arising from work 7 of this Section from the premises.
8 3.6 DUCT SCHEDULE
9 A. Supply Ducts: 10 1. Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units, and Terminal Units: 11 a. Pressure Class: Positive 2-inch wg. 12 b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: C. 13 c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 24. 14 d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12. 15 2. Ducts Connected to Constant-Volume Air-Handling Units: 16 a. Pressure Class: Positive 3-inch wg. 17 b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B. 18 c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12. 19 d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 6. 20 3. Ducts Connected to Variable-Air-Volume Air-Handling Units: 21 a. Pressure Class: Positive 4-inch wg. 22 b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. 23 c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 6. 24 d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 3. 25 4. Ducts Connected to Equipment Not Listed Above: 26 a. Pressure Class: Positive 2-inch wg. 27 b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: C. 28 c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 24. 29 d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12.
30 B. Return Ducts: 31 1. Ducts Connected to Air Handling Units, Fan Coil Units, and Terminal Units: 32 a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg. 33 b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: C. 34 c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 24. 35 d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12.
36 C. Exhaust Ducts: 37 1. Ducts Connected to Fans Exhausting (ASHRAE 62.1, Class 1 and 2) Air: 38 a. Pressure Class: Negative 2-inch wg. 39 b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: C 40 c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 24. 41 d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12. 42 2. Exhaust Ducts Serving Locker Rooms and Shower Rooms : 43 a. Aluminum.
09/April/2018 23 31 13 - 16 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 b. Pressure Class: Negative 2-inch wg. 2 c. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: C. 3 d. SMACNA Leakage Class: 24 4 e. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12 5 3. Ducts Connected to Commercial Kitchen Hoods (if applicable): Comply with NFPA 96. 6 a. Exposed to View: Type 304, stainless-steel sheet, No. 3 finish. 7 b. Concealed: Carbon-steel sheet. 8 c. Welded seams and joints. 9 d. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 4-inch wg. 10 e. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: Welded seams, joints, and penetrations. 11 f. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 6. 12 g. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 3
13 D. Outdoor-Air (Not Filtered, Heated, or Cooled) Ducts: 14 1. Ducts Connected to Air-Handling Units: 15 a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg. 16 b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: C. 17 c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 24. 18 d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12. 19 2. Ducts Connected to All Equipment Other than Air Handling Units: 20 a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 1-inch wg. 21 b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: C. 22 c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 24. 23 d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12.
24 E. Intermediate Reinforcement: 25 1. Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel. 26 2. PVC-Coated Ducts: 27 a. Exposed to Airstream: Match duct material. 28 b. Not Exposed to Airstream: Match duct material. 29 3. Stainless-Steel Ducts: 30 a. Exposed to Airstream: Match duct material. 31 b. Not Exposed to Airstream: Match duct material. 32 4. Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum.
33 F. Double-Wall Duct Interstitial Insulation: 34 1. Per ASHRAE Standard 189.1.
35 G. Elbow Configuration: 36 1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - 37 Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows." 38 a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 39 1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. 40 2) Mitered Type RE 4 without vanes. 41 b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 42 1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio. 43 2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes.
09/April/2018 23 31 13 - 17 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct 2 Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane 3 Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows." 4 c. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 5 1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. 6 2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes. 7 3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct 8 Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane 9 Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows." 10 2. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - 11 Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows." 12 a. Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. 13 b. Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes. 14 c. Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct 15 Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane 16 Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows." 17 3. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal 18 and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "Round Duct Elbows." 19 a. Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with 20 SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 3- 21 1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of direction have 22 proportionately fewer segments. 23 1) Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and three 24 segments for 90-degree elbow. 25 2) Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and four segments 26 for 90-degree elbow. 27 3) Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and five segments 28 for 90-degree elbow. 29 4) Radius-to Diameter Ratio: 1.5. 30 b. Round Elbows, 12 Inches and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated. 31 c. Round Elbows, 14 Inches and Larger in Diameter: Standing seam.
32 H. Branch Configuration: 33 1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - 34 Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-6, "Branch Connection." 35 a. Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry. 36 b. Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Spin in. 37 2. Round and Flat Oval: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - 38 Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical 39 Tees." Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct. 40 a. Velocity 1000 fpm (5 m/s) or Lower: 90-degree tap. 41 b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm (5 to 7.6 m/s): Conical tap. 42 c. Velocity 1500 fpm (7.6 m/s) or Higher: 45-degree lateral. 43
44 3.7 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE 45
09/April/2018 23 31 13 - 18 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO
ITEM NO. SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT AS INDICATED WITH BID WITH 23 31 01-01 Shop drawings of suspended ductwork Per construction schedule indicating point loads, along with applicable details keyed to layouts. 23 31 01-03 Product data for duct accessories. Per construction schedule
23 31 01-04 Product data for duct materials. Per construction schedule
1 END OF SECTION
09/April/2018 23 31 13 - 19 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 SECTION 23 34 00
2 HVAC FANS
4 PART 1 GENERAL
5 1.1 SUMMARY
6 A. Section includes low pressure, centrifugal belt or direct drive roof exhausters with spun 7 aluminum housing.
8 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
9 A. As specified on Equipment Schedules on Drawings.
10 1.3 SUBMITTALS
11 A. Refer to the Submittal Schedule at the end of Part 3 for a list of submittal requirements for 12 this Section.
13 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
14 A. Factory Tests: Factory test fan assembly in accordance with AMCA 210. Use current 15 adopted edition.
16 B. Performance Certification: Bear AMCA Certified Rating Seal for both air and sound 17 performance in accordance with AMCA 210, 300, and 301. Use current adopted edition.
18 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
19 A. Receive and inspect fans for damage and shortage at Project site.
20 B. Unload fans carefully to avoid damage.
21 C. Use padded or strap slings.
22 D. Lift fans only at points recommended by manufacturer.
23 E. Store fans in safe, dry location.
24 PART 2 PRODUCTS
25 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
26 A. ACME.
09/April/2018 23 34 00 - 1 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 B. Greenheck.
2 C. Loren Cook.
3 D. Penn.
4 E. Twin City.
5 F. Aerovent.
6 2.2 ROOF DOWNBLAST CENTRIFUGAL EXHAUST FAN
7 A. Fan Wheel: 8 1. Non-overloading aluminum wheels with backward inclined blades of single thickness 9 construction. 10 2. Securely fasten steel impeller hub to impeller backplate. 11 3. Dynamically balance and match with inlet orifice to provide operation with 12 minimum air noise at maximum efficiency.
13 B. Construction: 14 1. Hood, Housing, and Base: Heavy-gauge aluminum. 15 2. Wheel and Drive Assembly: Supported by structural galvanized steel frame.
16 C. Drive Assembly: 17 1. Located out of exhaust air stream. 18 2. Provide bearings for 150,000-hour life with grease fittings.
19 D. Exhaust fan with belt drive (refer to drawing schedule): 20 1. Drive Package: V-belt type, rated at 150 percent of motor nameplate horsepower. 21 Include V-belts, fixed pitch fan sheave, and variable pitch motor sheave sized for 22 10 percent plus or minus fan speed deviation from design point.
23 E. Motor: 24 1. General: NEMA Design B, ODP high efficiency, squirrel cage, induction type, 25 designed for continuous duty, across line starting, and 1.15 service factor. Provide 26 motors per Section 23 05 13 – Common Motor Requirements for HVAC 27 Equipment. 28 2. Provide with electrical characteristics as indicated on Equipment Schedule on 29 Drawings
30 F. Finish: 31 1. Thoroughly clean painted surfaces before painting. 32 2. Leave aluminum surfaces unpainted as standard finish unless specified otherwise. 33 3. Provide galvanized or epoxy coating on steel components.
09/April/2018 23 34 00 - 2 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 2.3 ACCESSORIES
2 A. Disconnect Switches: Factory mounted and wired, non-fused, weatherproof, for voltage 3 indicated.
4 B. Bird Screen: Welded, heavy-gauge, galvanized wire.
5 C. Backdraft Damper: Aluminum multi-blade gravity damper designed for quiet operation.
6 D. Prefabricated Roof Curbs: 7 1. One-piece roof curbs fabricated of heavy-gauge galvanized steel with raised cant 8 flanged base and welded seam construction. 9 2. Insulate with 1-1/2-inch-thick, 3-pound density fiberglass insulation 10 3. Minimum curb height of 12 inches, pitched to match roof slope to provide level 11 mounting surface for equipment. 12 4. Top with wood nailer strip for fastening roofing felts and securing equipment. 13 5. Provide air-dried, factory applied, synthetic plastic coating.
14 PART 3 EXECUTION
15 3.1 INSTALLATION
16 A. Comply with Section 23 00 15 - Basic Equipment Installation.
17 3.2 ATTACHMENTS
18 A. The following documents, attached immediately following End of Section, are part of this 19 Section: 20 1. Tag Data Sheet.
21 3.3 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE 22
ITEM NO. SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT AS INDICATED WITH BID 23 34 23-01 Product Data: Include: Per construction schedule • Fan designation number. • Type of fan. • Manufacturer’s name and model number. • Dimensions of fan, mounting attachments, specified accessories, and
09/April/2018 23 34 00 - 3 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO
ITEM NO. SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT AS INDICATED WITH BID locations of service connections. • Description of fabrication materials and specified accessories. • Weights and support locations with weight distribution at each support point. Descriptive data of motor including: • Manufacturer’s name and model number. • Nameplate horsepower. • Efficiency. • Service factor. • Type enclosure. • Speed (rpm). Electrical characteristics (V/Ph/Hz): • Fan performance data including: o Speed (rpm). o Static pressures (inches of water gauge). o Capacity (scfm). o Efficiency (%). o Brake horsepower. o Sound power level (dB re10 -12 watts) for each octave band. • Code compliances for fan. • Installation, operation, and repair instructions. 23 34 23-02 Shop Drawings: Include: Per construction schedule • Overall 2-line fan layout indicating available service areas and clearances. • Elevations and sections to indicate clearances, methods of support, and details of installation, including locations and sizes of openings.
09/April/2018 23 34 00 - 4 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO
ITEM NO. SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT AS INDICATED WITH BID 23 34 23-03 Operating and Maintenance Manual: With record documents Include: • Submittal Data: o Product Data. o Shop Drawings. • Spare Parts List: o Part description. o Part number. o Price. 1 2 3 END OF SECTION
09/April/2018 23 34 00 - 5 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 SECTION 23 36 00
2 VAV AIR TERMINAL UNITS
4 PART 1 GENERAL
5 1.1 SUMMARY
6 A. Section includes requirements necessary to furnish and install the following equipment: 7 1. Parallel fan-powered terminal units.
8 B. Related Sections: 9 1. Section 23 00 15 – Basic Equipment Installation. 10 2. Section 23 05 10 – Basic Materials and Methods 11 3. Section 23 09 00 – Building Automation System for HVAC
12 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
13 A. Equipment to perform as indicated on the equipment schedules on Drawings . 14
15 1.3 SUBMITTALS
16 A. Refer to the Submittal Schedule at the end of Part 3 for a list of submittal requirements for 17 this Section.
18 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
19 A. Certification: Test terminals in accordance with current adopted edition of AHRI 880 and 20 affix AHRI Seal.
21 1.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
22 A. Factory Leak Tests: 23 1. Heating Coil: Test each coil underwater with 200 psig air with no leaks allowed. 24 2. Air Control Damper: Test each unit per AHRI standards to comply with specified 25 leakage rates. 26 3. Housing: Test each unit per AHRI standards to comply with specified leakage rates.
27 B. Factory Functional Test: Test for functional performance, including controls, for two 28 randomly selected units of each type furnished. If test unit fails, test units.
29 C. Heating Coil Airflow Test: Test two randomly selected units of each type provided to 30 determine that velocity profile downstream of heating coil is no less than 50 percent of the 31 average velocity, regardless of damper position. If units fail, the product will be rejected.
09/April/2018 23 36 00 - 1 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
2 A. Protect machined and unpainted parts from damage by the elements with an application of 3 a strippable protective coating.
4 B. Delivery: Ship with firmly attached labels that indicate name of manufacturer and model 5 number.
6 C. Storage: 7 1. Protect from physical damage. 8 2. Store equipment indoors in a secure dry location off the ground in an orderly 9 manner that will allow easy inspection and inventory. 10 3. Leave factory shipping covers in place until unit is installed.
11 D. Handling: 12 1. Receive and inspect for damage and shortage at Project site. 13 2. Unload using methods which minimize risk of damage.
14 PART 2 PRODUCTS
15 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
16 A. Krueger.
17 B. Titus.
18 C. Trane.
19 D. Metalaire.
20 E. Nailor.
21 F. Daikin.
22 G. Johnson Controls.
23 2.2 GENERAL
24 A. Type: Provide pressure independent units.
25 B. Casing: 26 1. Description: Steel walled, internally insulated, complying with NFPA 90A and UL 27 181. 28 2. Exterior Wall: Minimum 22-gauge galvanized steel 29 3. Outlet Connections: Standard drive and slip joint; Straight flange.
09/April/2018 23 36 00 - 2 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 4. Primary Air Inlet Connection: Round or oval inlet suitable for standard duct sizes for 2 primary air. 3 5. Leakage Rate: 2 percent of maximum airflow rate at 3 inches WC. 4 6. Provide low temperature design as scheduled, suitable for supply air temperature of 5 40 degrees F without condensation on exposed surfaces with 80 degrees F dry bulb 6 and 60 percent relative humidity.
7 C. Insulation: 8 1. Comply with UL 181 and NFPA 90A. 9 2. Provide the following insulation on units as scheduled: 10 a. Matt faced, 1 inch thick (MF-1) with thermal resistance of R-4.0 Btu per hour- 11 square foot degree F, with edges sealed to prevent shedding.
12 D. Primary Air Volume Control Damper: 13 1. Type: Cylindrical, flat blade or slide valve type. 14 2. Leakage Rate: 1 percent of maximum airflow rate at 4 inches WC differential. 15 3. Bearings: Self-lubricating. 16 4. Maximum Required Differential Pressure: 0.18 inches WC. 17 5. Actuator: Provided by manufacturer with unit. 18 6. Position Indicator: Clearly mark on end of shaft. Removable markings are not 19 acceptable. 20 7. Failure Position: Open or closed as required by control sequence. 21 8. Maximum/Minimum Flow Settings: Factory set, field adjustable.
22 E. Velocity Sensor: 23 1. Type: Integral multiple port, averaging type. 24 2. Accuracy: Within 5 percent of rated airflow. 25 3. Range: Zero to 2,500 fpm inlet velocity. 26 4. Maximum Inlet Velocity: 2,200 fpm.
27 F. Acoustics: 28 1. Do not exceed sound rating levels for terminal units as scheduled. 29 2. Provide sound attenuators as integral part of terminal unit to achieve required sound 30 performance. 31 3. Certify sound performance per AHRI 885.
32 G. Electric Reheat Coil: 33 1. Type: Electric resistance-type heating element, factory installed in casing. 34 2. Coil Elements: Open construction, 80 percent nickel, 20 percent chromium. 35 3. Coil Element Isolators: Ceramic. 36 4. Regulatory Compliance: UL listed for zero clearance. 37 5. Control Panel and Wiring: NEMA 1 unit-mounted enclosure, UL listed with 38 removable or hinged cover and the following features: 39 a. Single-point wiring connection. 40 b. Built-in non-fused disconnect switch. 41 c. Control voltage transformer.
09/April/2018 23 36 00 - 3 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 d. Magnetic contactors for each stage connected to load side of fan. 2 e. Autoreset primary thermal cutout. 3 f. Manual reset secondary thermal cutouts. 4 g. Stainless steel terminal connectors with ceramic or phenolic insulators. 5 h. Terminal strip for external control wiring connections. 6 i. Airflow switch interlocked with manual reset thermal cutout.
7 H. Temperature Controls: 8 1. Type: Factory-mounted, pressure-independent, DDC controls with operating 9 sequences as described in Section 23 09 90 – MEP Sequence of Operation. 10 2. Direct-digital controls include the following: 11 a. Application-specific controller. 12 b. Integral microelectronic flow sensor. 13 c. Bidirectional synchronous electric damper operator. 14 d. Communication bus. 15 e. Wall or ceiling suspension-mounted temperature sensor.
16 I. Fan Assemblies: include the following: 17 1. Fan: Forward-curved, dynamically balanced, centrifugal fan wheel. 18 2. Motor: Energy-efficient, PSC type, with integral overload protection, and 19 permanently lubricated bearings, designed for use with SCR for fan speed 20 adjustment. 21 3. Reverse Rotation Prevention: Provide antibackward rotation design or backdraft 22 damper. 23 4. Vibration Isolation: Spring steel isolators and fan discharge isolation between scroll 24 and housing. 25 5. Fan Speed Controller: Manual electronic SCR, with provisions to prevent operation 26 in a stall mode.
27 2.3 FAN-POWERED AIR TERMINAL UNITS
28 A. Parallel Fan-Powered Air Terminal Unit (PFP): 29 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: 30 a. Price 31 b. Titus 32 c. Trane 33 d. Krueger 34 e. Metalaire 35 f. Nailer 36 2. Description – Variable Primary, Intermittent, and Variable Recirculation Air Unit: 37 Complete with the following: 38 a. Multispeed fan and motor drive assembly arranged for parallel flow with the 39 primary air. 40 b. Modulating primary air damper assembly. 41 c. Insulated steel casing as scheduled. 42 d. Control and electrical power wiring.
09/April/2018 23 36 00 - 4 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 e. Additional features as scheduled.
2 PART 3 EXECUTION
3 3.1 INSPECTION
4 A. Inspect equipment for damage upon delivery and immediately report damage to the 5 Owner. Replace or repair damage to the satisfaction of the Owner.
6 3.2 INSTALLATION
7 A. Install in accordance with Section 23 00 15 – Basic Equipment Installation.
8 B. Supports: 9 1. Static Units: Hang with sheet metal straps at four corners with additional supports if 10 required by manufacturer. 11 2. Fan-Powered Units: Hang with threaded rods at four corners with rubber in shear 12 isolators.
13 C. Access: 14 1. Removable Ceiling: Locate unit in accessible location. 15 Nonremovable Ceiling: Provide access door through ceiling and locate unit 16 in accessible location.
17 D. Duct Connections: 18 1. Inlet: Provide minimum of four duct diameters straight duct length with rigid duct 19 connection. Flexible duct connections are not acceptable. 20 2. Discharge: Provide factory-supplied sound attenuation section or minimum of 5 feet 21 of straight duct lined with acoustical duct liner as specified in Section 23 07 00 – 22 HVAC Insulation.
23 3.3 CLEANING
24 A. Surfaces: Clean surfaces prior to startup.
25 B. Openings: Provide temporary closure panels for openings prior to final connections of 26 ductwork.
27 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
28 A. Functional Tests: Conduct on each air terminal unit, assisted by the manufacturer’s 29 representative as follows: 30 1. Verify maximum and minimum airflows. 31 2. Verify response to local temperature control sensor. 32 3. Verify noise levels.
09/April/2018 23 36 00 - 5 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 B. Performance Tests: 2 1. Conduct on randomly selected units, assisted by manufacturer’s representative. 3 2. Perform under actual operating conditions or simulated operating conditions 4 approved by the Owner.
5 3.5 MANUFACTURER’S SERVICES
6 A. Provide a manufacturer’s service representative at the jobsite to perform specified 7 functions. Include the following minimum service requirements in the Bid. Do not include 8 travel time. 9 1. Two man-days for training of Owner’s personnel for startup, operation, and 10 maintenance. 11 2. Two man-days for installation assistance, functional testing, and certification of the 12 installation. 13 3. Two man-days for startup assistance.
14 3.6 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE 15
ITEM NO. SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT AS INDICATED WITH BID 23 36 00-01 Shop drawings that include specifications, Per construction schedule catalog cuts, and descriptive literature. Include, but not limit to, the following: 1. Type of unit. 2. Manufacturer’s make and model 3. Overall two-line unit layout, indicating dimensions of unit, locations and sizes of openings, mounting attachments, specified accessories, service areas and clearance requirements, and locations of service connections. 4. Noise criteria (NC) sound data. 5. Velocity data. 6. Air pressure drop. 7. Inlet and outlet connection size (in.). 8. AHRI-certified coil performance data to include cfm, air and water inlet and discharge temperatures at design conditions, gpm, water pressure drop, and water connection sizes.
09/April/2018 23 36 00 - 6 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO
ITEM NO. SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT AS INDICATED WITH BID 23 36 00-02 Description of fabrication materials for unit Per construction schedule including: • Casing. • Insulation. • Fans. • Heating coils. • Dampers. • Shipping and operating weights of unit. Fan performance curves indicating: • Air quantity. • Static pressure. • Bhp. • Efficiency. • Tip speed. • Rpm. • Sound power level (dB re10 -12 watts) for each octave band. Description of unit motor including: • Manufacturer's name and model number. • Nameplate horsepower. • Efficiency (%). • Service factor. • Type enclosure. • Speed (rpm). • Electrical characteristics (kW/V/Ph/Hz). Heating coil performance data indicating: • Air quantity. • Rows. • Fin spacing.
09/April/2018 23 36 00 - 7 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO
ITEM NO. SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT AS INDICATED WITH BID • Air side pressure drop. • Entering and leaving air db temperature. • Entering and leaving hot water temperatures, water quantity, and water side pressure drop.
23 36 00-03 Operating and Maintenance Manual: With operations and Include: maintenance manuals • Submittal Data: o Product Data. o Shop Drawings. • Installation, operation, and repair instructions. • Spare Parts List: o Part description. o Part number. o Price.
1 END OF SECTION
09/April/2018 23 36 00 - 8 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 SECTION 23 37 13
2 DIFFUSERS, GRILLES, AND REGISTERS 6
7 PART 1 GENERAL
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9 A. Section Includes: 10 1. Diffusers. 11 2. Grilles. 12 3. Registers. 13 4. Security Registers 14 5. Security Grilles 15 6. Spot Diffusers
16 1.2 SUBMITTALS
17 A. Refer to the Submittal Schedule at the end of Part 3 for a list of submittal requirements for 18 this Section.
19 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
20 A. Test and rate performance of air outlets and inlets in accordance with the latest version of 21 ASHRAE 70, Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets.
22 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
23 A. Delivery: Ship with firmly attached labels that indicate name of manufacturer and model 24 number.
25 B. Storage: 26 1. Store materials indoors in a secure dry area off the ground in a manner allowing easy 27 inspection and inventory. 28 2. Protect from physical damage. 29 3. Leave factory shipping covers in place until item is installed.
30 C. Handling: 31 1. Receive and inspect for damage and shortage at Project site. 32 2. Unload using methods which minimize risk of damage.
09/April/2018 23 37 13 - 1 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2 2.1 GENERAL
3 A. Air Motion Performance: Select devices based on air being introduced into the room at 25 4 degrees F temperature differential and being diffused at the 5-foot level to a velocity not 5 greater than 50 fpm, with a temperature uniformity of not greater than 1.5 degrees F.
6 B. Acoustical Performance: Select devices that do not exceed the criteria listed in the table 7 below: Type of Area NC Criteria Office Areas Boardroom 30 Executive Offices 30 Conference Rooms 30 Private Offices 35 Reception Rooms 40 General Open Offices 40 Halls/Corridors 45 Toilet Rooms 50 Computer Equipment Rooms 55 Lobbies 45
8
9 C. When devices are specified to include a damper for volume adjustment, achieve acoustical 10 performance with the damper 50 percent closed.
11 D. Pattern Designation: The pattern designation indicates the core style for diffusers with 12 optional cores that determine pattern of throw. The directions of throw may not be 13 indicated for diffusers with field-adjustable pattern control. 14 1. Throw arrows indicate the directions of throw if other than four-way. 15 2. Provide diffusers with the pattern and directions of throw indicated. When the 16 pattern designation is left blank and direction-of-throw arrows are absent provide the 17 pattern as four-way, except for slot and linear diffusers, which are be two-way, with 18 equal volume in each direction.
19 2.2 CEILING DIFFUSERS, GRILLES, AND REGISTERS
20 A. Louvered-Face Diffuser (Type A and B): 21 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: 22 a. Price Model SDC or approved equal.
09/April/2018 23 37 13 - 2 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 b. Titus. 2 c. Carnes. 3 d. Metalaire. 4 2. Features: Welded steel construction, square or rectangular louvered face, with 5 removable fixed core section with lateral air diffusing vanes. 6 3. Frame: Nominal 24-inch by 24-inch face (Type A) with frame for lay-in T-bar 7 mounting, Nominal 12-inch by 12-inch face (Type B) with frame for lay-in T-bar 8 mounting, or Flanged frame for surface mounting, face size as required, with 9 continuous sponge rubber gasket at face flange. 10 4. Finish: Baked white enamel.
11 B. Eggcrate Return/Exhaust Grille (Type C and D): 12 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: 13 a. Price Model 81 or approved equal 14 b. Titus. 15 2. Features: Square aluminum eggcrate construction, fixed 1/2-inch by 1/2-inch by 16 1/2-inch grid core. 17 3. Frame: Channel frame for 24-inch by 24-inch (Type C) lay-in T-bar mounting 18 without exposed flange; Channel frame for 12-inch by 12-inch (Type D) lay-in T-bar 19 mounting without exposed flange. 20 4. Finish: Baked-on white enamel.
21 2.3 SECURITY DIFFUSERS, AND GRILLES
22 A. Maximum and Suicide Deterrent Grilles (Type E) 23 1. Manufacturers: 24 a. Price Model MSPG or approved equal. 25 b. Krueger. 26 c. Nailor Industries, Inc. 27 d. Titus. 28 e. Tuttle and Bailey. 29 2. Security Level: Maximum and suicide deterrent. 30 3. Material: heavy gauge steel 31 4. Material Thickness: 0.19 inch 32 5. Finish: The grille finish shall be white. 33 6. Face Arrangement: 34 a. Shape: Square or Rectangular 35 b. Design: Perforated 36 c. Frame: Yes 37 d. Deflection: Zero degrees. 38 e. Core: None. 39 f. 3/16-inch thick, perforated faceplate with 5/16 inch diameter holes spaced 40 7/16 inch o.c., staggered at 60 degrees. 41 7. Wall sleeve: 3/16-inch thick hot rolled steel, length as required, stitch welded to face 42 and along the entire length of all sleeve seams.
09/April/2018 23 37 13 - 3 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 8. Mounting: Grille to include 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 3/16 inch steel angle mill finished 2 iron frame shipped loose for field welding to grille sleeve at back of wall penetration.
3 B. Minimum Security Diffuser (Type F) 4 1. Manufacturers: 5 a. Price Model MSD or approved equal 6 b. Krueger. 7 c. Nailor Industries, Inc. 8 d. Titus. 9 e. Tuttle and Bailey. 10 2. Security Level: Minimum security diffuser. 11 3. Material: heavy gauge steel. 12 4. Finish: The grille finish shall be white. 13 5. Face Arrangement: 14 a. Shape: Square. 15 b. Design: 12 gauge hot rolled steel, 13/16-inch square holes on 1-in centers with 16 tamper-proof srews. 17 c. Inner Core assembly consisting of fixed deflection louvers with 1-, 2-, 3-, or 4- 18 way horizontal discharge patterns. The inner core shall be removable in field 19 without tools for easy installation, cleaning, and damper adjustment. 20 6. Damper Operation: Face operated. 21 7. Damper Type: Adjustable opposed blade.
22 C. Minimum Security Exhaust Grille (Type G) 23 1. Manufacturers: 24 a. Price Model MSLP or approved equal. 25 b. Krueger. 26 c. Nailor Industries, Inc. 27 d. Titus. 28 e. Tuttle and Bailey. 29 2. Security Level: Minimum security grille. 30 3. Material: heavy gauge steel. 31 4. Finish: White baked enamel. 32 5. Face Arrangement: 33 a. Shape: Square. 34 b. Design: 12 gauge steel lattice face with 13/16-inch square holes on 1-inch 35 centers. Unit to be mounted to exhaust/transfer duct flange and ceiling using 36 tamper proof security screws.
37 2.4 LINEAR AND PLENUM SLOT DIFFUSERS
38 A. Linear Diffuser (Type M and N): 39 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: 40 a. Price Model SDR or approved equal. 41 b. Carnes. 42 c. Titus.
09/April/2018 23 37 13 - 4 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 2. Features: Extruded aluminum construction with concealed adjustable deflectors for 2 full 180-degree pattern control with two-way capability. One-inch-wide slots number 3 as indicated under pattern designation on Drawings. 4 3. Frame and Mounting: 1-1/8-inch flanged frame, concealed fasteners. 5 4. Finish: Baked off-white enamel with black pattern controllers. 6 5. Accessories: Coated steel supply plenum with 1/2-inch-thick internal insulation, neck 7 blankoffs and mitered corners where shown on the Drawings.
8 B. Plenum Slot Diffuser (Type H1, and H2): 9 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: 10 a. Price Model TBDI or approved equal 11 b. Titus. 12 c. Krueger. 13 2. Features: T-bar-mounted slot diffuser with plenum, coated steel construction shells, 14 full flow adjustable gasket-edged pattern control blades for one or two-way throw; 15 two 1-inch-wide slots. Extruded aluminum center and pattern controllers. Heavy 16 gauge coated steel plenum. 17 3. Performance: Maximum 0.18-inch total static pressure loss at design airflow. 18 4. Frame: T-bar-mounted, nominal 4-foot length (Type H1) or nominal 2-foot length 19 (Type H2); center and side tees furnished under ceiling work. For surface mount 20 installations, provide extruded aluminum plaster frame. 21 5. Finish: Black pattern controllers and exposed surfaces, white optional T-bars when 22 factory furnished, prime coated exposed surfaces for field painting. 23 6. Accessories: Internal insulation, T-bar mounting clips on two sides, quadrant 24 operated volume damper in inlet collar.
25 C. Plenum Slot Diffuser (Type H3): 26 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: 27 a. Price Model TBDI or approved equal 28 b. Titus. 29 c. Krueger. 30 2. Features: T-bar-mounted slot diffuser with plenum, coated steel construction shells, 31 full flow adjustable gasket-edged pattern control blades for one or two-way throw; 32 one 1-inch-wide slots. Extruded aluminum center and pattern controllers. Heavy 33 gauge coated steel plenum. 34 3. Performance: Maximum 0.18-inch total static pressure loss at design airflow. 35 4. Frame: T-bar-mounted, nominal 4-foot length; center and side tees furnished under 36 ceiling work. For surface mount installations, provide extruded aluminum plaster 37 frame. 38 5. Finish: Black pattern controllers and exposed surfaces, white optional T-bars when 39 factory furnished, prime coated exposed surfaces for field painting. 40 6. Accessories: Internal insulation, T-bar mounting clips on two sides, quadrant 41 operated volume damper in inlet collar.
42 D. Plenum Slot Exhaust (Type I1 and I2): 43 1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
09/April/2018 23 37 13 - 5 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 a. Price Model TBRI or approved equal. 2 b. Titus. 3 c. Krueger. 4 2. Features: T-bar-mounted return diffuser/plenum, slotted side outlet. Two 1-inch- 5 wide slots. 6 3. Frame: T-bar-mounted, nominal 4-foot (Type I1) or 2-foot (Type I2) length. Center 7 and side tees furnished under ceiling work. For surface mount installations, provide 8 extruded aluminum plaster frame. 9 4. Finish: Black pattern controllers and exposed surfaces, white optional T-bars when 10 factory furnished,prime coated exposed surfaces for field painting. 11 5. Accessories: 1/2-inch internal insulation, T-bar mounting clips on two sides.
12 2.5 SIDEWALL AND DUCT-MOUNTED GRILLES AND REGISTERS
13 A. Sidewall Supply Grille (Type J): 14 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: 15 a. Price Model 22 series or approved equal 16 b. Krueger 17 c. Titus 18 2. Features: Double-deflection fully adjustable airfoil shaped deflection blades spaced 19 3/4" on center. The front set of blades shall run parallel to the long dimension of the 20 grille. Both blades and border shall be of heavy extruded aluminum construction. 21 3. Frame: 3/8” flat border mounting frame. 22 4. Finish: Prime coat for field painting. 23 5. Accessories: Opposed-blade volume damper.
24 B. Sidewall Return/Exhaust/Transfer Grille (Type L): 25 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: 26 a. Price Model 530 or approved equal 27 b. Carnes. 28 c. Krueger. 29 d. Titus. 30 2. Features: Single-deflection fixed steel grille with horizontal face bars on 3/4-inch 31 centers set at 45 degrees. 32 3. Frame: 1-1/4-inch border flange with sponge rubber gasket. 33 4. Finish: Prime coat for field painting. 34 5. Accessories: Opposed-blade volume damper.
35 2.6 SURFACE MOUNTED ALUMINUM SPOT DIFFUSERS
36 A. Surface Mount Supply Spot Diffuser (Type O): 37 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: 38 a. TROX Technik or Approved equal 39 2. Features: 40 a. Wall recessed type 41 b. Double felt flange body seal to prevent air leakage
09/April/2018 23 37 13 - 6 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 c. Precision adjustable aluminum air flow exit plat 2 d. Ideal venture exit profile for quiet airflow 3 e. Heavy gage solid aluminum rotable body 4 f. Closed cell neoprene felt mounting gasket 5 g. Air flow adjustment Knob 6 h. 3-dimensional rotational direction with rotational angle up to 33° to 42° in all 7 direction from its center axis. 8 3. Finish: lightweight, corrosion resistant finish; Coordinate powder coating and color 9 with Architect. 10
11 PART 3 EXECUTION
12 3.1 INSPECTION
13 A. Inspect equipment for damage upon delivery, and immediately report damage to the 14 Owner. Repair damaged equipment to like-new condition or replace if damaged beyond 15 repair.
16 3.2 INSTALLATION
17 A. General Considerations: 18 1. Install items in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 19 2. Install diffusers, grilles, and registers tight on their respective mounting surfaces. 20 Install plumb and true with room dimensions, accurately centered on projections, 21 recesses, windows, ceiling grids, light fixtures, or doors. Provide appropriate frames 22 wherever necessary to adapt to mounting surface. 23 3. Make airtight connections to ductwork. 24 4. Install extractors on duct-mounted diffusers, behind duct-mounted supply grilles, 25 and where shown. Turning vanes are acceptable if the condition is the last outlet on 26 a branch. 27 5. Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black.
28 B. Special Considerations for Ceiling Diffusers: 29 1. Where flexible ductwork is used to make connections to ceiling diffusers, install a 30 minimum of three duct diameters of straight ductwork without bends immediately 31 upstream of the diffuser to provide uniform air distribution at the inlet collar. 32 2. If this cannot be achieved, install an insulated sheet metal, 90-degree inlet box with 33 turning vanes on the diffuser inlet. 34 3. Turning vanes are not required if modular core diffusers are supplied.
35 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
36 A. Remove debris; vacuum dust from installed materials. Remove by manufacturer's 37 recommended method.
09/April/2018 23 37 13 - 7 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 B. Set pattern control for directions of throw as shown on Drawings and set volume dampers 2 to wide-open position prior to air balancing taking place.
3 3.4 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE 4
ITEM NO. SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT AS INDICATED WITH BID 23 37 13 -01 Shop drawings. Per construction schedule
23 37 13 -02 Complete product specifications, including Per construction schedule catalog cut sheets, make and model, dimensions, accessories, throw patterns, and finishes. 23 37 13 -03 NC sound data, velocity data, and static Per construction schedule pressure drop information.
5 END OF SECTION
09/April/2018 23 37 13 - 8 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 SECTION 23 41 00
2 AIR FILTERS, HVAC
6 PART 1 GENERAL
7 1.1 SUMMARY
8 A. Section includes requirements to furnish and install, complete, air filters for HVAC 9 application with frames, mounting hardware, and accessories.
10 B. Related Sections: 11 1. Section 23 00 15 – Basic Equipment Installation. 12 2. Section 23 31 13 – Metal HVAC Ductwork and Accessories. 13 3. Section 23 74 13 – Central Station Air Handling Units 14 4. Section 23 82 19 – Fan Coil Units 15 5. Section 23 05 10 – Basic Materials and Methods
16 1.2 REFERENCES
17 A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: ASME AG-1: Code on Nuclear Air and Gas 18 Treatment.
19 B. Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology: IES-RP-CC-001.5: HEPA and 20 ULPA Filters.
21 C. Military Standards: MIL-STD-282 (W/ Notices 1 Through 4): Filter Units, Protective 22 Clothing, Gas-Mask Components and Related Products: Performance Test Methods.
23 D. Underwriters Laboratories : UL 586: High-Efficiency, Particulate, Air Filter Units.
24 1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
25 A. Unless otherwise specified herein, provide filters that meet the requirements of NFPA 90A 26 Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
27 B. Test efficiencies according to the latest edition of ASHRAE 52.1 Gravimetric and Dust- 28 Spot Procedures for Testing Air-Cleaning Devices Used in General Ventilation for 29 Removing Particulate Matter.
30 C. Provide filters, frames, and accessories for components to be mounted in air handlers as 31 specified in Section 23 74 13 – Central Station Air Handling Units and 23 82 19 – Fan Coil 32 Units.
09/April/2018 23 41 00 - 1 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 D. Provide filters, frames, and accessories as indicated on the datasheets included at the end 2 of this section to be mounted in ductwork constructed according to Section 23 31 01 – 3 Metal HVAC Ductwork and Accessories.
4 1.4 SUBMITTALS
5 A. Refer to the Submittal Schedule at the end of Part 3 for a list of submittal requirements for 6 this Section.
7 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
8 A. Receive and inspect filters and filter assemblies for damage and shortage at Project site.
9 B. Unload filters and filter assemblies carefully to avoid damage.
10 C. Store in safe, dry location in original shipping containers with labels and seals intact.
11 PART 2 PRODUCTS
12 2.1 FRAMED DISPOSABLE INDUSTRIAL (FDI) FILTERS
13 A. Acceptable Manufacturer: 14 1. AAF International: 5700 Series.
15 B. Description: 16 1. Disposable viscous-coated glass fiber filter media mounted in a fiberboard casing 17 between perforated metal grids with a stiffener bar positioned top to bottom to 18 provide additional support. 19 2. Provide filters suitable for mounting in a frame or side-access housing as required by 20 the application.
21 C. Efficiency: 80 to 85 percent when rated in accordance with ASHRAE Test Standard 52.1.
22 D. Performance: 23 1. Provide filters rated for operation under the following conditions: Filter Initial Pressure Drop (Inch Thickness Rated Velocity WC) 2 inches 500 fpm 0.25 24 2. Provide filters capable of operating up to a final (changeout) resistance of 0.5 inch 25 WC for 2-inch thickness without damaging the filter.
26 2.2 EXTENDED SURFACE MINIPLEAT (ESM) FILTERS
27 A. Acceptable Manufacturer: 28 1. AAF International: Varicel II.
09/April/2018 23 41 00 - 2 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 2. Camfil Farr: Opti-Pac.
2 B. Description: Extended surface, self-supporting, 4-inch minipleat filters meeting UL Class 2 3 requirements with holding frames and hardware.
4 C. Filter Media: Ultrathin dual-density fiberglass paper mat with a water-repellent binder, 5 pleated and structurally bonded one pleat to the other, without the use of metal separators 6 or support grids.
7 D. Media Frame: Moisture-resistant double-wall beverage board frame with the media pack 8 bonded inside the frame on four sides to prevent leaks and increase rigidity. Provide 9 diagonal support grids bonded to each pleat tip on both the air entering and leaving sides 10 for added reinforcement.
11 E. Efficiency: Provide filters with an average efficiency as scheduled based on ASHRAE Test 12 Standard 52.1.
13 F. Performance: 14 1. Provide filters capable of maintaining rated efficiencies under the following 15 conditions: Initial Pressure Drop Average Efficiency Rated Velocity (Inch WC) 80 to 85 500 fpm 0.59 16 2. Provide filters capable of operating up to a final (changeout) resistance of 1.5 inches 17 WC without damaging the filter.
18 G. Holding Frames: 16-gauge aluminized steel holding frames with sealed corners, closed-cell 19 neoprene gasketing, and frame depth and fasteners appropriate for the filters to be 20 installed.
21 2.3 IDENTIFICATION
22 A. Include filter assembly’s designation number on manufacturer’s permanent nameplate.
23 2.4 FILTER GAUGES
24 A. Manometer Type: 25 1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Dwyer Mark II. 26 2. Description: Inclined-vertical draft gauges with glass level vials, front zero 27 adjustment, fill plugs, and pointer flags. 28 3. Accessories: Static pressure tips, aluminum tubing, zeroing means, and extra oil. 29 4. Range: Select gauges with the minimum ranges to span the maximum filter final 30 pressured drop recommended by the manufacturer.
31 B. Dial Type: 32 1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Dwyer 2000 Series Magnehelic.
09/April/2018 23 41 00 - 3 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 2. Description: Diaphragm-actuated, direct-reading gauge with pointer zero adjustment 2 and adjustable signal flag. 3 3. Accessories: Mounting panel with screws, static pressure tips, aluminum tubing, and 4 vent valves. 5 4. Ranges: Select gauges with the minimum ranges to span the maximum filter final 6 pressure drop recommended by the manufacturer.
7 PART 3 EXECUTION
8 3.1 INSTALLATION
9 A. Comply with Section 23 00 15 – Basic Equipment Installation.
10 B. Provide 1-inch flashing on each side of filter frame assembly.
11 C. Brace banks constructed of more than 3 frames high with vertical stiffeners, riveted, or 12 bolted between frames on 48-inch centers with caulk around perimeter of assembled 13 frames.
14 D. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
15 E. Install in ducts and casings in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction 16 Standards, Metal and Flexible.
17 F. Prevent passage of unfiltered air around filters with felt, rubber, or neoprene gaskets.
18 G. Do not operate fan system until filters (temporary or permanent) are in place. Replace 19 temporary filters used during construction.
20 3.2 INSTALLATION, AUTOMATIC RENEWABLE MEDIA FILTER
21 A. Support filter assembly on a structural steel frame.
22 B. Provide walkable surface in ductwork upstream to support maintenance personnel.
23 3.3 INSTALLATION, FILTER GAUGES
24 A. Install filter gauges across each filter bank in accordance with the manufacturer’s printed 25 installation instructions with static pressure taps on entering and leaving side of filter bank.
26 B. Mount gauges, secure tubing with metal fasteners, level gauges, fill with oil, zero gauges, 27 and adjust flags.
28 3.4 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE 29
09/April/2018 23 41 00 - 4 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO
ITEM NO. SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT AS INDICATED WITH BID 23 41 00-01 Complete certified performance data at Per construction schedule design conditions, including cfm and air pressure drop. 23 41 00-02 Product data including: Per construction schedule • Filter designation number. • Type of filter. • Manufacturer’s name and model number. • Dimensions of filter, mounting attachments, and specified accessories. • Description of fabrication materials for filter assembly. Filter data including: • Face area. • Initial and recommended final pressure drops. • Efficiency. 23 41 00-03 Shop drawings including: Per construction schedule • Overall 2-line filter layout, indicating available service areas and clearance requirements. • Elevations and sections to show clearances, methods of support, and details of installation. 23 41 00-04 Product literature and a schedule with Prior to delivery quantity and sizes. 23 41 00-05 Product installation details. Prior to delivery
23 41 00-06 Installation and repair instructions. With operations and maintenance manuals
1 END OF SECTION
09/April/2018 23 41 00 - 5 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO
1 SECTION 23 64 26
2 AIR-COOLED, ROTARY-SCREW WATER CHILLERS
3 PART 1 - GENERAL
4 1.1 SUMMARY
5 A. Section Includes: 6 1. Packaged, air-cooled chillers.
7 B. Related Documents 8 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and 9 Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this 10 Section.
11 1.2 SUBMITTALS
12 A. Refer to the Submittal Schedule at the end of Part 3 for a list of submittal requirements for 13 this Section.
14 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
15 A. AHRI Certification: Certify chiller according to AHRI 590 certification program(s).
16 B. AHRI Rating: Rate chiller performance according to requirements in AHRI 550/590.
17 C. ASHRAE Compliance: 18 1. ASHRAE 15 for safety code for mechanical refrigeration. 19 2. ASHRAE 147 for refrigerant leaks, recovery, and handling and storage requirements.
20 D. ASHRAE/IES Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1.
21 E. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label chiller to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure 22 Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1, and include an ASME U-stamp and nameplate 23 certifying compliance.
24 F. Comply with NFPA 70.
25 G. Comply with requirements of UL and UL Canada and include label by a qualified testing 26 agency showing compliance.
27 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
28 A. Ship each chiller with a full charge of refrigerant. Charge each chiller with nitrogen if 29 refrigerant is shipped in containers separate from chiller.
09/April/2018 23 64 26 - 1 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO
1 B. Ship each oil-lubricated chiller with a full charge of oil.
2 C. Package chiller for export shipping in totally enclosed crate and bagging.
3 1.5 WARRANTY
4 A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of chillers that fail 5 in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 6 1. Extended warranties include, but are not limited to, the following: 7 a. Complete chiller including refrigerant and oil charge. 8 b. Complete compressor and drive assembly including refrigerant and oil charge. 9 c. Refrigerant and oil charge. 10 d. Parts and labor. 11 e. Loss of refrigerant charge for any reason. 12 f. Compressor only warranty: parts only for 5 years from date of Substantial 13 Completion.
14 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
15 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
16 A. Site Altitude: Chiller shall be suitable for altitude in which installed without affecting 17 performance indicated. Make adjustments to affected chiller components to account for 18 site altitude.
19 2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
20 A. Carrier Corporation
21 B. The Trane Company.
22 C. York International Corporation.
23 2.3 Description: Factory-assembled and run-tested chiller complete with base and frame, 24 condenser casing, compressors, compressor motors and motor controllers, evaporator, 25 condenser coils, condenser fans and motors, electrical power, controls, and accessories.
26 2.4 Cabinet: 27 1. Base: Galvanized-steel base extending the perimeter of chiller. Secure frame, 28 compressors, and evaporator to base to provide a single-piece unit. 29 2. Frame: Rigid galvanized-steel frame secured to base and designed to support cabinet, 30 condenser, control panel, and other chiller components not directly supported by 31 base. 32 3. Casing: Galvanized steel. 33 4. Finish: Coat base, frame, and casing with a corrosion-resistant coating capable of 34 withstanding a 1000-hour salt-spray test according to ASTM B 117. 35 5. Sound-reduction package designed to reduce sound level without affecting 36 performance and consisting of the following:
09/April/2018 23 64 26 - 2 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO
1 a. Acoustic enclosure around compressors. 2 b. Reduced-speed fans with acoustic treatment. 3 6. Security Package: Provide removable louvered panels with fasteners for additional 4 protection of compressors, evaporator, and condenser coils without inhibiting 5 service access. Finish to match cabinet.
6 2.5 Compressors: 7 1. Description: Positive displacement, hermetically sealed. 8 2. Casing: Cast iron, precision machined for minimum clearance about periphery of 9 rotors. 10 3. Rotors: Manufacturer's standard one- or two-rotor design. 11 4. Each compressor provided with suction and discharge shutoff valves, crankcase oil 12 heater, and suction strainer.
13 2.6 Service: Easily accessible for inspection and service.
14 2.7 Capacity Control: On-off compressor cycling and modulating slide-valve assembly or port 15 unloaders combined with hot-gas bypass, if necessary, to achieve performance indicated. 16 1. Maintain stable operation throughout range of operation. Configure to achieve most 17 energy-efficient operation possible. 18 2. Operating Range: From 100 to 15 percent of design capacity. 19 3. Condenser-Air Unloading Requirements over Operating Range: Constant-design, 20 entering condenser-air temperature. 21 4. For units equipped with a variable-frequency controller, capacity control shall be 22 both "valveless" and "stepless," requiring no slide valve or capacity-control valve(s) 23 to operate at reduced capacity.
24 2.8 Oil Lubrication System: Consisting of pump if required, filtration, heater, cooler, factory- 25 wired power connection, and controls. 26 1. Provide lubrication to bearings, gears, and other rotating surfaces at all operating, 27 startup, shutdown, and standby conditions including power failure. 28 2. Thermostatically controlled oil heater properly sized to remove refrigerant from oil. 29 3. Factory-installed and pressure-tested piping with isolation valves and accessories. 30 4. Oil compatible with refrigerant and chiller components. 31 5. Positive visual indication of oil level.
32 2.9 Vibration Control: 33 1. Vibration Balance: Balance chiller compressors and drive assemblies to provide a 34 precision balance that is free of noticeable vibration over the entire operating range. 35 c. Overspeed Test: 25 percent above design operating speed. 36 2. Isolation: Mount individual compressors on vibration isolators.
37 2.10 Compressor Motors: 38 1. Hermetically sealed and cooled by refrigerant suction gas. 39 2. High-torque, induction type with inherent thermal-overload protection on each 40 phase.
09/April/2018 23 64 26 - 3 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO
1 2.11 Compressor Motor Controllers: 2 1. Across the Line: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, full voltage, nonreversing. 3 2. Star-Delta, Reduced-Voltage Controller: NEMA ICS 2, closed transition. 4 3. Solid-state controller. 5 4. Variable-Frequency Controller: 6 a. Motor controller shall be factory mounted and wired on the chiller to provide a 7 single-point, field-power termination to the chiller and its auxiliaries. 8 b. Description: NEMA ICS 2; listed and labeled as a complete unit and arranged 9 to provide variable speed by adjusting output voltage and frequency. 10 c. Enclosure: Unit mounted, NEMA 250, Type 3R, with hinged full-front access 11 door with lock and key. 12 d. Integral Disconnecting Means: Door-interlocked, UL 489, instantaneous-trip 13 circuit breaker with lockable handle. Minimum withstand rating shall be as 14 required by electrical power distribution system, but not less than 42,000 A. 15 e. Technology: Pulse-width-modulated (PWM) output suitable for constant or 16 variable torque loads. 17 f. Motor current at start shall not exceed the rated load amperes, providing no 18 electrical inrush.
19 2.12 Refrigerant Circuits: 20 1. Refrigerant: Type as indicated on Drawings. 21 2. Refrigerant Type: R-134a. Classified as Safety Group A1 according to ASHRAE 34. 22 3. Refrigerant Compatibility: Chiller parts exposed to refrigerants shall be fully 23 compatible with refrigerants, and pressure components shall be rated for refrigerant 24 pressures. 25 4. Refrigerant Circuit: Each shall include a thermal- or electronic-expansion valve, 26 refrigerant charging connections, a hot-gas muffler, compressor suction and 27 discharge shutoff valves, a liquid-line shutoff valve, a replaceable-core filter-dryer, a 28 sight glass with moisture indicator, a liquid-line solenoid valve, and an insulated 29 suction line. 30 5. Pressure Relief Device: 31 a. Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 15 and in applicable portions of 32 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1. 33 b. ASME-rated, spring-loaded pressure relief valve; single- or multiple-reseating 34 type. 35
36 2.13 Evaporator: 37 1. Description: Shell-and-tube design. 38 a. Direct-expansion type with fluid flowing through the shell, and refrigerant 39 flowing through the tubes within the shell. 40 b. Flooded type with fluid flowing through tubes and refrigerant flowing around 41 tubes within the shell. 42 2. Code Compliance: Tested and stamped according to ASME Boiler and Pressure 43 Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1. 44 3. Shell Material: Carbon steel. 45 4. Shell Heads: Removable carbon-steel heads located at each end of the tube bundle.
09/April/2018 23 64 26 - 4 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO
1 5. Fluid Nozzles: Terminated with mechanical-coupling (grooved) end connections for 2 connection to field piping. 3 6. Tube Construction: Individually replaceable copper tubes with enhanced fin design, 4 expanded into tube sheets. 5 7. Heater: Factory-installed and -wired electric heater with integral controls designed to 6 protect the evaporator to minus 20 deg F. 7 8. Remote Mounting: Designed for remote field mounting where indicated. Provide kit 8 for field installation.
9 2.14 Air-Cooled Condenser: 10 1. Plate-fin coil with integral subcooling on each circuit, rated at 450 psig. 11 a. Construct coil casing of stainless steel. 12 b. Construct coils of copper tubes mechanically bonded to aluminum with 13 precoated epoxy-phenolic fins. 14 c. Coat coils with a baked-epoxy, corrosion-resistant coating after fabrication. 15 d. Hail Protection: Provide condenser coils with louvers, baffles, or hoods to 16 protect against hail damage. 17 2. Fans: Direct-drive propeller type with statically and dynamically balanced fan blades, 18 arranged for vertical air discharge. 19 3. Fan Motors: Totally enclosed nonventilating (TENV) or totally enclosed air over 20 (TEAO) enclosure, with permanently lubricated bearings. Equip each motor with 21 overload protection integral to either the motor or chiller controls. 22 4. Fan Guards: Steel safety guards with corrosion-resistant coating.
23 2.15 Electrical Power: 24 1. Factory-installed and -wired switches, motor controllers, transformers, and other 25 electrical devices necessary shall provide a single-point, field-power connection to 26 chiller. 27 2. House in a unit-mounted, NEMA 250, Type 3R enclosure with hinged access door 28 with lock and key or padlock and key. 29 3. Wiring shall be numbered and color-coded to match wiring diagram. 30 4. Install factory wiring outside of an enclosure in a raceway. 31 5. Field-power interface shall be to NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, nonfused disconnect 32 switch. 33 a. Disconnect means shall be interlocked with door operation. 34 b. Minimum withstand rating shall be as required by electrical power distribution 35 system. 36 6. Provide branch power circuit to each motor and to controls with one of the 37 following disconnecting means: 38 a. NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, fusible switch with rejection-type fuse clips rated for 39 fuses. Select and size fuses to provide Type 2 protection according to 40 IEC 60947-4-1. 41 b. UL 489, motor-circuit protector (circuit breaker) with field-adjustable, short- 42 circuit-trip set point. 43 7. Provide each motor with overcurrent protection. 44 8. Overload relay sized according to UL 1995 or an integral component of chiller 45 control microprocessor.
09/April/2018 23 64 26 - 5 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO
1 9. Phase-Failure and Undervoltage Relays: Solid-state sensing with adjustable settings. 2 10. Provide power factor correction capacitors to correct power factor to 0.90 at full 3 load. 4 11. Control Transformer: Unit-mounted transformer with primary and secondary fuses 5 and sized with enough capacity to operate electrical load plus spare capacity. 6 a. Power unit-mounted controls where indicated. 7 b. Retain first subparagraph below if unit-mounted convenience power receptacle 8 is required. Consult manufacturers for availability. 9 c. Power unit-mounted, ground fault interrupt duplex receptacle. 10 12. Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable time-delay relays. 11 13. For chiller electrical power supply, indicate the following: 12 a. Current and phase to phase for all three phases. 13 b. Voltage, phase to phase, and phase to neutral for all three phases. 14 c. Three-phase real power (kilowatts). 15 d. Three-phase reactive power (kilovolt amperes reactive). 16 e. Power factor. 17 f. Running log of total power versus time (kilowatt-hours). 18 g. Fault log, with time and date of each.
19 2.16 Controls: 20 1. Standalone and microprocessor based. 21 2. Enclosure: Share enclosure with electrical power devices or provide a separate 22 enclosure. 23 3. Operator Interface: Multiple-character digital or graphic display with dynamic update 24 of information and with keypad or touch-sensitive display located on front of 25 control enclosure. In either imperial or metric units, display the following 26 information: 27 a. Date and time. 28 b. Operating or alarm status. 29 c. Operating hours. 30 d. Outdoor-air temperature if required for chilled-water reset. 31 e. Temperature and pressure of operating set points. 32 f. Entering and leaving temperatures of chilled water. 33 g. Refrigerant pressures in evaporator and condenser. 34 h. Saturation temperature in evaporator and condenser. 35 i. No cooling load condition. 36 j. Elapsed time meter (compressor run status). 37 k. Pump status. 38 l. Antirecycling timer status. 39 m. Percent of maximum motor amperage. 40 n. Current-limit set point. 41 o. Number of compressor starts. 42 4. Control Functions: 43 a. Revise list below to suit Project. Verify availability; functions may vary among 44 manufacturers and models. 45 b. Manual or automatic startup and shutdown time schedule.
09/April/2018 23 64 26 - 6 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO
1 c. Entering and leaving chilled-water temperatures, control set points, and motor 2 load limits. Chilled-water leaving temperature shall be reset by DDC system. 3 d. Current limit and demand limit. 4 e. External chiller emergency stop. 5 f. Antirecycling timer. 6 g. Automatic lead-lag switching. 7 h. Variable evaporator flow. 8 i. Thermal storage. 9 5. Manually Reset Safety Controls: The following conditions shall shut down chiller and 10 require manual reset: 11 a. Revise list below to suit Project. Verify availability; conditions may vary among 12 manufacturers and models. 13 b. Low evaporator pressure or high condenser pressure. 14 c. Low chilled-water temperature. 15 d. Refrigerant high pressure. 16 e. High or low oil pressure. 17 f. High oil temperature. 18 g. Loss of chilled-water flow. 19 h. Control device failure. 20 6. Trending: Capability to trend analog data of up to five parameters simultaneously 21 over an adjustable period and frequency of polling. 22 7. Security Access: Provide electronic security access to controls through identification 23 and password with at least three levels of access: view only; view and operate; and 24 view, operate, and service. 25 8. Control Authority: At least four conditions: Off, local manual control at chiller, local 26 automatic control at chiller, and automatic control through a remote source. 27 9. Interface with DDC System for HVAC: Factory-installed hardware and software to 28 enable the DDC system for HVAC to monitor, control, and display chiller status and 29 alarms. 30 a. Retain first subparagraph below if interface with the DDC system for HVAC is 31 through hardwired points and minimal interface is required. 32 b. Hardwired Points:
33 1) Monitoring: On-off status, common trouble alarm 34 2) Control: On-off operation, chilled-water, discharge temperature set- 35 point adjustment 36 c. Delete "Hardwired Points" Subparagraph above and retain subparagraph 37 below if extensive interface with the DDC system for HVAC is required and is 38 beyond what hardwired points can provide. Requirement may exclude some 39 manufacturers. 40 d. ASHRAE 135 (BACnet), LonTalk, Modbus, Industry-accepted, open-protocol 41 communication interface with the DDC system for HVAC shall enable the 42 DDC system for HVAC operator to remotely control and monitor the chiller 43 from an operator workstation. Control features and monitoring points 44 displayed locally at chiller control panel shall be available through the DDC 45 system for HVAC.
09/April/2018 23 64 26 - 7 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO
1 2.17 Insulation: 2 1. Material: Closed-cell, flexible elastomeric, thermal insulation complying with 3 ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials. 4 2. Thickness: 3/4 inch 5 3. Factory-applied insulation over cold surfaces of chiller components. 6 a. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer and applied to 100 7 percent of insulation contact surface. Seal seams and joints. 8 4. Apply protective coating to exposed surfaces of insulation to protect insulation from 9 weather.
10 2.18 Accessories: 11 1. Factory-furnished, chilled-water flow switches for field installation. 12 2. Individual compressor suction and discharge pressure gages with shutoff valves for 13 each refrigerant circuit. 14 3. Factory-furnished spring isolators for field installation. 15 4. Tool Kit: Chiller manufacturer shall assemble a tool kit specially designed for use in 16 serving the chiller(s) furnished. Include special tools required to service chiller 17 components not readily available to Owner service personnel in performing routine 18 maintenance. Place tools in a lockable case with hinged cover. Provide a list of each 19 tool furnished and attach the list to underside of case cover.
20 2.19 Capacities and Characteristics: Refer to schedule on drawings.
21 2.20 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
22 A. Perform functional tests of chillers before shipping.
23 B. Factory run test each air-cooled chiller with water flowing through evaporator.
24 C. Factory test and inspect evaporator and condenser according to ASME Boiler and Pressure 25 Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.
26 D. For chillers located outdoors, rate sound power level according to AHRI 370.
27 PART 3 - EXECUTION
28 3.1 EXAMINATION
29 A. Examine chillers before installation. Reject chillers that are damaged.
30 B. Examine roughing-in for equipment support, anchor-bolt sizes and locations, piping, and 31 electrical connections to verify actual locations, sizes, and other conditions affecting chiller 32 performance, maintenance, and operations before equipment installation. 33 1. Final chiller locations indicated on Drawings are approximate. Determine exact 34 locations before roughing-in for piping and electrical connections.
35 C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
09/April/2018 23 64 26 - 8 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO
1 3.2 CHILLER INSTALLATION
2 A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast 3 anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
4 B. Coordinate sizes, locations, and anchoring attachments of structural-steel support 5 structures.
6 C. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations 7 with actual equipment provided.
8 D. Install chillers on support structure indicated.
9 E. Equipment Mounting: 10 1. Install chillers on cast-in-place concrete equipment bases. Comply with requirements 11 for equipment bases and foundations. 12 2. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Section 23 05 13 48 Vibration Controls for HVAC Piping.
14 F. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance.
15 G. Charge chiller with refrigerant and fill with oil if not factory installed.
16 H. Install separate devices furnished by manufacturer and not factory installed.
17 3.3 CONNECTIONS
18 A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 23 21 13 Hydronic Piping, 19 Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
20 B. Install piping adjacent to chiller to allow service and maintenance.
21 C. Evaporator Fluid Connections: Connect to evaporator inlet with shutoff valve, strainer, 22 flexible connector, thermometer, and plugged tee with pressure gage. Connect to 23 evaporator outlet with shutoff valve, balancing valve, flexible connector, flow switch, 24 thermometer, plugged tee with shutoff valve and pressure gage, flow meter, and drain 25 connection with valve. Make connections to chiller with a mechanical coupling.
26 D. Connect each chiller drain connection with a union and drain pipe, and extend pipe, full 27 size of connection, to floor drain. Provide a shutoff valve at each connection.
28 3.4 STARTUP SERVICE
29 A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. 30 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written 31 instructions. 32 2. Verify that refrigerant charge is sufficient and chiller has been leak tested. 33 3. Verify that pumps are installed and functional. 34 4. Verify that thermometers and gages are installed.
09/April/2018 23 64 26 - 9 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO
1 5. Operate chiller for run-in period. 2 6. Check bearing lubrication and oil levels. 3 7. For chillers installed indoors, verify that refrigerant pressure relief device is vented 4 outdoors. 5 8. Verify proper motor rotation. 6 9. Verify static deflection of vibration isolators, including deflection during chiller 7 startup and shutdown. 8 10. Verify and record performance of fluid flow and low-temperature interlocks for 9 evaporator and condenser. 10 11. Verify and record performance of chiller protection devices. 11 12. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls 12 and equipment.
13 B. Inspect field-assembled components, equipment installation, and piping and electrical 14 connections for proper assembly, installation, and connection.
15 C. Prepare test and inspection startup reports.
16 3.5 DEMONSTRATION
17 A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel 18 to adjust, operate, and maintain chillers. Video record the training sessions.
19 3.6 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE 20 21
ITEM NO. SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT AS INDICATED WITH BID 23 64 26-01 Part-load performance curves on the Per construction schedule compressor/motor input versus evapora- tor cooling load. 23 64 26-02 Performance curves on the compres- Per construction schedule sor/motor input versus condenser enter- ing air temperatures. 23 64 26-03 Sound power data for the machine run- Per construction schedule ning at full load and also at 50 percent load. Provide data for an eight-octave band analysis. 23 64 26-04 Maximum power consumption, minimum Per construction schedule circuit ampacity, recommended and max- imum circuit protective device rating, and maximum kW inrush.
09/April/2018 23 64 26 - 10 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO
ITEM NO. SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT AS INDICATED WITH BID 23 64 26-05 Detailed information on structural, me- Prior to delivery chanical, electrical, and other services necessary to evaluate installation require- ments. 23 64 05-07 Detailed drawings of control layout, wir- Prior to delivery ing diagrams, control components bill of material, and sequence of operation. Identify interface location for external control and monitoring status. 23 64 05-08 Provide flow switch mounting and instal- Prior to delivery lation instructions.
1 END OF SECTION
09/April/2018 23 64 26 - 11 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 SECTION 23 74 13
2 CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS 4
7 PART 1 GENERAL
8 1.1 SUMMARY
9 A. Section includes the work necessary to furnish and install the central station air handlers.
10 B. Related Sections: 11 1. Section 23 00 15 – Basic Equipment Installation. 12 2. Section 23 05 13 – Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment 13 3. Section 23 41 00 – Air Filters, HVAC. 14 4. Section 23 29 23 – Variable Frequency Drives. 15 5. The schedules on Drawings.
16 1.2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
17 A. Provide equipment suitable for indoor or outdoor installation, as listed in the schedules.
18 B. Minimum heating and cooling equipment operating efficiencies defined as coefficient of 19 performance and energy efficiency ratio specified in ASHRAE 90 are required.
20 C. Provide insulation complying with NFPA 90A for flame spread and smoke generation.
21 D. Rate, test, and certify fans in accordance with AMCA standards.
22 E. Rate, test, and certify coils in accordance with AHRI standards.
23 F. Ship units assembled unless unit exceeds maximum dimensions for shipping. Ship split 24 units in maximum allowable sizes.
25 1.3 SUBMITTALS
26 A. Refer to the Submittal Schedule at the end of Part 3 for a list of the submittal 27 requirements for this Section.
28 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
29 A. Manufacturer shall have a minimum ten years experience in designing, manufacturing and 30 servicing air-handling units.
31 B. At the discretion of the Owner or Engineer, all testing is subject to being represented by 32 Owner and/or Representative.
33 1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
34 A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00.
09/April/2018 23 74 13 - 1 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 B. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for lubrication, filter replacement, motor and 2 drive replacement (including all optional fan motors), condensate pan cleaning, 3 recommended spare parts lists and wiring diagrams.
4 C. Provide ladder logic and wiring diagrams for all electrical and controls portions of the air 5 handling unit, including airflow measurement damper and fan array system.
6 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
7 A. Do not operate units for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until ductwork is clean, 8 filters are in place, bearings lubricated, and fan (fans) has been test run under observation 9 of the Owner’s Representative.
10 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
11 A. Provide the following filter sets, as scheduled, for each air handler:
12 Filter Quantity of Sets Prefilter Two Main Two
13 1.8 SCHEDULES ON DRAWINGS
14 A. In general, all capacities of equipment, and motor and starter characteristics are shown in 15 schedules on the drawings. Reference shall be made to the schedules for such 16 information. The capacities shown are minimum capacities. Variations in the capacities of 17 the scheduled equipment supplied under this contract will be permitted only with the 18 written direction of the Owner or his Representative. All equipment shall be shipped to 19 the job with not less than a prime coat of paint or as specified hereinafter. Insofar as is 20 possible, all items of the same type shall be by the same manufacturer. Where installation 21 instructions are not included in these Specifications or on the drawings, the manufacturer’s 22 instructions shall be followed. All equipment affected by the altitude shall be rated to 23 operate at the altitude where it is installed.
24 1.9 WARRANTY
25 A. Provide manufacturer parts and labor warranty for 12 months following Final Completion 26 covering the labor required to install replacement parts. Perform warranty work using 27 manufacturer’s trained service technician.
28 B. Include factory-provided controls in the parts and labor warranties.
29 C. Parts associated with routine maintenance, such as air filters are excluded.
30 PART 2 PRODUCTS
31 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
32 A. AAON.
09/April/2018 23 74 13 - 2 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 B. Carrier.
2 C. McQuay.
3 D. Trane.
4 E. Johnson Controls/York.
5 2.2 MOTORS
6 A. Provide motors in accordance with the requirements of Section 23 05 13 – Common 7 Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment.
8 B. Select motors at 1.2 times the design conditions operating brake horsepower.
9 2.3 VARIABLE FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS
10 A. Provide drives in accordance with the requirements of Section 23 29 23 – Variable 11 Frequency Drives.
12 2.4 FILTERS
13 A. Provide filters and holding frames as scheduled in the schedules.
14 B. Provide filters and frames in accordance with the requirements of Section 23 41 00 – Air 15 Filters, HVAC.
16 2.5 COILS
17 A. Provide coils as scheduled in the schedules. Refer to outdoor mounted units under this 18 section for additional coating requirements for outdoor AHU.
19 B. Tubes: 20 1. Material: Seamless continuous copper, without flow turbulating devices. 21 2. Pressure/Temperature Rating:
22 a. Copper: 100 psig at 400 degrees F.
23 C. Fins: 0.008 inch-thick plate-type aluminum, mechanically bonded to fins and headers.
24 D. Casings: Stainless steel with stainless steel center tube supports for coils over 42 inches, air 25 bypass seals, and flanged duct connections.
26 E. Headers: 27 1. Water Coils: Gray cast iron or copper with tapped and plugged vent and drain 28 connections.
29 F. Tests: 30 1. Proof Test: 1.5 times maximum working pressure or minimum 300 psig. 31 2. Leakage Test: 200 psig air underwater.
32 G. Provide intermediate drain pans at maximum 36-inch intervals for coils where
09/April/2018 23 74 13 - 3 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 condensation may occur. Do not allow lower coils to become flooded or allow condensate 2 to pass through the airstream of the lower coil.
3 H. Electrical Heating Coils, Controls, and Accessories: Comply with UL 1995. 4 1. Casing Assembly: Slip-in type with galvanized-steel frame. 5 2. Sheathed Heating Elements: Coiled resistance wire of 80 percent nickel and 20 6 percent chromium surrounded by compacted magnesium-oxide powder in tubular- 7 steel sheath; with spiral-wound, copper-plated, steel fins continuously brazed to 8 sheath. 9 3. Open Heating Elements: Resistance wire of 80 percent nickel and 20 percent 10 chromium supported and insulated by floating ceramic bushings recessed into casing 11 openings, fastened to supporting brackets, and mounted in galvanized-steel frame. 12 4. Overtemperature Protection: Disk-type, automatically resetting, thermal-cutout, 13 safety device; serviceable through terminal box without removing heater from coil 14 section. 15 5. Secondary Protection: Load-carrying, manually resetting or manually replaceable, 16 thermal cutouts; factory wired in series with each heater stage. 17 6. Control Panel: Unit mounted with disconnecting means and overcurrent protection. 18 a. Magnetic contactor. 19 b. Solid-state, stepless pulse controller. 20 c. Step controller. 21 d. Time-delay relay. 22 e. Pilot lights, one per step. 23 f. Airflow proving switch.
24 2.6 VIBRATION PERFORMANCE
25 A. Perform factory balancing tests to certify the fan meets the values in the following table. 26 Take measurements in a direction parallel to the shaft in a horizontal plane and in a 27 direction perpendicular to the shaft in both the horizontal and the vertical planes. Perform 28 testing of factory balancing at the fan bearing housing caps under filter in conditions.
29 B. Conduct balancing tests with fan operating at a resistance equal to design external static 30 pressure. For testing, mount the fan on an isolated suspension test stand that weighs no 31 more than 15 percent of the assembled fan weight and provides an isolation deflection of 32 4 inches when loaded.
33 C. At the completion of the factory fan balance procedures, measure and log vibration 34 amplitudes of the exterior casing or housing of the fan assembly along the same three axes, 35 to be used for future reference in verifying fan vibration limits. Rotational Speed Vibration Amplitude Peak to Peak 1,000 rpm and less 3.0 mils 1,500 rpm 2.0 mils 2,000 rpm and above 1.5 mils
36 2.7 CASING
37 A. Utilize double wall casing construction. Fabricate casing from minimum 16-gauge G90 38 galvanized steel in manufacturer’s standard finish, suitably braced and mounted on a
09/April/2018 23 74 13 - 4 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 structural steel support frame suitable for equipment pad or rooftop curb mounting. 2 Fabricate internal liner from minimum 20-gauge G90 galvanized steel.
3 B. Insulate with 2-inch-thick, 1.5-pound-density neoprene-coated fiberglass insulation with 4 polyethylene bag facing protected with perforated galvanized metal liner for low-frequency 5 noise control.
6 C. Provide drain pan in sections containing coils, mist eliminators, or humidifier and in the 7 intake section. Construct drain pans of double wall 304 stainless steel with two way 8 sloping.
9 D. Refer to outdoor mounted units under this section for additional coating requirements for 10 outdoor AHU.
11 2.8 OUTDOOR MOUNTED UNITS
12 A. Roof panels with lapped joint watertight seal, sloped a minimum of 1/8 inch per foot away 13 from access side of unit. Construct unit such that ponding of water does not occur on the 14 roof.
15 B. Construct base to support unit on roof curb.
16 C. Supply roof curb with unit. Construct roof curb of 12-gauge galvanized steel, with cedar 17 nailing strip and insulated with 2-inch neoprene-coated fiberglass insulation. Roof curb to 18 enclose entire perimeter of unit, including pipe chases or service chases.
19 D. Provide pipe chases for coil, and drain connections.
20 E. Casing Coating: Phenolic
21 2.9 SERVICE PLENUMS AND ACCESS DOORS
22 A. Fit service plenums with manually opened access doors, interior incandescent lights, and 23 exterior light switch. Connect light circuits to a single junction box for owner single point 24 electrical connection.
25 B. Access Doors: Materials same as unit casing, continuous air/acoustic seals around 26 perimeter, two heavy-duty hinges minimum, wedge lever latches with inside release handle, 27 and arranged to open against the direction of higher relative pressure for safe use and 28 positive air seal.
29 C. Interior Lights: Fluorescent with glass and heavy-gauge wire safety cage, switched by a 30 single switch in weatherproof enclosure located outside the respective access door.
31 2.10 FAN SECTION
32 A. Internally isolated, double-inlet, centrifugal fan, backward-inclined or airfoil design as 33 required by the pressure class, rated and tested to meet service requirements, statically and 34 dynamically balanced.
35 B. Provide fan wheel with blades welded to rim and hub plate, solid or tubular steel shaft with 36 center-punched shaft ends to accommodate a tachometer, grease-lubricated, and self-
09/April/2018 23 74 13 - 5 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 aligning bearings with grease fittings accessibly located and involute formed scroll housing. 2 Provide bearings with AFBMA rated life as scheduled.
3 C. Size fan with maximum rpm not to exceed 80 percent of their first critical speed.
4 D. Where units are furnished with external motors and drives, include isolation for the fan 5 section, accessories, and connecting piping to match the same isolation as the type 6 specified.
7 E. Include a fan discharge airfoil-shaped diffuser mounted on fans that discharge into another 8 fan system component, such as coils, sound traps, or filters.
9 2.11 MIXING PLENUM
10 A. Recirculation Air Handler: 11 1. Include mixing dampers on both the return and makeup air inlets with opposed- 12 blade dampers arranged across the short dimension of the inlet to allow vertical 13 segmented mixing of the airstreams inside the box. 14 2. Provide an access door on one side of the plenum as shown in the schematic 15 drawings.
16 2.12 DAMPERS
17 A. Fabricate airfoil damper blades with bronze shaft bearings and double-gasketed blade seal 18 with a positive weather tight closure.
19 B. Contain blade interconnection mechanisms within the damper frame outside the airflow 20 path. Provide interconnection linkage allowing positive blade-to-blade interaction without 21 slippage and without the use of setscrews.
22 C. Maximum blade length less than narrowest dimension of outside air or relief air openings 23 of unit mixing boxes and in no case greater than 46 inches. Construct dampers exceeding 24 16 square feet in multiple equal-size sections. Operate each section by a separate actuator.
25 D. Provide end shafts a minimum of 18 inches long with length to provide attachment to the 26 damper drive blade without slippage. Furnish adjustable shaft extensions from 3 inches to 27 12 inches outside the damper frame and air-handling unit case.
28 E. Furnish UL-rated combination smoke and fire dampers with actuators and solenoid valves. 29 Size actuators to provide the required amount of torque and stroke to close the damper 30 against operating system pressure differential and velocities.
31 2.13 AIRFLOW MEASUREMENT
32 A. Outside Air (VAV system AHU): 33 1. Furnish and install in accordance with schedules, an air monitor station integral to 34 the minimum outside air damper. The integral air monitor/damper shall incorporate 35 measuring ports built into the damper blades and shall control the minimum amount 36 of outside air as required by schedule. The construction of the air monitor/damper 37 shall be aluminum frame. The frame shall be designed for 4 bolt and flange cleat 38 installation and shall provide maximum free area for lowest pressure drop
09/April/2018 23 74 13 - 6 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 performance. The damper blades shall be heavy gage aluminum airfoil type with 2 neoprene blade edge seals. 3 2. Jamb seals shall be flexible metal compression type, and the linkage shall be 4 concealed out of the airstream and located within the damper frame to reduce 5 pressure drop and noise. The integral damper/monitor assembly shall incorporate an 6 air straightener section to ensure proper airflow readings. The air straightener section 7 shall be flanged as required by the application. 8 3. Each air monitor/damper shall include 24VAC electric modulating motor and an 9 application specific controller designed for this application furnished by the damper 10 manufacturer. Each integral air monitor/damper shall be calibrated in an AMCA 11 registered laboratory and a certification chart shall accompany the air monitor/ 12 damper. 13 4. The accuracy of the device shall be no worse than ±5% when operating within stable 14 fan operating conditions. Devices shall not affect the submitted fan performance 15 and acoustical levels. Devices that obstruct the fan inlet shall not be acceptable. 16 5. The integral air monitor/damper shall equivalent to Ruskin's model IAQ50.
17 2.14 ELECTRICAL
18 A. Fan motors shall be factory-mounted to fan and factory-wired to VFDs mounted to the 19 unit compartment. Alternatively, when VFDs are remote to air handling unit, contractor 20 shall coordinate with electrical trades to connect to independent VFDs and connect from 21 VFDs to fan motors.
22 B. Vapor-proof lights (LED or compact fluorescent; ceiling or wall mounted so that fixture 23 shall be no higher than 88” above floor) shall be provided in each compartment as 24 specified. Light shall be provided in intake plenum access between coils, entering and 25 leaving side of fan, discharge plenum, and VFD compartment. Lights shall have a single 26 switch with timer located near fan section door. Switch shall control lights for each 27 section.
28 C. A single electrical connection will be provided. The air handling unit shall be power wired 29 for independent power source for receptacle and lights (having multiple switches for 30 independent light control) separate from the motor power source. All necessary 31 disconnects, transformers, etc. required for separating power from single electrical 32 connection shall be provided with unit. Lighting circuits shall receive power from a 33 “Dedicated Circuit Breaker”. If a single electrical connection cannot be provided, 34 contractor shall coordinate with electrical trades to provide separate power to each VFD 35 and to lighting/receptacle circuit.
36 D. Provide two GFI 120V convenience receptacles evenly spaced on the long side (access 37 side) of unit.
38 E. All wiring shall be 600V rated type MTW/THWN stranded copper in EMT or LiquidTite 39 conduit (max 3 feet). All junction boxes shall be UL approved and gasketed. Internal 40 raceways or wireways in compliance with NEC and DFW Standards are acceptable when 41 engineered by the manufacturer.
42 F. Motors: See Section 23 05 13 for additional requirements.
43 2.15 CONTROLS
09/April/2018 23 74 13 - 7 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 A. Controls system, including control valves and actuators, will be provided by others.
2 B. Provide dampers with fail position shown in the schedules.
3 2.16 DISCHARGE PLENUM
4 A. Size to allow even downstream airflow and low-pressure drop at the casing discharge.
5 2.17 FACTORY QUALITY CONTROL
6 A. Manufacturer’s Factory Services: 7 1. Test one air handler of each type and each capacity over the full range of the VFD, 8 as specified in Section 23 29 23 – Variable Frequency Motor Controllers. Generate 9 test curves for the air handler/VFD pair at 25, 50, 75 and 100 percent increments of 10 full-speed operation. Measure vibration performance at these operating speed 11 increments. 12 2. Coordination: Furnish information required by the VFD supplier for proper design 13 of the VFD, including, but not limited to, motor specifications and characteristics. 14 3. Calibrate and functionally check dampers at the factory. Provide a calibration sheet 15 for each device showing the calibration range and date calibrated. Functional check 16 at factory includes temporary air supply, tubing, and power. Verify proper actuator 17 fail modes and correct stroke checking. Document the functional check at factory.
18 B. Allow time at the factory for the Owner to perform an acceptance test and inspection, 19 including the controls supplied and installed.
20 PART 3 EXECUTION
21 3.1 INSTALLATION
22 A. Install units according to manufacturer’s written instructions.
23 B. Install per Specification Section 23 00 15 – Basic Equipment Installation.
24 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
25 A. Manufacturer’s Startup Services: 26 1. Provide a manufacturer’s representative for the fans necessary to assist the 27 Contractor during installation. 28 2. Balance fan equipment statically and dynamically. Field testing will be performed by 29 others on rotating equipment to determine actual operating vibration and acoustical 30 levels: 31 a. If the vibration limits described therein are exceeded, rebalance the equipment 32 in place, if directed by the Owner, until design tolerances are met. 33 b. If the sound power levels are exceeded, take the necessary steps to reduce the 34 levels until design tolerances are met. 35 3. Log and record information from tests, readings, and adjustments necessary to 36 accomplish the services described. After the fan is operating normally, provide 37 instructional time with the Owner’s service personnel to review the maintenance 38 manuals and perform each step necessary for startup, shutdown, troubleshooting,
09/April/2018 23 74 13 - 8 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 and routine maintenance. Notify CH2M HILL of the service orientation schedule, so 2 CH2M HILL may observe the training sessions. 3 4. Upon completion of the inspections, startup, testing, and checkout procedures, 4 submit written notice to the Owner that the units are ready for beneficial use by the 5 Owner. 6 5. In order to establish the minimum service requirements, provide the manufacturer’s 7 representative for the equipment specified herein at the jobsite for the minimum 8 man-days listed, not consecutive, travel time excluded: 9 a. 10 man-days for installation assistance, inspection, and certification of the 10 installation. 11 b. 5 man-days for plant startup and maintenance instructional time. 12 6. Include the cost of startup services time and associated expenses as part of the 13 bidder’s proposal. 14
15 3.1 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
ITEM NO. SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT AS INDICATED WITH BID 23 74 13-01 Product Data: Include: Prior to delivery • Unit designation number. • Type of unit. • Manufacturer’s name and model number. • Dimensions of unit, mounting attachments, specified accessories, and locations of service connections. Description of fabrication materials for unit including: • Structural members. • Casing. • Insulation. • Fans. • Heating coils. • Cooling coils. • Filters. • Dampers. Description of unit motor including: • Manufacturer’s name and model number. • Nameplate horsepower. • Efficiency (%).
09/April/2018 23 74 13 - 9 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO
ITEM NO. SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT AS INDICATED WITH BID • Service factor. • Type enclosure. • Speed (rpm). • Electrical characteristics (V/Ph/Hz). Description of unit drive package including: • Manufacturer’s name and model number for sheaves and belts. • Horsepower rating. • Sheave diameters. • Bushing sizes. • Belt sizes and numbers. • Percent adjustment above and below design setpoint. • Shipping and operating weights of unit with weight distribution at support points. Fan performance curves indicating: • Air quantity. • Static pressure. • Bhp. • Efficiency. • Tip speed. • Rpm. • Sound power level (dB re 10 -12 watts) for each octave band. Cooling coil performance data indicating: • Air quantity. • Rows. • Fin spacing. • Air side pressure drop. • Entering air db and wb temperatures. • Leaving air db and wb temperatures. • Entering and leaving chilled water temperatures. • Water quantity. • Water side pressure drop.
09/April/2018 23 74 13 - 10 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO
ITEM NO. SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT AS INDICATED WITH BID Heating coil performance data indicating: • Air quantity. • Rows. • Fin spacing. • Air side pressure drop. • Entering and leaving air db temperatures. • Operating voltage and kW. Filter data including: • Face area. • Initial and recommended final pressure drops. • Efficiency. • Damper areas and air side pressure losses. • Outside and relief air louver sizes, percent free area, and air side pressure losses. • Installation, operation, and repair instructions. 23 74 13-02 Shop Drawings: Include: Prior to delivery • Overall 2-lne unit layout, indicating available service areas and clearance requirements. • Elevations and sections to show clearances, methods of support, and details of installation. • Locations and sizes of openings. 23 74 13-03 Operating and Maintenance Manual: With operations and Include: maintenance manuals • Submittal Data: o Products Data. o Shop Drawings. • Spare Parts List: o Part description. o Part number. o Price.
09/April/2018 23 74 13 - 11 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 2 3 END OF SECTION 4
5
09/April/2018 23 74 13 - 12 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 SECTION 23 82 19
2 FAN COIL UNITS
6 PART 1 GENERAL
7 1.1 SUMMARY
8 A. Section includes the requirements necessary to furnish and install, complete, the fan coil 9 units.
10 B. Related Sections: 11 1. Section 23 00 15 – Basic Equipment Installation 12 2. Section 23 05 13 – Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment 13 3. Section 23 31 13 – Metal HVAC Ductwork and Accessories 14 4. Section 26 05 01 – Basic Electrical Requirements. 15 5. The schedules on Drawings.
16 1.2 SUBMITTALS
17 A. Refer to the Submittal Schedule at the end of Part 3 for a list of submittal requirements for 18 this Section.
19 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
20 A. Manufacturer shall have a minimum ten years experience in designing, manufacturing and 21 servicing air-handling units.
22 B. At the discretion of the Owner or Engineer, all testing is subject to being represented by 23 Owner and/or Representative.
24 1.4 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
25 A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00.
26 B. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for lubrication, filter replacement, motor 27 replacement, condensate pan cleaning, recommended spare parts lists and wiring diagrams.
28 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
29 A. Insofar as is practical, provide factory-assembled equipment.
30 B. Ship packaged and tagged parts and assemblies that are unassembled in a manner that will 31 protect the equipment from damage and facilitate the final assembly in the field.
09/April/2018 23 82 19 - 1 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 C. Protect machined and unpainted parts from damage by the elements with an application of 2 a strippable protective coating.
3 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
4 A. Do not operate units for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until ductwork is clean, 5 filters are in place, bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation of the 6 Owner’s Representative.
7 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
8 A. Furnish under provisions of Section 23 05 00.
9 B. Provide one set of spare filters for each unit.
10 1.8 SCHEDULES ON DRAWINGS
11 A. In general, all capacities of equipment, and motor and starter characteristics are shown in 12 schedules on the drawings. Reference shall be made to the schedules for such 13 information. The capacities shown are minimum capacities. Variations in the capacities of 14 the scheduled equipment supplied under this contract will be permitted only with the 15 written direction of the Owner or his Representative. All equipment shall be shipped to 16 the job with not less than a prime coat of paint. Insofar as is possible, all items of the 17 same type shall be by the same manufacturer. Where installation instructions are not 18 included in these Specifications or on the drawings, the manufacturer’s instructions shall 19 be followed. All equipment affected by the altitude shall be rated to operate at the altitude 20 where it is installed.
21 1.9 WARRANTY
22 A. Provide manufacturer parts and labor warranty for 12 months following Final Completion 23 covering the labor required to install replacement parts. Perform warranty work using 24 manufacturer’s trained service technician.
25 B. Include factory-provided controls in the parts and labor warranties.
26 C. Parts associated with routine maintenance, such as air filters are excluded.
27 PART 2 PRODUCTS
28 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
29 A. Envirotec
30 B. Carrier Corporation
09/April/2018 23 82 19 - 2 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 C. York International Corporation.
2 D. Trane Company.
3 E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Sections 23 05 00. The equipment as supplied by any of 4 the acceptable manufacturers or an approved equal shall comply with all of the provisions 5 of this specification.
6 2.2 GENERAL
7 A. Assembly consists of casing, heating coil, cooling coil, filter, fan and motor, controls, and 8 accessories. Concealed horizontal unit with ducted rear return air inlet and ducted front 9 supply air outlet connections.
10 2.3 CASING
11 A. Constructed of minimum 18-gauge, zinc-coated steel, internal surfaces acoustically and 12 thermally insulated with 1/2-inch-thick, 2-pound-density, neoprene-coated insulation or 13 1-inch-thick, 1.5-pound-density fiberglass insulation meeting NFPA 90A requirements and 14 UL 181 erosion requirements.
15 B. Provide Mylar or Tedlar facing on the airstream side to eliminate particle shedding into the 16 supply airstream.
17 C. Provide factory-applied baked enamel finish on the casing.
18 2.4 COOLING COIL
19 A. Provide cooling coil with 1/2-inch or 5/8-inch copper tube mechanically expanded into 20 aluminum plate fins, leak tested under water to 200-psig pressure. Provide manual air vent. 21 Provide with factory installed coil assembly.
22 B. Provide drain pan of minimum 18-gauge galvanized steel. Insulate interior and exterior 23 surfaces with fire-retardant, closed-cell foam. Alternatively, provide molded, high-impact, 24 flame-resistant, ABS thermoplastic pan. Pitch pan for positive drainage when unit is level. 25 Provide drain pan connection on same side as other access. 26
27 2.5 ELECTRIC-RESISTANCE HEATING COIL (Where indicated on Drawing Schedule)
28 A. Provide Nickel-chromium heating wire, free of expansion noise and hum, mounted in 29 ceramic inserts in a galvanized-steel housing; with fuses in terminal box for overcurrent 30 protection and limit controls for high temperature protection of heaters. Terminate 31 elements in stainless-steel machine-staked terminals secured with stainless-steel hardware.
09/April/2018 23 82 19 - 3 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 B. All units with electric heat shall be provided with an incoming line power distribution 2 block, designated to accept single point power wiring capable of carrying 125% of the 3 calculated load current.
4 2.6 WIRING
5 A. Factory mount and wire controls. Mount electrical components in control box with 6 removable cover. Incorporate single-point electrical connection to power source.
7 B. Factory mount transformer for control voltage on electric and electronic control units. 8 Provide terminal strip in control box for field wiring of thermostat and power source.
9 C. Factory wire fan to terminal strip.
10 D. Provide un-fused disconnect.
11 E. Conform to Section 26 05 01 – Basic Electrical Requirements.
12 2.7 FAN ASSEMBLY
13 A. Internally suspend and isolate fan/motor assembly from casing on rubber isolators.
14 B. Fan: Forward-curved centrifugal type with direct-drive motor, statically and dynamically 15 balanced; fans, wheels, and housings of coated steel.
16 C. Motor: Direct-drive permanent split capacitor type with thermally protected motor and 17 three-speed control in conformance with the requirements of Section 23 05 13 Common 18 Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment.
19 2.8 FILTERS
20 A. Provide 1-inch-thick disposable filter of 30 percent efficiency, removable from the same 21 side as coil access without removal of panels.
22 2.9 CONTROLS
23 A. Provide cooling controls by valve modulation of water.
24 B. Provide wall-mounted four-position switch indicating off/high/medium/low operation of 25 the fan and an auxiliary connection which is energized when the fan is operating in the 26 high, medium, or low position. Provide thermostat and controls for standalone operation, 27 utilizing modulating control valves for chilled water.
09/April/2018 23 82 19 - 4 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 PART 3 EXECUTION
2 3.1 INSTALLATION
3 A. Support fan coil units from structure above with threaded rod and angle from four corners 4 of the unit. Provide additional supports if required by the unit manufacturer.
5 B. Provide ceiling access doors or locate units above easily removable ceiling components.
6 C. Connect to ductwork in accordance with Section 23 31 13 – Metal HVAC Ductwork and 7 Accessories.
09/April/2018 23 82 19 - 5 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 3.2 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE 2 3
ITEM NO. SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT AS INDICATED WITH BID 23 82 19-01 Provide the following, within 3 weeks of Per construction schedule award of Contract: • Make, model, operating weight, and dimensions. • Noise criteria sound data. • Fan motor size, brake horsepower, and curve showing volume versus external static pressure. • External static pressure capacity. • ARI-certified coil performance data to include cfm, air and water inlet, and discharge temperatures at design conditions, gpm, water pressure drop, and water connection sizes. • Electrical interfaces, voltage, load. 4
5 END OF SECTION
09/April/2018 23 82 19 - 6 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 SECTION 26 05 01
2 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
3 PART 1 GENERAL
4 1.1 SUMMARY
5 A. Section includes general requirements specifically applicable to Division 26.
6 B. Related Sections: 7 1. Section 26 05 75 Fault Calculation and Protective Device Coordination Study.
8 C. Work Specifically Excluded from Project: 9 1. Power company metering current transformers, meter and interconnecting wiring. 10 2. Power company service transformer. 11 3. Power company medium voltage conductors to primary side of service transformer.
12 D. Work installed but furnished under other Sections: 13 1. Power company meter housing and current transformer cabinet. 14 2. Primary conduits from power company pad mounted switch to service transformer.
15 E. Contractor’s Responsibilities: 16 1. Complete systems in accordance with the intent of these contract documents. 17 2. Coordinate details of facility equipment and construction for specification divisions 18 that affect work covered under this Division. 19 3. Furnish and install incidental items not actually shown or specified, but that are 20 required by good practice to provide complete functional systems.
21 F. Intent of Drawings: 22 1. Electrical plan drawings show general locations of equipment, devices, raceways, 23 and floor boxes unless specifically dimensioned. 24 2. Contractor: Responsible for proper routing of raceways subject to prior review by 25 Owner. 26 27 3. Perform the following in addition to what is indicated on the drawings and 28 specifications. 29 a. Perform fault coordination study, voltage drop study, and protective device 30 coordination study, as indicated in Section 26 05 75 Fault Calculation and 31 Protective Device Coordination Study. 32 b. Size pull and junction boxes not shown or sized on the drawings. 33 c. Route raceways, coordinating with other Contractors. Determine raceway 34 highways in addition to those indicated on plans, including those for floor 35 mounted devices. Coordinate in floor raceways with Technology Drawings to 36 provide a coordinated raceway installation.
09/April/2018 26 05 01 - 1 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 d. Increase raceway sizes as needed based upon actual wire size. 2 e. Develop installation details based upon the drawings and specifications. 3 f. Route and size grounding system based upon drawings and specifications. 4 Include bonding jumpers and grounding electrode conductors to separately 5 derived sources and service entrances. 6 g. Develop wiring and control diagrams based upon Supplier drawings to 7 supplement those shown on the drawings. 8 h. Develop electrical equipment front elevations and footprint dimensions for 9 layout, purchase, and installation. 10 i. Based upon lighting fixture and switch layout drawings, design and connect 11 system to include power, neutral, ground, and switch-leg conductors. 12 j. Do not route redundant circuits in the same raceway system. 13 k. Lay out electrical distribution equipment per National Electrical Code (NEC) 14 required clearances. 15 l. Design, furnish, and install the following systems: 16 1) Lightning protection system per Section 26 41 00 Facility Lightning 17 Protection.
18 1.2 REFERENCES
19 A. Abbreviations and Acronyms: 20 1. Authority having jurisdiction (AHJ) 21 2. InterNational Electrical Testing Association (NETA) 22 3. National Electrical Code (NEC) 23 4. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA) 24 5. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 25 6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 26 7. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 27 8. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL)
28 1.3 DESIGN CRITERIA
29 A. Equipment and Devices Installed Outdoors or in Unheated Enclosures: Capable of 30 continuous operation within an ambient temperature of 30 to 104 degrees F, relative 31 humidity of zero to 95 percent.
32 B. Compliance by Contractor with provisions of this Section does not relieve the Contractor 33 of the responsibilities of furnishing equipment and materials of proper design, 34 mechanically and electrically suited to meet operating guarantees at specified service 35 conditions.
36 C. Electrical Components and Systems Manufactured within the Scope of Underwriters 37 Laboratories Inc. (UL): Conform to UL standards, provide UL listing, and label with an 38 applied UL listing mark or listing mark from a Nationally Recognized Testing Agency.
39 D. Equipment: Meet applicable requirements of Factory Mutual.
09/April/2018 26 05 01 - 2 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 E. Indoor Dry Areas: Use National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 1 2 enclosures for electrical equipment and devices in these areas unless otherwise indicated.
3 F. Outdoor and Wet Areas: Use NEMA 4X enclosures for electrical equipment and devices 4 in these areas unless otherwise indicated.
5 G. Corrosive Areas: Designated on the drawings. Provide raceways, elbows, fittings, 6 couplings, junction boxes, and pull boxes of materials specified hereafter. Use NEMA 4X 7 enclosures for electrical equipment and devices in these areas. Provide other devices and 8 materials labeled as suitable for installation in corrosive environment.
9 H. Hazardous Areas: Designated on the drawings. Provide devices, materials, and equipment 10 for installation in hazardous areas that are specifically approved for installation in 11 hazardous areas of class, division, and group indicated and are of construction that ensures 12 safe performance under conditions of proper use and maintenance.
13 I. Close unused holes in boxes, equipment, and raceway.
14 J. Remove abandoned outlets, cables, and conductors.
15 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
16 A. Conform to latest codes and other legal requirements.
17 B. Obtain permits and arrange inspections required by codes applicable to this Division. 18 Submit written evidence to Owner that required permits, inspections, and code 19 requirements have been secured.
20 1.5 SUBMITTALS
21 A. Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.
22 B. Refer to the Submittal Schedule at the end of PART 3 for a list of submittal requirements 23 for this Section.
24 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
25 A. Provide the Work in accordance with National Fire Protection Association 26 (NFPA) 70 NEC, as applicable. Where required by authority having jurisdiction (AHJ), 27 material and equipment shall be listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing 28 laboratory or other organization acceptable to the AHJ, to provide a basis for approval 29 under the above listed agency.
30 B. Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards published by UL 31 shall conform to those standards and shall have an applied UL listing mark or label or a 32 label from a Nationally Recognized Testing Agency.
09/April/2018 26 05 01 - 3 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 C. Provide materials and equipment acceptable to AHJ for Class, Division, and Group of 2 hazardous area indicated.
3 D. Material and equipment must be listed and labeled for its intended purpose, environment, 4 or application, especially when used in extreme climate areas.
5 PART 2 PRODUCTS
6 2.1 MATERIALS
7 A. Materials and Equipment: Labeled and/or listed as acceptable to AHJ as suitable for use 8 intended.
9 B. Where two or more units of the same class of material are required, provide products of a 10 single manufacturer. Component parts of materials or equipment need not be products of 11 the same manufacturer.
12 PART 3 EXECUTION
13 3.1 WORKMANSHIP
14 A. Install work using procedures defined in National Electrical Contractors Association 15 (NECA) Standard of Installation.
16 B. Install material and equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide 17 calibrated torque wrenches and screwdrivers as required.
18 3.2 SERVICE CONTINUITY
19 A. Maintain continuity of electric service to functioning portions of processes or buildings 20 during hours of normal use.
21 B. Arrange temporary outages for cutover work with Owner. Keep outages to a minimum 22 number and minimum length of time.
23 3.3 TOUCH-UP PAINTING
24 A. Repair damage to factory-applied paint finishes with touch-up paint.
25 B. Use touch-up paint and methods of preparation and application recommended by 26 manufacturer of components to be repaired. 27
09/April/2018 26 05 01 - 4 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 3.4 STARTUP TESTING AND INSPECTION OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
2 A. Voltage: At project completion, 3 1. Check voltage at termination point of power supply system to project. 4 2. Check true rms voltage magnitude and balance between phases for loaded and 5 unloaded conditions. 6 3. Adjust taps of transformers such that no-load voltage is approximately equal to or 7 up to 3 percent above nominal.
8 B. SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE 9 10
ITEM SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT AS INDICATED NO. WITH BID 26 05 01-01 Inspection and permit certificates and With record documents certificates of final inspection and acceptance from authority having jurisdiction 26 05 01-02 Test reports Before date of Substantial Completion
11 END OF SECTION
09/April/2018 26 05 01 - 5 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 SECTION 26 05 19
2 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
3 PART 1 GENERAL
4 1.1 SUMMARY
5 A. Section includes the requirements necessary to furnish and install: 6 1. 600V Wire. 7 2. 600V Cable. 8 3. Wiring connections and terminations. 9 4. Modular wiring system.
10 1.2 REFERENCES
11 A. Abbreviations and Acronyms: 12 5. Authority having jurisdiction (AHJ) 13 6. National Electrical Code (NEC) 14 7. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 15 8. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) 16 9. Variable frequency drive (VFD)
17 1.3 SUBMITTALS
18 A. Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.
19 B. Refer to the Submittal Schedule at the end of PART 3 for a list of submittal requirements 20 for this Section.
21 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
22 A. Provide the Work in accordance with National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 70 23 (National Electric Code - NEC), as applicable. Where required by authority having 24 jurisdiction (AHJ), material and equipment shall be listed and labeled by a nationally 25 recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable to the AHJ, to provide a 26 basis for approval under the above listed agency.
27 B. Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards published by 28 Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) shall conform to those standards and shall have an 29 applied UL listing mark or label.
30 C. Provide materials and equipment acceptable to AHJ for Class, Division, and Group of 31 hazardous area indicated.
32 D. Material and equipment must be listed and labeled for its intended purpose, environment, 33 or application, especially when used in extreme climate areas.
09/April/2018 26 05 19 - 1 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2 2.1 600V WIRE
3 A. Thermoplastic-insulated wire.
4 B. Rubber-insulated wire.
5 C. Feeders and Branch Circuits Larger than 6 AWG: Copper, stranded conductor, 600-Volt 6 insulation, THHN/THWN.
7 D. Feeders and Branch Circuits 6 AWG and Smaller: Copper, solid conductor, 600V 8 insulation, THHN/THWN.
9 E. Feeders and Branch Circuits installed below-grade or in wet or damp locations: Copper, 10 solid or stranded conductor, 600V insulation, XHHW-2.
11 F. Control Circuits: Copper, stranded conductor, 600-Volt insulation, THWN.
12 2.2 REMOTE CONTROL AND SIGNAL CABLE
13 A. Type 1, 600-Volt Control Cable for Class 1 Remote Control and Signal Circuits, Type TC: 14 10. Individual Conductors: 14 AWG, stranded copper, PVC insulation, nylon jacket, 15 rated 90 degree C dry, 75 degree C wet; color coded per ICEA Method 1, plus one 16 green equipment grounding conductor. 17 11. Assembly: Bundle wrapped with cable tape and covered with PVC jacket. 18 12. Provide grounding conductor in addition to number of conductors to be used.
19 B. Type 2, 300-Volt Control Cable for Class 2 or Class 3 Remote Control and Signal Circuits: 20 13. Individual Conductors: 14 AWG, solid copper, PVC insulated, rated 105 degree C 21 dry, individual conductors twisted together plus bare stranded tinned copper drain 22 conductor. 23 14. Assembly: Bundle covered with overall PVC jacket.
24 C. Type 3, 150-Volt Plenum-Rated Control Cable for Class 2 or Class 3 Remote Control and 25 Signal Circuits: 26 15. Individual Conductors: 14 AWG, solid copper, Teflon insulated, rated 60 degree C, 27 individual conductors twisted together. 28 16. Assembly: Bundled covered with overall clear or red Teflon jacket. 29
30 2.3 COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS CABLE
31 A. For communications systems cable also refer to Section 27 10 15 Communications Cable 32 and Accessories.
09/April/2018 26 05 19 - 2 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 PART 3 EXECUTION
2 3.1 GENERAL WIRING METHODS
3 A. Use no wire smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits and no smaller than 4 14 AWG for control wiring.
5 B. Place an equal number of conductors for each phase of a circuit in same raceway or cable.
6 C. Splice cables only with written permission of Owner. Show splice locations on as- 7 constructed drawings.
8 D. Conductors exposed to oils, greases, vapors, fumes, liquids, or other substances having 9 deleterious effect on the conductor or installation shall be of a type suitable for the 10 application.
11 E. No conductor shall be used in such a manner that its operating temperature exceeds that 12 designated for the type of insulated conductor involved.
13 F. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards.
14 G. Make conductor lengths for parallel circuits equal.
15 H. Where connection of cables installed under this Section is to be made by others, provide 16 pigtails of adequate length for neat, trained, and bundled connections.
17 3.2 INSTALLATION
18 A. Wiring in Raceways: 19 17. No conductors or cables shall be installed in conduits, ducts, or raceways until the 20 raceway has been completed. 21 18. When installing conductors, the electrical contractor shall exercise due care to 22 prevent damage to conductors or insulation. 23 19. Pull conductors into a raceway at the same time. Use UL listed, approved and 24 compatible wire pulling lubricant for pulling 4 AWG and larger wires. 25 20. Install wire in raceway after interior of building has been physically protected from 26 weather and mechanical work likely to injure conductors has been completed. 27 21. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway system before installing conductors.
28 B. Cable: 29 22. Provide protection for exposed cables where subject to damage. 30 23. Support cables above accessible ceilings; do not rest on ceiling tiles. Use UL listed 31 spring metal clips or nylon plastic cable ties to support cables from structure. Include 32 bridle rings or drive rings. 33 24. Use suitable UL listed cable fittings and connectors. 34 25. Install life safety and security systems cable per the requirements of NFPA 72, 35 National Fire Alarm Code.
09/April/2018 26 05 19 - 3 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 3.3 WIRING CONNECTIONS AND TERMINATIONS
2 A. All feeder cables shall be continuous from origin to panel or equipment terminations 3 without running splices in intermediate pull or splice boxes. Where taps and splices are 4 necessary and approved, they shall be made in approved splice boxes with suitable 5 connector. Splice boxes are to be accessible.
6 B. Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper wire splices and taps 7 8 AWG and smaller. For 10 AWG and smaller, use insulated spring wire connectors with 8 plastic caps on lighting and receptacle circuits.
9 C. Terminate control circuit conductors at terminal blocks only.
10 D. Use split bolt connectors for copper wire splices and taps 6 AWG and larger. Tape 11 uninsulated conductors and connectors with electrical tape to 150 percent of conductor 12 insulation value.
13 E. Thoroughly clean wires before installing lugs and connectors.
14 F. Where approved, make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors 15 without perceptible temperature rise.
16 G. Spare conductors are to be coiled and taped and mark as “SPARE”.
17 H. Splice below-grade conductors in handholes or manholes and make watertight with UL 18 approved epoxy resin-type splicing kits.
19 I. Label conductors according to the requirements of Section 26 05 53 Identification for 20 Electrical Systems.
21 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
22 A. Inspect wire and cable for physical damage and proper connection.
23 B. Torque test conductor connections and terminations to manufacturer's recommended 24 values.
25 C. Perform continuity and insulation tests on power and equipment branch circuit 26 conductors. Verify proper phasing connections.
27 D. Life Safety and Security Systems Cable: 28 26. Test cable per requirements of NFPA 72, Fire Alarm Code. 29 27. Test spliced cable shields for continuity and isolation from ground.
30 3.5 WIRE AND CABLE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
31 A. Concealed Interior Locations: Building wire in raceways.
32 B. Exposed Interior Locations: Building wire in raceways.
09/April/2018 26 05 19 - 4 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 C. Above Accessible Ceilings: Building wire in raceways.
2 D. Wet or Damp Interior Locations: Building wire in raceway.
3 E. Exterior Locations: Building wire in raceways.
4 F. Underground Locations: Building wire in raceways.
5 3.6 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE 6 7
ITEM SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT AS INDICATED NO. WITH BID 26 05 19-01 Catalog cutsheets, other descriptive Prior to delivery literature 26 05 19-02 Field test results Before date of Substantial Completion
8 END OF SECTION
09/April/2018 26 05 19 - 5 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 SECTION 26 05 26
2 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
3 PART 1 GENERAL
4 1.1 SUMMARY
5 A. Section includes the requirements necessary to furnish and install: 6 1. Power system grounding. 7 2. Electrical equipment, raceway, and cable tray grounding and bonding. 8 3. Metal piping system bonding.
9 1.2 REFERENCES
10 A. Abbreviations and Acronyms: 11 1. Authority having jurisdiction (AHJ) 12 2. Distributed Control System (DCS) 13 3. Ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) 14 4. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers, Inc. (IEEE) 15 5. National Electrical Code (NEC) 16 6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 17 7. Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) 18 8. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL)
19 1.3 SUBMITTALS
20 A. Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.
21 B. Refer to the Submittal Schedule at the end of PART 3 for a list of submittal requirements 22 for this Section.
23 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
24 A. Provide the Work in accordance with National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 70 25 (National Electric Code - NEC)), as applicable. Where required by authority having 26 jurisdiction (AHJ), material and equipment shall be listed and labeled by a nationally 27 recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable to the AHJ, in order to 28 provide a basis for approval under the above listed agency.
29 B. Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards published by 30 Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) shall conform to those standards and shall have an 31 applied UL listing mark or label.
32 C. Provide materials and equipment acceptable to AHJ for Class, Division, and Group of 33 hazardous area indicated.
09/April/2018 26 05 26 - 1 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 D. Material and equipment must be listed and labeled for its intended purpose, environment, 2 or application, especially when used in extreme climate areas.
3 1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
4 A. Ground and bond electrical systems and equipment including separately derived sources 5 and communications systems per requirements of National Electrical Code (NEC) Article 6 250.
7 B. Provide communications system grounding conductor at telephone utility point-of-service 8 entrance and connect to facility ground ring.
9 C. Provide separate isolated equipment grounding conductor bonded to system at service or 10 separately derived source. Avoid multiple connections to allow reduction of electrical noise.
11 PART 2 PRODUCTS
12 2.1 GROUND RODS
13 A. Copperclad steel, 3/4 inch diameter, 10 feet long, driven full length into the earth.
14 2.2 GROUND CONDUCTORS
15 A. Provide grounding conductors sized as shown on drawings.
16 B. Provide bare stranded copper conductors below grade. For above grade provide green 17 insulated stranded copper. Support conductor as required using straight sections of PVC 18 conduit.
19 C. Above ground provide Green THHN/THWN with 600V insulation where routed in 20 conduit.
21 D. When ungrounded conductors increased in size, or run in parallel proportionately increase 22 equipment grounding conductor per NEC Article 250
23 2.3 TEST WELLS
24 A. Provide test wells as indicated on drawings.
25 2.4 GROUND CONNECTIONS
26 A. Below Grade: Exothermic welded-type connectors by Cadweld, Thermoweld or 27 compression type connectors designed for purpose unless indicated otherwise.
28 B. Above Grade or in Manholes: Exothermic welded-type connectors by Cadweld, 29 Thermoweld or compression type UL listed connectors designed for purpose.
09/April/2018 26 05 26 - 2 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 PART 3 EXECUTION
2 3.1 INSTALLATION
3 A. Do not splice grounding conductors, except in junction or outlet boxes.
4 B. Provide separate, insulated equipment grounding conductor in feeder and branch circuits.
5 C. Provide grounding electrode conductors in 1-inch minimum PVC conduit from separately 6 derived sources to nearest effectively grounded building steel.
7 D. Provide ground conductor(s) to extend facility ground ring to location in each 8 communications room as shown on drawings. Use same type and size conductor used for 9 ground ring; thermite weld pigtail to ground ring.
10 E.
11 F. Provide grounding and bonding at utility company's metering equipment and pad-mounted 12 transformer.
13 G. Bare Grounding Conductors Below Grade: 14 1. Ground Ring shall be buried at a depth of not less than 30 inches below the soil. 15 2. Not in contact with gravel fill or concrete unless making transition from 16 connections above slab to conductors below grade. 17 3. Neatly trained around foundations, footings, and other obstacles.
18 H. Ground Resistance: maximum 5 ohms unless otherwise accepted. Install sufficient ground 19 rods in addition to code-required grounding if necessary. Where more than one rod 20 required, install rods at least 8 feet apart.
21 I. Ground metal sheathing and exposed metal vertical structural elements of buildings. 22 Ground metal fences enclosing electrical equipment. Provide electrical continuity between 23 metal frames and railings supporting push-button stations, receptacles, instrument cabinets, 24 etc., and raceways carrying circuits to these devices.
25 J. Bond metal piping systems and metal air ducts that may become energized to nearest 26 effectively grounded building structural steel member.
27 K. Grounding Connections: 28 1. Connect grounding conductors to ground rods at upper end of rod with end of rod 29 and connection point below finished grade. 30 2. Connect sections of outdoor ground mats (counterpoise) for substations or other 31 equipment below grade. Connect other grounding conductors generally in an 32 accessible manner. 33 3. At telephone manholes, install ground rod outside vault in duct bank trench. 34 Connect ground rod to bonding ribbons inside manhole with a minimum, 6-AWG 35 copper conductor.
09/April/2018 26 05 26 - 3 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 4. Use exothermic welding cartridges and molds in accordance with manufacturer's 2 recommendations. For compression connectors, refer to manufacturer's installation 3 recommendations. Notify Owner prior to backfilling ground connections. 4 5. When making bolted connection to aluminum or galvanized structures, apply 5 corrosion inhibitor such as Ideal NOALOX, or Penetrox A to contact surfaces 6 between cable, connector, and surface of structure.
7 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
8 A. Inspect grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness and 9 proper installation. 10 1. Fall-of-Potential Test: 11 a. Connect instrument per manufacturer’s instructions. 12 b. Locate C2 probe five times longest distance across grid being tested away 13 from grid. 14 c. Place rod P2 at various locations in line between tested electrode and 15 probe C2 and plot results on graph (distance versus resistance). Take 16 sufficient readings to yield portion of plotted curve as being constant (rate- 17 of-resistance change becomes so small with respect to distance as to be 18 insignificant). 19 2. Intercepting Slope Test: 20 a. Provide in lieu of fall-of-potential test for large grids. 21 b. Perform in accordance with Biddle Instruments guidelines. 22 3. Conduct two separate tests on opposite sides of grounding grid. 23 4. Report failure to obtain specified ground resistance to Owner.
24 B. Test ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) receptacles, alarm systems, and circuit breakers 25 for proper connection and operation with methods and instruments prescribed by 26 manufacturer.
27 C. Include reports of grounding system tests in operation and maintenance manuals for 28 review by Owner.
29 3.3 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE 30
ITEM SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT AS INDICATED
NO. BID WITH
26 05 26-01 Field test results Before date of Substantial Completion 26 05 26-04 Operation and maintenance manuals Before date of Substantial (reports of grounding system tests) Completion
31 END OF SECTION
09/April/2018 26 05 26 - 4 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 SECTION 26 05 29 2 3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 4 PART 1 GENERAL 5 6 1.1 SUMMARY 7 8 A. Section includes the requirements necessary to furnish and install: 9 1. Conduit, wireway, cable tray, and equipment supports, including design. 10 2. Fastening hardware. 11 3. Concrete equipment pads. 12 13 1.2 REFERENCES 14 15 A. Abbreviations and Acronyms: 16 1. Authority having jurisdiction (AHJ) 17 2. Fiberglass-reinforced plastic (FRP) 18 3. National Electrical Code (NEC) 19 4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 20 5. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) 21 22 1.3 SUBMITTALS 23 24 A. Refer to the Submittal Schedule at the end of PART 3 for a list of submittal requirements 25 for this Section. 26 27 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 28 29 A. Provide support systems adequate for weight of equipment, conduit, wireways, and/or 30 cable trays, including wiring that they carry. 31 B. Provide the Work in accordance with National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 70 32 (National Electric Code - NEC), as applicable. Where required by authority having 33 jurisdiction (AHJ), material and equipment shall be listed and labeled by a nationally 34 recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable to the AHJ, to provide a 35 basis for approval under the above listed agency. 36 C. Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards published by 37 Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) shall conform to those standards and shall have an 38 applied UL listing mark or label. 39 D. Provide materials and equipment acceptable to AHJ for Class, Division, and Group of 40 hazardous area indicated. 41 E. Material and equipment must be listed and labeled for its intended purpose, environment, 42 or application, especially when used in extreme climate areas. 43 44 1.5 COORDINATION 45
09/April/2018 26 05 29 - 1 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 A. Coordinate size, shape, and location of concrete pads with Section 03 30 00 Cast-in-Place 2 Concrete. 3 B. Generator concrete pad is detailed in Structural drawings. 4 C. Power Company service transformer shall be provided in accordance with the current 5 design requirements located on the Power Company website. 6 7 1.6 DESIGN CRITERIA 8 9 A. Support systems in compliance with project seismic requirements. 10 B. Design per project criteria. 11
12 PART 2 PRODUCTS 13 14 2.1 MATERIAL 15 16 A. Support Channel, Slotted Channel Framing, or Angle: 17 1. Indoor Areas: Painted steel. 18 2. Outdoor Areas: Galvanized steel 19 20 B. Hardware: 21 1. Outdoor Areas: Corrosion resistant. 22 2. Indoor Areas: Cadmium- or zinc-plated steel. 23 24 PART 3 EXECUTION 25 26 3.1 INSTALLATION 27 28 A. Fasten hanger rods, conduit clamps, and outlet and junction boxes to building structure 29 using beam clamps. Do not use spring steel clips and clamps. 30 31 B. Use expansion anchors or preset inserts in solid masonry walls, self-drilling anchors or 32 expansion anchors on concrete surfaces, and sheet metal screws in sheet metal studs. 33 34 C. Do not fasten supports to piping, ductwork, mechanical equipment, cable, conduit, or 35 vegetation. 36 37 D. Do not use powder-actuated anchors without written permission from Owner. 38 39 E. Do not drill structural steel members without written permission from Owner. 40 41 F. Fabricate supports from slotted channel framing, structural steel, angle, or steel channel, 42 rigidly welded or bolted to present a neat appearance. Use hexagon head bolts with spring- 43 lock washers under nuts. 44 45 G. Install channel with open face down to avoid collection of debris.
09/April/2018 26 05 29 - 2 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 H. Install surface mounted cabinets and panelboards as required but with no less than four 2 anchors. Provide steel channel supports to stand cabinets 1 inch off wall. 3 4 I. Bridge studs top and bottom with channels to support recessed mounted cabinets and 5 panelboards in stud walls. 6 7 J. Provide extra care in supporting PVC conduit to protect it from potential damage. 8 9 K. Use fiberglass or special-coated metallic supports in areas subject to corrosives. 10 11 L. Support individual raceways using clamps, wall brackets, strap hangers, or ceiling trapeze. 12 Support multiple raceways/cable trays running adjacent to each other by ceiling trapeze. 13 14 3.2 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE 15 16
ITEM NO. SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT AS INDICATED WITH BID 26 05 29-01 Product data indicating accessory Prior to delivery construction, testing limitations, materials, and ratings. 17 18 END OF SECTION
09/April/2018 26 05 29 - 3 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 SECTION 26 05 33
2 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
3 PART 1 GENERAL 4 5 1.1 SUMMARY 6 7 A. Section includes the requirements necessary to furnish and install: 8 1. Rigid metal conduit (RMC) and fittings. 9 2. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT) and fittings. 10 3. Flexible metal conduit (FMC) and fittings. 11 4. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit (LFMC) and fittings. 12 5. Rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit (PVC) and fittings. 13 6. Electrical nonmetallic tubing (ENT) and fittings. 14 7. Conduit supports, clamps, and straps. 15 8. Warning tape.
16 1.2 REFERENCES 17 18 A. Abbreviations and Acronyms: 19 1. Authority having jurisdiction (AHJ) 20 2. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT) 21 3. Electrical nonmetallic tubing (ENT) 22 4. Flexible metal conduit (FMC) 23 5. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit (LFMC) 24 6. National Electric Code (NEC) 25 7. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 26 8. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 27 9. Polyvinyl chloride conduit (PVC) 28 10. Rigid galvanized steel (RGS) 29 11. Rigid metal conduit (RMC) 30 12. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL)
31 1.3 SUBMITTALS 32 33 A. Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.
34 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 35 36 A. Provide the Work in accordance with National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 70 37 (National Electric Code - NEC), as applicable. Where required by authority having 38 jurisdiction (AHJ), material and equipment shall be listed and labeled by a nationally 39 recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable to the AHJ, to provide a 40 basis for approval under the above listed agency.
09/April/2018 26 05 33 - 1 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 B. Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards published by 2 Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) shall conform to those standards and shall have an 3 applied UL listing mark or label.
4 C. Provide materials and equipment acceptable to AHJ for Class, Division, and Group of 5 hazardous area indicated.
6 D. Material and equipment must be listed and labeled for its intended purpose, environment, 7 or application, especially when used in extreme climate areas.
8 PART 2 PRODUCTS
9 2.1 RMC AND FITTINGS
10 A. RMC: Rigid Galvanized Steel (RGS).
11 B. PVC Externally Coated Conduit: Rigid steel conduit with external 40-mil PVC coating and 12 internal phenolic coating over a galvanized surface.
13 C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: Threaded type, aluminum. Do not use setscrew-type 14 couplings, elbows, sweeps, or nipples. Provide bushings with shoulders, grounding lugs, 15 and insulated nonmetallic throats.
16 D. Hazardous Area Sealing Fittings: Threaded-type conduit seal fittings and sealing compound 17 UL listed for hazardous locations in accordance with the US National Electric Code 18 (NEC) Article 500.
19 2.2 EMT AND FITTINGS
20 A. EMT: Galvanized tubing.
21 B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) FB 1; 22 steel, compression type. Provide bushings with insulated nonmetallic throats and shoulders. 23 Provide grounding lugs for bushings on feeders.
24 2.3 FMC AND FITTINGS
25 A. Conduit: Aluminum.
26 B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: Aluminum.
27 2.4 LFMC CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
28 A. Conduit: Flexible metal conduit with PVC jacket.
29 B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: Metal with PVC jacket.
09/April/2018 26 05 33 - 2 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 C. Ground continuity between end connectors via internal or external bonding jumper or 2 braded strap.
3 2.5 RIGID PVC AND FITTINGS
4 A. Conduit: Schedule 40 PVC.
5 B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: PVC.
6 2.6 ELECTRICAL NONMETALLIC TUBING (ENT) AND FITTINGS
7 A. PVC.
8 B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: PVC.
9 2.7 CONDUIT SUPPORTS, CLAMPS, AND STRAPS
10 A. Metallic Raceway Systems: Galvanized steel, cadmium plated steel, or malleable iron.
11 B. Nonmetallic Raceway Systems: Nonmetallic fiberglass-reinforced plastic m or nylon, 12 polypropylene, or PVC.
13 2.8 WARNING TAPE
14 A. Electrical Warning Tape: 15 1. Heavy-gauge plastic tape for use in trenches containing electric circuits. 16 2. Made of material resistant to corrosive soil. 17 3. 6-inch minimum width red tape with printed warning that an electric circuit is 18 located below tape.
19 B. Communications and Life Safety/Security Warning Tape: 20 1. Metallic tape with tin or nickel coated joining clips furnished by tape manufacturer. 21 2. Communications Circuits: 6-inch minimum width orange tape with printed warning 22 that communication circuit is located below tape. 23 3. Life Safety/Security Circuits: 6-inch minimum width yellow tape with printed 24 warning that life safety circuit is located below tape.
25 PART 3 EXECUTION
26 3.1 PROTECTION DURING CONSTRUCTION
27 A. Following installation, protect products from the effects of moisture, corrosion, and 28 physical damage during construction. Keep openings in conduit and tubing capped with 29 manufactured seals during construction.
09/April/2018 26 05 33 - 3 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 3.2 MINIMUM SIZES
2 A. 3/4 inch minimum for exposed or concealed.
3 3.3 TYPE TO BE USED
4 A. Exterior, Exposed: 5 1. Galvanized steel RMC.
6 B. Interior, Exposed: 7 1. EMT.
8 C. Interior, Wet Locations: 9 1. Galvanized steel RMC.
10 D. Interior, Concealed, Not Installed in Concrete: 11 1. EMT.
12 E. Above Ground, Embedded in Concrete: 13 1. Galvanized steel RMC.
14 F. Underground, Direct Earth Burial: 15 1. PVC. 16 2. PVC-coated steel RMC vertical elbows.
17 G. Underground, Concrete-Encased: 18 1. PVC.
19 H. Corrosive Nonhazardous Areas (Interior and Exterior, Exposed or Concealed): PVC.
20 I. Hazardous Areas (Interior and Exterior, Exposed or Concealed): UL-approved galvanized 21 steel RMC.
22 J. Provide minimum 24 inches of cover over underground conduits in areas where traffic can 23 drive over them. Use concrete reinforced encasement when using PVC for road crossings.
24 K. Under slab Below 5 kV: 25 1. Greater than or Equal to 3-Inch Diameter: PVC, 18-inch minimum depth below 26 finished floor. Provide PVC-coated steel RMC bends for electrical conduits. 27 2. Less than 3-Inch Diameter: PVC, 18-inch minimum depth below finished floor. 28 Provide PVC-coated steel RMC bends for electrical conduits.
29 L. In addition to the requirements in Section 26 05 49 Vibration Isolation for Electrical 30 Systems, for final connection to valves, local instrumentation, and other equipment where 31 flexible connection is required to minimize vibration or where required to facilitate removal 32 or adjustment of equipment, use the following guidelines:
09/April/2018 26 05 33 - 4 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 1. 60-inch maximum lengths of LFMC with minimum 90-degree turn resulting in a 2 loose and compliant connection. 3 2. Provide flexible conduit long enough to allow item to which it is connected to be 4 withdrawn or moved off its base. 5 3. Plenums or Ducts: Maximum 48-inch lengths of LFMC. 6 4. Do not use FMC except for: 7 a. Final connection to non-vapor-tight or nonweather-resistant light fixtures. Do 8 not exceed 72 inches length and provide minimum diameter of 3/8 inch. 9 b. Non-plenum spaces used for environmental air.
10 3.4 SPECIAL LOCATIONS
11 A. Use PVC-coated RMC for electrical installations: 12 1. Where conduit changes from underground, direct burial to exposed. 13 2. Under equipment mounting pads. 14 3. To points at least 5 feet outside building walls and concrete slabs. 15
16 3.5 LOCATION, ROUTING, AND GROUPING
17 A. Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance.
18 B. Route exposed conduit and conduit above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to 19 walls and adjacent piping.
20 C. Maintain minimum 6-inch clearance between conduit and piping. Maintain 12-inch 21 clearance between conduit and heat sources. Maintain minimum 18-inch clearance above 22 ceiling grid.
23 D. Arrange conduit supports to prevent distortion of alignment by wire-pulling operations. 24 Fasten conduit using galvanized straps, lay-in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, or bolted 25 split stamped galvanized hangers.
26 E. Group conduit in parallel runs where practical, and use conduit rack per the requirements 27 of Section 26 05 29 Hangers and supports for electrical systems. Provide space for 28 25 percent additional conduit for each size of conduit in rack. If 25 percent equals a 29 fraction of a conduit, round up to next even number.
30 F. Attach conduit support systems to structure, not to piping or ductwork.
31 G. Provide supports minimum 8 feet on center for conduits smaller than 2 inches.
32 H. Do not fasten conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary 33 conduit support during construction, before conductors are pulled.
34 I. Do not notch structural members for passage of raceways.
09/April/2018 26 05 33 - 5 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 J. Combine homeruns for lighting and general-purpose receptacle circuits if desired, but 2 assume responsibility for conduit size and conductor de-rating. Do not combine neutral 3 conductors or other circuits.
4 3.6 BENDS
5 A. General: Use hydraulic one-shot conduit bender or factory elbows and sweeps for bends in 6 conduit larger than 2-inch size. Provide concentric parallel bends.
7 B. Electrical Conduit Bends: 8 1. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends between boxes. Where 9 four 90-degree bends are required, obtain prior approval from Owner. 10 2. Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Install 11 conduit bodies in readily accessible locations.
12 C. Communications and Life Safety/Security Conduit Sweeps: 13 1. Make changes in direction of communications conduit runs with symmetrical sweeps 14 of the longest possible radius. Provide minimum inside radius for 4-inch 15 underground and underslab communications conduit sweeps of 60 inches, and ten 16 times conduit internal diameter for other runs. 17 2. Install no more than the equivalent of two 90-degree bends between pull points 18 and/or pull boxes. 19 3. Make no bends in flexible conduit that exceed allowable cable bending radius or that 20 significantly restrict conduit flexibility.
21 3.7 CONDUIT INSTALLATION
22 A. Cut conduit square using saw or pipe cutter. Deburr cut ends.
23 B. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings and couplings and fasten securely.
24 C. Damp or Wet Locations: Use conduit hubs for fastening conduit to boxes and equipment. 25 Enter bottom of electrical equipment with conduit.
26 D. Install insulating throat connectors wherever raceway terminates in boxes or cabinets.
27 E. Cap exposed steel communications conduit ends with bushings or smooth collars to protect 28 cable sheath.
29 F. Avoid moisture traps. Where unavoidable, provide junction box with drain/breather 30 configuration.
31 G. Pull Ropes and Pull Tapes: 32 1. Provide pull ropes or pull tapes secured at each end of each empty conduit, except 33 sleeves and nipples. 34 2. Use nylon pull tape with printed footage indicators for each empty electrical conduit.
09/April/2018 26 05 33 - 6 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 3. Identify with tags at each end the origin and destination of each empty conduit, and 2 indicate same on empty or spare conduit on as-built drawings.
3 H. Where conduit penetrates fire-rated walls and floors, seal opening around conduit with UL- 4 listed foamed silicone elastomer compound with rating equal to or greater than wall/floor 5 penetrated.
6 I. Provide watertight seal where underground conduit enters structure through wall or floor.
7 J. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork where possible. Otherwise, 8 route through roof jack with pitch pocket. Coordinate roof penetrations.
9 K. Maximum Size Conduit in Slabs Above Grade: [1/2][3/4] inch. [Do not route conduit to 10 cross each other in slabs above grade.] [Do not route conduits larger than 1/2 inch to cross 11 each other.] Locate conduit in center one-third of slab.
12 L. Wipe plastic conduit clean and dry before joining. Apply full, even coat of cement to entire 13 area that will be inserted into fitting. Let joint cure for 20 minutes, minimum.
14 M. Install concealed, embedded, and buried conduit to emerge at right angles to surface and 15 have no curved portion of bend exposed.
16 3.8 UNDERGROUND DUCTBANK INSTALLATION
17 A. See Section 31 23 23.13 – Excavation and Backfill for Utilities, for trenching and backfill 18 requirements.
19 B. Install top of duct bank maximum 30 inches below finished grade.
20 C. Install conduit with minimum grade of 4 inches per 100 feet, either from one handhole, 21 manhole, or pull box to next, or from high point between them, depending on surface 22 contour.
23 D. Install conduits entering handholes, manholes, and structures at right angles.
24 E. Terminate conduit in end bell at electrical manhole entries and in watertight 4-inch duct 25 terminators at communications manhole entries.
26 F. Stagger conduit joints in concrete encasement 6 inches minimum vertically.
27 G. Separate parallel runs of two or more raceways in a single trench with preformed, 28 nonmetallic spacers designed for the purpose. Install spacers at maximum 4-foot intervals. 29 Band conduit together with suitable banding devices. Securely anchor conduit to prevent 30 movement during concrete placement.
31 H. Do not use union-type fittings.
09/April/2018 26 05 33 - 7 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 I. Bury warning tapes 12 inches above duct bank.
2 J. Do not backfill underground duct banks until Owner has observed them.
3 K. Pull 3-1/2-inch-diameter by 12-inch mandrel through 4-inch communications ducts to 4 verify circularity and sweep radius. Pull standard length mandrels through other 5 underground conduits. Request Owner to observe these activities.
6 L. Provide expansion fittings at structural isolation breaks. Use a ground jumper or bonding 7 strap across expansion fitting attached to conduit ends for ground continuity.
8 3.9 EMPTY RACEWAYS
9 A. Electrical Conduit: Provide permanent cap over each end of each empty raceway.
10 B. Provide pull rope or pull tape in each empty electrical and communications conduit as 11 specified above. Tie pull tape securely to duct plug or wall racking at each end.
12 C. Provide conduit identification at each end.
13 3.10 IDENTIFICATION
14 A. Follow requirements of Section 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems.
15 3.11 GROUNDING
16 A. Follow requirements of Section 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
17 3.12 VIBRATION ISOLATION
18 A. Follow requirements of Section 26 05 49 Vibration Isolation for Electrical Systems.
19 3.13 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
20 A. Follow requirements of Section 26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.
21 3.14 BOXES AND FITTINGS
22 A. Coordinate conduits with Section 26 05 05 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.
23 B. Close unused openings in raceways, boxes, and fittings. 24 END OF SECTION
09/April/2018 26 05 33 - 8 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 SECTION 26 05 49
2 VIBRATION ISOLATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 3
4 PART 1 GENERAL
5 1.1 SUMMARY
6 A. Section includes the requirements necessary to furnish and install vibration control 7 devices, materials, and related items for electrical systems.
8 1.2 REFERENCES
9 A. Abbreviations and Acronyms: 10 1. Authority having jurisdiction (AHJ) 11 2. Double Neoprene Pad (DNP) 12 3. Hanger Neoprene or Glass Fiber (HN) 13 4. National Electric Code (NEC) 14 5. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 15 6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 16 7. Structural Isolation Breaks (SIB) 17 8. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL)
18 1.3 SUBMITTALS 19
20 A. Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.
21 B. Refer to the Submittal Schedule at the end of PART 3 for a list of submittal 22 requirements for this Section.
23 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
24 A. Provide the Work in accordance with National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 25 70 (National Electric Code - NEC), as applicable. Where required by authority 26 having jurisdiction (AHJ), material and equipment shall be listed and labeled by a 27 nationally recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable to the AHJ, 28 to provide a basis for approval under the above listed agency.
29 B. Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards published by 30 Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) shall conform to those standards and shall have 31 an applied UL listing mark or label.
32 C. Provide materials and equipment acceptable to AHJ for Class, Division, and Group 33 of hazardous area indicated.
09/April/2018 26 05 49 - 1 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 D. Material and equipment must be listed and labeled for its intended purpose, 2 environment, or application, especially when used in extreme climate areas.
3 E. Coordinate the size, location, and special requirements of vibration isolation 4 equipment and systems with other trades. Coordinate plan dimensions with size of 5 housekeeping pads.
6 F. Provide vibration isolators of the appropriate sizes and proper loading to meet the 7 specified requirements.
8 G. Supply and install incidental materials needed to meet the requirements stated herein, 9 even if not expressly specified or shown on the drawings, without claim for 10 additional payment.
11 H. Verify correctness of equipment model numbers and conformance of each 12 component with manufacturer's specifications.
13 I. Should electrical equipment cause noise or vibration exceeding the manufacturer's 14 specifications for the unit in question, perform remedial work required to reduce 15 noise and vibration levels.
16 PART 2 PRODUCTS
17 2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATION MOUNT TYPES
18 A. Unit Double Neoprene Pad (DNP): 19 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: 20 a. Amber/Booth, Type NR. 21 b. Korfund Dynamics, Type Korpad. 22 c. Mason Industries, Type WSW. 23 d. Vibration Mountings & Control, Series Shear Flex. 24 2. Form neoprene pad isolators with two layers of 1/4-inch- to 3/8-inch-thick 25 ribbed or waffled neoprene, separated by a stainless steel or aluminum plate, 26 permanently adhered together. 27 3. Neoprene: 40 to 50 durometer. 28 4. Size pads so that they will be loaded within the manufacturer's recommended 29 range. Provide a steel top plate equal to the size of the pad to transfer the 30 weight of the supported unit to the pads and to distribute the load evenly 31 over the surface of the pads.
32 B. Unit Hanger Neoprene or Glass Fiber (HN): 33 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: 34 a. Amber/Booth, Type BRD-A. 35 b. Korfund Dynamics, Type H. 36 c. Mason Industries, Type HD. 37 d. Vibration Mountings and Control, Type RHD or RFD. 38 2. Neoprene-in-shear or glass fiber element contained in a steel housing. 39 Provide neoprene neck bushing or other element where hanger rod passes
09/April/2018 26 05 49 - 2 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 through hanger housing to prevent rod from contacting hanger housing. 2 Diameter of hole in housing sufficient to permit the hanger rod to swing 3 through a 30-degree arc before contacting the hanger housing.
4 C. Isolation Pads – Unit Substations and Large Transformers: 5 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: 6 a. Kinetics Noise Control Inc., Model KIP. 7 b. Mason Industries, Model W. 8 2. Neoprene, neoprene and cork, or precompressed molded fiberglass noise 9 and vibration isolation pads. Provide ribbed or waffle type neoprene pads. 10 Individually coat fiberglass pads with a flexible moisture-impervious 11 elastomeric membrane. Select pads for maximum deflection within their 12 design load ranges for the equipment that they are to support. Provide 13 2-inch-thick pads with a natural frequency of 12 Hz or less, and 4-inch-thick 14 pads with a natural frequency of 10 Hz or less. Provide pads with minimum 15 thickness of 2 inches unless otherwise specified. 16 3. Do not short-circuit isolators by through bolting unless otherwise specified. 17 Provide required restraint with snubbers.
18 2.2 FLEXIBLE ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
19 A. Type A: Field fabricated using a minimum 24-inch length of flexible conduit or 20 cable.
21 B. Type B: Field fabricated using a minimum 48-inch length of flexible conduit or cable.
22 PART 3 EXECUTION
23 3.1 APPLICATION
24 A. Transformers: 25 1. Mount transformers within the building construction on unit DNP isolators. 26 If the transformers are suspended, use Unit HN isolators selected to achieve 27 not less than 0.1-inch static deflection. 28 2. Make electrical connections to isolated transformers using flexible electrical 29 connections. Use Type A connections for conduits less than 1 inch. Use 30 Type B connections for conduits sized 1 inch and larger.
31 B. Dimmers: Mount dimmer cabinets on Unit DNP isolators.
32 C. Mechanical Equipment: Make electrical connections to vibration isolated mechanical 33 equipment using flexible electrical connections. Use Type A or Type B connections 34 for conduits less than 1 inch. Use Type B connections for conduits sized 1 inch and 35 larger.
36 D. Expansion Joints or Structural Isolation Breaks (SIB): 37 1. Conduits Smaller Than 4-Inch: Install expansion-deflection joint where 38 conduit crosses building expansion at column line 14 or SIB joints.
09/April/2018 26 05 49 - 3 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 2. Type A Connections: Use for conduits less than 1 inch. 2 3. Type B Connections: Use for conduits sized 1 inch to 3-1/2 inch. 3 4. Utilize pad isolators for busway, cable tray, wireway, and 4-inch and larger 4 conduits at SIBs. Support one end on 1-inch deflection isolators for 25 feet 5 on one side of SIB.
6 3.2 INSTALLATION
7 A. General: Position isolated electrical equipment so that it is freestanding and does not 8 contact the building structure or other systems.
9 B. Isolation Mounts: 10 1. Align mounts squarely above or below mounting points for the supported 11 equipment. 12 2. If a housekeeping pad is provided, install so that the isolators bear on the 13 housekeeping pad and the isolator base plate rests entirely on the pad. 14 3. Connect hanger rods for vibration isolated support to structural beams or 15 joists, not from the floor slab between beams and joists. Provide intermediate 16 support members as necessary. 17 4. Position vibration isolation hanger elements as high as possible in the hanger 18 rod assembly, but not in contact with the building structure, and so that the 19 hanger housing may rotate a full 360 degrees about the rod axis without 20 contacting objects.
21 C. Flexible Electrical Connections: 22 1. Install Type B connections in a grossly slack U shape or a 360-degree loop. 23 2. Do not tie flexible coupling or conduit to the building structure or other rigid 24 material beyond the point where it takes off from the rigid conduit.
25 3.3 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE 26 27
ITEM SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT AS INDICATED NO. WITH BID 26 05 49-01 Provide a description of products to be Prior to delivery supplied, including product data, dimensions, specifications, and installation instructions.
28 END OF SECTION
09/April/2018 26 05 49 - 4 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO
SECTION 26 05 53
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes the requirements necessary to furnish and install: 1. Nameplates and tape labels. 2. Wire and cable markers. 3. Raceway color coding. 4. Box identification. 5. Signage and warning labels.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Abbreviations and Acronyms: 1. Authority having jurisdiction (AHJ) 2. National Electrical Code (NEC) 3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 4. Power Distribution Unit (PDUs) 5. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) 6. Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.
B. Refer to the Submittal Schedule at the end of PART 3 for a list of submittal requirements for this Section.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide the Work in accordance with National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 70 (National Electric Code - NEC), as applicable. Where required by authority having jurisdiction (AHJ), material and equipment shall be listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable to the AHJ, to provide a basis for approval under the above listed agency.
B. Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards published by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) shall conform to those standards and shall have an applied UL listing mark or label.
C. Provide materials and equipment acceptable to AHJ for Class, Division, and Group of hazardous area indicated.
09/April/2018 26 05 53 - 1 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO
D. Material and equipment must be listed and labeled for its intended purpose, environment, or application, especially when used in extreme climate areas.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Nameplates: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic, minimum 3/16-inch-high black letters on white background. Emergency Egress Lighting Equipment Nameplates: White letters on red background. Generator Distribution System Equipment Nameplates: White letters on orange background.
B. Tape Labels: Embossed adhesive tape with minimum 3/16-inch Kroy black letters on white background.
C. Wire and Cable Markers: Clear, heat-shrink tubing type from Brady LS2000 printer or equal; do not use cloth or wraparound adhesive types.
D. Conductor and Raceway Color Tape: Colored vinyl electrical tape.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates or tape labels.
B. Install nameplates and/or tape labels parallel to equipment lines.
C. Secure nameplates to equipment fronts. Utilize noncorrosive screws for engraved nameplate mounting. Do not use adhesives. Secure nameplate to outside face of flush- mounted panelboard doors in finished locations.
D. Use tape labels for identification of individual wall switches and receptacles, control device stations, and boxes.
3.2 WIRE IDENTIFICATION
A. Provide wire markers on each phase, neutral, and ground conductor in panelboard gutters, pull boxes, outlet and junction boxes, and at load connection. 1. Power and Lighting Circuits: Identify with branch circuit or feeder number. 2. Control Wiring: Identify with control wire number as indicated on equipment manufacturer's shop drawings. 3. Life Safety and Security System Wiring: Identify according to requirements shown on life safety legend drawing.
09/April/2018 26 05 53 - 2 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO
B. Identify conductors for power circuits per the following schedule.
System Voltage Conductor 480Y/277V 208Y/120V Phase A Brown Black Phase B Orange Red Phase C Yellow Blue Neutral Gray White Grounding Green Green Switchleg (lighting) Purple Pink
3.3 NAMEPLATE ENGRAVING SCHEDULE
A. Provide nameplates to identify electrical distribution and control equipment and loads served. 1. Letter Height:
Letter Equipment Information Height Panelboards, Switchboards, Uninterruptible Equipment designation 1/4 inch Power Supplies (UPSs), Generators, Voltage rating and source 1/8 inch Lighting Inverters Individual Circuit Breakers, Switches, Load served and source 1/8 inch Drives, Motor Starters, Switchboards, Transformers Equipment designation 1/4 inch Primary and secondary 1/8 inch voltages, primary source, and secondary load location Automatic Transfer Switches Equipment designation, 1/4 inch voltage rating, normal 1/8 inch source, standby source, and load served, including location
3.4 LIFE SAFETY AND SECURITY SYSTEM DEVICE IDENTIFICATION
A. Label devices with self-adhesive labels, 1/8-inch characters, black letters on white background per life safety drawings.
09/April/2018 26 05 53 - 3 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO
B. Where view of device is obstructed by ceiling tile, place additional label on tile visible from floor.
3.5 RACEWAY COLOR-CODING SCHEDULE
A. Use colored tape at 10-foot intervals to identify raceway by system. System Color 480-Volt, 3-Phase Yellow 208-Volt, Single-Phase and 3-Phase Black Grounding Green General Control Brown and White Generator Power Orange UPS Orange and Red Emergency Egress Lighting from Inverter Red Fire Alarm System Red and White
3.6 BOX IDENTIFICATION
A. Use permanent black markers to identify circuits, destinations, and spares on junction and pull box lids. Clarify detail inside larger boxes. Lettering shall be clear and neat.
3.7 PANELBOARD COLOR CODE
A. Post neutral and phase color codes at each panelboard.
3.8 SIGNAGE AND WARNING LABELS
A. Place signs at service equipment noting location of generator and uninterruptible power supply systems.
B. Provide warning ribbon on primary service laterals 12 inches minimum above underground installation.
3.9 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
ITEM NO. SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT AS INDICATED BID WITH
26 05 53-01 Catalog cutsheets, other descriptive Prior to delivery literature
09/April/2018 26 05 53 - 4 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO
ITEM NO. SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT AS INDICATED BID WITH
26 05 53-02 Sample of labels for each system Prior to delivery
END OF SECTION
09/April/2018 26 05 53 - 5 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 SECTION 26 05 75
2 FAULT CALCULATION AND PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY
3 PART 1 GENERAL
4 1.1 SUMMARY
5 A. Section includes the requirements necessary to perform the following: 6 1. Fault calculations. 7 2. Time-current coordination study 8 3. Arc flash study.
9 1.2 REFERENCES
10 A. Abbreviations and Acronyms: 11 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 12 2. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers, Inc. (IEEE) 13 3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
14 1.3 DESCRIPTION OF STUDY
15 A. Provide fault (short-circuit) calculations for distribution system as indicated on 16 drawings.
17 B. As a minimum, utilize methods and guidelines outlined in American National 18 Standards Institute (ANSI) C37 for equipment, ANSI C57 for transformers, Institute 19 of Electrical and Electronic Engineers, Inc. (IEEE) 242 for protection and 20 coordination, and IEEE 399 for analysis.
21 C. Provide a protective device coordination study of sufficient portions of distribution 22 system as indicated on drawings to ensure protective devices are coordinated. Base 23 study on actual devices installed.
24 D. An initial fault (short circuit) study and recommendations of equipment changes 25 must be submitted and accepted prior to Owner approving affected equipment 26 submittals.
27 E. If a computer tool is used, the studies shall use a computer tool that is available 28 beyond a certain electrical equipment manufacturer, such as SKM Power Tools. The 29 model is to be given to the customer at the end of the project.
30 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS
31 A. Prepare fault calculation and protective device coordination study furnished herein 32 using the electrical equipment manufacturer who furnishes distribution equipment to
09/April/2018 26 05 75 - 1 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 contract site or an independent Electrical Engineer. In either case, Contractor to 2 furnish study prepared by a professional Electrical Engineer licensed in State of 3 Texas.
4 B. Utilize persons experienced in the work for study preparation.
5 1.5 SUBMITTALS
6 A. Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.
7 B. Refer to the Submittal Schedule at the end of PART 3 for a list of submittal 8 requirements for this Section.
9 PART 2 PRODUCTS
10 2.1 GENERAL
11 A. Fault calculation and protective device study may be prepared with network analyzer, 12 digital computer, or by written calculations, but must include complete fault 13 calculations as specified herein for each proposed and ultimate source combination.
14 B. Source combinations may include present and future power company supply circuits, 15 large motors, alternate sources, tie breaker use, lighting inverters, uninterruptible 16 power supplies, and generators.
17 C. The drawings and specifications indicate general requirements for electrical 18 equipment being provided. Changes and additions may be suggested by results of 19 study. Submit proposed changes and additions as part of study.
20 2.2 FAULT (SHORT-CIRCUIT) CALCULATION
21 A. Provide description of calculation methods, assumptions, and base quantities 22 selected, as applicable.
23 B. Provide one-line diagram(s), source impedance data including X/R ratio, bus data, 24 transformer data, circuit resistance and reactance values, and power company system 25 characteristics.
26 C. Provide impedance diagrams or listings, typical calculations, tabulations of 27 calculation quantities and results, conclusions, and recommendations.
28 D. Provide calculation of short-circuit interrupting and momentary (when applicable) 29 duties for an assumed three-phase bolted fault at each medium-voltage switchgear 30 lineup, medium-voltage motor starter, unit substation primary and secondary 31 terminals, low-voltage switchboard lineup, distribution panelboard, branch circuit
09/April/2018 26 05 75 - 2 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 panelboard, transformers, transfer switch, and other significant locations throughout 2 system.
3 E. Provide ground fault current calculations for same system areas as described herein, 4 including associated zero sequence impedances.
5 F. Provide tabulations including fault impedance, X/R ratios, asymmetry factors, motor 6 contributions, short-circuit kVA, and symmetrical and asymmetrical fault current.
7 G. Verify fault current levels are sufficient to operate protective devices.
8 H. Verify equipment ratings exceed associated fault values.
9 2.3 PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY
10 A. Provide time-current coordination curves graphically indicating proposed 11 coordination for system on log-log forms.
12 B. Include with each curve sheet a complete title and one-line diagram with legend 13 identifying specific portion of system covered by curve sheet.
14 C. Include detailed description of each protective device identifying type, function, 15 manufacturer, and time-current characteristics. Tabulate recommended device tap, 16 time dial, pickup, instantaneous, I2t and time delay settings.
17 D. Include on curve sheets the following characteristics: Power company relays and 18 fuses, system medium-voltage equipment relays and fuses, low-voltage equipment 19 circuit breakers and fuses, pertinent transformers, pertinent motors and generators, 20 and other system load protective devices.
21 E. Include at least devices down to largest branch circuit and largest feeder circuit 22 breaker in each distribution board, or panelboard.
23 F. Include adjustable instantaneous settings, impedance grounding protective devices, 24 and ground fault protective devices.
25 G. Include manufacturing tolerance and damage bands in plotted fuse characteristics.
26 H. Show transformer magnetizing in-rush, ANSI transformer withstand parameters, and 27 significant symmetrical or asymmetrical fault current to which device is exposed.
28 I. Select each primary protective device required for transformer winding configuration 29 shown so operating band is within transformer characteristics, including a point 30 equal to 58 percent of ANSI withstand point to provide secondary line-to-ground 31 fault protection. Where primary device is not within transformer characteristics, 32 show transformer damage curve.
09/April/2018 26 05 75 - 3 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 J. Separate transformer primary protective device characteristic curves by 16 percent 2 minimum current margin to provide proper coordination and protection in event of 3 secondary line-to-line faults.
4 K. Provide complete sets of individual protective device time-current coordination 5 characteristics.
6 L. List assumptions made and areas where ideal coordination not possible with 7 equipment involved.
8 M. When similar configurations exist in distribution system only one coordination curve 9 required for each unique situation, but provide summary of settings for every device.
10 2.4 ARC FLASH STUDY
11 A. In the report, provide a listing of arc flash distances and energy levels per National 12 Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 70 E.
13 B. Provide arc flash labels and mount on the equipment.
14 C. Revise if coordination settings are revised from section 3.1 B
15 PART 3 EXECUTION
16 3.1 ADJUSTING
17 A. Submit fault calculation and coordination study in same bound report to Owner for 18 review.
19 B. After review by Owner, make revisions to protective device settings to accomplish 20 conformance.
21 C. Make adjustments to relays and devices.
22 3.2 DEMONSTRATION
23 A. Demonstrate to Owner correct device settings and ratings are made.
24 3.3 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE 25
ITEM SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT AS INDICATED NO. WITH BID
09/April/2018 26 05 75 - 4 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO ITEM SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT AS INDICATED NO. WITH BID 26 05 75-01 Qualifications of person(s) performing Prior to delivery study, including States of registration as a professional Electrical Engineer 26 05 75-02 Methods and software to be used including Prior to delivery evidence of a valid software license. Name and version of software to be used. 26 05 75-03 Initial fault (short-circuit) calculations to Prior to delivery allow equipment selection. 26 05 75-04 Initial deficiencies, less than ideal Prior to delivery coordination, equipment not properly rated, suggestions, other comments. 26 05 75-05 Fault (short-circuit) calculations. Prior to delivery 26 05 75-06 Protective device coordination study. Prior to delivery 26 05 75-09 One-line diagram with each significant bus Prior to delivery or node having a unique number indicating that a fault calculation occurs at this point. 26 05 75-11 Final values and settings. Prior to delivery 26 05 75-12 Electronic copy of data and library files With record documents from software used (list name, version, and date of software). 26 05 75-13 Correspondence with utility, including With record documents utility available fault current contribution. 26 05 75-14 Arc flash labels. Before date of Substantial Completion
1 END OF SECTION
09/April/2018 26 05 75 - 5 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO SECTION 26 08 10
ACCEPTANCE TESTING AND CALIBRATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section specifies testing low voltage power circuit breakers and molded case circuit breakers.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Abbreviations and Acronyms: 1. Direct current (DC) 2. Hertz (Hz) 3. National Electrical Testing Association (NETA) 4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 5. Root mean squared (RMS)
B. Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.
C. Refer to the Submittal Schedule at the end of PART 3 for a list of submittal requirements for this Section.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. National Electrical Testing Association (NETA) membership is required for firm performing tests.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. NOT APPLICABLE
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE
A. General: National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 70B. Institute and maintain following precautions during testing requiring applications of potentials above 30 volts: 1. Erect barricades around testing areas and post warning signs. 2. Station watchmen to ensure unauthorized persons do not approach energized conductors and components. 3. Maintain telephone or voice radio contact between potential injection point and energized remote locations.
09/April/2018 26 08 10 - 1 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO B. Low-voltage Power Circuit Breakers: 1. Preparatory Work: Prior to testing, remove each breaker from its compartment and perform the following procedures. a. Clean, lubricate, inspect, and adjust each breaker in accordance with manufacturer's published maintenance instructions. b. Inspect contacts, arc quenchers, primary and secondary disconnects, current sensors, small wiring, and trip devices. c. Examine contacts for condition, clearance, pressure, and wipe. d. Adjust pressure for equal and minimum contact resistance on poles. 2. Tests: Refer to manufacturer's test instructions. Determine and record the following data: a. Breaker identification, including Project designation, manufacturer's ratings, serial number, trip device type, ranges, and time bands. b. Test each breaker electrically for proper tripping characteristics by passing 60 Hertz (Hz). sinusoidal low voltage current through each pole, one at a time, with test current injection at primary disconnects. 1) Perform tests at operating trip device settings as specified. 2) Include this information in report plus record of settings "as left" after calibration and adjustment of trip devices for conformance with required pickup characteristics. c. Apply sufficient current to actuate each mode of trip device (long time pickup, long time delay band, short time pickup, short time delay band, instantaneous pickup, ground pickup, and ground delay band as applicable). Record test current and elapsed time at tripping for each pole. State whether or not breaker tripping is within manufacturer's tolerances. d. Perform insulation resistance test on each breaker. With contacts closed apply 1,000 volts direct current (DC) and take resistance readings after one-minute energization between each pair of poles and from each pole to breaker frame. 3. Solid State Trips: Verify that adjustable trips are set as indicated in the results from the coordination study and required in Section 26 05 75- Fault Calculation and Protective Device Coordination Study. Test each pole of breaker for correct operation at each trip setting. Replace breakers or trip devices that fail to operate within breaker's published time-current current.
3.2 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
ITEM NO. SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT AS INDICATED WITH BID 26 08 10-01 Submit two bound copies of test reports With operations and maintenance certified by testing technician and approved manuals representative authorized to witness tests.
END OF SECTION
09/April/2018 26 08 10 - 2 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 SECTION 26 09 00 2 3 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR SPECIAL FUNCTION GLAZING 4 5 6 PART 1 - GENERAL 7 8 1.1 SUMMARY 9 10 A. Section includes: 11 1. Control system for use with SageGlass® insulating glass units. 12 13 B. Related Sections: 14 1. Section 08 88 00 “Special Function Glazing.” 15 2. Division 26 - Electrical. 16 17 1.2 DEFINITIONS 18 19 A. IGU: Insulating Glass Unit. 20 21 B. IGU Pigtail: Cable that extends from individual insulating glass units. 22 23 C. Frame Cable: Cable that runs through framing system and connects IGU Pigtail to low 24 voltage wiring on interior of building. 25 26 D. Interior Daylight Sensor: A Photosensor mounted on or near the interior of the framing 27 system to measure the amount of light coming through SageGlass® glazing; used for 28 automatic control of tint level to achieve consistent daylighting. 29 30 E. Exterior Daylight Sensor: A Photosensor mounted on or near the exterior of the framing 31 system to measure available daylight; used for automatic control of tint level to achieve 32 consistent daylighting. 33 34 F. Sensor Cable: Cable that runs through framing system and connects Daylight Sensor to low 35 voltage wiring on interior of building. 36 37 G. SageGlass® Switch: Wall-mounted two-button control interface of SageGlass® glass 38 units. 39 40 H. SageGlass® Controller: Control module for up to 6 SageGlass® IGU's or Daylight 41 Sensors. 42 43 I. I/O Controller: Control module for analog/digital inputs and outputs. 44 45 J. System Integration Module: Programmable control module with a variety of automation 46 interfaces, including optional BACnet and LonWorks modules which allow access to the 47 SageGlass® control system.
09/April/2018 26 09 00 - 1 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 K. Control Panel: Enclosure for SageGlass® IGU controls which mounts to an indoor 2 surface or may be recessed in a wall for flush mounting; includes flush mount cover. 3 4 L. 12-conductor Cable: Cable which runs from the SageGlass® Controller to the Terminal 5 Box (maximum length of 300ft) in installations where more than 125 feet of wiring is 6 required between Control Panels and SageGlass® IGUs. 7 8 M. Terminal Box: Junction Box where 12-conductor Cables are connected to Frame Cables; 9 mounts to an indoor surface or may be recessed in a wall for flush mounting; includes 10 flush-mount cover. 11 12 N. SageBus™: Communications bus between SageGlass® control products. 13 14 O. SageBus™ Cable: Cable which runs between SageGlass® control products allowing 15 communications (maximum length in daisy-chain configuration is 1500ft). 16 17 P. Backplane: An assembly, mounted inside a SageGlass® Control panel, with sockets for up 18 to four SageGlass® controllers and wiring connections for IGUs, power supplies, and 19 sensors. 20 21 Q. 24V Power Supply: A UL listed, NEC Class 2 power supply which provides safe, low- 22 voltage power from the AC mains for use with SageGlass® Controllers. 23 24 R. 12V Power Supply: A UL listed, NEC Class 2 power supply which provides safe, low- 25 voltage power from the AC mains for use with SageGlass® System Integration Modules 26 and Switches. 27 28 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 29 30 A. Basic Controls 31 1. Each SageGlass® Controller controls and monitors up to six SageGlass® IGUs or 32 Daylight Sensors. 33 2. SageGlass® Controller channels will be configured into multiple zones for 34 independent operation of specific areas of the glazing. 35 3. System is configured for four tint levels (fully tinted, fully clear, and two 36 intermediate). 37 38 B. Automation 39 1. SageGlass® controllers will be configured to automatically maintain daylight at a 40 target brightness range by monitoring a Daylight Sensor. 41 2. A System Integration Module will automatically control one or more zones based on 42 some combination of time, solar time (referenced to sunrise, sunset or solar noon) 43 and sensor levels (e.g., light, occupancy, or temperature). 44 45 C. User Interface 46 1. SageGlass® Switches provide local control of one or more control zones to specific 47 tint levels.
09/April/2018 26 09 00 - 2 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 2. SageGlass® Switches permit specific control zones to be locally switched between 2 automatic and manual over-ride modes. 3 4 D. System Integration 5 1. A System Integration Module enables integration with other automation systems 6 using BACnet, LonWorks, and serial interfaces. 7 2. Electrochromic control system is integrated with lighting control system to provide 8 synchronized light management per the Sequence of Operations defined by the 9 design team. 10 a. Occupancy sensor information shall be shared between the lighting and 11 Electrochromic control systems. 12 b. A physical link at the controller level shall be used to connect the lighting and 13 Electrochromic glazing control systems to allow communication and 14 coordination between the two systems. 15 16 1.4 SUBMITTALS 17 18 A. Product Data: SAGE Electrochromics' Product Data sheets including installation 19 instructions. 20 21 B. Sequence of Operations: Provide Sequence of Operations that defines under what 22 conditions (e.g. occupancy, time of day, heating or cooling mode, presence of glare etc.). 23 24 C. Previous projects: Provide information on two examples of prior installations which have 25 been operating for at least one year where the solutions from the lighting control 26 manufacturer and electrochromic manufacturer are successfully integrated. 27 28 D. Shop Drawings: Indicate wiring diagram, connections to Frame Cables, and other related 29 connections. Indicate locations of materials and routing of wiring. 30 31 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 32 33 A. Installer Qualifications: Acceptable to SAGE Electrochromics and capable of preparing 34 data for control systems, based on testing and engineering analysis of SAGE 35 Electrochromics' standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project. 36 37 B. Pre-Installation Meetings: Conduct pre-installation meeting or teleconference with the 38 following parties in attendance: 39 1. Architect, Contractor, glazing contractor, framing manufacturer, SAGE 40 Electrochromics, electrical contractor, automation engineer, and other parties related 41 to Work of this Section, to review procedures, schedules, safety, and coordination 42 with other elements of Project. 43 44 C. Manufacturers of lighting control system and electrochromic glazing must have a track 45 record of working together. They shall provide at least two examples of prior installations 46 which have been operating for at least one year where the solutions from the two 47 companies are successfully integrated. 48 09/April/2018 26 09 00 - 3 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 D. Manufacturers of lighting control system and electrochromic glazing are responsible for 2 delivering the Sequence of Operations as defined by design team 3 4 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 5 6 A. Comply with SAGE Electrochromics' instruction for receiving, handling, storing, and 7 protecting materials. 8 9 B. Deliver materials in SAGE Electrochromics' original, unopened, undamaged containers 10 with identification labels intact. 11 12 C. Store materials in original packaging, protected from exposure to harmful environmental 13 conditions, including static electricity. 14 15 D. All cables supplied by SAGE Electrochromics should be conditioned for 24 hours at room 16 temperature prior to installation and never installed below 32 degrees F (0 degrees C) 17 ambient temperature. 18 19 1.7 PROJECT / SITE CONDITIONS 20 21 A. Verify location of Control Panels and SageGlass Switches within building. 22 23 B. Verify locations of Terminal Boxes (if used) near IGUs. 24 25 C. Verify penetration locations of Frame/Sensor Cables into building. 26 27 D. The SageGlass® control system must be installed in an indoor, climate-controlled 28 environment. 29 30 E. Once installed, cables supplied by SAGE Electrochromics must not be routinely exposed 31 to sunlight, even through glass. 32 33 1.8 WARRANTY 34 35 A. Warrant SageGlass® controls against defects in material or workmanship for a period of 36 five years from the date of shipping of the Controls from manufacturer per the 37 manufacturer's warranty. 38 39 40 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 41 42 2.1 MATERIALS 43 44 A. SageGlass® Panel Mounted Control System: 45 1. SageGlass® Switch: 46 a. Power specifications: 47 1) Peak Power: 1 watt. 48 2) Max input voltage: 12 volts DC. 09/April/2018 26 09 00 - 4 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 3) Max input current: 0.1 amp. 2 b. Dimensions: 3 1) Height: 4.1 inch (10.4 cm). 4 2) Width: 1.75 inch (4.45 cm). 5 3) Depth: 1.0 inch (2.54 cm). 6 c. Optional accessories: 7 1) Bright white designer-style faceplate to fit installed single gang boxes. 8 Supplied by SAGE Electrochromics. 9 2) Single gang boxes to house SageGlass® Switches. Supplied by Electrical 10 Contractor. 11 2. SageGlass® Controller (One SageGlass® Controller required for every 3-6 12 SageGlass® IGUs, depending on the number of sub-panes per IGU): 13 a. Power specifications: 14 1) Electrical Peak Power: 80 watts. 15 2) Maximum Input Voltage: 24 volts DC. 16 3) Maximum Input Current: 3.3 amps. 17 4) Maximum Output Voltage: 16 volts DC. 18 5) Maximum Output Current (per channel): 2.5 amps. 19 b. Dimensions: 20 1) Height: 2.75 inch (7.0 cm). 21 2) Width: 4.25 inch (10.8 cm). 22 3) Depth: 0.38 inch (1.0 cm). 23 3. I/O controller (requires one backplane slot; provides analog/digital inputs and 24 outputs): 25 a. Power specifications 26 1) Electrical Peak Power: 80 watts. 27 2) Maximum Input Voltage: 24 volts DC. 28 3) Maximum Input Current: 3.3 amps. 29 4) Maximum Output Voltage: 22 volts DC. 30 5) Maximum Output Current (per channel): 90 mA. 31 6) Dry Contact Input. One channel of the I/O Controller Card provides 32 5VDC to one terminal of up to 11 independent contact closure inputs. 33 b. Dimensions 34 1) Height: 2.75 inch (7.0 cm). 35 2) Width: 4.25 inch (10.8 cm). 36 3) Depth: 0.38 inch (1.0 cm). 37 4. Backplane (attaches into Control Panel; one required for each one to four 38 SageGlass® Controllers in a Control Panel, depending on IGU size and 39 configuration). 40 a. Length: 3.75 in (9.5 cm). 41 b. Width: 7.5 inch (19 cm). 42 c. Depth: 1.0 in (2.5 cm). 43 5. 24V Power Supply (one required for each Backplane in a panel): 44 a. Power Specifications 45 1) UL Listed, Class 2. 46 2) Max input Power: 110 watts. 47 3) Input voltage: 90-260 volts AC, 50/60 Hz. 48 4) Max output power: 91.2 watts. 09/April/2018 26 09 00 - 5 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 5) Output voltage: 24 volts DC. 2 6) Max output current: 3.8. amps. 3 b. Dimensions 4 1) Length: 3.6" (9.1 cm). 5 2) Width: 3.5" (9.0 cm). 6 3) Depth: 2.2" (5.6 cm). 7 6. 12V Power Supply (one required for each System Integration Module and/or 8 network of SageGlass® Switches): 9 a. Power Specifications 10 1) UL Listed, Class 2. 11 2) Max input Power: 65 watts. 12 3) Input voltage: 90-260 volts AC, 50/60 Hz. 13 4) Max output power: 54 watts. 14 5) Output voltage: 12 volts DC. 15 6) Max output current: 4.5 amps. 16 b. Dimensions 17 1) Length: 3.6" (9.1 cm). 18 2) Width: 2.8" (7.1 cm). 19 3) Depth: 2.2" (5.6 cm). 20 7. System Integration Module: 21 a. Power Specifications: 22 1) Peak Power: 60 watts. 23 2) Maximum Input Voltage: 12 volts DC. 24 3) Maximum Input Current: 1 amp. 25 b. Dimensions: 26 1) Height: 6 inch (15 cm). 27 2) Width: 7.5 inch (19 cm). 28 3) Depth: 1.5 inch (3.8 cm). 29 c. Interfaces: 30 1) RS-232. 31 2) Ethernet. 32 d. Optional interface capabilities: 33 1) BACnet MS/TP or IP. 34 2) LonWorks. 35 8. Exterior Daylight Sensor 36 a. Photosensor. 37 b. Illuminance ranges: 0-1000 fc. 38 c. Power specifications 39 1) Max input voltage: 24V DC. 40 2) Output voltage: 0-10V DC. 41 d. Dimensions 42 1) Diameter: 1.5 inches (5.1 cm). 43 2) Depth: 2.7 inches (3.0 cm). 44 e. Color: White. 45 9. Interior Daylight Sensor 46 a. Photosensor. 47 b. Illuminance ranges: 0-3.2 klux, 0-32 klux, 0-65 klux. 48 c. Power specifications 09/April/2018 26 09 00 - 6 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 1) Max input voltage: 24V DC. 2 2) Output voltage: 0-10V DC. 3 d. Dimensions 4 1) Diameter: 2.0 inches (5.1 cm). 5 2) Depth: 1.2 inches (3.0 cm). 6 e. Color: White. 7 10. Small Panel: 8 a. Dimensions (without cover) 9 1) Height: 23.3 inch (59.1 cm). 10 2) Width: 14.3 inch (36.2 cm). 11 3) Depth: 3.8 inch (9.5 cm). 12 b. Dimensions (including cover) 13 1) Height: 26.2 inch (66.4 cm). 14 2) Width: 17.2 inch (43.6 cm). 15 3) Depth: 4.9 inch (12.5 cm). 16 c. Capacity: 17 1) Three Backplanes or two Backplanes and one System Integration 18 Module. 19 2) Three 24V or 12V power supplies. 20 d. Color: White. 21 e. Includes flush-mount cover. 22 11. Medium Panel: 23 a. Dimensions (without cover) 24 1) Height: 35.3 inch (89.5 cm). 25 2) Width: 17.5 inch (44.4 cm). 26 3) Depth: 3.8 inch (9.5 cm). 27 b. Dimensions (including cover) 28 1) Height: 38.2 inch (96.9 cm). 29 2) Width: 20.4 inch (51.8 cm). 30 3) Depth: 4.9 inch (12.5 cm). 31 c. Capacity: 32 1) Six Backplanes or five Backplanes and one System Integration Module. 33 2) Six 24V or 12V power supplies. 34 d. Color: White. 35 e. Includes flush-mount cover. 36 12. Large Panel: 37 a. Dimensions (without cover) 38 1) Height: 51.3 inch (130.2 cm). 39 2) Width: 17.5 inch (44.4 cm). 40 3) Depth: 3.8 inch (9.5 cm). 41 b. Dimensions (including cover) 42 1) Height: 54.2 inch (137.5 cm). 43 2) Width: 20.4 inch (51.8 cm). 44 3) Depth: 4.9 inch (12.5 cm). 45 c. Capacity: 46 1) Nine Backplanes and one System Integration Module. 47 2) Ten 24V or 12V power supplies. 48 d. Color: White. 09/April/2018 26 09 00 - 7 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 e. Includes flush-mount cover. 2 13. Terminal Box: 3 a. Terminal Box Enclosure: 4 1) Height: 10 inch (25.4 cm). 5 2) Width: 14.4 inch (36.58 cm). 6 3) Depth: 2.5 (6.35 cm). 7 4) Capacity: 4 12-conductor Cables. 8 5) Color: White. 9 6) Terminal block type: Screw terminals. 10 b. Terminal Box Cover: 11 1) Height: 11.25 inch (28.58 cm). 12 2) Width: 15.63 inch (39.7 cm). 13 c. Color: White. 14 d. Includes flush-mount cover. 15 14. SageGlass® AT-410S Solo Output Module Control System (integrated two button 16 switch with a four output controller): 17 a. Power specifications 18 1) Peak Power: 40 watts. 19 2) Maximum Input Voltage: 12 volts DC. 20 3) Maximum Input Current: 3.4 amps. 21 4) Fuse Rating: 4 amps. 22 5) Maximum Output Voltage: 12 volts DC. 23 6) Maximum Output Current (per channel): 1 amp. 24 b. Dimensions 25 1) Height: 4.1 inches (10.4 cm). 26 2) Width: 1.75 inches (4.45 cm). 27 3) Depth: 1 inch (2.54 cm). 28 c. Power Supply: 29 1) UL Listed, Class 2. 30 2) Max input power: 70 watts. 31 3) Input voltage: 90-305 volts AC, 50/60 Hz. 32 4) Max output power: 60 watts. 33 5) Max output voltage: 12 volts DC. 34 6) Max output current: 5 amps. 35 d. Optional accessories 36 1) Bright white designer-style faceplate to fit installed single gang boxes. 37 Supplied by SAGE Electrochromics. 38 2) Single gang boxes to house SageGlass® Switches. Supplied by Electrical 39 Contractor. 40 41 B. Class 2 Wiring: 42 1. 12-conductor Cable: Twelve conductor 16 or 18 AWG cable. Cable is of type 43 Plenum PVC, CMP/CL2P insulation which complies with the typical requirements 44 of the NEC and applicable building codes for Class 2 low voltage DC circuits. 45 2. SageBus™ Cable: Four-conductor cable containing an 18 AWG power pair and a 22 46 AWG twisted/shielded data pair. Cable is of type Plenum PVC, CMP/CL2P 47 insulation and complies with the typical requirements of the NEC and applicable 48 building codes for Class 2 low voltage DC circuits. 09/April/2018 26 09 00 - 8 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 C. 120V AC Wiring: 120V AC,15A or 20A service to each control enclosure. 2 3 4 PART 3 - EXECUTION 5 6 3.1 INSTALLATION 7 8 A. Cross functional team required. 9 10 B. Ensure that equipment, conduit, gang boxes, and other related materials are installed and 11 ready to receive Work of this Section. 12 13 C. Install products per SAGE's instructions. 14 15 D. Install SageGlass® Switches, Interior Daylight Sensors, Terminal Boxes and Panels in an 16 indoor, climate-controlled environment. 17 18 E. Ensure Control Panels and Terminal Boxes are installed so as to be accessible. 19 20 F. Ensure 12-Conductor Cable runs between Control Panels and Terminal Boxes do not 21 exceed the lengths shown in the following table, based on the length of Frame Cables used 22 (top row): 23 Cable lengths in feet Standard Frame Cables 50 75 125 12-Conductor Cable Maximum (AWG18) 200 125 0 12-Conductor Cable Maximum (AWG16) 300 200 0 24 25 G. Ensure total SageBus™ Cable run between Control Panels and SageGlass® Switches is no 26 longer than 1500 feet. 27 28 H. Ensure SageBus™ Cable connects all SageGlass® Switches and Control Panels in a daisy- 29 chain configuration. 30 31 I. Ensure SageBus™ Cable has been properly terminated at each end of line, using the 32 jumpers on the SageGlass® controller, SageGlass® Switch and System Integration Module. 33 34 J. Install SageGlass® Switches in standard single or multi- gang wall mounted junction box. 35 36 3.2 COMMISSIONING 37 38 A. Before start-up of SageGlass® system, conduct visual inspection to verify system is 39 installed per code and in working order. Verify proper wire connections to and from 40 equipment and insulating glass units. 41 42 B. When system is in start-up, conduct an overall system test and verify system is operating 43 per system SAGE's operating instructions. 09/April/2018 26 09 00 - 9 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 C. The electrochromic and lighting control systems shall be commissioned together to verify 2 the Sequence of Operations by the lighting control system and the electrochromic glass 3 manufacturers. 4 5 6 END OF SECTION
09/April/2018 26 09 00 - 10 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO
1 SECTION 26 09 23
2 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
3 PART 1 GENERAL
4 1.1 SUMMARY
5 A. Section includes the requirements necessary to furnish and install: 6 1. Intelligent Lighting controls. 7 2. Occupancy Sensors. 8 3. Timer Switches. 9 4. Photocells/daylight sensors. 10 5. Dimming control.
11 1.2 REFERENCES
12 A. Abbreviations and Acronyms: 13 1. American Wire Gauge (AWG) 14 2. Authority having jurisdiction (AHJ) 15 3. Electrical Testing Lab (ETL) 16 4. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) 17 5. Light emitting diodes (LEDs) 18 6. National Electric Code (NEC) 19 7. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 20 8. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 21 9. Time-of-day (TOD) 22 10. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL)
23 1.3 SUBMITTALS 24 25 A. Action Submittals: 26 1. Shop Drawings: 27 a. General: 28 1) Provide catalog data sheets and pictures for all products listed 29 below. 30 b. Lighting Controls: 31 1) Wiring diagram. 32 2) Contact ratings. 33 3) Functional features. 34 4) Programmable capabilities. 35 5) Enclosure type, dimensions. 36 c. Lighting Contactor: 37 1) Type (mechanically or electrically held). 38 2) Enclosure.
09/April/2018 26 09 23 - 1 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO
1 3) Contact ratings and configuration. 2 4) Coil operating voltage. 3 d. Photoelectric Switches (Photocells): 4 1) Voltage. 5 2) Power consumption. 6 3) Load capacity (watts). 7 4) Contact ratings and configuration. 8 5) Time delay. 9 6) Light operating level controls. 10 7) Enclosure type and dimensions. 11 8) Mounting type. 12 9) Temperature range. 13 10) Features and options. 14 e. Photo Sensors/Controls for Daylight Harvesting Control: 15 1) System description, overall functionality. 16 2) Each component. 17 3) Electrical ratings (voltage, amperage, watts). 18 4) Wiring diagrams. 19 5) Programming. 20 6) Testing. 21 f. Wall box dimmers. 22 g. Dimming systems. 23 h. Occupancy Sensors: 24 1) Type. 25 2) Switching capacity. 26 3) Coverage. 27 4) Time delay AUTO/OFF adjustment. 28 i. Emergency Shunt Relay.
29 B. Informational Submittals:
30 1. Manufacturer’s printed installation instructions.
31 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 32
33 A. Provide the Work in accordance with National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 70 34 (National Electric Code - NEC), as applicable. Where required by authority having 35 jurisdiction (AHJ), material and equipment shall be listed and labeled by a nationally 36 recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable to the AHJ, to provide a 37 basis for approval under the above listed agency.
38 B. Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards published by 39 Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) shall conform to those standards and shall have an 40 applied UL listing mark or label.
09/April/2018 26 09 23 - 2 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO
1 C. Material and equipment must be listed and labeled for its intended purpose, environment, 2 or application, especially when used in extreme climate areas.
3 D. Standard Products: 4 1. Provide materials and equipment of manufacturers regularly engaged in the 5 production of products specified in this section and that are of equal material, 6 design, and workmanship. 7 2. Provide products that have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 8 2 years prior to Bid opening in similar applications under similar circumstances and 9 of similar size. Provide products that have been on sale on the commercial market 10 through advertisements, manufacturers’ catalogs, or brochures during the 2-year 11 period.
12 E. Pre-installation Meeting: 13 1. Occupancy Sensors/Daylight Sensors: Arrange pre-installation meeting with 14 manufacturer’s factory authorized representative at Owner’s facility, to verify 15 placement of sensors and installation criteria.
16 PART 2 PRODUCTS
17 2.1 INTELLIGENT LIGHTING CONTROL
18 A. General: 19 1. Lighting control components for lighting systems are to be suitable for the lighting 20 system specified and compatible for interface with other associated control devices. 21 2. Lighting control components are to be rated for continuous service and operate 22 satisfactorily in every respect. 23 3. Lighting control provider shall analyze reflected ceiling plan to design a detailed 24 sensor layout that provides adequate occupancy and daylight sensor performance.
25 B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 26 1. Acuity Brands. 27 2. Lutron. 28 3. Legrand. 29 4. Hubbell.
30 C. Basic Features: 31 1. Networkable, expandable controller-based system. 32 2. Intelligent lighting control devices shall have individually addressable network 33 communication capability and consist of one or more basic lighting control 34 components: occupancy sensor, photocell sensor, relay, dimming output, contact 35 closure input, analog 0-10V input, and manual wall station capable of indicating 36 switching, dimming and/or scene control. 37 3. The system shall be capable of providing individually addressable switching and 38 dimming control of the following: networked luminaires, control zones to include
09/April/2018 26 09 23 - 3 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO
1 multiple switch legs or circuits, and relay and dimming outputs from centralized 2 panels to provide design flexibility appropriate with sequence of operations required 3 in each project area or typical space type. A single platform shall be used for both 4 indoor and outdoor lighting controls. 5 4. Lighting control zones shall be capable of being networked with a higher-level 6 system backbone to provide time based control, remote control from inputs and/or 7 systems external to the control zone, and remote configuration and monitoring 8 through a software. 9 5. System shall be capable of ‘out of box” sequence of operation for each control zone. 10 6. System shall interface with third party building management systems (BMS) to 11 support two-way communication.
12 D. System Software: 13 1. System shall provide a web-based management interface that provides remote system 14 control, live status monitoring and configuration capabilities of lighting control 15 settings and schedules. 16 2. All system software must be available for automatic download and installation via the 17 internet.
18 E. System Backbone and Integration Equipment: 19 1. System Controller: 20 a. System controller shall be a multi-tasking, real-time digital control processor 21 consisting of modular hardware with plug-in enclosed processors, 22 communication controllers, and power suppliers 23 b. Controller shall perform the following functions: 24 1) Facilitation of global network communication between different areas 25 and control zones. 26 2) Time-based control of downstream wired network devices. 27 3) Linking into an Ethernet network. 28 4) Integration with Building Management Systems (BMS) and Heating, 29 Ventilation, and Air Conditioning (HVAC) equipment. 30 5) Connection to various software interfaces, including management 31 interface, historical database, analytics interface and personal control 32 applications. 33 2. Device shall have a standard and astronomical internal time clock.
34 2.2 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
35 A. When intelligent lighting control units are specified, lighting control devices shall be from 36 the same manufacturer and contain an addressable interface to allow each device to have 37 its own unique address.
38 B. Exterior Photocell Switches: 39 1. Automatic ON/OFF switching photo control. 40 2. Housing: Self-contained, die-cast aluminum, unaffected by moisture, vibration, or 41 temperature changes.
09/April/2018 26 09 23 - 4 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO
1 3. Setting: ON at dusk and OFF at dawn. 2 4. Time delay feature to prevent false switching. 3 5. Field adjustable to control operating levels.
4 C. Occupancy Sensor: 5 1. General: 6 a. Capable of operating with lamp, ballasts, and drivers specified. 7 b. Readily accessible user adjustable controls for time delay and sensitivity. 8 c. Detection Range: 1000 square feet. 9 2. Passive Infrared Sensor: 10 a. Provide sensors that respond to human heat and movement to detect 11 occupants in the coverage area. 12 b. Temperature compensated pyroelectric sensor. 13 c. High immunity to false triggering due to RFI and EMI noise. 14 d. Multi-segmented lens in multi-tier configuration with grooves-in to eliminate 15 dust and residue buildup. 16 3. Ultrasonic: 17 a. Provide sensors which respond to ultrasonic disturbances within as well as 18 outside the line of sight to detect occupants in the coverage area. 19 b. Use advanced signal processing technology to adjust the detection threshold 20 dynamically to compensate for constantly changing levels of activity and 21 airflow throughout the controlled space. 22 c. Provide adjustable sensitivity and time delay response at sensor head. 23 4. Dual Technology: 24 a. Sensors use a combination of passive infrared and ultrasonic technologies to 25 detect occupants in coverage area. 26 b. Provide technology mode selection to allow installer to configure the operation 27 mode between dual technology, passive infrared only, or ultrasonic only 28 functionality. 29 c. No audio dual technology units will be accepted. 30 5. Sensor Mounting: 31 a. Ceiling: Directional coverage 360 degrees. 32 b. Wall: Directional coverage 180 degrees. 33 c. Switch Box: 34 1) Directional coverage 180 degrees. 35 2) Coverage area: At desk top level up to 300 square feet and gross motion 36 up to 1000 square feet. 37 6. High Bay: 38 a. Directional coverage 360 degrees. 39 b. Mounting height: 12 feet to 50 feet. 40 c. Mounting: Conduit threads. 41 d. Bi-level switches turn lights on when occupant enters the coverage area and 42 turns lights either off or to a preset dimmed level after coverage area is vacated 43 for preset time delay.
44 D. Daylight Sensor:
09/April/2018 26 09 23 - 5 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO
1 1. Photoelectric, low-voltage ambient light sensor (blue-enhanced photo diode). 2 2. Compatible with dimming system. 3 3. Field adjustable between 7 and 140 foot-candles.
4 E. Time Switch for Building Exterior Lighting Control: 5 1. Astronomical dial. 6 2. Bypass Switch: Prewired, externally operated ON/AUTO/OFF, for each circuit 7 shown. 8 3. Contact configuration and rating for circuits required. 9 4. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 1 10 5. Reserve power: Spring driven, capable of operating time switch for 16 hours after 11 power failure. 12 6. Wired for use with photocell specified. 13 7. Alternatively: Exterior lighting control may be tied into intelligent lighting system.
14 F. Timer switch for electrical, mechanical and utility rooms 15 1. Tamper resistant with preset time-on interval. 16 2. No minimum load requirement. 17 3. Flicker of lights and/or beep warning at 2 minutes before coutn-down time elapses. 18 4. Digital display of count down.
19 G. Mechanically and Electrically Held Lighting Contactors: Refer to 20 Section 26 29 16 Contactors for requirements.
21 2.3 DIMMING CONTROL
22 A. When intelligent lighting control units are specified, lighting control devices shall be from 23 the same manufacturer and contain an addressable interface to allow each device to have 24 its own unique address.
25 B. Programmable Dimming Control: Provide wall mounted, multichannel, multiscene 26 programmable dimming control module station with remote control capability and 27 adjustable dimming fade rate for control of remote dimming modules. Refer to the 28 drawings for project-specific dimming system requirements.
29 C. Emergency Power Control Device: Provide UL 924 emergency control override device 30 where emergency standby lighting is controlled locally. Provide 277 volt input voltage; 31 interface controls, voltage presence sensing, internal automatic test; rate for up to 15 amp 32 circuit.
33 PART 3 EXECUTION
34 3.1 INSTALLATION
35 A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
09/April/2018 26 09 23 - 6 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO
1 B. Verify finishes and location of exposed components and switches with the Contractor.
2 C. Install lighting control panels to be accessible. Allow space for adequate ventilation and 3 free circulation of air.
4 D. Complete electrical connections to control circuits, network terminations, RS-232 5 connections, analog inputs, and override wiring.
6 E. Building Exterior Luminaires: Photocells switch time clock ON at dusk with time clock 7 switching lights OFF at preset time.
8 F. Dimming Systems: 9 1. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. 10 2. Do not connect ballasts or equipment to dimming system unless acceptable to 11 dimming system manufacturer.
12 G. Occupancy Sensors: Locate and aim sensors in correct location required for complete and 13 proper volumetric coverage within range of coverage(s) of controlled areas per 14 manufacturer’s recommendations. Provide 90 percent to 100 percent room coverage to 15 accommodate all occupancy habits of single or multiple occupants at any location within 16 room(s). Locations and quantities of sensors shown on Drawings are diagrammatic and 17 only indicate which rooms are to be provided with sensors. Provide additional sensors if 18 required to properly and completely cover respective room.
19 H. For intelligent lighting control system furnish manufacturer’s representative at Job Site to 20 inspect installation, test unit and put into service. Provide training as necessary to 21 familiarize Owner’s personnel with operation, use, adjustment, and problem solving 22 diagnosis of system.
23 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
24 A. Test relays and switches after installation to confirm proper operation.
25 3.3 MANUFACTURER’S SERVICES
26 A. Furnish manufacturer’s representative for the following services at jobsite or classroom as 27 designated by Owner for minimum workdays listed below (travel time excluded): 28 1. 2 workdays for installation assistance and inspection of installation. 29 2. 1 workdays for functional and performance testing. 30 3. 1 workdays for plant startup. 31 4. 1 workdays for instruction of site personnel.
32 END OF SECTION
09/April/2018 26 09 23 - 7 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 SECTION 26 22 00
2 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
3 PART 1 GENERAL
4 1.1 SUMMARY
5 A. Section includes the requirements necessary to furnish and install the following low- 6 voltage transformers: 7 1. Dry-type, two-winding transformers.
8 1.2 REFERENCES
9 A. Abbreviations and Acronyms: 10 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 11 2. Authority having jurisdiction (AHJ) 12 3. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) 13 4. National Electric Code (NEC) 14 5. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 15 6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 16 7. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL)
17 1.3 SUBMITTALS
18 A. Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.
19 B. Refer to the Submittal Schedule at the end of PART 3 for a list of submittal requirements 20 for this Section.
21 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
22 A. Provide the Work in accordance with National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 70 23 (National Electric Code - NEC), as applicable. Where required by authority having 24 jurisdiction (AHJ), material and equipment shall be listed and labeled by a nationally 25 recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable to the AHJ, to provide a 26 basis for approval under the above listed agency.
27 B. Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards published by 28 Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) shall conform to those standards and shall have an 29 applied UL listing mark or label or a label from a Nationally Recognized Testing Agency.
30 C. Provide materials and equipment acceptable to AHJ for Class, Division, and Group of 31 hazardous area indicated.
09/April/2018 26 22 00 - 1 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 D. Material and equipment must be listed and labeled for its intended purpose, environment, 2 or application, especially when used in extreme climate areas.
3 E. Manufacturer: Company specializing in low voltage transformers with 3 years’ documented 4 experience.
5 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
6 A. Handle equipment and store in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
7 B. Store in warm, dry location with uniform temperature. Cover ventilating openings to keep 8 out dust.
9 C. Handle transformers using only lifting eyes and brackets provided for purpose. Protect 10 units against entrance of rain, sleet, or snow if handled in inclement weather.
11 PART 2 PRODUCTS
12 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS – DRY-TYPE, TWO-WINDING 13 TRANSFORMERS
14 A. Schneider Electric
15 B. Eaton Corporation
16 C. General Electric
17 2.2 DRY-TYPE, TWO-WINDING TRANSFORMERS
18 A. Dry-type Transformers: National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) ST 20; 19 factory-assembled, air-cooled, dry-type transformers; ratings as shown on drawings.
20 B. Insulation system and average winding temperature rise for rated kVA as follows: Insulation Rating Class Rise, Degrees C 15 kVA and below 185 degrees C 115 16 to 500 kVA 220 degrees C 150 21 1. Obtain required performance without exceeding above-indicated temperature rise in 22 40-degree C maximum ambient.
23 C. Efficiency: minimum efficiency per Code of Federal Regulations 10 CFR 431.196
24 D. Winding Taps, Transformers Less Than 15 kVA: Two 5 percent below-rated voltage, full- 25 capacity taps on primary winding.
09/April/2018 26 22 00 - 2 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 E. Winding Taps, Transformers 15 kVA and Larger: NEMA ST 20.
2 F. Transformers 75 kVA and Larger: Provide 4.5 percent minimum impedance.
3 G. Sound Levels: NEMA ST 20.
4 H. Basic Impulse Level: 10 kV.
5 I. Ground core and coil assembly to enclosure by means of visible flexible copper grounding 6 strap.
7 J. Mounting: Transformers 75 kVA and less suitable for wall, floor, or trapeze mounting; 8 transformers larger than 75 kVA suitable for floor or trapeze mounting.
9 K. Coil Conductors: Aluminum Continuous windings with terminations brazed or welded.
10 L. Enclosure: 11 1. Case or enclosure shall be provided with a noncombustible moisture resistant case or 12 enclosure that provides protection against the accidental insertion of foreign objects. 13 2. NEMA ST 20, Type 1: Provide lifting eyes or brackets. 14 3. Heavy-gauge steel with wiring compartment suitable for conduit entry and large 15 enough to allow convenient wiring. 16 4. On units rated 15 kVA and below, totally enclosed, nonventilated, NEMA 3R, 17 enclosure construction, with lifting eyes. 18 5. On units rated 30 kVA and above, ventilated, NEMA 2, drip proof enclosure 19 construction with lifting holes. Protect ventilation openings against falling dirt. 20 6. Isolate core and coil from enclosure using vibration-absorbing mounts.
21 M. Nameplate: Include transformer connection data.
22 2.3 FACTORY TESTING
23 A. Perform the following standard factory tests on equipment provided under this Section. 24 Test in accordance with latest version of American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 25 and NEMA standards. 26 1. Ratio tests at rated voltage connection and at tap connections. 27 2. Polarity and phase relation tests on rated voltage connection. 28 3. Applied potential tests. 29 4. Induced potential test. 30 5. No-load and excitation current at rated voltage on rated voltage connection.
31 PART 3 EXECUTION
32 3.1 INSTALLATION
33 A. Set transformer plumb and level.
09/April/2018 26 22 00 - 3 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 B. Use liquidtight, flexible conduit, 2-foot minimum length, for connections to transformer 2 case. Make conduit connections to side panel of enclosure.
3 C. Mount transformers on vibration isolating pads suitable for isolating transformer noise 4 from building structure. Reference Section 26 05 49 Vibration Isolation for Electrical 5 Systems.
6 3.2 TRANSFORMER TAPS
7 A. Set initial transformer taps up one tap to increase secondary voltage.
8 B. At project completion measure primary and secondary voltages and adjust taps.
9 C. Keep 120V outputs between 120-125V and 277V outputs between 277-290V.
10 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
11 A. Check for damage.
12 B. Clean transformer of debris inside and out.
13 C. Tighten connections prior to energizing transformer.
14 3.4 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE 15
ITEM SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT AS INDICATED NO. WITH BID 26 22 00-01 Catalog cut-sheets, other descriptive Prior to delivery literature 26 22 00-08 Factory testing results Prior to delivery 26 22 00-09 Operation and maintenance manuals With operations and maintenance manuals
16 END OF SECTION
09/April/2018 26 22 00 - 4 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 SECTION 26 24 13
2 SWITCHBOARDS 3 4 5 PART 1 GENERAL 6 7 1.1 SUMMARY 8 9 A. Section includes the requirements necessary to furnish and install main switchboards. 10 11 1.2 REFERENCES 12 13 A. Abbreviations and Acronyms: 14 1. Alternating current (AC) 15 2. Alternating current / direct current (AC/DC) 16 3. American Wire Gauge (AWG) 17 4. Asea Brown Boveri (ABB) 18 5. Authority having jurisdiction (AHJ) 19 6. Control power transformer (CPT) 20 7. National Electric Code (NEC) 21 8. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 22 9. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 23 10. Service entrance (SE) 24 11. Synthetic Insulated Switchboard (SIS) 25 12. Total harmonic distortion (THD) 26 13. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) 27 14. Volt alternating current (VAC) 28 15. Volts direct current (VDC) 29 30 1.3 SUBMITTALS 31 32 A. Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals. 33 34 B. Refer to the Submittal Schedule at the end of PART 3 for a list of submittal requirements 35 for this Section. 36 37 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 38 39 A. Provide the Work in accordance with National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 70 40 (National Electric Code - NEC), as applicable. Where required by authority having 41 jurisdiction (AHJ), material and equipment shall be listed and labeled by a nationally 42 recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable to the AHJ, to provide a 43 basis for approval under the above listed agency. 44 45 B. Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards published by 46 Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) shall conform to those standards and shall have an 47 applied UL listing mark or label.
09/April/2018 26 24 13 - 1 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 C. Provide materials and equipment acceptable to AHJ for Class, Division, and Group of 2 hazardous area indicated. 3 4 D. Material and equipment must be listed and labeled for its intended purpose, environment, 5 or application, especially when used in extreme climate areas. 6 7 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 8 9 A. Protect switchboards from moisture by using appropriate heaters as instructed by the 10 manufacturer. 11 12 B. Deliver switchboard sections in 60-inch maximum width shipping splits, individually 13 wrapped for protection, and mounted on shipping skids. 14 15 C. Store switchboard sections in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an 16 additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, 17 construction debris, and traffic. 18 19 D. Handle switchboard sections in accordance with National Electrical Manufacturers 20 Association (NEMA) and manufacturer’s written instructions. Lift only with lugs provided 21 for the purpose. Handle carefully to avoid damage to switchboard internal components, 22 enclosure, and finish. 23 24 1.6 EXTRA STOCK 25 26 A. Spare Fuses: Provide two sets each spare fuses for each size and type. 27 28 PART 2 PRODUCTS 29 30 2.1 SWITCHBOARDS 31 32 A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 33 1. Square D. 34 2. Eaton. 35 3. General Electric. 36 37 B. Switchboard Construction and Ratings: 38 1. Factory-assembled, dead-front, metal-enclosed, and self-supporting switchboard 39 assembly complete from incoming line terminals to load-side terminations. Provide 40 sections that align at front and rear. Provide side, top, front, and rear covers with 41 removable captive screw-on plates having formed edges on sides. Provide front 42 plates that are sectionalized, removable, made from steel with formed edges on sides. 43 2. Enclosure: Type as per drawings. 44 3. Switchboard Height: 90 inches nominal, excluding floor sills, lifting members, and 45 pull boxes. 46 4. Switchboard Ratings and Configuration: 47 a. Integrated Equipment Short-circuit Rating: As shown on the drawings. 48 b. Bus Voltage and Ampere Ratings: As shown on the drawings.
09/April/2018 26 24 13 - 2 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 c. Configuration: As shown on the drawings and as listed on schedule. 2 d. Frequency: 60 Hz. 3 5. Service: Provide switchboards UL-labeled for use as SE equipment. 4 6. Enclosure: NEMA Type 1non-walk-in type enclosure. Provide 120 VAC space 5 heaters in each section. 6 7. Provide stepdown transformer with overcurrent protection for heaters. 7 8. Line Terminations: Accessible from the front of the switchboards. 8 9. Load Terminations: Accessible from the front of the switchboards. 9 10. Individually mount each main device. 10 11. Group mount each distribution device. 11 12. Isolate the sides of each compartment with steel barriers. 12 13. Cable Entrance: Top. 13 14. Auxiliary section for fire pump connection: Same construction as switchboard and 14 located ahead of the main circuit breaker. Isolated compartment with lug 15 connections to line side of main bus per NEC Article 695. 16 17 C. Bus Work: 18 1. Bus Material: Silver-plated copper, sized in accordance with NEMA PB 2. 19 2. Bus Connections: Bolted, accessible from front for maintenance. Provide complete 20 bus, device supports, mounting, and connection for distribution devices shown as 21 provision for future devices. 22 3. Bus Arrangement: Phase A-B-C, left to right, top to bottom, and front to rear, as 23 viewed from the front. Provide a main horizontal bus with a continuous current 24 rating as shown. Provide main bus with full capacity through each section and with 25 provisions for future extension. 26 4. Where indicated, provide neutral bus extending the entire length of the switchboard 27 of the same material as the main bus and a continuous current rating 100 percent of 28 the main horizontal bus rating. 29 5. Provide a 2-inch by ¼-inch tin-plated copper ground bus through the length of the 30 switchboard, bolted to each vertical section. Provide a ground lug for one 4/0 AWG 31 bare copper conductor on the bus. 32 33 D. Mimic Bus: Show bussing, connections, and devices in single-line form on the front panels 34 of the switchboard using red paint. 35 36 E. Overcurrent Protective Devices: 37 1. Solid-State Molded-Case Circuit Breakers: Provide with true rms solid-state 38 electronic programmer and positive flux-transfer trip device. Provide fixed mounted 39 breakers, manually operated, main 100 percent rated, feeders 80 percent rated. 40 Provide operating handle capable of being padlocked in the off position. Provide 41 breakers with the following trip functions: 42 a. Current Setting: Adjustable. 43 b. Long-time Pickup: Fixed. 44 c. Long-time Delay: Fixed. 45 d. Long-time timing light. 46 e. Short-time Pickup: Adjustable. 47 f. Short-time Delay: Adjustable. 48 g. Short-time delay I2t ramp.
09/April/2018 26 24 13 - 3 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 h. Instantaneous Pickup: Adjustable. 2 i. Ground Fault Pickup: Adjustable. 3 j. Ground Fault Delay: Adjustable. 4 k. Residual type ground fault system. 5 2. Molded-case Circuit Breakers: Provide circuit breakers, fixed mounted, with integral 6 thermal trip. Provide fixed magnetic trip on 150-ampere and smaller frames; 7 adjustable on 225-ampere and larger frames. 8 3. Solid-state Digital Metering and Protection: 9 a. Microprocessor based, true rms sensing for measurement of electrical 10 parameters, and autorange display of monitored functions. Provide the 11 following minimum metering and protection features: 12 1) Metering: 13 a) AC line current (per phase). 14 b) AC line-to-line voltage (three-phase). 15 c) AC line-to-neutral voltage (three-phase, four-wire). 16 d) Watts. 17 e) VARS. 18 f) Power factor. 19 g) Peak demand. 20 h) Frequency. 21 i) Watt hours. 22 j) Total harmonic distortion (THD). 23 2) Monitor and Protection: 24 a) Voltage phase loss. 25 b) Current phase loss. 26 c) Voltage phase unbalance. 27 d) Phase reversal. 28 e) Undervoltage/overvoltage. 29 b. Provide data display at the unit by selecting individual parameters using a 30 membrane push-button operator panel. Provide communication of measured 31 data to a remote location over a two-wire network using standard equipment 32 furnished with the system. 33 c. Provide alarm/trip indication by powering LEDs which show alarm or trip 34 conditions. 35 d. Manufacturers: Cutler-Hammer IQ Data Plus 2 or equivalent GE, Square D, 36 Power Measurements, or ABB. 37 38 F. Accessories: 39 1. Terminations: Provide long-barrel compression-type lugs suitable for copper 40 conductors. Provide lugs suitable for 75 degree C-rated conductors. 41 2. Provide mechanical key interlocks where indicated on the drawings, interlocking as 42 indicated. 43 3. Provide nameplates in accordance with Section 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical 44 Systems. 45 4. Provide fitted spaces where indicated on the drawings. 46
09/April/2018 26 24 13 - 4 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 G. Factory Finishes: 2 1. Clean surfaces before applying paint. 3 2. Apply corrosion-resistant primer to surfaces. 4 3. Apply finish coat of baked enamel paint to 3 mils thick. 5 4. Finish Color: Manufacturer’s standard; Type 61, light gray. 6 7 PART 3 EXECUTION 8 9 3.1 INSTALLATION 10 11 A. Install switchboard in locations shown on the drawings in accordance with manufacturer's 12 written instructions. 13 14 B. Secure switchboard securely to floor or mounting pads with anchor bolts, Philips Drill 15 Company concrete anchors, or as required by manufacturer. 16 17 C. Tighten accessible bus connections and mechanical fasteners after placing switchboard. 18 19 D. Provide nameplates in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 05 53 Identification 20 for Electrical Systems for each individual circuit breaker that identifies its purpose or use. 21 22 3.2 NEUTRAL CONDUCTOR TERMINATIONS 23 24 A. Terminate neutral conductors on individual terminals unless conductors are paralleled and 25 terminals are rated for connection of more than one conductor. 26 27 3.3 ARC FLASH POTENTIAL 28 29 A. Provide arc flash potential labeling per NEC, CEC and NFPA 70E. 30 31 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING 32 33 A. Adjust operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement. 34 35 B. Touch up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finish. 36 37 C. Adjust trip and time-delay settings to values as indicated in Section 26 05 75 Fault 38 Calculation and Protective Device Coordination Study. 39 40 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 41 42 A. Inspect completed installation for physical damage, proper alignment, anchorage, and 43 grounding. 44 45 B. Measure insulation resistance of each bus section phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground for 46 1 minute each at a test voltage of 1,000 Volts, and a minimum acceptable value for 47 insulation resistance of 2 megohms.
09/April/2018 26 24 13 - 5 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 C. Check tightness of accessible bolted bus joints using a calibrated torque wrench. Provide 2 tightness in accordance with manufacturer's recommended values. 3 4 3.6 MANUFACTURER’S SERVICES 5 6 A. Furnish manufacturer’s representative for the following services at jobsite or classroom as 7 designated by Owner for minimum work-days listed below (travel time excluded): 8 1. 2 work-days for installation assistance and inspection of installation. 9 2. 2 work-days for functional and performance testing. 10 3. 2 work-days for plant startup. 11 4. 2 work-days for instruction of site personnel. 12 13 B. Manufacturer’s Certification: Provide a qualified factory-trained manufacturer’s 14 representative to certify in writing that the equipment has been installed, adjusted, and 15 tested in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. 16 17 3.7 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE 18
ITEM SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT AS INDICATED NO. WITH BID 26 24 13-01 Sketch with maximum external dimensions. Prior to delivery 26 24 13-02 Shipping weight. Prior to delivery 26 24 13-03 Size and number of bus bars per phase, Prior to delivery neutral, and ground. 26 24 13-04 Electrical characteristics including voltage, Prior to delivery frame size, trip ratings, and integrated equipment short-circuit rating. 26 24 13-05 Include front and side views of enclosures Prior to delivery with overall dimensions shown, including shipping splits. 26 24 13-06 Conduit entrance locations and Prior to delivery requirements. 26 24 13-07 Switchboard instrument details, including Prior to delivery complete schematic and wiring diagrams. Instructions for handling and installation of switchboard. 26 24 13-08 Written verification of the power Prior to delivery company's approval of the design. 26 24 13-09 Provide 3 certified copies of factory test With operations and reports prior to shipment. maintenance manuals
09/April/2018 26 24 13 - 6 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO ITEM SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT AS INDICATED NO. WITH BID 26 24 13-10 3 copies of the manufacturer’s With operations and representative’s field certification. maintenance manuals 26 24 13-11 Maintenance instructions for cleaning With operations and methods, cleaning materials recommended, maintenance manuals instructions for circuit breaker removal, replacement, testing and adjusting, and lubrication. 26 24 13-12 Record drawings including a front view, Prior to delivery plan view, elementary diagram, device summary, and complete wiring diagrams.
1 END OF SECTION
09/April/2018 26 24 13 - 7 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 SECTION 26 24 16
2 PANELBOARDS 3 4 5 PART 1 GENERAL 6 7 1.1 SUMMARY 8 9 A. Section includes: 10 1. Distribution panelboards. 11 2. Lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboards. 12 13 B. Panelboard Types and Classes 14 1. Type I – Circuit Breaker Equipped 15 2. Class 1 – Panelboard 16 17 1.2 REFERENCES 18 19 A. Abbreviations and Acronyms: 20 1. Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) 21 2. National Electric Code (NEC) 22 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 23 4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 24 5. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) 25 26 B. References Standards: 27 1. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 250 28 2. NEMA PB1 29 3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 70 30 4. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) 489 31 5. UL 67 32 6. Federal Specification - W-P-115C Panel, Power Distribution 33 34 1.3 SUBMITTALS 35 36 A. Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals. 37 38 B. Refer to the Submittal Schedule at the end of PART 3 for a list of submittal 39 requirements for this Section. 40 41 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 42 43 A. Provide the Work in accordance with National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 44 70 (National Electric Code - NEC), as applicable. Where required by authority 45 having jurisdiction (AHJ), material and equipment shall be listed and labeled by a 46 nationally recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable to the AHJ, 47 to provide a basis for approval under the above listed agency.
09/April/2018 26 24 16 - 1 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 B. Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards published by 2 Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) shall conform to those standards and shall have 3 an applied UL listing mark or label. 4 5 C. Provide materials and equipment acceptable to AHJ for Class, Division, and Group 6 of hazardous area indicated. 7 8 D. Material and equipment must be listed and labeled for its intended purpose, 9 environment, or application, especially when used in extreme climate areas. 10 11 E. Ensure the manufacturer of the assembly is the manufacturer of the major 12 components within the assembly and has produced similar electrical equipment for a 13 minimum period of 5 years. 14 15 1.5 SPARE PARTS 16 17 A. Keys: Furnish two for each panelboard to Owner. 18 19 PART 2 PRODUCTS 20 21 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURES – PANELBOARDS 22 23 A. Square D. 24 25 B. Eaton. 26 27 C. General Electric Company. 28 29 2.2 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS 30 31 A. Panelboards: 32 1. Type I, Class 1 Circuit Breaker type. 33 34 B. Enclosure: National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) PB 1, Type 1; 35 cabinet size, 9 1/2” inches deep, 26 inches wide (minimum). 36 37 C. Provide cabinet front with screw cover and hinged door with flush lock. Finish in 38 manufacturer's standard gray enamel. 39 40 D. Provide panelboards with copper bus, ratings on drawings. Provide copper ground 41 bus in panelboards. 42 43 E. Minimum Integrated Short-circuit Rating: 10,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 44 208 Volt panelboards; 22,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 480 Volt panelboards or 45 as shown on drawings. Provide fully rated circuit breakers, series or cascade type 46 ratings are not allowed. 47
09/April/2018 26 24 16 - 2 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 F. Molded-case Circuit Breakers: Provide bolt-on-type circuit breakers with integral 2 thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole. Provide circuit breakers UL- 3 listed as Type HACR for air-conditioning equipment branch circuits. Handle 4 lockable in off position. 5 6 G. When indicated, provide 100 percent rated circuit breakers. 7 8 H. Where indicated, provide neutral bus bar of the same material as the phase bus bars 9 and a continuous current rating 200 percent of the phase bus bars. Provide at least 10 one terminal screw for each branch circuit. 11 12 I. Terminations: Provide mechanical setscrew compression-type lugs suitable for 13 copper conductors. Provide lugs suitable for 75-degree C rated conductors. 14 15 J. Provide panelboard and individual device nameplates in accordance with 16 Section 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems. 17 18 2.3 BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS 19 2.4 20 A. Lighting and Appliance Branch Circuit Panelboards: Type I, Class 1 Circuit Breaker 21 type. 22 23 B. Enclosure: Type 1. 24 25 C. Cabinet Size: 5 3/4 inches deep; 20 inches wide. 26 27 D. Provide surface cabinet front with typewritten directory, trim clamps, hinged door 28 and flush lock all keyed alike. Finish in manufacturer's standard gray enamel. 29 30 E. Provide panelboards with copper bus, ratings on drawings. Provide copper ground 31 bus in panelboards. 32 33 F. Minimum Integrated Short-circuit Rating: 10,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 34 208 Volt panelboards; 14,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 480 Volt panelboards or 35 as shown on drawings. 36 37 G. Molded-case Circuit Breakers: [Bolt-on-type thermal magnetic trip circuit breakers 38 with common trip handle for all poles. Provide circuit breakers UL-listed as 39 Type SWD and HID for lighting circuits. Provide UL, Class A, ground fault 40 interrupter circuit breakers where scheduled on drawings. Provide 30 mA ground 41 fault interrupter circuit breakers for heat trace loads. Provide circuit breakers UL- 42 listed as Type HACR for air-conditioning equipment branch circuits. Provide fully 43 rated circuit breakers, series or cascade type ratings are not allowed. 44 45 H. Where indicated, provide neutral bus bar of the same material as the phase bus bars 46 and a continuous current rating 100 percent of the phase bus bars. Provide at least 47 one terminal screw for each branch circuit. 48
09/April/2018 26 24 16 - 3 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 I. Terminations: Provide mechanical setscrew compression-type lugs suitable for 2 copper conductors. Provide lugs suitable for 75-degree C rated conductors. 3 J. Nameplates: Laminated plastic with engraved letters on each unit. See 4 Section 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems. 5 6 K. Provide standard circuit inventory holders. 7 8 L. Refer to panel schedules on the drawings for specific requirements. 9 10 PART 3 EXECUTION 11 12 3.1 INSTALLATION 13 14 A. Install panelboards plumb, vertical unless impractical, and in conformance with 15 NEMA requirements. 16 17 B. Height: 78 inches to top. 18 19 C. Adjust trim to cover openings. 20 21 D. Provide filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards. 22 23 E. Provide typed circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Revise directory 24 to reflect circuiting changes required to balance phase loads. 25 26 F. Stub five empty 1-inch conduit to accessible location above ceiling out of each 27 recessed unit. 28 29 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 30 31 A. Measure steady-state load currents at each panelboard feeder. Where the difference 32 at any panelboard between phases exceed 20 percent, rearrange circuits to balance 33 the phase loads within 20 percent. Take care to maintain proper phasing for 34 multiwire branch circuits. 35 36 B. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: Inspect for physical damage, proper alignment, 37 anchorage, and grounding. Check proper installation and tightness of connections 38 for circuit breakers, fusible switches, and fuses. 39 40 3.3 PROTECTION DURING CONSTRUCTION 41 42 A. Store products specified in this Section in a dry location. Following installation, 43 protect products from the effects of moisture, corrosion, and physical damage during 44 construction. 45 46 3.4 GROUND BUS INSTALLATION 47 48 A. Install ground bus in accessible location.
09/April/2018 26 24 16 - 4 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 2 B. Ground wires to be taken to individual terminals unless terminals are parallel rated. 3 4 3.5 ARC FLASH POTENTIAL 5 6 A. Provide arc flash potential warning labeling on equipment in accordance with NEC. 7 8 3.6 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE 9
ITEM SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT AS INDICATED NO. WITH BID 26 24 16-01 Characteristics, including dimensions, Prior to delivery enclosure type, weight, outline and support point dimensions, main bus ampacity, integrated short-circuit current rating, circuit breaker and fusible switch arrangement, and sizes. 26 24 16-06 Operation and maintenance instructions With operations and including descriptive bulletins. maintenance manuals 26 24 16-07 Test results Provide factory testing results per UL 67.
10 END OF SECTION
09/April/2018 26 24 16 - 5 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 SECTION 26 27 26
2 WIRING DEVICES 3 4 PART 1 GENERAL 5 6 1.1 SUMMARY 7 8 A. Section includes the requirements necessary to furnish and install: 9 1. Wall switches. 10 2. Wall dimmers. 11 3. Receptacles. 12 4. Floor-mounted service fittings. 13 5. Device plates and box covers. 14 6. Cords and caps. 15 16 1.2 REFERENCES 17 18 A. Abbreviations and Acronyms: 19 1. Alternating current (AC) 20 2. American Disabilities Act (ADA) 21 3. Arc fault circuit interrupter (AFCI) 22 4. Authority having jurisdiction (AHJ) 23 5. Corrosion-resistant (CRE) 24 6. Ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) 25 7. Leakage current detection and interruption (LCDI) 26 8. National Electric Code (NEC) 27 9. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 28 10. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 29 11. Transient voltage surge suppression (TVSS) 30 12. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) 31 13. Single Pole Single Throw (SPST) 32 14. Double Pole Double Throw (DPDT) 33 34 1.3 SUBMITTALS 35 36 A. Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals. 37 38 B. Refer to the Submittal Schedule at the end of PART 3 for a list of submittal requirements 39 for this Section. 40 41 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 42 43 A. Provide the Work in accordance with National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 70 44 (National Electric Code - NEC), as applicable. Where required by authority having 45 jurisdiction (AHJ), material and equipment shall be listed and labeled by a nationally 46 recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable to the AHJ, to provide a 47 basis for approval under the above listed agency.
09/April/2018 26 27 26 - 1 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 B. Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards published by 2 Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) shall conform to those standards and shall have an 3 applied UL listing mark or label. 4 5 C. Provide materials and equipment acceptable to AHJ for Class, Division, and Group of 6 hazardous area indicated. 7 8 D. Material and equipment must be listed and labeled for its intended purpose, environment, 9 or application, especially when used in extreme climate areas. 10 11 PART 2 PRODUCTS 12 13 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 14 15 A. Wall Switches: 16 1. Bryant. 17 2. General Electric. 18 3. Hubbell. 19 4. Leviton. 20 5. Pass and Seymour. 21 6. Eagle. 22 7. Arrow Hart. 23 8. Crouse-hinds/Appleton/Killark for classified area installation. 24 25 B. Wall Dimmers: Refer to Section 26 09 23 – Lighting Control Devices 26 27 C. Receptacles: 28 1. Bryant. 29 2. General Electric. 30 3. Hubbell. 31 4. Leviton. 32 5. Pass and Seymour. 33 6. Eagle. 34 7. Arrow Hart. 35 8. Crouse-hinds/Appleton/Killark for classified area installation. 36 37 D. Floor-Mounted Service Fittings: 38 1. Legrand 39 2. Bryant. 40 3. General Electric. 41 4. Hubbell. 42 5. Leviton. 43 6. Pass and Seymour. 44 45 E. Device Plates and Box Covers: 46 1. Bryant. 47 2. General Electric. 48 3. Hubbell.
09/April/2018 26 27 26 - 2 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 4. Leviton. 2 5. Pass and Seymour. 3 6. Eagle. 4 7. Arrow Hart. 5 6 F. Cords and Caps: 7 1. Hubbell. 8 2. Leviton. 9 3. Pass and Seymour. 10 4. Arrow Hart. 11 12 2.2 MATERIALS 13 14 A. Wall Switches: Refer to Architectural Drawing AN01 for wiring device and cover plate 15 color schedule. 16 17 1. Wall Switches (SPST, DPST, three or four way) for Lighting Circuits and Motor 18 Loads Under 1/2 Horsepower: National Electrical Manufacturers Association 19 (NEMA) WD 1; alternating current (AC) general-use snap switch with rocker handle, 20 rated 20 amperes and 120 to 277 VAC, screw-type terminals. 21 2. Weatherproof: Switches as specified mounted in cast metal box with gasketed, 22 weatherproof device plate as specified. 23 24 B. Receptacles: Refer to Architectural Drawing AN01 for wiring device and cover plate color 25 schedule. 26 1. Convenience and Straight-blade Receptacles: NEMA WD 1. 27 2. Locking-blade Receptacles: Type indicated on drawings. 28 3. Convenience Receptacle Configuration: Type 5-20R. 29 a. Nylon Face. 30 b. UPS Powered Receptacles: Orange. 31 4. Weatherproof Receptacles: Receptacles as specified mounted in cast steel box with 32 gasketed, weatherproof device plate as specified. 33 5. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) Receptacles: Duplex convenience 34 receptacle with integral GFCI c/w nominal sensitivity level of 5 mA on the load side 35 and tripping time of 1/30th of a second, NEMA Type 5-20R. Feed-through type for 36 downstream device protection. 37 6. Specific-purpose Receptacles: 38 a. Configuration: Type as indicated on drawings, nylon face. 39 b. Pin-and-Sleeve Type: Number of poles and wires as indicated on drawings. 40 Provide back boxes where indicated. Provide gasketed cover and watertight 41 sealing glands. Provide matching plug with cord-grip features for each 42 receptacle. 43 c. Twist-lock Type: NEMA configuration as shown on the drawings. Provide one 44 matching plug with cord-grip feature for each receptacle. 45
09/April/2018 26 27 26 - 3 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 C. Floor-mounted Service Fittings: 2 1. Flush Covers for Duplex Convenience Receptacle: Brass flush cover suitable for 3 floor box with duplex threaded opening. Provide brass-finish protective rings for use 4 with threaded openings. Provide brass carpet rings. 5 2. Flush Covers for Communications: Brass flush cover suitable for floor box, with 6 2-1/8- by 1-inch combination threaded opening. Provide brass-finish protective 7 rings. Provide brass carpet rings. 8 3. Poke-through Fittings: UL-listed as fire-rated poke-through device. Include fire stops 9 and smoke barriers in through-floor component 2-hour rating minimum. Terminate 10 in 4-inch-square by 2-1/2-inch deep junction box. 11 12 D. Device Plates and Box Covers: Refer to Architectural Drawing AN01 for wiring device 13 and cover plate color schedule. 14 1. Decorative Cover Plate: Smooth nylon or stainless steel. 15 2. Cast Metal Plates: Use with cast metal box. Use steel plates with steel boxes and 16 copper-free aluminum with aluminum boxes. Provide stainless steel screws. 17 3. Weatherproof Cover Plate: Gasketed cast metal with hinged gasketed device covers. 18 19 E. Cords and Caps: 20 1. Attachment Plug Configuration: Match receptacle configuration at outlet provided 21 for equipment. 22 2. Cord Construction: Oil-resistant thermoset insulated Type SO multiconductor 23 flexible cord with identified equipment grounding conductor, suitable for extra-hard 24 usage in damp locations. 25 3. Cord Size: Suitable for connected load of equipment and rating of branch circuit 26 overcurrent protection. 27 28 PART 3 EXECUTION 29 30 3.1 INSTALLATION 31 32 A. Install wall switches 48 inches above floor, off position down. 33 34 B. Install convenience receptacles 18 inches above, grounding pole on bottom. Install 35 receptacles over counters at heights shown on drawings. 36 37 C. Install specific-use receptacles at heights shown on drawings. 38 39 D. Drill opening for poke-through fitting installation in accordance with manufacturer's 40 instructions. 41 42 E. Corridor Convenience Receptacles: Hospital grade. 43 44 F. Install decorative cover plates on switches, receptacles, and blank outlets in finished areas. 45 Use jumbo-size plates for outlets installed in masonry walls. 46 47 G. Install cast metal or galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in 48 unfinished areas, above accessible ceilings, and on surface-mounted outlets.
09/April/2018 26 27 26 - 4 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 H. Install devices and wall plates flush and level. 2 3 I. Install prefinished cord set where connection with attachment plug is indicated or 4 specified or use attachment plug with suitable strain-relief clamps. 5 6 J. Provide suitable strain-relief clamps for cord connections to outlet boxes and equipment 7 connection boxes. 8 9 3.2 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE 10
ITEM SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT AS INDICATED
NO. BID WITH
26 27 26-01 Catalog cutsheets, other descriptive Prior to delivery literature
11 END OF SECTION
09/April/2018 26 27 26 - 5 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 SECTION 26 28 16
2 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 3 4 PART 1 GENERAL 5 6 1.1 SUMMARY 7 8 A. Section includes the requirements necessary to furnish and install: 9 1. Enclosed low-voltage circuit breakers for main feeders and branch circuit protection. 10 2. Disconnect switches for service/motor and equipment disconnecting means. 11 3. Fuses. 12 4. Enclosures. 13 14 1.2 REFERENCES 15 16 A. Abbreviations and Acronyms: 17 1. Authority having jurisdiction (AHJ) 18 2. Ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) 19 3. National Electric Code (NEC) 20 4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 21 5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 22 6. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) 23 7. Variable frequency drive (VFD) 24 25 1.3 SUBMITTALS 26 27 A. Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals. 28 29 B. Refer to the Submittal Schedule at the end of PART 3 for a list of submittal requirements 30 for this Section. 31 32 1.4 SPARE PARTS 33 34 A. Fuses: Furnish to Owner 2 sets of spare fuses of each type and rating installed. 35 36 B. Fuse Pullers: Furnish 2 fuse pullers to Owner. 37 38 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 39 40 A. Provide the Work in accordance with National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 70 41 (National Electric Code - NEC), as applicable. Where required by authority having 42 jurisdiction (AHJ), material and equipment shall be listed and labeled by a nationally 43 recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable to the AHJ, to provide a 44 basis for approval under the above listed agency. 45
09/April/2018 26 28 16 - 1 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 B. Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards published by 2 Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) shall conform to those standards and shall have an 3 applied UL listing mark or label. 4 5 C. Provide materials and equipment acceptable to AHJ for Class, Division, and Group of 6 hazardous area indicated. 7 8 D. Material and equipment must be listed and labeled for its intended purpose, environment, 9 or application, especially when used in extreme climate areas. 10 11 PART 2 PRODUCTS 12 13 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 14 15 A. Square D. 16 17 B. Eaton. 18 19 C. General Electric. 20 21 2.2 MATERIALS 22 23 A. Individually Mounted Enclosed Low-voltage Circuit Breakers: 24 1. Enclosure: 25 a. Heavy duty National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Type as 26 indicated on drawings. 27 b. Provide surface-mounted box with door; interlock door with circuit breakers 28 so door may not be opened when circuit breaker is in closed position. Provide 29 defeater so qualified personnel can open door when circuit breaker is in closed 30 position. Provide ability to lock breaker in open position. 31 c. Finish: Provide manufacturer's standard gray enamel. 32 2. Minimum Integrated Short-circuit Rating: 10,000 amps rms symmetrical for 208 Volt 33 and 14,000 amps rms symmetrical for 480 Volts/600 Volts. Provide fully rated 34 circuit breakers, series or cascade type ratings are not allowed. 35 3. Molded-case Circuit Breakers: Bolt-on-type thermal magnetic trip with inverse time- 36 current element for overload tripping and instantaneous magnetic trip circuit 37 breakers complete with common trip handle for all poles; Class 1. Circuit breaker 38 frame size equal to 250 A or larger to have adjustable magnetic trip setting and to be 39 front mounted. Electronic trip unit circuit breaker to be RMS sensing c/w field 40 replaceable rating plug and followings: instantaneous/long- and short-time delay 41 adjustments, pickup levels and time delayed ground fault adjustable pickup levels. 42 Provide UL, Class A, ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) breakers where shown 43 on drawings. Provide 30 mA GFCI breakers for heat trace loads protecting 44 equipment, 5mA trip sensitivity for personnel safety. Provide circuit breakers listed 45 as Type HACR for air conditioning branch circuits and Types SWD and HID for 46 lighting circuits. 47 4. Do not use tandem circuit breakers or single-pole units with handle ties where two- 48 or three-pole units are indicated.
09/April/2018 26 28 16 - 2 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 5. Terminations: Provide hardware as required to accommodate type of connectors 2 specified in Section 26 05 19 Low-voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables. 3 6. Nameplates: Provide laminated plastic nameplates with engraved letters on each unit 4 in accordance with Section 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems. 5 7. Finish: Provide manufacturer’s standard gray enamel. 6 8. Shunt trip: 120 Volt trip coil energized from separate control circuit, set to trip at 7 55 percent rated voltage. 8 9 B. Disconnect Switches: 10 1. Fusible Switch Assemblies: 800 A or less, quick-make, quick-break, load-interrupter, 11 Type HD, enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle interlocked to 12 prevent opening front cover with switch in on position. Handle lockable in off 13 position; fuse clips designed to accommodate current-limiting Class R fuses. 14 2. Nonfusible Switch Assemblies: Type HD; quick-make, quick-break, load-interrupter 15 enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening 16 front cover with switch in on position. Handle lockable in off position. 17 3. Enclosures: Type 1 or as indicated on drawings]. 18 4. Terminations: Provide hardware as required to accommodate type of connectors 19 specified in Section 26 05 19 Low-voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables. 20 5. Nameplates: Provide laminated plastic nameplates with engraved letters on each unit 21 in accordance with Section 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems. 22 6. Finish: Provide manufacturer’s standard gray enamel. 23 24 C. Fuses: 25 1. See Section 26 05 05 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods, for detailed 26 specifications. 27 2. Fuses 600 Amperes and Less: Class RK5 for low-voltage motors as indicated on 28 drawings; current-limiting, time-delay, one-time fuse, 600 Volts. 29 3. Interrupting Rating: 200,000 rms amperes. 30 31 D. Enclosure nameplates for electrical system identification in accordance with 32 Section 26 05 53. 33 34 PART 3 EXECUTION 35 36 3.1 INSTALLATION 37 38 A. Install circuit breakers and disconnect switches where indicated on drawings. 39 40 B. Install fuses in fusible disconnect switches. 41 42 C. Individually Mounted Enclosed Circuit Breakers and Disconnect Switches: 43 1. Install enclosures plumb. 44 2. Maximum Height: Top of enclosure at 78 inches AFF. 45 3. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: Inspect for physical damage, proper alignment, 46 anchorage, and grounding. Check for proper installation and tightness of 47 connections. 48 4. Mount vertical unless approved by Owner.
09/April/2018 26 28 16 - 3 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 2 3 A. Factory-authorized service representative to perform full visual inspection, provide 4 adjustment and assist on field testing on electrical and mechanical connections. 5 6 B. Perform Megger insulation and continuity tests on each switch, circuit breaker, 7 components and control circuit. 8 9 3.3 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE 10
ITEM SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT AS INDICATED
NO. BID WITH
26 28 16-01 Catalog cutsheets, other descriptive Prior to delivery literature 26 28 16-02 Physical characteristics, including Prior to delivery dimensions, enclosure type, openings 26 28 16-04 Electrical characteristics for breakers Prior to delivery including voltage, frame size, trip rating, integrated short-circuit rating
11 END OF SECTION
09/April/2018 26 28 16 - 4 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 SECTION 26 29 13
2 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 3 4 5 PART 1 GENERAL 6 7 1.1 SUMMARY 8 9 A. Section includes the requirements necessary to furnish and install enclosed controllers not 10 installed in motor control centers (MCCs), including: 11 1. Manual motor starters. 12 2. Magnetic motor starters (including-soft starters) 13 3. Combination magnetic motor starters. 14 15 1.2 REFERENCES 16 17 A. Abbreviations and Acronyms: 18 1. Alternating current (AC) 19 2. Authority having jurisdiction (AHJ) 20 3. Direct current (DC) 21 4. Distributed Control System (DCS) 22 5. Energy-efficient (EF) 23 6. Light emitting diode (LED) 24 7. Motor control center (MCC) 25 8. Motor circuit protectors (MCPs) 26 9. National Electric Code (NEC) 27 10. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 28 11. Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) 29 12. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) 30 31 1.3 SUBMITTALS 32 33 A. Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals. 34 35 B. Refer to the Submittal Schedule at the end of PART 3 for a list of submittal requirements 36 for this Section. 37 38 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 39 40 A. Provide the Work in accordance with National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 70 41 (National Electric Code - NEC), as applicable. Where required by authority having 42 jurisdiction (AHJ), material and equipment shall be listed and labeled by a nationally 43 recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable to the AHJ, to provide a 44 basis for approval under the above listed agency. 45
09/April/2018 26 29 13 - 1 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 B. Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards published by 2 Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) shall conform to those standards and shall have an 3 applied UL listing mark or label. 4 5 C. Provide materials and equipment acceptable to AHJ for Class, Division, and Group of 6 hazardous area indicated. 7 8 D. Material and equipment must be listed and labeled for its intended purpose, environment, 9 or application, especially when used in extreme climate areas. 10 11 PART 2 PRODUCTS 12 13 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 14 15 A. Square D. 16 17 B. Eaton. 18 19 C. General Electric. 20 21 2.2 MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS 22 23 A. Integral Horsepower Motor Starter: Size and poles as indicated on drawings; AC, general 24 purpose, Class A, manually operated, nonreversing, full-voltage controller for induction 25 motors rated in horsepower. Provide field-convertible manual/automatic overload reset 26 feature factory set in manual reset mode. Class 10- or 20-type ambient compensated relay 27 with adjustable (90 to 110 percent of respective rating) trip. Provide with SPST NC 28 contact. Bimetallic type thermal elements. Provide red (run) green (off) transformer-type 29 light emitting diode (LED) pilot lights and toggle operator with provisions for padlock. 30 31 B. Fractional Horsepower Manual Motor Starter: Horsepower rating and poles as indicated 32 on drawing; AC, general purpose, Class A, manually operated full-voltage controller for 33 fractional horsepower induction motors with adjustable thermal overload unit (bimetallic 34 heaters). Provide red (run) green (off) transformer-type LED pilot lights and toggle with 35 provisions for padlock operator. 36 37 C. Enclosure: Type 1 unless indicated otherwise on drawings. 38 39 2.3 MAGNETIC MOTOR STARTERS 40 41 A. Magnetic Motor Starters: AC, general purpose, Class A, magnetic controller for induction 42 motors rated in horsepower, Size 1 minimum. 43 44 B. Full-voltage Starting: Nonreversing, and type as indicated on drawings. 45 46 C. Provide manufacturer’s standard schematic and wiring. Control circuit is 120 Volts fed 47 from integral CPT at the starter completed with secondary fuses. 48
09/April/2018 26 29 13 - 2 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 D. Coil Operating Voltage: 120 Volts 60 Hz. 2 3 E. Size: As indicated on drawings. 4 5 F. Overload Relay: Provide with manual overload reset Class 20-type ambient compensated 6 relay with adjustable (90 to 110 percent of respective rating) trip. Provide with one 7 SPST NO contact. Electronic type elements. Solid state overload relay to be selected 8 against single phasing and voltage/current unbalance. If ground fault protection required 9 for motor and feeder protection, solid state overload relay with ground fault protection 10 will be used. 11 12 G. Enclosure: NEMA 1, unless indicated otherwise on drawings. 13 14 H. Combination Motor Starters: Factory assembled combined motor starters with 15 disconnecting means indicated on drawings. Circuit breaker to be HMCP with field 16 adjustable short circuit trip, settings to be coordinated with motor LRC. 17 18 I. Auxiliary Contacts: Minimum two normally open and two normally closed field 19 convertible contacts in addition to seal-in contact, or as indicated on drawings. 20 21 J. Front Cover Control Devices: Heavy-duty, NEMA 13 control and indicating devices for 22 NEMA 1 and 12 enclosures. Provide heavy-duty NEMA 4 type devices for NEMA 4 23 enclosures. Provide corrosion-resistant type for NEMA 4X applications as indicated on 24 drawings. Type indicated on drawings. 25 26 K. Indicating Lights: Transformer LED-type mounted in front cover. Lens color(s), red run, 27 green stop. Push-to-test-type indicating lights. 28 29 L. Relays: Type indicated on drawings. 30 31 M. Control Power Transformers: Secondary voltage as indicated on drawings, 100 VA 32 minimum, unless indicated otherwise on drawings; protection as indicated on drawings. 33 34 2.4 CONTROLLER OVERCURRENT PROTECTION AND DISCONNECTION 35 MEANS FOR COMBINATION STARTER 36 37 A. Motor Circuit Protector (MCP): Circuit breakers with integral instantaneous magnetic trip 38 in each pole. Provide interlock to prevent opening front cover with MCP in on position 39 defeatable with screwdriver. Interrupting rating (starter as an assembly) as indicated on 40 drawings. Handle lockable in off position. Where required to achieve specified short- 41 circuit rating, provide current-limiter attachment rated at 100,000 amps rms symmetrical 42 interrupting current. 43 44 B. Molded-case, Thermal-magnetic Circuit Breakers: Circuit breakers with integral thermal 45 and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole. Provide interlock to prevent opening front 46 cover with circuit breaker in on position defeatable with screwdriver. Handle lockable in 47 off position. Interrupting rating (as an assembly) as indicated on drawings. Where required
09/April/2018 26 29 13 - 3 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 to achieve specified short-circuit rating, provide current-limiter attachment rated at 2 100,000 amps rms symmetrical interrupting current. 3 4 PART 3 EXECUTION 5 6 3.1 INSTALLATION 7 8 A. Install fuses in fusible switches. 9 10 B. Select and install overload relay elements in motor starters based on actual motor 11 nameplate ratings, such as full-load current, service factor, temperature rise, and ambient 12 motor temperature. Coordinate with starter vendor to obtain starters early for install and 13 overloads later when actual motor full load current is known. 14 15 C. Motor Data: Provide self-adhesive, typed label attached inside each motor starter enclosure 16 door identifying motor served by tag number and equipment name, nameplate 17 horsepower, full-load amperes, motor code letter, service factor, and installed overload 18 relay element catalog number. 19 20 D. Set MCPs to minimum trip setting that will permit motor starting under normal conditions 21 using procedures outlined in manufacturer's instructions booklet. 22 23 E. Provide nameplates in accordance with Section 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical 24 Systems. Add lamacoid of warning sign for multiple voltage sources inside the enclosure if 25 automation control and interface is required. 26 27 F. Mounting height is 5 feet (1500 mm) to the operating handle. 28 29 G. Use HOA mounted on the front of enclosure for automated Programmable Logic 30 Controller (PLC) / Distributed Control System (DCS) remote control and shutdown. 31 32 H. Ground and bonding on equipment to be completed, as per NEC Article 250 or 33 CEC Section 10 Grounding and Bonding. 34 35 I. Identify components/wire tags on control/field wiring and terminal blocks at the enclosed 36 controller. 37 38 3.2 TESTING 39 40 A. Manufacturer’s field services to provide on-site test and adjustment on the solid state 41 controller to ensure the controller fully functional to operate the equipment. 42 43 B. Acceptance test by field contractor to perform the Megger insulation test for enclosed 44 controller/components/wiring on the control circuit. 45 46 3.3 ARC FLASH POTENTIAL 47 48 A. Provide arc flash potential labeling on equipment per NEC and NFPA 70E.
09/April/2018 26 29 13 - 4 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 3.4 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE 2
ITEM SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT AS INDICATED
NO. BID WITH
26 29 13-01 Catalog cutsheets, other descriptive Prior to delivery literature on motor starters, relays, control transformers, control devices, and overcurrent devices 26 29 13-05 Wiring and schematic diagrams that identify Prior to delivery devices, indicate connections, and identify terminal numbers (note devices furnished when options involved) 26 29 13-08 Operation and maintenance manuals With operations and maintenance manuals
3 END OF SECTION
09/April/2018 26 29 13 - 5 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 SECTION 26 29 16
2 CONTACTORS 3 4 5 PART 1 GENERAL 6 7 1.1 SUMMARY 8 9 A. Section includes contactors for general-purpose use and lighting control. 10 11 1.2 REFERENCES 12 13 A. Abbreviations and Acronyms: 14 1. Alternating Current (AC) 15 2. Authority having jurisdiction (AHJ) 16 3. Direct Current (DC) 17 4. National Electric Code (NEC) 18 5. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 19 6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 20 7. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) 21 8. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) 22 23 1.3 SUBMITTALS 24 25 A. Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals. 26 27 B. Refer to the Submittal Schedule at the end of PART 3 for a list of submittal requirements 28 for this Section. 29 30 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 31 32 A. Provide the Work in accordance with National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 70 33 (National Electric Code - NEC), as applicable. Where required by authority having 34 jurisdiction (AHJ), material and equipment shall be listed and labeled by a nationally 35 recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable to the AHJ, to provide a 36 basis for approval under the above listed agency. 37 38 B. Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards published by 39 Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) shall conform to those standards and shall have an 40 applied UL listing mark or label. 41 42 C. Provide materials and equipment acceptable to AHJ for Class, Division, and Group of 43 hazardous area indicated. 44 45 D. Material and equipment must be listed and labeled for its intended purpose, environment, 46 or application, especially when used in extreme climate areas. 47
09/April/2018 26 29 16 - 1 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 3 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: 4 5 A. Contactors: 6 1. Square-D. 7 2. Eaton. 8 3. General Electric. 9 4. ASCO. 10 5. Allen-Bradley. 11 12 2.2 MATERIALS: 13 14 A. General: 15 1. NEMA ICS 2 – Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and 16 Overload Relays, Rated Not More Than 2000 Volts Alternating Current (AC) or 17 750 Volts Direct Current (DC). 18 2. Mechanically held, electrically operated contactors with size and number of poles as 19 indicated on drawings. 20 21 B. Coils: Encapsulated and rated for operation at 120 Volts, 60 Hz. 22 23 C. Contacts: Fully rated, totally enclosed, silver plated, capable of inspection or replacement 24 without disturbing line or load wiring. 25 26 D. Enclosures: 27 1. NEMA 1 for dry, indoor non-manufacturing areas. 28 2. NEMA 4X for damp or outdoor locations. 29 30 E. Pushbuttons, Selector Switches, and Indicating Lights: 31 1. Pushbuttons: Momentary contact type with flush head unless indicated otherwise on 32 drawings. 33 2. Selector Switches: Number of positions in rotation action (H/A or H/O/A) as 34 indicated on drawings. Where a "Test" (Hand) or similar momentary position is 35 required, provide switch unit with spring return from momentary position to "Off" 36 and maintained in “Auto”. 37 3. Indicating Lights: Transformer type with six-volt incandescent lamps and 38 interchangeable color caps. Specific colors are indicated on drawings. 39 4. Auxiliary contacts: One NO and one NC field convertible contacts in addition to 40 holding contact. 41 5. Control Power Transformer: 120 Volts secondary furnished with fuse and bond the 42 unfused leg of secondary to equipment ground. 43 6. Combination contactors: Contactors to be installed with thermal magnetic circuit 44 breaker (integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip). 45
09/April/2018 26 29 16 - 2 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 PART 3 EXECUTION 2 3 3.1 INSTALLATION 4 5 A. Mount enclosures plumb and level, 6 feet x 6 inches to top, and rigidly attach to structure 6 using materials and methods specified in Section 26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for 7 Electrical Systems. 8 9 B. Install surface mounted units in a manner to permit vertical flow of air behind cabinets 10 and enclosures. 11 12 C. Install incoming and outgoing power and control circuits in accordance with 13 Section 26 05 19 Low-voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables. 14 15 D. Check interconnection and operation of control devices, interlocks, indicating lights, and 16 control relays. Set timers and time delay relays for correct intervals. Check contactor- 17 operating coil for correct voltage rating. 18 19 3.2 IDENTIFICATION 20 21 A. Comply with Section 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems. 22 23 3.3 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE 24
ITEM SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT AS INDICATED
NO. BID WITH
26 29 16-01 Submit Product Data on each contactor Prior to delivery including: Dimensions. Voltage and number of poles. Current ratings and NEMA size. Enclosure type and accessories.
25 END OF SECTION
09/April/2018 26 29 16 - 3 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 SECTION 26 32 13
2 ENGINE GENERATORS 3 4 5 PART 1 GENERAL 6 7 1.1 SUMMARY 8 9 A. Section includes the requirements necessary to furnish and install: 10 1. Engine generator system. 11 2. Radiator. 12 3. Exhaust silencer and fittings. 13 4. Subbase fuel tank and fittings. 14 5. Generator control/alarm panels. 15 6. Battery and charger. 16 7. Weatherproof sound-attenuating enclosure. 17 18 1.2 REFERENCES 19 20 A. Abbreviations and Acronyms: 21 1. Alternating Current (AC) 22 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 23 3. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) 24 4. Authority having jurisdiction (AHJ) 25 5. Automatic transfer switch (ATS) 26 6. Diesel Engine Manufacturer's Association (DEMA) 27 7. Direct current (DC) 28 8. Electrical Equipment Manufacturers Association of Canada (EEMAC) 29 9. International Building Code (IBC) 30 10. National Electric Code (NEC) 31 11. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 32 12. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 33 13. Telephone Influence Factor (TIF) 34 14. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) 35 15. Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) 36 37 B. References Standards: 38 1. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) MG-1 – Motors and 39 Generators. 40 2. NEMA MG-2 – Safety Standard for Construction and Guide for Selection, 41 Installation and Use of Motors and Generators. 42 3. Listed to UL 2200 – Stationary Engine Generator Assemblies. 43 4. Wind Design Requirements: The enclosure/housing, the internal support structure, 44 and the anchorage of all electrical equipment, and associated raceways shall be 45 designed and constructed to withstand the stresses produced by wind forces as 46 defined in and required by the IBC, 2012 Edition. The following criteria are 47 applicable to this project.
09/April/2018 26 32 13 - 1 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 a. Ultimate Design Wind Speed, V ult = 153 MPH 2 b. Nominal Design Wind Speed, V asd = 119 MPH 3 c. Exposure Category C. 4 5. Emissions and Noise Requirements: Provide equipment that complies with emission 5 and noise requirements applicable to the project site located in Brownsville, Texas. 6 6. Guarantee: Manufacturer to guarantee the entire system to be in accordance with 7 nameplate specifications and to be free from defects in material and workmanship 8 under normal use for a minimum of 2 years from the date the system is put into 9 service. 10 11 1.3 SUBMITTALS 12 13 A. Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals. 14 15 B. Refer to the Submittal Schedule at the end of PART 3 for a list of submittal requirements 16 for this Section. 17 18 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 19 20 A. Provide the Work in accordance with National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 70 21 (National Electric Code - NEC), as applicable. Where required by authority having 22 jurisdiction (AHJ), material and equipment shall be listed and labeled by a nationally 23 recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable to the AHJ, to provide a 24 basis for approval under the above listed agency. 25 26 B. Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards published by 27 Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) shall conform to those standards and shall have an 28 applied UL listing mark or label or a label from a Nationally Recognized Testing Agency. 29 30 C. Provide materials and equipment acceptable to AHJ for Class, Division, and Group of 31 hazardous area indicated. 32 33 D. Material and equipment must be listed and labeled for its intended purpose, environment, 34 or application, especially when used in extreme climate areas. 35 36 E. Manufacturer: Company specializing in engine generators with 3 years’ documented 37 experience. 38 39 1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 40 41 A. Engine Generator System: Provide optional standby power source. 42 43 B. System Capacity: Each unit kW and kVA as indicated on the drawings; standby rating 44 using engine-mounted radiator and No. 2 fuel oil. 45
09/April/2018 26 32 13 - 2 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 C. Operation: Operate in automatic mode in conjunction with automatic transfer switches as 2 described herein. 3 1. Upon loss of normal source voltage (below 70 to 90 percent adjustable) and after 4 adjustable 0.5 to 10 second time delay to allow for momentary dips, close engine 5 starting contacts to start engine generator. 6 2. Automatic Emergency Load Acquisition Sequence Time: Maximum 10 seconds from 7 utility normal power source failure. 8 3. Upon restoration of normal voltage and frequency (phases greater than 90 percent of 9 nominal) and after 0 to 25-minute adjustable time period, retransfer back to normal. 10 4. After loads have been removed, continue to operate engine generator unloaded for 0 11 to 30 minutes adjustable for engine cool down. 12 13 1.6 DESIGN CRITERIA 14 15 A. Reliability Tests: 16 1. Certified Factory Equivalent Model Tests: Test power generation system consisting 17 of prime mover, generator, and necessary controls as complete systems on 18 representative engineering prototype models. Do not perform tests on equipment 19 sold but on separate production models. Certify that this prototype testing has been 20 accomplished. Include: 21 a. Maximum power level (maximum kW). 22 b. Maximum motor starting capacity (maximum kVA). 23 c. Structural soundness. 24 d. Torsiograph Analysis per MIL-STD 705C, Method 504.2: Calculate torsional 25 analysis using data from actual tests by generator set manufacturer to verify 26 freedom from torsional stresses within plus or minus 10 percent of rated 27 speed. Make results available to Owner for inspection upon request. Perform 28 actual torsional fatigue test on complete prototype generator set. Do not base 29 calculations on engine and generator data separately. 30 e. Engine alternator cooling airflow. 31 f. Transient response and steady-state governing. 32 g. Alternator temperature rise by embedded thermocouples and by resistance 33 method. 34 h. Harmonic analysis and voltage waveform deviation according to 35 MIL-STD 705C, Method 601.4. 36 i. Three-phase, Short-circuit Test for Mechanical and Electrical Strength: With 37 system operating at rated volts, amps, power factor, and speed, short-circuit 38 generator terminals ten times on all three phases for 10 seconds. Demonstrate 39 that generator set builds up and performs normally without manual 40 intervention, such as resetting of circuit breakers or other tripping devices 41 when short circuit is removed. 42 j. Perform endurance testing at rated load and speed without significant damage 43 or failures of electrical or mechanical components. 44 k. Sound generation at octave bands in accordance with ISO 8528-10. 45 l. Parallel Test: Demonstrate that representative prototype generator sets are 46 capable of withstanding 120 degree out-of-phase paralleling from full-rated 47 voltage and speed without sustaining mechanical or electrical damage.
09/April/2018 26 32 13 - 3 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 2. Certified Factory Production Model Tests: Before shipment of equipment, test 2 generator and system components under rated load and power factor for 3 performance and proper functioning of control and interfacing circuits. Do not test 4 at unity power factor only (resistance banks only). Other tests: 5 a. Single-step load pickup. 6 b. Transient response and steady-state governing. 7 c. Alternator temperature rise by resistance method. 8 d. Functional compatibility between generator set controls and master controls. 9 e. Fuel consumption. 10 3. Notify Owner in advance of these tests. Allow Owner to witness these tests. 11 Forward certified copies of test results to Owner for review prior to shipment. 12 4. General testing requirements as outlined in NEMA MG-1 and MIL-STD 705C. 13 14 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 15 16 A. Protect generator and accessories from moisture by using appropriate heaters as instructed 17 by manufacturer. 18 19 B. Store generator and accessories in clean, dry space. Maintain wrapping or provide 20 additional heavy canvas or plastic cover to protect from dirt, water, construction debris, 21 and traffic. 22 23 C. Handle generator and accessories in accordance with NEMA and manufacturer’s written 24 instructions. Lift only with lugs provided for the purpose. Handle carefully to avoid 25 damage to internal components, enclosure, and finish. 26 27 PART 2 PRODUCTS 28 29 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 30 31 A. Cummins. 32 33 B. Caterpillar. 34 35 C. MTU Onsite Energy. 36 37 2.2 ENGINE 38 39 A. Directly connected to generator by semiflexible coupling. Mount both on common 40 subbase. 41 42 B. Type: Water cooled in line or V type, four-stroke cycle, electric ignition internal 43 combustion engine with removable wet-type cylinder liners. 44 45 C. Fuel System: Appropriate for use of No. 2 fuel oil (ASTM D396). 46 47 D. Governed Engine Speed: 1,800 rpm at 60 Hz. 48
09/April/2018 26 32 13 - 4 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 E. Governor: 2 1. Isochronous type for parallel operation. Maintain engine speed within plus or minus 3 0.5 percent, steady state, and meet ISO 8528 Class 2 response criteria from no load 4 to full load. Include actuator, governor control module, separate magnetic pickup (do 5 not use to operate other devices besides governor), idle/run switch for warmup after 6 maintenance, three-phase isochronous load-sharing module, and autosynchronizer; 7 integrated into engine generator control panels by panel manufacturer. 8 9 F. Safety Devices: Engine shutdown on high jacket water temperature, low lubricating oil 10 pressure, engine overspeed, and engine overcrank. Limits as selected by manufacturer. 11 12 G. Engine Starting: Direct current (DC) starting system with positive engagement. Number 13 and voltage of starter motors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions of sufficient 14 capacity to start engine within ambient temperatures between 30 and 100 degrees F within 15 specified time period. Include remote starting control circuit with manual-off-remote 16 selector switch on engine generator control panel. 17 18 H. Engine Jacket Heater: Two independent immersion-type water heater with integral 19 thermostatic control, sized to maintain engine jacket water at normal engine operating 20 temperature and suitable for operation on a 20 A, three-phase, 208 Vac circuit. 21 22 I. Attached Radiator: 23 1. Radiator using solution of 50 percent ethylene-glycol extended life coolant with 24 blower-type fan, sized to maintain safe engine temperature when generator is fully 25 loaded at ambient temperature and altitude specified. Radiator Airflow Restriction: 26 0.5 inch WC, maximum. 27 2. Provide engine-mounted cooling radiator with blower fan and Venturi shroud. 28 Provide rigid guard to close both top and sides of moving parts between engine and 29 radiator. 30 31 J. Engine Accessories: 32 1. Fuel Strainer and Filter: Mount between engine fuel pump and engine. Provide 33 water/fuel separator/fuel strainer in line with fuel filter. 34 2. Lube Oil Filter: Conveniently located for servicing. Equip with spring-loaded bypass 35 valve to ensure oil circulation if filters are clogged. Provide oil drain extension line 36 positioned to permit convenient servicing of unit as installed. Provide bayonet-type 37 oil level stick. 38 3. Intake Air Filter: Heavy-duty, dry-type, replaceable element type rated for normal 39 service. 40 4. Fuel Transfer Pump: Positive-displacement engine-driven type. Provide relief valve 41 to prevent excessive pressure buildup if discharge line becomes clogged. 42 5. Fuel Priming Pump: Positive displacement priming pump. 43 6. Water Pump: Engine-driven centrifugal type with thermostatic valve to maintain 44 engine at recommended temperature level. 45 7. Lubricating Oil Pump: Gear type for supplying oil under predetermined constant 46 pressure to main bearings, pistons, piston pins, timing gears, camshaft bearings, and 47 valve mechanism.
09/April/2018 26 32 13 - 5 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 8. Engine-Mounted Gauges: Provide control panel on engine with the following gauges 2 to monitor engine operation: 3 a. Lubrication and pressure gauge. 4 b. Cooling water temperature gauge. 5 c. Lubrication oil temperature gauge. 6 9. Furnish one set of tools required for preventative maintenance of engine generator 7 system. Package tools in adequately sized metal toolbox. 8 10. Provide two additional sets of each fuel, oil, and air filter element required for engine 9 generator system. 10 11. Provide motor starters for engine accessories prewired from factory. 11 12 K. Vibration Isolation: 13 1. Meet applicable Diesel Engine Manufacturer's Association (DEMA) vibration 14 standards. 15 2. Use vibration analytical techniques to determine shaft critical speeds and to develop 16 bearing design and shaft balancing to mitigate vibration. 17 3. Apply torsional analysis and design to mitigate torsional vibration. 18 4. Engine and Generator Individually: Do not exceed 10 mils vibration in any plane at 19 continuous rating point when measured at attachment points to common steel 20 subbase. 21 5. Mount engine and generator on common structural steel frame sufficiently rigid to 22 prevent deflection between vibration isolators. 23 6. Demonstrate freedom from torsional vibration by torsional analysis. 24 7. Isolate complete subbase from enclosure skid base Korfund Series L vibration 25 isolators, sized by isolator manufacturer. Limit vibration transmissibility to 26 10 percent maximum. 27 8. Integral Sub-base Fuel Tank: Sized for 72-hour run time, 12-gauge steel, welded, 28 with internal baffles, double-contained. Provide fuel cap with padlock provisions, 29 extended vent, fuel gauge, fill pipe, and hoses and connectors for complete system. 30 31 2.3 GENERATOR 32 33 A. Generator: Reconnectable brushless, revolving field type, coupled directly to engine 34 flywheel through flexible driving disc for positive alignment. Directly bolt generator 35 housing to engine flywheel housing. Provide generator housing with single ball bearing 36 support for rotor. 37 38 B. Rotor: Layer wound with thermosetting epoxy between each layer plus final epoxy coat for 39 moisture and abrasion resistance. Provide amortisseur windings integral with rotor coil 40 support, shielded type shaft bearing with provisions for easy servicing through grease pipes 41 which extend to generator frame exterior. Design bearing for minimum B-10 40,000-hour 42 life, dynamically balanced to 25 percent overspeed. 43 44 C. Stator Winding: Two-thirds pitch design to eliminate third harmonic waveform distortion 45 and minimize harmful neutral circulating current when operating in parallel. Provide 46 windings with two dips and bakes of varnish, plus final epoxy coating for moisture and 47 abrasion resistance. Provide 5 percent rms maximum total voltage output waveform 48 harmonic distortion measured at full load into a load bank.
09/April/2018 26 32 13 - 6 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 D. Rating: Voltage, kW, and kVA as indicated on the drawings, 0.8 power factor, 60 Hz, 2 three-phase, four-pole at 1,800 rpm. 3 4 E. Rating applicable for continuous service in standby power application and in conformance 5 with applicable NEMA standards, latest revision. 6 7 F. Insulation: Minimum Class H. 8 9 G. Temperature Rise: 130 degrees C in 40 degree C ambient as measured by resistance. 10 11 H. Enclosure: Open dripproof. 12 13 I. Voltage Regulation: Include solid-state generator-mounted Volts per hertz exciter- 14 regulator with SCR control to match engine and generator characteristics with output 15 voltage regulation, plus or minus 2 percent, from no load to full load with a maximum of 16 16 percent instantaneous voltage dip when rated load and power factor are applied with 17 recovery rate of no more than 2 seconds to stable operation. Stable operation is defined as 18 operation with terminal voltage remaining constant within ±1 percent of rated voltage. 19 Provide built in protection against damage when regulator or generator is run at low 20 frequencies for short periods of time. Include manual controls to adjust voltage drop, plus 21 or minus 5 percent voltage level and voltage gain. 22 23 J. Rotating Brushless Exciter: Incorporate full-wave, three-phase rotating rectifier with 24 hermetically sealed, metallic-type, silicon diodes to supply main field excitation. Provide 25 surge protection to protect against transient conditions. 26 27 K. Telephone Influence Factor (TIF): Maximum 50. 28 29 L. Load Connection Box (Generator Connection Box): Provide end-mounted load 30 connection box for bottom conductor entry. Allow access to power terminals. Provide 31 working clearance in direction of access to connection box. 32 33 2.4 ENGINE GENERATOR ACCESSORIES 34 35 A. Fuel Tank: 36 1. Sub-base Fuel Tank: 37 a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 38 1) Tramont. 39 2) Simplex. 40 3) Pryco. 41 b. Mount on or near engine, 5000 gallons or volume necessary for 72 hours of 42 running time at full-rated load. 43 c. Dual contained, UL-142. 44 d. Provide heavy-duty 120-Vac, single-phase, 60-Hz motors and 2-gpm bronze 45 gear pumps with stainless steel shafts, one transfer pump and one return pump. 46 e. Provide running time meter for each pump. 47 f. Provide 2-inch manual fuel fill tube with screw-on-type vented cap. 48 g. Provide low fuel level contacts for remote annunciation.
09/April/2018 26 32 13 - 7 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 h. Build to UL and NFPA specifications. 2 i. Mount fuel strainer to fuel inlet of tank. 3 j. Provide high fuel level alarm contacts for remote annunciation. 4 2. Provide wire-reinforced flexible fuel lines with threaded connections and swivel 5 fittings for each fuel connection on engine. Coordinate fuel supply and return line 6 sizes from remote main tank to meet engine manufacturer's minimum installation 7 requirements and maximum tank pumping capacity. 8 3. Integral Fuel Tank: Refer to enclosure specification in this Section for fuel tank 9 description. 10 4. Provide diesel engine manufacturer's standard fuel system, including replaceable 11 spin-on-type fuel filter conveniently located for servicing. 12 13 B. Exhaust Silencer: Industrial-type silencer with muffler companion flanges made of carbon 14 steel with an internal heat blanket and flexible stainless steel exhaust fitting suitable for 15 horizontal orientation, sized in accordance with engine manufacturer's instructions. Mount 16 as part of manufacturer's enclosure. Provide stainless steel flexible exhaust adapter for 17 each exhaust outlet between engine and silencer, minimum 24 inches long. 18 19 C. Batteries: Heavy-duty, diesel-starting type, lead-acid storage batteries with minimum 20 capacity per SAE J537 at 0 degrees F, minimum 24 Volts. Provide sufficient capacity for 21 minimum six 10-second starting attempts in specified ambient range. Match battery 22 voltage to starting system. Include necessary cables and clamps. 23 24 D. Battery Tray: Plastic-coated metal or wooden tray treated for electrolyte resistance, 25 constructed to contain spillage of electrolyte. Provide with protective Plexiglass cover. 26 27 E. Battery Charger: Constant potential, current-limiting type. [Meet battery manufacturer's 28 recommendations for charge rate, float, and equalizing charge potential. Provide low 29 battery voltage alarm contacts for remote annunciation. Include overload protection, full 30 wave rectifier, DC voltmeter and ammeter, and 120 Vac fused input. Provide built-in 31 equalizer charge timer. Provide wall-mounted enclosure to meet NEMA 250, Type 1 32 requirements. 33 34 F. Line Circuit Breaker: 100 percent rated, Fixed-mounted, Insulated-case circuit breaker on 35 generator output with integral thermal, ground fault and instantaneous solid state magnetic 36 trip in each pole, sized in accordance with NFPA 70. Include battery voltage-operated 37 shunt trip, connected to open circuit breaker on engine failure. Provide manual charging 38 lever for backup to electric operator. Mount unit in enclosure to meet NEMA 250, Type 1 39 requirements. Provide key interlocks as indicated on the drawings. Provide auxiliary 40 contact wired to generator control panel to indicate when generator breaker opens. 41 Provide circuit breaker load side lugs. 42 43 G. Digital Engine-generator Control Panel: NEMA 250, Type 1 generator-mounted control 44 panel enclosure with engine and generator controls and indicators. Isolate generator- 45 mounted control panel from engine vibration. Include provision for padlock and the 46 following equipment and features: 47 1. Frequency Meter: 45- to 65-Hz range, digital.
09/April/2018 26 32 13 - 8 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 2. Alternating Current (AC)-Output Volt Meter: Digital, 0.5 percent accuracy, with 2 phase selector switch. 3 3. AC-Output Ammeter: Digital, 0.5 percent accuracy, with phase selector switch. 4 4. Output Voltage Adjustment: Plus or minus 5 percent range. 5 5. LCD Display: Lubrication oil pressure gauge, lubricating oil temperature gauge, 6 cooling water temperature gauge, engine overspeed, engine overcrank, fuel oil 7 pressure, low fuel level in tank, high fuel level in tank, low jacket water temperature, 8 approaching high jacket water temperature, approaching low oil pressure, low battery 9 voltage, engine control switch not in auto position, generator breaker open, direct- 10 reading indicating tachometer, and engine running time meter. 11 6. Engine start/stop selector switch and emergency stop push button. 12 7. Output Contacts: Running status, remote alarm functions, and air intake/exhaust 13 louver control. 14 15 H. Weatherproof Enclosure: 16 1. Reinforced aluminum housing, minimum 14 gauge. Allow access to control panel 17 and service points, with lockable doors and panels. Protect against adverse weather 18 and environmental conditions, discourage tampering, and act as barrier to birds, 19 rodents, etc. 20 2. Shuttered Air Openings: on front and sides. Cover intake side with mesh screen. 21 3. Provide hinged doors on sides and generator end, lockable, keyed the same. Provide 22 extension pipe from crankcase to enclosure exterior with gate valve and plug. Size 23 enclosure to contain batteries and fuel tank. Mount exhaust silencer externally on top 24 of enclosure. 25 4. Provide personnel access steps and landings at doors and openings intended to allow 26 walk-in access to generator enclosure interior. Coordinate access step direction and 27 landings with other enclosures, buildings, and structures shown on the plan 28 drawings. 29 5. Finish: Electrostatic powder paint process with manufacturer's standard color, heat- 30 resistant engine paint. Exterior enclosure finish minimum 3 mils dry film epoxy 31 chemical-resistant finish, American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 70, light 32 gray. 33 6. Enclosure: Served with one 80 -ampere, 480 Volt, three-phase, four-wire service for 34 power requirements for lighting, receptacles, heaters, battery charger, etc. Provide 35 480 Volt panel with main breaker rated 30,000 AIC, together with necessary 36 transformers and 208Y/120V panel with main breaker rated 10,000 AIC to feed 37 associated equipment. Install wiring to equipment in conduit. Provide bolt-in type 38 circuit breakers. 39 7. Provide minimum four industrial LED fixtures with wire guards and wall-mounted 40 toggle switch. 41 8. Provide two 20-amp, 120 Vac receptacles inside enclosure for maintenance purposes. 42 Provide 1,920-watt power capacity for each receptacle. 43 9. Provide wiring and circuits to engine block heaters, lighting, receptacles, battery 44 charger, and other engine-generator equipment required for complete and 45 operational system. 46 10. Provide NEMA 4 enclosures for electrical equipment inside generator enclosure, 47 including, but not limited to, junction boxes, pull boxes, control enclosures, power 48 panelboards, enclosed disconnect switches, enclosed circuit breakers, etc.
09/April/2018 26 32 13 - 9 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 2 I. Remote Engine Annunciator Panel: Include functions listed herein. Ethernet TCP/IO line 3 for communication to engine generator control panel. Surface-mounted panel with 4 standard color painted finish. Annunciators: 5 1. Locking type with manual reset button for DC operation from battery bank. 6 2. Provide contacts so when shutdown occurs from one set of shutdown contacts, 7 subsequent operation of shutdown contacts is locked off from operating 8 annunciators. 9 3. Silence trouble alarm upon operation of silencing switch, but keep pilot illuminated. 10 4. On return to normal and resetting of annunciators, sound trouble horn again until 11 switch is returned to normal position. 12 13 J. Terminal Box: Provide single terminal box on engine generator skid for power, control 14 and instrumentation wiring from other components of engine generator system including 15 but not limited to transfer switches. Factory-install and connect to terminal box engine 16 generator skid mounted devices and controls requiring interface. Design and apply 17 separation for power limited cables and wire where required. 18 19 K. Provide load bank circuit breaker with shunt trip to operate when generator is required to 20 provide facility power. 21 22 L. Nameplates: in accordance with Section 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems. 23 24 PART 3 EXECUTION 25 26 3.1 EXAMINATION 27 28 A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work and field dimensions are as shown on 29 drawings. 30 31 B. Verify that required utilities are available, in proper location, and ready for use. 32 33 C. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions. 34 35 3.2 INSTALLATION 36 37 A. Install generator system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 38 39 B. Provide grounding in accordance with Section 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for 40 Electrical Systems. 41 42 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 43 44 A. Provide full-load test utilizing portable test bank for 4 hours minimum. 45 46 B. Final test conducted in presence of Owner. 47 1. Interrupt normal source to transfer switch.
09/April/2018 26 32 13 - 10 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 2. Verify switch transfer to emergency source after appropriate time delays and 2 operation of appropriate indicating lights and signal circuits. 3 3. After 15 minutes, re-energize normal source. 4 4. Verify switch retransfer to normal source after appropriate time delays, engine cool- 5 off time, and operation of appropriate indicating lights and signal circuits. 6 5. Demonstrate operation of off/auto/test/engine start control switch. 7 8 C. During test, record the following at 20-minute intervals: 9 1. Kilowatts. 10 2. Amperes. 11 3. Voltage. 12 4. Coolant temperature. 13 5. Ambient temperature. 14 6. Frequency. 15 7. Oil pressure. 16 8. Power factor. 17 18 D. Test alarm and shutdown circuits by simulating conditions. 19 20 3.4 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES 21 22 A. When plant electrical system is essentially complete and plant can be operated, provide full 23 and partial load and operational tests for at least 4 hours, including at least 2 continuous 24 hours at full-rated load. Include motor starting test to verify specified performance. 25 Perform 50 percent and 100 percent load change. Notify Owner at least 5 working days 26 prior to beginning of test. Allow Owner to witness tests. Provide required instrumentation 27 and equipment necessary to conduct tests. 28 29 B. Provide factory-qualified erection engineer to personally supervise complete installation of 30 diesel engines and generators, including setting, alignment, assembly, connections, startup, 31 testing, and instruction of Owner. Furnish manufacturer's written certification ensuring 32 that each item of equipment is complete, in good condition, free from damage, and 33 properly installed, connected, and adjusted. 34 35 C. Furnish manufacturer’s representative for the following services at jobsite or classroom as 36 designated by Owner for minimum workdays listed below, travel time excluded: 37 1. 2 workdays for installation assistance and inspection of installation. 38 2. 2 workdays for functional and performance testing. 39 3. 1 workdays for plant startup. 40 4. 1 workdays for instruction of site personnel. 41 42 3.5 ADJUSTING 43 44 A. Adjust generator output voltage and engine speed. 45 46 3.6 CLEANING 47
09/April/2018 26 32 13 - 11 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 A. Clean engine and generator surfaces. Replace lubricating oil and fuel filters. 2 3 3.7 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE 4
ITEM SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT AS INDICATED NO. WITH BID 26 32 13-01 Catalog cut-sheets, other descriptive Prior to delivery literature 26 32 13-02 Layout with dimensions and openings for Prior to delivery generator and other components specified. Identify fluid drain ports and clearance requirements 26 32 13-03 Weights Prior to delivery 26 32 13-04 Capacities and ratings Prior to delivery 26 32 13-05 Mounting, including seismic Prior to delivery 26 32 13-06 Performance characteristics Prior to delivery 26 32 13-11 Datasheets Prior to delivery 26 32 13-14 Electrical voltage, load, and interface Prior to delivery 26 32 13-15 Wiring and schematic diagrams Prior to delivery 26 32 13-16 Control interface Prior to delivery 26 32 13-18 Factory testing results With record documents 26 32 13-19 Field test results Prior to delivery 26 32 13-20 Operation and maintenance manuals With record documents 26 32 13-22 Description of generator transient With record documents responses during startup, switchover, and shutdown 26 32 13-27 Certified statement of rated load With operations and compliance at specified ambient maintenance manuals temperature and elevation for 4-hour load test duration 26 32 13-28 Dimensioned drawings of conduit and Prior to delivery cable entry locations for power, control, instrumentation, alarm and monitoring systems 26 32 13-30 Point-to-point wiring diagrams of field- Prior to delivery installed interconnection wiring, including connections necessary for complete and operational system
09/April/2018 26 32 13 - 12 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 END OF SECTION
09/April/2018 26 32 13 - 13 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 SECTION 26 33 53
2 STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
3 PART 1 GENERAL
4 1.1 SUMMARY
5 A. Section includes the requirements necessary to furnish and install static uninterruptible 6 power supplies (UPS), including but not limited to: 7 1. UPS Module. 8 2. System Control Switchgear with static bypass. 9 3. Battery System. 10 4. Battery Protective and Disconnect Device. 11 5. Maintenance Bypass Switch.
12 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
13 A. System Configuration: Single module Uninterruptible Power System
14 B. Components: System includes battery to provide continuous source of electrical power, 15 rectifier/charger to maintain battery charge and to provide input to inverter when utility 16 power is available, inverter to provide power to load during normal operation, static switch 17 to transfer load automatically and without disturbance between inverter and utility power, 18 manual switch to bypass static switch for maintenance, input and output isolation 19 transformers and filters to provide appropriate isolation and disturbance attenuation, and 20 necessary monitors, sensors, and control circuits.
21 C. Design Standards: 22 1. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) 1778, Standard for Safety Uninterruptible 23 Power Systems. 24 2. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers, Inc. (IEEE) 587, American National 25 Standards Institute (ANSI) C62.41, Guide for Surge Voltages in Low-voltage AC 26 Power Circuits. 27 3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 70, National Electric Code (NEC). 28 4. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). 29 5. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) PE-1, Uninterruptible 30 Power Systems – Specification and Performance Verification.
31 D. Modes of Operation: 32 1. Normal: The inverter continuously powers the critical load. The rectifier/charger 33 derives power from the utility alternating current (AC) source and supplies direct 34 current (DC) power to the inverter, while simultaneously float charging the battery.
09/April/2018 26 33 53 - 1 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 2. Emergency: Upon utility AC power failure, without any switching, the inverter 2 obtains power from the battery plant and provides uninterrupted power to the 3 critical AC load. Designed to have no interruption in power to the critical load upon 4 failure or restoration of the utility ac source. 5 3. Recharge: Upon restoration of the utility AC source, the rectifier/charger 6 automatically powers the inverter and simultaneously recharges the battery with no 7 interruption to the critical AC load. 8 4. Bypass: If the UPS must be taken out of service for maintenance or repair, the 9 bypass switch transfers the load to the bypass source with no output disturbance 10 transferred to the AC critical load. 11 5. Off-battery: For Battery only maintenance, external disconnect breaker disconnects 12 the battery from the rectifier/charger and inverter. The UPS module continues to 13 function and meet all of the specified steady-state performance criteria, except for 14 the power outage back-up time capability.
15 1.3 REFERENCES
16 A. Abbreviations and Acronyms: 17 1. Alternating current (AC) 18 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 19 3. American Power Conversion (APC) 20 4. Authority having jurisdiction (AHJ) 21 5. Controlled Power Company (CPC) 22 6. Direct current (DC) 23 7. Double neoprene pad (DNP) 24 8. Emergency power off (EPO) 25 9. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers, Inc. (IEEE) 26 10. Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor (IGBT) 27 11. International Fire Code (IFC) 28 12. Liquid crystal display (LCD) 29 13. Multi-module Unit (MMU) 30 14. National Electric Code (NEC) 31 15. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 32 16. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 33 17. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 34 18. Pulse-width Modulation (PWM) 35 19. Root mean squared (RMS) 36 20. Total harmonic distortion (THD 37 21. Ultraviolet (UV) 38 22. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) 39 23. Uninterruptible power supply (UPS) 40 24. Valve-regulated lead-acid (VRLA) 41 25. Vented lead-acid (VLA) 42 26. Volt-amperes (VA)
09/April/2018 26 33 53 - 2 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 B. References Standards: 2 1. UL 1778, Standard for Safety Uninterruptible Power Systems. 3 2. CSA 22.2, cUL Equipment. 4 3. IEEE 587, ANSI C62.41, Guide for Surge Voltages in Low-voltage AC Power 5 Circuits. 6 4. NFPA 70, NEC. 7 5. OSHA. 8 6. NEMA PE-1, Uninterruptible Power Systems – Specification and Performance 9 Verification.
10 1.4 SUBMITTALS
11 A. Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.
12 B. Refer to the Submittal Schedule at the end of PART 3 for a list of submittal requirements 13 for this Section.
14 1.5 QUALIY ASSURANCE
15 A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in UPS equipment with 10 years documented 16 experience.
17 B. Factory Tests: Test complete system at factory and calibrate prior to shipment, include 18 full-load test at rated power factor.
19 C. Provide the Work in accordance with NFPA 70 (National Electric Code - NEC), as 20 applicable. Where required by authority having jurisdiction (AHJ), material and equipment 21 shall be listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory or other 22 organization acceptable to the AHJ, to provide a basis for approval under the above listed 23 agency.
24 D. Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards published by UL 25 shall conform to those standards and shall have an applied UL listing mark or label.
26 E. Provide materials and equipment acceptable to AHJ for Class, Division, and Group of 27 hazardous area indicated.
28 F. Material and equipment must be listed and labeled for its intended purpose, environment, 29 or application, especially when used in extreme climate areas.
30 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
31 A. Protect UPS and accessories from moisture by using appropriate heaters or desiccants as 32 instructed by manufacturer.
09/April/2018 26 33 53 - 3 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 B. Store UPS and accessories in a clean, dry space. Maintain wrapping or provide additional 2 heavy canvas or plastic cover to protect from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.
3 C. Handle UPS and accessories in accordance with NEMA and manufacturer’s written 4 instructions. Lift only with lugs provided for the purpose. Handle carefully to avoid 5 damage to internal components, enclosure, and finish.
6 1.7 WARRANTY
7 A. UPS: Provide warranty against defects in workmanship and materials for 12 months after 8 initial startup, or 18 months after ship date, whichever comes first.
9 B. Battery: Pass the battery manufacturer’s standard warranty to the end user.
10 C. Warranty - End User: Pass warranties associated with buy-out items to the end user.
11 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
12 A. Operating Ambient Temperature: 13 1. UPS: 32 to 104 degrees F. 14 2. Battery: 77 degrees F, plus or minus 5 degrees F.
15 B. Storage/Transport Ambient Temperature: Minus 13 to 131 degrees F.
16 C. Relative Humidity: 0 to 95 percent, noncondensing.
17 D. Altitude: 18 1. Operating: Up to 4000 feet above mean sea level without derating. 19 2. Storage/Transport: Up to 50,000 feet without derating.
20 E. Audible Noise: Limit noise generated by UPS under conditions of normal operation below 21 sound pressure level of 75 db measured at 5 feet from the UPS cabinet.
22 1.9 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
23 A. Manufacturer’s Field Service: 24 1. Service Personnel: 25 a. Directly employ a nationwide service organization, consisting of factory-trained 26 field service personnel dedicated to the start-up and maintenance of UPS and 27 power equipment. 28 b. A dispatch center to coordinate field service personnel schedules. One toll-free 29 number shall reach a qualified support person 24 hours per day, 365 days per 30 year. If emergency service is required, on-site service shall be 4 hours or less 31 within 150 miles of a service center. 32 c. Two local service personnel shall be assigned to the site with a regional office 33 as a backup.
09/April/2018 26 33 53 - 4 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 B. Maintenance Contracts: A complete offering of preventative and full-service maintenance 2 contracts for both the UPS system and battery system shall be available.
3 PART 2 PRODUCTS
4 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
5 A. Powerware.
6 B. Mitsubishi Electric Automation.
7 C. Liebert.
8 D. MGE UPS Systems. 9
10 2.2 SYSTEM RATINGS AND OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS
11 A. System Continuous Rating: As shown on the drawings. Maintain output voltage within 12 specified limits at loads from full load to no load.
13 B. Battery Capacity: Discharge time to end voltage: 5 minutes at full load, 77 degrees C.
14 C. Voltage Rating: 15 1. Input: 16 a. Three-phase: 480Y/277 Volts. 17 2. Output: 18 a. Three-phase: 480Y/277 Volts and alternate feed to function with selected 19 input and output voltages.
20 D. Equipment Short-Circuit Rating: 42,000 A rms.
21 2.3 UPS MODULE PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
22 A. Input: 23 1. Voltage Range: Plus or minus 10 percent. 24 2. Frequency Range: 60, plus or minus 3 Hz. 25 3. Inrush Current Limiting: 30 percent of full load rated max. 26 4. Current Walk-in: 25 to 100 percent in 15 seconds. 27 5. Power Factor: Minimum 0.85 lagging at full load with nominal input voltage. 28 6. Two-step Rectifier Input Current Limit: 29 a. Step 1: Factory set at 115 percent (adjustable 100 to 125 percent) normal full 30 load input current. 31 b. Step 2: Factory set at 100 percent (adjustable 85 to 125 percent) for on- 32 generator operation.
09/April/2018 26 33 53 - 5 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 7. Two-step Battery Charge Current Limit: 2 a. Step 1: Factory set at 10 percent (adjustable 1 to 25 percent) maximum 3 discharge current. 4 b. Step 2: Factory set at 1 percent (adjustable 1 to 25 percent) maximum 5 discharge current. 6 8. Current Distortion: Less than 7 percent at full load input. 7 9. Surge Protection: Sustains input surges without damage per criteria listed in 8 ANSI C62.41-1980.
9 B. Output: 10 1. Load Rating: 100 percent continuous load rating at 0 to 104 degrees F for any 11 combination of linear and non-linear load. 12 2. Voltage Regulation: Plus or minus 1 percent for steady state load. 13 3. Voltage Adjustment: Plus or minus 5 percent. 14 4. Free Running Frequency: 60 Hz, plus or minus 1.0 percent 15 5. Frequency Regulation: 0.1 percent. 16 6. Measure UPS efficiency under the following conditions: 17 a. UPS, operating at full-rated load kVA, and kW. 18 b. Battery, fully charged and floating on system. 19 c. Input voltage within specified range. 20 d. Efficiency: Defined as output kW divided by input kW. 21 e. Minimum Efficiency at Full Load: 95 percent. 22 7. Phase Displacement: 23 a. 120, plus or minus 1 degree for balanced loads. 24 b. 120, plus or minus 4 degrees for 50 percent unbalanced loads. 25 8. Unbalanced Voltage Regulation: 26 a. 100 percent balanced loads: Plus or minus 1 percent. 27 b. 100 percent unbalanced loads: Plus or minus 2 percent. 28 9. Voltage Transients: 29 a. Compliant to IEC 62040-3 Class 1. 30 b. 100 percent load step: Plus or minus 3 percent. 31 c. Loss or return of AC input power: Plus or minus 3 percent with 5-millisecond 32 recovery time. 33 d. Transfer to/from Bypass: Plus or minus 5 percent. 34 10. Voltage Transient Recovery Time: 35 a. Compliant to IEC 62040-3 Class 1. 36 b. Within 1 percent of output voltage rating within one electrical cycle 37 (16 milliseconds). 38 11. Harmonic Distortion: Maximum 5 percent rms voltage total harmonic distortion 39 (THD) and maximum 3 percent for any single harmonic, at rated frequency and 40 voltage, from 10 percent load to full load and over battery voltage range, measured 41 into a linear load. 42 12. Three-phase Overload Ratings: 43 a. 150 percent for 10 seconds with voltage regulation.
09/April/2018 26 33 53 - 6 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 b. 125 percent for 2 minutes with voltage regulation. 2 c. 100 percent continuously. 3 13. Current Limit: 125 percent of rated output current. 4 14. Fault Clearing: Sub-cycle current of at least 300 percent but not more than 5 500 percent of normal full load current (when bypass is not available). 6 15. Power Factor: 0.90 lagging.
7 2.4 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
8 A. UPS Materials: 9 1. Provide all new high-grade materials for UPS module with solid-state electronic 10 devices, sealed semi-conductors, and control logic and fuses that are physically 11 isolated from power train components. 12 2. The maximum working voltage, current, and di/dt of all solid-state power 13 components and electronic devices shall not exceed 75 percent of the ratings 14 established by their manufacturer. 15 3. The operating temperature of solid-state component sub-assemblies shall not be 16 greater than 75 percent of their ratings. 17 4. Electrolytic capacitors shall be computer grade and operated at no more than 18 95 percent of their voltage rating at the maximum rectifier charging voltage.
19 B. Mechanical Design Features 20 1. Enclosure: 21 a. Construction: NEMA Type 1 enclosure designed for floor mounting. 22 b. Mounting: Structurally adequate with provisions for hoisting, jacking, and 23 forklift handling. 24 c. Allow installation, maintenance, and service of UPS without removal of or 25 access to side or rear panels. 26 d. Provide adequate space and termination facilities for terminating input and 27 output cables. Provide provisions for top access to input, output, and DC 28 connections. 29 2. Ventilation: 30 a. Provide redundant forced air cooling to ensure that all components are 31 operated well within temperature ratings. 32 b. Locate air intake at bottom front and air exhaust at top of unit. 33 c. Incorporate removable air filters that do not require shutting down UPS for 34 replacement, are readily accessible and located at air intakes. 35 d. Provide temperature sensors to monitor UPS internal temperature. Upon 36 detection of temperatures in excess of manufacturer’s recommendations, the 37 sensors shall cause audible and visual alarms to be sounded on the UPS panel. 38 3. Grounding: The AC output neutral shall be electrically isolated from the UPS. The 39 UPS shall have an equipment ground terminal. A terminal for bonding the system 40 neutral to the facility service entrance ground (customer-supplied cable) shall be 41 provided.
09/April/2018 26 33 53 - 7 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 C. Vibration Isolation: 2 1. Application: Mount UPS on double neoprene pad (DNP) isolators. 3 2. DNP: 4 a. Utilize Neoprene pad isolators formed by two layers of 1/4-inch to 3/8-inch 5 thick ribbed or waffled neoprene, separated by stainless steel or aluminum 6 plate. Utilize layers permanently adhered together. Provide Neoprene of 40 to 7 50 durometer. Size pads so they will be loaded within manufacturer's 8 recommended range. Provide a steel top plate equal to size of pad to transfer 9 weight of support unit to pads and to distribute load evenly over surface of 10 pads. 11 b. Form DNP isolators from one of the following products or approved equal: 12 1) Type NR: Amber/Booth. 13 2) Type Korpad: Korfund Dynamics. 14 3) Type WSW: Mason Industries. 15 4) Type NPS: Peabody Noise Control.
16 D. Protection: 17 1. Provide built-in self-protection for surges, sags, and overcurrent from the AC source, 18 overvoltage and voltage surges from output terminals of paralleled sources, and load 19 switching and circuit breaker operation in the distribution system. 20 2. Provide protection against sudden changes in output load and short circuits at the 21 output terminals. Provide built-in protection against permanent damage to itself and 22 the connected load for all predictable types of malfunctions. Use fast-acting current 23 limiting devices to protect against cascading failure of solid-state devices. Internal 24 UPS malfunctions shall cause the module to trip off-line with minimum damage to 25 the module and provide maximum information to maintenance personnel regarding 26 the reason for tripping off-line. 27 3. Provide control section for monitoring and control. Locate meters, controls, and 28 mimic panel on control section door with alarm functions integral to UPS
29 E. Rectifier/Charger Unit: 30 1. Solid-state, providing direct current to inverter unit and for battery charging. 31 2. Provide with input circuit breaker. Provide circuit breaker of frame size and trip 32 rating to supply full-rated load to critical load and recharge battery at the same time. 33 Provide circuit breaker with an undervoltage trip so circuit breaker opens 34 automatically when control voltage is lost. 35 3. Size rectifier/charger to supply power for load and recharging of batteries. Provide 36 charging rate sufficient to restore battery from discharge to 90 percent full charge 37 within ten times the discharge time. After battery is recharged, maintain battery at 38 full charge until next emergency operation. 39 4. Fuse Protection: Fuse each AC phase individually with fast-acting fuses so that loss 40 of any semi-conductor shall not cause cascading failure. Bolt fuses to bus bars at 41 both ends to ensure mechanical and electrical integrity. The display panel on the 42 front of the unit shall indicate a blown fuse occurring on any phase of the rectifier.
09/April/2018 26 33 53 - 8 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 5. Limit initial magnetization inrush current to 500 to 800 percent of rectifier/battery 2 charger full-load current. Provide minimum power factor of 0.8 lagging at nominal 3 input voltage and frequency with inverter operating at full-rated load. 4 6. DC Filter: Provide the rectifier/charger with an output filter to minimize ripple 5 current into the Battery. The AC ripple voltage of the rectifier DC output shall not 6 exceed 0.5 percent root mean squared (RMS) of the float voltage. The AC ripple 7 current in the battery during float operation shall not exceed two percent RMS of the 8 inverter full load DC current. The filter shall be adequate to ensure that the DC 9 output of the rectifier/charger will meet the input requirements of the inverter 10 without the battery connected. 11 7. Battery Equalize Charge: Provide an automatic equalize charge timer feature to 12 automatically apply an equalize voltage to the battery after a 30-second or longer 13 utility outage that generates a Battery Discharging Alarm. The duration of equalize 14 charge time shall be adjustable from 0 to 72 hours. Manual override shall be 15 provided for the automatic equalize circuit. 16 8. Over-voltage Protection: Provide DC over-voltage protection within each module so 17 that if the DC voltage rises to the pre-set limit, that UPS module shall shut down 18 automatically. In the Multi-module UPS System, should the connected critical load 19 exceed the capacity of the available on-line modules, the system control cabinet will 20 initiate an uninterrupted load transfer to bypass.
21 F. Inverter: 22 1. Inverter Unit: Inverter shall be a solid-state Pulse-width Modulation (PWM) 23 controlled Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor (IGBT) technology device. Inverter will 24 be capable of accepting rectifier/charger or battery output and providing rated 25 output within required specified limits. 26 2. Provide electronic controls for individual phase voltage compensation to obtain 27 phase voltage balance of no more than 3 percent under operating conditions, 28 including up to 50 percent current unbalance. 29 3. Provide fault sensing, static isolation, and an output circuit breaker. 30 4. Inverter: Shall be capable of providing specified rated volt-amperes (VA) within 31 operating range of battery while connected to 1 to 0.8 leading or lagging power 32 factor load. Provide current limit for loads in excess of 150 percent of full load 33 rating. Provide maximum effective current at output of inverter, when bypass AC 34 input not available, of 150 percent. 35 5. Static Voltage Regulation of Inverter Steady-State Output: Deviate plus or 36 minus 2 percent maximum under the following conditions: 37 a. Ambient temperature variations. 38 b. Minimum to maximum DC bus voltage. 39 c. Maximum frequency excursions. 40 6. Provide manual adjustment control to regulate output voltage, plus or 41 minus 3 percent from rated value. 42 7. Provide output frequency controlled within plus or minus 2 Hz. Limit frequency 43 transients for system disturbances to plus or minus 0.1 percent maximum. 44 8. Battery Protection:
09/April/2018 26 33 53 - 9 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 a. Provide the inverter with monitoring and control circuits to protect the battery 2 from damage due to excessive discharge. 3 b. Initiate inverter shutdown when the battery voltage has fully discharged. 4 c. Automatically calculate and adjust the battery end-of-discharge voltage for 5 partial load conditions to allow extended operation without damaging the 6 battery. Automatic shutdown based on discharge time is not acceptable.
7 G. Static Bypass Transfer Switch: 8 1. Description: Fully rated, solid-state static bypass transfer switch which allows "make 9 before break" or overlap-type transfer of load from UPS to utility power source (or 10 back again) without interruption of power to critical load. Provide control unit with 11 an automatic transfer circuit which senses status of inverter logic signals and alarm 12 conditions and initiates uninterrupted transfer of load in case of malfunction or 13 external overload. 14 2. Continuous Duty Static Switch: 15 a. Rated to provide 1000 percent of capacity subcycle and up to 500 percent of 16 rated load for three cycles. 17 b. Capable of transferring the full rated load from UPS module output to bypass 18 power source. 19 3. Manual Load Transfers: Initiated from the control panel by utilizing isolation and 20 bypass circuit breakers. The static switch shall not be required. 21 4. Automatic Transfer Conditions: 22 a. Transfer static bypass switch from inverter to bypass power source for the 23 following conditions: 24 1) Inverter Under-voltage: Less than 90 percent of nominal. 25 2) Inverter Over-voltage: Greater than 110 percent of nominal. 26 3) Inverter overload. 27 4) Inverter shutdown for any reason. 28 5) DC circuit under-voltage or over-voltage. 29 6) Final voltage of system battery is reached. 30 b. Inhibit static bypass switch transfer to bypass source for the following 31 conditions: 32 1) Bypass Source Under-voltage: Less than 80 percent of nominal. 33 2) Inverter not synchronized and in phase with normal source. 34 c. Automatic Retransfer Conditions: Automatically retransfer load to inverter 35 provided the following conditions are met: 36 1) Inverter logic and bypass source are synchronized and in phase. 37 2) Inverter conditions are stable for 32 seconds. 38 3) Retransfer selector switch is in the automatic position. 39 4) UPS output is not overloaded. 40
09/April/2018 26 33 53 - 10 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 2.5 MAINTENANCE BYPASS/ISOLATION
2 A. Description: A make-before-break maintenance bypass switch to route the flow of power 3 to the load around the rectifier/charger, inverter, and static bypass transfer switch. 4 1. Switch shall be electrically and mechanically interlocked to prevent interrupting 5 power to the load when switching to bypass mode. 6 2. Switch shall electrically isolate other UPS components to permit safe servicing.
7 B. Provide two thermal-magnetic breakers for maintenance bypass and for maintenance 8 isolation. Each circuit breaker shall have an interrupting rating of 42 kAIC. Provide a key 9 interlock system. 10 1. Key interlock requires unlocking the maintenance bypass breaker before switching 11 from normal position with key that is released only when the UPS is bypassed by the 12 static bypass transfer switch. Lock is designed specifically for mechanical and 13 electrical component interlocking.
14 2.6 CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
15 A. Controls: 16 1. AC input circuit breaker. 17 2. Inverter operator switch to initiate inverter operation. 18 3. Inverter standby switch to cause inverter to cease operation. 19 4. Static switch transfer switch to permit manual actuation of static transfer switch. 20 5. Static switch lockout switch to inhibit automatic retransfer of load to inverter. 21 6. Battery charge timer. 22 7. Indicator test switch. 23 8. Static switch preferred input circuit breaker. 24 9. Static switch output circuit breaker . 25 10. Static switch bypass circuit breaker. 26 11. Emergency power off (EPO) switch. 27 12. Audio reset push-button switch. 28 13. Controls for static switch maintenance bypass switch.
29 B. Time Delay: Provide field adjustable 0 to 120 seconds minimum time delay return from 30 battery only power to normal after normal power loss.
31 C. UPS Control Panel: Group displays, indications, and basic system controls on a common 32 control panel on front of UPS enclosure.
33 D. Provide logic microprocessors, sensors, transducers, terminals, relays, and wiring required 34 to support listed items. Alarms will include audible signals and visual displays.
35 E. Indications: 36 1. Quantitative Indications: 37 a. Input voltage, each phase, line to line.
09/April/2018 26 33 53 - 11 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 b. Input current, each phase, line to line. 2 c. Bypass input voltage, each phase, line to line. 3 d. Bypass input frequency. 4 e. System output voltage, each phase, line to line. 5 f. System output current, each phase. 6 g. System output frequency. 7 h. DC bus voltage. 8 i. Battery current and direction (charge/discharge). 9 j. Elapsed time discharging battery. 10 k. Battery time remaining during battery operation. 11 l. Number of transfers to standby source. 12 m. Percent load. 13 2. Power Flow: A power flow diagram shall graphically depict whether the load is being 14 supplied from the inverter, bypass, or battery and provide, on the same screen, the 15 status of the following components: 16 a. Normal operation. 17 b. Battery circuit breaker. 18 c. Inverter output circuit breaker. 19 d. Bypass circuit breaker. 20 e. Static transfer switch (connected, disconnected). 21 f. Time to overload transfer. 22 3. Alarm Indications shall include the following: 23 a. Input Fail. 24 b. Control Power Fail. 25 c. Output Over/Under Frequency. 26 d. Output Under-voltage. 27 e. Output Over-voltage. 28 f. Overload. 29 g. Overload Transfer. 30 h. Overload Shutdown. 31 i. DC Ground Fault. 32 j. DC Capacitor Fuse Blown. 33 k. Battery CB Open. 34 l. Battery Discharging. 35 m. Low Battery Warning. 36 n. Low Battery Shutdown. 37 o. DC Over-voltage Shutdown. 38 p. Load on Bypass. 39 q. Auto Retransfer Primed. 40 r. Manual Reset/Retransfer. 41 s. Static Switch Unable. 42 t. Bypass Not Available. 43 u. Bypass Phase Sequence Wrong. 44 v. Reverse Power. 45 w. Rectifier Fuse Blown.
09/April/2018 26 33 53 - 12 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 x. Inverter Fault. 2 y. Hardware Shutdown. 3 z. Emergency Off. 4 aa. Ambient Over-temperature. 5 bb. Blower Failed. 6 cc. Equipment Over-temperature. 7 dd. Over-temperature Timeout. 8 4. Operator Guidance: Provide menu-driven operator instructions detailing the 9 operation of the UPS system. 10 a. The instruction menu shall be located at the control panel. 11 b. The UPS logic microprocessor shall monitor each step, thus prompting itself 12 to the next step of the instructions. 13 c. The following instructions shall be available as a minimum: 14 1) UPS Startup. 15 2) UPS Shutdown. 16 3) Inverter Stop. 17 4) Inverter Start. 18 5) Transfer of Load to Static Bypass. 19 6) Equalize Charge to System Battery.
20 F. EPO Switch: Capable of local operation and operation by means of activation by external 21 dry contacts.
22 G. Dry Contacts: Provide form-C isolated dry contacts for external use to monitor: 23 1. UPS on line. 24 2. Load on static switch bypass. 25 3. UPS on battery. 26 4. UPS battery low. 27 5. Summary alarm.
28 2.7 STORAGE BATTERY
29 A. Manufacturers: 30 1. East Penn 31 2. Enersys 32 3. C&D
33 B. Furnish a storage battery for UPS with sufficient capacity to maintain UPS output at 34 required load for minimum specified time. Battery to provide 100 percent of specified 35 capacity at initial startup. Provide heavy-duty industrial type battery designed for stationary 36 power service.
37 C. Provide valve-regulated lead-acid batteries. Provide impact- resistant plastic container of a 38 design proven by field experience.
09/April/2018 26 33 53 - 13 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 D. Battery to have sufficient capacity to supply load for 5 minutes.
2 E. Supply battery with the following: 3 1. Racks cabinets two-step tiers, protected with electrolyte-resistant paint. 4 2. Intercell and interior connectors for racks, end to end and/or back to back. 5 Maximum connection voltage drop of 30 mV between adjacent units. 6 3. Special tools and fittings required to assemble battery. 7 4. Cell numerals. 8 5. DC disconnect. 9 6. Barrier around battery terminals to prevent accidental contact
10 2.8 FACTORY TESTING
11 A. Test UPS system as defined here for compliance with this Specification. Perform tests 12 described in this Section at UPS manufacturer's facility. Tests may be witnessed by Owner.
13 B. Provide equipment, instruments, load banks, and apparatus for testing. Assure instruments 14 are of sufficient accuracy to verify specified performance parameters.
15 C. Perform testing at normal ambient conditions within test facility.
16 D. Power Module Tests: Subject power module to the following tests as a minimum. Conduct 17 control and power tests simultaneously if appropriate. 18 1. Control Tests: Test operation of the following items/functions: 19 a. Instrumentation: 20 1) Accuracy on display. 21 2) Operation upon command. 22 b. Annunciation: 23 1) Sensor operation. 24 2) Distinction between manual override and normal status alarm. 25 3) Status command. 26 4) Display operation, normal alarms. 27 c. Logic: 28 1) Protective functions. 29 2) Normal operation functions. 30 d. Operator controls. 31 e. Troubleshooting controls. 32 2. Power Tests: For steady-state tests in this paragraph, measure and continuously 33 record phase voltages, three-phase currents, frequency, and power factor or 34 kilowatts, at module input and output terminations. 35 a. No load. 36 b. 50 percent of rated power module kW load, balanced. 37 c. 100 percent of rated power module kW load, balanced for 24 hours. 38 d. Output harmonic voltages at 100 percent rated kW load.
09/April/2018 26 33 53 - 14 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 3. System Tests: Perform system tests exclusive of battery bank. System may be tested 2 in increments, as long as it is demonstrated that each power module performs as 3 specified when operating with any other power module. Test systems with two 4 power modules with both power modules operational. Control and power tests may 5 be conducted simultaneously, if appropriate. 6 a. Control Tests: Test operation of the following system items/functions: 7 1) Instrumentation: 8 a) Accuracy on display. 9 b) Operation upon command. 10 2) Annunciation: 11 a) Sensor operation. 12 b) Distinction between troubleshooting controls, normal status, 13 Priority 1 alarm and Priority 2 alarm. 14 c) Status command. 15 d) Display operation normal alarms. 16 3) Logic: 17 a) Protective functions. 18 b) Normal operation functions. 19 4) Operator controls. 20 5) Troubleshooting controls. 21 4. Power Tests, Steady State: For steady state tests in this paragraph, measure and 22 continuously record three-phase voltages, three-line currents, frequency, and power 23 factor or kilowatts, at system input and output terminations. 24 a. No load. 25 b. 50 percent of rated system kW load, balanced. 26 c. 100 percent rated system kW load, balanced. 27 5. Power Tests, Transient: For transient tests in this paragraph, measure voltages with 28 continuous recording instruments at output termination of system output/bypass 29 module. 30 a. 0 to 50 percent load addition. 31 b. 50 to 100 percent load rejection. 32 c. Manually initiated transfer. 33 d. Manually initiated retransfer. 34 e. 125 percent of rated system load, balanced. 35 f. 150 percent of rated system load, balanced. 36 g. Automatic transfer. 37 h. Automatic retransfer.
38 PART 3 EXECUTION
39 3.1 INSTALLATION
40 A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
41 B. Secure enclosures and racks to floor.
09/April/2018 26 33 53 - 15 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 C. Include services of technician to supervise adjustments, final connection, and system 2 energization.
3 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
4 A. On-site Tests: Provide on-site factory-trained technician to supervise installation and 5 testing.
6 B. Field UPS Start-up Inspection and Testing: 7 1. Visual Inspection: 8 a. Inspect equipment for signs of damage. 9 b. Verify installation per drawings. 10 c. Inspect cabinets for foreign objects. 11 d. Verify neutral and ground conductors are properly sized and configured per 12 vendor requirements as noted in vendor drawings supplied with installation 13 manuals or submittal package. 14 e. Inspect all battery cell cases. 15 f. Inspect each cell for proper polarity. 16 g. Verify all printed circuit boards are configured properly. 17 2. Mechanical Inspection: 18 a. Check all control wiring connections for tightness. 19 b. Check all power wiring connections for tightness. 20 c. Check all terminal screws, nuts, and/or spade lugs for tightness. 21 3. Electrical Inspection: 22 a. Check all fuses for continuity. 23 b. Confirm input bypass voltage and phase rotation is correct. 24 c. Verify control transformer connections are correct for voltages being used. 25 d. Assure connections and voltage of the battery string. 26 e. Battery inspection and certification according to IEEE standards. 27 4. Unit Start-Up: 28 a. Energize control power. 29 b. Perform control/logic checks and adjust to meet manufacturer specification. 30 c. Verify DC float and equalize voltage levels. 31 d. Verify DC voltage clamp and over-voltage shutdown levels. 32 e. Verify battery discharge, low battery warning, and low battery shutdown levels. 33 f. Verify fuse monitor alarms and system shutdown. 34 g. Verify inverter voltages and regulation circuits. 35 h. Verify inverter/bypass sync circuits and set overlap time. 36 i. Perform manual transfers and returns. 37 j. Simulate utility outage at no load. 38 k. Verify proper recharge.
39 C. Instruct up to ten Owner’s personnel for minimum of 1 day in maintenance and operation 40 of equipment.
09/April/2018 26 33 53 - 16 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 D. Provide test instruments to record elapsed time between transfers, voltage, current, 2 frequency, waveform, and transients. 3 1. Include services of an experienced technician to make final adjustments, final 4 connections, and perform final testing. 5 2. Evidence of transients or phase shifts in graphs will be cause for rejection of system.
6 3.3 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE 7 8
ITEM SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT AS INDICATED NO. WITH BID 26 33 53-01 Itemized list of exceptions and deviations Prior to delivery from these specifications 26 33 53-02 Catalog cutsheets, other descriptive Prior to delivery literature 26 33 53-03 Layout with dimensions and openings for Prior to delivery major components including inverter, by- pass, transformers, charger, battery, battery rack, and battery enclosure 26 33 53-04 Locations of conduit entry and exit points Prior to delivery 26 33 53-05 Single-line diagram including controls, Prior to delivery metering, and external wiring requirements 26 33 53-07 Capacities and ratings Prior to delivery 26 33 53-08 Heat rejection and ventilation requirements Prior to delivery under no load and full load conditions 26 33 53-09 Mounting and detailed scaled installation Prior to delivery drawings, including seismic 26 33 53-11 System configuration and rating with single- Prior to delivery line diagrams (detail breaker and disconnect locations, frame size, trip ratings, and model numbers) 26 33 53-16 Datasheets Prior to delivery 26 33 53-19 Wiring and schematic diagrams Prior to delivery 26 33 53-21 Control interface Prior to delivery 26 33 53-22 Battery specification, installation, and Prior to delivery maintenance requirements 26 33 53-27 Factory testing results Prior to delivery
09/April/2018 26 33 53 - 17 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO ITEM SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT AS INDICATED NO. WITH BID 26 33 53-28 Field test results With record documents
26 33 53-29 Operation and maintenance manuals With operations and maintenance manuals 26 33 53-30 Training With record documents
1 END OF SECTION
09/April/2018 26 33 53 - 18 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 SECTION 26 36 23
2 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES
3 PART 1 GENERAL
4 1.1 SUMMARY
5 A. Section includes the requirements necessary to furnish and install automatic transfer 6 switches (ATS).
7 B. Abbreviations and Acronyms: 8 1. American Wire Gauge (AWG) 9 2. Authority having jurisdiction (AHJ) 10 3. Automatic transfer switches (ATS) 11 4. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers, Inc. (IEEE) 12 5. National Electric Code (NEC) 13 6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 14 7. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL)
15 1.2 SUBMITTALS 16
17 A. Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.
18 B. Refer to the Submittal Schedule at the end of PART 3 for a list of submittal requirements 19 for this Section.
20 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 21
22 A. Provide the Work in accordance with National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 70 23 (National Electric Code - NEC), as applicable. Where required by authority having 24 jurisdiction (AHJ), material and equipment shall be listed and labeled by a nationally 25 recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable to the AHJ, to provide a 26 basis for approval under the above listed agency.
27 B. Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards published by 28 Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) shall conform to those standards and shall have an 29 applied UL listing mark or label.
30 C. Provide materials and equipment acceptable to AHJ for Class, Division, and Group of 31 hazardous area indicated.
32 D. Material and equipment must be listed and labeled for its intended purpose, environment, 33 or application, especially when used in extreme climate areas.
09/April/2018 26 36 23 - 1 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO
1 E. ATS Manufacturer: 2 1. Company specializing in transfer switches and emergency power control systems 3 with 10 years’ minimum experience. 4 2. Maintain local service center capable of emergency service or routine preventative 5 maintenance and offer preventative maintenance contracts. Maintain records of each 6 switch by serial number for 10 years minimum.
7 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
8 A. Inherently double-throw power transfer switch unit and control module interconnected to 9 provide complete automatic operation.
10 B. Electrically operated and mechanically held. Mechanically interlock to ensure only one of 11 two possible positions preferred source or alternate source.
12 C. Provide inspection capability from front. Provide manual operating handle for 13 maintenance, permitting operator to manually stop contacts at any point throughout entire 14 travel, to properly inspect and service contacts.
15 D. Provide control module to direct transfer switch operation. Control sensing and logic with 16 built-in microprocessor for reliability, minimum maintenance, and inherent digital 17 communications capability.
18 E. Monitor each phase voltage of normal source with 85 to 100 percent adjustable pickup and 19 70 to 98 percent adjustable dropout, both in increments of 1 percent, fully field adjustable 20 without use of tools, meters, or power supplies. Factory set to pick up at 90 percent, drop 21 out at 85 percent.
22 F. Provide alternate source voltage sensing with 85 to 100 percent adjustable pickup and 84 23 to 86 percent fixed dropout and frequency sensing with 90 to 100 percent adjustable 24 pickup and 87 to 89 percent fixed dropout, fully field adjustable in 1 percent increments 25 without use of tools, meters, or power supplies. Factory set to pick up at 90 percent 26 voltage and 95 percent frequency.
27 G. Control Module: Include time delays fully field adjustable in increments over entire range 28 as follows: 29 1. Time delay adjustable from 0 to 6 seconds and factory set at 1 second to override 30 momentary preferred source outages to delay transfer switch and engine starting 31 signals. 32 2. Transfer to alternate source time delay adjustable from zero to 5 minutes. 33 3. Retransfer to preferred source time delay, automatically bypassed if alternate source 34 fails and preferred source is acceptable, adjustable from zero to 30 minutes. 35 4. Unloaded running time delay for standby engine generator cooldown, adjustable 36 from zero to 60 minutes.
09/April/2018 26 36 23 - 2 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO
1 H. Start Signal: Prevent dry cranking of generator by requiring generator to reach proper 2 output and to run for cooldown duration setting, regardless of whether preferred source 3 restores before load is transferred.
4 PART 2 PRODUCTS
5 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 6
7 A. ASCO 7000.
8 B. Russelectric, Type RMT.
9 C. Cummins/ONAN.
10 D. Zenith Controls Inc.
11 2.2 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES (ATS)
12 A. Provide one low-voltage automatic transfer switch (ATS) capable of switching resistive and 13 inductive-type loads and providing control as to which source serves these loads.
14 B. Nominal Voltage and Poles: 15 1. 480Y/277 Volts, three-phase, four-wire, plus ground. 16 2. Four-pole on common shaft (three-phase, plus neutral).
17 C. Short-circuit Withstand Capability: 18 3-Cycle Closing and Withstand Rating, ATS Used with Molded- Switch Amperes Case Breaker, rms Symmetrical Amps 100 to 400 42,000 600 to 800 65,000 1,000 to 1,200 85,000 1,600-4000 100,000
19 D. Continuous Current Rating: As indicated on the drawings.
20 E. Transfer Mechanism: 21 1. Single momentarily energized electric operator to activate double-throw switch. 22 2. Overcenter-type linkage to provide quick-make, quick-break action of switch 23 contacts. 24 3. Capable of operating at 70 percent of nominal system voltage.
09/April/2018 26 36 23 - 3 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO
1 4. Interlock preferred and alternate source contacts mechanically and electrically to 2 prevent simultaneous closing. 3 5. Silver-tungsten alloy main contacts mechanically held without use of hooks, latches, 4 magnets, or springs. 5 6. Separate arcing contacts and arc extinguishing chutes.
6 F. Manual Operator: Capable of actuating switch with same action and speed as electric 7 operator.
8 G. Enclosure: 9 1. NEMA 1. 10 2. Finish: Manufacturer's standard color. 11 3. Door lock with provisions for padlocking.
12 H. Lugs: 13 1. Two-hole, long barrel copper only compression lugs. 14
15 2.3 ATS ACCESSORIES
16 A. Provide one each Form C contact rated 5A at 120 Vac for each of the following: 17 1. Loss of preferred voltage via voltage sensing relay on preferred source for generator 18 start signal. 19 2. Loss of preferred voltage via voltage sensing relay on preferred source for facility 20 monitoring use. 21 3. Alternate source detected at line side of transfer switch via voltage-sensing relay on 22 preferred source. 23 4. Transfer switch in preferred position. 24 5. Transfer switch in alternate position.
25 B. Provide one red and one green indicating light on enclosure door. 26 1. Illuminate green light when switch is in preferred position. 27 2. Illuminate red light when switch is in alternate position.
28 C. Provide two amber indicating lights on enclosure door. 29 1. Illuminate one light when preferred source is present. 30 2. Illuminate second light when alternate source is present. 31 3. Operate lights from voltage-sensing relays, not directly from main busses.
32 D. Identify control wire terminations with tubular sleeve-type markers.
33 E. Provide schematic drawing under clear plastic on interior of enclosure door.
34 F. Communication Network: Full-duplex RS 422 interface built into ATS control module to 35 enable digital communications with remotely located annunciators and/or network
09/April/2018 26 36 23 - 4 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO
1 supervisors. Enable remote annunciator to indicate and control the following functions via 2 digital communications in control panel: 3 1. Indication: 4 a. Load connected to preferred or alternate source. 5 b. Preferred and/or alternate source available. 6 c. Transfer switch in test mode. 7 d. Transfer switch control panel in time-delay function. 8 2. Control: 9 a. Simulate preferred source failure to sensing controls. 10
11 G. Exerciser Clock: 12 1. Sets day, time, and duration of exercise period. 13 2. Provide with/without load selector switch
14 H. Manual/automatic retransfer selector switch.
15 I. Battery Charger: 16 1. SCR voltage regulated type with float and taper features. 17 2. 6 amps at 24 Vdc with charging ammeter. 18
19 J. Elevator Signal Relay: 1- to 300-second adjustable pre-signal prior to transfer and 20 retransfer and signal when transfer switch is in emergency position. 21 1. Terminations: Provide hardware as required to accommodate connector types 22 specified in Section 26 05 19 Low-voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.
23 K. Nameplates: Provide nameplates in accordance with Section 26 05 53 Identification for 24 Electrical Systems.
25 2.4 ATS CONTROL DEVICES
26 A. Four-position switch mounted on enclosure door with four modes as follows: 27 1. Off: 28 a. Control relays de-energized, engine-start circuit open. No operation 29 under any circumstance. 30 b. Provide white, door-mounted indicating light illuminated when in off 31 position. 32 2. Auto: Complete automatic operation as specified. 33 3. Test: Simulate failure of preferred source. Transfer to alternate as specified. 34 Retransfer to preferred after switch is returned to auto position after appropriate 35 time delay. Provide momentary contact switch to override time delay from alternate 36 to preferred. 37 4. Engine Start: ATS remains connected to preferred source and initiates engine-start 38 circuit. Transfer to alternate source only on failure of preferred source and after 39 appropriate time delay.
09/April/2018 26 36 23 - 5 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO
1 PART 3 EXECUTION
2 3.1 INSTALLATION 3
4 A. Install ATS in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions.
5 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING 6
7 A. Adjust contactors, time delays, and functioning parts.
8 B. Clean exterior and interior surfaces.
9 3.3 MANUFACTURER’S SERVICES
10 A. Furnish manufacturer’s representative for the following services at jobsite or classroom as 11 designated by Owner for minimum workdays listed below, travel time excluded: 12 1. 1 workday for installation assistance and inspection of installation. 13 2. 1 workday for functional and performance testing. 14 3. 1 workday plant startup. 15 4. 1 workday for instruction of site personnel.
16 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 17
18 A. Test ATS in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
19 B. Test in accordance with requirements of authority having jurisdiction.
20 3.5 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE 21
ITEM NO. SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT AS INDICATED WITH BID 26 36 23-02 Catalog cutsheets, other descriptive Prior to delivery literature 226 36 23- Layout with dimensions and openings Prior to delivery 03 26 36 23-05 Capacities and ratings Prior to delivery 26 36 23-07 Performance characteristics Prior to delivery 26 36 23-11 Datasheets Prior to delivery
09/April/2018 26 36 23 - 6 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO
ITEM NO. SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT AS INDICATED WITH BID 26 36 23-13 Electrical voltage, load, and interface for Prior to delivery accessories 26 36 23-14 Wiring and schematic diagrams Prior to delivery 26 36 23-15 Control interface Prior to delivery 26 36 23-17 Field test results [X] [Prior to delivery] [Per construction schedule] [With record documents] [With operations and maintenance manuals] [Before date of Substantial Completion] [Other] 26 36 23-18 Operation and maintenance manuals With operations and maintenance manuals 26 36 23-19 Training Before date of Substantial Completion 26 36 23-21 Manufacturer’s specifications Prior to delivery 26 36 23-23 Installation instructions Prior to delivery
1 END OF SECTION
09/April/2018 26 36 23 - 7 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO
1 SECTION 26 41 00
2 FACILITY LIGHTNING PROTECTION
3 PART 1 GENERAL
4 1.1 SUMMARY
5 A. Section includes the requirements necessary to furnish and install: 6 1. System design. 7 2. Air terminals, interconnecting conductors, and other system components and 8 accessories. 9 3. Grounding and bonding for lightning protection. 10 4. System inspection and certification.
11 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
12 A. Lightning Protection System: National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 780; Class I 13 Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) 96A; master labeled system protecting roof-mounted 14 mechanical equipment, consisting of air terminals on roofs, bonding of structure and other 15 metal objects, grounding electrodes, and interconnecting conductors.
16 1.3 REFERENCES 17
18 A. Abbreviations and Acronyms: 19 1. Authority having jurisdiction (AHJ) 20 2. Independent Protection Co. (IPC) 21 3. Lightning Protection Institute (LPI) 22 4. National Electric Code (NEC) 23 5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 24 6. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL)
25 1.4 SUBMITTALS
26 A. Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.
27 B. Refer to the Submittal Schedule at the end of PART 3 for a list of submittal requirements for 28 this Section.
29 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
30 A. Provide the Work in accordance with NFPA 70 (National Electric Code - NEC), as 31 applicable. Where required by authority having jurisdiction (AHJ), material and equipment 32 shall be listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory or other organization 33 acceptable to the AHJ, to provide a basis for approval under the above listed agency.
09/April/2018 26 41 00 - 1 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 B. Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards published by UL shall 2 conform to those standards and shall have an applied UL listing mark or label.
3 C. Provide materials and equipment acceptable to AHJ for Class, Division, and Group of 4 hazardous area indicated.
5 D. Material and equipment must be listed and labeled for its intended purpose, environment, or 6 application, especially when used in extreme climate areas.
7 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
8 A. Designer: Lightning Protection Institute (LPI)-certified Designer or recognized lightning 9 protection Manufacturer.
10 B. Manufacturer: Company specializing in lightning protection equipment with minimum 11 3 years' documented experience and member of LPI.
12 C. Installer: Authorized installer of manufacturer with minimum 3 years' documented 13 experience and member of LPI.
14 D. Inspection of Final Installation and Grounding Connections of the System: Performed by 15 LPI-certified inspector.
16 1.7 COORDINATION
17 A. Coordinate work of this Section with roofing and exterior, and interior finish installations.
18 PART 2 PRODUCTS
19 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
20 A. Thompson Lightning Protection.
21 B. Independent Protection Co. (IPC).
22 C. Erico.
23 D. Kuefler Lightning Protection.
24 E. Advanced Lightning Technology, LTD.
25 2.2 MATERIALS
26 A. Components: Aluminum unless otherwise specified.
27 B. Air Terminals: 28 1. Solid aluminum with tapered points.
09/April/2018 26 41 00 - 2 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 2. Length sufficient to extend minimum 10 inches above object being protected. 2 3. Diameter: 1/2 inch.
3 C. Ground Rods: 4 1. Materials: Copperclad steel. 5 2. Diameter: 5/8 inch. 6 3. Length: 10 feet.]
7 D. Conductors: Aluminum Cable.
8 E. Cable Connections and Splicers: 9 1. Welds: Exothermic process. 10 2. Fasteners: Bolted, clamp type. 11 3. Through-Roof: Lead seal flashing washer.
12 F. Conduit: PVC Schedule 40 per Section 26 05 33 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems. 13 PVC conduit shall not be installed in exposed areas.
14 G. Contact the Owner at least 7 days before inspections and tests are scheduled.
15 PART 3 EXECUTION
16 3.1 EXAMINATION
17 A. Verify surfaces are ready to receive work.
18 B. Verify field measurements as shown on shop drawings.
19 C. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions.
20 3.2 PROTECTION OF SURROUNDING ELEMENTS
21 A. Protect elements surrounding work of this Section from damage or disfiguration.
22 3.3 INSTALLATION
23 A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
24 B. Certify completed system as UL master labeled.
25 C. Install ground rods per Section 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
26 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
27 A. Isolate lightning protection system from other ground conditions while performing tests.
09/April/2018 26 41 00 - 3 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 B. Obtain services of Underwriters Laboratories Inc. to provide inspection and certification of 2 lightning protection system.
3 C. Obtain UL master label and attach to building at location directed by Owner.
4 3.5 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE 5 6
ITEM SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT AS INDICATED
NO. BID WITH
26 41 00-01 Resumes of key Contractor personnel for X Prior to delivery design-build 26 41 00-02 Catalog cutsheets, other descriptive Prior to delivery literature showing dimensions and materials of each component, include indication of certification by listing authority 26 41 00-03 Layout of air terminals, grounding Prior to delivery electrodes, and bonding connections to structure and other metal objects 26 41 00-04 Detail of terminal, electrode, and Prior to delivery conductor sizes, and connection and termination details. 26 41 00-05 Field test results (include description of Before date of Substantial equipment tested, description of test, test Completion results, conclusions, recommendations, and signature of responsible test organization authority)
7 END OF SECTION
09/April/2018 26 41 00 - 4 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 SECTION 26 50 00 2 LIGHTING
3 PART 1 GENERAL
4 1.1 REFERENCES
5 A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 6 1. ASTM International (ASTM): 7 a. A123/A123M, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) 8 Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 9 b. A153/A153M, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron 10 and Steel Hardware. 11 c. A572/A572A, Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy 12 Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel. 13 d. A588/A588M, Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy 14 Structural Steel, with 50 ksi [345 MPa] Minimum Yield Point to 4-in. 15 [100-mm] Thick. 16 e. A595/A595M, Standard Specification for Steel Tubes, Low-Carbon or 17 High-Strength Low-Alloy, Tapered for Structural Use. 18 f. A615/A615M, Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon- 19 Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 20 g. A1011/A1011M, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot- 21 Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low- 22 Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength. 23 h. D6576, Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Rubber Chemically 24 Blown. 25 i. G154, Standard Practice for Operating Fluorescent Light Apparatus for 26 UV Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials. 27 2. American Wood Protection Association (AWPA): M6, Brands Used on Forest 28 Products. 29 3. Canadian Standards Association (CSA). 30 4. Certified Ballast Manufacturer (CBM). 31 5. Federal Communications Commission (FCC). 32 6. Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA). 33 a. HB-9, Lighting Handbook. 34 b. LM-79, IES Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Solid-State 35 Lighting Products. 36 c. LM-80, IESNA Approved Method for Measuring Lumen Maintenance of 37 LED Light Sources. 38 d. RP (Recommended Practices) Series. 39 e. TM-21, Projecting Long Term Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources. 40 7. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): C62.41, Recommended 41 Practice on Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits. 42 8. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 43 9. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum). 44 10. ICS 6, Industrial Control and Systems: Enclosures. 45 11. National Energy Policy Act. 46 12. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical Code 47 (NEC) – Softbound Version. 09/April/2018 26 50 00 - 1 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO MASTER
1 13. Rural Utilities Service (RUS): 1728F-700, Specification for Wood Poles, Stubs 2 and Anchor Logs. 3 14. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 4 a. 773, UL Standard for Safety Plug-In Locking Type Photocontrols for Use 5 with Area Lighting - Fourth Edition; Reprint with Revisions Through and 6 Including March 08, 2002. 7 b. 844, Electric Lighting Fixtures for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations. 8 c. 924, Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment. 9 d. 1598, UL Standard for Safety Luminaires. 10 e. 2108, UL Standard for Safety Low Voltage Lighting Systems - First 11 Edition; Reprint with Revisions through and Including February 24, 2014. 12 f. 8750, UL Standard for Safety Light Emitting Diode (LED) Equipment for 13 Use in Lighting Products - First Edition; Reprint with Revisions Through 14 and Including April 1, 2015. 15 15. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency and U.S. Department of Energy: Energy 16 Star. 17 18 1.2 SUBMITTALS
19 A. Action Submittals: 20 1. Shop Drawings: 21 a. General: 22 1) Provide catalog data sheets and pictures for all products listed below. 23 2) Proposed Luminaire Substitutions (Interior and Exterior): Provide an 24 electronic photometric file in standard ‘.ies’ file format per the 25 Illumination Engineering Society of North America (IESNA) for any 26 proposed luminaire substitution not identified on the project 27 Luminaire Schedule. Obtain file from the luminaire manufacturer or 28 approved independent photometric testing laboratory. Include the 29 proposed substitute luminaire with all options identified on the 30 project Luminaire Schedule. 31 b. Exterior Luminaires: 32 1) Catalog data sheets with pictures. Luminaire material, finish, 33 dimensions, and metal gauge. 34 2) Lens material, pattern, and thickness. Filters. 35 3) IESNA lighting classification (BUG rating). 36 4) Isolux diagram. 37 5) Lighting distribution data and lighting distribution classification type 38 as defined in IESNA HB 9. 39 6) Fastening details to wall, pendant, or pole. 40 7) Ballast type, location, and method of fastening. 41 8) For light poles, submit catalog sheet, wind loading, pole deflection 42 with fixture attached, total weight, all accessories, complete 43 dimensions, and finish. 44 9) Brackets and supports. 45 10) Pole foundations.
09/April/2018 26 50 00 - 2 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO
1 c. LED Source Systems: 2 1) General: 3 a) IESNA LM-80 test reports. 4 b) IESNA TM-21 ratings. 5 c) Operating temperature range. Data sheet (chart/graph) 6 describing life as a function of temperature. 7 d) Warranty: Light engine and driver. 8 e) Rated life. 9 f) Surge protection. 10 g) Thermal control device, heat sink. 11 h) Enclosure and wiring information. 12 i) Operating voltage range. 13 2) Electronic Module/Light Engine: 14 a) Correlated Color Temperature (CCT). 15 b) Color Rendering Index (CRI). 16 3) Drivers: 17 a) Input Current Total Harmonic Distortion. 18 b) Power factor. 19 c) Sound rating. 20 21 B. Informational Submittals: 22 1. Manufacturer’s printed installation instructions.
23 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
24 A. Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ): 25 1. Provide Work in accordance with NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). 26 Where required by the AHJ, provide material and equipment labeled or listed by 27 a nationally recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable to the 28 AHJ to provide a basis for approval under NEC. 29 2. Provide materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards 30 published by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. in conformance with those 31 standards and with an applied UL listing mark. 32 33 B. Standard Products: 34 1. Provide materials and equipment of manufacturers regularly engaged in the 35 production of products specified in this section and that are of equal material, 36 design, and workmanship. 37 2. Provide products that have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 38 2 years prior to Bid opening in similar applications under similar circumstances 39 and of similar size. Provide products that have been on sale on the commercial 40 market through advertisements, manufacturers’ catalogs, or brochures during the 41 2-year period. 42 3. Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date: Do not use products 43 manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to Site.
09/April/2018 26 50 00 - 3 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO MASTER
1 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
2 A. Aluminum Poles: 3 1. Provide manufacturer’s standard protection for the finish during shipment and 4 installation. At minimum, spirally wrap each pole shaft with protective paper 5 secured with tape, and ship small parts in boxes. 6 2. Do not store poles on ground. 7 3. Support poles so they are at least 1 foot above ground level and growing 8 vegetation. 9 4. Do not remove factory-applied pole wrappings until just before installing pole. 10 5. Ship poles with bolt circle template, base cover, handhold cover, and shaft cap or 11 tenon.
12 PART 2 PRODUCTS
13 2.1 LUMINAIRES
14 A. Provide luminaires and components tested, listed, and labeled by UL, or other 15 approved testing agency. 16 17 B. Provide luminaires with Illumination Engineering Society of North America (IESNA) 18 formatted photometric files, “.ies” format, certified by the luminaire manufacturer for 19 use with lighting software. 20 21 C. Luminaire Labels: 22 1. External label per ANSI C136.15.
23 2.2 LED SOURCE SYSTEMS
24 A. General: 25 1. Provide IESNA LM-80 test reports. 26 2. Provide RoHS compliant LED light source(s) and driver(s). 27 3. Warranty: 5 years minimum. 28 29 B. Electronic Module/Light Engine: 30 1. Mount all components to a single plate and factory prewired with quick- 31 disconnect plugs. 32 2. Include a driver, thermal control device, thermal protector device, and surge 33 protector device. 34 a. Provide surge protector tested in accordance with IEEE/ANSI C62.41.2 35 to Category C Low. 36 3. Provide LEDs mounted to a metal-core circuit board and aluminum heat sink 37 for optimal thermal management and long life. 38 4. Light Engine Rating per TM-21: 60,000 at 25 degrees C 39 5. Correlated Color Temperature (CCT): As indicated on the Luminaire Schedule. 40 6. Color Rendering Index (CRI): Minimum of 70.
09/April/2018 26 50 00 - 4 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO
1 2 C. Drivers: 3 1. Expected life of 60,000 hours at 25 degrees . 4 2. Provide drivers mounted in an all metal can. 5 3. Operating Voltage Range: 50/60-Hz input source of 120V to 277V with 6 sustained variations of plus or minus 10 percent voltage with no damage to the 7 driver. 8 4. Input Current Total Harmonic Distortion: Less than 20 percent up to 50 percent 9 of full load rating. 10 5. Power Factor: Greater than 0.90 for primary application up to 50 percent of full 11 load rating. 12 6. Sound rating: Class A. 13 7. Comply with NEMA 410 for inrush current limits. 14 15 2.3 POLES
16 A. General: 17 1. Design for wind load of 119 mph while supporting luminaires and other 18 appurtenances. Use effective projected areas (EPA) of luminaires and 19 appurtenances in calculations specific to the actual products proposed on each 20 pole. 21 2. Poles 40 feet and Shorter: One-piece construction. 22 3. Pole Height: As indicated on Luminaire Schedule. 23 4. Handhole: 24 a. Provide oval-shaped handhole having a minimum clear opening of 25 2.5 inches by 5 inches. 26 b. Secure cover with stainless steel captive screws. 27 c. Metal Poles: Provide an internal grounding connection accessible from 28 handhole near bottom of each pole. 29 5. Do not install scratched, stained, chipped, or dented poles. 30 31 B. Aluminum Poles: 32 1. Manufactured of corrosion-resistant aluminum alloys. Seamless extruded or spun 33 seamless type with minimum 0.188-inch wall thickness. 34 2. Shape: Round Tapered. 35 3. Provide pole grounding connection designed to prevent electrolysis when used 36 with copper ground wire. 37 4. Shaft Top: Fitted with cap. 38 5. Base: 39 a. Anchor bolt mounted and machined to receive lower end of shaft. 40 b. Welded joint between shaft and base. 41 c. Base Cover: Cast aluminum alloy. 42 d. Hardware, Except Anchor Bolts: either anodized aluminum alloy or 43 stainless steel. 44 e. Handhole. 45 6. Provide pole cast-in-place foundations with galvanized steel anchor bolts, 46 threaded at the top end and bent 90 degrees at the bottom end.
09/April/2018 26 50 00 - 5 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO MASTER
1 7. Provide base covers to match pole and galvanized nuts and washers for anchor 2 bolts. 3 8. Pole and Bracket Finish: Uniform satin finish to match fixture.
4 2.4 POLE FOUNDATIONS
5 A. Anchor Bolts: Steel rod having a minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi; at minimum, 6 galvanize the top 12 inches of the rod. 7 8 B. Concrete: As specified in Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete.
9 2.5 IN-LINE FUSE HOLDER AND FUSE
10 A. Fuse Holder: 11 1. General: Waterproof, of corrosion-resistant material. 12 2. Rating: 600 volts. 13 14 B. Fuse: 15 1. General: Midget, dual element. 16 2. Rating: 5-amp, voltage as required by application. 17 18 C. Manufacturer: Methods Electronics Inc. Network, Buss Div.
19 2.6 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
20 A. Manufacturer’s Nameplate: Provide each item of equipment with a nameplate bearing 21 manufacturer’s name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a 22 conspicuous place; nameplate of distributing agent will not be acceptable. 23 24 B. Provide clear markings located to be readily visible to service personnel. 25 26 2.7 FACTORY FINISH
27 A. Provide electrical equipment with factory-applied painting systems that, at minimum, 28 meet the requirements of NEMA 250 corrosion-resistance test. 29 PART 3 EXECUTION
30 3.1 LUMINAIRES
31 A. General: 32 1. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. 33 2. Provide proper hangers, pendants, and canopies as necessary for complete 34 installation . 35 3. Install plumb and level. 36 37 B. Mounting: 38 1. General:
09/April/2018 26 50 00 - 6 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO
1 a. Coordinate mounting, fastening, and environmental conditions with 2 Section 26 05 02, Basic Electrical Requirements. 3 b. 4 2. Pole Mounted: 5 a. Provide cast-in-place concrete base. 6 b. Provide branch circuit in-line fuses in pole base handhole. 7 8 3.2 POLES
9 A. Electrical Installations: Conform to IEEE C2 and requirements specified herein. 10 11 B. Pole Setting: 12 1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings or footing detail. 13 2. Install poles in straight runs in a straight line 14 15 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
16 A. Upon completion of installation, verify equipment is properly installed, connected, and 17 adjusted. Conduct an operating test to show equipment operates in accordance with 18 the requirements of this section. 19 20 3.4 CLEANING
21 A. Remove labels and markings, except UL listing mark. 22 23 B. Wipe luminaires inside and out to remove construction dust. 24 25 C. Clean luminaire plastic lenses with antistatic cleaners only. 26 27 D. Touch up painted surfaces of luminaires and poles with matching paint ordered from 28 manufacturer. 29 30 E. Replace defective lamps at time of Substantial Completion. 31
32 END OF SECTION
09/April/2018 26 50 00 - 7 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 SECTION 26 52 13
2 EMERGENCY LIGHTING POWER SUPPLY 3
4 PART 1 GENERAL
5 1.1 SUMMARY
6 A. Section includes the requirements necessary to furnish and install emergency lighting 7 power supplies.
8 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
9 A. System Configuration: Forward transfer-type emergency power supply consisting of 10 rectifier/charger unit, storage battery, and solid-state inverter with static transfer switch in 11 one or several enclosures.
12 B. Operating Sequence: When utility power is available, supply load through transfer switch 13 and maintain battery charge via battery charger. If utility fails, transfer load to battery- 14 powered inverter. When utility is restored, retransfer load and restore battery charge via 15 battery charger.
16 1.3 REFERENCES
17 A. Abbreviations and Acronyms: 18 1. Alternating current (AC) 19 2. Authority having jurisdiction (AHJ) 20 3. Automatic Transfer Switches (ATS) 21 4. Light Emitting Diode (LED) 22 5. National Electric Code (NEC) 23 6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 24 7. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) 25 8. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL)
26 1.4 SUBMITTALS
27 A. Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.
28 B. Refer to the Submittal Schedule at the end of PART 3 for a list of submittal requirements 29 for this Section.
30 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
31 A. Provide the Work in accordance with National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 70 32 (National Electric Code - NEC), as applicable. Where required by authority having
09/April/2018 26 52 13 - 1 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 jurisdiction (AHJ), material and equipment shall be listed and labeled by a nationally 2 recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable to the AHJ, to provide a 3 basis for approval under the above listed agency.
4 B. Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards published by 5 Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) shall conform to those standards and shall have an 6 applied UL listing mark or label.
7 C. Provide materials and equipment acceptable to AHJ for Class, Division, and Group of 8 hazardous area indicated.
9 D. Material and equipment must be listed and labeled for its intended purpose, environment, 10 or application, especially when used in extreme climate areas.
11 PART 2 PRODUCTS
12 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
13 A. Powerware.
14 B. Dual-Lite.
15 C. Lithonia (EM Div.).
16 D. Siltron.
17 E. Lightguard .
18 2.2 EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY
19 A. Input Voltage: 480 Volts, 60 Hz, three-phase.
20 B. Output Power: As shown on the drawings.
21 C. Battery Operating Time: 1.5 hours at full load with a discharge to not less than 22 87.5 percent of nominal battery voltage.
23 D. Output Voltage: 480Y/277 Volts, plus or minus 5 percent.
24 E. Inverter: 25 1. Solid-state construction. 26 2. True sine wave output suitable for computer applications. 27 3. Suitably protected from short circuits and overloads. 28 4. Output Frequency: 60 Hz, plus or minus 0.5 Hz. 29 5. Suitable for use with electronic ballasts.
09/April/2018 26 52 13 - 2 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 F. Efficiency: 90 percent minimum.
2 G. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): Less than 10 percent at fully resistive load.
3 H. Transfer Switch: Static type.
4 I. Battery: Lead antimony (lead acid), sealed type. Provide barrier around battery terminals to 5 prevent accidental contact.
6 J. Battery Life: 10 Year.
7 K. Accessories: 8 1. Provisions for remote battery alarm. 9 2. Output volt meter. 10 3. Output ammeter. 11 4. Test switch to simulate power failure. 12 5. Battery charge indicator. 13 6. Battery ammeter. 14 7. Maintenance required alarm indicator. 15 8. RS232 communication system 16 9. Output circuit breaker 17 10. Output trip alarm 18 11. Remote meter pane] 19 12. Maintenance bypass switch 20 13. Form “C” contacts 21 14. External modem for RS232
22 L. Light Emitting Diode (LED)-type Indicating Lamps: 23 1. Normal alternating current (AC) on. 24 2. High charge. 25 3. Charging. 26 4. Electrolyte level alarm.
27 M. Charger: Solid-state SCR type; dual rate; designed to maintain battery in full-charge 28 condition during normal conditions; capable of fully recharging batteries from 87.5 percent 29 of nominal battery voltage within 24 hours following a discharge. Provide short-circuit 30 protection on output of charger.
31 N. Exercising Time Clock: Simulate input power interruption for adjustable 0- to 15-minute 32 duration every 30 days.
33 O. Rated Output: 90 minute.
34 2.3 REMOTE TROUBLE MONITOR
35 A. Indicators: Common trouble lamp and audible tone. Include silence switch arranged for 36 ringback feature.
09/April/2018 26 52 13 - 3 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO 1 B. Enclosure: 2 1. Freestanding with manufacturer's standard finish. 3 2. Where two or more enclosures are used, provide enclosures of the same dimensions.
4 PART 3 EXECUTION
5 3.1 INSTALLATION
6 A. Install units plumb and level.
7 B. Provide interconnection between cabinets.
8 3.2 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES
9 A. Furnish manufacturer’s representative for the following services at jobsite or classroom as 10 designated by Owner for minimum workdays listed below (travel time excluded): 11 1. 1 workday for installation assistance and inspection of installation. 12 2. 1 workday for functional and performance testing. 13 3. 1 workday for plant startup. 14 4. 1 workday for instruction of site personnel.
15 3.3 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE 16 17
ITEM SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENT AS INDICATED NO. WITH BID 26 52 13-01 Heat rejection and airflow requirements. Prior to delivery Dimensional and Weight Information 26 52 13-02 Data on batteries. Prior to delivery 26 52 13-03 Interconnection diagram for external Prior to delivery wiring. 26 52 13-04 Operation and maintenance manual. Prior to delivery
18 END OF SECTION
09/April/2018 26 52 13 - 4 423356 Issue for Bid New Passenger Terminal - BRO